Jeep Grand Cherokee WK2 2011-2013 service repair manual Part 2 of 2

Citation preview

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 & C2 Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 harness connectors. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

3. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror. 4. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

NOTE:

The scan tool will display several High or Open DTCs when the connectors are disconnected.

Does the scan tool display: B1D22-11-DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 



Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Checking Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the short to ground in the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and harness connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ONE OF THE OTHER DRIVER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUITS 

Fig. 51: Checking Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver Circuit For Short To Other Driver Mirror Driver Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit (C2-8) and the other Driver Mirror Driver circuits in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10.0 Ohms for either measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10.0 Ohms for a short to the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P75) DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY RETURN OR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Checking Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Return Or Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit (C2-8) and all Mirror Ground or Return circuits in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms between the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit and any of the Ground or Return circuits? Yes 



Repair the (P75) Driver Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit for a short to the Return or Ground circuit. If the wiring harness and connectors are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D32-11-DRIVER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

The Door Module senses a short low on the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for more than two seconds with the heater switched on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY DRIVER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C160) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display: B1D32-11-DRIVER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, use the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide and inspect the wiring and

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

connectors.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 54: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C2 connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY DRIVER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 55: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Driver Mirror Driver

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit (C2-4) and each of the Driver Mirror Driver circuits in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C160) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short To The Driver Mirror Heater Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit and the (C160) Driver Mirror Heater Return circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 3.0 Ohm? Yes 

Repair the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to the (C160) Driver Mirror Heater Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Ground Or Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit (C2-4) and all Ground and Return circuits in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms between the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit and any Ground or Return circuit? Yes 



Repair the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to the Ground or Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D32-15-DRIVER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

The Door Module senses an open or a short high on the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (C160) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A DRIVER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P501) DRIVER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P711) DRIVER BLIND SPOT SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display: B1D32-15-DRIVER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN as active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, use the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide and inspect the wiring and connectors.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 59: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C2 connector. 3. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

4. Measure the voltage of the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes 



Repair the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to voltage. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT AND (C160) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit and the (C160) Driver Mirror Heater Return circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10.0 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit or the (C160) Driver Mirror Heater Return circuit for an open. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO A DRIVER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 61: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Driver Mirror Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit (C2-4) and each

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Driver Mirror Driver circuits in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (P501) DRIVER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 62: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit and the (P501) Driver Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to the (P501) Driver Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 63: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit and the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 and C1 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P711) DRIVER BLIND SPOT SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Checking Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short To The Driver Blind Spot Signal Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit and the (P711) Driver Blind Spot Signal Driver circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to the (P711) Driver Blind Spot Signal Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connectors are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D4A-2A-MEMORY SWITCH INPUT - SIGNAL STUCK IN RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Memory Seat Switch Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module receives a conflicting input from the (G200) Memory Select Switch MUX circuit for more than 30 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING MEMORY SET SWITCH IN A PUSHED POSITION SUBSTANCE CAUSING MEMORY SET SWITCH TO GET STUCK IN A PUSHED POSITION (G200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (G200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G920) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT MEMORY SET SWITCH DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT MEMORY SET SWITCH FOR DAMAGE 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Memory Set switch for damage. Is the switch damaged? Yes 



Replace the Memory Set switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, MEMORY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 2. 2. INSPECT FOR OBJECT OR SUBSTANCE CAUSING MEMORY SET SWITCH TO STAY OR STICK IN A PUSHED POSITION 1. Inspect the Memory Set switch for anything that would cause it to stay or stick in a pushed 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

position. Is anything present that would cause the Memory Set switch to stay or stick in a pushed position? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Press the Memory Set switch several times in all positions. 4. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 5. Turn the ignition on then wait 30 seconds. 6. Using a scan tool, read the Active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display; B1D4A-2A-MEMORY SWITCH INPUT - SIGNAL STUCK IN RANGE? Yes 

Go To 4.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK MEMORY SET SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Memory Set Switch Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Using a scan tool, erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Memory Set switch connector. Cycle the ignition three times. Turn the ignition on and then wait 30 seconds.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

6. Using a scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1D4A-2A-MEMORY SWITCH INPUT - SIGNAL STUCK IN RANGE? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace the Memory Set switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, MEMORY , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. CHECK (G200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 67: Checking Memory Select Switch MUX Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Door Module C5 connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G200) Memory Select Switch MUX circuit at the Memory Set switch connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (G200) Memory Select Switch MUX circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (G200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (G920) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Checking Memory Select Switch MUX Circuit For Short To Memory Select Switch Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (G200) Memory Select Switch MUX circuit and the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit at the Memory Set switch connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



No

Repair the (G200) Memory Select Switch MUX circuit for a short to the (G920) Memory Select Switch return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E64-00-LEFT MIRROR SELECT SWITCH STUCK For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses the Left Mirror Select switch input for more than 30 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING LEFT MIRROR SELECT SWITCH IN A PUSHED POSITION SUBSTANCE CAUSING LEFT MIRROR SELECT SWITCH TO GET STUCK IN A PUSHED POSITION DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH ASSEMBLY DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT DRIVER DOOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY FOR DAMAGE NOTE:

Diagnose and repair all LIN Bus related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) before performing this test procedure.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Driver Door switch assembly for damage. Is the switch assembly damaged? Yes



Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 2.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2. INSPECT FOR OBJECT OR SUBSTANCE CAUSING LEFT MIRROR SELECT SWITCH TO STAY OR STICK IN A PUSHED POSITION 1. Inspect the Left Mirror Select switch for anything that would cause it to stay or stick in a pushed position. Is anything present that would cause the Left Mirror Select switch to stay or stick in a pushed position? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Press and release the Left Mirror Select switch several times and then wait 30 seconds. 4. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. 

Is the same DTC active? Yes 



Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E65-00-RIGHT MIRROR SELECT SWITCH STUCK For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses the Right Mirror Select switch input for more than 30 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING RIGHT MIRROR SELECT SWITCH IN A PUSHED POSITION SUBSTANCE CAUSING RIGHT MIRROR SELECT SWITCH TO GET STUCK IN A PUSHED POSITION DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH ASSEMBLY DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT DRIVER DOOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY FOR DAMAGE NOTE:

Diagnose and repair all LIN Bus related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) before performing this test procedure.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch assembly for damage. Is the switch assembly damaged? Yes 



Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 2. 2. INSPECT FOR OBJECT OR SUBSTANCE CAUSING RIGHT MIRROR SELECT SWITCH TO STAY OR STICK IN A PUSHED POSITION 1. Inspect the Right Mirror Select switch for anything that would cause it to stay or stick in a pushed position. 

Is anything present that would cause the Right Mirror Select switch to stay or stick in a pushed position? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Press and release the Right Mirror Select switch several times and then wait 30 seconds. 4. Using a scan tool, read the DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display; B1E65-00-RIGHT MIRROR SELECT SWITCH STUCK as active? Yes 



Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E66-11-DRIVER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

When one of the Mirror Fold or Unfold driver circuits are shorted to ground for approximately 30 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FOLDING MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUITS SHORTED TO GROUND DRIVER FOLDING MIRROR ASSEMBLY DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Operate the Mirror Fold switch in both directions three times. 6. Wait 30 seconds. 7. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1E66-11-DRIVER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit. Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. FOLDING MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUITS SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 70: Checking Folding Mirror Driver Circuits Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (component side) connector at the Drivers Door Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and each of the Folding Mirror Driver circuits in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (component side) connector. 4. Inspect the wiring and connectors between the mirror and the Drivers Door Module. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (P694) Folding Mirror Fold Driver or the (P691) Folding Mirror Unfold Driver

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. MIRROR ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition on 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Operate the Mirror Fold switch in both directions three times. 6. Wait 30 seconds. 7. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B1E66-11-DRIVER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 



Replace the Drivers Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Drivers Folding Mirror assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E66-15-DRIVER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

When one of the Mirror Fold or Unfold Driver circuits are shorted to battery voltage or the circuit is open for over 30 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DRIVER POWER FOLDING MIRROR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE DRIVER POWER FOLDING MIRROR ASSEMBLY DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Operate the Mirror Fold switch in both directions three times. 4. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 5. Turn the ignition on. 6. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1E66-15-DRIVER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit. Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. DRIVER POWER FOLDING MIRROR OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Checking Driver Power Folding Mirror For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror connector at the Drivers Door Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (P694) Folding Mirror Fold Driver and the (P691) Folding Mirror Unfold Driver circuits in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 connector. Is the resistance below 9.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Drivers Power Folding Mirror Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. DRIVER POWER FOLDING MIRROR SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 73: Driver Power Folding Mirror Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P694) Folding Mirror Fold Driver circuit in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P691) Folding Mirror Unfold Driver circuit in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 connector. Is there any voltage present in either circuit? Yes 



Replace the Drivers Power Folding Mirror Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Drivers Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210C-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

At all times. SET CONDITION:

Anytime the module senses voltage input below 8.0 volts for more than four seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC (A215) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT HAS HIGH RESISTANCE (Z917) GROUND CIRCUIT HAS HIGH RESISTANCE DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read the Powertrain Control Module DTCs. Are there any Charging or Battery DTCs present? No 

Go To 2.

Yes Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate charging system or battery DTC diagnostic procedures . 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs in the Door Module. 

Does the scan tool display: B210C-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD? Yes 

Go To 3.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (A215) FUSED B(+) OR (Z917) GROUND CIRCUITS RESISTED

Fig. 75: Measuring Resistance Of Fused B(+) Or Ground Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Driver Door Module C3 connector. Turn the ignition on. Test the (A215) Fused B(+) circuits by connecting a 12-volt test light between the Fused B(+) circuit and the (Z917) Ground circuits in the door module C3 connector. The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test the (A215) Fused B(+) and the (Z) Ground circuits to determine which one has the high resistance. Repair the necessary circuit for high resistance. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210C-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 76: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

At all times. SET CONDITION:

Anytime the module senses voltage input above 16.0 volts for more than four seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module DTCs. Are there any active Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate charging system or battery DTC diagnostic procedures .

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. With the scan tool, read the active door module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B210C-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD? Yes



Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B21A1-00-ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

Whenever the module detects a power on reset or a reflash, this code will set. This code is for information only. No repair is necessary. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES MODULE WAS RE-FLASHED MODULE WAS RESET DIAGNOSTIC TEST

This DTC is for information only. At some time the module was re-flashed or was reset during a power on operation. No repair is necessary. B21DD-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the battery voltage was below 10.0 volts for over four seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module DTCs. Are there any Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate charging system or battery DTC diagnostic procedures .



This code is for information only. At some time there was a low battery system voltage. Check the battery and charging system in accordance with the Service Information.

No

B21DD-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the system voltage was above 16.0 volts for over four seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES HIGH BATTERY SYSTEM VOLTAGE CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module DTCs. Are there any Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate charging system or battery DTC diagnostic procedures .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

No 

This code is a CAN system message for information only. Check the charging system in accordance with the Service Information.

B2598-54-DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - MISSING CALIBRATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The express up feature is accomplished by the door module sensing the exact position of the window at all times. This is done by the module reading the counts of the hall sensor located in the window motor. Whenever the module looses track of the window position, it will not allow the express feature to operate and will set this DTC. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the window motor is operating. SET CONDITION:

When the Door Module has lost the parameters for window travel. This code may set anytime the battery or the door module connector is disconnected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes MODULE NOT CALIBRATED EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) NOTE:

If there are any other Power Window DTCs, repair them before continuing.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Operate the Driver Window switch up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B2598-54-DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - MISSING CALIBRATION?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. WINDOW MODULE NOT CALIBRATED 1. Activate the window to the full up position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 2. Activate the window to the full down position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 3. Again activate the window to the full up position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 4. Lower the window all the way down then press and release the switch to the express up position. 

Did the window move to the full up position? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Move the Driver Express Window Switch from the idle position to the up position and then to the express up position. 

Is there two definite detent positions felt? Yes 



No

Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Driver Express Window Switch in accordance with the service information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2598-96-DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

When the door module senses an internal fault, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Operate the Driver Window up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B2598-96-DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE? Yes 



Replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. If this code ever repeats, replace the door module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

B2599-54-DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - MISSING CALIBRATION - QUAD/CREW CAB ONLY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

This code can set anytime the battery or the door module connector is disconnected. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the window motor is operating. SET CONDITION:

When the Door Module has lost the parameters for window travel. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes MODULE NOT CALIBRATED EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT (DMFR) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If there are any other Power Window DTCs, repair them before continuing.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Operate the Right Window switch up and down several times. Wait 30 seconds. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B2599-54-DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - MISSING CALIBRATION? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. WINDOW MODULE NOT CALIBRATED 1. Operate the window to the full up position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 2. Operate the window to the full down position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 3. Again operate the window to the full up position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 4. Lower the window all the way down then press and release the switch to the express up position. Did the window move to the full up position? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Move the Right Express Window Switch from the idle position to the up position and then to the express up position. 

Is there two definite detent positions felt? Yes 



Replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Right Express Window Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2599-96-DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

When the door module senses an internal fault, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Operate the Passenger Window up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B2599-96-DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE ? Yes 



Replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. If this code ever repeats, replace the door module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B282E-11-DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

The Door Module senses a short low on the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for more than two seconds with the lamp switched on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P713) DRIVER BLIND SPOT SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUIT (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A DRIVER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C160) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P591) DRIVER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL/PUDDLE RETURN CIRCUIT DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on. NOTE:

Verify the panel lamps dimmer switch is not in the defeat (off) position.

5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Is the DTC active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, use the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide and inspect the wiring and connectors.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 78: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P69) DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 79: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for a short to the (P69) Driver Mirror Sensor Ground circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P713) DRIVER BLIND SPOT SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 80: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To The Driver Blind Spot Signal Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

The Ohmmeter positive lead must be connected to the (P713) Driver Blind Spot Signal Return circuit and the negative lead to the (M41) Driver Puddle

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Lamp Driver circuit for the test results to be valid. 1. Measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (P713) Driver Blind Spot Signal Return circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. Is there resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for a short to the (P713) Driver Blind Spot Signal Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A DRIVER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 81: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit Shorted To A Driver Mirror Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C2 connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit (C1-1) and each Driver Mirror Driver circuits in the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P591) DRIVER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL/PUDDLE RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 82: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To The Driver Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (P591) Driver Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Return circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for a short to the (P591) Driver Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C160) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To The Driver Mirror Heater Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (C160) Driver Mirror Heater Return circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver for a short to the (C160) Driver Mirror Heater Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B282E-15-DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

The Door Module senses a short high or an open on the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for more than two seconds with the lamp switched on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (P591) DRIVER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL/PUDDLE RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A DRIVER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P501) DRIVER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P713) DRIVER BLIND SPOT DRIVER CIRCUIT DRIVER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on. NOTE:

Verify the panel lamps dimmer switch is not in the defeat (off) position.

5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display as active: B282E-15-DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 85: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage of the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit between the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes 



Repair the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for a short to voltage. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT AND (P591) DRIVER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL/PUDDLE LAMP RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit And Driver Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Lamp Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C2 connector. NOTE:

The Ohmmeter positive lead must be connected to the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the negative lead to the (P591) Driver Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Lamp Return circuit for the test results to be valid.

3. Measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (P591) Driver Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Lamp Return circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 & C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance above 1000 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit or the (P591) Driver Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Lamp Return circuit for an open. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO A DRIVER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit Shorted To A Driver Mirror Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and each of the Driver Mirror Driver circuits Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 

Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (M41) Driver Puddle

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



Lamp Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C16) DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT OR TO THE (P501) DRIVER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 88: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To The Driver Mirror Heater Driver Circuit Or To The Driver Mirror Turn Signal Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. For Heated Mirror, measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (C16) Driver Mirror Heater Driver circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. 2. For Turn Signal Mirror, measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (P501) Driver Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for either measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (M41) DRIVER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P711) DRIVER BLIND SPOT DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 89: Checking Driver Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To The Driver Blind Spot Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (P711) Driver Blind Spot Signal Driver circuit at the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the short between the (M41) Driver Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (P711) Driver Blind Spot Signal Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B2830-11-DRIVER BLIND SPOT WARNING LIGHT CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition in the run position. SET CONDITION:

When the Driver Blind Spot Indicator circuit senses that the voltage is below 4.0 volts for over 155 ms., this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DRIVER MIRROR ASSEMBLY DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase all DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B2830-11-DRIVER BLIND SPOT WARNING LIGHT CONTROLCIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as Active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all relate splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. INSPECT MIRROR CONNECTIONS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 91: C1 Driver Door Module Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Driver Door Module C1 harness connector. 3. Inspect the wiring and connectors between the mirror and the Drivers Door Module. Were there any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. MIRROR ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition on 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Make sure the DDM C1 connector is still disconnected. 6. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B2830-15-DRIVER BLIND SPOT WARNING LIGHT CONTROLCIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN as Active? Yes 



Replace the Driver Mirror Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2830-DRIVER BLIND SPOT WARNING INDICATOR CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Driver Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

When the Driver Blind Spot Indicator circuit senses high voltage or an open circuit for over 55 ms., this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DRIVER MIRROR ASSEMBLY DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase all DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B2830-DRIVER BLIND SPOT WARNING INDICATOR CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. INSPECT MIRROR CONNECTIONS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: C1 Driver Door Module Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Drivers Door Module C1 harness connector. 3. Inspect the wiring and connectors between the mirror and the Drivers Door Module. Were there any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. MIRROR ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 94: Measuring Resistance Between Driver Blind Spot Indicator Return Circuit & Blind Spot Indicator Driver Circuit In Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P713) Driver Blind Spot Indicator Return circuit and the (P711) Driver Blind Spot Indicator Driver circuit in the DDM C1 connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance between 550.0 and 650.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Driver Mirror Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0010-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; U0010-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS as active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0010-CAN Interior Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0037-11-LIN BUS - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 95: LIN Bus Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. SET CONDITION:

The module detects a short to ground on the LIN Bus circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D501) LIN BUS RETURN CIRCUIT DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Cycle the ignition off and on three times. 4. Operate the front power windows up and down several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display as active: U0037-11-LIN BUS - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK THE LIN BUS CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Checking The LIN Bus Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between the (D903) LIN Bus circuit and the (D501) LIN Bus Return circuit. Is the voltage below 7.0 Volts? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 97: Checking LIN Bus Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Driver Door Module C5 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D903) LIN Bus circuit in the Door Module C5 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D903) LIN Bus circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D501) LIN BUS RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 98: Checking LIN Bus Circuit For A Short To Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D903) LIN Bus circuit and the (D501) LIN Bus Return circuit in the Door Module C5 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (D903) LIN Bus circuit for a short to the (D501) LIN Bus Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0155-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Instrument Cluster (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0155-Lost Communication with Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0164-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the HVAC Control Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY HVAC POWER AND GROUND HVAC CONTROL MODULE MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0164-Lost Communication with HVAC Control Module.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0203-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Left Front Door Module (DMFL) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND LEFT FRONT DOOR MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

CONTROL MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U0203-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT as active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0203-Lost Communication with Door Module Front Left diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0204-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Right Front Door Module (DMFR) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND RIGHT FRONT DOOR MODULE CONTROL MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; U0204-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT as active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0204-Lost Communication with Door Module Front Right diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0209-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Memory Seat Module for approximately two to five seconds.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND MEMORY SEAT MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY MEMORY SEAT MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; U0209-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE as active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0209-Lost Communication with Memory Seat Control Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0232-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Blind Spot Detection Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN B BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U0232-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE as active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0232-00 Lost Communication with Blind Spot Detection Module diagnostic procedure.



. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U113D-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MASTER POWER WINDOW SWITCH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 99: LIN Bus Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the driver door module has lost communication with the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FUSE M26 IN THE TIPM OPEN (A855) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT OPEN (D501) LIN BUS RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN DRIVER WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Operate the Front Window switches up and down several times. Wait 30 seconds. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; U113D-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MASTER POWER WINDOW SWITCH? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2. (A855) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 100: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure Fuse M26 in the TIPM is good before proceeding.

With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Using a 12-volt test light connected to Ground, check the (A855) Fused B(+) circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the open in the (A855) Fused B(+) circuit. If the fuse is open, make sure to check for a short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE LIN BUS CIRCUIT 

Fig. 101: Checking The LIN Bus Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D903) LIN Bus circuit and the (D501) LIN Bus Return circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage below 7.0 Volts? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 4. 4. (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 102: Checking LIN Bus Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the Driver Door Module C5 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between ground and the (D903) LIN Bus circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (D903) LIN Bus circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (D501) LIN BUS RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 103: Checking LIN Bus Return Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (D501) LIN Bus Return circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 6.



Repair the open in the (D501) LIN Bus Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

6. (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 104: Checking LIN Bus Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Driver Door Module C5 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D903) LIN Bus circuit in the Driver Door Module C5 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the short to ground in the (D903) LIN Bus circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 7. 7. (D903) LIN BUS CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Driver Door Module (DDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFL) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 105: Checking LIN Bus Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D903) LIN Bus circuit between the Door Module C5 harness connector and the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch harness connector. Is the resistance above 2.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D903) LIN Bus circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description C1403-11 TRANSFER CASE RANGE POSITION SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C1403-12 TRANSFER CASE RANGE POSITION SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C1403-8F TRANSFER CASE RANGE POSITION SENSOR - ERRATIC C1403-92 TRANSFER CASE RANGE POSITION SENSOR - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION C1406-11 TRANSFER CASE BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C1406-12 TRANSFER CASE BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C1406-92 TRANSFER CASE BRAKE CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION C140A-13 TRANSFER CASE MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN C140A-92 TRANSFER CASE MOTOR CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION C140E-00 TRANSFER CASE MOTOR BLOCKED C1415-92 TRANSFER CASE MOTOR "CURRENT" - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION C1438-00 TRANSFER CASE DIFFERENTIAL CLUTCH WORN C1444-00 TRANSFER CASE MOTOR OVERUSE C1472-92 TRANSFER CASE CLUTCH CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION C1476-00 TRANSFER CASE CLUTCH POSITION OUT OF RANGE C1477-4B TRANSFER CASE CLUTCH - OVER TEMPERATURE C2108-11 DRIVETRAIN SUPPLY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C2110-11 SENSOR SUPPLY 1 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C2110-12 SENSOR SUPPLY 1 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C2129-16 BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD C2129-17 BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD C212A-16 SYSTEM VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD C212A-17 SYSTEM VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD C2201-00 FDCM/DTCM INTERNAL U0001-00 CAN C BUS U0100-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PCM U0101-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM U0121-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

U0141-00 U0212-00 U0401-00 U0402-00 U0415-00 U0429-00 U0431-00

CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCM (SAS) IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM TCM IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM SCM IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM (FCM/TIPM)

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING C1403-11-TRANSFER CASE RANGE POSITION SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage or supply voltage low conditions present. SET CONDITION:

Sensor input voltage is below a specified value for a calibrated amount of time. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. T-CASE POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.4 OF A VOLT NOTE:

If DTCs C1403-11 and C2110-11 are both present, perform the diagnostic procedure for C2110-11 before continuing with this test procedure.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read the T-Case Position Sensor voltage in the DTCM. Is the voltage below 0.4 of a volt? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit For Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. Choose an answer that matches the voltage measured? Below 4.5 volts 

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Above 5.5 volts 

Go To 4.

Between 4.5 volts and 5.5 volts Go To 5. 3. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit between the DTCM C1 and the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

No

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 5. 5. (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 5: Checking Mode Sensor Signal Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit at the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking Mode Sensor Signal Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit between the DTCM C1 harness connector and the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit for an open. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Reconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit and the (K504) Drivetrain 5 volt supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. 4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. With the scan tool, read the T-Case Position Sensor voltage in the DTCM. 6. The displayed voltage should be between 4.5 volts and 5.5 volts with the jumper wire in place. 

Does the voltage display as described? Yes 



Replace the Transfer Case Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SHIFT , REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 3. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

circuit. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 5. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 6. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1403-12-TRANSFER CASE RANGE POSITION SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The sensor voltage is above a specified value for a calibrated amount of time. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. T-CASE POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.8 VOLTS NOTE:

If DTCs C1403-12 and C2110-12 are both present, perform the diagnostics procedure for C2110-1212 before continuing with this test procedure.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read the T-Case Position Sensor voltage in the DTCM. Is the voltage above 4.8 volts? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes 

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 9: Checking Mode Sensor Signal Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking Drivetrain Sensor Return Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit for an open. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Connect a jumper wire between the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit and the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit in the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, read the T-Case Position Sensor voltage in the DTCM. NOTE:

Remove the jumper wire before continuing.

Is the voltage below 0.2 of a volt? Yes 



Replace the Transfer Case Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, MODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 5. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 6. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1403-8F-TRANSFER CASE RANGE POSITION SENSOR - ERRATIC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects excessive voltage fluctuation on the Mode Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

This DTC sets when the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects excessive voltage fluctuation on the Mode Sensor Signal circuit. Perform a thorough inspection of all wiring and connectors between the sensor and the control module.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 14. 2. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY VOLTAGE ERRATIC 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. NOTE:

Voltage should be approximately 5.0 volts and steady. Compare any slight fluctuations found to a known good circuit in order to verify voltmeter functionality.

Is the voltage approximately 5.0 volts and steady?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 6.

No Go To 3. 3. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 13: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. Measure the voltage of the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. 5. Monitor the voltmeter while performing a wiggle test on the wiring harness and connectors. Is any voltage detected on the circuit during the wiggle test? Yes  

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit for an intermittent short to voltage. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. 2. Monitor the ohmmeter while performing a wiggle test on the wiring harness and connectors. Is the resistance ever above 5.0 Ohms during the wiggle test? Yes 



Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit for an intermittent open circuit or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. 2. Monitor the ohmmeter while performing a wiggle test on the wiring harness and connectors. Is the resistance ever below 5.0 Ohms during the wiggle test? Yes  

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5-volt Supply circuit for an intermittent short to ground. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. T-CASE POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking T-Case Position Sensor Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Reconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit and the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit in the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. 4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. With the scan tool read the T-Case Position Sensor Voltage in the DTCM while performing a wiggle test on the wiring and connectors between the sensor and the control module. NOTE:

Voltage should be approximately 0.0 volts and steady.

Is the T-Case Position Sensor Voltage approximately 0.0 volts and steady? Yes 

Go To 12.

No Go To 7. 7. (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Checking Mode Sensor Signal Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Remove the previously installed jumper wire.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit at the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. 5. Monitor the voltmeter while performing a wiggle test on the wiring harness and connectors. Is any voltage detected on the circuit during the wiggle test?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit for an intermittent short to voltage. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 8. 8. (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 18: Checking Drivetrain Sensor Return Circuit Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

harness connector. 2. Monitor the voltmeter while performing a wiggle test on the wiring harness and connectors. Is any voltage detected on the circuit during the wiggle test? Yes  

Repair the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit for an intermittent short to voltage. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 9. 9. (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Checking Mode Sensor Signal Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Measure the resistance of the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. 3. Monitor the ohmmeter while performing a wiggle test on the wiring harness and connectors. Is the resistance ever above 5.0 Ohms during the wiggle test? Yes 



Repair the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit for an intermittent open circuit or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 10. 10. (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Checking Drivetrain Sensor Return Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit between the Transfer Case Motor harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. 2. Monitor the ohmmeter while performing a wiggle test on the wiring harness and connectors. Is the resistance ever above 5.0 Ohms during the wiggle test? Yes 



Repair the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit for an intermittent open circuit or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 11. 11. (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Checking Mode Sensor Signal Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. 2. Monitor the ohmmeter while performing a wiggle test on the wiring harness and connectors. Is the resistance ever below 5.0 Ohms during the wiggle test? Yes  

Repair the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit for an intermittent short to ground. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 12. 12. TRANSFER CASE MOTOR 

NOTE:

This DTC sets when the DTCM detects excessive voltage fluctuation on the Mode Sensor Signal circuit. Perform a thorough inspection of all wiring and connectors between the sensor and the control module.

1. Using the schematic as a guide, inspect the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) power and ground circuits. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 13. 13. TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER 1. Replace the Transfer Case Motor/ Encoder in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. Test drive the vehicle. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the DTCM. Does this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

14. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 3. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 5. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 6. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1403-92-TRANSFER CASE RANGE POSITION SENSOR - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. No Range Position Sensor low or high voltage conditions present. SET CONDITION:

During a blocked shift attempt, motor current indicates motor movement, but the sensor value change is less than a specified value. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If DTCs C1403-92 and C1406-11 are both present, perform the diagnostic procedure for C1406-11 before continuing with this test procedure.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. NOTE:

Repair any system undervoltage or overvoltage DTCs that are set in this module before proceeding.

2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the DTCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Checking Drivetrain Sensor Return Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor harness C2 connector. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the high resistance or open in the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 24: Checking Drivetrain 5 Volt Supply Circuit For Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Reconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 2. Connect a jumper wire between the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit and the (K504) Drivetrain Sensor 5 Volt Supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, read the T-Case Position Sensor voltage. 5. The displayed voltage should be between 4.5 volts and 5.5 volts with the jumper wire in place. Does the voltage display as described? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: Checking T-Case Position Sensor Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Connect a jumper wire between the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit and the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, read the T-Case Position Sensor voltage. 5. The displayed voltage should be between 0.0 volts and 0.4 of a volt with the jumper wire in place. Does the voltage display as described? Yes 



Replace the Transfer Case Motor/Encoder in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, MODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 3. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 5. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 6. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C1406-11-TRANSFER CASE BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 26: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects that the Transfer Case Motor Lock circuit diagnostic input is low when output is off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T301) SWITCHED BATTERY SOLENOID SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T301) SWITCHED BATTERY SOLENOID SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TRANSFER CASE MOTOR ASSEMBLY DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (T301) SWITCHED BATTERY SOLENOID SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Checking Switched Battery Solenoid Supply Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T301) Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T301) Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T301) SWITCHED BATTERY SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE 

Fig. 28: Checking Switched Battery Solenoid Supply Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light across the (T301) Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit and the (T317) Transfer Case Motor Lock Signal in the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. NOTE:

As a failsafe precaution when either the Transfer Case Motor harness connectors are disconnected, the DTCs must be cleared in the DTCM. Failure to follow this will result in the DTCM detecting this condition and turning OFF the Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit.

4. Using the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, actuate the T-Case Motor Solenoid Lock in the DTCM. NOTE:

Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Transfer Case Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SHIFT , REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 3. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 5. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 6. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes 

Repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

No

C1406-12-TRANSFER CASE BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects that the Transfer Case Motor Lock Circuit diagnostic input is high when the output is on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T301) TRANSFER CASE MOTOR LOCK SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (T301) SWITCHED BATTERY SOLENOID SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T317) TRANSFER CASE MOTOR LOCK SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN TRANSFER CASE MOTOR ACTUATOR DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle. 4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 7. 2. (T301) SWITCHED BATTERY SOLENOID SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Checking Switched Battery Solenoid Supply Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position Disconnect the Transfer Case C1 Motor harness connector. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T301) Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit between the Transfer Case Motor harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T301) Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit for an open. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T317) TRANSFER CASE MOTOR LOCK SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Checking Transfer Case Motor Lock Signal Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T317) Transfer Case Motor Lock Signal circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T317) Transfer Case Motor Lock Signal circuit for an open. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T301) SWITCHED BATTERY SOLENOID SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Checking Switched Battery Solenoid Supply Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Measure the voltage of the (T301) Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit in the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. Is any voltage present? Yes 

Repair the (T301) Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. TRANSFER CASE MOTOR 

Fig. 33: Checking Transfer Case Motor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Reconnect the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (T317) Transfer Case Motor Lock Signal circuit and the (T301) Switched Battery Solenoid Supply in the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance greater than 10.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Transfer Case Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SHIFT , REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) 1. Reconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC C1406-12-TRANSFER CASE BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY set? Yes 



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 3. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 5. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1406-92-TRANSFER CASE BRAKE CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

1. The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects an excessive voltage variation on the Mode Sensor Signal circuit. 2. The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) performs an error correction procedure too frequently. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T301) SWITCHED BATTERY SOLENOID SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TRANSFER CASE MOTOR ASSEMBLY DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. (T301) SWITCHED BATTERY SOLENOID SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Checking Switched Battery Solenoid Supply Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Connect a 12-volt test light across the (T301) Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit and the (T317) Transfer Case Motor Lock Signal in the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. NOTE:

As a failsafe precaution when the Transfer Case Motor harness connectors are disconnected, the DTCs must be erased in the DTCM. Failure to follow this will result in the DTCM detecting this condition and turning OFF the Switched Battery Solenoid Supply circuit.

3. Using the scan tool, erase the DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, actuate the T-Case Motor Solenoid Lock in the DTCM. NOTE:

Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Transfer Case Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SHIFT , REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 3. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 5. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 6. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C140A-13-TRANSFER CASE MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects an open circuit on one of the Transfer Case Step Motor Control circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T315) STEP MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT OPEN (T316) STEP MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT OPEN (T315) STEP MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T316) STEP MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE TRANSFER CASE MOTOR DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle. 4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 7. 2. (T315) STEP MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Checking Step Motor Control A Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. Disconnect the DTCM C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T315) Step Motor Control A circuit from the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector to the DTCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T315) Step Motor Control B circuit for an open. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T316) STEP MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 38: Checking Step Motor Control B Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T316) Step Motor Control B circuit from the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector to the DTCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T316) Step Motor Control B circuit for an open. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T315) STEP MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Checking Step Motor Control A Circuit Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Measure the voltage of the (T315) Step Motor Control A circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. Is the voltage above 0.5 of a volt? Yes  

Repair the (T315) Step Motor Control A circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. (T316) STEP MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT VOLTAGE 

Fig. 40: Checking Step Motor Control B Circuit Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (T316) Step Motor Control B circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. Is the voltage above 0.5 of a volt? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T316) Step Motor Control B circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. TRANSFER CASE MOTOR 

Fig. 41: Checking Transfer Case Motor

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (T315) Step Motor Control A circuit and the (T316) Step Motor Control B circuit at the DTCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Transfer Case Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SHIFT , REMOVAL .  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 7. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C140A-92-TRANSFER CASE MOTOR CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 42: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

A faulted condition is detected in the H-bridge driver. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T315) STEP MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T316) STEP MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T315) STEP MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (T316) STEP MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT TRANSFER CASE MOTOR DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle. 4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (T315) STEP MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Checking Step Motor Control A Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the DTCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T315) Step Motor Control A circuit at the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (T315) Step Motor Control A circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T316) STEP MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 44: Checking Step Motor Control B Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T316) Step Motor Control B circuit at the Transfer Case Motor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T316) Step Motor Control B circuit for a short to ground. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T315) STEP MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (T316) SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Checking Step Motor Control A Circuit Shorted To The Shift Motor Control A Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T315) Step Motor Control A circuit and the (T316) Step Motor Control B circuit at the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (T315) Step Motor Control A circuit and the (T316) Step Motor Control B circuit. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C140E-00-TRANSFER CASE MOTOR BLOCKED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) is unable to engage the requested range. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSFER CASE INTERNAL CONDITION TRANSFER CASE MOTOR DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle. 4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. TRANSFER CASE INTERNAL CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Inspect the Transfer Case in accordance with the Service Information to determine if there are any mechanical conditions that are preventing the Shift Motor from engaging the requested range. 

Are any mechanical conditions preventing the Shift Motor from engaging the requested range? Yes  

Repair or replace the Transfer Case in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. TRANSFER CASE MOTOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect all wiring and connectors that pertain to this circuit. 3. If any problems are found, repair as necessary and retest. 4. If no other problems are found, replace the Transfer Case Motor in accordance with the Service Information. 5. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. Ignition on, engine not running. 7. Test drive the vehicle. 8. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Is the DTC status Active? Yes 



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PROCEDURE. No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1415-92- TRANSFER CASE MOTOR "CURRENT" - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

1. Current reading greater than 1A for 200 msec with no motor activation. 2. Current reading never greater than 1A during a completed range or neutral shift. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T315) SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T316) SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If both DTCs C1415-92 and C140A-92 are present, check the DTCM fuse and the B(+) supply to the Integrated Power Module (IPM).

Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Test drive the vehicle. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (T315) SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Checking Step Motor Control A Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. Disconnect the DTCM C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T315) Shift Motor Control A circuit from the Transfer Case Motor harness C1 connector to the DTCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T315) Shift Motor Control A circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T316) SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Checking Step Motor Control B Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T316) Shift Motor Control B circuit from the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector to the DTCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T316) Shift Motor Control B circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1438-00-TRANSFER CASE DIFFERENTIAL CLUTCH WORN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The ignition on, engine running. No Under/Overvoltage, and/or encoder error DTCs present. When shifted into 4-Low or in 4-high. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) is unable to fully lock the T-Case (in Either High or Low) because the T-Case clutch is worn. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE TRANSFER CASE CLUTCH WORN DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Diagnose and repair any system voltage or Transfer Case related DTCs in the DTCM before continuing with this test.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Ignition on, engine running. With the scan tool, clear stored DTCs in the DTCM. Test drive the vehicle. During the test drive, move the Transfer Case Selector Switch to each position several times in accordance with the Service Information. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the DTCM. Does this DTC reset? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (K504) Drivetrain 5 Volt Supply circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5 Volt Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 51: Checking Mode Sensor Signal Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Checking Drivetrain Sensor Return Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. TRANSFER CLUTCH WORN 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Shift the Transfer case into 4-LOW. 3. With the scan tool, monitor the encoder voltage in the DTCM. 4. Shift the Transfer case into AWD. 

Is the encoder voltage between 4.625 volts and 4.750? Yes 



Replace the worn clutch pack assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MP2010 - REMOVAL or MP3023 - REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1444-00-TRANSFER CASE MOTOR OVERUSE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

A calibrated motor abuse temperature limit has been achieved. The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) monitors the motor use and has determined that excessive motor activations have occurred. This DTC will be stored after Transfer Case Motor has cooled down. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR SWITCH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CLUSTER CONTROL NODE (CCN) DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Diagnose and repair any system voltage or Transfer Case related DTCs in the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) before continuing with this test.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, clear Stored DTCs in the DTCM and the CCN.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Test drive the vehicle. 4. During the test drive, move the Transfer Case Selector Switch to each position several times in accordance with the Service Information. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the DTCM and the CCN. Does this DTC reset? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. With the scan tool, monitor the ambient temperature in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). 

Is the ambient temperature at room temperature? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Ambient Temperature Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, AMBIENT TEMPERATURE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR SWITCH 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors relative to this circuit. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 4. CLUSTER/CCN 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Transfer Case Selector Switch in accordance with the Service Information. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, clear Stored DTCs in the CCN and the DTCM. 5. Test drive the vehicle. 6. During the test drive, move the Transfer Case Selector Switch to each position several times in accordance with the Service Information. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the CCN and the DTCM. 

Does this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1472-92-TRANSFER CASE CLUTCH CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects an overheat condition due to excessive difference in speed across the Transfer Case from hard driving conditions (Mud, Sand, Snow, 2WD Chassis dynamometer etc.). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DRIVING CONDITIONS DRIVE CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the ABS Module. Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No Go To 2. 2. POWER CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the PCM. 

Are there any PCM DTCs present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 3. 3. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select View DTCs. 

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 5. 4. VERIFY SET CONDITION 

NOTE:

Check with customer on driving terrain (e.g. mud, sand, snow) for set condition.

1. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 2. Test drive vehicle on dry paved road. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 



Replace the Transfer Case in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MP2010 REMOVAL or MP3023 - REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test Complete.  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1476-00-TRANSFER CASE CLUTCH POSITION OUT OF RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system under voltage or over voltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) is unable to engage the requested range. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSFER CASE KISSPOINT NOT LEARNED (T315) MOTOR A CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T316) MOTOR B CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE TRANSFER CASE INTERNAL CONDITION TRANSFER CASE DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 9. 2. RELEARN KISS POINT 1. Ignition on, engine running. 2. Place the Transmission in neutral and apply the brakes firmly. 3. Place the Transfer Case Motor Selector Switch in AUTO. 4. With the scan tool, run the DTCM non-volatile reset command. 5. Place the Transmission in park. 6. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 7. Wait for 10 seconds, and turn Ignition switch to Ignition on, engine not running. 8. With the scan tool, clear stored DTCs in the DTCM. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. Switch the Transfer Case Motor Selector Switch to 4-Low and back to AUTO. 10. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC status Active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 9. 3. (T315) SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 54: Checking Step Motor Control A Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector. Disconnect the DTCM C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T315) Shift Motor Control A circuit from the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector to the DTCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T315) Shift Motor Control A circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T316) SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 55: Checking Step Motor Control B Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T316) Shift Motor Control B circuit from the Transfer Case Motor C1 harness connector to the DTCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T316) Shift Motor Control B circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (K504) Drivetrain 5 Volt Supply circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5 Volt Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. (T313) MODE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Checking Mode Sensor Signal Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T313) Mode Sensor Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. (K594) DRIVETRAIN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Checking Drivetrain Sensor Return Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit between the Transfer Case Motor C2 harness connector and the DTCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Repair the (K594) Drivetrain Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. TRANSFER CASE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Inspect the Transfer Case to determine if there are any mechanical conditions preventing the shift motor from engaging in the position selected. 

Are any mechanical conditions preventing the shift motor from engaging in the position selected? Yes 



Replace the Transfer Case in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MP2010 REMOVAL or MP3023 - REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 9. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 3. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1477-4B-TRANSFER CASE CLUTCH - OVER TEMPERATURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects an overheat condition due to excessive difference in speed across the Transfer Case from hard driving conditions (Mud, Sand, Snow, 2WD Chassis dynamometer etc.). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DRIVING CONDITIONS AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the ABS Module. Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Go To 2.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select View DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. With the scan tool, monitor the ambient temperature in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). 

Is the ambient temperature at room temperature? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Ambient Temperature Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, AMBIENT TEMPERATURE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. VERIFY SET CONDITION 

NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Check with customer on driving terrain (e.g. mud, sand, snow) for set condition.

With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Allow the Transfer Case to cool down. Test drive vehicle on dry paved road. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2108-11-DRIVETRAIN SUPPLY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects that the Drivetrain Sensor Supply voltage is below 2.5 volts for 300 mS. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY (REFERENCE) VOLTAGE BELOW 4.8 VOLTS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read the Drivetrain 5-volt Supply (Reference) Voltage in the DTCM. Is the voltage below 4.8 volts? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor/Encoder harness connector. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, read the 5-volt Supply (Reference) Voltage. 

Is the voltage above 4.75 volts with the Transfer Case Motor harness disconnected? Yes 



No

Replace the Transfer Case Encoder in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, MODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 60: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K504) Drivetrain 5- volt Supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2110-11-SENSOR SUPPLY 1 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects that the Drivetrain Sensor Supply voltage is below 2.5 volts for 300 mS. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TRANSFER CASE MOTOR/ENCODER DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY (REFERENCE) VOLTAGE BELOW 4.8 VOLTS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read the Drivetrain 5-volt Supply (Reference) Voltage in the DTCM. Is the voltage below 4.8 volts? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. TRANSFER CASE ENCODER 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor/Encoder harness connector. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, read the 5-volt Supply (Reference) Voltage. 

Is the voltage above 4.75 volts with the Transfer Case Motor harness disconnected? Yes 



No

Replace the Transfer Case Encoder in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, MODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 62: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K504) Drivetrain 5- volt Supply circuit at the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2110-12-SENSOR SUPPLY 1 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects that the Drivetrain Sensor Supply voltage is above 7.5 volts for 300 mS POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. 5 VOLT SUPPLY (REFERENCE) VOLTAGE IS ABOVE 5.2 VOLTS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read the Drivetrain 5-volt Supply (Reference) Voltage in the DTCM. Is the voltage above 5.2 volts? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. (K504) DRIVETRAIN 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Checking Drivetrain 5-Volt Supply Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Transfer Case Motor harness connector. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (K504) Drivetrain 5 Volt Supply circuit at Transfer Case Motor C2harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (K504) Drivetrain 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2129-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects that system voltage is below 8.5 volts for 60 seconds with engine RPM greater than 1500. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE POWER CIRCUITS OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Powertrain Control Module. Are there any Charging System or related voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate Charging System DTC diagnostic procedures before continuing with this test. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the DTCM. 

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Checking Ground Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Disconnect the DTCM C2 harness connector. 3. With a 12-volt test light connected to B+, check the (Z916) Ground circuit in the DTCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly for each of the Ground circuits? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Repair the (Z916) Ground circuit for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. POWER CIRCUITS OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Measuring Power Circuits Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. With a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit in the DTCM C1 harness connector and the (A959) Fused B+ circuit in the DTCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly for each of the circuits? Yes 



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Repair the Fused B+ circuit(s) for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 3. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C2129-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects that system voltage is above 16.0 volts for 60 seconds with engine RPM greater than 1500. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Powertrain Control Module. Are there any Charging System or related voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the DTCM. 

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C212A-16-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Transfer Case Range Position Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects that system voltage is below 8.5 volts for 60 seconds with engine RPM greater than 1500. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE POWER CIRCUITS OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Powertrain Control Module. Are there any Charging System or related voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate Charging System DTC diagnostic procedures before continuing with this test. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the DTCM. 

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Checking Ground Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position Disconnect the DTCM C2 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. With a 12-volt test light connected to B+, check the (Z916) Ground circuit in the DTCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly for each of the Ground circuits?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Z916) Ground circuit for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. POWER CIRCUITS OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 70: Measuring Power Circuits Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the DTCM C1 harness connector. 2. With a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit in the DTCM C1 harness connector and the (A959) Fused B+ circuit in the DTCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly for each of the circuits? Yes 



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Repair the Fused B+ circuit(s) for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 3. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C212A-17-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) detects that system voltage is above 16.0 volts for 60 seconds with engine RPM greater than 1500. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Powertrain Control Module. Are there any Charging System or related voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the DTCM. 

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 



No

Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2201-00-FDCM/DTCM INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) has detected a failure internal to the controller. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

U0001-00-CAN C BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects an open, short to ground or a short to voltage on the CAN C Bus circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Perform the U0001-CAN C Bus diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0001-CAN C Bus diagnostic procedure.



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0100-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) ANY MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0100-Lost Communication with PCM diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0101-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED: SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) for approximately 500ms. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0101-Lost Communication with TCM diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0121-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0121-00-Lost Communication with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Control Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D65) CAN C BUS(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D64) CAN C BUS(-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0212-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCM (SAS) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED: SET CONDITION:

If the controller fails to receive bus messages from the Steering Control Module (SAS) for approximately 500 ms. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DTCs RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SAS) POWER AND GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SAS) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0212-Lost Communication with SCM diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0401-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on for four seconds, no CAN BUS circuit error condition present, no lost communication with Powertrain Control Module (PCM) condition present, and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) is receiving implausible data for pedal position, engine RPM, torque, or engine coolant temperature from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DTCS PRESENT DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DTCS PRESENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the PCM. Are there any active DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



U0402-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM TCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on for four seconds, no CAN BUS circuit error condition present, no lost communication with TCM condition present, and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) is receiving implausible data for gear or PRNDL position from the Transmission Control Module (TCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) DTCS PRESENT DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the TCM. Are there any DTCs present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



U0415-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on for four seconds, no CAN BUS circuit error condition present, no lost communication with ABS condition present, and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) is receiving implausible data for vehicle speed, wheel speeds, brake switch status, longitudinal acceleration, yaw rate, or lateral acceleration from the ABS Module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE DTCS PRESENT DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ABS MODULE DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the ABS Module. Are there any DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

U0429-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM SCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on for 4 seconds, no CAN BUS circuit error condition present, no lost communication with SCM condition present, and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) is receiving implausible data for sensor status from the SCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE (SCCM) DTCS PRESENT DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the SCCM. Are there any DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



U0431-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on for four seconds, no CAN BUS circuit error condition present, no lost communication with TIPM condition present, and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) is receiving no message or implausible data for ambient temperature or the transfer case selector switch. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS OPEN OR SHORTED CONDITION TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DTCS PRESENT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CONFIGURED INCORRECTLY DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Diagnose all CAN C and CAN Interior bus communication DTCs before continuing.

NOTE:

This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. CHECK FOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the TIPM. 

Are there any TIPM DTCs present? Yes 

No

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 3. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

STANDARD PROCEDURE TRANSFER CASE VERIFICATION TEST DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors. With the scan tool, select clear Stored DTCs. Make sure that all accessories are turned off and that the battery is fully charged. Test drive the vehicle in each Transfer Case range and verify proper operation in each range.  To select or deselect 2WD, AWD or 4HI mode (if equipped), vehicle speed must be below 88 Kmh (55 mph) with all wheels at vehicle speed.  Shifts will not take place with a wheel speed difference of greater than 21 Kmh (13 mph) between the front and rear wheels.  To select or deselect 4LO (if equipped), vehicle speed must be below 5 Kmh (3 mph) with the ignition on, engine not running and the transmission in neutral (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal pressed (manual transmission).  To select or deselect Transfer Case Neutral (if equipped), vehicle speed must be 0 Kmh (0 mph) with the ignition on, engine not running, the brake pedal applied, and the transmission

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

in neutral (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal pressed (manual transmission). Press the Neutral button (if equipped) on the Transfer Case Selector Switch until the Neutral Indicator is illuminated. WARNING: Apply the parking brake. The vehicle may roll with the Transfer Case in neutral. 

To verify that the Transfer Case is in Neutral, shift the automatic transmission into reverse and release the brake pedal for three seconds or shift the manual transmission into gear and slowly release the clutch pedal. There should be no vehicle movement if the Transfer Case is in Neutral. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) and in the Instrument Cluster (CCN). 

Are there any DTCs present in the TIPM or in the CCN? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to TIPM - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , or refer to CCN - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Test complete.

No

STANDARD PROCEDURE - DTCM VERIFICATION TEST DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTCM VERIFICATION TEST 1. Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors. 2. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 3. Make sure that all accessories are turned off and that the battery is fully charged. 4. Test drive the vehicle and verify proper operation. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the DTCM. Are there any DTCs present in the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM)? Yes 

No

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Repair is complete.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description C15A4-00 POWER STEERING ASSIST INHIBITED-VEHICLE SPEED TOO HIGH C211B-00 IGNITION RUN/START INPUT C211B-11 IGNITION RUN/START INPUT-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C211B-12 IGNITION RUN/START INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C2128-00 ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED C212A-84 SYSTEM VOLTAGE-SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE C212A-85 SYSTEM VOLTAGE-SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE C2206-00 VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH C220D-00 ELECTRICAL POWERED HYDRAULIC STEERING MODULE INTERNAL C2210-00 ECU OVERTEMPERATURE C221F-00 ECU NOT INITIALIZED U0002-00 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE U0100-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM U0121-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE U0126-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STEERING ANGLE SENSOR U0141-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) U0401-00 IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM U0415-00 IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS U0428-00 IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM STEERING ANGLE SENSOR MODULE U1601-00 ECU APPLICATION SOFTWARE CODE 1 MISSING OR CORRUPTED U160B-00 ECU BOOT SOFTWARE 1 MISSING OR CORRUPTED

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING C15A4-00-POWER STEERING ASSIST INHIBITED-VEHICLE SPEED TOO HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously, with the engine over 300 RPM. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump Motor does not turn. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) PUMP DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. EHPS PUMP MOTOR 1. Turn the steering wheel left and right. 

Is there power steering assist? Yes 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C211B-00-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuous. SET CONDITION:

No ignition voltage sensed at the module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If multiple DTCs are present, inspect the wiring and harness connector at the EHPS Pump.

1. Turn ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the EHPS Module. Is the DTC status Active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the TIPM C5 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the EHPS Module C2 harness connector. 4. Measure the resistance between ground and the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the EHPS Module harness connector. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for a short to ground. Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit Open Or High Resistance

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit between the TIPM C5 harness connector and the EHPS Module C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C211B-11-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuous. SET CONDITION:

The ignition signal at the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module harness connector is less than 2.5 Volts while the vehicle is running. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If multiple DTCs are present, inspect the wiring and harness connector at the EHPS Pump.

1. Turn ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the EHPS Module. Is the DTC status Active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the TIPM C5 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the EHPS Module C2. 4. Measure the resistance between ground and the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the EHPS Module harness connector. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for a short to ground. Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C211B-12-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuous. SET CONDITION:

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module receives ignition signal while ignition is off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If multiple DTCs are present, inspect the wiring and harness connector at the EHPS Pump.

1. Turn ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the EHPS Module. Is the DTC status Active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit Shorted To Battery Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit at the EHPS Module C2 harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes  

Repair the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for a short to battery. Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C2128-00-ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump assembly contains a control module, brushless electric motor, and hydraulic pump integrated into a single unit. The EHPS Pump draws power from the 12-Volt electrical system and provides the necessary flow and pressure to the steering gear to provide normal power steering. The EHPS Pump requires communication over the CAN C bus to function properly. The output flow of the EHPS Pump is varied as a function of Steering Wheel Rate (received from SAS) and Vehicle Speed (received from ABS Module) in order to provide the optimum flow of power steering fluid to the steering gear under all operating conditions. The EHPS Pump will start to provide steering assist when the Vehicle speed message greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) is received on CAN C. If the Vehicle Speed message is missing at vehicle startup, the EHPS Pump will not operate. If the Vehicle Speed message is lost during operation the EHPS pump will use a default vehicle speed of 85 km/h (59 mph) to calculate desired flow and as a result, steering effort will no longer be speed sensitive. If the Steering Wheel Position message is lost the EHPS Pump will use a default steering wheel rate of 230°/sec to calculate desired flow and as a result, steering effort may be higher on evasive steering maneuvers. The EHPS pump will resume normal operation automatically once any missing message or out of range condition noted above is restored to normal. WHEN MONITORED:

Once at each ignition cycle. SET CONDITION:

When the ignition is turned on, the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump checks to see if the last shutdown occurred correctly. If it did not, this DTC will be set active for the remainder of the current key cycle. The EHPS Pump will run normally even if this DTC is active. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (A929) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Z906/Z907) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) PUMP DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK DTC-C2128 ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED NOTE:

Make sure the 12-Volt battery is fully charged before proceeding.

NOTE:

This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.

1. Ignition on, engine off. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display: DTC C2128-ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED? Yes 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 2. 2. (A929) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the EHPS Module C1 harness connector. NOTE:

Wiggle test the wiring harness and electrical connectors while testing the circuit.

3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A929) Fused B(+) circuit in the EHPS Module C1 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (A929) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. (Z906/Z907) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking Ground Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Wiggle test the wiring harness and electrical connectors while testing the circuit.

1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z906/Z907) Ground circuit in the EHPS Module C1 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair the (Z906/Z907) Ground circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C212A-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE-SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module receives a low charging system voltage message over the CAN Bus or detects voltage under 10 volts on the (A929) Fused B(+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW (A929) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Perform the Charging System diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the active EHPS Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 3.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT THE (A929) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking The Voltage At The Fused B(+) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the EHPS Module harness connector. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Measure the voltage between the (A929) Fused B(+) circuit and ground. Compare this value to the voltage measured at the vehicle battery. Is the voltage measured at the EHPS Module harness connector the same as measured at the battery? Yes 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair the (A929) Fused B(+) circuit as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

C212A-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE-SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module receives a high charging system voltage message over the CAN Bus or detects voltage over 16 volts on the (A929) Fused B(+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Perform the Charging System diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the active EHPS Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

C2206-00-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. SET CONDITION:

This DTC will set if the vehicle type is not identified or incorrectly identified. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) PUMP TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE NOTE:

Diagnose and repair any Powertrain Control Module VIN or Communication DTCs before continuing with this test.

NOTE:

If C2202-00-Original VIN Mismatch / Missing is set along with this DTC, perform the diagnostic procedure for C2202-00 before continuing with this test.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read and record the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read and record the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 4. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display: C2206-00-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



With the scan tool select TIPM under the ECU selection then Misc Functions and Restore Vehicle Configuration.



Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

C220D-00-ELECTRICAL POWERED HYDRAULIC STEERING MODULE INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump assembly contains a control module, brushless electric motor, and hydraulic pump integrated into a single unit. The EHPS Pump draws power from the 12-Volt electrical system and provides the necessary flow and pressure to the steering gear to provide normal power steering. The EHPS Pump requires communication over the CAN C bus to function properly. The output flow of the EHPS Pump is varied as a function of Steering Wheel Rate (received from SAS) and Vehicle Speed (received from ABS Module) in order to provide the optimum flow of power steering fluid to the steering gear under all operating conditions. The EHPS Pump will start to provide steering assist when the Vehicle speed message greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) is received on CAN C. If the Vehicle Speed message is missing at vehicle startup, the EHPS Pump will not operate. If the Vehicle Speed message is lost during operation the EHPS pump will use a default vehicle speed of 85 km/h (59 mph) to calculate desired flow and as a result, steering effort will no longer be speed sensitive. If the Steering Wheel Position message is lost the EHPS Pump will use a default steering wheel rate of 230°/sec to calculate desired flow and as a result, steering effort may be higher on evasive steering maneuvers. The EHPS pump will resume normal operation automatically once any missing message or out of range condition noted above is restored to normal. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

If the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EPS) Module detects an internal fault, this DTC will set. Most of internal faults that can set this DTC will result in the EPS Pump not operating for the remainder of the current key cycle. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. ACTIVE DTC NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.

Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Start the engine and run for two minutes. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display: C220D-00-ELECTRICAL POWERED HYDRAULIC STEERING MODULE INTERNAL? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with service information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and electrical connectors. Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C2210-00-ECU OVERTEMPERATURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on with battery voltage normal. SET CONDITION:

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module detects an over temperature at the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) PUMP OVER TEMPERATURE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. EHPS PUMP OVER TEMPERATURE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Let vehicle sit for 30 minutes. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Test drive vehicle performing parking maneuvers. 6. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

C221F-00-ECU NOT INITIALIZED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Wireless Ignition Node detects that the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module has not initialized. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. EHPS MODULE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase WIN DTCs. 2. Remove and insert the key from the ignition switch several times then leave the key in the run position. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: C221F-00 ECU NOT INITIALIZED? Yes 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

U0002-00-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

For vehicle communication problems, use the scan tool to refer to the Network Review Screen. The screen depicts a high level view of the vehicle network. Fault and problem areas appear in red. Selecting any of the network components allows access to the source of the problem.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Diagnose the U0002-00 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE as the U0001 CAN C BUS CIRCUIT test and perform the U0001-Can C Bus diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0100-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Powertrain Control Module (ECM/PCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (ECM/PCM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC NOTE:

If present, diagnose and repair DTC U0002-88-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE- BUS OFF before diagnosing this DTC.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0100-Lost Communication with ECM/PCM diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0121-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0121-00-Lost Communication with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Control Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0126-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) communicates with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The ElectroHydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump continuously monitors the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. If the EHPS Pump does not receive messages from the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS), this fault will set. WHEN MONITORED: SET CONDITION:

If the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump fails to receive bus messages from the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) for approximately 500 ms. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED STEERING ANGLE SENSOR POWER AND GROUND ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE (ABS) NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SAS) ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) PUMP ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE (ABS) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0126-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STEERING ANGLE SENSOR diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D65) CAN C BUS(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D64) CAN C BUS(-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

AND TESTING . . U0401-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN message received at least once, and no U0002-CAN C Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump detects an incorrect CAN message from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes EHPS CAN BUS DTCS PCM DTCS ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) PUMP DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR DTC U0401-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U0401-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. CHECK IF TIPM CAN BUS DTCS ARE PRESENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. Are there any TIPM CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. 

Are there any Engine DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering Module pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the ElectroHydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



U0415-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously while the system is active. SET CONDITION:

An error message has been received over the bus from the Anti-lock Brake Module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS OPEN OR SHORTED CONDITION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) PUMP DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Diagnose all CAN B and C communication DTCs before continuing.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With a scan tool, view DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. ABS COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS IN OTHER MODULES 1. With a scan tool check for ABS communication related DTCs in other modules on the CAN Bus. 

Are there any ABS communication related DTCs in other modules on the CAN Bus at this time? Yes 



Replace and program the Anti-Lock Brake Control Module (ABS) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS Verification Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U0428-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM STEERING ANGLE SENSOR MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Assembly contains a control module, brushless electric motor, and hydraulic pump integrated into a single unit. The EHPS Assembly draws power from the 12-Volt electrical system and provides the necessary flow and pressure to the steering gear to provide normal power steering independent of the gasoline engine. The EHPS Assembly requires communication over the CAN C bus to function properly. The output flow of the EHPS Assembly is varied as a function of Steering Wheel Rate (received from SAS Module) and Vehicle Speed (received from ABS Module) in order to provide the optimum flow of power steering fluid to the steering gear under all operating conditions. The pump will start to provide steering assist when a hybrid active (vehicle started) or a Vehicle speed message greater than 5 kph (3 mph) is received on CAN C. If both the Vehicle Speed and Hybrid Active messages are missing at vehicle startup, the EHPS Assembly will not operate. If the Vehicle Speed message is lost during operation the EHPS Module will use a default vehicle speed of 85 km/h (59 mph) to calculate desired flow and as a result, steering effort will no longer be speed sensitive. If the Steering Wheel Position message is lost the EHPS Module will use a default steering wheel rate of 230°/sec to calculate desired flow and as a result, steering effort may be higher on evasive steering maneuvers. The EHPS Assembly will resume normal operation automatically once any missing message or out of range condition noted above is restored to normal. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously while the system is active. SET CONDITION:

An error message has been received over the bus from the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS OPEN OR SHORTED CONDITION STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SAS) ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Diagnose all communication DTCs before continuing.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With a scan tool, view DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. SAS COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCs IN OTHER MODULES 1. With a scan tool check for SAS communication related DTCs in other modules on the CAN Bus. 

Are there any SAS communication related DTCs in other modules on the CAN Bus at this time? Yes 



Replace the SAS in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Assembly in accordance with Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U1601-00-ECU APPLICATION SOFTWARE CODE 1 MISSING OR CORRUPTED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump assembly contains a control module, brushless electric motor, and hydraulic pump integrated into a single unit. The EHPS Pump draws power from the 12-Volt electrical system and provides the necessary flow and pressure to the steering gear to provide normal power steering. The EHPS Pump requires communication over the CAN C bus to function properly. The output flow of the EHPS Pump is varied as a function of Steering Wheel Rate (received from SAS) and Vehicle Speed (received from ABS Module) in order to provide the optimum flow of power steering fluid to the steering gear under all operating conditions. The EHPS Pump will start to provide steering assist when the Vehicle speed message greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) is received on CAN C. If the Vehicle Speed message is missing at vehicle startup, the EHPS Pump will not operate. If the Vehicle Speed message is lost during operation the EHPS pump will use a default vehicle speed of 85 km/h (59 mph) to calculate desired flow and as a result, steering effort will no longer be speed sensitive. If the Steering Wheel Position message is lost the EHPS Pump will use a default steering wheel rate of 230°/sec to calculate desired flow and as a result, steering effort may be higher on evasive steering maneuvers. The EHPS pump will resume normal operation automatically once any missing message or out of range condition noted above is restored to normal. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously, with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump detects that its software has been corrupted or is missing. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) FLASHED INCORRECTLY ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) PUMP DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR DTC U1601-ECU APPLICATION SOFTWARE CODE 1 MISSING OR CORRUPTED NOTE:

This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid. Check for a loose scan tool connection. Verify battery charger is installed and charge rate provides approximately 13.5 volts.

1. Ignition on, engine off. 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, follow the reprogramming procedure and reflash the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump while maintaining voltage as noted above. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U1601-00-ECU APPLICATION SOFTWARE CODE 1 MISSING OR CORRUPTED? Yes 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform EHPS VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. Perform the EHPS VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

U160B-00-ECU BOOT SOFTWARE 1 MISSING OR CORRUPTED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump detects an internal failure. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) PUMP DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With a scan tool, view DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 



Replace and program the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Perform the EHPS VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete. The condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

STANDARD PROCEDURE EPS VERIFICATION TEST For a complete wiring diagram, refer to Wiring Information . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. EPS VERIFICATION TEST 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Remove all test equipment. 3. Connect all previously disconnected components and connectors. 4. Verify all accessories are turned off and the battery is fully charged. 5. Verify that the ignition is on. With the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from all modules. Start

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 STEERING Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the engine and allow it to run for two minutes and fully operate the system that was indicating the failure. NOTE:

Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock, holding at each lock position for One second.

6. Turn the ignition off and wait five seconds. Turn the ignition on and using the scan tool, read Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from all modules. 7. If there are no DTCs present after turning ignition on, road test the vehicle for at least five minutes. 8. Again, with the scan tool read DTCs. If any DTCs are present, and troubleshoot the new or recurring DTC. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. 9. If there are no DTCs present and the customer's concern can no longer be duplicated, the repair is complete. Are any DTCs present or is the original concern still present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Repair is complete.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description C141C-11 REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C141C-12 REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C141C-13 REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN C141C-19 REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT C141C-4B REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - OVER TEMPERATURE C1451-12 REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C1451-14 REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN C1451-64 REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR - SIGNAL PLAUSIBILITY FAILURE C1481-12 REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C1482-11 REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C1481-14 REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN C1482-15 REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN C1483-11 REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C1483-12 REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C1484-11 REAR DIFFERENTIAL BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C1484-12 REAR DIFFERENTIAL BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C1484-13 REAR DIFFERENTIAL BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN C1484-19 REAR DIFFERENTIAL BRAKE CONTROL - OVERCURRENT C1485-4B REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR BRAKE OUTPUT DRIVER - OVER TEMPERATURE C1486-4B REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR OUTPUT DRIVER - OVER TEMPERATURE C1488-4B REAR DIFFERENTIAL CLUTCH-OVER TEMPERATURE C1489-96 REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR BRAKE - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE C148D-00 REAR DIFFERENTIAL CLUTCH WEAR LIMIT EXCEEDED C148F-1D REAR DIFFERENTIAL MEASURED MOTOR - CIRCUIT OUT OF RANGE C1490-00 REAR DIFFERENTIAL ACTUATOR INITIALIZATION FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C2129-16 C2129-17 C2220-00 U0002-00 U0100-00 U0114-00 U0121-00 U0414-00 U140D-00 U1450-00

BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD REAR DIFFERENTIAL ECU INTERNAL CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE (FDCM) (DTCM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM FDCM (DTCM) IMPLAUSIBLE WHEEL SPEED SIGNALS RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE DTCM TORQUE MESSAGE RECEIVED

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING C141C-11-REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

The ignition on with battery voltage normal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects low voltage on the Rear Differential Motor circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the ELSD Motor harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit in the ELSD Motor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit in the ELSD Motor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC reset? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C141C-12-REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

The Solenoid is active, no solenoid supply circuit DTCs are present and battery voltage is normal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects high voltage on the Rear Differential Motor circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the ELSD Motor harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit in the ELSD Motor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit in the ELSD Motor harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C141C-13-REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

The Solenoid is active, no solenoid supply circuit DTCs are present and battery voltage is normal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects no voltage on the Rear Differential Motor circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Open Or High Resistance

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the ELSD Motor harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit between the ELSD Motor harness connector and the ELSD C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit between the ELSD Motor harness connector and the ELSD C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C141C-19-REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

The ignition on with battery voltage normal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects over current draw on the Rear Differential Motor circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 7. 2. (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the ELSD Motor harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit in the ELSD Motor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit in the ELSD Motor harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T338) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit in the ELSD Motor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (T338) ELSD Motor Clamp IN/OUT circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (T339) ELSD MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 14: Checking ELSD Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit in the ELSD Motor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T339) ELSD Motor Clamp OUT/IN circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 7. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C141C-4B-REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL - OVER TEMPERATURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on with battery voltage normal. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects an over temperature at the Rear Differential Motor. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR OVER TEMPERATURE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.



Go To 4.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. ELSD MOTOR OVER TEMPERATURE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Let vehicle sit for 30 minutes. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Test drive vehicle under normal driving conditions. 6. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC reset? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1451-12-REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The sensor voltage is above a specified value for a calibrated amount of time. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Start the engine. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off. 4. Start the engine. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the voltage of the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 17: Checking Hall Sensor Return Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the voltage of the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Checking Hall Sensor Feed Circuit Shorted To The Hall Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit and the (T333) Hall Sensor Feed Signal 1 circuit at the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit and the (T333) Hall Sensor Feed Signal 1 circuit. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Start the engine. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off. 6. Start the engine. 7. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. Start the engine. 3. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. C1451-14-REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN

Fig. 19: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage or supply voltage low conditions present. SET CONDITION:

Sensor input voltage is below a specified value for a calibrated amount of time. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit between the ELSD C1 harness connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Shorted To Hall Sensor Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T333) Hall Sensor Feed Signal 1 circuit and the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit at the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the short between the (T333) Hall Sensor Feed Signal 1 circuit and the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Start the engine. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off. 6. Start the engine. 7. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. Start the engine. 3. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1451-64-REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR - SIGNAL PLAUSIBILITY FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Differential Slip (ELSD) Module has detected an internal error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 16. 2. (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 23: Checking Hall Sensor Feed Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. 4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. Measure the voltage of the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 24: Checking Hall Sensor Feed Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 25: Checking Hall Sensor Feed Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit between the ELSD C1 harness

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 7. (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 28: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit between the ELSD C1 harness connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Repair the (T333) Hall Sensor Signal 1 circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 2 Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 9. 9. (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 30: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 2 Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 10. 10. (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 2 Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit between the ELSD C3 harness connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes 

Go To 11.

No Repair the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 11. (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Checking Hall Sensor Return Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 12. 12. (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 33: Checking Hall Sensor Return Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 13. 13. (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Checking Hall Sensor Return Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit between the ELSD C1 harness connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes 

Go To 14.

No Repair the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 14. (T333) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Shorted To Hall Sensor Signal 2 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T333) Hall Sensor Feed Signal 1 circuit and the (T334) Hall Sensor Feed Signal 2 circuit at the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (T334) Hall Sensor Feed Signal 2 circuit and the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 15. 15. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Start the engine. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off. 6. Start the engine. 7. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 16. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. Start the engine. 3. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 4. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. C1481-12-REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Fig. 36: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The sensor voltage is above a specified value for a calibrated amount of time. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Checking Hall Sensor Feed Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 38: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 2 Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the voltage of the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Checking Hall Sensor Return Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1482-11-REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

GROUND

Fig. 40: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects excessive voltage fluctuation on the Mode Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T331) TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (T331) TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Checking Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T331) Temperature Sensor Signal circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T331) Temperature Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1481-14-REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

GROUND OR OPEN

Fig. 42: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage or supply voltage low conditions present. SET CONDITION:

Sensor input voltage is below a specified value for a calibrated amount of time. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Checking Hall Sensor Feed Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 44: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 2 Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Checking Hall Sensor Feed Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit between the ELSD C3 harness connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. (T334) HALL SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Checking Hall Sensor Signal 2 Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit between the ELSD C3 harness connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (T334) Hall Sensor Signal 2 circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. (T335) HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Checking Hall Sensor Return Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit between the ELSD C3 harness connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the (T335) Hall Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 7. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1482-15-REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects excessive voltage fluctuation on the Mode Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T330) TEMPERATURE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (T331) TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (T330) TEMPERATURE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T331) TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 7. 2. (T330) TEMPERATURE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Checking Temperature Sensor Return Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the voltage of the (T330) Temperature Sensor Return circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T330) Temperature Sensor Return circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T331) TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 50: Checking Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (T331) Temperature Sensor Signal circuit in the Rear Differential

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T331) Temperature Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T330) TEMPERATURE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 51: Checking Temperature Sensor Return Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T330) Temperature Sensor Return circuit between the ELSD C1 harness connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (T330) Temperature Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. (T331) TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Checking Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T331) Temperature Sensor Signal circuit between the ELSD C1 harness connector and the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (T331) Temperature Sensor Signal circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 7. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1483-11-REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage or supply voltage low conditions present.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

Sensor input voltage is below a specified value for a calibrated amount of time. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 54: Checking Hall Sensor Feed Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1483-12-REAR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Fig. 55: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The sensor voltage is above a specified value for a calibrated amount of time. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (T332) HALL SENSOR FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Checking Hall Sensor Feed Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T332) Hall Sensor Feed circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1484-11-REAR DIFFERENTIAL BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 57: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects excessive voltage fluctuation on the Sensor circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Checking Differential Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 59: Checking Differential Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1484-12-REAR DIFFERENTIAL BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Fig. 60: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects excessive voltage fluctuation on the Sensor circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Checking Differential Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 62: Checking Differential Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. Measure the voltage of the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1484-13-REAR DIFFERENTIAL BRAKE CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects excessive voltage fluctuation on the Sensor circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Checking Differential Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit between the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector and the ELSD C1 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Checking Differential Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit between the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector and the ELSD C3 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1484-19-REAR DIFFERENTIAL BRAKE CONTROL - OVERCURRENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

The ignition on with battery voltage normal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects over current draw on the Rear Differential Motor circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 7. 2. (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Checking Differential Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 68: Checking Differential Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. Measure the voltage of the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Checking Differential Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 70: Checking Differential Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 7. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1485-4B-REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR BRAKE OUTPUT DRIVER - OVER TEMPERATURE

Fig. 71: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on with battery voltage normal. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects an over temperature at the Rear Differential Motor Brake Output. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR BRAKE OUTPUT OVER TEMPERATURE (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. ELSD MOTOR BRAKE OUTPUT OVER TEMPERATURE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Let vehicle sit for 30 minutes. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. 5. 6. 7.

With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Test drive vehicle under normal driving conditions. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC reset? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Checking Differential Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 73: Checking Differential Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. Measure the voltage of the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Checking Differential Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 75: Checking Differential Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC reset? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1486-4B-REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR OUTPUT DRIVER - OVER TEMPERATURE

Fig. 76: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on with battery voltage normal. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects an over temperature at the Rear Differential Motor Output. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR OUTPUT OVER TEMPERATURE (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. ELSD MOTOR OUTPUT OVER TEMPERATURE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Let vehicle sit for 30 minutes. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Test drive vehicle under normal driving conditions. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC remain active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Checking Differential Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 78: Checking Differential Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. Measure the voltage of the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes  

Repair the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (T336) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP IN/OUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 79: Checking Differential Motor Clamp In/Out Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Disconnect the ELSD C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (T336) Differential Motor Clamp In/Out circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. (T337) DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR CLAMP OUT/IN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 80: Checking Differential Motor Clamp Out/In Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ELSD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit in the Rear Differential Solenoid harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T337) Differential Motor Clamp Out/In circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1488-4B-REAR DIFFERENTIAL CLUTCH-OVER TEMPERATURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on with battery voltage normal. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects an over temperature at the Rear Differential Clutch Motor. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) DIFFERENTIAL CLUTCH OVER TEMPERATURE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. ELSD DIFFERENTIAL CLUTCH OVER TEMPERATURE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Let vehicle sit for 30 minutes. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Test drive vehicle under normal driving conditions Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC reset? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC reset? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1489-96-REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOTOR BRAKE - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) has detected slippage of the motor brake causing an internal failure. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 2. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C148D-00-REAR DIFFERENTIAL CLUTCH WEAR LIMIT EXCEEDED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on with battery voltage normal. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects a that the rear differential clutch wear limit has been exceeded. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C148F-1D-REAR DIFFERENTIAL MEASURED MOTOR - CIRCUIT OUT OF RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) has detected circuit current or motor position out of range. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE NOTE:

If any ELSD motor or sensor DTCs are present, perform the appropriate

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

diagnostic procedure before continuing with this test. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1490-00-REAR DIFFERENTIAL ACTUATOR INITIALIZATION FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) has detected incorrect position change during initialization. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MOTOR ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE NOTE:

If any ELSD motor or sensor DTCs are present, perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure before continuing with this test.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2129-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

Fig. 81: Rear Differential Control Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects the battery voltage has dropped below 10 Volts for more than 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT (A206) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (A903) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Are there any Charging System or related voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate Charging System DTC diagnostic procedures before continuing with this test. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ELSD. 

Is the DTC active at this time?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. (A206) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 82: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit Open Or High Resistance

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ELSD C2 harness connector. 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. With a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A206) Fused B+ circuit in the ELSD C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (A206) Fused B(+) circuit for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. (A903) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. With a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A903) Fused B+ circuit in the ELSD C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (A903) Fused B(+) circuit for an open circuit or high resistance. Inspect the related fuse. if the fuse is open, check the circuit for a short to ground.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Checking Ground Circuit Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With a 12-volt test light connected to B+, check the (Z916) Ground circuit in the ELSD C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Repair the (Z916) Ground circuit for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2129-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module detects the battery voltage has increased above 16

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Volts for more than 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Are there any Charging System or related voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the ELSD. 

Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 



Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2220-00-REAR DIFFERENTIAL ECU INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) has detected a failure internal to the controller. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the ELSD. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

U0002-00-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

For vehicle communication problems, use the scan tool to refer to the Network Review Screen. The screen depicts a high level view of the vehicle network. Fault and problem areas appear in red. Selecting any of the network components allows access to the source of the problem.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Diagnose the U0002-00 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE as the U0001 CAN C BUS CIRCUIT test and perform the U0001-Can C Bus diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0100-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) ANY MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0100-Lost Communication with PCM diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0114-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE (FDCM) (DTCM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery Voltage between 10 and 16 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) doesn't receive a Final Drive Control Module (FDCM) (DTCM) message over the CAN C BUS circuit for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN INTERIOR OR CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES PRESENT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery Voltage is between 10 and 16 Volts before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0114-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE (FDCM) (DTCM) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0121-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0121-00-Lost Communication with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Control Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0414-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM FDCM (DTCM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When the ELSD Module detects an incorrect message from the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CAN BUS DTCs PRESENT DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DTCs PRESENT ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR TIPM CAN BUS DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. Are there any TIPM CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for DTC U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTCM DTCs ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read DTCM DTCs. 

Are there any DTCM DTCs present? Yes  

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) terminals or corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance to the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U140D-00-IMPLAUSIBLE WHEEL SPEED SIGNALS RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the ELSD detects an incorrect CAN ID from the ABS control module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CAN BUS DTCs PRESENT ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE DTCs PRESENT ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR TIPM CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. Are there any TIPM CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for DTC U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR ABS DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs. 

Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes  

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Module terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance to the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U1450-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DTCM TORQUE MESSAGE RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When the ELSD Module detects an incorrect message from the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CAN BUS DTCs PRESENT DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DTCs PRESENT ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR TIPM CAN BUS DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. Are there any TIPM CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for DTC U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 DRIVELINE/AXLES Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTCM DTCs ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read DTCM DTCs. 

Are there any DTCM DTC's present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) terminals or corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Module in accordance to the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



STANDARD PROCEDURE ELSD VERIFICATION TEST DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ASCM VERIFICATION TEST 1. Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors. 2. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 3. Make sure that all accessories are turned off and that the battery is fully charged. 4. With the scan tool, under "Miscellaneous Functions" run the Quick Learn routine. 5. With the scan tool, under "System Test" run the System Functionality Test. 6. Test drive the vehicle and verify proper operation. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the ELSD. Are there any DTCs present in the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD)? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Repair is complete.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC P0562 P0563 P0607 P0930 P0931 P2775 P2779 U0002 U0100 U0121 U0141

Description BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH ECU INTERNAL PERFORMANCE BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH AUTOSTICK UPSHIFT SWITCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE AUTOSTICK DOWNSHIFT SWITCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE ECM/PCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM)

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Shift Lever Assembly monitors ignition voltage. The DTC will set if the monitored battery voltage drops below 6.0 volts and a temporary limp in will be activated. If the voltage rises above 9.0 volts, normal operations is resumed. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When monitored battery voltage drops below 6.0 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM (F1) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

(Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ENGINE CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. Are there any Engine Charging System DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK (F1) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Checking Ignition Unlock Run Start Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Shift Lever Assembly harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F1) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit in

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the Shift Lever Assembly harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (F1) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit for high resistance.  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Ground Circuit In Shift Lever Assembly Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z911) Ground circuit in the Shift Lever Assembly harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

that of a direct connection to the battery. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Z911) Ground circuit for high resistance.  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY 1. Reconnect all disconnected harness connectors. 2. With the scan tool, erase Shift Lever DTCs. 3. Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM. 4. With the scan tool, read Shift Lever DTCs. 

Did the P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW DTC reset? Yes



Replace the Shift Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Test complete.



No

P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Shift Lever Assembly monitors ignition voltage. The DTC will set, if the monitored battery voltage rises above 16.0 volts. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition in the run position. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When the monitored battery voltage rises above 16.0 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS VEHICLE WAS JUMP STARTED INCORRECTLY SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. NOTE:

This includes any one trip faults.

Are there any Engine Charging System DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 2. 2. VEHICLE WAS JUMP STARTED INCORRECTLY 1. Verify if the vehicle was jump started by another vehicle using a 24-volt charging system or incorrectly jump started with the 12 volt battery in series. 

Was the vehicle jump started by another vehicle? Yes  

No

This is the cause of the DTC. Erase the DTC and return the vehicle to the customer. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. CHECK SYSTEM VOLTAGE 1. Start the engine and let idle for at least 10 seconds. 2. With the scan tool, monitor system voltage. 

Is the system voltage above 16V for more than 5 seconds? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY 1. Reconnect all disconnected harness connectors. 2. With the scan tool, erase Shift Lever DTCs. 3. Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM. 4. With the scan tool, read Shift Lever DTCs. 

Did the P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH DTC reset? Yes 



Replace the Shift Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Test Complete.

P0607-ECU INTERNAL PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article THEORY OF OPERATION

The Shift Lever Assembly (SLA) Electronic Shift Module (ESM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates that there is an issue with the Shifter's internal processor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition in the run position. SET CONDITION:

If the Shift Lever Assembly controller detects an invalid calibration (checksum value). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Shift Lever Assembly Control Module terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the Shift Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

P0930-BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The brake switch signal must be active before the shift lever can be moved out of the park position. The Shifter Lever Assembly (SLA) Electronic Shift Module (ESM) receives two brake switch signals. The first signal is a CAN C Bus message sent to the shifter lever assembly. The second signal is a hard wired brake switch signal to the shifter lever assembly from the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). The CAN C Bus message is the primary brake switch signal and the hard wired signal serves as the backup brake switch signal. These two brake switch signals are compared against each other to verify proper brake switch operation. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if the high side driver detects a short to ground for 10 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ENGINE BRAKE DTCS PRESENT WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DTCS PRESENT K321 BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND K321 BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ENGINE DTCS PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. Are there any Engine brake DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DTCS PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs. Are there any Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT 

Fig. 4: Checking Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Shifter Lever Assembly harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool under Wireless Ignition Node (WIN), actuate the BTSI. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

5. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (K321) BTSI Control circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly while cycling on and off on all (K321) BTSI Control circuit? Yes 



Replace the Shifter Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & BTSI Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K321) BTSI Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (K321) BTSI Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Of BTSI Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (K321) BTSI Control circuit between the Shifter Lever Assembly harness connector and the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (K321) BTSI Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY 1. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. 

Repair 



Replace the Shifter Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

P0931-BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The brake switch signal must be active before the shift lever can be moved out of the park position. The Shifter Lever Assembly (SLA) Electronic Shift Module (ESM) receives two brake switch signals. The first signal is a CAN C Bus message sent to the shifter lever assembly. The second signal is a hard wired brake switch signal to the shifter lever assembly from the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). The CAN C Bus message is the primary brake switch signal and the hard wired signal serves as the backup brake switch signal. These two brake switch signals are compared against each other to verify proper brake switch operation. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition key on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if the high side driver detects an open load for 10 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ENGINE BRAKE DTCS PRESENT WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DTCS PRESENT K321 BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ENGINE DTCs PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. Are there any Engine brake DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 2. 2. WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DTCS PRESENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. With the scan tool, read Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs. Are there any Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Measuring Voltage Between Ground & BTSI Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Shifter Lever Assembly harness connector. Disconnect the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) harness connector. Turn the ignition on. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

5. Measure the voltage between ground and the (K321) BTSI Control circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (K321) BTSI Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY 1. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Repair as necessary. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. 

Repair 



Replace the Shifter Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

P2775-AUTOSTICK UPSHIFT SWITCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The AutoStick Switch is integrated into the Shift Lever Assembly. The gear requested by the AutoStick selection is then sent over the CAN C bus to the TCM to engage the requested gear. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition in the run position. SET CONDITION:

When the expected switch state is not correctly sensed by the Shift Lever Assembly. If the upshift switch signal is detected as active in gear position other than drive. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PROCEDURE . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Shift Lever Assembly (SLA) Electronic Shift Module (ESM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the Shift Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

P2779-AUTOSTICK DOWNSHIFT SWITCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The AutoStick Switch is integrated into the Shift Lever Assembly. The gear requested by the AutoStick selection is then sent over the CAN C bus from the Electronic Shift Module (ESM) to the TCM to engage the requested gear. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is in the run position. SET CONDITION:

When the expected switch state is not correctly sensed by the Shifter Lever Assembly (SLA) Electronic Shift Module (ESM). If the Downshift switch signal is detected as active in gear position other than drive. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY Repair

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Using the schematics as a guide, check the Shifter Lever Assembly (SLA) Electronic Shift Module (ESM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the Shifter Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Is the DTC Active at this time? Yes 

Diagnose the U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE as the U0001-CAN C BUS CIRCUIT test. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0001-CAN C

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus diagnostic procedure. No 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Powertrain Control Module (ECM/PCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (ECM/PCM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Is the DTC Active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0100-Lost Communication with ECM/PCM diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED ABS MODULE DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Is the DTC Active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0121-Lost Communication with Anti-Lock Brake Module diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10.0 and 16.0 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

STANDARD PROCEDURE NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE For a complete wiring diagram refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article Perform the following pre-diagnostic troubleshooting procedures prior to performing any diagnostic test. NOTE:

Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay.

NOTE:

Incorrect fluid level, and/or poor fluid condition can be the cause of many transmission problems. Visually inspect the transmission and cooler lines for leakage and repair as necessary and adjust the fluid level per the Service Information.

Always perform diagnostics with a fully charged battery to avoid false symptoms. 1. With the scan tool, read the engine DTCs. Check and repair all engine DTCs prior to performing transmission symptom diagnostic procedures. 2. With the scan tool, read and record all Transmission DTCs. Record the controller software version and variant ID (configuration or level). NOTE:

Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins (TSB) that may apply.

NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located using a scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, it is recommended to record all available data to assist in troubleshooting and duplicating the conditions and in which the DTC originally set.

3. Verify the current software level of transmission controller. Various problems are corrected by software upgrades (flash) to the transmission controller.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Electronic Shift Module (ESM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

If a TCM software update is performed, all DTC information (Environmental Data) will be lost.

4. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors to all components related to the transmission and shift lever assembly. Clean and repair as necessary. 5. Most DTCs set on start up but some may only set by driving the vehicle. Note the when monitored and set conditions of the reported DTC. If variant DTCs are present, perform their respective test first. 6. Verify the axle ratio and transfer case ratio. NOTE:

The Transfer case ratio must be programmed using the scan tool under the appropriate gateway module (FCM, FDCM, and/or TIPM) even if equipped with AWD or NO transfer case. Validate that the left to right tire sizes on each axle are the same. Do not perform diagnostics using a space-saver spare tire. Invalid tire sizes (right to left) may cause erroneous DTCs to set.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. Did any of the above procedures repair the vehicle? Yes



Testing is complete. Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Information and perform the appropriate symptom(s).



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description C151E-11 LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C151E-15 LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN C151E-36 LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO LOW C151E-37 LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO HIGH C151E-76 LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-WRONG MOUNTING POSITION C1522-11 RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C1522-15 RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN C1522-36 RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO LOW C1522-37 RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO HIGH C1522-76 RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-WRONG MOUNTING POSITION C1526-11 LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C1526-15 LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN C1526-36 LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO LOW C1526-37 LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO HIGH C1526-76 LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-WRONG MOUNTING POSITION C152A-11 RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C152A-15 RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN C152A-36 RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO LOW C152A-37 RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO HIGH C152A-76 RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-WRONG MOUNTING POSITION C153A-11 LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C153A-12 LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY C153A-13 LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN C153A-96 LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE C153D-11 RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND C153D-12 RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C153D-13 C153D-96 C1540-11 C1540-12 C1540-13 C1540-96 C1543-11 C1543-12 C1543-13 C1543-96 C1556-12 C1556-14 C1556-96 C155E-11 C155E-12 C155E-13 C155E-92 C155E-96 C1562-13 C1562-92 C1562-98 C1566-92 C1567-92 C1568-92 C1569-92 C15C0-98 C156E-00

RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE RIDE HEIGHT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY RIDE HEIGHT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN RIDE HEIGHT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE RIDE HEIGHT AIR PUMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN RIDE HEIGHT AIR PUMP CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION RIDE HEIGHT AIR PUMP CONTROL - COMPONENT OR SYSTEM OVER TEMPERATURE LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION AIR SUSPENSION - COMPONENT OR SYSTEM OVER TEMPERATURE RIDE HEIGHT SYSTEM CALIBRATION PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C159E-11 C159E-15 C159F-11 C159F-12 C159F-13 C159F-92 C159F-96 C15A0-11 C15A0-12 C15A0-13 C15A0-92 C15A0-96 C15A1-00 C15A2-00 C15A3-00 C15A7-2A C15A8-2A C15A9-00 C15AA-00 C15AB-00 C15AD-92 C15AE-00 C2110-11 C2110-12 C211B-92 C2125-11 C2125-12 C2129-16 C2129-17 C212A-16 C212A-17 C212B-11 C212B-12

AIR PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND AIR PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE UNABLE TO OBTAIN DESIRED RIDE HEIGHT RIDE HEIGHT SYSTEM UNLEVEL RIDE HEIGHT SYSTEM MANUALLY SWITCH OFF AIR SUSPENSION UP BUTTON - STUCK AIR SUSPENSION DOWN BUTTON - STUCK HEIGHT SENSOR MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE AIR LEAK DURING VENT AIR LEAK DURING FILL RIDE HEIGHT SYSTEM - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION COMPRESSOR PRESSURE LINE LEAK SENSOR SUPPLY 1 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND SENSOR SUPPLY 1 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION SENSOR SUPPLY 2 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND SENSOR SUPPLY 2 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD SENSOR SUPPLY 3 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND SENSOR SUPPLY 3 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C212C-11 C212C-12 C2202-00 C220C-00 C2212-00 U0001-00 U0100-00 U0101-00 U0102-00 U0121-00 U0141-00 U0168-00 U0401-00 U0402-00 U0403-00 U0415-00 U0427-00 U0429-00 U0431-00 U110A-00

SUSPENSION VALVE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND SUSPENSION VALVE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH / MISSING ACTIVE SUSPENSION MODULE INTERNAL ECU IN - PLANT MODE CAN C BUS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TRANSFER CASE CONTROL MODULE / AWD LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (WIN/WCM) IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM TCM IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM T-CASE IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (WIN/WCM) IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM SCM (SAS) IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS WITH SCM - CAN-C

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING C151E-11-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Left Front Ride Height Sensor is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S142) LF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (S142) LF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking LF Height Sensor Signal Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Left Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (S142) LF Height Sensor Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (S142) LF Height Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Left Front Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C151E-11-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C151E-15-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Left Front Ride Height Sensor is shorted to a voltage or an open circuit while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INSPECT THE LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (S140) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S141) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S142) LF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S142) LF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Check the Left Front Ride Height Sensor for disconnected, damaged, or loose harness connector. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (S140) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the ASCM C1 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Left Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of (S140) 5 Volt Supply circuit between ASCM C1 harness connector and the Left Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S140) 5 Volt Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (S141) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Sensor Return Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (S141) Sensor Return circuit between the ASCM C1 harness connector and the Left Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (S141) Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (S142) LF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking LF Height Sensor Signal Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (S142) LF Height Sensor Signal circuit between the ASCM C1 harness connector and the Left Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S142) LF Sensor Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. (S142) LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 7: Checking Left Front Ride Height Sensor Signal Circuit For Short To Voltage

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and (S142) LF Height Sensor Signal circuit in the Left Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (S142) Left Front Ride Height Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Left Front Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C151E-15-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C151E-36-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Left Front Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency is below 588 Hz for more than 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 2. LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Left Front Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C151E-36-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TO LOW reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C151E-37-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Left Front Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency is below 1000 Hz for more than 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Left Front Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C151E-37-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TO HIGH reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C151E-76-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-WRONG MOUNTING POSITION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Left Front Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency range roll over (from greater than 90% to less than 10% within 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR LINKAGE DISCONNECTED OR DAMAGED AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR LINKAGE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Inspect the Left Front Ride Height Sensor Linkage for disconnected, damaged, loose or improper mounting. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1522-11-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Front Ride Height Sensor is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S145) RF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (S145) RF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Checking LF Height Sensor Signal Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Right Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (S145) RF Height Sensor Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (S145) RF Height Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Right Front Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C1522-11-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C1522-15-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Front Ride Height Sensor is shorted to a voltage or an open circuit while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INSPECT THE RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (S143) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S144) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S145) RF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S145) RF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Check the Right Front Ride Height Sensor for disconnected, damaged, or loose harness connector. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (S143) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ASCM C1 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the Right Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of (S143) 5 Volt Supply circuit between ASCM C1 harness connector and the Right Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S143) Sensor 5 Volt Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (S144) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Sensor Return Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (S144) Sensor Return circuit between the ASCM harness connector and the Right Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S144) Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (S145) RF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking RF Height Sensor Signal Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (S145) RF Height Sensor Signal circuit between the ASCM harness connector and the Right Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S145) RF Height Sensor Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. (S145) RF HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Checking Left Front Ride Height Sensor Signal Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and (S145) Right Front Ride Height Sensor Signal circuit in the RF Height Sensor harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (S145) RF Height Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 7. RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Right Front Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C1522-15-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1522-36-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Front Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency is below 588 Hz for more than 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Right Front Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C1522-36-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TO LOW reset? Yes 

Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1522-37-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Front Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency is below 1000 Hz for more than 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Right Front Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C1522-37-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TO HIGH reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1522-76-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-WRONG MOUNTING POSITION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Right Front Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency range roll over (from greater than 90% to less than 10% within 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR LINKAGE DISCONNECTED OR DAMAGED AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR LINKAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Inspect the Right Front Ride Height Sensor Linkage for disconnected, damaged, loose or improper mounting. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1526-11-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S148) LR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (S148) LR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking LF Height Sensor Signal Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector Disconnect the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector Measure the resistance between ground and the (S148) LR Height Sensor Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (S148) LR Height Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C1526-11-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C1526-15-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor is shorted to a voltage or an open circuit while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INSPECT THE LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (S146) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S147) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S148) LR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S148) LR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Check the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor for disconnected, damaged, or loose harness connector. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (S146) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of (S146) 5 Volt Supply circuit between ASCM C2 harness connector and the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S146) 5 Volt Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (S147) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Checking Sensor Return Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (S147) Sensor Return circuit between the ASCM C2 harness

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

connector and the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S147) Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (S148) LR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Checking LR Height Sensor Signal Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (S148) LR Height Sensor Signal circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S148) LR Sensor Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. (S148) LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Checking Left Front Ride Height Sensor Signal Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and (S148) LR Height Sensor Signal circuit in the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (S148) Left Rear Ride Height Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 7. LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C151E-15-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1526-36-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency is below 588 Hz for more than 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C1526-36-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TO LOW reset? Yes 

Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1526-37-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency is below 1000 Hz for more than 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C1526-37-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TO HIGH reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1526-76-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-WRONG MOUNTING POSITION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency range roll over (from greater than 90% to less than 10% within 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR LINKAGE DISCONNECTED OR DAMAGED AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR LINKAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Inspect the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor Linkage for disconnected, damaged, loose or improper mounting. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C152A-11-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S151) RR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (S151) RR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Checking LF Height Sensor Signal Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector Disconnect the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector Measure the resistance between ground and the (S151) RR Height Sensor Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (S151) RR Height Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C152A-11-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C152A-15-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 24: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor is shorted to a voltage or an open circuit while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INSPECT THE RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (S149) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S150) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S151) RR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (S151) RR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Check the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor for disconnected, damaged, or loose harness connector. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (S149) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (S149) 5 Volt Supply circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S149) 5 Volt Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (S150) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Checking Sensor Return Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (S150) Sensor Return circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S150) Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (S151) RR HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Checking RR Height Sensor Signal Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (S151) RR Height Sensor Signal circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (S151) RR Sensor Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. (S151) RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 28: Checking Left Front Ride Height Sensor Signal Circuit For Short To Voltage

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and (S151) RR Height Sensor Signal circuit in the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (S151) Right Rear Ride Height Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C151E-15-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C152A-36-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency is below 588 Hz for more than 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 2. RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C152A-36-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TO LOW reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C152A-37-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TOO HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency is below 1000 Hz for more than 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Replace the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C152A-37-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-SIGNAL FREQUENCY TO HIGH reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C152A-76-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR-WRONG MOUNTING POSITION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor's signal frequency range roll over (from greater than 90% to less than 10% within 1 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR LINKAGE DISCONNECTED OR DAMAGED AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR LINKAGE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Inspect the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor Linkage for disconnected, damaged, loose or improper mounting. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C153A-11-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the left front ride air spring control valve is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y32) LF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y32) LF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Checking LF Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y32) LF Air Spring Valve Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y32) LF Air Spring Valve Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Measure the resistance between (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit and the (Y32) LF Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly. 

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C153A-12-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the left front ride air spring control valve is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y32) LF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y32) LF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Checking LF Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Y32) LF Air Spring Valve Control circuit. Is any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Y32) LF Air Spring Valve Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C153A-12-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C153A-13-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 33: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Left Front Air Spring Valve Control circuit is open while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRING HARNESS, TERMINAL, CONNECTOR DAMAGED OR DISCONNECTED (Y30) AIR SPRING VALVE SUPPLY OPEN (Y32) LF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 

NOTE:

Make sure the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector is connected correctly.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Were any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (Y30) AIR SPRING VALVE SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Checking Air Spring Valve Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector 3. Measure the resistance of the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y32) LF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Checking LF Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y32) LF Air Spring Valve Control circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y32) LF Air Spring Valve Control circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Connect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. While back probing, measure the resistance between the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit and the (Y32) LF Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly. 

Is the resistance above 30 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C153A-96-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module ASCM) detects the Left Front Air Spring Valve Control has an internal failure while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit and the (Y32) LF Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 300 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C153D-11-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 38: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the right front ride air spring control valve is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y31) RF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y31) RF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Checking RF Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y31) RF Air Spring Valve Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y31) RF Air Spring Valve Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 40: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit and the (Y31) RF Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C153D-12-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the right front ride air spring control valve is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y31) RF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y31) RF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 42: Checking RF Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Y31) RF Air Spring Valve Control circuit. Is any voltage present? Yes 

Repair the (Y31) RF Air Spring Valve Control circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C153D-12-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C153D-13-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 43: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Front Air Spring Valve Control circuit is open while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRING HARNESS, TERMINAL, CONNECTOR DAMAGED OR DISCONNECTED (Y30) AIR SPRING VALVE SUPPLY OPEN (Y31) RF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 

NOTE:

Make sure the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector is connected correctly.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Were any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (Y30) AIR SPRING VALVE SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Checking Air Spring Valve Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y31) RF AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Checking RF Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For Open Or High Resistance

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y31) RF Air Spring Valve Control circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y31) RF Air Spring Valve Control circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit and the (Y31) RF Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 30 Ohms? Yes 

Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C153D-96-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module ASCM) detects the Right Front Air Spring Valve Control has an internal failure while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit and the (Y31) RF Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 300 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1540-11-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the left rear ride air spring control valve is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y33) LR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y33) LR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Checking LR Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y33) LR Air Spring Valve Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y33) LR Air Spring Valve Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 51: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit and the (Y33) LR Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1540-12-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the left rear ride air spring control valve is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y33) LR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y33) LR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Checking LR Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Y33) LR Air Spring Valve Control circuit. Is any voltage present? Yes 

Repair the (Y33) LR Air Spring Valve Control circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C1540-12-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C1540-13-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 54: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Left Rear Air Spring Valve Control circuit is open while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRING HARNESS, TERMINAL, CONNECTOR DAMAGED OR DISCONNECTED (Y30) AIR SPRING VALVE SUPPLY OPEN (Y33) LR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 

NOTE:

Make sure the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector is connected correctly.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Were any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (Y30) AIR SPRING VALVE SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 55: Checking Air Spring Valve Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y33) LR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Checking LR Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y33) LR Air Spring Valve Control circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y33) LR Air Spring Valve Control circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit and the (Y33) LR Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 30 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1540-96-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module ASCM) detects the Left Rear Air Spring Valve Control has an internal failure while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit and the (Y33) LR Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 300 Ohms? Yes 

Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1543-11-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the right rear ride air spring control valve is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y34) RR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y34) RR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Checking RR Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y34) RR Air Spring Valve Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y34) RR Air Spring Valve Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 62: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit and the (Y34) RR Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1543-12-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the right rear ride air spring control valve is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y34) RR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y34) RR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Checking RR Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Y34) RR Air Spring Valve Control circuit. Is any voltage present? Yes 

Repair the (Y34) RR Air Spring Valve Control circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C1543-12-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. C1543-13-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 65: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the Right Rear Air Spring Valve Control circuit is open while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRING HARNESS, TERMINAL, CONNECTOR DAMAGED OR DISCONNECTED (Y30) AIR SPRING VALVE SUPPLY OPEN (Y34) RR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 

NOTE:

Make sure the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector is connected correctly.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (Y30) AIR SPRING VALVE SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Checking Air Spring Valve Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y34) RR AIR SPRING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Checking RR Air Spring Valve Control Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y34) RR Air Spring Valve Control circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y34) RR Air Spring Valve Control circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 68: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Connect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit and the (Y34) RR Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 30 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1543-96-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module ASCM) detects the Right Rear Air Spring Valve Control has an internal failure while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 70: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (Y30) 12V Valve Power Supply circuit and the (Y34) RR Air Spring Valve Control circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 300 Ohms? Yes 

Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1556-12-RIDE HEIGHT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the pressure sensor signal is shorted to battery while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y18) PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (Y13) PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (Y18) PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Checking Pressure Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Y18) Pressure Sensor Signal circuit. Is any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the (Y18) Pressure Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. (Y13) PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 73: Checking Pressure Sensor Return Circuit For Open Or High Resistance

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit and the (Y10) 5 Volt Supply circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 60k Ohms? Yes 

Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1556-14-RIDE HEIGHT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the pressure sensor signal is shorted to ground or an circuit while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRING HARNESS, TERMINAL, CONNECTOR DAMAGED OR DISCONNECTED (Y10) PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Y18) PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Y18) PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 

NOTE:

Make sure the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector is connected correctly.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Were any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (Y10) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 76: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (Y10) 5 Volt Supply between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y10) 5 Volt Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y18) PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Checking Pressure Sensor Signal Circuit For Open Or High Resistance

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y18) Pressure Sensor Signal circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y18) Pressure Sensor Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (Y18) PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 78: Checking Pressure Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y18) Pressure Sensor Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (Y18) Pressure Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 6. 6. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 

Fig. 79: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Pressure Sensor Signal Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Y18) Pressure Sensor Signal circuit and the (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 60k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 5 VOLT SUPPLY 

Fig. 80: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between the (Y10) 5 Volt Supply circuit and the (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 60k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1556-96-RIDE HEIGHT AIR PRESSURE SENSOR - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 81: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Pressure Sensor has an internal failure while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 82: Checking Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (Y10) 5 Volt Supply circuit and the (Y13) Pressure Sensor Return circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 30 Ohms? Yes 

Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C155E-11-RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the valve control circuit is shorted to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y35) AMBIENT VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If multiple DTCs are present, inspect the wiring and connector at the Air Suspension Compressor.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (Y35) AMBIENT VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Checking Ambient Valve Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y35) Ambient Valve Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Y35) Ambient Valve Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (Y35) AMBIENT VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 85: Checking Ambient Valve Control Circuit For Open Or High Resistance

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y35) Ambient Valve Control circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y35) Ambient Valve Control circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C155E-12-RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the valve control circuit is shorted to battery while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y35) AMBIENT VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If multiple DTCs are present, inspect the wiring and harness connector at the Air Suspension Compressor.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y35) AMBIENT VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Checking Ambient Valve Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Y35) Ambient Valve Control circuit. Is any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Y35) Ambient Valve Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C155E-13-RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 88: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the valve control circuit is open while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y35) AMBIENT VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If multiple DTCs are present, inspect the wiring and harness connector at the Air Suspension Compressor.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y35) AMBIENT VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 89: Checking Ambient Valve Control Circuit For Open Or High Resistance

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (Y35) Ambient Valve Control circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y35) Ambient Valve Control circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C155E-92-RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Pressure Vent Valve energized time exceeding three minutes within the last ten minutes. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on, engine running. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Ignition on, engine not running. Wait ten minutes. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status still Active? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes 

Repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

No

C155E-96-RIDE HEIGHT PRESSURE VENT CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Ride Height Pressure Vent Control Valve is internally shorted. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on, engine running. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status still Active? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1562-13-RIDE HEIGHT AIR PUMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects an open relay or circuit while the ignition is in the Run position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION RELAY (Y38) COMPRESSOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Y39) COMPRESSOR RELAY RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Y39) COMPRESSOR RELAY RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If multiple DTCs are present, inspect the wiring and harness connector at the Air Suspension Compressor.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. AIR SUSPENSION RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Install a known good relay 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 

Is the status still Active for this DTC? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Install a new Air Suspension Relay.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. (Y38) COMPRESSOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 91: Checking Compressor Relay Signal Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Remove the Air Suspension Relay. 3. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Measure the resistance of the (Y38) Compressor Relay Signal circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Relay. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y38) Compressor Relay Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y39) AIR COMPRESSOR RELAY RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Checking Air Compressor Relay Return Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y39) Compressor Relay Return circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Relay. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y39) Compressor Relay Return circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. (Y39) AIR COMPRESSOR RELAY RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 93: Checking Air Compressor Relay Return Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y39) Air Compressor Relay Return circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (Y39) Compressor Relay Return circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1562-92-RIDE HEIGHT AIR PUMP CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Air Compressor Relay has been energized for a time exceeding five minutes within the last ten minutes. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION RELAY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on, engine running. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Install a known good relay. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 

Is the status still Active for this DTC? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Install a new Air Suspension Relay.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. 2. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

Were any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair as necessary. Perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1562-98-RIDE HEIGHT AIR PUMP CONTROL - COMPONENT OR SYSTEM OVER TEMPERATURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Air Compressor has reached a temperature of 356° F (180° C). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. Turn the ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status still Active? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C1566-92-LEFT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Air Spring Valve as been used for a time exceeding three minutes within the last ten minutes. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on, engine not running. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. Ignition on, engine not running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Wait ten minutes. 5. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 6. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status still Active? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1567-92-RIGHT REAR RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Air Spring Valve as been used for a time exceeding three minutes within the last ten minutes. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on, engine not running. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Ignition on, engine not running. Wait ten minutes. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status still Active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1568-92-LEFT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Air Spring Valve as been used for a time exceeding three minutes within the last ten minutes. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on, engine not running. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Ignition on, engine not running. Wait ten minutes. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status still Active? Yes



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1569-92-RIGHT FRONT RIDE HEIGHT LEVEL PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Air Spring Valve as been used for a time exceeding three minutes within the last ten minutes. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition on, engine not running. Wait ten minutes. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Ignition on, engine not running. Wait ten minutes. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status still Active? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15C0-98-AIR SUSPENSION - COMPONENT OR SYSTEM OVER TEMPERATURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) is detecting an over temperature of a component or system. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. Turn the ignition on, engine not running. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 2. 2. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C156E-00-RIDE HEIGHT SYSTEM CALIBRATION PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects that all four ride height sensors have not been calibrated. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION RIDE HEIGHT SENSORS NOT CALIBRATED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION RIDE HEIGHT SENSORS NOT CALIBRATED 1. Calibrate the ride height sensors in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , INSTALLATION . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C159E-11-AIR PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 94: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the compressor temperature sensor has a short to ground while ignition is in the Run position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y45) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND (Y46) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE RETURN SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (Y45) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 95: Checking Compressor Temperature Signal For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y45) Compressor Temperature Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y45) Compressor Temperature Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. (Y46) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE RETURN SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 96: Checking Compressor Temperature Return For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y46) Compressor Temperature Return circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y46) Compressor Temperature Return circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C159E-15-AIR PUMP TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

Fig. 97: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the compressor temperature sensor has a short to battery or an open while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y45) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE SIGNAL SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Y46) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE RETURN SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Y45) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE SIGNAL OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Y46) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE RETURN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 7. 2. (Y45) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE SIGNAL SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 98: Checking Compressor Temperature Signal For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (Y45) Compressor Temperature Signal circuit. Is any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Y45) Compressor Temperature Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (Y46) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE RETURN SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 99: Checking Compressor Temperature Return For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (Y46) Compressor Temperature Return circuit. Is any voltage present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (Y46) Compressor Temperature Return circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y45) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE SIGNAL OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 100: Checking Compressor Temperature Signal For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Y45) Compressor Temperature Signal circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y45) Compressor Temperature Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (Y46) COMPRESSOR TEMPERATURE RETURN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 101: Checking Compressor Temperature Return For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y46) Compressor Temperature Return circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Y46) Compressor Temperature Return circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 7. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C159F-11-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 102: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the reverse valve 1 control has a short to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y48) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 1 SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y48) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 1 SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 103: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 1 For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y48) 12 Volt reverse Valve Control 1 circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (Y48) 12 Volt reverse Valve Control 1 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 104: Checking Air Suspension Compressor Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between (Y48) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 1 circuit and the (Y47) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Supply circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



No

Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C159F-12-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 105: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the reverse valve 1 control is shorted to voltage while ignition is in the Run position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y48) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 1 SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y48) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 1 SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 106: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 1 For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (Y48) 12 Volt reverse Valve Control 1 circuit. Is any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (Y48) 12 Volt reverse Valve Control 1 circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C159F-12-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C159F-13-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 107: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the reverse valve 1 control has an open or high resistance while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRING HARNESS, TERMINAL, CONNECTOR DAMAGED OR DISCONNECTED (Y47) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE SUPPLY OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Y48) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 1 OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 

NOTE:

Make sure the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector is connected correctly.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. (Y47) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE SUPPLY OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 108: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Supply For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector 3. Measure the resistance of the (Y47) 12 Volt reverse Supply circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y47) 12 Volt Reverse Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y48) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 1 OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 109: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 1 For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y48) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 1 circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y48) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 1 circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 110: Checking Air Suspension Compressor Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Y47) 12 Volt reverse Supply circuit and the (Y48) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 1 circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 10.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C159F-92-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the reversing valve 1 has been activated longer than three minutes within the last ten minutes.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on, engine running. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Ignition on, engine not running. Wait ten minutes. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status still Active? Yes 



No

Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C159F-96-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 1 CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 111: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Reversing Valve has an internal failure while ignition is in the Run position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 112: Checking Air Suspension Compressor Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Y47) 12 Volt reverse Supply circuit and the (Y48) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 1 circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 30.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15A0-11-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 113: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the reverse valve 2 control has a short to ground while ignition is in the Run position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y49) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 2 SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y49) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 2 SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 114: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 2 For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y49) 12 Volt reverse Valve Control 2 circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y49) 12 Volt reverse Valve Control 2 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 115: Checking Air Suspension Compressor Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between (Y49) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 2 circuit and the (Y47) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Supply circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15A0-12-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 116: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the reverse valve 2 control is shorted to voltage while ignition is in the Run position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y49) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 2 SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (Y49) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 2 SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 117: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 2 For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (Y49) 12 Volt reverse Valve Control 2 circuit. Is any voltage present? Yes 

Repair the (Y49) 12 Volt reverse Valve Control 2 circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Did DTC C15A0-12-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY reset? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. C15A0-13-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 118: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the reverse valve 2 control has an open or high resistance while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRING HARNESS, TERMINAL, CONNECTOR DAMAGED OR DISCONNECTED (Y47) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE SUPPLY OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Y49) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 2 OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 

NOTE:

Make sure the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector is connected correctly.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. (Y47) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE SUPPLY OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 119: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Supply For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector 3. Measure the resistance of the (Y47) 12 Volt reverse Supply circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y47) 12 Volt reverse Supply circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y49) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE CONTROL 2 OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 120: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 2 For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Y49) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 2 circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y49) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 2 circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 121: Checking Air Suspension Compressor Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Connect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Y47) 12 Volt reverse Supply circuit and the (Y49) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 2 circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 10.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15A0-92-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the reversing valve 2 has been activated longer than three minutes. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on, engine running. 2. Wait ten minutes. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Ignition on, engine not running. Wait ten minutes. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status still Active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15A0-96-AIR SUSPENSION REVERSE VALVE 2 CONTROL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 122: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the Reversing Valve has an internal failure while ignition is in the Run position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 123: Checking Air Suspension Compressor Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Y47) 12 Volt reverse Supply circuit and the (Y49) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Control 2 circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance above 30.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15A1-00-UNABLE TO OBTAIN DESIRED RIDE HEIGHT For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects that the desired ride height has not been achieved after 20 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FUSE LOW AIR MASS AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) 1. The ASCM is reporting internal errors. NOTE:

Before continuing, check the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. 3. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C15A2-00-RIDE HEIGHT SYSTEM UNLEVEL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the difference between the left and right sensors (same axle) are very uneven even after two adjustments were done with the vehicle speed greater than 8 Km/h (5 mph). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FUSE LOW AIR MASS AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) 1. The ASCM is reporting internal errors. NOTE:

Before continuing, check the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. 3. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C15A3-00-RIDE HEIGHT SYSTEM MANUALLY SWITCH OFF For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects that the system has been diagnostically shut off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DISABLED AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) 1. With the scan tool, check too see if the ASCM has been disabled. 

Was the ACSM system disabled? Yes  

With the scan tool, enable the ACSM system. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes 

Repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

No

C15A7-2A-AIR SUSPENSION UP BUTTON - STUCK For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the UP button switch information by receiving messages from the CAN communications bus. Specifically the UP button is wired to the cluster, the cluster sends this information via CAN I to the TIPM, and TIPM sends it onto the ASCM via CAN C. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

Air suspension UP selection button (located next to and is part of the Terrain switch) has been pressed continuously for more than 17 seconds while the ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes UP AIR SUSPENSION SWITCH STUCK IN THE PRESSED POSITION TERRAIN SWITCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 2. UP AIR SUSPENSION SWITCH IN THE PRESSED POSITION 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the UP Air Suspension switch for foreign material which could keep it from returning back to the not pushed state. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Using the scan tool, monitor the UP Air Suspension Switch status in the ASCM while pressing and releasing the switch. 

Does the UP Air Suspension Switch function correctly? Yes 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

No Go To 3. 3. TERRAIN SWITCH 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Terrain Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, TERRAIN SELECT , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 4.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Replace the Terrain Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, TERRAIN SELECT , REMOVAL .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to REMOVAL . 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15A8-2A-AIR SUSPENSION DOWN BUTTON - STUCK

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the DOWN button switch information by receiving messages from the CAN communications bus. Specifically the DOWN button is wired to the cluster, the cluster sends this information via CAN I to the TIPM, and TIPM sends it onto the ASCM via CAN C. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

Air suspension UP selection button (located next to and is part of the Terrain switch) has been pressed continuously for more than 17 seconds while the ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DOWN AIR SUSPENSION SWITCH STUCK IN THE PRESSED POSITION TERRAIN SWITCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. DOWN AIR SUSPENSION SWITCH IN THE PRESSED POSITION 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Inspect the DOWN Air Suspension switch for foreign material which could keep it from returning back to the not pushed state. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Using the scan tool, monitor the DOWN Air Suspension Switch status in the ASCM while pressing and releasing the switch. Does the DOWN Air Suspension Switch function correctly? Yes 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

No Go To 3. 3. TERRAIN SWITCH 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Terrain Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, TERRAIN SELECT , REMOVAL . 

Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.  Replace the Terrain Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, TERRAIN SELECT , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to REMOVAL . 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15A9-00-HEIGHT SENSOR MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects that the desired ride height has not been achieved after 20 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If any other DTCs are present, repair them first before continuing with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. RIDE HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Visually inspect the all the ride height sensors for physical or electrical damage. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Replace the Ride Height Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, HEIGHT , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Does the DTC remain active? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15AA-00-AIR LEAK DURING VENT For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects that it cannot vent any air from within the system to the outside atmosphere. In order to vent air it must be go through the reversing valves, the compressor, ambience

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

valve, and finally through the exhaust hose. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

Air suspension cannot vent the air to atmosphere when attempting to do so. Pneumatic fault in components used when venting. This includes the air compressor, reverse valve units, ambience valve, exhaust hose. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION EXHAUST HOSE AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. AIR SUSPENSION EXHAUST HOSE 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Air Suspension Exhaust Hose. 

NOTE:

Make sure all doors and liftgate are closed.

3. Start the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace or Repair the Air Suspension Exhaust hose in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HOSE ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

NOTE:

If any DTCs related to the Ambience Valve are present, repair them first before continuing with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. NOTE:

Make sure all doors and liftgate are closed.

3. Start the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 4. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

NOTE:

If any DTCs related to the Reversing Valves are present, repair them first before continuing with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure all doors and liftgate are closed.

3. Start the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15AB-00-AIR LEAK DURING FILL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects that it cannot increase reservoir pressure (fill) when the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

system is operating. In order to fill the reservoir air must be go through the intake air hose, ambience valve, reversing valves, the compressor, and finally through the air line leading to the reservoir itself. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

Air suspension cannot fill air into the reservoir when attempting to do so. Pneumatic fault in components used when filling. This includes the air compressor, reverse valve units, ambience valve, intake hose, leaking air line to the reservoir. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION INTAKE HOSE AIR SUSPENSION RESERVOIR AIR LINES AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. AIR SUSPENSION INTAKE HOSE 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Air Suspension Intake Hose. 

NOTE:

Make sure all doors and liftgate are closed.

3. Start the vehicle.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace or Repair the Air Suspension Intake hose in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HOSE ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. AIR SUSPENSION RESERVOIR AIR LINES 1. Raise the vehicle to the highest ride height possible. 2. With the scan tool, under "Miscellaneous Functions" run the "System Pressure Measurement" routine. 3. Record the pressure in the reservoir. 4. Wait 30 minutes and rerun the "System Pressure Measurement" routine. 

Did the reservoir's pressure decrease by more than 1 bar (14.5 psi)? Yes 



Repair or Replace the Air Suspension Line in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to AIR LINE , STANDARD PROCEDURE , or refer to AIR LINE , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. AIR SUSPENSION SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 

NOTE:

If any DTCs related to the Ambience Valve are present, repair them first before continuing with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to VALVE BLOCK, COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. NOTE:

Make sure all doors and liftgate are closed.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Start the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 5. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

NOTE:

If any DTCs related to the Reversing Valves are present, repair them first before continuing with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. NOTE:

Make sure all doors and liftgate are closed.

3. Start the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15AD-92-RIDE HEIGHT SYSTEM - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 124: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) checks for ride height sensor movement during the middle of a level change. If it does not see this movement then this DTC is set.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FUSE J1 (40A) (Y40) COMPRESSOR RELAY OUTPUT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (A113) FUSED B(+) OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Z909) GROUND OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR RELAY AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. AIR SUSPENSION RELAY FUSE J1 (40A) 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Check the Air Suspension Relay Fuse J1 (40A) in the TIPM. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR RELAY 1. Install the Air Suspension Relay Fuse J1 (40A) in the TIPM. 2. Remove the Air Suspension Relay and install a known good relay. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status still Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. (A113) FUSED B(+) OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 125: Checking Fused B(+) For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Remove the Air Suspension Relay. Turn the ignition on. Using a 12 volt test light connected to ground, check the (A113) Fused B+ circuit. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (A113) Fused B+ circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. (Z909) GROUND OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 126: Checking Ground For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z909) Ground circuit. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 6.



Repair the (Z909) Ground circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6. (Y40) COMPRESSOR RELAY OUTPUT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE

Fig. 127: Checking Compressor Relay Output For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Install the Air Suspension Relay in the PDC. 2. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (Y40) Compressor Relay Output circuit between the ASCM C2 harness connector and the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y40) Compressor Relay Output circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 128: Checking Air Suspension Compressor Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. 2. While back probing, measure the resistance between the (Y40) Fused (B+) circuit and the (Z909) Ground circuit at the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly. Is the resistance above 5 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY, AIR SUSPENSION , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C15AE-00-COMPRESSOR PRESSURE LINE LEAK For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The air compressor has an air line which connects the reversing valve to the valve block. The ASCM monitors the pressure this air line when it is pressured. After a time the pressure is checked again to see if there is any pressure loss. Any appreciable pressure loss indicates that this air line has a leak. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) monitors the pressure in the air suspension compressor line when it is pressurized. After time the pressure is checked again to see if there is any pressure loss. Any appreciable pressure loss indicates that this air line has a leak.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR COMPRESSOR AIR LINE AIR COMPRESSOR AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure all doors and liftgate are closed.

1. Start the vehicle. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR AIR LINE 1. Visually inspect the air compressor for damaged airline fitting or the compressor air line for leaks. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2110-11-SENSOR SUPPLY 1 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 129: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the 5 Volt Sensor Supply 1 circuit has a short to ground while ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S143) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (S146) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (S143) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 130: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Right Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (S143) 5 Volt Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (S143) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. (S146) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 131: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (S146) 5 Volt Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (S146) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2110-12-SENSOR SUPPLY 1 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 132: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the 5 Volt Sensor Supply 1 circuit has a short to battery while the ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S143) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (S146) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (S143) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 133: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the Ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Right Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage between (S143) 5 Volt Supply circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.2 volts? Yes 

Repair the (S143) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (S146) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 134: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Disconnect the Left Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. 4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. Measure the voltage between (S146) 5 Volt Supply circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.2 volts? Yes  

Repair the (S146) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C211B-92-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 135: TIPM & ASCM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) senses ignition run start from two inputs, one is from the CAN messaging and the other is from the hardwired input. When there is a conflict in ignition status this fault sets. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) NOTE:

Repair all other DTCs first before continuing with this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 2. (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 136: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run/Start) Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the voltage between ground and (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run/Start) harness connector. Is the voltage above 9 volts? Yes 

Repair the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run/Start) circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (F943) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 137: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run/Start) Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run/Start) circuit in the ASCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Repair the (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run/Start) circuit for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2125-11-SENSOR SUPPLY 2 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 138: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the 5 Volt Sensor Supply 2 circuit has a short to ground while the ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S149) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (S150) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (S149) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 139: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (S149) 5 Volt Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (S149) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (S150) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 140: Checking Sensor Return Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (S150) Sensor Return circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (S150) Sensor Return circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2125-12-SENSOR SUPPLY 2 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 141: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the 5 Volt Sensor Supply 1 has a short to battery while the ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S149) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. (S149) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 142: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Right Rear Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage between the (S149) 5 Volt Supply circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.2 volts? Yes 

Repair the (S149) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2129-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 143: TIPM & ASCM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the battery voltage has dropped below 10 Volts for more than 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT (A206) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Are there any Charging System or related voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate Charging System DTC diagnostic procedures before continuing with this test. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. 

Is the DTC status Active at this time?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. (A206) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 144: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. 2. Ignition on, engine not running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. With a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A206) Fused B+ circuit in the ASCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (A206) Fused B(+) circuit for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 145: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. With a 12-volt test light connected to B+, check the (Z916) Ground circuit in the ASCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Repair the (Z916) Ground circuit for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2129-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the battery voltage has increased above 16 Volts for more than 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Are there any Charging System or related voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the DTCM. 

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes 

Repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

No

C212A-16-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 146: TIPM & ASCM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the battery voltage has dropped below 10 Volts for more than 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes POWER CIRCUITS OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) NOTE:

Repair all other DTCs first before continuing with this test.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. POWER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 147: Checking Power Circuits For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. With a test light connected to ground check (A206) Fused B(+) circuit and (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the Power circuits for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 148: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With a 12-volt test light connected to B+, check the (Z916) Ground circuit in the ASCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Repair the (Z916) Ground circuit for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C212A-17-SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 149: TIPM & ASCM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects the system voltage has increased above 16 Volts for more than 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes POWER CIRCUITS OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) NOTE:

Repair all other DTCs first before continuing with this test.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. POWER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 150: Checking Power Circuits For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. With a test light connected to ground check (A206) Fused B(+) circuit and (F943) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit at the ASCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the Power circuits for an open or high resistance.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 151: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With a 12-volt test light connected to B+, check the (Z916) Ground circuit in the ASCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Repair the (Z916) Ground circuit for an open circuit or high resistance.  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C212B-11-SENSOR SUPPLY 3 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 152: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the 5 Volt Sensor Supply 3 circuit has a short to ground while the ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S140) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (S141) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. (S140) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 153: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Left Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Disconnect the ASCM C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (S140) 5 Volt Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (S140) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. (S141) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 154: Checking Sensor Return Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (S141) Sensor Return circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (S141) Sensor Return circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C212B-12-SENSOR SUPPLY 3 VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 155: Air Suspension Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects when the 5 Volt Sensor Supply 1 circuit has a short to battery while the ignition is in the Run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (S140) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. (S140) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 156: Checking 5 Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Left Front Ride Height Sensor harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage between the (S140) 5 Volt Supply circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.2 volts? Yes 

Repair the (S140) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C212C-11-SUSPENSION VALVE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 157: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects that too much current is being used when the onboard 12 volt power supply is turned on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y30) 12 VOLT VALVE POWER SUPPLY SHORTED TO GROUND (Y38) COMPRESSOR RELAY SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND (Y47) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE SUPPLY SHORTED TO GROUND AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. (Y30) 12 VOLT VALVE POWER SUPPLY SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 158: Checking 12 Volt Valve Power Supply For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y30) 12 Volt Valve Power Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y30) 12 Volt Valve Power Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. (Y38) COMPRESSOR RELAY SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 159: Checking Compressor Relay Signal For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the Air Suspension Relay. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y38) Compressor Relay Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Y38) Compressor Relay Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. (Y47) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE SUPPLY SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 160: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Supply For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Y47) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (Y47) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C212C-12-SUSPENSION VALVE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 161: Ride Height Air Pump Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects battery voltage on the on-board 12 volt power supply before it has been turned on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Y30) 12 VOLT VALVE POWER SUPPLY SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Y38) COMPRESSOR RELAY SIGNAL SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Y39) COMPRESSOR RELAY RETURN SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Y47) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE SUPPLY SHORTED TO VOLTAGE AIR SUSPENSION COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the ASCM. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. (Y30) 12 VOLT VALVE POWER SUPPLY SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 162: Checking 12 Volt Valve Power Supply For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the ASCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Air Suspension Solenoid Assembly harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (Y30) 12 Volt Valve Power Supply. Is any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the (Y30) 12 Volt Valve Power Supply circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. (Y38) COMPRESSOR RELAY SIGNAL SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 163: Checking Compressor Relay Signal For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Remove the Air Suspension Relay. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (Y38) Compressor Relay Signal. Is any voltage present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (Y30) 12 Volt Valve Power Supply circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. (Y39) COMPRESSOR RELAY RETURN SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 164: Checking Compressor Relay Return For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (Y39) Compressor Relay Return.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (Y30) 12 Volt Valve Power Supply circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. (Y47) 12 VOLT REVERSE VALVE SUPPLY SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 165: Checking 12 Volt Reverse Valve Supply For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Air Suspension Compressor Assembly harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (Y47) 12 Volt Reverse Valve Supply. Is any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (Y30) 12 Volt Valve Power Supply circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C2202-00-ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH / MISSING For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) continuously monitors the vehicle's VIN (from the CAN bus) and compares it to the VIN which is internally stored within the ASCM when the vehicle was first assembled. When they do not match this fault sets. The Service Air Suspension Message will be displayed on the cluster when this fault is first active. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

When the vehicle's VIN (being transmitted on the CAN bus) does not match the current VIN stored within the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes COMMUNICATIONS DTC(S) PRESENT POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 3. Turn ignition off to the lock position. 4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. Wait ten seconds. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. WRONG VIN PROGRAMMED IN PCM 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read the VIN in the PCM. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Compare VIN in the PCM to the vehicle VIN. Is the correct VIN programmed in the PCM? Yes 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWERTRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the PCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST - NGC or PCM VERIFICATION TEST - 3.0L DIESEL . 3. COMMUNICATION DTCS PRESENT 1. Turn ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in all other modules. If any communications DTCs are present, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . 3. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ABS VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

C220C-00-ACTIVE SUSPENSION MODULE INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) continuously monitors internal hardware circuitry for defects. The Service Air Suspension Message will be displayed on the cluster when this fault is first active. WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Detection of RAM, ROM, EEPROM, Watchdog, no current calibration, or high side switch defect recognized. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) INTERNAL CONDITION 1. The ASCM is reporting internal errors. NOTE:

Before continuing, check the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. 3. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C2212-00-ECU IN - PLANT MODE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) has a special diagnostic mode called "in-plant mode". Whenever any ASCM diagnostic routine is run the ECU will stop normal operation and enter this mode. All leveling functions will be disabled while in this mode. This is so that the technician can work on the vehicle knowing

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

that the air suspension will not automatically readjust itself. The Service Air Suspension Message will be displayed on the cluster when this fault is first active WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Run any of the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) diagnostic routines. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ASSEMBLY LINE INITIALIZATION COMPLETE ROUTINE AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. HEIGHT SENSOR CHECK ROUTINE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, under Miscellaneous Functions run the "Height Sensor Check" routine. 3. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 

Does the DTC remain active? Yes 

Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U0001-00-CAN C BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects an open, short to ground or a short to voltage on the CAN C Bus circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Perform the U0001-CAN C Bus diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No

U0100-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) ANY MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0100-Lost Communication with PCM diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No

U0101-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED: SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) for approximately 500ms. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active at this time?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0101-Lost Communication with TCM diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0102-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TRANSFER CASE CONTROL MODULE / AWD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC NOTE:

If present, diagnose and repair DTC U0002-88-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE- BUS OFF before diagnosing this DTC.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read and record the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Cycle the ignition from off to on. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC Active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0102-Lost Communication with Transfer Case Control Module / AWD diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0121-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0121-00-Lost Communication with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Control Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D65) CAN C BUS(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D64) CAN C BUS(-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No

U0168-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (WIN/WCM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Vehicle Security Control Module (WIN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0168-Lost Communication with Vehicle Security Control Module (WIN) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0401-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN message received at least once, and no U0002-88-CAN C Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module detects an incorrect CAN message from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE CAN BUS DTCS ENGINE DTCS AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR DTC U0401-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U0401-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. CHECK IF TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CAN BUS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read the TIPM DTCs. 

Are there any TIPM CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. 

Are there any Engine DTCs present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Using the schematics as a guide, check the ASCM pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

U0402-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM TCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN message received at least once, and no U0002-88-CAN C Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects an incorrect CAN message from the Transmission

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Control Module (TCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) CAN BUS DTCS TRANSMISSION DTCS AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR DTC U0402-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM TCM NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U0402-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM TCM? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. CHECK IF TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CAN BUS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read the TIPM DTCs. 

Are there any TIPM CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK IF TRANSMISSION DTCS ARE PRESENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Are there any Transmission DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No Using the schematics as a guide, check the ASCM pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

U0403-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM T-CASE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN message received at least once, and no U0002-88-CAN C Bus Off Performance DTC present.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) detects an incorrect CAN message from the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) CAN BUS DTCS DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) DTCS AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR DTC U0403-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM T-CASE NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U0403-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM T-CASE? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. CHECK IF TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CAN BUS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read the TIPM DTCs. 

Are there any TIPM CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

No

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. CHECK IF TRANSFER CASE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read DTCM DTCs. 

Are there any DTCM DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No Using the schematics as a guide, check the ASCM pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

U0415-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on for four seconds, no CAN BUS circuit error condition present, no lost communication with ABS condition present, and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) is receiving implausible data for vehicle speed, wheel speeds, brake switch status, longitudinal acceleration, yaw rate, or lateral acceleration from the ABS Module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE DTCS PRESENT AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ABS MODULE DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the ABS Module. Are there any DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



U0427-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (WIN/WCM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on for four seconds, no CAN BUS circuit error condition present, no lost communication with Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) condition present, and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) is receiving implausible data for sensor status from the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DTCS PRESENT AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the WIN. Are there any DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



U0429-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM SCM (SAS) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on for four seconds, no CAN BUS circuit error condition present, no lost communication with Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) condition present, and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) is receiving implausible data for sensor status from the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SAS) DTCS PRESENT AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SAS) DTCS PRESENT 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in the SAS. Are there any DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



U0431-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on for four seconds, no CAN BUS circuit error condition present, no lost communication with TIPM condition present, and no system undervoltage or overvoltage condition present. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) is receiving no message or implausible data for ambient temperature or the transfer case selector switch. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS OPEN OR SHORTED CONDITION TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DTCS PRESENT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CONFIGURED INCORRECTLY AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Diagnose all CAN C and CAN Interior bus communication DTCs before continuing.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.

Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. CHECK FOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the TIPM. 

Are there any TIPM DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the selector switch to each position several times. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes 

Repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

No

U110A-00-LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS WITH SCM - CAN-C For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) communicates with other controllers over the CAN C bus. The ASCM continuously monitors the bus activity and receives the messages it needs. If the ASCM does not receive messages from the SAS, then this fault will set. The Service Air Suspension Message will be displayed on the cluster when this fault is first active. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on for more than 5 seconds and battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) no longer detects any messaging from the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) for more than 0.5 of a second after monitoring conditions have been fulfilled. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SAS) AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

If present, diagnose and repair DTC U0001-00-CAN C BUS before diagnosing this DTC.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read and record ASCM DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, erase ASCM DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Cycle the ignition switch. 5. With the scan tool, read ASCM DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Perform the Stored Lost Communication diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all CAN C Bus modules. 

NOTE:

Check for CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs related to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the DTCs. Go To the appropriate Electrical Diagnostic Information.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THAT THE SAS IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. With the scan tool, select ECU View. 2. Verify that the SAS is active on the bus. 

Is the SCM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Perform the Stored Lost Communication diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCs 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Front Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. With the scan tool, select Network View and select Advanced. Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the SAS? Yes 

Replace the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL .



Replace the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



STANDARD PROCEDURE ASCM VERIFICATION TEST DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ASCM VERIFICATION TEST 1. Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors. 2. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 3. Make sure that all accessories are turned off and that the battery is fully charged. 4. Test drive the vehicle and verify proper operation. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the ASCM. Are there any DTCs present in the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM)? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Repair is complete.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC B143B B143C B143E B143F B2205 U0010 U0141 U0155 U0184

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B143B-MICROPHONE 1 CIRCUIT LOW

Description MICROPHONE 1 CIRCUIT LOW MICROPHONE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH MICROPHONE 2 CIRCUIT LOW MICROPHONE 2 CIRCUIT HIGH ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH CAN INTERIOR BUS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Hands Free Module (HFM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Hands Free Module (HFM) controls and monitors the (X712) microphone 1 input circuit (+) for a concern. The microphone is located in the rearview mirror.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a detailed description of the Hands Free System. Refer to DESCRIPTION . For additional information regarding the operation of the Hands Free System. Refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Hands Free Module (HFM) detects a short to ground or an open on the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X712) MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) CIRCUIT OPEN (X712) MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT OPEN (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HANDS FREE MODULE (HFM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Verify the connection of the Rearview Mirror harness connector.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B143B-MICROPHONE 1 CIRCUIT LOW as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Microphone Feed Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Inside Rearview Mirror harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for an open or a short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking The Inside Rearview Mirror Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Connect a jumper wire between the (X793) Microphone Feed and the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuits. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. NOTE:

DTC B143C-MICROPHONE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH should display as active as a result of this test.

Does the scan tool display B143B-MICROPHONE 1 CIRCUIT LOW as active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Inside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, REARVIEW , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (X712) MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Checking Microphone 1 In (+) Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Hands Free Module harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit between the Inside Rearview Mirror and Hands Free Module harness connectors. Is the resistance above 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (X712) MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Microphone 1 In (+) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit for short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Hands Free Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HANDS FREE (HFM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B143C-MICROPHONE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Hands Free Module (HFM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Hands Free Module (HFM) controls and monitors the (X712) microphone 1 input circuit (+) for a concern. The microphone is located in the rearview mirror.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a detailed description of the Hands Free System. Refer to DESCRIPTION . For additional information regarding the operation of the Hands Free System. Refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Hands Free Module (HFM) detects a short to voltage on the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X712) MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HANDS FREE MODULE (HFM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Verify the connection of the Rearview Mirror harness connector.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B143C-MICROPHONE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking The Inside Rearview Mirror Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Rearview Mirror harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B143C-MICROPHONE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, REARVIEW , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (X712) MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Checking Microphone 1 In (+) Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Hands Free Module harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X712) Microphone circuit. Is the voltage above 1.0 volt? Yes  

Repair the (X712) Microphone circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Hands Free Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HANDS FREE (HFM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B143E-MICROPHONE 2 CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Hands Free Module (HFM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Hands Free Module (HFM) controls and monitors the (X722) microphone 2 input circuit (+) for a concern. The microphone is located in the rearview mirror.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a detailed description of the Hands Free System. Refer to DESCRIPTION . For additional information regarding the operation of the Hands Free System. Refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Hands Free Module (HFM) detects a short to ground or an open on the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X722) MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) CIRCUIT OPEN (X722) MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT OPEN (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HANDS FREE MODULE (HFM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Verify the connection of the Rearview Mirror harness connector.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B143E-MICROPHONE 2 CIRCUIT LOW as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking Microphone Feed Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Inside Rearview Mirror harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for an open or a short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Checking The Inside Rearview Mirror Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Connect a jumper wire between the (X793) Microphone Feed and the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuits. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. NOTE:

DTC B143F-MICROPHONE 2 CIRCUIT HIGH should display as active as a result of this test.

Does the scan tool display B143E-MICROPHONE 2 CIRCUIT LOW as active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Inside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, REARVIEW , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (X722) MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Microphone 2 In (+) Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Hands Free Module harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit between the Inside Rearview Mirror and Hands Free Module harness connectors. Is the resistance above 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (X722) MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking Microphone 2 In (+) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit for short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Hands Free Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HANDS FREE (HFM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B143F-MICROPHONE 2 CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Hands Free Module (HFM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Hands Free Module (HFM) controls and monitors the (X722) microphone 2 input circuit (+) for a concern. The microphone is located in the rearview mirror.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a detailed description of the Hands Free System. Refer to DESCRIPTION . For additional information regarding the operation of the Hands Free System. Refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Hands Free Module (HFM) detects a short to voltage on the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X722) MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HANDS FREE MODULE (HFM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Verify the connection of the Rearview Mirror harness connector.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B143F-MICROPHONE 2 CIRCUIT HIGH as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Checking The Inside Rearview Mirror Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Rearview Mirror harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B143F-MICROPHONE 2 CIRCUIT HIGH as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, REARVIEW , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (X722) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Microphone Circuits For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Hands Free Module harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X722) Microphone circuit. Is the voltage above 1.0 volt? Yes  

Repair the (X722) Microphone circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Hands Free Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HANDS FREE (HFM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Hands Free Module will receive and monitor the VIN message from the PCM. The Hands Free Module will set this code if the VIN recorded in the module is different from the VIN message received from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INCORRECT VIN PROGRAMMED IN PCM HANDS FREE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the Hands Free Module DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 4. With the scan tool, read the active Hands Free Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. 2. CHECK VIN IN PCM 1. With the scan tool, compare the VIN that is programmed into the PCM to the VIN on the vehicle. 

Does the VIN programmed into the PCM match the vehicle VIN? Yes



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace and program the Hands Free Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Program the correct VIN into the PCM and retest the Hands Free Module system.



No

U0010-CAN INTERIOR BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0010-CAN Interior Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10.0 and 16.0 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Instrument Cluster (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0155-Lost Communication with Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Hands Free Module (HFM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fused installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Radio for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES RADIO POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY RADIO MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0184-Lost Communication with Radio diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B10C4-11 HEATED STEERING WHEEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B10C4-12 HEATED STEERING WHEEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B10C4-13 HEATED STEERING WHEEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN B10C4-1E HEATED STEERING WHEEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE B11C0-13 STEERING WHEEL HEATER POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT OPEN B11DC-13 REAR HEATED SEATS POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT OPEN B1E99-11 FRONT LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1E99-12 FRONT LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1E99-13 FRONT LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN B1E99-1E FRONT LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE B1E9A-11 FRONT RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1E9A-12 FRONT RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1E9A-13 FRONT RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN B1E9A-1E FRONT RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE B1E9B-11 REAR LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1E9B-12 REAR LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1E9B-13 REAR LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN B1E9B-1E REAR LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE B1E9C-11 REAR RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1E9C-12 REAR RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1E9C-13 REAR RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN B1E9C-1E REAR RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE B1E9D-11 FRONT LEFT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1E9D-12 FRONT LEFT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1E9D-13 FRONT LEFT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN B1E9E-11 FRONT RIGHT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B1E9E-12 B1E9E-13 B1EB1-1A B1EB1-1B B1EB2-1A B1EB2-1B B1EB3-1A B1EB3-1B B1EB4-1A B1EB4-1B B210C-17 B210C-18 B21DD-84 B21DD-85 B221A-00 U0011-00 U0141-00 U0155-00 U0164-00 U1446-00

FRONT RIGHT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY FRONT RIGHT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE BELOW THRESHOLD FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ABOVE THRESHOLD FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE BELOW THRESHOLD FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ABOVE THRESHOLD REAR LEFT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE BELOW THRESHOLD REAR LEFT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ABOVE THRESHOLD REAR RIGHT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE BELOW THRESHOLD REAR RIGHT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ABOVE THRESHOLD BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT BELOW THRESHOLD SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE (HSM) HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL CAN B BUS PERFORMANCE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE IMPLAUSIBLE HEATED STEERING WHEEL TEMPERATURE MESSAGE RECEIVED (CCN)

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B10C4-11-HEATED STEERING WHEEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Heated Steering Wheel Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects voltage below threshold on the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit for more than two seconds when the output is turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C986) HEATED STEERING WHEEL RETURN CIRCUIT HEATED STEERING WHEEL (HSW) STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SCM) HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the HSW on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by rotating the steering wheel. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK FOR SHORTED (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT BETWEEN SCM AND HSM WARNING: Turn the ignition off, disconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 1. Disconnect the SCM C1 harness connector. WARNING: Turn the ignition on, then reconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 2. 3. 4. 5.

With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the HSW on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the same DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. CHECK (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C4 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit between ground and the SCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the short to ground in the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 4. CHECK (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C986) HEATED STEERING WHEEL RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 3: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit For Short To Heated Steering Wheel Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit and the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit at the SCM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit and the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. CHECK FOR A SHORTED HSW 

WARNING: Turn the ignition off, disconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 1. Remove the Driver Airbag in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to AIR BAG, DRIVER , REMOVAL . 2. Disconnect the SCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

Before proceeding, thoroughly inspect the wiring harness and connectors between the HSW and the Steering Control Module. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.

3. Reconnect the SCM C1 harness connector. WARNING: Turn the ignition on, then reconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the HSW on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the same DTC active? Yes 



Replace the Steering Control Module (SCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Replace the Heated Steering Wheel (HSW) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to WHEEL, STEERING , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B10C4-12-HEATED STEERING WHEEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Heated Steering Wheel Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects voltage on the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT HEATED STEERING WHEEL (HSW) STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SCM) HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time, except for the HSW. Attempt to reproduce condition by rotating the steering wheel. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK FOR SHORTED (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT BETWEEN SCM AND HSM

Fig. 5: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit For Short Between SCM & HSM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC WARNING: Turn the ignition off, disconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 1. Disconnect the SCM C1 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WARNING: Turn the ignition on, then reconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit at the SCM C1 harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. CHECK (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit For Short To Fused Ignition Run Control Output Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C4 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance between the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit and the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit at the HSM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Repair the short between the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit and the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 7: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit between the HSM C4 harness connector and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. CHECK FOR A SHORTED SCM 

WARNING: Turn the ignition off, disconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 1. Remove the Driver Airbag in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to AIR BAG, DRIVER , REMOVAL . 2. Disconnect the SCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

Before proceeding, thoroughly inspect the wiring harness and connectors between the HSW and the Steering Control Module. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.

3. Reconnect the SCM C1 harness connector. WARNING: Turn the ignition on, then reconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Measure the voltage of the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit between the SCM C2 component connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes 



Replace the Steering Control Module (SCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Heated Steering Wheel (HSW) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to WHEEL, STEERING , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B10C4-13-HEATED STEERING WHEEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Heated Steering Wheel Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects current below threshold on the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit for more than two seconds when the output is turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT OPEN (C986) HEATED STEERING WHEEL RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN HEATED STEERING WHEEL (HSW) STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SCM) HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the HSW on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by rotating the steering wheel. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN SCM AND HSM

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit For Open Between SCM & HSM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC WARNING: Turn the ignition off, disconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 1. Disconnect the SCM C1 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the HSM C4 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit between the SCM C1 harness connector and the HSM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the open in the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (C986) HEATED STEERING WHEEL RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN SCM AND HSM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Return Circuit For Open Between SCM & HSM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit between the SCM C1 harness connector and the HSM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the open in the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN HSW 

Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance Between Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit & Heated Steering Wheel Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Remove the Driver Airbag in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to AIR BAG, DRIVER , REMOVAL . 2. Disconnect the SCM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

Before proceeding, thoroughly inspect the wiring harness and connectors between the HSW and the Steering Control Module. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.

3. Measure the resistance between the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit and the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit at the SCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance 1.85 ± 0.2 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace the Heated Steering Wheel (HSW) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to WHEEL, STEERING , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. CHECK (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE SCM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit For Open In SCM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Reconnect the SCM C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit between the SCM C2 component connector and the HSM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Replace the Steering Control Module (SCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. CHECK (C986) HEATED STEERING WHEEL RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN FOR AN OPEN IN THE SCM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Return Circuit For Open In SCM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit between the SCM C2 component connector and the HSM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Steering Control Module (SCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B10C4-1E-HEATED STEERING WHEEL CONTROL - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Heated Steering Wheel Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects current between 0.5 and 1.0 amp on the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit for more than two seconds when the output is turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH (C986) HEATED STEERING WHEEL RETURN CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH HEATED STEERING WHEEL (HSW) STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SCM) HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Before proceeding, verify the battery is fully charged, the charging system is operating properly, no Battery or System Voltage Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are set, and the HSM Power and Ground circuits are clean and tight.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the HSW on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by rotating the steering wheel. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK HSW CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance Between Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit & Heated Steering Wheel Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC WARNING: Turn the ignition off, disconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 1. Remove the Driver Airbag in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to AIR BAG, DRIVER , REMOVAL . 2. Disconnect the SCM C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Before proceeding, thoroughly inspect the wiring harness and connectors between the HSW and the Steering Control Module. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.

3. Measure the resistance between the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit and the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit at the SCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance 1.85 ± 0.2 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Heated Steering Wheel (HSW) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to WHEEL, STEERING , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit For Open In SCM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the HSM C4 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit between the SCM C2 component connector and the HSM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 5. 4. CHECK (C986) HEATED STEERING WHEEL RETURN CIRCUIT FOR A HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Return Circuit For Open In SCM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit between the SCM C2 component connector and the HSM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 5. CHECK (C91) HEATED STEERING WHEEL FEED CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE BETWEEN SCM AND HSM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Feed Circuit For Open Between SCM & HSM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the SCM C1 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit between the SCM C1 harness connector and the HSM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Steering Control Module (SCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the high resistance in the (C91) Heated Steering Wheel Feed circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. CHECK (C986) HEATED STEERING WHEEL RETURN CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE BETWEEN SCM AND HSM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Checking Heated Steering Wheel Return Circuit For Open Between SCM & HSM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the SCM C1 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit between the SCM C1 harness connector and the HSM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Steering Control Module (SCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the high resistance in the (C986) Heated Steering Wheel Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B11C0-13-STEERING WHEEL HEATER POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Heated Steering Wheel Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects no voltage on the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

OR SHORT

Fig. 21: Checking Fused Ignition Run Control Output Circuit For Open Or Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the HSM C4 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL .



Repair the open or short in the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B11DC-13-REAR HEATED SEATS POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Rear Heated Seat Power Supply Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects no voltage on the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OPEN FUSE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK TIPM FUSE 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check for power on both sides of TIPM Fuse M9. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Choose the applicable result? No Power To Fuse 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Fuse Open 

Go To 3.

Fuse OK Go To 6. 3. REPLACE AND RECHECK TIPM FUSE M9 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Install a new TIPM Fuse. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Using a scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Turn the ignition off. 6. Start the engine and let it run. 7. Operate each of the Heated Seats and the HSW, if equipped. 8. Inspect TIPM Fuse. 

Is the fuse open? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Verify seat harness is routed correctly. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT INSIDE TIPM FOR SHORT TO GROUND 1. If not done previously, turn the ignition off. 2. Remove TIPM Fuse M9. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Disconnect the TIPM C6 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

4. Measure the resistance of the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit between ground and the TIPM Fuse M9 (output side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) and Fuse M9 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN TIPM AND HSM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Check Fused Ignition Run Control Output Circuit For A Short To Ground Between TIPM And HSM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the HSM C4 harness connector, if equipped. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit between ground and the TIPM C6 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit for a short to ground. Replace Fuse M9 in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) and Fuse M9 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. CHECK (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT INSIDE TIPM FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 24: Check Fused Ignition Run Control Output Circuit Inside TIPM For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC TIPM C6 harness connector shown in illustration (Fig. 24) Mirror image for TIPM C6 component side connector.

NOTE:

1. If not done previously, turn the ignition off. 2. Remove TIPM Fuse M9. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit between the TIPM Fuse M9 (output side) connector and the TIPM C6 (component side) connector. NOTE:

The graphic shows the connector end. Measure at the component side of the TIPM.

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN TIPM AND HSM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: Check Fused Ignition Run Control Output Circuit For An Open Between TIPM And HSM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit between the TIPM C6 harness connector and the HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E99-11-FRONT LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Front Left Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage below 1.0 Volt or current above 10.0 amps on the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT TO SEAT BACK HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Seat Back Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit at the Left Seat Back Heater harness connector (connector side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair or replace the pigtail harness for a short to ground or replace the shorted Seat Back Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COVER, SEAT BACK, FRONT , REMOVAL or COVER, SEAT BACK, REAR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT TO SEAT CUSHION HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Checking Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit To Seat Cushion For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit at the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (connector side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the short to ground in the harness or replace the shorted Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT TO HSM FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 28: Checking Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit To Seat Cushion For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit at the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to ground between the Heated Seat Module and the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the HSM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E99-12-FRONT LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Front Left Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage above 5.0 volts on the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time, except for the Left Front Heated Seat. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Fig. 30: Checking Left Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C2

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

harness connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Checking Left Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and ground while adjusting the seat in all positions. Is there any voltage present during the seat adjustment? Yes  

No

Repair the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT 

Fig. 32: Checking Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To The Right Front Seat Heater Control Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Left Seat Back Heater harness connector. Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Measure the resistance between the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit and the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit at HSM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E99-13-FRONT LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Front Left Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects current below 0.5 of an amp on the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 34: Checking Left Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

4. Measure the resistance of the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (Z916) Ground circuit between ground and the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). 3. Measure the resistance of the (Z916) Ground circuit between ground and the Driver Seat Assembly harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms for both measurements? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Z916) Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. LEFT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Measuring Resistance Between Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit & Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z916) Ground circuit at the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (component side). Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms (without vented seats) or 9.8 Ohms (with vented seats)? Yes 

Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. LEFT SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT OPEN 

Fig. 37: Checking Left Seat Back Heater Element For Open Or Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect all previously disconnected harness connectors except for the Driver Seat Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z916) Ground circuit at the Driver Seat Assembly harness connector (seat back side).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms (without vented seats) or 11.6 Ohms (with vented seats)? Yes 



Repair or replace the pigtail harness for an open or replace the open Seat Back Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COVER, SEAT BACK, FRONT , REMOVAL or COVER, SEAT BACK, REAR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E99-1E-FRONT LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 38: Front Left Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects impedance above threshold on the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Before proceeding, verify the battery is fully charged, the charging system is operating properly, no Battery or System Voltage Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are set, and the HSM Power and Ground circuits are clean and tight.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Checking Left Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

4. Measure the resistance of the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit for high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Z916) Ground circuit between ground and the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (Z916) Ground circuit between ground and the Driver Seat Assembly harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms for both measurements? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Z916) Ground circuit for high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. LEFT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Measuring Resistance Between Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit & Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z916) Ground circuit at the Left Seat Cushion Heater connector (component side). Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms (without vented seats) or 9.8 Ohms (with vented seats)? Yes 

Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. LEFT SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT RESISTANCE 

Fig. 42: Checking Left Seat Back Heater Element For Open Or Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z916) Ground circuit at the Driver Seat Assembly harness connector (seat back side). Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms (without vented seats) or 11.6 Ohms (with vented seats)?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair or replace the pigtail harness for an open or replace the open Seat Back Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COVER, SEAT BACK, FRONT , REMOVAL or COVER, SEAT BACK, REAR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9A-11-FRONT RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Front Right Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage below 1.0 volt or current above 10.0 amps on the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT TO SEAT BACK HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Seat Back Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit at the Right Seat Back Heater harness connector (connector side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair or replace the pigtail harness for a short to ground or replace the shorted Seat Back Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COVER, SEAT BACK, FRONT , REMOVAL or COVER, SEAT BACK, REAR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT TO SEAT CUSHION HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Checking Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit To Seat Cushion For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit at the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (connector side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the short to ground in the harness or replace the shorted Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT TO HSM FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Checking Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit To Seat Cushion For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit at the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to ground between the Heated Seat Module and the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the HSM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9A-12-FRONT RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Front Right Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage above 5.0 volts on the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time, except for the Right Front Heated Seat. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Checking Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Checking Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and ground while adjusting the seat in all positions. Is there any voltage present during the seat adjustment? Yes  

Repair the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P187) LEFT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT 

Fig. 49: Checking Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To The Right Front Seat Heater Control Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connectors. Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Measure the resistance between the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit and (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit at HSM C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to the (P187) Left Front Seat Heater Control circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9A-13-FRONT RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Front Right Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects current below 0.5 of amp on the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Fig. 51: Checking Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Disconnect the Right Seat Back Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

5. Measure the resistance of the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit at the HSM C2 harness connector and the Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms for both measurements? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Z919) Ground circuit between ground and the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (Z919) Ground circuit between ground and the Passenger Seat Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms for either measurement? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Z919) Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK FOR AN OPEN RIGHT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Measuring Resistance Between Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit & Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuit at the Right Seat Cushion Heater connector (component side). Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms (without vented seats) or 9.8 Ohms (with vented seats)? Yes 

Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK PIGTAIL HARNESS AND RIGHT SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT FOR AN OPEN 1. Measure the resistance between the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuit at the Right Seat Back Heater harness connector (seat back side). 

Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms (without vented seats) or 11.6 Ohms (with vented seats)? Yes 



Repair or replace the pigtail harness for an open or replace the open Seat Back Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COVER, SEAT BACK, FRONT , REMOVAL or COVER, SEAT BACK, REAR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9A-1E-FRONT RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 54: Front Right Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects impedance above threshold on the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Before proceeding, verify the battery is fully charged, the charging system is operating properly, no Battery or System Voltage Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are set, and the HSM Power and Ground circuits are clean and tight.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P188) RIGHT FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 55: Checking Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Disconnect the Right Seat Back Heater harness connector. Disconnect the Passenger Seat Assembly harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

6. Measure the resistance of the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit for high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Z919) Ground circuit between ground and the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (Z919) Ground circuit between ground and the Passenger Seat Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms for both measurements? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Z919) Ground circuit for high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK RIGHT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Measuring Resistance Between Right Front Seat Heater Control Circuit & Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuit at the Right Seat Cushion Heater connector (component side). Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms (without vented seats) or 9.8 Ohms (with vented seats)? Yes 

Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK PIGTAIL HARNESS AND RIGHT SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT RESISTANCE 1. Measure the resistance between the (P188) Right Front Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuit at the Right Seat Back Heater harness connector (seat back side). 

Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms (without vented seats) or 11.6 Ohms (with vented seats)? Yes 



Repair or replace the pigtail harness for a short to ground or replace the shorted Seat Back Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COVER, SEAT BACK, FRONT , REMOVAL or COVER, SEAT BACK, REAR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9B-11-REAR LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage below 1.0 volt or current above 10.0 amps on the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the front seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT IN BODY HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the same DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the shorted Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Checking Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between ground and the HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OR TO (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Check Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To The Heated Seat Sensor Return Circuit Or To Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z923) Ground circuit at the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for either measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9B-12-REAR LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage above 5.0 Volts on the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time, except for the Left Rear Heated Seat. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the front seat.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 62: Checking Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 3. CHECK (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT 

Fig. 63: Checking Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To The Fused Ignition Run Control Output Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (F931)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit at HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to voltage.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Checking Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the Voltage of the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and ground while adjusting the front seat. Is there any Voltage present during the seat adjustment? Yes  

Repair the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Checking Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For Short To Right Rear Heater Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left or Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit at HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B1E9B-13-REAR LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects current below 0.5 of an amp on the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the front seat. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK FOR AN OPEN LEFT REAR SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Check For An Open Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance between the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z923) Ground circuit at the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (seat side). Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN BODY HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Check Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For An Open In Body Harness Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Check Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (Z923) Ground circuit between ground and the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (Z923) Ground circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9B-1E-REAR LEFT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 70: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects impedance above threshold on the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Before proceeding, verify the battery is fully charged, the charging system is operating properly, no Battery or System voltage Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are set and the HSM Power and Ground circuits are clean and tight.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

condition by adjusting the front seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK LEFT REAR SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT RESISTANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Check For An Open Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance between the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z923) Ground circuit at the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (seat side). Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE IN BODY HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Check Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For An Open In Body Harness Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 73: Check Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (Z923) Ground circuit between ground and the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (Z923) Ground circuit for high resistance. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9C-11-REAR RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage below 1.0 volt or current above 10.0 amps on the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the front seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT IN BODY HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the same DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the shorted Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: Checking Right Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between ground and the HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OR TO (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 76: Check Right Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To The Heated Seat Sensor Return Circuit Or To Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuit at the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for either measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9C-12-REAR RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects voltage above 5.0 volts on the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time, except for the Right Rear Heated Seat. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the front seat.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 78: Checking Right Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 3. CHECK (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT 

Fig. 79: Checking Right Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To The Fused Ignition Run Control Output Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (F931)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit at the HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to voltage.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 80: Checking Right Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and ground while adjusting the front seat. Is there any voltage present during the seat adjustment? Yes



Repair the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 5.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. CHECK (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT

Fig. 81: Checking Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For Short To Right Rear Heater Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left or Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit at HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Repair the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for a short to the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9C-13-REAR RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 82: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects current below 0.5 of an amp on the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the front seat. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK FOR OPEN RIGHT REAR SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT

Fig. 83: Check For Open Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance between the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuit at the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater Connector (seat side). Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN BODY HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Check Right Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For An Open In Body Harness Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 85: Check Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Z919) Ground circuit between ground and the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



No

Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Z919) Ground circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9C-1E-REAR RIGHT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE OUT OF RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects impedance above threshold on the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTANCE HIGH SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Before proceeding, verify the battery is fully charged, the charging system is operating properly, no Battery or System Voltage Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are set, and the HSM Power and Ground circuits are clean and tight.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Heated Seat on and operate in all modes. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

adjusting the front seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK REAR SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT RESISTANCE

Fig. 87: Check For Open Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance between the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuit at the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater Connector (seat side).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 4.8 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE IN BODY HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 88: Check Right Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit For An Open In Body Harness Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit for high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 89: Check Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Z919) Ground circuit between ground and the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



No

Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Z919) Ground circuit for high resistance. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9D-11-FRONT LEFT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 90: Vent Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage below 1.0 volt or current above threshold on the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit for more than 12 seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P921) LEFT SEAT VENT RETURN CIRCUIT SEAT CUSHION VENT MOTOR SHORTED SEAT BACK VENT MOTOR SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Vented Seat on and wait at least 12 seconds before proceeding. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT AND VENT MOTORS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 91: Checking Left Seat Vent Feed Circuit And Vent Motors For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Connect an ammeter between the (P921) Left Seat Vent Return circuit and ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. 4. Connect one end a fused jumper wire to Battery voltage and the other end to the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

Both vent motors should be operational and the ammeter should read 720 to 880 ma.

Does the ammeter read 720 ma to 1.2 amps? Yes 



Disconnect the fused jumper wire and ammeter. Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Disconnect the fused jumper wire. Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT AND SEAT BACK VENT MOTOR FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Checking Left Seat Vent Feed Circuit And Vent Motors For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Vent harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Connect an ammeter between the (P921) Left Seat Vent Return circuit and ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. 3. Connect one end of a fused jumper wire to Battery voltage and the other end to the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

The seat back vent motor should be operational and the ammeter should read 320 to 480 ma.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the ammeter read 320 to 600 ma? Yes 



Disconnect the fused jumper wire and ammeter. Replace the Seat Cushion Vent Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, VENTED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Disconnect the fused jumper wire and the ammeter. Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: Checking Left Seat Vent Feed Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Assembly C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit between ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P921) LEFT SEAT VENT RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 94: Checking Left Seat Vent Feed Circuit For A Short To The Left Seat Vent Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit and the (P921) Left Seat Vent Return circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit for a short to the (P921) Left Seat Vent Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Repair or replace the pigtail harness for a short to ground or replace the shorted Seat Back Vent Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, VENTED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9D-12-FRONT LEFT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Fig. 95: Vent Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage above 5.0 volts on the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time, except for the Left Front Vented Seat. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Checking Left Seat Vent Feed Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit between the HSM C5 harness connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

Fig. 97: Checking Left Seat Vent Feed Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit between the HSM C5 harness connector and ground while adjusting the seat in all positions.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present during the seat adjustment? Yes  

Repair the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9D-13-FRONT LEFT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 98: Vent Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects current below threshold on the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit for more than 12 seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT OPEN (P921) LEFT SEAT VENT RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION VENT MOTOR OPEN SEAT BACK VENT MOTOR OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Vented Seat and wait at least 12 seconds before proceeding. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK LEFT SEAT VENT MOTORS AND (P421) FEED AND (P921) RETURN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 99: Checking Left Seat Vent Feed Circuit And Vent Motors For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Connect an ammeter between the (P921) Left Seat Vent Return circuit and ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. 4. Connect one end a fused jumper wire to Battery Voltage and the other end to the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

Both vent motors should be operational and the ammeter should read 720 to 880 ma.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the ammeter read 720 ma to 1.2 amps? Yes 



Disconnect the ammeter and fused jumper wire. Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Disconnect the fused jumper wire. Go To 3. 3. CHECK LEFT SEAT BACK VENT MOTOR AND (P421) FEED AND (P921) RETURN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 100: Checking Left Seat Vent Feed Circuit And Vent Motors For A Short To Ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Vent harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Connect an ammeter between the (P921) Left Seat Vent Return circuit and ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. 3. Connect one end a fused jumper wire to Battery voltage and the other end to the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

The seat back vent motor should be operational and the ammeter should read 320 to 480 ma.

Does the ammeter read 320 to 600 ma? Yes 



Disconnect the ammeter and fused jumper wire. Repair or replace the pigtail harness for an open or replace the open Seat Cushion Vent Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, VENTED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Disconnect the ammeter and fused jumper wire. Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P421) LEFT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 101: Checking Left Seat Vent Feed Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the driver seat assembly in-line harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit between the HSM C5 harness connector and the Driver Seat Assembly C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (P421) Left Seat Vent Feed circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. CHECK (P921) LEFT SEAT VENT RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 102: Checking Left Seat Vent Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P921) Left Seat Vent Return circuit between the HSM C5 harness connector and the Driver Seat Assembly C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Repair or replace the pigtail harness for an open or replace the open Seat Back Vent Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, VENTED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (P921) Left Seat Vent Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9E-11-FRONT RIGHT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 103: Vent Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects voltage below 1.0 volt or current above threshold on the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit for more than 12 seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P922) RIGHT SEAT VENT RETURN CIRCUIT SEAT CUSHION VENT MOTOR SHORTED SEAT BACK VENT MOTOR SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the Vented Seat on and wait at least 12 seconds before proceeding. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT AND VENT MOTORS FOR A SHORT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TO GROUND

Fig. 104: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit And Vent Motors For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Connect an ammeter between the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit and ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. 4. Connect one end a fused jumper wire to Battery voltage and the other end to the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Both vent motors should be operational and the ammeter should read 720 to 880 ma.

Does the ammeter read 720 ma to 1.2 amps? Yes 



Disconnect the fused jumper wire and ammeter. Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Disconnect the fused jumper wire. Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT AND SEAT BACK VENT MOTOR FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 105: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit And Vent Motors For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Vent harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Connect an ammeter between the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit and ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. 3. Connect one end of a fused jumper wire to Battery Voltage and the other end to the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

The seat back vent motor should be operational and the ammeter should read 320 to 480 ma.

Does the ammeter read 320 to 600 ma?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Disconnect the fused jumper wire and ammeter. Replace the Seat Cushion Vent Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, VENTED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Disconnect the fused jumper wire and ammeter. Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 106: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Vent and Right Seat Back Vent harness connectors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit between ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P922) RIGHT SEAT VENT RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 107: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit For A Short To The Right Seat Vent Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit and the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes



Repair the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit for a short to the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Repair or replace the pigtail harness for a short to ground or replace the shorted Seat Back



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Vent Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, VENTED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9E-12-FRONT RIGHT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Fig. 108: Vent Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage above 5.0 Volts on the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time, except for the Right Front Vented Seat. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Fig. 109: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit between the HSM C5 harness connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

Fig. 110: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit between the HSM C5 harness connector and ground while adjusting the seat in all positions. Is there any voltage present during the seat adjustment? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E9E-13-FRONT RIGHT VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 111: Vent Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects current below threshold on the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit for more than 12 seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT OPEN (P922) RIGHT SEAT VENT RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION VENT MOTOR OPEN SEAT BACK VENT MOTOR OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Turn the vented seat on and wait at least 12 seconds before proceeding. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK RIGHT SEAT VENT MOTORS AND (P422) FEED AND (P922) RETURN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 112: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit And Vent Motors For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Connect an ammeter between the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit and ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. 4. Connect one end a fused jumper wire to Battery voltage and the other end to the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

Both vent motors should be operational and the ammeter should read 720 to 880 ma.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the ammeter read 720 ma to 1.2 amps? Yes 



Disconnect the fused jumper wire and ammeter. Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Disconnect the fused jumper wire. Go To 3. 3. CHECK RIGHT SEAT BACK VENT MOTOR AND (P422) FEED AND (P922) RETURN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 113: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit And Vent Motors For A Short To Ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Vent harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Connect an ammeter between the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit and ground at the HSM C5 harness connector. 3. Connect one end a fused jumper wire to Battery voltage and the other end to the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit at the HSM C5 harness connector. NOTE:

The seat back vent motor should be operational and the ammeter should read 320 to 480 ma.

Does the ammeter read 320 to 600 ma? Yes 



Disconnect the fused jumper wire and ammeter. Repair or replace the pigtail harness for an open or replace the open Seat Cushion Vent Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Disconnect the fused jumper wire and ammeter. Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN TO THE RIGHT SEAT CUSHION VENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 114: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit For An Open To The Right Seat Cushion Vent Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Vent harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit between the HSM C5 harness connector and the Right Seat Cushion Vent harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. CHECK (P422) RIGHT SEAT VENT FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN TO THE RIGHT SEAT BACK VENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 115: Checking Right Seat Vent Feed Circuit For An Open To The Right Seat Back Vent Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Right Seat Back Vent harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2. Measure the resistance of the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit between the HSM C5 harness connector and the Right Seat Back Vent harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (P422) Right Seat Vent Feed circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. CHECK (P922) RIGHT SEAT VENT RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN TO THE RIGHT SEAT CUSHION VENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 116: Checking Right Seat Vent Return Circuit For An Open To The Right Seat Cushion Vent Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit between the HSM C5 harness connector and the Right Seat Cushion Vent harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK (P922) RIGHT SEAT VENT RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN TO THE RIGHT SEAT BACK VENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 117: Checking Right Seat Vent Return Circuit For An Open To The Right Seat Back Vent Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit between the HSM C5 connector and the Right Seat Back Vent connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Repair or replace the pigtail harness for an open or replace the open Seat Back Vent Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (P922) Right Seat Vent Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1EB1-1A-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 118: Front Left Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

When Heated Seat Module (HSM) is powered. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects that the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit NTC is below threshold for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT IN BODY HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 119: Checking Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the same DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 120: Checking Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between ground and the Left Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OR TO (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 121: Checking Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (Z916) Ground circuit at the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for either measurement?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1EB1-1B-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 122: Front Left Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

When Heated Seat Module (HSM) is powered. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects that the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit NTC is above threshold for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 123: Checking Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 124: Checking Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and ground while adjusting the seat in all positions. Is there any voltage present during the seat adjustment? Yes  

Repair the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TO LEFT SEAT CUSHION HEATER 

Fig. 125: Checking Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Voltage To Left Seat Cushion Heater Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. 2. Start the engine and let it run.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the voltage between the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the Voltage above 4.5 volts? Yes 



Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P687) LEFT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT OR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 126: Checking Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Or An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C2 connector and the Left Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (P687) Left Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. CHECK (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 127: Checking Heated Seat Temp Sensor Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and the Left Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1EB2-1A-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 128: Front Right Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When Heated Seat Module (HSM) is powered. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects that the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit NTC is below threshold for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT IN BODY HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 129: Checking Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit In Body Harness For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the same DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the shorted Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 130: Checking Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between ground and the Right Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT OR TO (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 131: Checking Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To The Ground Circuit Or To Heated Seat Sensor Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuit at the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for either measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1EB2-1B-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 132: Front Right Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When Heated Seat Module (HSM) is powered. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects that the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit NTC is above threshold for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

VOLTAGE

Fig. 133: Checking Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C2 harness connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 134: Checking Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and ground while adjusting the seat in all positions. Is there any voltage present during the seat adjustment? Yes  

Repair the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TO RIGHT SEAT CUSHION HEATER 

Fig. 135: Checking Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Voltage To Right Seat Cushion Heater Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. 2. Start the engine and let it run. 3. Measure the voltage between the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 4.5 volts? Yes 



Replace the shorted Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P688) RIGHT FRONT HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT OR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 136: Checking Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Or An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the HSM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C2 connector and the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (P688) Right Front Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. CHECK (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 137: Checking Heated Seat Sensor Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit between the HSM C2 harness connector and the Right Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Repair the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B1EB3-1A-REAR LEFT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 138: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

When Heated Seat Module (HSM) is powered. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects that the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit NTC is below threshold for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

condition by adjusting the front seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT IN BODY HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 139: Check Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit In Body Harness For A Short To Ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector. NOTE: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the same DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 140: Check Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between ground and the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT OR TO (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 141: Check Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To The Ground Circuit Or To Heated Seat Sensor Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuit at the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). 2. Measure the resistance between the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for either measurement?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1EB3-1B-REAR LEFT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 142: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

When Heated Seat Module (HSM) is powered. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects that the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit NTC is above threshold for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the front seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 143: Checking Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 3. CHECK (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 144: Checking Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To The Fused Ignition Run Control Output Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit at HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to voltage.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

Fig. 145: Checking Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and ground while adjusting the front seat. Is there any voltage present during the seat adjustment? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OR TO (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT 

Fig. 146: Checking Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To The Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit Or To Right Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

4. Measure the resistance between the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit at the HSM C3 harness connector. 5. Measure the resistance between the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit at the HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for either measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TO LEFT REAR SEAT CUSHION HEATER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 147: Check Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Voltage To Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. 2. Start the engine and let it run. 3. Measure the voltage between the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the voltage above 4.5-volts? Yes 



Replace the Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK (P672) LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT OR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 148: Check Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Or An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Repair the (P672) Left Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 8. CHECK (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 149: Check Heated Seat Sensor Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit between the HSM C3 connector and the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1EB4-1A-REAR RIGHT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 150: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

When Heated Seat Module (HSM) is powered. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects that the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit NTC is below threshold for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

condition by adjusting the front seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT IN BODY HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 151: Check Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit In Body Harness For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater harness connector. NOTE: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the same DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the shorted Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PAD, HEATER , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 152: Check Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between ground and the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT OR TO (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 153: Check Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To The Ground Circuit Or To Heated Seat Sensor Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (Z923) Ground circuit at the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). 2. Measure the resistance between the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for either measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1EB4-1B-REAR RIGHT SEAT HEATER SENSOR - CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 154: Heater Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

When Heated Seat Module (HSM) is powered. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects that the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit NTC is above threshold for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by operating all HSM functions one at a time. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the front seat.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 155: Checking Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let it run. 4. Measure the voltage of the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 3. CHECK (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (F931) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 156: Checking Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To The Fused Ignition Run Control Output Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit at HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to the (F931) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to voltage.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE DURING SEAT ADJUSTMENT 

Fig. 157: Checking Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the Voltage of the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and ground while adjusting the front seat. Is there any Voltage present during the seat adjustment?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (P178) RIGHT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OR TO (P177) LEFT REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT 

Fig. 158: Checking Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For A Short To Right Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit Or To Left Rear Seat Heater Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector. 3. Disconnect the Left Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

4. Measure the resistance between the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P178) Right Rear Seat Heater Control circuit at the HSM C3 harness connector. 5. Measure the resistance between the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P177) Left Rear Seat Heater Control circuit at the HSM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for either measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TO RIGHT REAR SEAT CUSHION HEATER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 159: Check Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit Voltage To Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Reconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. 2. Start the engine and let it run. 3. Measure the voltage between the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit and the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit at the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the voltage above 4.5 Volts? Yes  

Replace the Rear Seat Cushion Heater Element in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK (P673) RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT TEMP SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 160: Check Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit between the HSM C3 connector and the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Repair the (P673) Right Rear Heated Seat Temp Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 8. CHECK (P968) HEATED SEAT SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 161: Check Heated Seat Sensor Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit between the HSM C3 harness connector and the Right Rear Seat Cushion Heater connector (harness side). Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (P968) Heated Seat Sensor Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210C-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 162: Heated Seat Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage above 16.0 volts on the (F930) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH (F930) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCs) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module (PCM) DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC for Charging System diagnostic procedures .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Using a scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine and let run for one minute. 4. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. 

Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (F930) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE 

Fig. 163: Checking Fused Ignition Run Control Output Circuit Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C1 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let idle. 4. Measure the voltage of the (F930) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit between the HSM C1

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

harness connector and ground and compare it to the voltage at the vehicle battery. Is the Voltage measured at the HSM C1 connector the same as the voltage measured at the battery? Yes 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Repair the (F930) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit for the cause of the high voltage condition at the HSM. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210C-18-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 164: Heated Seat Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With engine running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects Voltage below 10.0 volts on the (F930) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW (F930) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCs) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module (PCM) DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC for Charging System diagnostic procedures .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Using a scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine and let it run for one minute. 4. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. 

Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat.  Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (F930) FUSED IGNITION RUN CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Fig. 165: Checking Fused Ignition Run Control Output Circuit Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the HSM C1 harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Start the engine and let idle. 4. Measure the voltage of the (F930) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit between the HSM C1

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

harness connector and ground and compare it to the voltage at the vehicle battery. Is the voltage measured at the HSM C1 connector the same as the voltage measured at the battery? Yes 



Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Repair the (F930) Fused Ignition Run Control Output circuit for the cause of the low voltage condition at the HSM. Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B21DD-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) receives a battery Voltage below 10.0 volts status message through the CAN Bus. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCs) PRESENT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCs NOTE:

If present, diagnose and repair DTC U0141-00 Lost Communication With IPM (FCM/TIPM) before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module (PCM) DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC for Charging System diagnostic procedures .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR DTCs IN TIPM 1. Using a scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

Are there any DTCs set in the TIPM? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B210C-18-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT BELOW THRESHOLD IN HSM 1. Using a scan tool, read HSM DTCs. 

Is DTC B210C-18-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT BELOW THRESHOLD active? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No Go To 4. 4. VERIFY THIS DTC IS ACTIVE 

NOTE:









Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using a suitable Battery Tester, test the Battery before continuing. Make sure system voltage is in the normal operating range of approximately 12 to 14 volts before continuing. Inspect the vehicle for aftermarket accessories that may exceed the Generator System output. Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



1. 2. 3. 4.

Inspect the fuses. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.

Using a scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run for one minute. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes  

Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B21DD-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) receives a system Voltage above 16.0 volts status message through the CAN Bus. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH TIPM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCs) PRESENT HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCs

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

If present, diagnose and repair DTC U0141-00 Lost Communication With IPM (FCM/TIPM) before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module (PCM) DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC for Charging System diagnostic procedures .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR DTCs IN TIPM 1. Using a scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

Are there any DTCs set in the TIPM? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B210C-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT ABOVE THRESHOLD IN HSM 1. Using a scan tool, read HSM DTCs. 

Is DTC B210C-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT ABOVE THRESHOLD active? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No Go To 4. 4. VERIFY THIS DTC IS ACTIVE 

NOTE:



Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using a suitable Battery Tester, test the Battery before continuing.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





 

1. 2. 3. 4.

Make sure system voltage is in the normal operating range of approximately 12 to 14 volts before continuing. Inspect the vehicle for aftermarket accessories that may exceed the Generator System output. Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition. Inspect the fuses. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.

Using a scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition Off. Start the engine and let run for one minute. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes  

Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B221A-00-(HSM) HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

If the Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects an internal component failure. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off. 4. Start the engine and let it run. 5. Operate each of the heated and vented systems one at a time, as equipped. 6. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes  

Replace the Heated Seat Module (HSM) in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Verify seat harness is routed correctly to the HSM. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by adjusting the seat. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0011-00-CAN B BUS PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) detects that the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or (D264) CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit is shorted. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) (-) CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

This module will not be able to communicate when this fault is active and therefore will only display this DTC as stored. To diagnose this fault, use a scan tool and check for DTCs in the TIPM. If DTCs are active, diagnose and repair the faults. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . If no DTCs are active, but there are stored Lost Communication DTCs set, diagnose and repair these faults. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . If no DTCs are set, perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D65) CAN C BUS(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D64) CAN C BUS(-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0155-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Instrument Cluster (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0155-Lost Communication with Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0164-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the HVAC Control Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY HVAC POWER AND GROUND HVAC CONTROL MODULE MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0164-Lost Communication with HVAC Control Module.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U1446-00-IMPLAUSIBLE HEATED STEERING WHEEL TEMPERATURE MESSAGE RECEIVED (CCN)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 166: Heated Steering Wheel Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Heated Steering Wheel (HSW) Temperature Sensor is connected to the Right Steering Switch. The sensor

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

data is transferred from the Right Steering Switch to the Cluster (CCN) by way of the LIN bus, a serial sub-bus. WHEN MONITORED:

With the engine running. SET CONDITION:

The Heated Seat Module (HSM) does not receive the Heated Steering Wheel (HSW) Temperature Sensor Fault Signal from the Cluster (CCN) for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G110) HSW TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (G110) HSW TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (G110) HSW TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G902) SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT (G110) HSW TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G907) EVIC MUX RETURN CIRCUIT (G110) HSW TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT (G907) EVIC MUX RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN HEATED STEERING WHEEL (HSW) TEMPERATURE SENSOR RIGHT STEERING WHEEL SWITCH STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Diagnose and repair all active Bus related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) including Lost Communication DTCs before diagnosing this DTC.

Turn the ignition on. Using a scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Start the engine and let it run. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Attempt to reproduce condition by rotating the steering wheel.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK FOR AN OPEN OR SHORTED HSW TEMPERATURE SENSOR 

Fig. 167: Checking HSW Temperature Sensor For An Open Or Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC WARNING: Turn the ignition off, disconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Remove the Driver Airbag in accordance with the Service Information. 2. Disconnect the Steering Wheel Heater Sensor connector. NOTE:

Before proceeding, thoroughly inspect the wiring harness and connectors between the HSW and the Right Steering Wheel Switch. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. WARNING: Turn the ignition on, then reconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury.

3. Measure the Voltage between the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit and the (G907) EVIC MUX Return circuit at the Steering Wheel Heater Sensor connector. Is the Voltage above 3.5-volts? Yes  

Replace the Heated Steering Wheel (HSW) in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (G110) HSW TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 168: Checking HSW Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Steering Wheel Switch connector. NOTE:

Check connectors. Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance of the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit between the Steering Wheel Heater Sensor connector and the Right Steering Wheel Switch connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

Yes Repair the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK (G110) HSW TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 169: Checking HSW Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit between ground and

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the Right Steering Wheel Switch connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (G110) HSW TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (G902) SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT, (G907) EVIC MUX RETURN CIRCUIT, AND (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 170: Checking HSW Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Switch MUX Return Circuit, EVIC MUX Return Circuit, & Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit and the (G902) Switch MUX Return circuit at the Right Steering Wheel Switch connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit and the (G907) EVIC MUX Return circuit at the Right Steering Wheel Switch connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit and the (Z911) Ground circuit at the Right Steering Wheel Switch connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms between the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit and any of the other circuits? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (G110) HSW Temperature Sensor Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (G907) EVIC MUX RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 171: Checking EVIC MUX Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Heated Seat Module (HSM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (G907) EVIC MUX Return circuit between the Steering Wheel Heater Sensor connector and the Right Steering Wheel Switch connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the (G907) EVIC MUX Return circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK FOR AN OPEN OR SHORTED RIGHT STEERING WHEEL SWITCH 1. Replace the Right Steering Wheel Switch in accordance with the Service Information. 2. Reconnect the Steering Wheel Heater Sensor connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Using a scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Turn the ignition off. 6. Start the engine and let it run. 7. Using a scan tool, read DTCs. 

Is the DTC active? Yes  

Replace the Steering Control Module (SCM) in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B1A20-00 PRE-ARM TIMEOUT B1A3C-00 INTERNAL SIREN BATTERY B1A3D-00 SIREN BATTERY TAMPER / LOSS OF POWER SUPPLY B1A3E-00 SIREN / ITM MISMATCH B1A3F-00 ITM ARMING SEQUENCE PERFORMANCE B1A88-92 ULTRASONIC SENSOR CIRCUIT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B210A-84 SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE B210B-85 SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE B2206-00 CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH B222A-00 VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH B223C-00 INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE INTERNAL U0010-00 CAN INTERIOR BUS U0141-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) U0155-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN U110D-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SECURITY SIREN U140E-00 IMPLAUSIBLE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION DATA RECEIVED U1415-00 IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING VEHICLE CONFIGURATION DATA U1416-00 IMPLAUSIBLE SECURITY SIREN SIGNAL RECEIVED

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B1A20-00-PRE-ARM TIMEOUT For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During the Vehicle Theft and Security System (VTSS) pre-arm process. SET CONDITION:

If the VTSS pre-arm sequence is interrupted within 16 seconds after securing the vehicle. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes INTERMITTENT PROBLEM WITH FUSED B(+) TO CLUSTER INTERMITTENT PROBLEM WITH CAN INTERIOR BUS CIRCUITS TO CLUSTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Diagnose any related Communication DTCs before continuing.

1. 2. 3. 4.

With a scan tool, read and record DTCs. With the scan tool, clear DTCs. Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition. Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute. 5. Disarm the VTSS. 6. With the scan tool, read ITM DTCs. Does the DTC reset? Yes 



Remove the Cluster and inspect the Fused B(+) and both CAN Interior Bus circuits for spread terminals, corrosion or intermittent opens. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A3C-00-INTERNAL SIREN BATTERY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously, with the engine over 600 RPM. SET CONDITION:

When the internal battery within the siren does not charge as expected, the ITM sets this code.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VEHICLE STORED WITH NO BATTERY VOLTAGE FOR EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME SIREN DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Start the engine and allow it to idle for two minutes then turn the engine off. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. VEHICLE STORED WITH NO BATTERY VOLTAGE FOR EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME 

NOTE:

If the vehicle was allowed to sit with no battery voltage for an extended period of time the back up battery located in the siren may discharge and need to be recharged.

Was the vehicle battery power just restored after the vehicle was stored with no power for an extended period of time? Yes 

Allow the vehicle to sit with a fully charged battery for two hours then restart this diagnostic procedure.



Replace the Siren in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SIREN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B1A3D-00-SIREN BATTERY TAMPER / LOSS OF POWER SUPPLY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the VTSS armed. SET CONDITION:

If the Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) detects incorrect voltage at the siren this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes HARNESS TAMPERING/INTERMITTENT CONDITION (A412) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN SIREN DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT SIREN WIRING HARNESS 1. Inspect the wiring harness to the siren for any signs of tampering or intermittent condition. Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair wiring as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. With the scan tool, clear DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition. 3. Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute. 4. Disarm the VTSS. 5. Using the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (A412) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT AT THE SIREN 

Fig. 2: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit At The Siren Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Siren harness connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A412) Fused B(+) circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (A412) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT AT THE SIREN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Ground Circuit At The Siren Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12 volt test light connected to 12 volts, check the (Z901) Ground circuit at the siren connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



No

Replace the Siren in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SIREN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Z901) Ground circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A3E-00-SIREN / ITM MISMATCH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: ITM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

While the VTSS is armed. SET CONDITION:

Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) loses battery voltage. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS INTERMITTENT LOSS OF FUSED B(+) TO THE ITM WITH THE VTSS ARMED DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Diagnose any related Communication DTCs before continuing.

1. 2. 3. 4.

With a scan tool, read and record DTCs. With the scan tool, clear DTCs. Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition. Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute. 5. Disarm the VTSS. 6. Using the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 



Check for and correct any CAN Bus DTCs set in the ITM or other modules. Also check for intermittent loss Fused B(+) to the ITM. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B1A3F-00-ITM ARMING SEQUENCE PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: ITM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During the VTSS pre-arm process. SET CONDITION:

Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) loses battery voltage. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS INTERMITTENT LOSS OF FUSED B(+) TO THE ITM DURING THE VTSS PRE-ARM PROCESS DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Diagnose any related Communication DTCs before continuing.

1. 2. 3. 4.

With a scan tool, read and record DTCs. With the scan tool, clear DTCs. Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition. Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute. 5. Disarm the VTSS. 6. Using the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 



Check for and correct any CAN Bus DTCs set in the ITM or other modules. Also check for intermittent loss Fused B(+) to the ITM. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A88-92-ULTRASONIC SENSOR CIRCUIT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Ultrasonic Sensor is integral to the Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) located in the Headliner. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously while the Vehicle Theft and Security System (VTSS) is armed. SET CONDITION:

If the Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) does not receive the correct message back from the Intrusion Sensor. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE (ITM) INTRUSION MODULE SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition. 2. Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute. 3. Disarm the VTSS. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE INTRUSION MODULE SENSORS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Intrusion Module Sensors harness connector. 3. Using a volt/ohm meter set to measure capacitance, measure the capacitance of each sensor. 

Is the capacitance range of each sensor between 1nF and 3nF? Yes 



Replace the ITM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Intrusion Module Sensors in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, INTRUSION MODULE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210A-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: ITM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) receives a low charging system voltage message over the CAN Bus or detects voltage under 9.5 volts on the (A412) Fused B(+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW (A412) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE (ITM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Perform the Charging System diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the active ITM DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 3.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT THE (A412) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT

Fig. 7: Checking The Voltage At The Fused B(+) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the ITM harness connector. 2. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the voltage between the (A412) Fused B(+) circuit and ground. Compare this value to the voltage measured at the vehicle battery. Is the voltage measured at the ITM harness connector the same as measured at the battery? Yes 



Replace the ITM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (A412) Fused B(+) circuit as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210B-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) receives a high charging system voltage message over the CAN Bus or detects voltage over 16.5 volts on the (A412) Fused B(+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE (ITM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Perform the Charging System diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the active ITM DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 



Replace the ITM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2206-00-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

VIN stored in Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) does not match the VIN stored in the TIPM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE SWAPPED FROM DIFFERENT VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition. 2. Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute. 3. Disarm the VTSS.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes



Replace the ITM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Test is complete.



No

B222A-00-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) is not configured. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE CONFIGURATION DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CONFIGURE THE INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE 1. Using the scan tool under miscellaneous functions perform the initialization procedure for the Intrusion Transceiver Module. 2. With the scan tool, clear DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition. 4. Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute. 5. Disarm the VTSS. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. Using the scan tool, read DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the DTC reset? Yes



Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Test complete.



No

B223C-00-INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Internal Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) test failed. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. With a scan tool, read and record DTCs. 2. With the scan tool, clear DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition. 4. Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute. 5. Disarm the VTSS. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0010-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0010-CAN Interior Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D65) CAN C BUS(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D64) CAN C BUS(-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0155-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Instrument Cluster (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0155-Lost Communication with Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U110D-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SECURITY SIREN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously while the Vehicle Theft and Security System (VTSS) is armed. SET CONDITION:

If the Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) does not receive messages from the Siren. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (A412) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND SIREN INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE (ITM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Arm the VTSS and wait one minute. 3. Disarm the VTSS and turn the ignition on. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (A412) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit At The Siren Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Siren harness connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A412) Fused B(+) circuit in the Siren harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (A412) FUSED B(+) circuit for an open or short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 10: Checking Ground Circuit At The Siren Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z901) Ground circuit at the Siren harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the (Z901) Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. FAULTY SIREN 

Fig. 11: Checking For Faulty Siren Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC Use the DRBIII® and set up as follows: 1. Use the Scope input cable CH7058, Cable to Probe adapter CH7062, and the red and black test probes.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Connect the scope input cable to the channel one connector on the DRBIII®. Attach the red and black leads and the cable to probe adapter to the scope input cable. 3. Select DRBIII® Stand-alone. 4. Select lab scope. 5. Select Live. 6. Select 12 volt square wave. 7. Press F2 for Scope. 8. Press F2 and use the down arrow to set voltage range to 20 volts. Press F2 again when complete. 9. Disconnect the Siren harness connector. 10. Connect the black lead to the chassis ground. Connect the red lead to the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit in the Siren connector. 11. Close all doors and arm the VTSS. 12. Observe the voltage displayed on the DRBIII® Lab Scope. Is there a voltage square wave present 1 to 2 seconds? Yes 



Connect a known good siren and try to reset the DTC. If the DTC does not reset the original siren needs to be replaced. If the DTC does reset replace the ITM. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Siren Signal Control Circuit For A Short To Battery Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking Siren Signal Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the ITM harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 7.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for a short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Checking Siren Signal Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the ITM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U140E-00-IMPLAUSIBLE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION DATA RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) receives incorrect vehicle configuration information from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS SET IN TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE (ITM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CAN BUS DTCS SET IN TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 

NOTE:

Verify that the TIPM has the correct vehicle configuration before proceeding with this test step.

1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the TIPM. Are there any active CAN Bus DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Replace the ITM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



U1415-00-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING VEHICLE CONFIGURATION DATA For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) receives incorrect vehicle configuration information from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS SET IN TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE (ITM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CAN BUS DTCS SET IN TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 

NOTE:

Verify that the TIPM has the correct vehicle configuration before proceeding with this test step.

1. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the TIPM. Are there any active CAN Bus DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Replace the ITM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



U1416-00-IMPLAUSIBLE SECURITY SIREN SIGNAL RECEIVED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

For a description and operation of the Intrusion Siren, refer to SIREN , OPERATION , and refer to SIREN , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously while the Vehicle Theft and Security System (VTSS) is armed. SET CONDITION:

If the Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) does not receive messages from the Siren. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (A412) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND SIREN INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE (ITM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Arm the VTSS and wait one minute. 3. Disarm the VTSS and turn the ignition on. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (A412) FUSED B(+) OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 16: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit At The Siren Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Siren harness connector. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A412) Fused B(+) circuit in the Siren harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Repair the (A412) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or a short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 17: Checking Ground Circuit At The Siren Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z901) Ground circuit at the Siren harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Z901) Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. FAULTY SIREN 

Fig. 18: Checking For Faulty Siren Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Use the DRBIII® and set up as follows: 1. Use the Scope input cable CH7058, Cable to Probe adapter CH7062, and the red and black test probes. 2. Connect the scope input cable to the channel one connector on the DRBIII®. Attach the red and black leads and the cable to probe adapter to the scope input cable. 3. Select DRBIII® Stand-alone. 4. Select lab scope. 5. Select Live. 6. Select 12 volt square wave. 7. Press F2 for Scope. 8. Press F2 and use the down arrow to set voltage range to 20 volts. Press F2 again when complete. 9. Disconnect the Siren connector. 10. Connect the black lead to the chassis ground. Connect the red lead to the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit in the Siren connector. 11. Close all doors and arm the VTSS. 12. Observe the voltage displayed on the DRBIII® Lab Scope. Is there a voltage square wave present 1 to 2 seconds? Yes 



Connect a known good siren and try to reset the DTC. If the DTC does not reset the original siren needs to be replaced. If the DTC does reset replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Checking Siren Signal Control Circuit For A Short To Battery Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Siren harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Checking Siren Signal Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Siren harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Intrusion Transceiver Module harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 7.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for a short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. (D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Checking Siren Signal Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Intrusion Transceiver Module harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit between the Intrusion Transceiver Module and the Siren connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B1D5E-13 POWER SEAT SWITCH-CIRCUIT OPEN B1D62-2A POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK-STUCK B1D6B-11 SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D6B-12 SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1D6F-11 SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D6F-12 SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1D73-11 SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D73-12 SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1D77-11 SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D77-12 SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1D7B-00 SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE B1D7F-00 SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE B1D83-00 SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE B1D87-00 SEAT BACKREST MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE B1D8B-11 STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D8B-12 STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1D8F-11 STEERING COLUMN TILT POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D8F-12 STEERING COLUMN TILT POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1D93-00 STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE B1D97-00 STEERING COLUMN TILT MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE B1D9B-54 SEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP NOT LEARNED-MISSING CALIBRATION B210A-84 SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE B210B-85 SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE B210D-21 SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL AMPLITUDE LESS THAN MINIMUM B210E-22 SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL AMPLITUDE GREATER THAN MAXIMUM B221C-42 (MSM) MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL-GENERAL MEMORY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

U0011-00 U0013-00 U0014-00 U0016-00 U0017-00 U0141-00 U0155-00 U0203-00

FAILURE CAN INTERIOR BUS OFF PERFORMANCE CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN LOST COMMUNICATION WITH LEFT FRONT DOOR MODULE

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B1D5E-13-POWER SEAT SWITCH-CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Driver Seat Switch Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The MSMD detects an open in either driver seat switch MUX circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P309) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT OPEN (P311) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT OPEN (P28) DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 3. Cycle the Driver Seat Switch in all directions several times. 4. Wait one minute. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D5E-13-POWER SEAT SWITCH-CIRCUIT OPEN? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECKING THE (P28) DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Driver Seat Switch MUX Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Driver Seat Switch harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P28) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return circuit. Is the resistance below 40 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 5. 3. CHECKING THE (P311) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT 

Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance Between Driver Seat Front Vertical/Recliner Switch MUX Circuit & Driver Seat Switch MUX Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Driver Seat Switch harness connector. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C4 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (P311) Driver Seat Front Vertical/Recliner Switch MUX circuit and the (P28) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance between 40 and 60 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 6. 4. CHECKING THE (P309) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT 

Fig. 4: Checking Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizontal Switch MUX Circuit

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P309) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizontal Switch MUX circuit and the (P28) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return circuit. Is the resistance between 40 and 60 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Go To 7. 5. CHECKING THE (P28) DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Driver Seat Switch MUX Return Circuit For An Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C4 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (P28) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return circuit between the Driver Seat Switch harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P28) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 8. 6. CHECKING THE (P311) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking Driver Seat Front Vertical/Recliner Switch MUX Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Switch harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (P311) Driver Seat Front Vertical/Recliner Switch MUX circuit between the Driver Seat Switch harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P311) Driver Seat Front Vertical/Recliner Switch MUX circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Driver Seat Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, SEAT , REMOVAL .  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 7. CHECKING THE (P309) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizontal Switch MUX Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Switch harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (P309) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizontal Switch MUX circuit between the Driver Seat Switch harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P309) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizontal Switch MUX circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Driver Seat Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, SEAT , REMOVAL .  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Switch and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Switch and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B1D62-2A-POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK-STUCK For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSM), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The MSM will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSM also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSM in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSM based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSM perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSM will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSM will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSM will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Memory Seat Module (MSM) detects that the Driver Seat Switch is in an active position for longer than 50 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DRIVER SEAT SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Cycle the Driver Seat Switch in all directions several times. Wait one minute. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D62-2A-POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK-STUCK? Yes 



Replace the Driver Seat Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D6B-11-SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

If sensor voltage is not within a specified range. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DRIVER HORIZONTAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 3. Move the Seat Switch in the horizontal position three times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D6B-11-SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECKING THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Seat Adjuster Horizontal Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECKING THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking Driver Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1K Ohms. Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D6B-12-SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

If sensor voltage is not within a specified range. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE DRIVER HORIZONTAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Seat Switch in the horizontal position three times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D6B-11-SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECKING THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Seat Adjuster Horizontal Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL .  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECKING THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D6F-11-SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

If sensor voltage is not within a specified range. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DRIVER FRONT VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 3. Move the Seat Switch in the front vertical position three times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D6F-11-SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECKING THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 



Replace the Seat Adjuster Front Vertical Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECKING THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Driver Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D6F-12-SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

If sensor voltage is not within a specified range. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Seat Switch in the front vertical position three times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D6F-11-SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECKING THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Seat Adjuster Front Vertical Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL .  Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECKING THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit. Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D73-11-SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

If sensor voltage is not within a specified range. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DRIVER REAR VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Seat Switch in the rear vertical position three times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D73-11-SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECKING THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 



Replace the Seat Adjuster Rear Vertical Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECKING THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Checking Driver Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1K Ohms. Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D73-12-SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

If sensor voltage is not within a specified range. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE DRIVER REAR VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Seat Switch in the rear vertical position three times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D73-11-SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECKING THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 24: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Seat Adjuster Rear Vertical Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL .  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECKING THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D77-11-SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

If sensor voltage is not within a specified range. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DRIVER RECLINER SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Seat Switch in the recliner position three times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D77-11-SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECKING THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Seat Adjuster Recliner Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECKING THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 28: Checking Driver Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D77-12-SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

If sensor voltage is not within a specified range. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE DRIVER RECLINER SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Seat Switch in the recliner position three times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D77-12-SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECKING THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Seat Adjuster Recliner Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL .  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECKING THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C4 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D7B-00-SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The MSMD does not detect seat motor activation. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (G491) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER SHORTED TO GROUND (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER SHORTED TO GROUND (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DRIVER HORIZONTAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTCs? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Seat Switch in the horizontal position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B1D7B-00-SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECKING THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 11. 4. CHECKING THE (G491) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Sense Circuit & Driver Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit and the (G491) Driver Seat Horizontal Sensor Ground circuit. Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 12. 5. CHECKING THE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 13.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECKING THE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes 

Go To 14.

No Go To 7. 7. CHECKING THE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Horizontal Switch in the forward position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Go To 15. 8. CHECKING THE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 38: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Horizontal Switch in the rearward position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Go To 17. 9. CHECKING THE DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Checking The Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit and the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Horizontal Switch in the forward position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

that of a direct connection to the battery. Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 10.

No Go To 19. 10. CHECKING THE DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: Checking The Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Horizontal Switch in the rearward position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Seat Adjuster Horizontal Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL . Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 11. CHECKING THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit between the Driver Seat Horizontal Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 12. CHECKING THE (G491) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 42: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Sensor Ground Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (G491) Driver Seat Horizontal Sensor Ground circuit between the Driver Seat Horizontal Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G491) Driver Seat Horizontal Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 13. CHECKING THE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 14. CHECKING THE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 15. CHECKING THE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 45: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 16. 16. CHECKING THE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver Circuit For An Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit between the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Driver Seat Horizontal Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit. Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 17. CHECKING THE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 18. 18. CHECKING THE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Circuit For An Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit between the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Driver Seat Horizontal Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 19. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Horizontal Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Horizontal Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D7F-00-SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The MSMD does not detect seat motor activation. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (G494) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

RESISTANCE DRIVER FRONT VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTCs? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Seat Switch in the front vertical position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B1D7F-00-SEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECKING THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 11. 4. CHECKING THE (G494) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 51: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Sense Circuit & Driver Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and the (G494) Driver Seat Front Vertical Sensor Ground circuit. Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 5.

No Go To 12. 5. CHECKING THE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 52: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes 

Go To 13.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECKING THE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 14.

No Go To 7. 7. CHECKING THE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 54: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver Circuit

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Front Vertical Switch in the up position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Go To 15. 8. CHECKING THE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 55: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Front Vertical Switch in the down position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Go To 17. 9. CHECKING THE DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Checking The Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit and the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Front Vertical Switch in the up position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

that of a direct connection to the battery. Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 10.

No Go To 19. 10. CHECKING THE DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Checking The Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Front Vertical Switch in the down position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Seat Adjuster Front Vertical Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 11. CHECKING THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Checking Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit between the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 12. CHECKING THE (G494) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Checking Driver Seat Front Vertical Sensor Ground Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (G494) Driver Seat Front Vertical Sensor Ground circuit between the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G494) Driver Seat Front Vertical Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 13. CHECKING THE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 14. CHECKING THE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 15. CHECKING THE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 62: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 16. 16. CHECKING THE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: Checking Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver Circuit For An Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit between the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 17. CHECKING THE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 18. 18. CHECKING THE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Checking Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver Circuit For An Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit between the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 19. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Front Vertical Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D83-00-SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The MSMD does not detect seat motor activation. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (G492) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

RESISTANCE DRIVER REAR VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTCs? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Seat Switch in the rear vertical position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B1D83-00-SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECKING THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 11. 4. CHECKING THE (G492) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Sense Circuit & Driver Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and the (G492) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Sensor Ground circuit. Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 5.

No Go To 12. 5. CHECKING THE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes 

Go To 13.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECKING THE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 70: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 14.

No Go To 7. 7. CHECKING THE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 71: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Switch in the down position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Go To 15. 8. CHECKING THE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Switch in the up position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Go To 17. 9. CHECKING THE DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 73: Checking The Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit and the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Switch in the down position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

that of a direct connection to the battery. Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 10.

No Go To 19. 10. CHECKING THE DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Checking The Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Switch in the up position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Seat Adjuster Rear Vertical Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 11. CHECKING THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: Checking Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit between the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 12. CHECKING THE (G492) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 76: Checking Driver Seat Rear Vertical Sensor Ground Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (G492) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Sensor Ground circuit between the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G492) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 13. CHECKING THE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 14. CHECKING THE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 78: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 15. CHECKING THE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 79: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 16. 16. CHECKING THE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 80: Checking Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver Circuit For An Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit between the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 17. CHECKING THE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 81: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the short to ground in the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit. Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 18. 18. CHECKING THE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 82: Checking Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver Circuit For An Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit between the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 19. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Rear Vertical Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D87-00-SEAT BACKREST MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Seat Motor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The MSMD does not detect seat motor activation. The DTC will only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (G493) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DRIVER RECLINER SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTCs? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 3. Move the Seat Switch in the recline position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B1D87-00-SEAT BACKREST MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECKING THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 11. 4. CHECKING THE (G493) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 85: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Sense Circuit & Driver Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit and the (G493) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sensor Ground circuit. Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 12. 5. CHECKING THE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 13.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECKING THE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes 

Go To 14.

No Go To 7. 7. CHECKING THE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 88: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Recliner Switch in the up position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 8.

No Go To 15. 8. CHECKING THE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 89: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver Circuit

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Recliner Switch in the down position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Go To 17. 9. CHECKING THE DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Checking The Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit and the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit. 2. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Recliner Switch in the up position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

that of a direct connection to the battery. Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 10.

No Go To 19. 10. CHECKING THE DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 91: Checking The Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. While observing the test light, move the Driver Seat Recliner Switch in the down position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Seat Adjuster Recliner Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, SEAT ADJUSTER , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 11. CHECKING THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Checking Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit between the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 12. CHECKING THE (G493) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: Checking Driver Seat Recliner Position Sensor Ground Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (G493) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sensor Ground circuit between the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G493) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 13. CHECKING THE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 94: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 14. CHECKING THE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 95: Measuring Voltage Between Driver Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 15. CHECKING THE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 16. 16. CHECKING THE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 97: Checking Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit between the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 17. CHECKING THE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 98: Checking Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the short to ground in the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 18. 18. CHECKING THE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 99: Checking Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit between the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 19. 19. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Driver Seat Recliner Adjuster Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1D8B-11-STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 100: Steering Column Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The telescope motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The position sensor input is less than 1.7 volts or more than 14 ms. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P152) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 3. Move the Telescope Switch in the forward/rearward position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D8B-11-STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE POSITION SENSORCIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECKING THE (P152) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 101: Measuring Voltage Between Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and Steering Wheel Telescope Motor harness connectors. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 



Replace the Steering Column Telescope Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECKING THE (P152) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 102: Checking Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the short to ground in the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Steering Wheel Telescope Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Steering Wheel Telescope Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D8B-12-STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 103: Steering Column Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The telescope motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The position sensor input is above the maximum value for more than 14 ms. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P152) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 3. Move the Telescope Switch in the forward/rearward position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D8B-11-STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE POSITION SENSORCIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECKING THE (P152) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 104: Measuring Voltage Between Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and Steering Wheel Telescope Motor harness connectors. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Steering Column Telescope Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COLUMN , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECKING THE (P152) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 105: Measuring Voltage Between Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the short to voltage in the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Steering Wheel Telescope Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Steering Wheel Telescope Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D8F-11-STEERING COLUMN TILT POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 106: Steering Column Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The tilt motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The position sensor input is less than 1.7 volts or more than 14 ms. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P151) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND STEERING COLUMN TILT MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 3. Move the Telescope Switch in the up/down position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D8F-11-STEERING COLUMN TILT POSITION SENSORCIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECKING THE (P151) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 107: Checking Steering Wheel Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and Steering Wheel Telescope Motor harness connectors. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 



Replace the Steering Column Tilt Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECKING THE (P151) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 108: Checking Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1K Ohms. Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D8F-12-STEERING COLUMN TILT POSITION SENSOR-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 109: Steering Column Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The tilt motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The position sensor input is above the maximum value for more than 14 ms. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P151) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE STEERING COLUMN TILT MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 3. Move the Tilt Switch in the up/down position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1D8F-11-STEERING COLUMN TILT POSITION SENSORCIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECKING THE (P151) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 110: Checking Steering Wheel Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and Steering Wheel Tilt Motor harness connectors. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Steering Column Tilt Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COLUMN , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECKING THE (P151) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 111: Checking Steering Wheel Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the short to voltage in the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D93-00-STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 112: Steering Column Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, Tilt/Telescope Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The telescope motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The MSMD does not detect telescope motor activation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P152) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (G914) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P157) TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P157) TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P157) TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE STEERING COLUMN TILT MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display any tile/telescope position sensor DTCs? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the Telescope Switch in the forward/rearward position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B1D93-00-STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPE MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECKING THE (P152) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 113: Measuring Voltage Between Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Steering Column Telescope Motor harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 11. 4. CHECKING THE (G914) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 114: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit and the (G914) Sensor Ground circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 12. 5. CHECKING THE (P157) TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 115: Checking Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P157) Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 13.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 116: Measuring Voltage Between Steering Motor Common Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 14.

No Go To 7. 7. CHECKING THE (P157) TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 117: Checking Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P157) Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Telescope Switch in the forward position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Go To 15. 8. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 118: Checking Steering Motor Common Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Telescope Switch in the rearward position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Go To 17. 9. CHECKING THE TELESCOPE REARWARD DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 119: Checking Telescope Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P157) Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver circuit and the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. 2. While observing the test light, move the Telescope Switch in the forward position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 10.

No Go To 19. 10. CHECKING THE TELESCOPE FORWARD DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 120: Checking Telescope Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. While observing the test light, move the Telescope Switch in the rearward position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Steering Column Telescope Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 11. CHECKING THE (P152) TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 121: Checking Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit between the Steering Column Telescope Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P152) Telescope Steering Forward/Rearward Position Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 12. CHECKING THE (G914) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 122: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (G914) Sensor Ground circuit between the Steering Column Telescope Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes  

Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G914) Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 13. CHECKING THE (P157) TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 123: Checking Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P157) Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the short to voltage in the (P157) Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 14. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 124: Measuring Voltage Between Steering Motor Common Circuit & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit and ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 15. CHECKING THE (P157) TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 125: Checking Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P157) Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1K Ohms. Yes 



Repair the short to ground in the (P157) Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 16. 16. CHECKING THE (P157) TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 126: Checking Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P157) Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver circuit between the Steering Column Telescope Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P157) Telescope Steering Motor Forward/Rearward Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 17. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 127: Checking Steering Motor Common Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms. Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the short to ground in the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 18. 18. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 128: Checking Steering Motor Common Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit between the Steering Column Telescope Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes  

Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 19. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Steering Wheel Telescope Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Steering Wheel Telescope Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D97-00-STEERING COLUMN TILT MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 129: Steering Column Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, Tilt/Tilt Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD from the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The tilt motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

The MSMD does not detect tilt motor activation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P151) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (G914) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P153) TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P153) TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P153) TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE STEERING COLUMN TILT MOTOR MEMORY SEAT MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display any tile/tilt position sensor DTCs? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 3. Move the Tilt Switch in the up/down position three times. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B1D97-00-STEERING COLUMN TILT MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECKING THE (P151) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 130: Checking Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and Steering Wheel Tilt Motor harness connectors. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 11. 4. CHECKING THE (G914) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 131: Measuring Voltage Between Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense Circuit & Sensor Ground Circuit

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit and the (G914) Sensor Ground circuit. Is the voltage above 11 volts? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 12. 5. CHECKING THE (P153) TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 132: Checking Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P153) Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 13.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 133: Checking Steering Motor Common Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt? Yes 

Go To 14.

No Go To 7. 7. CHECKING THE (P153) TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 134: Checking Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P153) Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Tilt Switch in the up position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

that of a direct connection to the battery. Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Go To 15. 8. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 135: Checking Steering Motor Common Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit and ground. 2. While observing the test light, move the Tilt Switch in the down position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

that of a direct connection to the battery. Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Go To 17. 9. CHECKING THE TILT UP DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 136: Checking Tilt Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (P153) Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver circuit and the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. 2. While observing the test light, move the Tilt Switch in the up position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 10.

No Go To 19. 10. CHECKING THE TILT DOWN DRIVER 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 137: Checking Tilt Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. While observing the test light, move the Tilt Switch in the down position. NOTE:

The test lamp must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test lamp illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Steering Column Tilt Motor Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COLUMN , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 11. CHECKING THE (P151) TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 138: Checking Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit between the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P151) Tilt Steering Up/Down Position Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 12. CHECKING THE (G914) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 139: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (G914) Sensor Ground circuit between the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes  

Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (G914) Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 13. CHECKING THE (P153) TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 140: Checking Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P153) Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P153) Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 14. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 141: Checking Steering Motor Common Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 1 volt?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 15. CHECKING THE (P153) TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 142: Checking Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P153) Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms. Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (P153) Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 16. 16. CHECKING THE (P153) TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 143: Checking Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P153) Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver circuit between the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes 



Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P153) Tilt Steering Motor Up/Down Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 17. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 144: Checking Steering Motor Common Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the MSMD C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. Is the resistance below 1K Ohms.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 18. 18. CHECKING THE (P953) STEERING MOTOR COMMON CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 145: Checking Steering Motor Common Circuit For Open Or Excessive Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit between the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor harness connector and the MSMD harness connector. Is the resistance above 10 Ohms. Yes  

Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (P953) Steering Motor Common circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 19. 19. MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and harness connectors between the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and the MSMD. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Steering Wheel Tilt Motor and MSMD harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D9B-54-SEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP NOT LEARNED-MISSING CALIBRATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSMD), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The MSMD will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSMD also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSMD in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSMD via a MUX signal circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSMD based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSMD perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSMD will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSMD will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSMD will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

The seat motor is activated. SET CONDITION:

Seat becomes de-standardized. The seat horizontal motor is 5% past the expected soft stop position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OTHER DTCS SET IN THE MEMORY SEAT MODULE SEAT STANDARDIZATION ROUTINE NOT PERFORMED DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor or circuit performance DTCs? Yes 

Diagnose and repair the other DTCs first. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Move the seat in the full forward horizontal position. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B1D9B-54-SEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP NOT LEARNEDMISSING CALIBRATION? Yes  

With the scan tool, perform the MSMD Standardization Routine. Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B210A-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 146: Memory Seat Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSM), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The MSM will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSM also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSM in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSM based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSM perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSM will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSM will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSM will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Engine running, during seat motor operation. SET CONDITION:

The Memory Seat Module receives a low charging system voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage under 9.5 volts on the (A210) Fused B(+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW (A210) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Perform the Charging System diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine and operate the driver power seat. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC B210A-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT THE (A210) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 147: Checking The Voltage At The Fused B(+) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector. 2. Start the engine and let idle. 3. Measure the voltage between the (A210) Fused B(+) circuit and ground. Compare this value to the voltage measured at the vehicle battery. Is the voltage measured at the Memory Seat Module harness connector the same as measured at the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

battery? Yes 



Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair the (A210) Fused B(+) circuit as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B210B-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 148: Memory Seat Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSM), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The MSM will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSM also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSM in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSM based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSM perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSM will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSM will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSM will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Engine running, during seat motor operation. SET CONDITION:

The Memory Seat Module receives a high charging system voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage over 16.5 volts on the (A210) Fused B(+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Perform the Charging System diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine and operate the driver power seat. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC B210B-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE? Yes 



Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B210D-21-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL AMPLITUDE LESS THAN MINIMUM

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 149: Memory Seat Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSM), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The MSM will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSM also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSM in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSM based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSM perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSM will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSM will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSM will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Engine running, during seat motor operation. SET CONDITION:

The Memory Seat Module receives a low charging system voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage under 9.5 volts on the (A210) Fused B(+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW (A210) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT MEMORY SEAT MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Perform the Charging System diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine and operate the driver power seat. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B210D-21-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL AMPLITUDE LESS THAN MINIMUM? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT THE (A210) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 150: Checking The Voltage At The Fused B(+) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Memory Seat Module harness connector. 2. Start the engine and let idle. 3. Measure the voltage between the (A210) Fused B(+) circuit and ground. Compare this value to the voltage measured at the vehicle battery. Is the voltage measured at the Memory Seat Module harness connector the same as measured at the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

battery? Yes 



Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair the (A210) Fused B(+) circuit as necessary. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B210E-22-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL AMPLITUDE GREATER THAN MAXIMUM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSM), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The MSM will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSM also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSM in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSM based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSM perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSM will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSM will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSM will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. WHEN MONITORED:

Engine running, during seat motor operation.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Memory Seat Module receives a high charging system voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage over 16.5 volts on the (A210) Fused B(+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Perform the Charging System diagnostic procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Start the engine and operate the driver power seat. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC B210E-22-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW-SIGNAL AMPLITUDE GREATER THAN MAXIMUM? Yes  

Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B221C-42-(MSM) MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL-GENERAL MEMORY FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Memory System is made up of the Memory Seat Module (MSM), Memory Switch, Driver Seat Switch, multiple Seat Motors which also each contain a hall-effect position sensor, and the Tilt and Telescope Steering Motors, both of which contain a hall-effect position sensor. When the Driver Seat Switch is used to command seat movement, a signal is sent from the Switch to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The MSM will then command the appropriate Seat Motor or Motors to move the seat in the commanded direction as long as the Driver Seat Switch is held in that direction. When seat movement is commanded, the MSM also powers the hall-effect position sensor located in each Seat Motor. These hall-effect sensors provide feedback to the MSM in relation to the seat's position. The Tilt and Telescoping Steering operate in a similar manner, with the Tilt Switch and Telescope Switch sending a signal to the MSM via a MUX signal circuit. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor are then commanded by the MSM based on the Switch input. The Tilt Motor and Telescope Motor also each have a hall-effect position sensor. The Memory Switch is used to set and recall memory seat and steering positions. When a Memory Switch button is pressed, a signal is sent from the Switch to the Driver Door Module (DDM) via a MUX signal circuit. The DDM will then request the MSM perform the function via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. If the SET button on the Memory Switch is pressed, followed by the 1 or 2 button, the MSM will store the seat and steering position based on the position inputs received from the hall-effect position sensor. If the 1 or 2 button on the Memory Switch is pressed, the MSM will recall the stored position for that particular selection and return the seat and steering column to the stored position. Memory position may also be recalled using a linked FOBIK transmitter. For driver safety, the MSM will prevent the memory recall function from being initiated if the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position or if the vehicle is moving. For further information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Memory Seat Module (MSM) internal self test has failed. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC B221C-42-(MSM) MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNALGENERAL MEMORY FAILURE? Yes 



Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U0011-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS OFF PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 151: Memory Seat Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Memory Seat Module detects the (D265) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (+) circuit or (D264) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (-) circuit open. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (+) CIRCUIT OPEN (D264) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (-) CIRCUIT OPEN MEMORY SEAT MODULE (MSMD) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase MSMD DTCs 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read active MSMD DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D265) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (+) CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 152: Checking Can IHS Bus (125K) (+) Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (+) circuit and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Repair the (D265) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (+) circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (D264) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (-) CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 153: Checking Can IHS Bus (125K) (-) Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the voltage between the (D264) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (-) circuit and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair the (D264) CAN IHS BUS (125K) (-) circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0013-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 volts and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

A short to ground is detected on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

CONTROL MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the diagnostic test procedure for DTC U0010-CAN INTERIOR BUS.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0014-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 volts and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

A short to voltage is detected on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CONTROL MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the diagnostic test procedure for DTC U0010-CAN INTERIOR BUS.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0016-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 volts and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

A short to ground is detected on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CONTROL MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the diagnostic test procedure for DTC U0010-CAN INTERIOR BUS.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0017-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 volts and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

A short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CONTROL MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the diagnostic test procedure for DTC U0010-CAN INTERIOR BUS.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D65) CAN C BUS(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D64) CAN C BUS(-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0155-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Instrument Cluster (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0155-Lost Communication with Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0203-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH LEFT FRONT DOOR MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 volts and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Door Module Front Left (DMFL) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY LEFT FRONT DOOR MODULE CONTROL MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0203-Lost Communication with Door Module Front Left diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Memory Seat Module (MSMD) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

diagnostic procedure.

STANDARD PROCEDURE STANDARD PROCEDURE - POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. Perform Power Seat System Verification Test 1. Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors. 2. Make sure that all accessories are turned off. 3. Make sure that the battery is fully charged. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. If either the Memory Seat Module or the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor/Seat Track was replaced, the MSM Standardization Routine must be performed using the scan tool. 6. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs from all modules. 7. Operate the driver seat in all positions. 8. With the Memory Switch on the Driver's Door, program the Driver's Seat No. 1 Button to a desired position and Driver No. 2 Button to a different position. 9. Verify that both Memory positions can be recalled from the RKE transmitter and the Memory Switch on the Driver's Door. 10. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on. 11. With the scan tool, select ECU View. 12. Check for DTCs in the modules. Are DTCs present in any of the modules or is the original condition still present? Yes 

The repair is not complete. Refer to the related DTC list for the DTC that is still present.



The repair is complete.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 RESTRAINTS Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 RESTRAINTS Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B1204 PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT LOW B1205 PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH B1206 PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT OPEN B1B00 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW B1B01 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH B1B02 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN B1B03 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER B1B04 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT LOW B1B05 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT HIGH B1B06 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT OPEN B1B07 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER B1B08 PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW B1B09 PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH B1B0A PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN B1B0B PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER B1B0C PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT LOW B1B0D PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT HIGH B1B0E PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT OPEN B1B0F PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER B1B10 DRIVER KNEE BOLSTER SQUIB CIRCUIT LOW B1B11 DRIVER KNEE BOLSTER SQUIB CIRCUIT HIGH B1B12 DRIVER KNEE BOLSTER SQUIB CIRCUIT OPEN B1B13 DRIVER KNEE BOLSTER SQUIB CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER B1B18 LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW B1B19 LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH B1B1A LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN B1B1B LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER B1B20 RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW B1B21 RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH B1B22 RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN B1B23 RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER B1B50 1st ROW DRIVER SEATBELT SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW B1B51 1st ROW DRIVER SEATBELT SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH B1B52 1st ROW DRIVER SEATBELT SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 RESTRAINTS Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B1B53 B1B54 B1B55 B1B56 B1B57 B1B70-UP B1B71-UP B1B72 B1B73 B2746 B1B75 B1B76 B2749 B1BA5 B1BC7 B1C27 B1C28 B1C29 B1C2A B1C2B B1C2C B1C2D B1C2E B1C12 B1C13 B1C14 B1C16 B1C18 B1C19 B1C1A B1C1C B1CDB B1CDC B1CDD B2734 B1BD0 B1C38 B1C39 B1C3A B1C3B

1st ROW DRIVER SEATBELT SENSOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER 1st ROW PASSENGER SEATBELT SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW 1st ROW PASSENGER SEATBELT SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH 1st ROW PASSENGER SEATBELT SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN 1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT SENSOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL LEFT SIDE SATELLITE PRESSURE SENSOR 4 INTERNAL RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE PRESSURE SENSOR 4 INTERNAL AIRBAG SQUIB CONFIGURATION MISMATCH DEPLOYMENT DATA RECORD FULL LEFT SIDE SEAT THORAX SQUIB 1 LOW LEFT SIDE SEAT THORAX SQUIB 1 HIGH LEFT SIDE SEAT THORAX SQUIB 1 OPEN LEFT SIDE SEAT THORAX SQUIB 1 SHORTED TOGETHER RIGHT SIDE SEAT THORAX SQUIB 1 LOW RIGHT SIDE SEAT THORAX SQUIB 1 HIGH RIGHT SIDE SEAT THORAX SQUIB 1 OPEN RIGHT SIDE SEAT THORAX SQUIB 1 SHORTED TOGETHER DRIVER ACTIVE HEADREST CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW DRIVER ACTIVE HEADREST CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH DRIVER ACTIVE HEADREST CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN DRIVER ACTIVE HEADREST CONTROL CIRCUIT MISMATCH PASSENGER ACTIVE HEADREST CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW PASSENGER ACTIVE HEADREST CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH B1C1A -PASSENGER ACTIVE HEADREST CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN PASSENGER ACTIVE HEADREST CONTROL CIRCUIT MISMATCH PASSENGER OCCUPANT DETECTOR CIRCUIT LOW PASSENGER OCCUPANT DETECTOR CIRCUIT HIGH PASSENGER OCCUPANT DETECTOR CIRCUIT OPEN PASSENGER OCCUPANT DETECTOR SENSOR FAULT ROLL OVER INTERNAL 1st ROW DRIVER RETRACTOR TENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW 1ST ROW DRIVER RETRACTOR TENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH 1st ROW DRIVER RETRACTOR TENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN 1st ROW DRIVER RETRACTOR TENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 RESTRAINTS Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B1C47 B1C48 B1C49 B1C4A B210D B210E B212C B212D B2207 B2208 B220B B222A B223B B2255 B2722 U0002 U0141 U0170 U0172 U0171 U0173 U11AD U0175 U0176 U11B0 U1414 U1415 U142A

TOGETHER 1st ROW PASSENGER RETRACTOR TENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW 1ST ROW PASSENGER RETRACTOR TENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH 1st ROW PASSENGER RETRACTOR TENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN 1st ROW PASSENGER RETRACTOR TENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN IGNITION RUN ONLY INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER INTERNAL 1 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER INTERNAL 2 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER FIRING STORED ENERGY VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER ROLL OVER FEATURE DISABLE ORC UNLOCKED - ALL DEPLOYMENT DISABLED CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE IMPACT SENSOR 4 LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE IMPACT SENSOR 4 IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING ECU CONFIGURATION DATA IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING VEHICLE CONFIGURATION DATA IMPLAUSIBLE PRNDL SIGNAL RECEIVED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC B128E-11 B128E-12 B128E-25 B128E-92 B128F-11 B128F-12 B128F-25 B128F-92 B1290-11 B1290-12 B1290-25 B1290-92 B1291-11 B1291-12 B1291-25 B1291-92 B1292-11 B1292-12 B1292-25 B1295-92 B1293-11 B1293-12 B1293-25 B1293-92 B1295-11 B1295-12 B1295-25 B1295-92 B1296-11 B1296-12 B1296-25 B1296-92 B1297-11 B1297-12

Description PTS SENSOR 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY PTS SENSOR 1 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 1 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION PTS SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY PTS SENSOR 2 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 2 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION PTS SENSOR 3 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 3 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY PTS SENSOR 3 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 3 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION PTS SENSOR 4 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 4 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY PTS SENSOR 4 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 4 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION PTS SENSOR 5 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 5 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY PTS SENSOR 5 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 5 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION PTS SENSOR 6 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 6 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY PTS SENSOR 6 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 6 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION PTS SENSOR 8 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 8 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY PTS SENSOR 8 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 8 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION PTS SENSOR 9 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 9 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY PTS SENSOR 9 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 9 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION PTS SENSOR 10 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 10 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B1297-25 B1297-92 B1298-11 B1298-12 B1298-25 B1298-92 B210C-16 B210C-17 B2128-16 B2128-17 B21DD-16 B21DD-17 B222A-00 B2232-00 U0010-00 U0141-00 U0155-00 U0423-00 U0431-00

PTS SENSOR 10 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 10 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION PTS SENSOR 11 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PTS SENSOR 11 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY PTS SENSOR 11 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE PTS SENSOR 11 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD SYSTEM VOLTAGE-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD SYSTEM VOLTAGE-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH (PTS) PARKTRONICS INTERNAL CAN INTERIOR BUS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM (FCM/TIPM)

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B128E-11-PTS SENSOR 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 5: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B128E-12-PTS SENSOR 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B128E-12-PTS SENSOR 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Measure the voltage of the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit. 

Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes



Repair the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 3.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit and the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit for a short to the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B128E-25-PTS SENSOR 1 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA) PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT) DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B128E-92-PTS SENSOR 1 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 1. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 1 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Park Assist Signal 1 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage Of Park Assist Signal 1 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit. Is voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 10: Checking Park Assist Signal 1 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit between the Park Assist

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Module C3 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (D702) Park Assist Sensor 1 Signal circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B128F-11-PTS SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B128F-12-PTS SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B128F-12-PTS SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Measure the voltage of the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit. 

Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes



Repair the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 3.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit and the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit for a short to the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B128F-25-PTS SENSOR 2 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA) PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT) DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B128F-92-PTS SENSOR 2 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 2. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 2 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Park Assist Signal 2 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Measuring Voltage Of Park Assist Signal 2 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit. Is voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D705) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 20: Checking Park Assist Signal 2 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit between the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (D705) Park Assist Sensor 2 Signal circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1290-11-PTS SENSOR 3 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Checking Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 25: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Checking Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1290-12-PTS SENSOR 3 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1290-12-PTS SENSOR 3 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Measure the voltage of the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit. 

Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes



Repair the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 3.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit and the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit for a short to the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1290-25-PTS SENSOR 3 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA) PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT) DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1290-92-PTS SENSOR 3 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 3. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 3 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 28: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Park Assist Signal 3 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Measuring Voltage Of Park Assist Signal 3 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit. Is voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D706) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 30: Checking Park Assist Signal 3 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit between the Park Assist

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Module C3 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (D706) Park Assist Sensor 3 Signal circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1291-11-PTS SENSOR 4 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Checking Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

Fig. 34: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 35: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Checking Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1291-12-PTS SENSOR 4 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1291-12-PTS SENSOR 4 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Measure the voltage of the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit. 

Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes



Repair the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 3.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit and the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit for a short to the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1291-25-PTS SENSOR 4 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA) PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT) DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1291-92-PTS SENSOR 4 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 4. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 4 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 38: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Park Assist Signal 4 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

Fig. 39: Measuring Voltage Of Park Assist Signal 4 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit. Is voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D707) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: Checking Park Assist Signal 4 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit between the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Repair the (D707) Park Assist Sensor 4 Signal circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1292-11-PTS SENSOR 5 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 42: Checking Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

Fig. 44: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 45: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Checking Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1292-12-PTS SENSOR 5 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1292-12-PTS SENSOR 5 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Measure the voltage of the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit. 

Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes



Repair the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 3.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit and the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit for a short to the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1292-25-PTS SENSOR 5 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA) PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT) DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1295-92-PTS SENSOR 5 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 5. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 5 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Checking Park Assist Signal 5 Circuit For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

Fig. 49: Measuring Voltage Of Park Assist Signal 5 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit. Is voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D708) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 5 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Checking Park Assist Signal 5 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit between the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 5 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? No 

Repair the (D708) Park Assist Sensor 5 Signal circuit for an open.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1293-11-PTS SENSOR 6 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 51: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Checking Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

Fig. 54: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 55: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Checking Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1293-12-PTS SENSOR 6 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1293-12-PTS SENSOR 6 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Measure the voltage of the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit. 

Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes



Repair the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 3.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X702) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit and the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit for a short to the (X702) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X751) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. 

Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X751) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1293-25-PTS SENSOR 6 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA) PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT) DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1293-92-PTS SENSOR 6 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 6. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 6 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Park Assist Signal 6 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Measuring Voltage Of Park Assist Signal 6 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit. Is voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D709) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 6 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 60: Checking Park Assist Signal 6 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit between the Park Assist

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Module C3 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 6 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (D709) Park Assist Sensor 6 Signal circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1295-11-PTS SENSOR 8 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Park Assist Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 62: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1295-12-PTS SENSOR 8 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1295-12-PTS SENSOR 8 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Park Assist Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 70: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit. Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes  

Repair the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit and the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit for a short to the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Checking Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 73: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1295-25-PTS SENSOR 8 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT) DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1295-92-PTS SENSOR 8 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Park Assist Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 8. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 8 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: Checking Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts check the (D701) Park Assist Sensor No. 8 Signal circuit at the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Repair the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

Fig. 76: Checking Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground check the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit at the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector for a short to battery. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes  

Repair the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D701) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 8 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Checking Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit between the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 8 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? No 

Repair the (D701) Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal circuit for an open.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1296-11-PTS SENSOR 9 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 78: Park Assist Sensor No. 9 Signal Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 79: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 80: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 81: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 82: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 85: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1296-12-PTS SENSOR 9 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1296-12-PTS SENSOR 9 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Park Assist Sensor No. 9 Signal Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit. Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes  

Repair the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 88: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit and the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit for a short to the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 89: Checking Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1296-25-PTS SENSOR 9 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA) PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1296-92-PTS SENSOR 9 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 91: Park Assist Sensor No. 9 Signal Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 9. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 9 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Checking Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal Circuit For Short To Ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts check the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit for a short to ground at the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes  

Repair the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: Checking Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground check the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit at the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector for a short to battery. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D703) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 9 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 94: Checking Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit between the Park Assist

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Module C2 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 9 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (D703) Park Assist Sensor 9 Signal circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1297-11-PTS SENSOR 10 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 95: Park Assist Sensor No. 10 Signal Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 97: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 98: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 99: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 100: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 101: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 102: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1297-12-PTS SENSOR 10 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1297-12-PTS SENSOR 10 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 103: Park Assist Sensor No. 10 Signal Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 104: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit. Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes  

Repair the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 105: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit and the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit for a short to the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 106: Checking Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 107: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1297-25-PTS SENSOR 10 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT) DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1297-92-PTS SENSOR 10 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 108: Park Assist Sensor No. 10 Signal Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 10. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 10 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 109: Checking Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts check the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit at the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes  

Repair the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 110: Checking Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal Circuit For Short To Battery Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground check the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit at the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector for a short to battery. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes  

Repair the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D704) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 10 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 111: Checking Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal Circuit For Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit between the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 10 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (D704) Park Assist Sensor 10 Signal circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1298-11-PTS SENSOR 11 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 112: Park Assist Sensor No. 11 Signal Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects a short to ground on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR DISCONNECTED (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

A disconnected sensor will set this DTC. Verify the Park Assist Sensor is connected before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 113: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 8.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 114: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE CONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 115: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Perform this step with the Park Assist Module connected.

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 5. CHECK THE (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PARK ASSIST MODULE DISCONNECTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 116: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 117: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. CHECK THE (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 118: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 119: Park Assist Sensor Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire across the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply and (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuits. 4. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1298-12-PTS SENSOR 11 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1298-12-PTS SENSOR 11 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 120: Park Assist Sensor No. 11 Signal Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an open or short to voltage on the Park Assist Sensor Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 121: Checking Voltage Of Park Assist Sensor 8 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Park Assist Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit. Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes  

Repair the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 122: Measuring Resistance Between Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit & Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit and the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit for a short to the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 123: Checking Resistance Between Ground & Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance above 20.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN PARK ASSIST MODULE AND SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 124: Checking Resistance Of Park Assist Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1298-25-PTS SENSOR 11 - SIGNAL SHAPE / WAVEFORM FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal Sensor error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST SENSOR MEMBRANE OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT COVERING FASCIA)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PARK ASSIST SENSOR CONNECTOR OBSTRUCTION (ICE, SNOW, MUD, DIRT) DECOUPLING RING MISSING/MOUNTED WRONG OBJECTS - SUCH AS LICENSE PLATES - IN CLOSE RANGE TO THE SENSOR PARK ASSIST SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure, remove any ice, snow, mud, dirt, or other obstructions from the front/rear fascia/bumper. Also remove any ice, snow, dirt, mud, or other obstructions from the underside of the Fascia/Bumper surrounding the sensors.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. PARK ASSIST SENSOR 1. Verify that none of the possible causes mentioned above are present. Repair as necessary. 

If none of the possible causes mentioned above are present, view repair. Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1298-92-PTS SENSOR 11 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 125: Park Assist Sensor No. 11 Signal Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

If the system detects data corruption in the transmission in the internal communication line between the module and sensors, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 FOR INTERNAL SHORT 1. Disconnect Park Assist Sensor 11. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace Park Assist Sensor 11 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 126: Checking Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts check the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit at the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 127: Checking Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal Circuit For Short To Battery Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground check the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit at the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector for a short to battery. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes  

Repair the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit for a short to battery. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (D710) PARK ASSIST SENSOR 11 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 128: Checking Park Assist Sensor Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit between the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector and the Park Assist Sensor 11 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (D710) Park Assist Sensor 11 Signal circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 

Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210C-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

Park Assist Module supply voltage less than 6.5 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also inspect the related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. VERIFY OPERATION OF THE VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM 

NOTE:

Troubleshoot any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the battery is fully charged.

Are any charging system DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX NGC and perform the appropriate charging system or battery diagnostic procedure .



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B210C-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

Park Assist Module supply voltage greater than 16.0 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also inspect the related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. VERIFY OPERATION OF THE VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM 

NOTE:

Troubleshoot any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding.

NOTE:

Make sure the battery is fully charged.

Are any charging system DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX NGC and perform the appropriate charging system or battery diagnostic procedure .



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B2128-16-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 129: Park Assist Power Supply Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

Park Assist Sensor supply voltage less than 7.2 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X702) FRONT PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (IF EQUIPPED) (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND PARK ASSIST SENSOR PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK EACH PARK ASSIST SENSOR FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect one Park Assist Sensor. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. If this DTC is still active, repeat this procedure by disconnecting another Park Assist Sensor. However, if this DTC changes from active to stored, or if all sensors have been disconnected, proceed as follows: Does the scan tool still display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Park Assist Sensor that caused this DTC to change from active to stored after disconnecting it in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (X702) FRONT PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (IF EQUIPPED) 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 130: Checking Front Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit For Short To Ground (If Equipped) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If vehicle is not equipped with Front Park Assist, proceed to next test step.

NOTE:

Perform this test with all Front Park Assist Sensors disconnected.

1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X702) Front Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (X702) Front Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 131: Checking Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Perform this test with all Rear Park Assist Sensors disconnected.

1. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2128-17-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 132: Park Assist Power Supply Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Park Assist Sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the Park Assist Module.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. Each sensor has a voltage, signal, and return circuit to the module. The sensors communicate with the Park Assist Module using a dedicated serial bus communication circuit. NOTE:

The numbering system for the park assist sensors allows for up to twelve sensors on the vehicle, six front and six rear. The sensors are numbered in a clockwise manner starting at the left front bumper. The left front sensor (if equipped with front park assist) is the number 1 sensor. The numbering continues in a clockwise direction around the vehicle. Since Chrysler Group vehicles use only four rear sensors, sensor numbers 7 and 12 are omitted, so the left rear sensor is the number 11 sensor.

WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

Park Assist Sensor supply voltage greater than 9.2 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X702) FRONT PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (IF EQUIPPED) (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X702) FRONT PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE (IF EQUIPPED)

Fig. 133: Checking Front Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit For Short To Voltage (If Equipped) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If vehicle is not equipped with Front Park Assist, proceed to next test step.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C3 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage on the (X702) Front Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit. Is the voltage above 9.2 volts? Yes  

Repair the (X702) Front Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 134: Checking Park Assist Sensor Supply Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Park Assist Module C2 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage on the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 9.2 volts? Yes  

Repair the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B21DD-16-SYSTEM VOLTAGE-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

Vehicle System voltage less than 6.5-volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for chafed, pierced, pinched and partially broken wires. Also inspect the related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded or contaminated terminals.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. VERIFY OPERATION OF THE VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM 

NOTE:

Troubleshoot any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding.

NOTE:

Make sure the battery is fully charged.

Are any charging system DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX NGC and perform the appropriate charging system or battery diagnostic procedure .



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B21DD-17-SYSTEM VOLTAGE-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Vehicle in reverse. During the self-test while vehicle is in drive between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h). SET CONDITION:

Vehicle System voltage greater than 16.0 Volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. VERIFY OPERATION OF THE VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM 

NOTE:

Troubleshoot any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding.

NOTE:

Make sure the battery is fully charged.

Are any charging system DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX NGC and perform the appropriate charging system or battery diagnostic procedure .



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B222A-00-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Vehicle Line data transmitted on the CAN bus doesn't correspond with the data stored in the Park Assist

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK VEHICLE LINE IN THE PCM 1. With the scan tool, compare the vehicle line that is programmed in to the PCM to the vehicle line of the vehicle. Does the vehicle line programmed into the PCM match the vehicle? Yes 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also inspect the related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2232-00-(PTS) PARKTRONICS INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Park Assist Module detects an internal failure. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PARK ASSIST MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. REPLACE THE PARK ASSIST MODULE View Repair Repair 



Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0010-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0010-CAN Interior Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D65) CAN C BUS(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D64) CAN C BUS(-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0155-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Instrument Cluster (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0155-Lost Communication with Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0423-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Park Assist Module supply voltage between 9-16 volts. Ignition in Run/Start. SET CONDITION:

Incorrect ignition status received from the Cluster POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NO COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER DTCS STORED OR ACTIVE IN THE CLUSTER ACTIVE DTCS IN THE TIPM PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also inspect the related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CLUSTER IS ACTIVE ON THE CAN C INTERIOR BUS 1. With the scan tool, select ECU View. 2. Verify that the Cluster is active on the bus. 

Is the Cluster active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the No Response from Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. DTCS STORED OR ACTIVE IN THE CLUSTER 1. Check for Ignition Switch DTCs in the Cluster. 

Are any DTCs active or stored in the Cluster? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 4. 4. ACTIVE DTCS IN THE TIPM 1. With the scan tool, select ECU View and select TIPM. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Are any Communication DTCs active in the TIPM? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Replace and program the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



U0431-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Park Assist Module supply voltage between 9-16 Volts. Ignition in Run/Start. SET CONDITION:

Incorrect ignition status received from the TIPM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NO COMMUNICATION WITH TIPM DTCS STORED OR ACTIVE IN THE TIPM PARK ASSIST MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Park Assist Module (PAM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also inspect the related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. TIPM IS ACTIVE ON THE CAN INTERIOR BUS 1. Using the scan tool, select ECU View. 2. Verify that the TIPM is active on the bus. 

Is the TIPM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the No Response from TIPM diagnostic procedure. 3. ACTIVE DTCS IN THE TIPM 1. Using the scan tool, select ECU View and select TIPM. 2. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs. 

Are any Communication DTCs active in the TIPM? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Replace and program the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B164E-11 PASSENGER MIRROR SIGNAL LAMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1676-11 PASSENGER COURTESY LAMP CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B16A3-11 PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B16A3-15 PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN B1805-2A PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH - SIGNAL STUCK IN RANGE B185E-11 PASSENGER WINDOW CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B185E-13 PASSENGER WINDOW CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN B1862-11 PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1865-31 PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR - NO SIGNAL B1910-2A PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH - SIGNAL STUCK IN RANGE B1D11-11 PASSENGER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D14-11 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D14-12 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1D17-11 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D17-12 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1D2A-11 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D2E-11 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D36-11 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1D36-15 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN B1E6A-11 PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1E6A-15 PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN B210C-16 BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD B210C-17 BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

B21A1-00 B21DD-84 B21DD-85 B2598-54 B2598-96 B2599-54 B2599-96 B282F-11 B2831-11 B2831-15 U0010-00 U0141-00 U0155-00 U0164-00 U0203-00 U0204-00 U0209-00 U0232-00

ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - MISSING CALIBRATION DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - MISSING CALIBRATION - QUAD/CREW CAB ONLY DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PASSENGER BLIND SPOT WARNING LIGHT CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND PASSENGER BLIND SPOT WARNING INDICATOR CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN CAN INTERIOR BUS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B164E-11-PASSENGER MIRROR SIGNAL LAMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses a short low on the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit for more than

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

two seconds with the turn signal switched on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P502) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P502) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P582) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL/PUDDLE RETURN CIRCUIT (P502) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT (P502) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. For others, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P502) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 2: Checking Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C2 connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit at the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P502) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 3: Measuring Resistance Between Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver Circuit And Passenger

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Mirror Vertical/Common/Horizontal Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit (C2-9) and each Passenger Mirror Driver circuit in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P502) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (P582) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL/PUDDLE RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Checking Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver Circuit For Short To Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

The Ohmmeter positive lead must be connected to the (P582) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Return circuit and the negative lead to the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit for the test results to be valid.

1. Measure the resistance between the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit and the (P582) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Return circuit at the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 200.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee





Repair the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit for a short to the (P582) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Return/Puddle circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P502) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Sensor Ground Or Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit (C2-9) and

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

all sensor ground and return circuits. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair the (P502) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal Driver circuit for a short to a sensor ground or return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1676-11-PASSENGER COURTESY LAMP CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Passenger Door Handle Lamp Driver Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake and the instrument panel lamps are on. SET CONDITION:

When the Passenger Door Handle Lamp Driver circuit falls below 3.0 volts for over 1450 ms. and the above conditions are met, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (M46) PASSENGER DOOR HANDLE LAMP CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND (M46) PASSENGER DOOR HANDLE LAMP CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (M461) PASSENGER DOOR HANDLE LAMP RETURN PASSENGER DOOR HANDLE LAMP PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the park lamps on. 4. Open the passenger door. 5. Wait 30 seconds. 6. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1676-11-PASSENGER COURTESY LAMP CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. PASSENGER DOOR HANDLE LAMP SHORTED 1. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Turn the park lamps off. 4. Remove the inner door panel trim in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PANEL, DOOR TRIM , REMOVAL . 5. Ensure the Passenger Door Handle Lamp connector is disconnected. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. Turn the park lamps on. 8. Wait one minute. 9. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B1676-11-PASSENGER COURTESY LAMP CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as Active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Passenger Door Handle Lamp.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (M46) PASSENGER DOOR HANDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking Passenger Door Courtesy Lamp Driver Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Turn the park lamps off. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C5 connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (M46) Passenger Door Handle Lamp Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (M46) Passenger Door Handle Lamp Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. (M46) PASSENGER DOOR HANDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (M461) PASSENGER DOOR HANDLE LAMP RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 8: Checking Passenger Door Handle Lamp Driver Circuit For Short To Passenger Door Handle Lamp Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (M46) Passenger Door Handle Lamp Driver circuit and the (M461) Passenger Door Handle Lamp Return circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the short between the (M46) Passenger Door Handle Lamp Driver circuit and the (M461) Passenger Door Handle Lamp Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B16A3-11-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Passenger Window Switch Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake, the park lamps are on and the window lock out switch is on. SET CONDITION:

When the Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit falls below 3.0 Volts for over 25 ms. and the above conditions are met. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q936) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH RETURN WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Make sure the passenger window lock out switch is on. 4. Turn the park lights on. 5. Wait 30 seconds. 6. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B16A3-11-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED

Fig. 10: Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch Harness Connector End View

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch harness connector. Make sure the passenger window lock out switch is on and the park lamps are still on. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B16A3-11-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Window/Door Lock Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Checking Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver Circuit Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Turn the park lamps off. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C5 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (E34) Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the short to ground in the (E34) Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q936) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 12: Checking Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver Circuit Shorted To The Passenger Window Switch Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (E34) Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit and the (Q936) Passenger Window Switch Return circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (E34) Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit for a short to the (Q936) Passenger Window Switch Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B16A3-15-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Passenger Window Switch Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit current draw is greater than 120mA for over 2000 ms. and the switch illumination output is turned off or there is no current draw when the switch illumination is turn on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (Q936) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Make sure the passenger window lock out switch is on. 3. Make sure the ignition is on. 4. Turn the park lamps are on. 5. Wait 30 seconds. 6. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B16A3-15-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and harness connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 14: Checking Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Make sure the park lamps and the lock out switch are still on. Turn the panel lamps fully on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

6. Measure the voltage between the (E34) Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 10.0 Volts? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER WIRE OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Measuring Resistance Of Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver Circuit Between Passenger Door Module C5 Harness Connector And Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C5 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (E34) Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit between the Passenger Door Module C5 harness connector and the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 2.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (E34) Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. (Q936) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance Of Passenger Window Switch Return Circuit Between Passenger

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Door Module C5 Harness Connector And Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q936) Passenger Window Switch Return circuit between the Passenger Door Module C5 harness connector and the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch harness connector. Is the resistance above 2.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (Q936) Passenger Window Switch Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. (E34) PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Measuring Voltage Between Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver Circuit And Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between the (E34) Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes 



Repair the short to voltage in the (E34) Passenger Window Switch Illumination Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1805-2A-PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH - SIGNAL STUCK IN RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously SET CONDITION:

When the Door Lock/Unlock Switch is stuck for over 30 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBSTRUCTION IN SWITCH DOOR LOCK SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Operate the Passenger Door Lock Switch in all positions several times. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1805-2A-PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SIGNAL STUCK IN RANGE? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. DOOR LOCK SWITCH 1. Check the switch for any objects that could cause a sticking condition. 

Was anything found that could cause a sticking condition? Yes  

Clean or remove the object as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B185E-11-PASSENGER WINDOW CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Passenger Window Driver Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

If either one of the Window Driver circuits are open, the motor will be totally inoperative. To lower the window, voltage is applied to the (Q22) Window Driver (Down) circuit and the (Q12) Window Driver (UP) circuit remains grounded in the module. To drive the window up, the circuits are reversed. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When both Passenger Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are grounded during a window movement command. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q22) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q12) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q22) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q12) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP) CIRCUIT WINDOW MOTOR SHORTED PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Try to operate the Passenger Window up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B185E-11-PASSENGER WINDOW CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. WINDOW MOTOR SHORTED 

Fig. 19: Passenger Window Motor Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

3. 4. 5. 6.

Disconnect the Passenger Window Motor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Operate the Passenger Window switch up and down several times. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B185E-11-PASSENGER WINDOW CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Passenger Window Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, WINDOW REGULATOR , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (Q22) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Passenger Window Driver (Down) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C4 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q22) Passenger Window Driver (Down) circuit. Is the resistance below 10, 000 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the short to ground in the (Q22) Passenger Window Driver (Down) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 4. (Q12) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Passenger Window Driver (Up) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q12) Passenger Window Driver (Up) circuit. Is the resistance below 10, 000 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the short to ground in the (Q12) Passenger Window Driver (Up) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Go To 5. 5. (Q22) DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q12) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP) CIRCUIT 

Fig. 22: Measuring Resistance Between Passenger Window Driver (Down) Circuit And Passenger Window Driver (Up) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q22) Passenger Window Driver (Down) circuit and the (Q12) Passenger Window Driver (Up) circuit. Is the resistance below 10, 000 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee





Repair the (Q22) Passenger Window Driver (Down) circuit for a short to the (Q12) Passenger Window Driver (Up) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B185E-13-PASSENGER WINDOW CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Passenger Window Driver Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

If either one of the Window Driver circuits are open, the motor will be totally inoperative. To lower the window, voltage is applied to the (Q22) Window Driver (Down) circuit and the (Q12) Window Driver (UP) circuit remains grounded in the module. To drive the window up, the circuits are reversed. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When one or both Driver Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are not supplied with voltage, when they should be, during a window movement command for more than 2000 ms. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q22) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) CIRCUIT OPEN (Q12) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP) CIRCUIT OPEN WINDOW MOTOR (REGULATOR) PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Operate the Passenger Window switch up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B185E-13-PASSENGER WINDOW CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. WINDOW MOTOR OR CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 24: Checking Window Motor Or Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Window Motor harness connector. 3. Connect a test light between the (Q12) Passenger Window Driver (Up) circuit and the (Q22) Passenger Window Driver (Down) circuit. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Trip the driver door latch to the closed position. 6. Operate the Passenger Window switch up and down several times while observing the test light.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly when the switch is pressed in both directions? With the express up window, the test light will only flash momentarily each time the switch is activated. Yes 



Replace the Passenger Window Motor (regulator) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, WINDOW REGULATOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (Q22) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: Checking Passenger Window Driver (Down) Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C4 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (Q22) Passenger Window Driver (Down) circuit between the Passenger Door Module C4 module harness connector and the Passenger Window Motor (Cavity 3 LHD/ Cavity 1 RHD) in the harness connector. Is the resistance above 2.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (Q22) Passenger Window Driver (Down) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (Q12) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP) CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Checking Passenger Window Driver (Up) Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q12) Passenger Window Driver (Up) circuit between the Passenger Door Module C4 module harness connector and the Passenger Window Motor (Cavity 1 LHD/ Cavity 3 RHD) in the harness connector. Is the resistance above 2.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (Q12) Passenger Window Driver (Up) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

Yes 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1862-11-PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Passenger Window Driver Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The window motor contains a hall effect sensor to detect the window position. A hall effect sensor is a transducer that varies its output voltage in response to changes in magnetic field. If the motor looses its counts, it may perform erratically or in very short movements. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit falls below 0.8 of a Volt for over two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q306) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND WINDOW MOTOR SHORTED PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Operate the Passenger Window switch up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1862-11-PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2. WINDOW MOTOR SHORTED

Fig. 28: Passenger Window Motor Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Passenger Window Motor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Operate the Passenger Window switch up and down several times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

6. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1862-11-PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Window Motor (regulator) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, WINDOW REGULATOR , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (Q306) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C4 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q306) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (Q306) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1865-31-PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR - NO SIGNAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Passenger Window Driver Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The window motor contains a hall effect sensor to detect the window position. A hall effect sensor is a transducer that varies its output voltage in response to changes in magnetic field. If the motor looses its counts, it may perform erratically or in very short movements. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Passenger Window Motor Hall Sensor does not generate a signal during a window movement. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q990) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q990) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT (Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN WINDOW MOTOR DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Operate the Passenger Window switch up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1865-31-PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR - NO SIGNAL? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Checking Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal For Short To Ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Passenger Window Motor harness connector. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C4 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the Passenger Window Hall Sensor A signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (Q990) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Checking Passenger Window Hall Sensor Return Circuit For Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q990) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Return circuit between the Passenger Door Module C4 harness connector and the Passenger Window Motor harness connector. Is the resistance above 2.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (Q990) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Checking Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit between the Passenger Door Module C4 harness connector and the Passenger Window Motor harness connector. Is the resistance above 2.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the open in the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. (Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q990) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Checking Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal Circuit For Short To Passenger Window Hall Sensor Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit and the (Q990) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Return circuit. Is the resistance below 10, 000 Ohms? Yes 



No

Repair the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit for a short to the (Q990) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Window Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, WINDOW REGULATOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1910-2A-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH - SIGNAL STUCK IN RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously SET CONDITION:

When the Passenger Window Switch is stuck for over 30 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBSTRUCTION IN SWITCH PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Operate the Passenger Window Switch in all positions several times. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1910-2A-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH - SIGNAL STUCK IN RANGE? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. WINDOW SWITCH 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

1. Check the switch for any objects that could cause a sticking condition. Was anything found that could cause a sticking condition? Yes  

Clean or remove the object as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passenger Window Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D11-11-PASSENGER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The mirror position sensor is used in conjunction with the memory system. Anytime the mirror changes position, the sensor changes its value. That value is stored in the door module. When a command from the memory set switch is received, the module will position the mirror to the exact position chosen by the particular driver.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses a short low on the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit for more than two seconds with the output turned on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display: B1D11-11-PASSENGER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 36: Measuring Resistance Of 5-Volt Supply Circuit Between Ground And Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY MIRROR SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Checking 5-Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Any Mirror Sensor Ground Or Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Module C2 connector. 2. Measure the residence between the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit (C1-10) and all Mirror Sensor Ground and Return circuits. Is the resistance below 1.2K Ohms on any measurements? Yes 



Repair the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit for a short to a Mirror Sensor Ground or Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 38: Checking 5-Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Any Passenger Mirror Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit (C1-10) and all Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D14-11-PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The mirror position sensor is used in conjunction with the memory system. Anytime the mirror changes position, the sensor changes its value. That value is stored in the door module. When a command from the memory set switch is received, the module will position the mirror to the exact position chosen by the particular driver.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses a short low on the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY MIRROR SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display; B1D14-11-PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit. Repair as necessary. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 40: Measuring Resistance Of Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal Circuit Between Ground And Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit between ground and the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY MIRROR SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Checking Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal Circuit For A Short To Any Mirror Sensor Ground Or Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Module C2 connector. 2. Measure the residence between the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit and all Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground and Return circuits at the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 1.2K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for a short to a Mirror Sensor Ground or Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 42: Checking Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal Circuit For A Short To Any Passenger Mirror Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit (C1-7)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

and all Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D14-12-PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The mirror position sensor is used in conjunction with the memory system. Anytime the mirror changes position, the sensor changes its value. That value is stored in the door module. When a command from the memory set switch is received, the module will position the mirror to the exact position chosen by the particular driver.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses more than 400 mA current on the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit or an open or a short high on the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY CIRCUIT DRIVER CIRCUIT (A857) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY CIRCUIT DRIVER CIRCUIT (A857) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display; B1D14-12-PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit. Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 44: Checking Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal Circuit And 5-Volt Supply Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. 5. Measure the voltage between ground and the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. Is there any Voltage present on either circuit? Yes 



Repair all circuits with Voltage present for a short to Voltage. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

NOTE:

In this step we are measuring the 5-Volt Supply voltage at the Door Module. It should not be over 5.2 volts.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) harness connectors from the Door Module connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between ground and the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit at the Door Module (C1Pin 10) (Module Side) socket. Is the Voltage above 5.2 Volts? Yes 



No

Replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 45: Checking Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground circuit in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance above 3.0K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee





Repair the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for an open. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY OF THE CIRCUIT DRIVER CIRCUITS 

NOTE:

We are now checking the wiring and the mirror for any crossed circuits.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Checking 5-Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Any Of The Circuit Driver Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between the (A857) 5-Volt Supply circuit (C1-Cavity 10) and all circuit Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) harness connectors. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms between the (A857) 5-Volt Supply and any of the circuit Driver circuits? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 20K Ohms for a short to the (A857) 5-Volt Supply circuit. If the wiring harness and connectors are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY CIRCUIT DRIVER CIRCUITS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Checking Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal Circuit For A Short To Any Circuit Driver Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit (C1Cavity 7) and all circuit Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) harness connectors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 20K Ohms between the (P64) circuit and any of the circuit Driver circuits? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 20K Ohms for a short to the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit. If the wiring harness and connectors are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK (P64) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A OPEN IN THE DOOR MODULE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Checking Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal Circuit For A Open In The Door Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) harness connectors to the Passenger Door Module. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Using a scan tool, record and erase the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

4. Using a jumper wire, connected to ground, back probe the (P64) Passenger Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit (C1-Cavity 7). NOTE:

The graphic shows the connector terminal end view. Back probe the wire end of the terminal. Use caution not to damage the wire.

5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1D14-11-PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 



Replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D17-11-PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The memory system is able to store and recall all exterior outside mirror positions. The system can be set for two different drivers. The memory mirrors have a variable resistor (potentiometer) that measures the resistance of the vertical and the horizontal position of the mirror. This value changes anytime the mirror is moved. WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses a short low on the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUITS (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUITS PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the can tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display B1D17-11-PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 50: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) harness connector from the Door Module. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short to ground in the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit. If the wiring harness and harness connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (P66) PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 51: Measuring Resistance Between Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal Circuit And Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the residence between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 1.0K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for a short to the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground circuit. If the wiring harness and harness connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY OTHER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUITS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Checking Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal Circuit For A Short To Any Other Mirror Sensor Ground Or Return Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) harness connector from the Door Module. 2. Measure the residence between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit and all other mirror sensor ground and return circuits. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Positional Signal circuit and any other Ground or Return circuit? Yes 



Repair the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for a short to a Sensor Ground or Return circuit. If the wiring harness and harness connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Checking Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal Circuit For A Short To Any Passenger Mirror Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit (C1-

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

9) and Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) harness connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit. If the wiring harness and harness connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and harness connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and harness connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D17-12-PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 54: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The mirror position sensor is used in conjunction with the memory system. Anytime the mirror changes position, the sensor changes its value. That value is stored in the door module. When a command from the memory set switch is received, the module will position the mirror to the exact position chosen by the particular driver.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses more than 400 mA current on the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit or an open or a short high on the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY CIRCUIT DRIVER CIRCUIT (A857) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY CIRCUIT DRIVER CIRCUIT (A857) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Is the DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, use the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide and inspect the wiring and connectors.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 55: Measuring Voltage Of Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal Circuit Between Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 Connector And Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the Voltage of the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector and ground. 5. Measure the voltage of the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector and ground. Is there any Voltage present on either circuit? Yes 



Repair all circuits with Voltage present for a short to Voltage. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY 

NOTE:

In this step we are measuring the 5-Volt Supply voltage at the Door Module. It should not be over 5.2 volts.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) harness connectors from the Door Module connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between ground and the (A857) 5-volt Supply circuit at the Door Module (C1Pin 10) (Module Side) socket. Is the Voltage above 5.2 Volts? Yes



Replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 4.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

4. CHECK (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 56: Checking Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit and the (P66) Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground circuit in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance above 3.0K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for an open. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee



accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (A857) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY OF THE CIRCUIT DRIVER CIRCUITS 

NOTE:

We are now checking the wiring and the mirror for any crossed circuits.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Checking 5-Volt Supply Circuit For A Short To Any Of The Circuit Driver Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between the (A857) 5-Volt Supply circuit (C1-Cavity 10) and all circuit Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) harness connectors. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms between the (A857) 5-Volt Supply and any of the circuit Driver circuits? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 20K Ohms for a short to the (A857) 5-Volt Supply circuit. If the wiring harness and connectors are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY CIRCUIT DRIVER CIRCUITS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Checking Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal Circuit For A Short To Any Circuit Driver Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit (C1Cavity 9) and all circuit Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) harness connectors. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms between the (P68) circuit and any of the circuit Driver circuits? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 20K Ohms for a short to the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit. If the wiring harness and connectors are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK (P68) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A OPEN IN THE DOOR MODULE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Checking Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal Circuit For A Open In The Door Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) harness connectors to the Passenger Door Module. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Using a scan tool, record and erase the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 4. Using a jumper wire, connected to ground, back probe the (P68) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit (C1-Cavity 9).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The graphic shows the connector terminal end view. Back probe the wire end of the terminal. Use caution not to damage the wire.

5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1D17-11-PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 



Replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D2A-11-PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Mirror Vertical Driver circuit supplies battery voltage for the mirror up position and ground for the mirror down position. The Mirror Common Driver supplies battery voltage for the mirror Down position and ground for the mirror up position. WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses a short low on the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY OTHER PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT. (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY RETURN OR GROUND CIRCUITS PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display: B1D2A-11-PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE DOOR MODULE NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Here we are checking the Door Module for an internal short.

Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 harness connectors. Using a scan tool, record and erase the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

NOTE:

The scan tool will display several High or Open DTCs when the connectors are disconnected.

Does the scan tool display: B1D2A-11-PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Measuring Resistance Of Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver Circuit Between Ground And Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit between ground and the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY OTHER PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUITS 

Fig. 62: Checking Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Other Passenger Mirror Driver Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit (C2-6) and all other Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10.0 Ohms for either measurement? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee





Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10.0 Ohms for a short to the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUITS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: Checking Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground Or Return Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit (C2-6) and all Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground or Return circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 and C1 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms between the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit and any of the Ground or Return circuits? Yes 



Repair the (P72) Passenger Mirror Vertical Driver circuit for a short to the Return or Ground circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D2E-11-PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit supplies battery voltage for the mirror left position and ground for the mirror right position. The Mirror Common Driver supplies battery voltage for the mirror right position and ground for the mirror left position. WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses a short low on the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit for more than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT (P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR SIGNAL RETURN OR GROUND CIRCUIT PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display: B1D2E-11-PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P72) PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE DOOR MODULE NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Here we are checking the Door Module for an internal short.

Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 harness connectors. Using a scan tool, record and erase the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Driver Outside Rearview Mirror. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

NOTE:

The scan tool will display several High or Open DTCs when the connectors are disconnected.

Does the scan tool display: B1D2E-11-PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Measuring Resistance Of Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver Circuit Between Ground And Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit at the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 66: Checking Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver Circuit For A Short To Another Passenger Mirror Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit (C2-8) and the other Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10.0 Ohms for either measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10.0 Ohms for a short to the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P74) PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUITS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Checking Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground Or Return Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit and each Passenger Mirror Sensor Ground and Return circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 and C1 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms between the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit and any of the Ground or Return circuits? Yes 



Repair the (P74) Passenger Mirror Horizontal Driver circuit for a short to the Ground or Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D36-11-PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses a short low on the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for more than two

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

seconds with the heater switched on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT. (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A PASSENGER MIRROR RETURN OR GROUND CIRCUIT (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C170) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Turn the rear defogger on. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display: B1D36-11-PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 69: Measuring Resistance Of Passenger Mirror Heater Driver Circuit Between Ground And Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C2 connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit between ground and the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 70: Measuring Resistance Between Passenger Mirror Heater Driver Circuit And Passenger Mirror Horizontal/Vertical/Common Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit (C2-4) and all Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (C170) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Measuring Resistance Between Passenger Mirror Heater Driver Circuit And Passenger Mirror Heater Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit and the (C170) Passenger Mirror Heater Return circuit at the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 3.0 Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to the (C170) Passenger Mirror Heater Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee



REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Checking Passenger Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Passenger Mirror Ground Or Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit (C2-4) and each Passenger Mirror Ground and Return circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 and C1 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms between the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit and any Ground or Return circuit? Yes 



Repair the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to the Passenger Mirror Ground or Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1D36-15-PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 73: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses an open or a short high on the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for more

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

than two seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (C170) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE ANY PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION - HEATER OFF 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 5. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 6. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display; B1D36-15-PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION - HEATER ON 1. Turn the rear defogger on. 2. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display; B1D36-15-PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 3. Otherwise, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Measuring Voltage Of Passenger Mirror Heater Driver Circuit Between Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 Connector And Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C2 connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage of the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit between the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee





Repair the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit for a short to voltage. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT AND (C170) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 75: Measuring Resistance Between Passenger Mirror Heater Driver Circuit And Passenger Mirror Heater Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit and the (C170) Passenger Mirror Heater Return circuit at the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 9.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit or the (C170) Passenger Mirror Heater Return circuit for an open. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. CHECK (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 76: Measuring Resistance Between Passenger Mirror Heater Driver Circuit And Passenger Mirror Horizontal/Vertical/Common Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit (C2-4) and all Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 

Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee



REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK (C17) PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ALL OTHER PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUITS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Checking Passenger Mirror Heater Driver Circuit For A Short To All Other Passenger Mirror Driver Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit (C2-4) and all other Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 and C1 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms between the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit and any Passenger Mirror Driver circuit? Yes 



Repair the short between the (C17) Passenger Mirror Heater Driver circuit and the other Passenger Mirror Driver circuits. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E6A-11-PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 78: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

When one of the Mirror Fold or Unfold driver circuits are shorted to ground for over 30 seconds.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PASSENGER MIRROR ASSEMBLY PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Operate the Mirror Fold switch in both directions three times. 6. Wait 30 seconds. 7. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1E6A-11-PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit. Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. INSPECT MIRROR CONNECTIONS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 79: Mirror Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror connector at the Passenger Door Module C2 harness connector. 3. Inspect the wiring and connectors between the mirror and the Passenger Door Module.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. MIRROR ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition on 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Operate the Mirror Fold switch in both directions three times. 6. Wait 30 seconds. 7. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B1E6A-11-PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 



Replace the Drivers Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passenger Folding Mirror assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1E6A-15-PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 80: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

When one of the Mirror Fold or Unfold Driver circuits are shorted to battery voltage or the circuit is open for

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

approximately 30 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P695) PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P692) PASSENGER MIRROR UNFOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P695) PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT OR (P692) PASSENGER MIRROR UNFOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (P695) PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT. (P695) PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY PASSENGER MIRROR ACCESSORY DRIVER CIRCUIT PASSENGER FOLDING MIRROR ASSEMBLY PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 6. Turn the puddle lamps on, if equipped with puddle lamp mirror. 7. Turn on the rear window defogger. 8. Operate the Mirror Fold switch in both directions three times. 9. Wait 30 seconds. 10. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1E6A-15-PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



The condition that caused this symptom is currently not present. Check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for chafed, pierced, pinched and partially broken wires. Also, inspect the related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded or contaminated terminals. Repair as necessary.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (P695) PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT AND (P692) PASSENGER MIRROR UNFOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 81: Checking Passenger Mirror Fold Driver Circuit & Passenger Mirror Unfold Driver Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (P695) Passenger Mirror Fold Driver circuit and the (P692) Passenger Mirror Unfold Driver circuit at the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 9.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (P695) Passenger Mirror Fold Driver circuit or the (P692) Passenger Mirror Unfold Driver circuit for an open. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Folding Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK (P695) PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT AND (P692) PASSENGER MIRROR UNFOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 82: Checking Passenger Mirror Fold Driver Circuit & Passenger Mirror Unfold Driver Circuit

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P695) Passenger Mirror Fold Driver circuit in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. 3. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P692) Passenger Mirror Unfold Driver circuit in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is there any voltage present in either terminal? Yes 



Repair the (P695) Passenger Mirror Fold Driver circuit or the (P692) Passenger Mirror Unfold Driver circuit for a short to voltage. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Folding Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (P695) PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Checking Passenger Mirror Fold Driver Circuit For A Short To A Passenger Mirror Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P695) Passenger Mirror Fold Driver circuit (C2-1) and all Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 

Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (P695) Passenger Mirror Fold Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee



MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (P695) PASSENGER MIRROR FOLD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO A PASSENGER MIRROR ACCESSORY DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Checking Passenger Mirror Fold Driver Circuit For A Short To A Passenger Mirror Accessory Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C1 connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (P695) Passenger Mirror Fold Driver circuit (C2-1) and each of the Passenger Mirror Accessory Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 and C1 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms between the (P695) Passenger Mirror Fold Driver circuit and any Passenger Mirror Driver circuit? Yes 



Repair the (P695) Passenger Mirror Fold Driver circuit for a short to a Passenger Mirror Accessory Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210C-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 85: Passenger Door Module Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Anytime the module senses voltage input below 8.0 Volts for more than four seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC (A214) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT HAS HIGH RESISTANCE (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT HAS HIGH RESISTANCE PASSENGER DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. Using the scan tool, read the active Powertrain Control Module DTCs. Are there any PCM Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs in the Door Module. 

Does the scan tool display B210C-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (A214) FUSED B(+) OR (Z919) GROUND CIRCUITS RESISTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Checking Fused B(+) Circuits Using 12-Volt Test Light Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C3 connector. Turn the ignition on. Test the (A214) Fused B(+) circuits by connecting a 12-volt test light between the Fused B(+) circuit and the (Z919) Ground circuits in the door module C3 connector. The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee



MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test the (A214) Fused B(+) and the (Z919) Ground circuits to determine which one has the high resistance. Repair the necessary circuit for high resistance. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210C-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Passenger Door Module Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram,refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Anytime the module senses voltage input above 16.0 volts for more than four seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC PASSENGER DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read the active Powertrain Control Module DTCs. Are there any active PCM Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. With the scan tool, read the active door module DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display; B210C-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE INPUT - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD? Yes 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B21A1-00-ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

Whenever the module detects a power on reset or a reflash, this code will set. This code is for information only. No repair is necessary. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES MODULE WAS RE-FLASHED MODULE WAS RESET DIAGNOSTIC TEST

This DTC is for information only. At some time the module was re-flashed or was reset during a power on operation. No repair is necessary. B21DD-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the battery voltage was below 10.0 volts for over four seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module DTCs. Are there any Charging or Battery DTCs present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the active charging system or battery DTC diagnostic procedure .



This code is for information only. At some time there was a low battery system voltage. Check the battery and charging system in accordance with the Service Information.

No

B21DD-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the system voltage was above 16.0 volts for over four seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES HIGH BATTERY SYSTEM VOLTAGE CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module DTCs. Are there any Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the active charging system or battery DTC diagnostic procedure .



This code is a CAN system message for information only. Check the charging system in accordance with the Service Information.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

B2598-54-DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - MISSING CALIBRATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The express up feature is accomplished by the door module sensing the exact position of the window at all times. This is done by the module reading the counts of the hall sensor located in the window motor. Whenever the module looses track of the window position, it will not allow the express feature to operate and will set this DTC. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the window motor is operating. SET CONDITION:

When the Door Module has lost the parameters for window travel. This code may set anytime the battery or the door module connector is disconnected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes MODULE NOT CALIBRATED EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT (DMFL) NOTE:

If there are any other Power Window DTCs, repair them before continuing.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Operate the Driver Window switch up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B2598-54-DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - MISSING CALIBRATION? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. WINDOW MODULE NOT CALIBRATED 1. Activate the window to the full up position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 2. Activate the window to the full down position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 3. Again activate the window to the full up position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 4. Lower the window all the way down then press and release the switch to the express up position. 

Did the window move to the full up position? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Move the Express Window Switch from the idle position to the up position and then to the express up position. 

Is there two definite detent positions felt? Yes 



Replace the Door Module Front Left in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Express Window Switch in accordance with the service information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

B2598-96-DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

When the door module senses an internal fault, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT (DMFL) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Operate the Driver Window up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B2598-96-DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE? Yes 



Replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. If this code ever repeats, replace the door module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2599-54-DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - MISSING CALIBRATION - QUAD/CREW CAB ONLY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

This code can set anytime the battery or the door module connector is disconnected. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the window motor is operating. SET CONDITION:

When the Door Module has lost the parameters for window travel. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes MODULE NOT CALIBRATED EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If there are any other Power Window DTCs, repair them before continuing.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Operate the Passenger Window switch up and down several times. Wait 30 seconds. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B2599-54-DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - MISSING CALIBRATION? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. WINDOW MODULE NOT CALIBRATED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

1. Operate the window to the full up position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 2. Operate the window to the full down position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 3. Again operate the window to the full up position and continue to hold the switch for an additional two seconds. 4. Lower the window all the way down then press and release the switch to the express up position. Did the window move to the full up position? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Move the Passenger Express Window Switch from the idle position to the up position and then to the express up position. 

Is there two definite detent positions felt? Yes 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passenger Express Window Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, POWER WINDOW , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2599-96-DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When the door module senses an internal fault, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Operate the Passenger Window up and down several times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display B2599-96-DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE ? Yes 



Replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. If this code ever repeats, replace the door module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B282F-11-PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 88: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Door Module senses a short low on the (M42) Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for more than two

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

seconds with the lamp switched on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (M42) PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (M42) PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANY PASSENGER SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT (M42) PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P582) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL/PUDDLE RETURN CIRCUIT (M42) PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT PASSENGER OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR SHORTED DOOR MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). 3. Turn the turn signal on, if equipped with turn signal mirror. 4. Turn the puddle lamps on. NOTE:

Verify the panel lamps dimmer switch is not in the defeat (off) position.

5. Turn the rear defogger on, if equipped with heated mirror. 6. Press and release the Mirror Select switch to select the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror. 7. Operate the Mirror Adjust switch in all directions several times while monitoring the scan tool for DTCs. NOTE:

After adjusting the mirror in one direction wait at least two seconds before adjusting the mirror in the opposite direction, as this will allow time for an active fault to set if present.

Does the scan tool display; B282F-11-PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. For vehicle's equipped with folding outside rearview mirrors, repeat test with mirror folded. If DTC is now active, Go To 2. Otherwise, using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK (M42) PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 89: Measuring Resistance Of Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit Between Ground And Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector from the Door

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Module C1 connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (M42) Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver circuit between ground and the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 (Component Side) connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (M42) Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for a short to ground. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (M42) PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (P582) PASSENGER MIRROR TURN SIGNAL/PUDDLE RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Checking Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To Passenger Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C2 (Component Side) connector from the Door Module C2 connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (M42) Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver circuit and the (P582) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Return circuit at the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (M42) Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver circuit for a short to the (P582) Passenger Mirror Turn Signal/Puddle Return circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (M42) PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO A PASSENGER MIRROR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 91: Measuring Resistance Between Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit And Passenger Mirror Vertical/Common/Horizontal Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (M42) Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver circuit (C1-1) and each of the Passenger Mirror Driver circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 

Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (M42) Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee



MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK (M42) PASSENGER PUDDLE LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANY PASSENGER SENSOR GROUND OR RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Checking Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To Any Passenger Sensor Ground Or Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (M42) Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver circuit (C1-1) and each of the Passenger Mirror Return or Ground circuits in the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror C1 and C2 (Component Side) connectors. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms for any measurement? Yes 



Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10K Ohms for a short to the (M42) Passenger Puddle Lamp Driver circuit. If the wiring harness and connector are okay, replace the Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage and repair as necessary. If the wiring and connectors are okay, replace the Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2831-11-PASSENGER BLIND SPOT WARNING LIGHT CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

When the Passenger Blind Spot Indicator circuit senses that the voltage is below 04.0 of a volt for over 155 ms.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

when the indicator is commanded to turn on, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PASSENGER MIRROR ASSEMBLY PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase all DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B2831-11-PASSENGER BLIND SPOT WARNING LIGHT CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND as Active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all relate splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. INSPECT MIRROR CONNECTIONS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 94: Passenger Door Module C1 Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C1 harness connector. 3. Inspect the wiring and connectors between the mirror and the Passenger Door Module. Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. MIRROR ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition on 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Be sure the PDM C1 connector is still disconnected. 6. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B2831-15-PASSENGER BLIND SPOT WARNING LIGHT CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN as Active? Yes 



Replace the Passenger Mirror Assembly in accordance with the service information. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2831-15-PASSENGER BLIND SPOT WARNING INDICATOR CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 95: Passenger Door Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

When the Passenger Blind Spot Indicator circuit senses a high voltage or an open circuit for over 55 ms., this

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PASSENGER MIRROR ASSEMBLY PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase all DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read the ACTIVE DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B2831-15-PASSENGER BLIND SPOT WARNING INDICATOR CONTROL-CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. INSPECT MIRROR CONNECTIONS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Passenger Door Module C1 Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C1 harness connector. 3. Inspect the wiring and connectors between the mirror and the Passengers Door Module. Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. MIRROR ASSEMBLY 

Fig. 97: Checking Mirror Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P714) Passenger Blind Spot Indicator Return circuit and the (P712) Passenger Blind Spot Indicator Driver circuit in the PDM C1 connector. Is the resistance between 550.0 and 650.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passenger Mirror Assembly. Refer to MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW , REMOVAL and MIRROR, OUTSIDE REARVIEW, GLASS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0010-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

2. With the scan tool, read active Door Module DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0010-CAN Interior Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0155-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Instrument Cluster (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0155-Lost Communication with Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0164-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the HVAC Control Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY HVAC POWER AND GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

HVAC CONTROL MODULE MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0164-Lost Communication with HVAC Control Module.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0203-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Left Front Door Module (DMFL) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND LEFT FRONT DOOR MODULE CONTROL MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0203-Lost Communication with Door Module Front Left diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0204-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Right Front Door Module (DMFR) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND RIGHT FRONT DOOR MODULE CONTROL MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0204-Lost Communication with Door Module Front Right diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0209-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Memory Seat Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND MEMORY SEAT MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY MEMORY SEAT MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0209-Lost Communication with Memory Seat Control Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0232-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passenger Door Module (PDM) - Electrical Diagnostics (DMFR) - Grand Cherokee

Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Blind Spot Detection Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN B BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0232-00 Lost Communication with Blind Spot Detection Module diagnostic procedure.



. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B1A71-01 PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE B1A72-01 PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE B1A73-01 PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE B1A74-01 PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE B2199-16 BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD B2199-17 BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD B21DD-84 SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE B21DD-85 SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE B2205-00 ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH B223B-00 VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH B229B-00 PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) INTERNAL B259A-00 FRONT LEFT DOOR HANDLE SENSE B259B-00 FRONT RIGHT DOOR HANDLE SENSE B259E-00 TRUNK/LIFTGATE DOOR HANDLE LOCK SENSE B25A3-00 FRONT LEFT DOOR HANDLE SENSOR B25A4-00 FRONT RIGHT DOOR HANDLE SENSOR B25A7-00 TRUNK/LIFTGATE HANDLE SENSOR U0001-00 CAN C BUS U0002-00 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE U0100-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PCM U0141-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM)

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B1A71-01-PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Passive Entry Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For Antenna locations and the Theory of Operation, Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Passive Entry or Keyless Go is activated. SET CONDITION:

When the driver starts the vehicle (through the push button switch), activates the front door handles or activates the liftgate switch, the PEM module fires the antennas and verifies the programed FOBIK. If it finds that the signal or return circuit of antenna 1 is open, short to ground, short to battery or the antenna terminals are shorted, it will set this code. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D920) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D920) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D921) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (D920) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (D920) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D921) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 RETURN CIRCUIT ANTENNA 1 PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If there is an antenna problem, the Keyless Go feature will not operate.

Using the FOBIK, turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, select: PEM, More Options and System Tests. Perform the PEM LF Antenna Verification Tests. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A71-01-PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1- GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE as active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D920) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C2 connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D920) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D920) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (D920) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage Between Ground And Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (D920) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (D920) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (D920) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Checking Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passive Entry Antenna 1 connector. NOTE:

Antenna 1 is located in the Left Rear Door. Refer to ANTENNA, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL .

3. Measure the resistance of the (D920) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal circuit between the PEM C2 connector and the Antenna 1 connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (D920) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (D921) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Passive Entry Antenna 1 Return Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D921) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Return circuit between the PEM C2 connector and the Antenna 1 connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the open in the (D921) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Return circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. (D920) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D921) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 1 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Measuring Resistance Between Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal Circuit And Passive Entry Antenna 1 Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D920) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal circuit and the (D921) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Return circuit. Is the resistance below 30K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D920) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Signal circuit and the (D921) Passive Entry Antenna 1 Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 





Replace the Antenna 1 and repeat the PEM LF Antenna Verification Tests. Refer to ANTENNA, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . If this DTC is still active and there are no other DTCs present, replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A72-01-PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Passive Entry Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For Antenna locations and the Theory of Operation, Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Passive Entry or Keyless Go is activated. SET CONDITION:

When the driver starts the vehicle (through the push button switch), activates the front door handles or activates the liftgate switch, the PEM module fires the antennas and verifies the programed FOBIK. If it finds that the signal or return circuit of antenna 2 is open, short to ground, short to battery or the antenna terminals are shorted, it will set this code. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D922) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D922) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D923) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (D922) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (D922) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D923) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 RETURN CIRCUIT ANTENNA 2 PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If there is an antenna problem, the Keyless Go feature will not operate.

Using the FOBIK, turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, select: PEM, More Options and System Tests. Perform the PEM LF Antenna Verification Tests. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A72-01-PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2- GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE as active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D922) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C2 connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D922) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the short to ground in the (D922) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (D922) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage Between Ground And Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (D922) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (D922) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (D922) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passive Entry Antenna 2 connector. NOTE:

Antenna 2 is located in the Right Rear Door. Refer to ANTENNA, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL .

2. Measure the resistance of the (D922) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal circuit between the PEM C2 connector and the Antenna 2 connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (D922) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (D923) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Checking Passive Entry Antenna 2 Return Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D923) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Return circuit between the PEM C2 connector and the Antenna 2 connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the open in the (D923) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Return circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. (D922) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D923) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 2 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Measuring Resistance Between Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal Circuit And Passive Entry Antenna 2 Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D922) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal circuit and the (D923) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Return circuit. Is the resistance below 30, 000 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between the (D922) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Signal circuit and the (D923) Passive Entry Antenna 2 Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 





Replace the Antenna 2 and repeat the PEM LF Antenna Verification Tests. Refer to ANTENNA, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . If this DTC is still active and there are no other DTCs present, replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A73-01-PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Passive Entry Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For Antenna locations and the Theory of Operation, Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Passive Entry or Keyless GO is activated. SET CONDITION:

When the driver starts the vehicle (through the push button switch), activates the front door handles or activates the liftgate switch, the PEM module fires the antennas and verifies the programed FOBIK. If it finds that the signal or return circuit of antenna 3 is open, short to ground, short to battery or the antenna terminals are shorted, it will set this DTC. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D924) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D924) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D925) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (D924) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (D924) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D925) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 RETURN CIRCUIT ANTENNA 3 PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If there is an antenna problem, the Keyless Go feature will not operate.

Using the FOBIK, turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, select: PEM, More Options and System Tests. Perform the PEM LF Antenna Verification Tests. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A73-01-PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3- GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE as active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D924) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 14: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C2 connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D924) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D924) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (D924) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 15: Measuring Voltage Between Ground And Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (D924) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (D924) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (D924) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance Of Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal Circuit Between PEM C2 Connector And Antenna 3 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the Passive Entry Antenna 3 connector. NOTE:

Antenna 3 is located in the Instrument Panel. Refer to ANTENNA, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL .

2. Measure the resistance of the (D924) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal circuit between the PEM C2 connector and the Antenna 3 connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (D924) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (D925) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance Of Passive Entry Antenna 3 Return Circuit Between PEM C2 Connector And Antenna 3 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D925) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Return circuit between the PEM C2 connector and the Antenna 3 connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the open in the (D925) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Return circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. (D924) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D925) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 3 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance Between Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal Circuit And Passive Entry Antenna 3 Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D924) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal circuit and the (D925) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Return circuit. Is the resistance below 30K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the short between the (D924) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Signal circuit and the (D925) Passive Entry Antenna 3 Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 





Replace the Antenna 3 and repeat the PEM LF Antenna Verification Tests. Refer to ANTENNA, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . If this DTC is still active, and there are no other DTCs present, replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A74-01-PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Passive Entry Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For Antenna locations and the Theory of Operation, Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Passive Entry or Keyless GO is activated. SET CONDITION:

When the driver starts the vehicle (through the push button switch), activates the front door handles or activates the liftgate switch, the PEM module fires the antennas and verifies the programed FOBIK. If it finds that the signal or return circuit of antenna 4 is open, short to ground, short to battery or the antenna terminals are shorted, it will set this code. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D926) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D926) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED VOLTAGE (D927) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (D926) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (D926) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D927) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 RETURN CIRCUIT ANTENNA 4 PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If there is an antenna problem, the Keyless Go feature will not operate.

Using the FOBIK, turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. With the scan tool, select: PEM, More Options and System Tests. Perform the PEM LF Antenna Verification Tests. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A74-01-PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4- GENERAL ELECTRICAL FAILURE as active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. (D926) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 20: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C2 connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D926) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D926) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (D926) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 21: Measuring Voltage Between Ground And Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (D926) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (D926) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (D926) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Measuring Resistance Of Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal Circuit Between PEM C2 Connector And Antenna 4 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passive Entry Antenna 4 connector. NOTE:

Antenna 4 is located in the rear bumper area. Refer to ANTENNA, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL .

2. Measure the resistance of the (D926) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal circuit between the PEM C2 connector and the Antenna 4 connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (D926) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (D927) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Measuring Resistance Of Passive Entry Antenna 4 Return Circuit Between PEM C2 Connector And Antenna 4 Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D927) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Return circuit between the PEM C2 connector and the Antenna 4 connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the open in the (D927) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Return circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. (D926) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D927) PASSIVE ENTRY ANTENNA 4 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance Between Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal Circuit And Passive Entry Antenna 4 Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (D926) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal circuit and the (D927) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Return circuit. Is the resistance below 30K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Repair the short between the (D926) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Signal circuit and the (D927) Passive Entry Antenna 4 Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 





Replace the Antenna 4 and repeat the PEM LF Antenna Verification Tests. Refer to ANTENNA, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . If this DTC is still active, and there are no other DTCs present, replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2199-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: TIPM & PEM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

At all times. SET CONDITION:

Anytime the module senses voltage input below 8.0 Volts for over two seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC (A106) FUSED B(+) OR (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT HAS HIGH RESISTANCE PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK POWERTRAIN DTCs 1. Using the scan tool, read the active PCM DTCs. Are there any Battery or Charging System DTCs? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure for the charging system DTCs .

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. Using the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display; 2199-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD as active? Yes 

Go To 3.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT RESISTED 

Fig. 26: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C1 harness connector. 2. Test the (A106) Fused B(+) circuit for high resistance by connecting a 12-volt test light between the (A106) Fused B(+) circuit and the (Z912) Ground circuit in the Passive Entry Module connector. The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test the (A106) Fused B(+) and the (Z912) Ground circuits to determine which one has the high resistance. Repair the (A106) Fused B(+) circuit or the (Z912) Ground circuit for high resistance. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2199-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: TIPM & PEM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

At all times. SET CONDITION:

Anytime the module senses voltage input above 16.0 Volts for over two seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. Using the scan tool, read the active Powertrain DTCs. Are there any active Battery or Charging system DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure for the charging system DTCs .

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display; B2199-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD? Yes



Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B21DD-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 28: TIPM & PEM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

The first 10 seconds after the ignition is turned to run. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) sends a message that the system voltage is below 8.0 volts, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. Are there any PCM Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure for the charging system DTCs .



This code is for information only. At some time there was a low battery system voltage. Check the battery and charging system for an intermittent failure.

No

B21DD-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: TIPM & PEM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The first 10 seconds after the ignition is turned to run. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) sends a message that the system voltage is above 16.0 volts, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES HIGH SYSTEM VOLTAGE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. Are there any PCM Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure for the charging system DTCs .



This code is for information only. At some time there was a high battery system voltage. Check the battery and charging system for an intermittent failure.

No

B2205-00-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During a Passive Entry or Keyless Go event. SET CONDITION:

The Passive Entry Module (PEM) will receive and monitor the VIN message from the PCM and record the VIN if different from the last VIN. If the module was used on a previous vehicle, the VIN will be set to that vehicle and the module will have to be replaced. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) NOT PROGRAMMED PEM RECEIVED INVALID VIN DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE VEHICLE VIN 1. Using the FOBIK, turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select: PEM, "REPORTS", "ECU Details Report". 3. Scroll down to "PEM", read the "VIN Original" and compare it to the actual vehicle VIN. Does the PEM VIN Original match the vehicle VIN? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. With the scan tool, select: PEM, "System Tests". 3. Perform the "PEM LF Antennas Verification Test". 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B2205-00-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH as active? Yes 



Replace the PEM module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. RESET ECU 1. With the scan tool, select "Misc Functions" 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With the scan tool, perform the "Reset ECU" routine. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 4. Insert the Push Button and try to start the engine three times. Did the engine start using the "Keyless Go" function? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the PEM module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B223B-00-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever a Passive Entry or Keyless Start event is actuated. SET CONDITION:

When a Passive Entry or Keyless Start event is actuated and the PEM receives an incorrect configuration message, it will set this code after three activated events. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CONFIGURATION MESSAGE MISMATCHES WITH THE PEM CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION MESSAGE IS NOT ON THE BUS TIPM MISMATCH PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK MODULE CONFIGURATION NOTE:

If there are any PEM handle or antenna DTCs, perform the diagnostic procedure for them before continuing.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Make sure the battery is fully charged.

Using the Push Button, turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Using the Push Button, cycle the ignition three times waiting two seconds between cycles. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, check the active PEM DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B223B-00-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK MODULE CONFIGURATION 1. With the scan tool, select: PEM, "Reports", "Configuration Report", "PEM". 2. Record the Vehicle Line and the Driver (side) (LHD/RHD) reported by the PEM. 3. Select "Configuration Report", "TIPM". 

Does the configuration report for PEM match the TIPM report? Yes 



Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. TIPM CONFIGURATION 1. Look over the vehicle and check the Vehicle Line and the Driver (side) (LHD/RHD). 2. Compare the PEM configuration report to the actual vehicle (Vehicle line & Drivers side). 

Does the PEM configuration report match the actual vehicle? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

With the scan tool, check the TIPM for any Vehicle Configuration DTCs. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B229B-00-PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake. SET CONDITION:

This code is set immediately if the Passive Entry Module internal self test fails. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B229B-00-PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE INTERNAL IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Cycle the ignition switch off then back on. 3. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: DTC B229B-00-PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE INTERNAL as Active? Yes



Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B259A-00-FRONT LEFT DOOR HANDLE SENSE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Front Right Door Handle Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During the Passive Entry or Keyless Go event. SET CONDITION:

When the PEM senses an open on the Passive Handle Switch Sense or handle Ground circuit for over one minute, this code will set. If the handle circuits are shorted it will stop communication between the handle and the PEM and may also set this code. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P125) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P124) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (P125) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (P125) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P124) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT LEFT FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE (PASSIVE ENTRY) PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, select: "PEM", "Misc.Functions". 4. Perform the PEM Door Handle Verification Tests. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B259A-00-FRONT LEFT DOOR HANDLE SENSE as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. (P125) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 31: Checking Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Front Exterior Door Handle Switch harness connector. Refer to PANEL, DOOR TRIM , REMOVAL . 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between the (P125) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11.5 Volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. (P124) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE HANDLE SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 32: Checking Left Front Passive Handle Switch Return Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P124) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return circuit. Is the resistance below 10.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 5. 4. DOOR HANDLE OR PEM 1. Turn the ignition on and open the Right Front window. 2. Turn the ignition off, remove the FOBIK and close all doors. 3. Go to the Right Front Door. 4. Have the FOBIK outside and within 10 cm. to 1.5 m. (4 in. to 5 ft.) of the Right Door. 

NOTE:

In the next steps, wait two (2) seconds between each Lock and Unlock activation as there is a two second delay after each Lock action.

5. Lock and Unlock the Right Front Door by the outside handle four times. Did the Right Door Handle lock and unlock the door as it should? Yes 



Replace the Left Front Door Handle in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HANDLE, EXTERIOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the PEM Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (P124) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE HANDLE SWITCH RETURN WIRE OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Checking Left Front Passive Handle Switch Return Wire Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C1 Harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (P124) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return circuit between the PEM C1 harness connector (Cavity 3 LHD/ Cavity 5 RHD) and the Left Front Exterior Door Handle Switch harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the open in the (P124) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return wire.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. (P125) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE WIRE OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Checking Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense Wire Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P125) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense wire between the PEM C1 harness connector (Cavity 2 LHD/Cavity 4 RHD) and the Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the open in the (P125) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Sense wire.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. (P125) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE WIRE SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Checking Left Front Passive Handle Switch Sense Wire Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P125) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense wire. Is the resistance below 30K Ohms? Yes 



No

Repair the short to ground in the (P125) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 8. 8. (P125) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P124) LEFT FRONT PASSIVE HANDLE SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 36: Checking Left Front Passive Handle Switch Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P125) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense circuit and the (P124) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return circuit. Is the resistance below 30K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the short between the (P125) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense circuit and the (P124) Left Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B259B-00-FRONT RIGHT DOOR HANDLE SENSE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Front Right Door Handle Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During a Passive Entry or Keyless Go event. SET CONDITION:

When the PEM senses an open on the Passive Handle Switch Sense or handle Ground circuit for over one (1) minute, this code will set. If the handle circuits are shorted it will stop communication between the handle and the PEM and may also set this code. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P400) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P401) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (P400) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (P400) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P401) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT RIGHT FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE (PASSIVE ENTRY) PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, select: "PEM", "Misc Functions". 4. Perform the PEM Door Handle Verification Tests. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B259B-00-FRONT RIGHT DOOR HANDLE SENSE as active? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. (P400) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 38: Checking Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Front Exterior Door Handle Switch harness connector. Refer to PANEL, DOOR TRIM , REMOVAL . 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between the (P400) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 11.5 Volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. (P401) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 39: Checking Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P401) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return circuit. Is the resistance below 10.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 5. 4. DOOR HANDLE OR PEM 1. Turn the ignition on and open the Left Front Window. 2. Turn the ignition off, remove the FOBIK and close all doors. 3. Go to the Left Front Door. 4. Have the FOBIK outside and within 10 cm. to 1.5 m. (4 in. to 5 ft.) of the Left Front Door. 

NOTE:

In the next steps, wait two (2) seconds between each Lock and Unlock activation as there is a two second delay after each Lock action.

5. Lock and Unlock the Left Front Door by the outside handle four times. Did the Left Front Door Handle lock and unlock the door as it should? Yes 



Replace the Right Front Door Handle in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HANDLE, EXTERIOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the PEM Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (P401) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH RETURN WIRE OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: Checking Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return Wire For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C1 Harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (P401) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return circuit between the PEM C1 harness connector (Cavity 5 LHD/ Cavity 3 RHD) and the Right Front Exterior Door Handle harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair the (P401) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return wire for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. (P400) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE WIRE OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Checking Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense Wire For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P400) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense wire between the PEM C1 harness connector (Cavity 4 LHD/ Cavity 2 RHD) and the Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the open in the (P400) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense wire.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. (P400) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE WIRE SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 42: Checking Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense Wire For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P400) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Sense wire in the Right Front Exterior Door Handle Switch harness connector. Is the resistance below 30K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short to ground in the (P400) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense wire. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 8. 8. (P400) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P401) RIGHT FRONT PASSIVE ENTRY HANDLE SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Checking Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (P400) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense circuit and the (P401) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return circuit. Is the resistance below 30K Ohms? Yes 



No

Repair the short between the (P400) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Sense circuit and the (P401) Right Front Passive Entry Handle Switch Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B259E-00-TRUNK/LIFTGATE DOOR HANDLE LOCK SENSE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Trunk/Liftgate Door Handle Lock Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

This DTC is set when there is a malfunction with the PEM Lock/Unlock Switch on the License Plate Lamp Bar.

WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the module is awake. SET CONDITION:

If the PEM Lock/Unlock Switch circuit in the Licence Plate Lamp Bar is high for longer than 30 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P30) PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY SWITCH SHORTED LIFTGATE LICENSE PLATE LAMP BAR ASSEMBLY PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B259E-00 IS ACTIVE 1. Using the Start button, turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Open the left front window. 4. Turn the ignition off and close all doors. 5. Have the FOBIK outside the car and within six (6) feet from the Liftgate Lamp Bar. 6. Lock and Unlock the liftgate using the push button toggle switch on the Liftgate Lamp Bar several times. 7. Using the Start button, turn the ignition on. 8. Using the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. 9. Wait 30 seconds. Does the scan tool display: B259E-00-TRUNK/LIFTGATE DOOR HANDLE LOCK SENSE as active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Press and release the Power Liftgate Lock and Unlock Switch several times. If the switch ever sticks, replace the Liftgate License Plate Lamp Bar in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP BAR, EXTERIOR HANDLE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. SHORTED SWITCH 1. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Disconnect the License Plate Lamp Bar harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Using the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. 6. Wait 30 seconds. 

Does the scan tool display: B259E-00-TRUNK/LIFTGATE DOOR HANDLE LOCK SENSE as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Liftgate License Plate Lamp Bar in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP BAR, EXTERIOR HANDLE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Checking PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C1 harness connector. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P30) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense circuit in the PEM C1 harness connector. 4. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P39) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Return circuit in the PEM C1 harness connector. Is there any voltage present in either or both circuits? Yes 

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 4. (P39) PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 46: Checking PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Return Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the License Plate Lamp Bar harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P39) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Return circuit in the License Plate Lamp Bar harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the short to voltage in the (P39) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. (P30) PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 47: Checking PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P30) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense circuit in the License Plate Lamp Bar harness connector. Is there any voltage present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P30) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Replace the License Plate Lamp Bar Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP BAR, EXTERIOR HANDLE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 48: Checking PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Circuit Shorted To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Re-connect the License Plate Lamp Bar harness connector. Turn the ignition on. While measuring the voltage in the following step, have a helper press and hold the PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch button. 5. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P30) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense circuit in the PEM C1 harness connector. 6. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P39) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Return circuit in the PEM C1 harness connector. Is there any voltage present in either or both circuits while the switch is being pressed? Yes 



Replace the License Plate Lamp Bar Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP BAR, EXTERIOR HANDLE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B25A3-00-FRONT LEFT DOOR HANDLE SENSOR

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Front Right Door Handle Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

Before proceeding, check the handle for any foreign material, or binding, that could cause a sticking situation to the handle or switch.

WHEN MONITORED:

During a Passive Entry or Keyless Go Event. SET CONDITION:

When the Passive Entry Module (PEM) senses a door handle hall sensor, lock switch failure or a continuous activation for over two (2) minutes, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LEFT FRONT DOOR HANDLE (PASSIVE ENTRY) PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

If there are any other PEM DTCs, perform the diagnostic procedure for them before proceeding.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Make sure that the door handle is in the home position (not pulled). With the scan tool, select "Diagnostic Procedures", "Reset ECU" and "PEM" and perform the routine. 5. With the scan tool, select "PEM", "Data" and scroll to "Left Front Door Handle Activation Value". 6. Observe the value field. Does the scan tool display: "Hall"? Yes 





Replace the Door Handle in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HANDLE, EXTERIOR , REMOVAL . With the scan tool, select "Diagnostic Procedures", "Reset ECU" and "PEM" and perform the routine. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR STUCK LOCK SWITCH 1. With the scan tool, select "PEM", "Data" and scroll to "Left Front Door Handle Activation Value". 2. Observe the value field. 

Does the scan tool display: "Lock"? Yes 





Replace the Door Handle in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HANDLE, EXTERIOR , REMOVAL . With the scan tool, select "Diagnostic Procedures", "Reset ECU" and "PEM" and perform the routine. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. DOOR HANDLE OPERATION 1. Open the Left Front Door window. 2. Turn the ignition off and close all doors. 3. Have the FOBIK outside and within 10 cm. to 1.5 m. (4 in. to 5 ft.) of the Left Door. 

NOTE:

In the next step, wait two (2) seconds between each Lock and Unlock activation as there is a two second delay after each Lock action.

4. Lock and Unlock the Left Door by the outside handle four (4) times. Did the Door Handle Lock and Unlock the door as it should? Yes 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Record the findings on the work order. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. DOOR HANDLE OR PEM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Go to the Right Front Door. Open the Right Front window. Turn the ignition off and close all doors. Have the FOBIK outside and within 10 cm. to 1.5 m. (4 in. to 5 ft.) of the Right Door. NOTE:

In the next step, wait two (2) seconds between each Lock and Unlock activation as there is a two second delay after each Lock action.

5. Lock and Unlock the Right Front Door by the outside handle four times. Did the Right Door Handle lock and unlock the door as it should? Yes 



Replace the Left Front Door Handle in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HANDLE, EXTERIOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the PEM Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B25A4-00-FRONT RIGHT DOOR HANDLE SENSOR

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Front Right Door Handle Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

Before proceeding, check the handle for any foreign material, or binding that could cause a sticking situation to the handle or switch.

WHEN MONITORED:

During a Passive Entry or Keyless Go Event. SET CONDITION:

When the Passive Entry Module (PEM) senses a door handle hall sensor, lock switch failure or a continuous activation for over two (2) minutes, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RIGHT FRONT DOOR HANDLE (PASSIVE ENTRY) PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

If there are any other PEM DTCs, perform the diagnostic procedure for them before proceeding.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Make sure that the door handle is in the home position (not pulled). With the scan tool, select "Diagnostic Procedures", "Reset ECU" and "PEM" and perform the routine. 5. With the scan tool, select "PEM", "Data" and scroll to "Right Front Door Handle Activation Value". 6. Observe the value field. Does the scan tool display: "Hall"? Yes 





Replace the Right Front Door Handle in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HANDLE, EXTERIOR , REMOVAL . With the scan tool, select "Diagnostic Procedures", "Reset ECU" and "PEM" and perform the routine. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR STUCK LOCK SWITCH 1. With the scan tool, select "PEM", "Data" and scroll to "Right Front Door Handle Activation Value". 2. Observe the value field. 

Does the scan tool display: "Lock"? Yes 





Replace the Right Front Door Handle in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HANDLE, EXTERIOR , REMOVAL . With the scan tool, select "Diagnostic Procedures", "Reset ECU" and "PEM" and perform the routine. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. DOOR HANDLE OPERATION 1. Open the Right Front door window. 2. Turn the ignition off and close all doors. 3. Have the FOBIK outside and within 10 cm. to 1.5 m. (4 in. to 5 ft.) of the Right Front Door. 

NOTE:

In the next step, wait two (2) seconds between each Lock and Unlock activation as there is a two second delay after each Lock action.

4. Lock and Unlock the Right Front Door by the outside handle four (4) times. Did the Door Handle Lock and Unlock the door as it should? Yes



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Record the findings on the work order. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Go To 4.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. DOOR HANDLE OR PEM 1. Go to the Left Front Door. 2. Open the Left Front Window. 3. Turn the ignition off and close all doors. 4. Have the FOBIK outside and within 10 cm. to 1.5 m. (4 in. to 5 ft.) of the Left Front Door. NOTE:

In the next step, wait two (2) seconds between each Lock and Unlock activation as there is a two second delay after each Lock action.

5. Lock and Unlock the Left Front Door by the outside handle four times. Did the Left Front Door Handle lock and unlock the door as it should? Yes 



Replace the Right Front Door Handle in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HANDLE, EXTERIOR , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the PEM Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B25A7-00-TRUNK/LIFTGATE HANDLE SENSOR

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 51: Trunk/Liftgate Door Handle Lock Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

This DTC is set when there is a malfunction with the PEM Lock/Unlock Switch on the License Plate Lamp Bar.

WHEN MONITORED:

During a passive entry event. SET CONDITION:

If the PEM Lock/Unlock Switch in the Licence Plate Lamp Bar stays active for longer than 60 seconds or the button is stuck, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P30) PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P30) PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P39) PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT LIFTGATE LICENSE PLATE LAMP ASSEMBLY (LAMP BAR) PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Open the left front window. 4. Turn the ignition off and close all doors. 5. Have the FOBIK outside the car and within six (6) feet from the liftgate light bar. 6. Lock and Unlock the liftgate using the push button toggle switch on the Liftgate Lamp Bar several times. 7. Turn the ignition on. 8. Using the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. 9. Wait for three (3) minutes. Does the scan tool display: B25A7-00-TRUNK/LIFTGATE HANDLE SENSOR as active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH 

Fig. 52: Checking PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the License Plate Lamp Bar harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Using the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Wait for three (3) minutes. Does the scan tool display: B25A7-00-TRUNK/LIFTGATE HANDLE SENSOR as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the License Plate Lamp Bar in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP BAR, EXTERIOR HANDLE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (P30) PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Checking PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense Circuit Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the PEM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P30) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense circuit. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short in the (P30) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. (P30) PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P39) PEM LIFTGATE LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT 1. Measure the resistance between the (P30) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense circuit and the (P39) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Return circuit. 

Is the resistance below 20K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P30) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Sense circuit for a short to the (P39) PEM Liftgate Lock/Unlock Switch Return circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the Passive Entry Module (PEM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0001-00-CAN C BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects an open, short to ground or a short to voltage on the CAN C Bus circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Perform the U0001-CAN C Bus diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0001-CAN C Bus diagnostic procedure.



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0002-00-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

For vehicle communication problems, use the scan tool to refer to the Network Review Screen. The screen depicts a high level view of the vehicle network. Fault and problem areas appear in red. Selecting any of the network components allows access to the source of the problem.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Diagnose the U0002-00 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE as the U0001 CAN C BUS CIRCUIT test and perform the U0001-Can C Bus diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0100-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) ANY MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Perform the U0100-Lost Communication with PCM diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

No

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Passive Entry Module (PEM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULES POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B1882-92 LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1886-11 LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1886-12 LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B188C-11 LIFTGATE CONTROL CIRCUIT 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B188C-12 LIFTGATE CONTROL CIRCUIT 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B188C-13 LIFTGATE CONTROL CIRCUIT 1 - CIRCUIT OPEN B18DC-11 POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B18DC-2A POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH STUCK B18E1-11 POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B18E1-12 POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B18E1-2A POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - STUCK B1941-92 POWER LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR 2 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1945-11 POWER LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1945-12 POWER LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1949-11 POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1949-12 POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1949-2A POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - STUCK B1952-00 POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE MOTOR - INCORRECT DIRECTION B1953-00 POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH OVERCURRENT B1954-00 POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - EXCESSIVE TIME B1955-00 POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE OVERCURRENT B1956-00 POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - EXCESSIVE TIME B195F-11 POWER LIFTGATE CHIME CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B195F-12 POWER LIFTGATE CHIME CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1963-00 POWER LIFTGATE STRUT PERFORMANCE B1964-11 POWER LIFTGATE SENSOR SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1964-12 POWER LIFTGATE SENSOR SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1967-00 POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION OVERCURRENT B1968-00 POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - EXCESSIVE TIME B1969-00 POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION EXCESSIVE POSITION SENSOR COUNTS B196A-00 POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION OVERCURRENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B196B-00 B196C-00 B196D B196E-00 B196F-00 B1970-00 B1971-00 B1972-00 B1973-00 B1974-00 B1975-00 B1976-00 B1977-00 B1978-00 B1979-00 B197A-00 B197F-11 B197F-12 B197F-13 B2199-16 B2199-17 B21DD-16 B21DD-17 B224E-96 U0010-00 U0431-00

POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - EXCESSIVE TIME POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION EXCESSIVE POSITION SENSOR COUNTS POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - FULL OPEN SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - FULL OPEN SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CONTROL 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CONTROL 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CONTROL 1 - CIRCUIT OPEN BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD SYSTEM VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD SYSTEM VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD POWER LIFTGATE MODULE INTERNAL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE CAN INTERIOR BUS IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM (FCM/TIPM)

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B1882-92-LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is power opening or closing.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit not pulsing during motor operation, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q204) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q204) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT OPEN (Q204) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q204) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR DTCS 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. If possible, operate the liftgate several times. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1882-92-LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Logic Ground For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Turn all lights off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance of both the (Q901) Logic Ground circuits between the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector and the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10.0 Ohms between all (Q901) Logic Ground circuits? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (Q204) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Position Sensor Signal 1 Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 4. (Q204) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 4: Checking Position Sensor Signal 1 Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. (Q204) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Position Sensor Signal 1 Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit between the PLG C1 connector and the Drive Unit connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking Position Sensor Supply Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C1 connector and the Power Liftgate Drive Unit connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 7. (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking Position Sensor Supply Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes



Repair the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .



Go To 8.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

8. (Q204) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT

Fig. 8: Checking Position Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Shorted To The Position Sensor Signal 2 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit and the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit for a short to the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 9. 9. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 

Fig. 9: Checking Power Liftgate Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Reconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. Reconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Reconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Turn the ignition on. While back probing, measure the voltage between ground and the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit in the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The graphic shows the terminal end of the connector, back probe the wire end.

Is the voltage approximately 5.0 volts? Yes 

Go To 10.

No Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 10. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking The Voltage Between Ground And The Position Sensor Signal 1 Circuit In The Power Liftgate Drive Unit Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. While back probing, measure the voltage between ground and the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit in the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. NOTE:

The graphic shows the terminal end of the connector, back probe the wire end.

Slowly lower and raise the liftgate while observing the voltmeter. Does the voltage change from approximately 0.0 volts to 4, 7 volts as the liftgate is moved? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1886-11-LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Liftgate Pinch Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

The Power Liftgate Module has detected the Left Liftgate Pinch Sensor circuit voltage is under 0.5 of a volt for over 20 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT LEFT LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs and any liftgate inhibitors. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the liftgate several times. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1886-11-LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. LEFT PINCH SENSOR SHORTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Left Pinch Sensor For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the Left Liftgate Pinch Sensor harness connector. Erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 20 seconds, then turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1886-11-LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Replace the Left Liftgate Pinch Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PINCH , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. CHECK THE (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 13: Checking Left Pinch Sensor Signal For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal harness circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 7K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL FOR A SHORT TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 14: Checking Left Pinch Sensor Signal For A Short To Logic Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal circuit and the (Q901) Logic

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 7K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal circuit for a short to the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1886-12-LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Liftgate Pinch Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

The Power Liftgate Module has detected the Left Power Liftgate Pinch Sensor circuit voltage is above 4.8 volts for over 10 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE LEFT LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs and any liftgate inhibitors. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the liftgate several times. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1886-12-LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Logic Ground For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Liftgate Pinch Sensor harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit in the Left Pinch Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. LEFT PINCH SENSOR OPEN 

Fig. 17: Checking Left Pinch Sensor For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the Left Pinch Sensor in the Component Side connector. NOTE:

The graphic shows the harness side - component side is the mate connector of the pinch sensor.

Is the resistance between 9, 000 and 11, 000 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Replace the Left Pinch Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PINCH , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 18: Checking Left Pinch Sensor Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal circuit in the Left Pinch Sensor harness connector. Is the voltage below 4.5 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 6. 5. (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Checking Left Pinch Sensor Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 connector and the Left Liftgate Pinch Sensor connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Repair the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 20: Checking Left Pinch Sensor Signal Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal circuit. Is the voltage above 4.5 volts? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Replace the Left Liftgate Pinch Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, PINCH , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 7. (Q75) LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Checking Left Pinch Sensor Signal Wire For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (Q75) Left Pinch Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B188C-11-LIFTGATE CONTROL CIRCUIT 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 22: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate is power opening or closing. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses voltage less than 1.5 volts on the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit, prior to starting a power cycle, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT SHORTED POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. If possible, operate the liftgate several times. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B188C-11-LIFTGATE CONTROL CIRCUIT 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DRIVER CIRCUIT

Fig. 24: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Liftgate Close Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. NOTE:

Be sure to use an accurate DVOM in the following step. Zero the meter before beginning.

Is the resistance below 0.35 of an Ohm (should be approximately 0.5 of an Ohm)? Yes 

No

Go To 6.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER WIRE SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 25: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER WIRE SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 26: Checking Liftgate Close Driver Wire For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit in the Power Liftgate Module C1 connector. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER WIRE SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER WIRE 

Fig. 27: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Wire For Short To Liftgate Close Driver Wire Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit for a short to the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B188C-12-LIFTGATE CONTROL CIRCUIT 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 28: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate is power opening or closing.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses voltage more than 9.5 volts on the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit prior to starting a liftgate power cycle, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. If possible, operate the liftgate several times. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B188C-12-LIFTGATE CONTROL CIRCUIT 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit in the PLGM C1 harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Checking Liftgate Close Driver Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 4. 4. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Liftgate Close Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes



Repair the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit for a short to the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B188C-13-LIFTGATE CONTROL CIRCUIT 1 - CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 32: Liftgate Control Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate is power opening or power closing. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses no current on the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and no liftgate movement, this code will set. It is also possible for this code to set if the liftgate has been run several times and the internal circuit breaker (Thermo Protection Device) has opened up. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. If possible, operate the liftgate several times. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B188C-13-LIFTGATE CONTROL CIRCUIT 1 - CIRCUIT OPEN? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Liftgate Close Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. NOTE:

Be sure to use an accurate DVOM in the following step. Zero the meter before beginning.

Is the resistance approximately 0.5 of an Ohm? Yes 

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit between the PLG C1 connector and the PLG Drive Unit connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Checking Liftgate Close Driver Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit between the PLG C1 connector and the PLG Drive Unit connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B18DC-11-POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Power Liftgate Handle Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses a voltage of less than 2.0 volts on the Liftgate Handle Switch Sense circuit for longer than 20 seconds this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P339) POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P339) POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the Power Liftgate several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18DC-11-POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SHORTED 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Handle Switch harness connector. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Open the Power Liftgate using the Liftgate Handle. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18DC-11-POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Power Liftgate Handle Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, EXTERIOR HANDLE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (P339) POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Checking Power Liftgate Handle Switch MUX Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P339) Power Liftgate Handle Switch Mux circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (P339) Power Liftgate Handle Switch Mux circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 4. 4. (P339) POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 38: Checking Power Liftgate Handle Switch MUX Circuit For Short To Logic Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (P339) Power Liftgate Handle Switch Mux circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (P339) Power Liftgate Handle Switch Mux circuit for a short to the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B18DC-2A-POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH STUCK

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Power Liftgate Handle Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the handle switch is inactive, the voltage from the module to the switch will be 5.0 volts. When the switch is pressed, the voltage will be approximately 3.3 volts. This can be verified by using the scan tool and monitoring the Handle Switch states or voltage and pressing and releasing the liftgate handle. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses the Liftgate Handle Switch Mux circuit active (2.7V to 4.0V) for longer than 15 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes HANDLE OR LATCH BINDING OR BENT (P339) POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (P339) LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the liftgate several times using the liftgate handle. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18DC-2A-POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH STUCK Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SHORTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: Power Liftgate Handle Switch Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the Power Liftgate Handle Switch harness connector. Erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Wait 15 seconds. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18DC-2A-POWER LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH STUCK? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Check the handle and latch for any possible cause of an intermittent sticking condition. Repair as necessary. If the handle is okay, replace the Power Liftgate Handle Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, EXTERIOR HANDLE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (P339) LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Checking Power Liftgate Handle Switch MUX Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P339) Liftgate Handle Switch Mux circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (P339) Liftgate Handle Switch Mux circuit for a partial short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 4. 4. (P339) LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

GROUND

Fig. 42: Checking Power Liftgate Handle Switch MUX Circuit For Short To Logic Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (P339) Liftgate Handle Switch Mux circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



No

Repair the (P339) Liftgate Handle Switch Mux circuit for a short to the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B18E1-11-POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses a voltage of less than 3.4 volts on the (G25) Liftgate Switch Sense circuit for longer than 15 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G25) LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND FRONT POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the liftgate several times from the front switch. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18E1-11-POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SHORTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Front Power Liftgate Switch Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Front Power Liftgate Switch harness connector in the overhead console. 2. Erase the DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18E1-11-POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Front Power Liftgate Switch (Overhead Console) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONSOLE, OVERHEAD, FRONT , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (G25) LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Checking Liftgate Switch Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G25) Liftgate Switch Sense circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (G25) Liftgate Switch Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B18E1-12-POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses a voltage over 5.01 volts on the (G25) Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit for longer than 15 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G25) LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (G25) LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN FRONT POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 105 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the liftgate several times from the front switch. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18E1-12-POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. FRONT POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH SHORTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Front Power Liftgate Switch Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Front Power Liftgate Switch harness connector in the overhead console. 2. Erase the DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Turn the ignition off, wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18E1-12-POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Front Power Liftgate Switch (Overhead Console) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONSOLE, OVERHEAD, FRONT , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (G25) LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Checking Liftgate Release Switch Sense Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (G25) Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the (G25) Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 4. (G25) LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Checking Liftgate Release Switch Sense Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (G25) Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit between the Switch connector and the Power Liftgate C2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (G25) Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B18E1-2A-POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - STUCK

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses the (G25) Liftgate Switch Sense circuit active (2.75 to 4.0 volts) for longer than 15 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G25) LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT PARTIALLY SHORTED TO GROUND FRONT POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH STUCK POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the liftgate several times from the overhead switch. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18E1-2A-POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - STUCK? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. FRONT POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH STUCK 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 51: Front Power Liftgate Switch Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Front Power Liftgate Switch harness connector. 2. Erase the DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Turn the ignition off, wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B18E1-2A-POWER LIFTGATE FRONT ZONE SWITCH - STUCK? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Front Power Liftgate Switch (Overhead Console) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONSOLE, OVERHEAD, FRONT , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (G25) LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Checking Liftgate Switch Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G25) Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (G25) Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit for a partial short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1941-92-POWER LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR 2 - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate is power opening or closing. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit not pulsing during motor operation, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN (Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT OPEN Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q204) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. If possible, operate the liftgate several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1941-92-POWER LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR 2 PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 54: Checking Logic Ground For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance of both of the (Q901) Logic Ground circuits between the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector and the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 55: Checking Position Sensor Signal 2 Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 4. 4. (Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Checking Position Sensor Signal 2 Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit Is there any voltage present? Yes



Repair the (204) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .



Go To 5.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. (Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Checking Position Sensor Signal 2 Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit between the PLG C1 connector and the Power Drive Unit connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Checking Position Sensor Supply Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 7. (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Checking Position Sensor Supply Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 8. 8. (Q205) POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q204) POSITION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT

Fig. 60: Measuring Resistance Between Position Sensor Signal 2 Circuit And Position Sensor Signal 1 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit and the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



No

Repair the (Q205) Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit for a short to the (Q204) Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 9. 9. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 

Fig. 61: Checking Power Liftgate Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Reconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. Reconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Reconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Turn the ignition on. While back probing, measure the voltage between ground and the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit in the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. NOTE:

The graphic shows the terminal end of the connector, back probe the wire end.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage approximately 5.0 volts? Yes  

Go To 10. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 10. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 

Fig. 62: Checking Power Liftgate Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. While back probing, measure the voltage between ground and the (Q205) Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal circuit in the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. NOTE:

The graphic shows the terminal end of the connector, back probe the wire end.

Slowly lower and raise the liftgate while observing the voltmeter. Does the voltage change from approximately 0.0 volts to 4.7 volts as the liftgate is moved? Yes  

Test Complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1945-11-POWER LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: Liftgate Pinch Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The right pinch sensor provides two functions. It is not only a pinch sensor but is also the Power Liftgate Temperature Sensor. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

The Power Liftgate Module has detected the Right Liftgate Pinch Sensor circuit voltage is under 0.22 of a volt for over 20 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT RIGHT LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

NOTE:

The vehicle should be at room temperature when this test is performed.

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs and any liftgate inhibitors. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 20 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Be sure the liftgate is closed. 4. Open and close the liftgate several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1945-11-POWER LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. RIGHT LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR SHORTED

Fig. 64: Checking Right Liftgate Pinch Sensor For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the Right Liftgate Pinch Sensor harness connector. Erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display; B1945-11-POWER LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Right Liftgate Pinch Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, PINCH , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 65: Checking Right Pinch Sensor Signal Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 4. 4. (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Checking Right Pinch Sensor Signal Circuit For Short To Logic Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 20K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit for a short to the (Q901) Logic ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1945-12-POWER LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Liftgate Pinch Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The right pinch sensor provides two functions. It is not only a pinch sensor but is also the Power Liftgate Temperature Sensor. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

The Power Liftgate Module has detected the Right Liftgate Pinch Sensor circuit voltage is above 5.0 volts for over 20 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE RIGHT LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

NOTE:

The vehicle should be at room temperature when this test is performed

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs and any liftgate inhibitors. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Open and close the liftgate several times. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1945-12-POWER LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR 2 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Checking Logic Ground For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Liftgate Pinch Sensor connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit in the Right Pinch Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. CHECK THE RIGHT LIFTGATE PINCH SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Checking Right Liftgate Pinch Sensor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit in the Right Liftgate Pinch/Temp Sensor (Component Side) connector. NOTE:

The graphic shows the harness side - the component side is the male connector.

NOTE:

The vehicle should be at room temperature when this test is performed. At 50 deg F the reading should be between 18K and 22K. At 77 deg F the reading should be between 9.12K and 10.88K. At 104 deg F the reading should be between 4.90K and 5.75K.

Is the resistance between 4.9K and 22K Ohms depending on the temperature?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Right Liftgate Pinch/Temp Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, PINCH , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 70: Checking Right Pinch Sensor Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the voltage between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit in the Right Pinch Sensor harness connector. Is the voltage below 4.5 volts? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 6. 5. CHECK THE (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Checking Right Pinch Sensor Signal Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Right Liftgate Pinch Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Repair the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Checking Right Pinch Sensor Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit in the Right Pinch Sensor harness connector. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Go To 7.



Replace the Right Liftgate Pinch Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SENSOR, PINCH , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 7. (Q78) RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Fig. 73: Checking Right Pinch Sensor Signal Wire Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit in the Right Pinch Sensor harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Q78) Right Pinch Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1949-11-POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Power Liftgate Rear Zone Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses a voltage of less than 2.0 volts on the (G29) Liftgate Switch Signal circuit for longer than 15 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G29) LIFTGATE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND REAR LIFTGATE SWITCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the liftgate several times from the rear switch. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1949-11-POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. LIFTGATE REAR SWITCH SHORTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: Checking Liftgate Rear Switch For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the Power Liftgate Rear Switch connector. Erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1949-11-POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Replace the Power Liftgate Rear Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, D-PILLAR , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (G29) LIFTGATE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 76: Checking Liftgate Switch Signal Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G29) Liftgate Switch Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (G29) Liftgate Switch Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1949-12-POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Power Liftgate Rear Zone Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses a voltage over 4.5 volts on the (G29) Liftgate Switch Signal circuit for longer than 15 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G29) LIFTGATE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE LIFTGATE SWITCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the liftgate several times from the rear switch. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1949-12-POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. LIFTGATE REAR SWITCH SHORTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 78: Checking Liftgate Rear Switch For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the Power Liftgate Rear Switch connector. Erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1949-12-POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Replace the Power Liftgate Rear Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, D-PILLAR , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (G29) LIFTGATE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 79: Checking Liftgate Switch Signal Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (G29) Liftgate Switch Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (G29) Liftgate Switch Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1949-2A-POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - STUCK

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 80: Power Liftgate Rear Zone Switch Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses a voltage between 2.75 volts and 4.0 volts on the (G29) Liftgate Switch Signal circuit for longer than 15 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G29) LIFTGATE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT PARTIAL SHORTED TO GROUND LIFTGATE SWITCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the liftgate several times from the rear switch. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1949-2A-POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - STUCK? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. LIFTGATE REAR SWITCH SHORTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 81: Checking Liftgate Rear Switch For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the Power Liftgate Rear Switch connector. Erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1949-2A-POWER LIFTGATE REAR ZONE SWITCH - STUCK? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Replace the Liftgate Rear Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, D-PILLAR , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (G29 LIFTGATE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 82: Checking Liftgate Switch Signal Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G29) Liftgate Switch Signal circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (G29) Liftgate Switch Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1952-00-POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE MOTOR - INCORRECT DIRECTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Motor is in operation.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When the Power Liftgate Module senses the direction of the drive motor is in opposition to the direction it is trying to drive the liftgate, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT AND THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUITS ARE CROSSED (Q204) LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR 1 SIGNAL AND THE (Q205) LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUITS ARE CROSSED POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. If possible, operate the liftgate several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1952-00-POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE MOTOR - INCORRECT DIRECTION? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT AND THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUITS ARE CROSSED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit & Liftgate Close Driver Circuits Are Crossed Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Inspect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit and Power Liftgate Module connectors, terminals and harness for damaged or pushed out terminals, or pinched/broken wires. Repair any obvious problems. 5. Trace the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuits between the PLG C1 harness connector and the Drive Unit harness connector. NOTE:

In the graphic above, the Open Driver is shown as (+) and the Close Driver is shown as (-).

Are the circuits crossed at either connector? Yes  

Correct the wiring as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. (Q204) LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR 1 SIGNAL AND THE (Q205) LIFTGATE POSITION SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUITS ARE CROSSED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 85: Checking Liftgate Position Sensor 1 Signal & Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal Circuits Are Crossed Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Inspect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit and Power Liftgate Module connectors, terminals and harness for damaged or pushed out terminals, or pinched/broken wires. Repair any obvious problems. 2. Trace the (Q204) Liftgate Position Sensor 1 Signal circuit and the (Q205) Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal circuits between the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. NOTE:

In the graphic above, the Sensor 1 Signal is shown as (+) and the Sensor 2 Signal is shown as (-).

Are the circuits crossed at either connector? Yes  

Correct the wiring as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1953-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH OVERCURRENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a cinching operation. SET CONDITION:

The latch motor stall current of 12.0 amps has been detected for over 500ms, with no ratchet switch transition. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE LATCH NOT IN HOME POSITION LOW BATTERY SYSTEM VOLTAGE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE POWER LIFTGATE MODULE LATCH ASSEMBLY DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. Make sure the battery is fully charged and vehicle charging system is operating properly. 2. Make sure the liftgate is closed and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test" before proceeding to ensure the latch is positioned correctly. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 5. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 6. With the scan tool, read Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1953-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH OVERCURRENT? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, weak liftgate prop assembly, loose/hard weatherstrip seal , and track assembly for wear or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. If necessary manually operate the power liftgate on a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close for comparison. 3. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Were any mechanical problems found? Yes  

Refer to LIFTGATE , ADJUSTMENTS for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short condition. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 88: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit For A Short To The Logic Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short condition. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 

Repair the short between the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit and the (Q901) Logic

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 5. 5. (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 89: Checking Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short condition. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 6. 6. (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Checking Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit For A Short To The Logic Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short condition. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit for a short to the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK THE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 91: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit For Short To Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit and the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit in the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes



Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit for a short to the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .



Go To 8.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

8. (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER WIRE SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Fig. 92: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Wire For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes 

Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit for a short to voltage. If the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit is OK, replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL ,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch Assembly in accordance with the service information. Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1954-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - EXCESSIVE TIME

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a cinching operation. SET CONDITION:

The latch motor should perform its operation within four seconds. When it takes longer for the cinch operation, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE LATCH NOT IN HOME POSITION (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN LATCH ASSEMBLY DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

If there are any other Power Liftgate DTCs present, correct them before proceeding with this test.

1. Make sure the battery is fully charged and vehicle charging system is operating properly. 2. Make sure the liftgate is closed and with the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test" before proceeding to ensure the latch is positioned correctly. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 4. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 5. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 6. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1954-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - EXCESSIVE TIME? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, weak liftgate prop assembly, loose/hard weatherstrip seal, and track assembly for wear or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. If necessary manually operate the power liftgate on a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close for comparison. 3. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Were there any mechanical problems found? Yes  

Refer to LIFTGATE , ADJUSTMENTS for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 94: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch connector. Check connectors for corrosion, damage, or pushed out terminals. Repair as necessary. Measure the resistance of the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 6. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent open condition. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. CHECK THE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 95: Checking Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent open condition. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit for high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit between the PLG Module C2 harness connector and the PLG Latch harness connector. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short condition. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 97: Checking Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit between the PLG C2 connector and the PLG Latch connector. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent open condition. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1955-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE OVERCURRENT For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . NOTE:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 98: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a power releasing operation. SET CONDITION:

The latch motor stall current of over seven amps has been detected for over 300ms. with no ratchet or secondary switch transition. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE WEAK OR DETERIORATED LIFTGATE SEAL (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN LATCH ASSEMBLY DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

If there are any other Power Liftgate DTCs present, repair them before proceeding with this test.

1. Make sure the liftgate is closed and with the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Position Test" before proceeding to ensure the latch is positioned correctly. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1955-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE OVERCURRENT? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, weak liftgate prop assembly, loose/hard weatherstrip, and track assembly for wear or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. If necessary manually operate the power liftgate on a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close for comparison. 3. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Were there any mechanical problems found? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. WEAK OR DETERIORATED LIFTGATE SEAL 1. Check the liftgate seal for proper resiliency. 2. If necessary manually open the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the springy "Pop-Off" effect that happens when the handle is first depressed. 

Is the liftgate seal in good condition? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the seal.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. CHECK THE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT AND THE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 99: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit And The Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present in either or both circuits? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit or the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 5. 5. (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 100: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense wire for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 101: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q901) Logic Ground wire between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 7. CHECK THE (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CHECK FOR OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 102: Checking Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense wire for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1956-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - EXCESSIVE TIME

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 103: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a releasing operation. SET CONDITION:

The latch motor should perform its operation within four seconds. When it takes longer for the release operation, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE LATCH NOT IN HOME POSITION (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (G78) LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE LATCH ASSEMBLY DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

If there are any other Power Liftgate DTCs present, repair them before proceeding with this test.

NOTE:

Make sure the battery is fully charged and serviceable before proceeding.

1. Make sure the liftgate is closed and with the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test" before proceeding to ensure the latch is positioned correctly. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1956-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - EXCESSIVE TIME?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, weak liftgate prop assembly, loose/hard weatherstrip, and track assembly for wear or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. If necessary manually operate the power liftgate on a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close for comparison. 3. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Were there any mechanical problems found? Yes  

Refer to LIFTGATE , ADJUSTMENTS for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 104: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Check the connectors for damage, corrosion, or pushed out pins. Repair any problems as necessary. Measure the resistance of the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 6. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent open condition. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. CHECK THE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 105: Checking Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent open condition. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND WIRE FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 106: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit between the PLG C2 harness connector and the PLG Latch harness connector. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short condition. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 107: Checking Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate Latch C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent open condition. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B195F-11-POWER LIFTGATE CHIME CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 108: Power Liftgate Chime Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is activating the chime. SET CONDITION:

The power liftgate module has detected the chime circuit voltage is low. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q94) LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND CHIME POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the liftgate several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B195F-11-POWER LIFTGATE CHIME CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. CHIME SHORTED 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 109: Identifying License Lamp Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the Power Liftgate Chime harness connector. Erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the Power Liftgate. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B195F-11-POWER LIFTGATE CHIME CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Replace the Power Liftgate Chime in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CHIME , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (Q94) LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 110: Checking Liftgate Chime Driver Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q94) Liftgate Chime Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (Q94) Liftgate Chime Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B195F-12-POWER LIFTGATE CHIME CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 111: Power Liftgate Chime Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake. SET CONDITION:

The power liftgate module has detected the chime circuit voltage is over four volts during operation or over 1.5 volts when not operating. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q94) LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q94) LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN POWER LIFTGATE CHIME POWER LIFTGATE MODULE (PLGM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the liftgate several times. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B195F-12-POWER LIFTGATE CHIME CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. (Q94) LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 112: Checking Liftgate Chime Driver Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q94) Liftgate Chime Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q94) Liftgate Chime Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. (Q94) LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 113: Checking Liftgate Chime Driver Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Chime harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (Q94) Liftgate Chime Driver circuit between the PLG C2 connector and the Chime connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Q94) Liftgate Chime Driver circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 114: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z923) Ground circuit. Does the test tight illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (Z923) Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE CHIME 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 115: Checking The Power Liftgate Chime Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Reconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, actuate the Power Liftgate Chime. Measure the voltage between the (Q94) Power Liftgate Chime Driver circuit and the (Z923) Ground circuit in the PLG Chime harness connector. Does the voltage cycle between 0 and 12 volts? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Chime in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CHIME , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1963-00-POWER LIFTGATE STRUT PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 116: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

This DTC is designed to detect a failed gas prop which will cause the liftgate to free fall at the top of an open cycle. This is accomplished by the liftgate position sensors 1 and 2 transmitting that information to the power liftgate module. This DTC can also be set by the operator pulling on the opened liftgate and closing it down to quickly (less than one second). WHEN MONITORED:

One second after the liftgate completes a power opening operation. SET CONDITION:

If the liftgate starts to drop after a complete opening operation, the Power Liftgate Module will set this code. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WEAK STRUT COLD WEATHER CONDITION DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the PLG DTCs and any liftgate inhibitors. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the liftgate to the full up position and wait 30 seconds. 5. Close the liftgate and repeat the previous step. 6. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1963-00-POWER LIFTGATE STRUT PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 2.



Make sure there is no intermittent binding or cold weather condition which may have caused this code to set.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. WEAK STRUT 1. Manually open the liftgate to approximately 1/4 open position. 2. Let go of the liftgate and see if it will slam shut. 3. If necessary, compare the effort to open and close the liftgate with a known good vehicle. 

NOTE:

At this point the liftgate should hold in this position but it may slip down very slowly which is passable.

Does the liftgate hold in position or lower very slowly? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Liftgate Gas Prop (strut) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PROP, GAS , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. WEAK STRUT 1. Manually open the liftgate to the full open position. 2. Leave go of the liftgate and see if it will stay in the full up position. 

Does the liftgate stay in the full up position as it should? Yes 



No trouble found at this time. If this vehicle continues to set this DTC, replace the Liftgate Gas Prop (strut) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PROP, GAS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Liftgate Gas Prop (strut) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PROP, GAS , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1964-11-POWER LIFTGATE SENSOR SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 117: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Power Liftgate Module has detected the sensor supply circuit voltage is under 4.0 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs and any liftgate inhibitors. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the liftgate several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1964-11-POWER LIFTGATE SENSOR SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 118: Checking Position Sensor Supply Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and inspect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Clean and repair if necessary and repeat step 1. If the connector is okay, continue testing. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1964-11-POWER LIFTGATE SENSOR SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the service information.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 119: Checking Position Sensor Supply Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1964-12-POWER LIFTGATE SENSOR SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 120: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate Module is awake.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Power Liftgate Module has detected the Position Sensor Supply voltage is above 5.5 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record the DTCs and any liftgate inhibitors. 2. Erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 4. Operate the liftgate several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1964-12-POWER LIFTGATE SENSOR SUPPLY - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 121: Checking Logic Ground For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Measure the resistance of both of the (Q901) Logic Ground circuits between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Drive Unit connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms on both? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 122: Checking Position Sensor Supply Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Measure the voltage between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit in the Power Liftgate Drive Unit connector. Is the voltage above 5.5 volts? Yes 

Repair the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit for a short to voltage. If the power liftgate is inoperative after repairing the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit, replace the Power

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the service information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 4. 4. (Q203) POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 123: Checking Position Sensor Supply Circuit Shorted To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (Q203) Position Sensor Supply circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1967-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION OVERCURRENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 124: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Anytime the Power Liftgate is in a power open operation. SET CONDITION:

The drive motor stall current of over 24 amps has been detected for over 500 ms. during the power opening

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE OR OVERLOADING (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE WIRE SHORTED TO VOLTAGE WEAK STRUT LATCH ASSEMBLY POWER LIFTGATE MODULE POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1967-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION OVERCURRENT? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding conditions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, weak liftgate prop assembly, or loose/hard weatherstrip for wear or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. Check for the possibility of the liftgate having been overloaded due to ice or heavy snow. 2. Raise the liftgate and check the struts for proper operation. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. If necessary manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed. 4. Compare the effort needed on the disabled vehicle. Were there any mechanical problems found? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE SECONDARY RATCHET SWITCH 1. Open the liftgate to the middle position. 2. With the scan tool, monitor the Secondary Ratchet Switch. 3. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the fully closed position while observing the scan tool. 4. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 5. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 8. 4. (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 125: Checking Liftgate Close Driver Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 5. 5. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 126: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Liftgate Close Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. NOTE:

Be sure to use an accurate DVOM in the following step. Zero the meter before beginning.

Is the resistance below 0.35 of an Ohm (should be approximately 0.5 of an Ohm)? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 6.

No Go To 7. 6. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 127: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Liftgate Close Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Repair the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit for a short to the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with service information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 7. POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT 1. Re-connect the Power Liftgate Module C1 connector. 2. Operate the Power Liftgate in both directions if possible. 

Does the motor start to lift the liftgate but is very slow and labors extensively? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit assembly in accordance with the service information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 8. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 128: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the Ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 9. 9. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 129: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the Ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 10.

No Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 10. (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE WIRE SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 130: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Wire For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? Yes



Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1968-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - EXCESSIVE TIME

Fig. 131: Liftgate Control Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

This code can also set if for some reason the liftgate was in an opening operation and it was interrupted by the engine cranking for over 20 seconds. WHEN MONITORED:

Anytime the Power Liftgate is in a power open operation. SET CONDITION:

The drive motor has taken longer than 15 seconds to complete an open command. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE EXCESSIVE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ON THE (A115) POWER LIFTGATE MODULE FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT, THE Q88 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT, OR THE Q89 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT INCORRECT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE IS INSTALLED IN THE VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1968-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - EXCESSIVE TIME? Yes 

Go To 2.



Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

conditions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, weak liftgate prop assembly, or loose/hard weatherstrip or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. If necessary manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled vehicle. Were there any mechanical problems found? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE 1. Disconnect all Power Liftgate Module harness connectors. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. 3. Check all connectors and terminals for corrosion. 

Do any connectors or terminals need repairing? Yes  

Clean and repair wiring as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1969-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION EXCESSIVE POSITION SENSOR COUNTS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 132: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During Power Liftgate opening cycle.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the Power Liftgate (PLG) Module detects that the Power Liftgate Drive Unit has generated excessive pulses during a full power cycle, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE (Q51) FULL OPEN SWITCH CIRCUIT OPEN (Q51) FULL OPEN SWITCH CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the Power Liftgate several times from stop to stop if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1969-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION EXCESSIVE POSITION SENSOR COUNTS? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding conditions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, weak liftgate prop assembly, loose/hard weatherstrip, for wear or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. If necessary manually operate the power liftgate on a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close for comparison. 

Were there any mechanical problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE - POSITION SENSE OPEN 1. Operate the liftgate from the full closed position and put an obstacle in its path to make it reverse. 

Did the liftgate reverse back to the closed position? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Check to see if there is an updated flash for this module. If there is not an updated flash available, replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 133: Checking Logic Ground For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Measure the resistance of both of the (Q901) Logic Ground circuits between the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector and the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms for both measurements? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. (Q51) FULL OPEN SWITCH CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 134: Checking Full Open Switch Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q51) Full Open Switch circuit between the Power Liftgate Drive Unit connector and the Power Liftgate Module C1 connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q51) Full Open Switch circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 135: Checking Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q51) Full Open Switch circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q51) Full Open Switch circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 

Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B196A-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION OVERCURRENT

Fig. 136: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Anytime the Power Liftgate is in a power closing operation.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The drive motor stall current of over 20 amps has been detected for over 500 ms. during a power closing operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE STRUT BINDING (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE WIRE SHORTED TO VOLTAGE POWER LIFTGATE MODULE LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B196A-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION OVERCURRENT? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding conditions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, weak liftgate prop assembly, or loose/hard weatherstrip for wear or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Check the struts to be sure they are not binding when the liftgate is closing. 3. If necessary manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed. 4. Compare the effort needed on the disabled vehicle. Were there any mechanical problems found? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE SECONDARY RATCHET SWITCH 1. With the scan tool, monitor the Secondary Ratchet Switch. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the fully closed position while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 8. 4. CHECK THE (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 137: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 138: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Liftgate Close Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC Turn the ignition off. 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent shorted condition. NOTE:

Be sure to use an accurate DVOM in the following step. Zero the meter before beginning.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 0.35 of an Ohm (should be approximately 0.5 of an Ohm)? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Go To 7. 6. (Q88) LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER WIRE SHORTED TO THE (Q89) LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER WIRE 

Fig. 139: Checking Liftgate Open Driver Circuit For Short To Liftgate Close Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit and the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short circuit condition. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (Q88) Liftgate Open Driver circuit for a short to the (Q89) Liftgate Close Driver circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with service information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 7. POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT 1. Reconnect all connectors. 2. Operate the Power Liftgate in both directions if possible. 

Does the motor start to lift or lower the liftgate but moves very slow and labors extensively? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit assembly in accordance with the service information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 8. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 140: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the Ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 9. 9. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 141: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the Ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 10.

No Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 10. (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE WIRE SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 142: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Wire For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit in accordance with the service information. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Power Liftgate Latch in accordance with Service Information. Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B196B-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - EXCESSIVE TIME

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 143: Liftgate Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

This code can also set if for some reason the liftgate was in a closing operation and it was interrupted by the engine cranking for over 20 seconds. WHEN MONITORED:

Anytime the Power Liftgate is in a power close operation. SET CONDITION:

The drive motor has taken longer than 15 seconds to complete a close command or 20 seconds with the engine cranking. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE EXCESSIVE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE ON THE (A115) POWER LIFTGATE MODULE FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT, THE Q88 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER CIRCUIT, OR THE Q89 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER CIRCUIT POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT INCORRECT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE WAS INSTALLED DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B196B-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - EXCESSIVE TIME? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding conditions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, stiff liftgate prop assembly, or loose/hard weatherstrip or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. If necessary manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled vehicle. 

Were there any mechanical problems found? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK POWER LIFTGATE CONNECTORS FOR EXCESSIVE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE 1. Disconnect all Power Liftgate Module harness connectors. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. 3. Check all connectors for damage or corroded/pushed out terminals. 

Do any connectors or terminals need repairing? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B196C-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION EXCESSIVE POSITION SENSOR COUNTS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 144: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During Power Liftgate closing cycle.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the Power Liftgate (PLG) Module detects that the Power Liftgate Drive Unit has generated excessive pulses during a full power cycle, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND LATCH ASSEMBLY POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the Power Liftgate several times from stop to stop if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read ACTIVE DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B196C-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION EXCESSIVE POSITION SENSOR COUNTS? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding conditions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, weak liftgate prop assembly, loose/hard weatherstrip seal, for wear or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. If necessary manually operate the power liftgate on a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close for comparison. 

Were there any mechanical problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE LATCH 1. With the scan tool, monitor the SECONDARY RATCHET SWITCH CLOSED. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the closed position while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent open or shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 145: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the Ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE - POSITION SENSE OPEN 1. Operate the liftgate from the full closed position and put an obstacle in its path to make it reverse. 

Did the liftgate reverse back to the closed position? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the service information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B196D-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - FULL OPEN SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 146: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Full Open Switch indicates when the gate is a few degrees from full open position. The switch is closed

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

when the liftgate is fully open and the switch is open when the liftgate is either fully closed and latched or between full open and closed. It can be checked by manually opening and closing the liftgate while monitoring the scan tool. WHEN MONITORED:

During the Power Liftgate open cycle or liftgate fully closed. SET CONDITION:

The Full Open Switch was detected as closed with the liftgate being fully closed or the latch being fully latched. The Full Open Switch was detected as closed before reaching 20% of full open position during an open operation. The Full Open Switch remained open after approximately reaching 10% of full open position during an open operation. May be triggered by an intermittent full open switch failure. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 4. Refer to Service Information and perform the Power Liftgate Learn Cycle procedure. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B196D-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - FULL OPEN SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding or obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. OBSTRUCTION OR STICKING SWITCH 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, foreign material in the drive unit or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation of the Full Open Switch. 2. With the scan tool under PLGM, read the FULL OPEN SWITCH state. 3. While monitoring the scan tool, manually operate the liftgate to and from the full open position. 

Does the switch status change smoothly as the liftgate is pulled down from the full open position? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 3. (Q51) FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT SHORTED TO GROUND 1. Gain access to the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. 2. Gain access to the Power Liftgate Module. 3. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the FULL OPEN SWITCH state. 4. Manually open the liftgate to mid position. 5. While monitoring the scan tool, wiggle the wiring harness from the Power Liftgate Module to the Power Liftgate Drive Unit assembly. 

Did the switch status ever change? Yes  

Repair the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit for an intermittent short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DRIVE UNIT, POWER , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT - FULL OPEN SWITCH

Fig. 147: Measuring Voltage Between Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense Circuit & Logic Ground In The Drive Unit Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit and (Q901) Logic Ground in the Drive Unit connector. 3. While measuring the voltage, wiggle the harness from the PLG module to the Drive Unit connector. Is the voltage constantly above 4.6 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 5. 5. (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 148: Checking Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch sense circuit in

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 6. 6. (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 149: Checking Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense Circuit For Short Logic Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch sense circuit and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit in the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Is the resistance below 1000 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit for a short to the (Q901) Logic Ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 7. 7. (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 150: Checking Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate C1 connector and the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. 2. Wiggle the wiring Power Liftgate Module harness to check for an intermittent open condition. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B196E-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - FULL OPEN SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 151: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Full Open Switch indicates when the gate is a few degrees from full open position. The switch is closed

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

when the liftgate is fully open and the switch is open when the liftgate is either fully closed and latched or between full open and closed. It can be checked by manually opening and closing the liftgate while monitoring the scan tool. WHEN MONITORED:

During the Power Liftgate close cycle. SET CONDITION:

The Full Open Switch was detected as remaining closed after the liftgate closed 20% from start of the close operation. May be triggered by an intermittent full open switch failure. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q901) LOGIC GROUND OPEN POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B196E-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - FULL OPEN SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 2.



Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding or obstructions.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. OBSTRUCTION OR STICKING SWITCH 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, foreign material in the drive unit or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation of the Full Open Switch. 2. With the scan tool under PLGM, read the FULL OPEN SWITCH state. 3. Manually operate the liftgate from the full open to mid position several times while monitoring the scan tool. 

Does the switch status change smoothly as the liftgate is pulled down from the full open position? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 3. (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT SHORTED TO GROUND 1. Gain access to the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. 2. Gain access to the Power Liftgate Module. 3. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the FULL OPEN SWITCH state. 4. Manually open the liftgate to mid position. 5. While monitoring the scan tool, wiggle the wiring harness from the Power Liftgate Module to the Power Liftgate Drive Unit assembly. 

Did the switch status ever change? Yes  

Repair the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit for an intermittent short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the service information.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 152: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For And Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Measure the resistance of both (Q901) Logic Ground circuits between the Power Liftgate Drive Unit connector and the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms on both measurements? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 153: Measuring Voltage Between Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense Circuit & Logic Ground In The Drive Unit Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Re-connect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Measure the voltage between (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit and the (Q901) Logic Ground in the Power Driver Unit connector. 4. While measuring the voltage, wiggle the Power Liftgate Module to check for an intermittent short. Is the voltage constantly above 4.6 volts? Yes 

Replace the Power Liftgate Drive Unit in accordance with the service information. Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 6. 6. (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 154: Checking Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C1 harness connector 3. Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit in the Power Liftgate Drive Unit connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 7. 7. (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND 

Fig. 155: Checking Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense Circuit For Short Logic Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch sense circuit and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit in the Power Liftgate Drive Unit harness connector. Is the resistance below 1000.0 Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit for a short to the (Q901) Logic Ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 8. 8. (Q51) LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 156: Checking Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit between the PLG C1 connector and the Drive Unit connector. 2. Wiggle the wiring harness from the Power Liftgate Module to the Full Open Switch on the Power Liftgate Drive Unit assembly. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (Q51) Liftgate Full Open Switch Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B196F-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 157: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Primary Ratchet (Ajar) Switch must remain closed when the liftgate is fully open or between full open and closed positions. The switch will open when the liftgate is fully closed and latched. This switch indicates when the latch is in primary position. It is open when in primary and closed when out of primary. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a opening operation. SET CONDITION:

The Liftgate Ajar Switch remained open during a power open cycle. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE LATCH CABLE NOT CONNECTED (WITHOUT PASSIVE ENTRY SYSTEM) LOW SEAL LOAD (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the releasing operation after the 4 second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B196F-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Check the liftgate seal. If it is to soft or to hard it will not provide a proper "Pop-Off" when the gate is unlatched. 3. If the vehicle is Not equipped with the Passive Entry System, check for a broken or disconnected latch cable. 4. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 5. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 6. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes 



Refer to the Service information for the related symptom(s). Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, monitor the PRIMARY RATCHET SWITCH. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the second detent while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent open or shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? Yes 

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 158: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Turn all lights off. 3. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit in the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 5. Wiggle the harness while observing the Ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 159: Checking Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the Ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1970-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 160: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Primary Ratchet (Ajar) Switch must remain closed when the liftgate is fully open or between full open and closed positions. The switch will open when the liftgate is fully closed and latched. This switch indicates when the latch is in primary position. It is open when in primary and closed when out of primary. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate in performing a power close operation. SET CONDITION:

The ratchet primary (Ajar) switch is detected as open before the power cinching operation is started. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the cinching operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1970-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, monitor the PRIMARY RATCHET SWITCH. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the second detent while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent open or shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 161: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 162: Checking Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate C2 connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1971-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 163: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Primary/Ratchet Switch must remain closed when the liftgate is fully open or between full open and closed positions. The switch will open when the liftgate is fully closed and latched. It is open when the latch is in primary position and closed when the latch is out of primary. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a cinching operation. SET CONDITION:

The ratchet switch did not remain closed during a power cinch operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the cinching operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1971-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, monitor the PRIMARY RATCHET SWITCH. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the second detent while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent open or shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? Yes



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .



Go To 4.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Fig. 164: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Turn all light off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit in the Liftgate Latch connector. 5. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 165: Rt-b1970-7 (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense Circuit Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit in the Liftgate Latch connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 6. 6. (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 166: Checking Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 7. (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 167: Checking Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For Short To Logic Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit in the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes



Repair the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit for short to the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1972-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 168: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Primary Ratchet Switch must remain closed when the liftgate is fully open or between full open and closed positions. The switch will open when the liftgate is fully closed and latched. This switch indicates when the latch is in primary position. It is open when in primary and closed when out of primary. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a power releasing operation or when the latch is unlatched and the liftgate is open. SET CONDITION:

When the ratchet switch remains open during a power release operation or when the primary ratchet switch is detected open when the latch is unlatched (liftgate open). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE (Q901) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the releasing operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read ACTIVE DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1972-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - RATCHET PRIMARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, monitor the PRIMARY RATCHET SWITCH. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the second detent while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent open or shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? Yes



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .



Go To 4.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Fig. 169: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. (G78) LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 170: Checking Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (G78) Liftgate Ajar Switch Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1973-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 171: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Secondary Ratchet Switch must remain closed when the liftgate is fully open or between full open and closed positions. The switch will open when the liftgate is fully closed and latched. This switch indicates when the latch is in secondary position. It is open when in secondary or primary positions and closed when out of secondary. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a opening operation. SET CONDITION:

The ratchet secondary switch is still detected as open after 10% of liftgate travel during an opening operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the releasing operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read ACTIVE DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1973-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN OPERATION- RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, monitor the SECONDARY RATCHET SWITCH CLOSED. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the first detent while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent open or shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? No 

Go To 4.

Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Fig. 172: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 173: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense between the Power Liftgate Module C2 connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes Go To 6. 6. (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 174: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Wire For A Short To Voltage

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes  

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1974-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 175: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Secondary Ratchet Switch must remain closed when the liftgate is fully open or between full open and closed positions. The switch will open when the liftgate is fully closed and latched. This switch indicates when the latch is in secondary position. It is open when in secondary or primary and closed when out of secondary WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a closing operation. SET CONDITION:

The ratchet secondary switch is detected as open to early in the power close operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the releasing operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read ACTIVE DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1974-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE OPERATION - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, monitor the SECONDARY RATCHET SWITCH CLOSED. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the first detent while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent open or shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? No 

Go To 4.

Yes  

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Fig. 176: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 177: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense between the Power Liftgate Module C2 connector and the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 178: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Wire For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes  

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1975-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 179: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Secondary Ratchet Switch must remain closed when the liftgate is fully open or between full open and closed positions. The switch will open when the liftgate is fully closed and latched. This switch indicates when the latch is in secondary position. It is open when in secondary or primary and closed when out of secondary WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate latch is performing a cinching operation. SET CONDITION:

The ratchet secondary switch is unstable during a cinching operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

Make sure the battery is fully charged and the vehicle charging system is operating properly before proceeding.

NOTE:

This DTC will only set during the cinching operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

1. 2. 3. 4.

With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display; B1975-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Check the liftgate seal to insure it is not to hard. Replace if necessary. 3. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 4. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 5. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, monitor the SECONDARY RATCHET SWITCH CLOSED. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the first detent while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent open or shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? No 

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 180: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Sensor Ground circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (Q901) Sensor Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 181: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? No 

Go To 6.

Yes Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 182: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes Go To 7. 7. (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE WIRE SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 183: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Wire For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit in accordance with the service information. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? No 



Yes

Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and with the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1976-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 184: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The secondary ratchet switch must remain closed when the liftgate is fully open or between full open and closed positions. The switch will open when the liftgate is fully closed and latched. This switch indicates when the latch is in secondary position. It is open when in secondary or primary: closed when out of secondary WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a releasing operation and when the liftgate is open. SET CONDITION:

The ratchet secondary switch is unstable during a releasing operation or when the liftgate is open. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the latching operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1976-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - RATCHET SECONDARY SWITCH PERFORMANCE? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, monitor the SECONDARY RATCHET SWITCH CLOSED. 2. Using a screwdriver, click the latch to the first detent while observing the scan tool. 3. Unlatch the latch by pressing the handle switch and observe the scan tool for a change of state. 4. Repeat this step several times while moving the liftgate in different positions and wiggling the harness to check for an intermittent open or shorted circuit. 

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time? No 

Go To 4.

Yes  

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Fig. 185: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 5. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 186: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit. 2. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to ground.

No Go To 6.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 187: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 7. CHECK THE (Q76) LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 188: Checking Latch Secondary Position Sense Wire For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes  

Repair the (Q76) Latch Secondary Position Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1977-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN DIRECTION - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 189: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The sector switch is essentially a park switch for the latch. When the latch is running a cinch or release operation, the switch is closed. After the cinch or release is complete, the PLGM will reverse direction of the latch until the switch is open. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a power open operation. SET CONDITION:

The sector switch is unstable prior to an opening operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE LATCH NOT IN HOME POSITION (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR DTCS NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the power open operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1977-00-POWER LIFTGATE OPEN OPERATION - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. LATCH HOME POSITION 1. Make sure the liftgate is closed. 2. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the "Sector Gear Switch Closed" state. 

Does the scan tool display; YES? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Go To 4. 4. POWER LIFTGATE LATCH 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 190: Checking Power Liftgate Latch Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. With the scan tool, monitor the Sector Gear Switch Closed state. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit and the (Q901) Sensor Ground circuit. 4. Repeat the previous step several times by disconnecting and connecting the jumper while observing the scan tool. Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time the jumper was connected and disconnected?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch in accordance with the service information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 191: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Turn all lights off. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. 4. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 192: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit. 2. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 11.



Go To 7.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

7. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 193: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? No  

Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes Go To 8. 8. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 194: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? No 



Yes

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 9. ADJUST LATCH TO HOME POSITION 1. Close the liftgate. 2. With the scan tool run the "Latch Home Sector Test". 

NOTE:

This test will try to adjust the sector gear to the Home Position.

3. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the "Sector Gear Switch Closed" state. Does the scan tool display: NO? Yes  

Repair is complete. The latch was not in the Home position. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 10. 10. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 195: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 11.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 11. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 196: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1978-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSE DIRECTION - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 197: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The sector switch is essentially a park switch for the latch. When the latch is running a cinch or release operation, the switch is closed. After the cinch or release is complete, the Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) will reverse direction of the latch until the switch is open. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Power Liftgate is performing a closing operation. SET CONDITION:

The sector switch is unstable prior to a closing operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE LATCH NOT IN HOME POSITION (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the releasing operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1978-00-POWER LIFTGATE CLOSING OPERATION - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. LATCH HOME POSITION 1. Make sure the liftgate is closed. 2. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the "Sector Gear Switch Closed" state. 

Does the scan tool display; YES? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Go To 4. 4. POWER LIFTGATE LATCH 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 198: Checking Power Liftgate Latch Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. With the scan tool, monitor the Sector Gear Switch Closed. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. 4. Repeat the previous step several times by disconnecting and connecting the jumper while observing the scan tool. Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time the jumper was connected and disconnected?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch in accordance with the service information and using the scan tool, run the power liftgate "Latch Home Sector Test" procedure. Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 199: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Turn all lights off. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 200: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Sensor Ground circuit and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit in the Liftgate Latch connector. 2. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 7.



Go To 11.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

7. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 201: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 8. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 202: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 9. ADJUST LATCH TO HOME POSITION 1. Close the liftgate. 2. With the scan tool run the "Latch Home Sector Test". 

NOTE:

This test will try to adjust the sector gear to the Home Position.

3. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the "Sector Gear Switch Closed" state. Does the scan tool display: NO? Yes  

Repair complete. The latch was not in the Home position. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 10. 10. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 203: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit in the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1000.0 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 11.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the power liftgate "Latch Home Sector Test" procedure. Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 11. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 204: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense wire for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B1979-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 205: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The sector switch is essentially a park switch for the latch. When the latch is running a cinch or release operation, the switch is closed. After the cinch or release is complete, the PLGM will reverse direction of the latch until the switch is open. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a cinching operation. It is monitored both in a manual mode and also in a power mode (power closing). SET CONDITION:

The sector switch is unstable during a cinching operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE LATCH NOT IN HOME POSITION (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the releasing operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1979-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. 

Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. LATCH HOME POSITION 1. Make sure the liftgate is closed. 2. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the "Sector Gear Switch Closed" state. 

Does the scan tool display; YES? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Go To 4. 4. POWER LIFTGATE LATCH 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 206: Checking Power Liftgate Latch Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. With the scan tool, monitor the Sector Gear Switch Closed. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. 4. Repeat the previous step several times by disconnecting and connecting the jumper while observing the scan tool. Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time the jumper was connected and disconnected?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 207: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Turn all lights off. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground wire for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 208: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit in the Liftgate Latch connector. 2. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 11.



Go To 7.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

7. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 209: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 8. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 210: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 9. ADJUST LATCH TO HOME POSITION 1. Close the liftgate. 2. With the scan tool run the "Latch Home Sector Test". 

NOTE:

This test will try to adjust the sector gear to the Home Position.

3. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the "Sector Gear Switch Closed" state. Does the scan tool display: NO? Yes  

Repair complete. The latch was not in the Home position. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 10. 10. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 211: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit in the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 11.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 11. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 212: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Wiggle the harness while observing the Ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1, 000 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B197A-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 213: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The sector switch is essentially a park switch for the latch. When the latch is running a cinch or release operation, the switch is closed. After the cinch or release is complete, the PLGM will reverse direction of the latch until the switch is open. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the power liftgate is performing a latch releasing operation. SET CONDITION:

The sector switch is unstable during a latch releasing operation. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LIFTGATE LATCH NOT IN HOME POSITION (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

This DTC will only set during the releasing operation after the four second time out. This may make it difficult to reproduce.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B197A-00-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE - SECTOR SWITCH PERFORMANCE?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the door several times and check for any binding or other obstructions.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE 

NOTE:

If the liftgate fails to open manually, refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , STANDARD PROCEDURE .

1. Examine the liftgate for proper fit and alignment, loose/hard or torn seals, misaligned latch striker or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. Manually operate the liftgate of a known good vehicle and notice the effort needed to open and close. 3. Compare the effort needed on the disabled liftgate. 4. Especially notice the effort needed to unlatch and close the liftgate. Does it take more effort to operate the liftgate than it should? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. LATCH HOME POSITION 1. Make sure the liftgate is closed. 2. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the "Sector Gear Switch Closed" state. 

Does the scan tool display; YES? Yes 

Go To 9.



Go To 4.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. POWER LIFTGATE LATCH

Fig. 214: Checking Power Liftgate Latch Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. With the scan tool, monitor the Sector Gear Switch Closed state. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. 4. Repeat the previous step several times by disconnecting and connecting the jumper while observing the scan tool.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did the scan tool show the switch state changing correctly every time the jumper was connected and disconnected? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch in accordance with the service information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 215: Checking Logic Ground Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Turn all lights off. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 9.5 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 216: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit in the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 11.



Go To 7.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

7. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 217: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit between the Power Liftgate C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 8. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 218: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the voltmeter. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense wire for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 9. ADJUST LATCH TO HOME POSITION 1. Close the liftgate. 2. With the scan tool run the "Latch Home Sector Test". 

NOTE:

This test will try to adjust the sector gear to the Home Position.

3. With the scan tool in Inputs/Outputs, read the "Sector Gear Switch Closed" state. Does the scan tool display: NO? Yes  

Repair complete. The latch was not in the Home position. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 10. 10. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 219: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit in the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1000.0 Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 11.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Power Liftgate Latch in accordance with the service information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Position Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 11. CHECK THE (Q79) SECTOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 220: Checking Sector Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Wiggle the harness while observing the ohmmeter. Is the resistance below 1000.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q79) Sector Switch Sense circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B197F-11-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CONTROL 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 221: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Anytime the Power Liftgate is in a latch cinch or release operation. SET CONDITION:

When the liftgate latch motor cinch or release output is pulled low prior to or during a latch cinch or release operation, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BINDING LATCH LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT LATCH ASSEMBLY POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 5. If the B2199-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW DTC is present, repair that code before proceeding. Does the scan tool display; B197F-11-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CONTROL 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND? Yes 

Go To 2.



Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

conditions in the latch assembly.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. BINDING LIFTGATE LATCH 1. Examine the liftgate for proper alignment, worn or binding hinges, latch alignment or anything that would cause an obstruction to proper operation. 2. With an open liftgate, manually close the latch and open it with the handle switch several times. Were there any mechanical problems found? Yes  

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE for the related symptom(s). Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 222: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit For A Short To The Logic Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit in the latch connector. 4. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short circuit condition. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Q901) LOGIC GROUND 

Fig. 223: Checking Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit For A Short To The Logic Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (Q901) Logic Ground circuit and the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit in the latch connector. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short circuit condition. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 6.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 224: Measuring Resistance Between Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit & Liftgate Latch Release Driver Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit and the (Q85)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit for a short to the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 6. CHECK THE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 225: Checking Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit. 3. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short circuit condition. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes



Repair the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .



Go To 7.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

7. CHECK THE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Fig. 226: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit. 2. Wiggle the harness and check for an intermittent short circuit condition. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B197F-12-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CONTROL 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 227: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Anytime the Power Liftgate is in a latch cinch or release operation. SET CONDITION:

When the liftgate latch motor cinch or release output is pulled high prior to or during a latch cinch or release operation, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 5. If the B2199-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD DTC is present, repair that code before proceeding. Does the scan tool display; B197F-12-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CONTROL 1 - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding conditions in the latch assembly.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 228: Checking Power Liftgate Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes 

Go To 3.



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Fig. 229: Checking Power Liftgate Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage of the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Repair the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B197F-13-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CONTROL 1 - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 230: Power Liftgate Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Anytime the Power Liftgate is performing a power cinching or releasing operation. SET CONDITION:

When the power liftgate latch motor control circuit voltage is below the low voltage threshold. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN POWER LIFTGATE LATCH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on. 3. Operate the power liftgate several times if possible. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B197F-13-POWER LIFTGATE LATCH CONTROL 1 - CIRCUIT OPEN? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the liftgate several times and check for any binding conditions in the latch assembly.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 2. LIFTGATE LATCH CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 231: Checking Liftgate Latch Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit and the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit. Is the resistance approximately 4.0 Ohms? Yes 



No

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. (Q84) LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 232: Checking Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Q84) Liftgate Latch Cinch Driver circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. (Q85) LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 233: Checking Liftgate Latch Release Driver Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit between the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector and the Power Liftgate Latch harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Latch assembly in accordance with the Service Information and using the scan tool, run the "Latch Home Sector Test". Refer to LATCH, LIFTGATE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No  

Repair the (Q85) Liftgate Latch Release Driver circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B2199-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 234: Power Liftgate Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

Whenever the liftgate is activated, if the voltage is below 10.5 volts, within 15 seconds prior to power operation, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES PCM LOW VOLTAGE DTC (A115) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR PCM DTCS NOTE:

Make sure the battery is fully charged and serviceable before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs Are there any PCM Battery or Charging System DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. With the scan tool, read Power Liftgate Module Active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display; B2199-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD? Yes 

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 3. CHECK THE (A115) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 235: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Power Liftgate Module C2 harness connector. Start the engine. Measure the voltage between ground and the (A115) Fused B(+) circuit in the Power Liftgate C2

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

connector. 5. Compare the voltage read at the PLG C2 connector with a direct connection at the battery. Is the voltage at the PLG C2 connector within 0.5 of a volt of the battery voltage? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (A115) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST . 4. CHECK THE (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

Fig. 236: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Using a 12 volt test light, connect one end to the (A115) Fused B(+) circuit and the other end to the (Z916) Ground in the Liftgate C2 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery

Does the test tight illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (Z916) Ground circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2199-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 237: Power Liftgate Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

Anytime the Power Liftgate is activated and the module senses voltage input above 16.0 volts, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES HIGH VOLTAGE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE DTC POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. Are there any Battery or Charging System DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. With the scan tool, read the Active PLG DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display; B2199-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD? Yes 



No

Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with service information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

B21DD-16-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Anytime the power liftgate module is awake SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the battery voltage was below 7.3 volts for over 10 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BATTERY OR VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the ENGINE DTCs. Are there any ENGINE Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure .



This code is for information only. At some time there was a low battery system voltage. Check the battery and charging system in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No



B21DD-17-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Anytime the power liftgate module is awake. SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the system voltage was above 18.4 volts for over 10 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM HIGH BATTERY SYSTEM VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, read the Engine DTCs. Are there any ENGINE Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure .



This code is a CAN system message for information only. At some time the battery system was over 18.4 volts. Check the charging system and system grounds in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

No



B224E-96-POWER LIFTGATE MODULE INTERNAL - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the battery is connected. SET CONDITION:

When the module senses an internal problem, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes TROUBLE CODE PRESENT POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from On to Off. 3. Wait 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read the Active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B224E-96-POWER LIFTGATE MODULE INTERNAL COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE? No 



Operate the power liftgate open and closed several times. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. If this code appears, replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

U0010-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0010-CAN Interior Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0431-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the battery is connected. SET CONDITION:

When the module receives mixed messages from the TIPM, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER LIFTGATE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from On to Off. 3. Wait 30 seconds. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display; U0431-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM? No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes Go To 2. 2. POWER LIFTGATE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, read the DTCs in several other modules. 

Does the scan tool display; U0431-00-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM in other modules? No 



Replace the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - 545RE - Grand Cherokee

2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - 545RE - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description P0122 TPS/APP CIRCUIT LOW P0123 TPS/APP CIRCUIT HIGH P0124 TPS/APP INTERMITTENT P0218 HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATION ACTIVATED P0562 BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW P0602 CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR/NOT PROGRAMMED P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAM P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE ROM P0613 INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROCESSOR P0706 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR RATIONALITY P0711 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE P0712 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW P0713 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH P0714 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT P0716 INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE P0721 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE P0726 ENGINE SPEED INPUT CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE P0731 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST P0732 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND P0733 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD P0734 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH P0735 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 5TH P0736 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN REVERSE P0740 TCC OUT OF RANGE P0750 LR SOLENOID CIRCUIT P0755 2C SOLENOID CIRCUIT P0765 UD SOLENOID CIRCUIT P0770 4C SOLENOID CIRCUIT P0841 LR PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY P0845 2C HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST P0846 2C PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY P0868 LINE PRESSURE LOW P0869 LINE PRESSURE HIGH P0870 OD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - 545RE - Grand Cherokee

P0871 P0875 P0876 P0882 P0883 P0884 P0890 P0933 P0934 P0935 P0944 P0987 P0988 P1684 P1715 P1736 P1775 P1776 P1794 P2700 P2701 P2702 P2703 P2704 P2706 U0002 U0100 U0121 U0141 U1449

OD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY UD HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST UD PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY TCM POWER INPUT LOW TCM POWER INPUT HIGH POWER UP AT SPEED SWITCHED BATTERY HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SENSOR RANGE/PERFORMANCE LINE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW LINE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH LOSS OF HYDRAULIC PUMP PRIME 4C HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TEST 4C PRESSURE SWITCH RATIONALITY BATTERY WAS DISCONNECTED RESTRICTED MANUAL VALVE IN T3 RANGE GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND PRIME SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN TCC POSITION SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE LATCHED IN LR POSITION SPEED SENSOR GROUND ERROR INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOLUME LR INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOLUME 2C INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOLUME OD INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOLUME UD INADEQUATE ELEMENT VOLUME 4C MS SOLENOID CIRCUIT CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE ECM/PCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) IMPLAUSIBLE ERS MESSAGE RECEIVED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, 3.0L Diesel - Grand Cherokee

2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, 3.0L Diesel - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description P0016 CRANKSHAFT/CAMSHAFT MISALIGNMENT-BANK 1- SENSOR 1 P0045 TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL CIRCUIT/OPEN P0046 TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL CIRCUIT/EXCESSIVE CURRENT P0047 TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW P0048 TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH P0053 O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER RESISTANCE P0069 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE / BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CORRELATION P0070 AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR STUCK P0072 AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW P0073 AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH P0087 FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TOO LOW P0088 FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TOO HIGH P0089 FUEL PRESSURE 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT/OPEN P0090 FUEL PRESSURE 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT/OPEN P0091 FUEL PRESSURE 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW P0092 FUEL PRESSURE 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH P0097 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW P0098 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH P0101 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR PERFORMANCE P0102 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW P0103 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH P0130 O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT OPEN P0131 O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT LOW P0132 O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT HIGH P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED - BANK 1 SENSOR 1 P0135 O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER PERFORMANCE P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH P0192 FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, 3.0L Diesel - Grand Cherokee

P0193 P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204 P0205 P0206 P020A P020B P0203 P020D P020E P020F P0219 P0234 P0237 P0238 P0251 P0253 P0254 P0257 P0262 P0265 P0268 P0271 P0274 P0277 P0299 P0335 P0336 P0340 P0341 P0383 P0384 P0401 P0402 P0403 P0404 P0405 P0406 P042C P042D

FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH FUEL INJECTOR 1 CIRCUIT / OPEN FUEL INJECTOR 2 CIRCUIT / OPEN FUEL INJECTOR 3 CIRCUIT / OPEN FUEL INJECTOR 4 CIRCUIT / OPEN FUEL INJECTOR 5 CIRCUIT / OPEN FUEL INJECTOR 6 CIRCUIT / OPEN CYLINDER 1 INJECTION TIMING CYLINDER 2 INJECTION TIMING CYLINDER 3 INJECTION TIMING CYLINDER 4 INJECTION TIMING CYLINDER 5 INJECTION TIMING CYLINDER 6 INJECTION TIMING ENGINE OVERSPEED CONDITION TURBOCHARGER OVERBOOST CONDITION TURBO BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW TURBO BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INJECTION PUMP FUEL METERING CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN INJECTION PUMP FUEL METERING CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW INJECTION PUMP FUEL METERING CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH INJECTION PUMP FUEL METERING CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE FUEL INJECTOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH FUEL INJECTOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH FUEL INJECTOR 3 CIRCUIT HIGH FUEL INJECTOR 4 CIRCUIT HIGH CYLINDER 5 INJECTOR CIRCUIT HIGH CYLINDER 6 INJECTOR CIRCUIT HIGH TURBOCHARGER UNDERBOOST CONDITION CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PERFORMANCE CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR - PERFORMANCE BANK 1 - SENSOR 1 GLOW PLUG CONTROL MODULE CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW GLOW PLUG CONTROL MODULE CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED EGR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN EGR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE EGR POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW EGR POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH CATALYST TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, 3.0L Diesel - Grand Cherokee

P042E P0462 P0480 P0489 P0490 P049D P0501 P0503 P0504 P0513 P0520 P053A P053B P053C P053S P0545 P0546 P0562 P0563 P0571 P0600 P0601 P0606 P0607 P060A P060B P060D P0616 P0617 P061A P061B P061C P0627 P0628 P0629 P062A P062B

CATALYST TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION CONTROL STUCK OPEN FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT EGR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW EGR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH EGR CONTROL POSITION EXCEEDED LEARNING LIMIT VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR "A" INTERMITTENT/ERRATIC/HIGH BRAKE SWITCH A/B CORRELATION INVALID SKIM KEY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT CRANKCASE VENT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN CRANKCASE VENT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW CRANKCASE VENT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH CRANKCASE VENT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW - BANK 1 SENSOR 1 EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH - BANK 1 SENSOR 1 SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH BRAKE SWITCH 1 PERFORMANCE SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE MEMORY CHECKSUM ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL PROCESSOR ECU INTERNAL PERFORMANCE INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE MONITORING PROCESSOR PERFORMANCE INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE A/D PROCESSING PERFORMANCE INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION PERFORMANCE STARTER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW STARTER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE TORQUE PERFORMANCE INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE TORQUE CALCULATION PERFORMANCE INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE ENGINE RPM PERFORMANCE FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH FUEL PUMP "A" CONTROL CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE FUEL INJECTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, 3.0L Diesel - Grand Cherokee

P062F P0633 P0638 P0641 P0645 P0647 P064C P0651 P0658 P0659 P066A P066C P066E P0670 P0671 P0672 P0673 P0674 P0675 P0676 P067A P067A P067A P0683 P0685 P068A P0697 P06E9 P0850 P1131 P1649 P1946 P198A P1D30 P1D38 P1D39 P1D3A P1D3B P1D3C P1D3D P1D3E

PERFORMANCE INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE EEPROM ERROR INVALID SKIM KEY ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT A/C CLUTCH CONTROL CIRCUIT A/C CLUTCH CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH GLOW PLUG CONTROL CIRCUIT MODULE 1 SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2 CIRCUIT ACTUATOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE "A" CIRCUIT LOW ACTUATOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE "A" CIRCUIT HIGH CYLINDER 1 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT LOW CYLINDER 2 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT LOW CYLINDER 3 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT LOW GLOW PLUG CONTROL MODULE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN CYLINDER 1 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT CYLINDER 2 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT CYLINDER 3 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT CYLINDER 4 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT CYLINDER 5 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT CYLINDER 6 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT CYLINDER 4 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT LOW CYLINDER 5 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT LOW CYLINDER 6 GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT LOW GLOW PLUG CONTROL MODULE TO PCM COMMUNICATION ASD/MAIN CONTROL CIRCUIT PCM POWER DE-ENERGIZED PERFORMANCE - TOO EARLY SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 3 CIRCUIT ENGINE STARTER PERFORMANCE PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH PERFORMANCE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE GLOW PLUG MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CRASH EVENT DETECTED - ENGINE SHUTDOWN AWD SYSTEM PERFORMANCE OIL VISCOSITY TOO LOW INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE LEVEL 2 INJECTION CUT OFF ACTIVE INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE A/D VOLTAGE TEST ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE A/D VOLTAGE RATIO ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE MONITORING BYTE ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE MONITORING RESPONSE TIME ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE SERIAL LINK ERROR

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, 3.0L Diesel - Grand Cherokee

P1D3F P1D40 P1D41 P1D42 P1D43 P1D44 P1D49 P1D4A P1D4B P1D4C P1D4D P1D4E P1D4F P1D55 P1D56 P1D57 P1D58 P2002 P2008 P2009 P2010 P2014 P2015 P2016 P2017 P2032 P2033 P2100 P2101

INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE SHUT OFF TEST ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE SHUT OFF TEST UNDERVOLTAGE ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE SHUT OFF TEST MONITORING MODULE ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE SHUT OFF TEST TIME OUT ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE SHUT OFF TEST POSTIIVE ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE SHUT OFF TEST MONITORING TIME ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE SHUT OFF TEST OVERVOLTAGE ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE POST INJECTION 2 SHUT OFF ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE POST INJECTION 3 EFFICIENCY ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE POST OVERRUN MONITORING ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE QUANTITY WAVE PLAUSIBILITY ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAIL PRESSURE PLAUSIBILITY ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE MONITORING CURRENT TORQUE LIMITATION INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE MONITORING LEAD TORQUE LIMITATION INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE WATCHDOG QUERY RESPONSE TIME ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE CPU UNDERVOLTAGE ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE CPU OVERVOLTAGE ERROR INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE WATCHDOG RESET ERROR DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER (SWIRL) CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN - BANK 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER (SWIRL) CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW - BANK 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER (SWIRL) CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH - BANK 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER (SWIRL) POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER POSITION SENSOR PERFORMANCE - BANK 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER (SWIRL) POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW - BANK 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER (SWIRL) POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH - BANK1 EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW - BANK 1 SENSOR 2 EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH - BANK 1 SENSOR 2 ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT OPEN ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, 3.0L Diesel - Grand Cherokee

P2102 P2103 P2107 P210C P210D P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2135 P2148 P2151 P2173 P2226 P2228 P2229 P2231 P2237 P2243 P2244 P2266 P244A P244B P2453 P245A P245B P245C P245D P253F P2610 P268c P268D P268E P268F P2690 P2691 P2A00 U0101 U0103

EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR HIGH ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW - BANK 2 ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR HIGH - BANK 2 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION FUEL INJECTOR GROUP 1 SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT HIGH FUEL INJECTOR GROUP 2 SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT HIGH THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - HIGH AIR FLOW DETECTED BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH O2 SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO HEATER CIRCUIT - BANK 1 SENSOR 1 O2 SENSOR 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT CIRCUIT OPEN O2 SENSOR 1/1 REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT OPEN O2 SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE - BANK 1 SENSOR 1 WATER IN FUEL (WIF) SENSOR VOLTAGE TOO LOW DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TOO LOW DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TOO HIGH DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE EGR COOLER BYPASS CONTROL CIRCUIT/OPEN EGR COOLER BYPASS CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE EGR COOLER BYPASS CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW EGR COOLER BYPASS CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH ENGINE OIL DETERIORATED PCM INTERNAL ENGINE OFF TIMER PERFORMANCE CYLINDER 1 INJECTOR DATA INCOMPATIBLE CYLINDER 2 INJECTOR DATA INCOMPATIBLE CYLINDER 3 INJECTOR DATA INCOMPATIBLE CYLINDER 4 INJECTOR DATA INCOMPATIBLE CYLINDER 5 INJECTOR DATA INCOMPATIBLE CYLINDER 6 INJECTOR DATA INCOMPATIBLE O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, 3.0L Diesel - Grand Cherokee

U0120 U0121 U0122 U0131 U0141 U0146 U0155 U0164 U0168 U0402 U0405 U0407 U0415 U0416 U0424 U0427 U0431 U0452 U1008 U1432

LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STARTER/GENERATOR CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY (TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (WIN) IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM TCM IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CRUISE CONTROL MODULE IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM GLOW PLUG CONTROL MODULE IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ESP IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM HVAC CONTROL MODULE IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM IPM (FCM/TIPM) INVALID DATA RECEIVED FROM RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE LIN 1 BUS IMPLAUSIBLE CABIN TEMPERATURE SIGNAL RECEIVED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, NGC - Grand Cherokee

2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, NGC - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description P000A BANK 1 CAMSHAFT 1 POSITION SLOW RESPONSE (3.6L) P000B BANK 1 CAMSHAFT 2 POSITION SLOW RESPONSE (3.6L) P000B BANK 1 CAMSHAFT 2 POSITION SLOW RESPONSE (5.7L) P000C BANK 2 CAMSHAFT 1 POSITION SLOW RESPONSE (3.6L) P000D BANK 2 CAMSHAFT 2 POSITION SLOW RESPONSE (3.6L) P0010 BANK 1 CAMSHAFT 1 POSITION ACTUATOR CIRCUIT OPEN P0013 BANK 1 CAMSHAFT 2 POSITION ACTUATOR CIRCUIT OPEN P0013 BANK 1 CAMSHAFT 2 POSITION ACTUATOR CIRCUIT OPEN (5.7L) P0014 BANK 1 CAMSHAFT 2 POSITION TARGET PERFORMANCE (5.7L) P0016 CRANKSHAFT/CAMSHAFT TIMING MISALIGNMENT - BANK 1 SENSOR 1 P0017 CRANKSHAFT/CAMSHAFT TIMING MISALIGNMENT - BANK 1 SENSOR 2 P0018 CRANKSHAFT/CAMSHAFT TIMING MISALIGNMENT - BANK 2 SENSOR 1 P0019 CRANKSHAFT/CAMSHAFT TIMING MISALIGNMENT - BANK 2 SENSOR 2 P0020 BANK 2 CAMSHAFT 1 POSITION ACTUATOR CIRCUIT OPEN P0023 BANK 2 CAMSHAFT 2 POSITION ACTUATOR CIRCUIT OPEN P0031 O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT LOW P0032 O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT HIGH P0037 O2 SENSOR 1/2 HEATER CIRCUIT LOW P0038 O2 SENSOR 1/2 HEATER CIRCUIT HIGH P0051 O2 SENSOR 2/1 HEATER CIRCUIT LOW P0052 O2 SENSOR 2/1 HEATER CIRCUIT HIGH P0057 O2 SENSOR 2/2 HEATER CIRCUIT LOW P0058 O2 SENSOR 2/2 HEATER CIRCUIT HIGH P0071 AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE P0072 AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW P0073 AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR RATIONALITY P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH P0116 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, NGC - Grand Cherokee

P0121 P0122 P0123 P0125 P0128 P0129 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0135 P0137 P0138 P0139 P0140 P0141 P0151 P0152 P0153 P0155 P0157 P0158 P0159 P0160 P0161 P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 P0196 P0197 P0198 P0201 P0201 P0202 P0202 P0203 P0203 P0204 P0204 P0205 P0205 P0206

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMP FOR CLOSED-LOOP FUEL CONTROL THERMOSTAT RATIONALITY BAROMETRIC PRESSURE OUT-OF-RANGE LOW O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT LOW O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT HIGH O2 SENSOR 1/1 SLOW RESPONSE O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER PERFORMANCE O2 SENSOR 1/2 CIRCUIT LOW O2 SENSOR 1/2 CIRCUIT HIGH O2 SENSOR 1/2 SLOW RESPONSE O2 SENSOR 1/2 NO ACTIVITY DETECTED O2 SENSOR 1/2 HEATER PERFORMANCE O2 SENSOR 2/1 CIRCUIT LOW O2 SENSOR 2/1 CIRCUIT HIGH O2 SENSOR 2/1 SLOW RESPONSE O2 SENSOR 2/1 HEATER PERFORMANCE O2 SENSOR 2/2 CIRCUIT LOW O2 SENSOR 2/2 CIRCUIT HIGH O2 SENSOR 2/2 SLOW RESPONSE O2 SENSOR 2/2 NO ACTIVITY DETECTED O2 SENSOR 2/2 HEATER PERFORMANCE FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 LEAN FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 RICH FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 LEAN FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 RICH ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH FUEL INJECTOR 1 CIRCUIT - 3.6L FUEL INJECTOR 1 CIRCUIT - 5.7L FUEL INJECTOR 2 CIRCUIT - 3.6L FUEL INJECTOR 2 CIRCUIT - 5.7L FUEL INJECTOR 3 CIRCUIT - 3.6L FUEL INJECTOR 3 CIRCUIT - 5.7L FUEL INJECTOR 4 CIRCUIT - 3.6L FUEL INJECTOR 4 CIRCUIT - 5.7L FUEL INJECTOR 5 CIRCUIT - 3.6L FUEL INJECTOR 5 CIRCUIT - 5.7L

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, NGC - Grand Cherokee

P0206 P0207 P0208 P0221 P0222 P0223 P0298 P0300 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0305 P0306 P0307 P0308 P0315 P0325 P0330 P0335 P0336 P0339 P0340 P0344 P0340 P0344 P0365 P0369 P0345 P0349 P0390 P0394 P0420 P0430 P0440 P0441 P0443 P0452 P0455

FUEL INJECTOR 6 CIRCUIT - 3.6L FUEL INJECTOR 6 CIRCUIT - 5.7L FUEL INJECTOR 7 CIRCUIT FUEL INJECTOR 8 CIRCUIT THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 PERFORMANCE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE CYLINDER 5 MISFIRE CYLINDER 6 MISFIRE CYLINDER 7 MISFIRE CYLINDER 8 MISFIRE NO CRANK SENSOR LEARNED KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT KNOCK SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PERFORMANCE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR INTERMITTENT - 3.6L CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT - 5.7L CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR INTERMITTENT - 5.7L CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT - 3.6L CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR INTERMITTENT - 3.6L CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT - BANK 1 SENSOR 2 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR INTERMITTENT - BANK 1 SENSOR 2 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT - BANK 2 SENSOR 1 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT - BANK 2 SENSOR 1 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT - BANK 2 SENSOR 2 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 1/4 INTERMITTENT CATALYST EFFICIENCY (BANK 1) CATALYST EFFICIENCY (BANK 2) GENERAL EVAP SYSTEM FAILURE EVAP PURGE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CIRCUIT EVAP PRESSURE SWITCH STUCK CLOSED EVAP PURGE SYSTEM LARGE LEAK

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, NGC - Grand Cherokee

P0456 P0457 P0461 P0462 P0463 P0480 P0481 P0501 P0503 P0506 P0507 P050B P050D P0513 P0520 P0521 P0522 P0523 P0524 P0532 P0533 P054A P054C P0562 P0563 P0571 P0572 P0573 P0579 P0580 P0581 P0585 P0591 P0592 P0593 P0600 P0601 P0606 P060B

EVAP PURGE SYSTEM SMALL LEAK LOOSE FUEL CAP FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 ERRATIC IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE LOWER THAN EXCEPTED IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE HIGHER THAN EXCEPTED COLD START IGNITION TIMING PERFORMANCE COLD START ROUGH IDLE INVALID SKIM KEY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE OIL PRESSURE TOO LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TOO LOW A/C PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW A/C PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH COLD START EXHAUST CAMSHAFT POSITION TIMING OVERADVANCED - BANK 1 SENSOR 2 COLD START EXHAUST CAMSHAFT POSITION TIMING OVERADVANCED - BANK 2 SENSOR 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH BRAKE SWITCH 1 PERFORMANCE BRAKE SWITCH 1 STUCK ON BRAKE SWITCH 1 STUCK OFF SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 1 PERFORMANCE SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 1 CIRCUIT LOW SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 1 CIRCUIT HIGH SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 1/2 CORRELATION SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 2 PERFORMANCE SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 2 CIRCUIT LOW SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 2 CIRCUIT HIGH SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK INTERNAL MEMORY CHECKSUM INVALID INTERNAL ECM PROCESSOR ETC A/D GROUND PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, NGC - Grand Cherokee

P060D P060E P060F P061A P061C P0622 P0627 P062C P0630 P0632 P0633 P063A P0642 P0643 P0645 P0652 P0653 P0685 P0688 P06DA P06DD P06DE P0703 P0850 P1115 P1128 P1129 P113D P113E P1239 P1411 P1414 P1416 P1417 P1521 P1524 P1572 P1573 P1593 P1607

ETC LEVEL 2 APP PERFORMANCE ETC LEVEL 2 TPS PERFORMANCE ETC LEVEL 2 ECT PERFORMANCE ETC LEVEL 2 TORQUE PERFORMANCE ETC LEVEL 2 RPM PERFORMANCE GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT FUEL PUMP RELAY CIRCUIT ETC LEVEL 2 MPH PERFORMANCE VIN NOT PROGRAMMED IN PCM ODOMETER NOT PROGRAMMED IN PCM SKIM SECRET KEY NOT STORED IN PCM GENERATOR VOLTAGE SENSE CIRCUIT SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT LOW PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH A/C CLUTCH RELAY CIRCUIT SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2 CIRCUIT LOW SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2 CIRCUIT HIGH AUTO SHUTDOWN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT AUTO SHUTDOWN RELAY SENSE CIRCUIT LOW DUAL STAGE OIL PUMP CIRCUIT DUAL STAGE OIL PUMP STUCK LOW DUAL STAGE OIL PUMP STUCK HIGH BRAKE SWITCH 2 PERFORMANCE PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH PERFORMANCE GENERAL TEMPERATURE RATIONALITY CLOSED LOOP FUELING NOT ACHIEVED - BANK 1 CLOSED LOOP FUELING NOT ACHIEVED - BANK 2 O2 SENSOR 1/1 SLOW RESPONSE (HIGH FREQUENCY) O2 SENSOR 2/1 SLOW RESPONSE (HIGH FREQUENCY) ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE TOO LOW CYLINDER 1 REACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE CYLINDER 4 REACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE CYLINDER 6 REACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE CYLINDER 7 REACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE INCORRECT ENGINE OIL TYPE OIL PRESSURE OUT OF RANGE - CAMSHAFT ADVANCE/RETARD DISABLED BRAKE PEDAL STUCK ON BRAKE PEDAL STUCK OFF SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 1/2 STUCK PCM INTERNAL SHUTDOWN TIMER RATIONALITY TOO SLOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, NGC - Grand Cherokee

P1618 P1628 P1696 P1697 P1718 P2066 P2067 P2068 P2072 P2096 P2097 P2098 P2099 P2100 P2101 P2107 P2110 P2111 P2112 P2115 P2116 P2118 P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2135 P2138 P2161 P2166 P2167 P2172 P2173 P2174 P2175 P2181

SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT ERRATIC SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2 CIRCUIT ERRATIC EEPROM MEMORY WRITE DENIED/INVALID EMR (SRI) MILEAGE NOT STORED EEPROM INTEGRITY FAILURE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 PERFORMANCE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM - ICE BLOCKAGE DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM 1 LEAN DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM 1 RICH DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM 2 LEAN DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM 2 RICH ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PERFORMANCE ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MODULE PROCESSOR ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL - FORCED LIMITED RPM ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL - UNABLE TO CLOSE ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL - UNABLE TO OPEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 2 ERRATIC ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 MAXIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 MAXIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE HIGH AIRFLOW/VACUUM LEAK DETECTED (INSTANTANEOUS ACCUMULATION) HIGH AIRFLOW/VACUUM LEAK DETECTED (SLOW ACCUMULATION) LOW AIRFLOW/RESTRICTION DETECTED (INSTANTANEOUS ACCUMULATION) LOW AIRFLOW/RESTRICTION DETECTED (SLOW ACCUMULATION) COOLING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, NGC - Grand Cherokee

P219A P219B P2245 P2246 P2271 P2273 P2299 P2302 P2305 P2308 P2311 P2314 P2317 P2320 P2323 P2503 P2504 P258A P258D P2610 P3400 P3401 P3402 P3425 P3426 P3441 P3442 P3449 P3450 P3497 U0001 U0002 U0100 U0101 U0103 U0104 U0114 U0121 U0141

AIR-FUEL RATIO CYLINDER IMBALANCE BANK 1 AIR-FUEL RATIO CYLINDER IMBALANCE BANK 2 O2 SENSOR 1/1, 2/1 REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT LOW O2 SENSOR 1/1, 2/1 REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT HIGH O2 SENSOR 1/2 SIGNAL STUCK RICH O2 SENSOR 2/2 SIGNAL STUCK RICH BRAKE PEDAL POSITION/ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION INCOMPATIBLE IGNITION COIL 1 SECONDARY CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION IGNITION COIL 2 SECONDARY CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION IGNITION COIL 3 SECONDARY CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION IGNITION COIL 4 SECONDARY CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION IGNITION COIL 5 SECONDARY CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION IGNITION COIL 6 SECONDARY CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION IGNITION COIL 7 SECONDARY CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION IGNITION COIL 8 SECONDARY CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION CHARGING SYSTEM OUTPUT LOW CHARGING SYSTEM OUTPUT HIGH ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP CIRCUIT ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP PERFORMANCE PCM INTERNAL SHUTDOWN TIMER RATIONALITY TOO FAST MDS RATIONALITY BANK 1 MDS SOLENOID 1 CIRCUIT CYLINDER 1 DEACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE MDS SOLENOID 4 CIRCUIT CYLINDER 4 DEACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE MDS SOLENOID 6 CIRCUIT CYLINDER 6 DEACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE MDS SOLENOID 7 CIRCUIT CYLINDER 7 DEACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE MDS RATIONALITY BANK 2 CAN C BUS CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE ECM/PCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CRUISE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE (FDCM) (ASBS) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Electrical Diagnostics, NGC - Grand Cherokee

U0151 U0168 U0300 U0416 U110A U110C U110E U110F U1110 U1113 U1120 U1186 U1403 U1411 U1412 U1417 U1418 U1431 U1449

LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER (ORC) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (SKREEM-WCM) INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE SOFTWARE INCOMPATIBILITY IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ESP LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCM (SAS) LOST FUEL LEVEL MESSAGE LOST AMBIENT TEMPERATURE MESSAGE LOST FUEL VOLUME MESSAGE LOST VEHICLE SPEED MESSAGE LOST A/C PRESSURE MESSAGE LOST WHEEL DISTANCE MESSAGE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL MODULE IMPLAUSIBLE FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE FUEL VOLUME SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE LEFT WHEEL DISTANCE SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE RIGHT WHEEL DISTANCE SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CRUISE CONTROL MODULE IMPLAUSIBLE ERS MESSAGE RECEIVED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B2199-16 BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD B2199-17 BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD B21DD-84 SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL VOLTAGE BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE B21DD-85 SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE C0077-00 LOW TIRE PRESSURE C1501-96 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 1 - INTERNAL COMPONENT FAILURE C1502-96 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 2 - INTERNAL COMPONENT FAILURE C1503-96 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 3 - INTERNAL COMPONENT FAILURE C1504-96 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 4 - INTERNAL COMPONENT FAILURE C151C-00 TIRE PRESSURE SENSORS MISSING C151D-00 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR LOCATION UNDETERMINED C1580-00 LEFT/RIGHT SIDE TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR LOCATION UNDETERMINED C1581-00 FRONT/REAR TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR LOCATION UNDETERMINED C1597-00 TPM SYSTEM DEACTIVATED-WINTER MODE C2209-00 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR INTERNAL U0001-00 CAN C BUS U0002-00 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE U0100-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM U0121-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE U0141-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) U0168-00 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (WIN/WCM)

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B2199-16-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Tire Pressure Module (TPM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Any time the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module senses voltage input below 8.0 volts for over 20 ms, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC (A27) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE (Z906) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DTCs NOTE:

Make sure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. Are there any battery or charging systems DTCs? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. With the scan tool, record and erase stored DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. (A27) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position Disconnect the TPM Module harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check (A27) Fused B(+) circuit in the TPM Module harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (A27) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. (Z906) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z906) Ground circuit in the TPM Module harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Repair the (Z906) Ground circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.

B2199-17-BATTERY VOLTAGE - CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Any time the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module senses voltage input above 16.0 volts for over 20ms, this

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC TIRE PRESSURE MODULE (TPM) NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. Are there any ENGINE DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase stored DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B21DD-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL VOLTAGE BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Tire Pressure Module (TPM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Anytime the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module senses voltage input below 8.0 volts for over 20 ms, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC (A27) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE (Z906) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DTCs NOTE:

Make sure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. Are there any battery or charging system DTCs? No 

Go To 2.

Yes Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. With the scan tool, record and erase stored DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. (A27) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TPM harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check (A27) Fused B(+) circuit in the Tire Pressure Module harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (A27) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. (Z906) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Or High Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z906) Ground circuit in the Tire Pressure Module harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Repair the (Z906) Ground circuit for an open or high resistance.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B21DD-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Any time the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module senses voltage input above 16.0 volts for over 20ms, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. Are there any battery or charging system DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase stored DTCs. 2. Start the engine and run for two minutes. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Is the DTC active at this time? Yes



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. Wiggle test the wiring harness and connectors while monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 3. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 4. While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit. 5. Look for the data to change other than as expected or for the DTC to reset. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C0077-00-LOW TIRE PRESSURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously while driving. SET CONDITION:

A low pressure condition will exist when the tire pressure falls below or is equal to the low pressure threshold value as specified for the vehicle. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS INCORRECT TIRE PRESSURE INCORRECT PLACARD VALUES TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

NOTE:

Adjust all tired to cold placard values and test drive before continuing with diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE Note if any the following conditions are present:   

Low Tire Pressure DTCs. TPM Sensor Internal fault. Spare tire is not equipped with a TPM Sensor and is currently on the vehicle. Repair the tire and install it back on the vehicle.

NOTE:

Before beginning diagnostic procedure, verify that tire pressures are correct.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read and record TPM Module DTCs. With the scan tool, erase stored TPM Module DTCs. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) up to 20 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM Module. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 7. 2. LOW TIRE PRESSURE 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle will need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Verify that all tire pressures are to the recommended cold inflation tire pressure specifications. 2. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the TPM Module. 3. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM Module. Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test Complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 

NOTE:

Before continuing with any TPM diagnostic test, use the scan tool and read the "Tire Placard Pressure - Front" and "Tire Placard Pressure - Rear" under "Data Display" in the TPM. Confirm that the values match the Tire Inflation Pressure (Placard) label located on the driver's side B-Pillar. If the incorrect Placard Values have been programmed in the TPM, use the scan tool and read the "Tire Placard Pressure - Front" and "Tire Placard Pressure - Rear" under "Data Display" in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If the Placard values are incorrect in the TIPM, select the TIPM, then under "Miscellaneous Functions", select "Update Pressure Threshold" and follow the procedure in the scan tool. Enter the front and rear placard pressure values as seen on the Tire Inflation Pressure (Placard) label. Repeat step #2.

NOTE:

The following tests are used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the low pressure fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing.

1. With the scan tool, select View Data Display in the TPM Module and find the compensated tire pressure values located under each of the TPM Sensor Identification locations. Are any of the compensated tire pressure values below the Placard Value? Yes 

No

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. TPM-RKE ANALYZER 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer (9936) available? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 6. 5. TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the sensor internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the correct TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing. Use the following method below at every tire location.

NOTE:

If the TPM sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM sensors and repeat this step.

NOTE:

Always be certain to select proper vehicle line and model year when using this tool, as the tool will automatically use the correct protocol to attempt to read the TPM sensor. If the incorrect vehicle line and/or model year is selected, the TPM sensor will not respond to the tool.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM sensor for a response, and store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer. If you receive no response from any of the TPM sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly, and repeat the process on each non-responsive wheel. 2. Replace the TPM sensor if the results show a "Damaged Accel", "Damaged Temp", "Damaged Press", "H/W fail", "S/W fail" or the Tire Pressure Sensor does not respond after repeated attempts. Install the correct Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM. 4. Check to see if the Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM. Has the Tire Pressure Sensor been located? Yes 

Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 6. TPM SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait Two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 3. Look for a tire location with a non-responsive TPM Sensor ID. 4. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the sensor in question has been identified Has the TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 7. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR DTC 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring harness and connectors. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the TPM. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.

C1501-96-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 1 - INTERNAL COMPONENT FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor actively monitors the air pressure, air temperature inside the tire, the direction of the tire rotation and the internal battery status. Each sensor has a unique ID code. The TPM Sensor transmits the data at regular intervals via an encoded signal to a receiver circuit located in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. WHEN MONITORED:

With vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). SET CONDITION:

The TPM Module will monitor the signals from the four active road tire TPM Sensors. A loss of RF signal error is detected if data is not received or cannot be accurately decoded for a maximum of 20 minutes when the vehicle speed is above 24 km/h (15 mph). An internal sensor hardware error condition will be set when an error in the shock sensor, pressure sensor, or temperature sensor is detected. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS AFTERMARKET TIRES/WHEELS INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components, and verify that the tire pressures are correct, before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read and record TPM Module DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) up to 20 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 4. With the scan tool, erase stored TPM Module DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM Module. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM Module and locate the following:  Tire 1 Pressure Sensor HW Fault  Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Missing ID  Tire 1 Temperature Sensor HW Fault  Tire 1 Temperature Sensor SW O/U  Tire 1 Acceleration Sensor HW Fault  Tire 1 Loss of Signal from Pressure Sensor 

Do any of the above faults read "Set"? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 7. 3. TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 7. 4. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC 

NOTE:

This fault can be set if the incorrect or no TPM Sensor is installed on the vehicle. If the spare tire is currently installed on the vehicle, and it is not equipped with a TPM Sensor, this DTC can be set. Replace the spare with a TPM Sensor equipped wheel and tire assembly. Test drive the vehicle. If the DTC resets, continue with the diagnostic procedure.

1. Perform a visual inspection to verify that all road wheels are equipped with a TPM Sensor. 2. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) verify the correct TPM Sensor is on the vehicle. Is the correct TPM Sensor installed on the vehicle? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Install the correct Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM-RKE ANALYZER 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing. Use the following method below at every tire location.

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Always be certain to select the proper vehicle line and model year when using this tool, as the tool will automatically use the correct protocol to attempt to read the TPM Sensor. If the incorrect vehicle line and/or model year is selected, the TPM Sensor will not respond to the tool.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for a response, and store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer. If you receive no response from any of the TPM Sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly and repeat the process on each non-responsive wheel. 2. Replace the TPM Sensor if the results show a "Damaged Accel", "Damaged Temp", "Damaged Press", "H/W fail", "S/W fail" or the TPM Sensor does not respond after repeated attempts. Install the correct Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM Module. 4. Check to see if the Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM Module. Has the TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to verify the TPM Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM Module. The TPM Sensor Identifications are located under "Data Display" for the TPM Module. Do the TPM Sensor IDs match what is stored in the TPM Module? Yes 

Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 7. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive the TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 3. Look for a tire location with a non-responsive TPM Sensor ID. 4. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the TPM Sensor in question has been identified. Has the TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Return to the beginning of this test and perform the diagnostic procedure as necessary.



Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



C1502-96-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 2 - INTERNAL COMPONENT FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor actively monitors the air pressure, air temperature inside the tire, the direction of the tire rotation and the internal battery status. Each sensor has a unique ID code. The TPM Sensor transmits the data at regular intervals via an encoded signal to a receiver circuit located in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. WHEN MONITORED:

With vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). SET CONDITION:

The TPM Module will monitor the signals from the four active road tire TPM Sensors. A loss of RF signal error is detected if data is not received or cannot be accurately decoded for a maximum of 20 minutes when the vehicle speed is above 24 km/h (15 mph). An internal sensor hardware error condition will be set when an error in the shock sensor, pressure sensor, or temperature sensor is detected. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS AFTERMARKET TIRES/WHEELS INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components, and verify that the tire pressures are correct, before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With the scan tool, read and record TPM Module DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) up to 20 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 4. With the scan tool, erase stored TPM Module DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM Module. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM Module and locate the following:  Tire 2 Pressure Sensor HW Fault  Tire 2 Pressure Sensor Missing ID  Tire 2 Temperature Sensor HW Fault  Tire 2 Temperature Sensor SW O/U  Tire 2 Acceleration Sensor HW Fault  Tire 2 Loss of Signal from Pressure Sensor 

Do any of the above faults read "Set"? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 7. 3. TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

No

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 7. 4. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC 

NOTE:

This fault can be set if the incorrect or no TPM Sensor is installed on the vehicle. If the spare tire is currently installed on the vehicle, and it is not equipped with a TPM Sensor, this DTC can be set. Replace the spare with a TPM Sensor equipped wheel and tire assembly. Test drive the vehicle. If the DTC resets, continue with the diagnostic procedure.

1. Perform a visual inspection to verify that all road wheels are equipped with a TPM Sensor. 2. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) verify the correct TPM Sensor is on the vehicle. Is the correct TPM Sensor installed on the vehicle? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Install the correct Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing. Use the following method below at every tire location.

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

NOTE:

Always be certain to select the proper vehicle line and model year when using this tool, as the tool will automatically use the correct protocol to attempt to read the TPM Sensor. If the incorrect vehicle line and/or model year is selected, the TPM Sensor will not respond to the tool.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for a response, and store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer. If you receive no response from any of the TPM Sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

correctly and repeat the process on each non-responsive wheel. 2. Replace the TPM Sensor if the results show a "Damaged Accel", "Damaged Temp", "Damaged Press", "H/W fail", "S/W fail" or the TPM Sensor does not respond after repeated attempts. Install the correct Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM Module. 4. Check to see if the TPM Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM Module. Has the TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 

NOTE:

If the sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to verify the TPM Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM Module. The TPM Sensor Identifications are located under "Data Display" for the TPM Module. Do the TPM Sensor IDs match what is stored in the TPM Module? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 7. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 3. Look for a tire location with a non-responsive TPM Sensor ID. 4. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the TPM Sensor in question has been identified. Has the TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Return to the beginning of this test and perform the diagnostic procedure as necessary.



Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



C1503-96-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 3 - INTERNAL COMPONENT FAILURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor actively monitors the air pressure, air temperature inside the tire, the direction of the tire rotation and the internal battery status. Each sensor has a unique ID code. The TPM Sensor transmits the data at regular intervals via an encoded signal to a receiver circuit located in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. WHEN MONITORED:

With vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). SET CONDITION:

The TPM Module will monitor the signals from the four active road tire TPM Sensors. A loss of RF signal error is detected if data is not received or cannot be accurately decoded for a maximum of 20 minutes when the vehicle speed is above 24 km/h (15 mph). An internal sensor hardware error condition will be set when an error in the shock sensor, pressure sensor, or temperature sensor is detected. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS AFTERMARKET TIRES/WHEELS INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components, and verify that the tire pressures are correct, before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Before beginning diagnostic procedure, verify that tire pressures are correct.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read and record TPM Module DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) up to 20 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 4. With the scan tool, erase stored TPM Module DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM Module. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM and locate the following:  Tire 3 Pressure Sensor HW Fault  Tire 3 Pressure Sensor Missing ID  Tire 3 Temperature Sensor HW Fault  Tire 3 Temperature Sensor SW O/U  Tire 3 Acceleration Sensor HW Fault  Tire 3 Loss of Signal from Pressure Sensor 

Do any of the above faults read "Set"? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 7. 3. TPM/RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 7. 4. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC 

NOTE:

This fault can be set if the incorrect or no TPM Sensor is installed on the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

vehicle. If the spare tire is currently installed on the vehicle, and it is not equipped with a TPM Sensor, this DTC can be set. Replace the spare with a TPM Sensor equipped wheel and tire assembly. Test drive the vehicle. If the DTC resets, continue with the diagnostic procedure. 1. Perform a visual inspection to verify that all road wheels are equipped with a TPM Sensor. 2. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) verify the correct TPM Sensor is on the vehicle. Are the correct TPM sensors installed on the vehicle? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Install the correct Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM/RKE ANALYZER 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing. Use the following method below at every tire location.

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

NOTE:

Always be certain to select the proper vehicle line and model year when using this tool, as the tool will automatically use the correct protocol to attempt to read the TPM Sensor. If the incorrect vehicle line and/or model year is selected, the TPM Sensor will not respond to the tool.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for a response, and store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer. If you receive no response from any of the TPM Sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly and repeat the process on each non-responsive wheel. 2. Replace the TPM Sensor if the results show a "Damaged Accel", "Damaged Temp", "Damaged Press", "H/W fail", "S/W fail" or the TPM Sensor does not respond after repeated attempts. Install the correct Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM Module. 4. Check to see if the Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM Module. Has the TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer to verify the TPM Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM Module. The TPM Sensor Identifications are located under "Data Display" for the TPM Module. Do the TPM Sensor IDs match what is stored in the TPM Module? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 7. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive the TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 3. Look for a tire location with a non-responsive TPM Sensor ID. 4. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the TPM Sensor in question has been identified. Has the TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Return to the beginning of this test and perform the diagnostic procedure as necessary.



Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



C1504-96-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 4 - INTERNAL COMPONENT FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor actively monitors the air pressure, air temperature inside the tire,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the direction of the tire rotation and the internal battery status. Each sensor has a unique ID code. The TPM Sensor transmits the data at regular intervals via an encoded signal to a receiver circuit located in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. WHEN MONITORED:

With vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). SET CONDITION:

The TPM Module will monitor the signals from the four active road tire TPM Sensors. A loss of RF signal error is detected if data is not received or cannot be accurately decoded for a maximum of 20 minutes when the vehicle speed is above 24 km/h (15 mph). An internal sensor hardware error condition will be set when an error in the shock sensor, pressure sensor, or temperature sensor is detected. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS AFTERMARKET TIRES/WHEELS INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components, and verify that the tire pressures are correct, before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Before beginning diagnostic procedure, verify that tire pressures are correct.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read and record TPM Module DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) up to 20 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 4. With the scan tool, erase stored TPM Module DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM Module. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM Module and locate the following:  Tire 4 Pressure Sensor HW Fault  Tire 4 Pressure Sensor Missing ID  Tire 4 Temperature Sensor HW Fault  Tire 4 Temperature Sensor SW O/U  Tire 4 Acceleration Sensor HW Fault  Tire 4 Loss of Signal from Pressure Sensor 

Do any of the above faults read "Set"? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 7. 3. TPM/RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 7. 4. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC 

NOTE:

This fault can be set if the incorrect or no TPM Sensor is installed on the vehicle. If the spare tire is currently installed on the vehicle, and it is not equipped with a TPM Sensor, this DTC can be set. Replace the spare with a TPM Sensor equipped wheel and tire assembly. Test drive the vehicle. If the DTC resets, continue with the diagnostic procedure.

1. Perform a visual inspection to verify that all road wheels are equipped with a TPM Sensor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) verify the correct TPM Sensor is on the vehicle. Is the correct TPM Sensor installed on the vehicle? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Install the correct Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM-RKE ANALYZER 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing. Use the following method below at every tire location.

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

NOTE:

Always be certain to select the proper vehicle line and model year when using this tool, as the tool will automatically use the correct protocol to attempt to read the TPM Sensor. If the incorrect vehicle line and/or model year is selected, the TPM Sensor will not respond to the tool.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for a response, and store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer. If you receive no response from any of the TPM Sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly and repeat the process on each non-responsive wheel. 2. Replace the TPM Sensor if the results show a "Damaged Accel", "Damaged Temp", "Damaged Press", "H/W fail", "S/W fail" or the TPM Sensor does not respond after repeated attempts. Install the correct Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM Module. 4. Check to see if the Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM Module. Has the TPM Sensor been located?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to verify the TPM Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM Module. The TPM Sensor Identifications are located under "Data Display" for the TPM Module. Do the TPM Sensor IDs match what is stored in the TPM Module? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 7. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive the TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 3. Look for a tire location with a non-responsive TPM Sensor ID. 4. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the TPM Sensor in question has been identified. Has the TPM Sensor been located?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Install the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Return to the beginning of this test and perform the diagnostic procedure as necessary.



Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No



C151C-00-TIRE PRESSURE SENSORS MISSING For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When installing a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module, the module is programed with universal IDs for the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. The TPM Module must be programmed with the correct TPM Sensor ID's. NOTE:

FF is the default value. If this value is found, the TPM controller has not been programmed.

WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

During vehicle TPM Sensor ID locate process. SET CONDITION:

When installing a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS INCORRECT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR ID(S) TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Before beginning diagnostic procedure, verify that tire pressures are correct.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read and record TPM Module DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for 20 minutes in order to receive TPM data and allow for the system to update. 4. With the scan tool, erase active TPM Module DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Tire Pressure Module (TPM). Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete.  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 3. WITH TPM-RKE TOOL CHECK TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR ID(S) 

NOTE:

Always be certain to select the proper vehicle line and model year when using this tool, as the tool will automatically use the correct protocol to attempt to read the Sensor. If the incorrect vehicle line and/or model year is selected, the Sensor will not respond to the tool.

NOTE:

If you receive no response from any of the tire pressure sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly, and repeat the process on each of the non-responsive wheel(s)

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for an ID, store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer. 2. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer to upload the correct IDs and proper locations in the scan tool. 3. With the scan tool, select the TPM Module under "Miscellaneous Functions", follow the procedure for uploading TPM Sensor IDs. 4. With the scan tool, erase TPM Module DTCs. 5. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for 20 minutes in order to receive TPM data and allow for the system to update. 6. With the scan tool, check to see if the TPM sensor IDs match what is programmed into the TPM Module. Do the TPM IDs match? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Install a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. WITHOUT TPM-RKE TOOL CHECK TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR ID(S) 1. Turn the ignition on. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 3. Repeat the above step on each wheel of the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, erase TPM Module DTCs. 5. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for 20 minutes in order to receive TPM data and allow for the system to update. 6. With the scan tool, check to see if the TPM sensor IDs are programmed into the TPM Module. Are the TPM Sensor IDs in the TPM Module? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Install a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C151D-00-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR LOCATION UNDETERMINED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor locate process occurs after the vehicle is stationary for more than 20 min. The TPM system will determine the sensor positions while driving at speeds above 24 km/h (15 mph). This process can take up to 20 min to determine TPM Sensor positions. WHEN MONITORED:

During vehicle TPM Sensor locate process. SET CONDITION:

Must fail multiple vehicle TPM Sensor locate processes if localization fails due to Left/Right fail or Front/Rear fail or if the TPM Module is new and has never attempted localization. If missing TPM Sensors are present on first drive, C151D will set to show that the TPM Sensor location cannot be determined/guaranteed (cannot revert to last known good locations). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

The DTC C151D should not exist on its own. If any other DTCs are present, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure in this information first before continuing.

NOTE:

If a new TPM Module was installed, the vehicle must remain stationary for 20 minutes before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read and record TPM Module DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for 20 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 4. With the scan tool, erase TPM Module DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM Module. Is DTC C151D Active on its own at this time? Yes 



Install a new TPM Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C1580-00-LEFT/RIGHT SIDE TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR LOCATION UNDETERMINED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor locate process occurs after the vehicle remains stationary for 20 minutes. The Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module will determine the TPM Sensor positions. The TPM Sensors themselves determine which side of the vehicle they are located on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

During vehicle TPM Sensor locate process. SET CONDITION:

Must fail multiple vehicle TPM sensor locate processes if localization fails due to Left/Right fail or if the TPM module is new and has never attempted localization. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

NOTE:

The vehicle must remain stationary for 20 minutes before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read and record TPM Module DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, erase stored TPM Module DTCs. 4. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for 20 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM Module. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the TPM Module and locate the following for each TPM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Sensor:  Tire Pressure Sensor HW Fault  Tire Temperature Sensor HW Fault  Tire Acceleration Sensor HW Fault Do any of the above HW faults read "Set"? Yes 



For each TPM Sensor with a HW Fault. Install a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Install a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 4. Have the vehicle remain stationary for 20 minutes. 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 



Install a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C1581-00-FRONT/REAR TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR LOCATION UNDETERMINED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor locate process occurs after the vehicle remains stationary for 20 minutes. The Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module will determine the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor positions. The TPM Module measures the signal strength of each TPM sensor and determines if the are in the front or rear. WHEN MONITORED:

During vehicle TPM Sensor locate process. SET CONDITION:

Must fail multiple vehicle TPM sensor locate processes if localization fails due to Front/Rear fail or if the TPM module is new and has never attempted localization. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE HARNESS INCORRECT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE INSTALLATION TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE NOTE:

The vehicle must remain stationary for 20 minutes before proceeding with this diagnostic procedure.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read and record TPM Module DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for 10 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 4. With the scan tool, erase stored TPM Module DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the TPM Module. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE INTERFERENCE 

NOTE:

Interference may occur if the TPM Module is installed incorrectly or the TPM harness is not fastened properly to the body.

1. Turn the ignition off. Verify the following:   

Aftermarket devices are installed or in the vehicle. The TPM Module harness is damaged or is routed incorrectly. The TPM Module is installed incorrectly.

Are there any of the above conditions present? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Install a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Install a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C1597-00-TPM SYSTEM DEACTIVATED-WINTER MODE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

NOTE:

When this DTC is active the TPM Module will enter a deactivation mode (Winter Mode) and the TPM system becomes deactivated. If winter tires and wheel assemblies are installed no repair is required.

The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Module determines the TPM Sensor positions by performing the vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor locate procedure. This procedure is run after the vehicle has been stationary for 20 minutes. After driving the vehicle at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for a minimum of 10 minutes without the TPM Sensor installed, the TPM Module sends a bus message commanding the TPM telltale lamp to flash for 75 seconds. After the 75 seconds of flashing, the lamp will remain on solid and a chime will be heard. The message center will display SERVICE TPM SYSTEM for five seconds and shut off, all while the tire pressure values will be displayed as dashes. After the ignition has been cycled off and on the TPM telltale lamp will remain off, the message center will no longer display SERVICE TPM SYSTEM, and the tire pressures continue to be displayed as dashes. WHEN MONITORED:

During vehicle TPM Sensor locate process. SET CONDITION:

For BUX/Canada vehicles only where all four TPM Sensors fail the locate processes at the same time because the TPM sensors are not installed on winter tire and wheel assemblies. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSORS NOT PRESENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSORS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read and record the TPM Module DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, erase stored TPM Module DTCs. 4. Drive the vehicle at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for 10 minutes. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs in the TPM Module. Is DTC C1597-00 Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) WINTER MODE 

NOTE:

Repair all other TPM Module DTCs before continuing with this test procedure.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Cycle the ignition from off to on. 3. Check for the following conditions:  The telltale lamp is off.  The tire pressure values in the Instrument Cluster are displayed as dashes.  The message center is not displaying "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM". Are all of the above conditions correct? Yes 

No

The Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module is now in deactivation mode (Winter Mode). This DTC will remain active until the correct tire and wheel assemblies are installed back on the vehicle. Once one of the correct tire and wheel assemblies are reinstalled, the other three must also be reinstalled prior to turning the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSORS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Verify the correct TPM Sensors are installed in all of the tire and wheel assemblies. 

Are the correct TPM Sensors installed? Yes 



Install a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Install all new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 



Install a new Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

C2209-00-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR INTERNAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. The Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module monitors its internal microprocessors for correct operation. SET CONDITION:

If the Tire Pressure Module detects an internal fault, the DTC is set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes NON-FCC COMPLIANT COMPONENTS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE - INTERNAL FAULT NOTE:

Check for and remove any non-FCC compliant components before beginning this diagnostic procedure.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TPM INTERNAL FAILURE DTC PRESENT 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, erase stored DTCs. 4. Turn the ignition off. 5. Turn the ignition on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display TIRE PRESSURE MODULE INTERNAL FAILURE? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U0001-00-CAN C BUS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on, battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts, and engine run time greater than Three seconds. SET CONDITION:

The Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Module does not receive any Can C bus messages for a specific amount of time. One trip fault. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN C BUS OPEN OR SHORTED CONDITION TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

For vehicle communication problems, use the scan tool to refer to the Network Review Screen. The screen depicts a high level view of the vehicle network. Fault and problem areas appear in red. Selecting any of the network components allows access to the source of the problem.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With a scan tool, select View DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0001-Can C Bus circuit diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0002-00-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

For vehicle communication problems, use the scan tool to refer to the Network Review Screen. The screen depicts a high level view of the vehicle network. Fault and problem areas appear in red. Selecting any of the network components allows access to the source of the problem.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With a scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Diagnose the U0002-00 CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE as the U0001 CAN C BUS CIRCUIT test. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0001-Can C Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0100-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Powertrain Control Module (ECM/PCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (ECM/PCM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC NOTE:

If present, diagnose and repair DTC U0002-88-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE- BUS OFF before diagnosing this DTC.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0100-Lost Communication with ECM/PCM diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0121-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0121-00-Lost Communication with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Control Module diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0168-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (WIN/WCM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Vehicle Security Control Module (WIN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0168-Lost Communication with Vehicle Security Control Module (WIN) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

STANDARD PROCEDURE STANDARD PROCEDURE - TPM VERIFICATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE Was the TPM Module replaced during the test procedure? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. PLACARD PRESSURE VALUES 1. Reconnect the previously removed and/or disconnected components and connectors. 2. With the scan tool, select "Miscellaneous Functions" in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 3. Program the Placard Pressure Values into the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). 4. Go To "Tire Pressure Module (TPM)", select "Data Display", read "'Tire Placard Pressure - Front" and "'Tire Placard Pressure -Rear" and confirm the values match the Tire Inflation Pressure (Placard) label. Also, go into the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), select Data Display and read "'Tire Placard Pressure - Front" and "'Tire Placard Pressure -Rear" to confirm the values were programmed correctly. If the Placard values are incorrect in the TIPM or TPM Module, select the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) then under "Miscellaneous Functions", select "Update 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 SUSPENSION Tire Pressure Module (TPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Pressure Threshold" and enter the placard pressure value as seen on the Tire Inflation Pressure (Placard) label. 5. With the scan tool, erase all stored DTCs. 6. With the scan tool, read TPM Module DTCs. Are there any DTCs present? Yes 

Repair not complete, perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

No Go To 3. 3. TPM SENSOR REPLACEMENT 

NOTE:

If a TPM-RKE Tool is not available, let the vehicle sit stationary for more then 20 minutes, and then proceed to step 4.

1. Using an updated TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool, select TPM Functions, then enter the Model Year and the Body Style of the vehicle, and for the Trigger Selection select PARK SENSOR 2. Scan each TPM Sensor at each road wheel, and store each TPM Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, RIGHT REAR, and SPARE TIRE (if equipped).) 3. Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the scan tool, and then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the TPM. 4. Drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, read TPM DTCs. Are there any TPM DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.



Repair complete.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC B10B4 B10B5 B10B8 B10B9 B1138 B1139 B162B B162C B162F B1630 B1633 B1634 B1637 B1638 B163B B163C B163F B1640 B1643 B1644 B1647 B1648 B1659 B165C B1660 B1663 B1664 B16D0 B16D1 B16D4 B16D5 B17AE B17B2 B1820

Description CABIN HEATER 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW CABIN HEATER 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH CABIN HEATER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW CABIN HEATER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH CABIN HEATER 3 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW CABIN HEATER 3 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH FRONT LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW FRONT LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH FRONT RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW FRONT RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH REAR LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW REAR LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH REAR RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW REAR RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH REAR FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW REAR FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH LEFT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW LEFT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH RIGHT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW RIGHT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH REAR LEFT TRAILER TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW REAR RIGHT TRAILER TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW HOOD AJAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B184E B184F B1851 B2101 B2102 B210D B210E B212F B2142 B219A B219F B2206 B2215 B222C B2304 B2305 B230D B230E B2323 B2324 B25AB B25AE C1008 P0072 P0073 P0462 P0463 P0691 P0691 P0692 P0692 P0693 P0693 P0694 P0694 P1273 P1275 P129C P129E P2067

FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK IGNITION RUN/START INPUT LOW IGNITION RUN/START INPUT HIGH BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH IGNITION RUN/ACC CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW IGNITION OFF DRAW (IOD) FUSE NOT PRESENT IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START CONTROL CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT IGNITION OFF DRAW (IOD) FUSE BLOWN CURRENT VIN MISSING / MISMATCH FRONT CONTROL MODULE INTERNAL (TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE) VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (STUCK LOW) WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (STUCK HIGH) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (STUCK LOW) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (STUCK HIGH) HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH LIFTGATE UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW LIFTGATE UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH BRAKE FLUID LEVEL CIRCUIT HIGH AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (2-SPEED FAN) COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (PWM FAN) COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (2-SPEED FAN) COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (PWM FAN) COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (2-SPEED FAN) COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (PWM FAN) COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (2-SPEED FAN) COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (PWM FAN) A/C CONTROL CIRCUIT 2 HIGH A/C CONTROL CIRCUIT 2 OVERCURRENT INVERTER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH INVERTER CONTROL CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

P2068 U0001 U0010 U0100 U0101 U0102 U0103 U0104 U0121 U0127 U0131 U0132 U0136 U0141 U0151 U0155 U0159 U0164 U0167 U0168 U0181 U0184 U0186 U0197 U0203 U0204 U0208 U0209 U0212 U0230 U0232 U0241 U0249

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH CAN C BUS CAN INTERIOR BUS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TRANSFER CASE CONTROL MODULE / AWD LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE (ESM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CRUISE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE (EHPS) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELSD LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER (ORC) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK ASSIST MODULE (PTS) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL MODULE (ITM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (WIRELESS IGNITION NODE OR WIN) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUDIO AMPLIFIER (AMP) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE (HFM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT (DMFL) (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT (DMFR) (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE (MSMD) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE (PLGM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE (BSM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE (AHBM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE - LAST ROW (VES3)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

U1145 U1147 U1148 U1158

LOST COMMUNICATION WITH KEYLESS GO SECURITY MODULE ADDITIONAL CAN INTERIOR BUS ECU DETECTED ADDITIONAL CAN C BUS ECU DETECTED LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER (SDARV)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

STANDARD PROCEDURE BODY VERIFICATION TEST DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. Perform Body Verification Test 1. Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors. 2. Make sure all accessories are turned off. 3. Make sure the battery is fully charged. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, record and erase Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)s from all modules. 6. If an electronic control module was replaced, select the applicable module from the scan tool. If the module has programmable features, program as necessary. 7. (Export only) If the Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) and/or Siren was replaced, select the ITM from the scan tool and perform the applicable replacement procedure. 8. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on. 9. Operate all functions of the system that caused the original concern. If a repair or module replacement was done to the power windows, operate the motor fully down and then to the full up position and stall it for two seconds. 10. With the scan tool, view all the modules and check for DTCs. Are DTCs present in any of the modules or is the original condition still present? Yes 

The repair is not complete. Refer to the related category for the DTC or symptom that is still present.



The repair is complete.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B10B4-CABIN HEATER 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Three relays are used for the electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater system. The PTC relays are used to switch fused battery voltage directly to the heating elements of the PTC heater unit when requested by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PTC relays are activated through a ground path provided by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects the (K360) PTC No. 1 Relay Control circuit is open or shorted to ground. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F343) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (K360) PTC NO. 1 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (K360) PTC NO. 1 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN PTC NO. 1 RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DTC IS ACTIVE WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts, or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions can result possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

Before erasing stored DTCs, record these conditions. Attempting to duplicate these conditions may assist when checking for an active DTC.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off and wait 30 seconds. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (F343) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORTED CIRCUIT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the PTC No. 1 Relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F343) Fused ASD Relay Output circuit at the PTC No. 1 Relay harness connector. 

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the open or short in the (F343) Fused ASD Relay Output circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (K360) PTC NO. 1 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K360) PTC No. 1 Relay Control circuit. 

Is the resistance above 10k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the short to ground in the (K360) PTC No. 1 Relay Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK (K360) PTC NO. 1 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 1. Measure the resistance of the (K360) PTC No. 1 Relay Control circuit between the PTC No. 1 Relay harness connector and the TIPM C1 harness connector. 

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (K360) PTC No. 1 Relay Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK PTC NO. 1 RELAY 1. Reconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 2. Remove the PTC No. 1 Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. 5. Turn the ignition off and wait 30 seconds. 6. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds. 7. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Replace the PTC No. 1 Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. INSPECT RELATED WIRING AND CHECK FOR TSBS 1. Turn the ignition off. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the PTC No. 1 Relay and the TIPM. 3. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 4. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 5. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B10B5-CABIN HEATER 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Three relays are used for the electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater system. The PTC relays are used to switch fused battery voltage directly to the heating elements of the PTC heater unit when requested by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PTC relays are activated through a ground path provided by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. PTC No. 1 Relay command on. SET CONDITION:

If the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects that the (K360) PTC No. 1 Relay Control circuit is shorted to voltage. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K360) PTC NO. 1 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE PTC NO. 1 RELAY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DTC IS ACTIVE WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Before erasing stored DTCs, record the environmental conditions. Attempting to duplicate these conditions may assist when checking for an active DTC.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. With the scan tool, actuate Diesel Cabin Heat 1. Monitor the scan tool for at least 30 seconds. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK PTC NO. 1 RELAY 1. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Remove the PTC No. 1 Relay. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds. 6. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

NOTE:

The scan tool should display an open circuit DTC with the PTC No. 1 Relay removed.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display: B10B4-CABIN HEATER 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes  

Replace the PTC No. 1 Relay. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (K360) PTC NO. 1 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between ground and the (K360) PTC No. 1 Relay Control circuit. 

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (K360) PTC No. 1 Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. INSPECT RELATED WIRING AND CHECK FOR TSBS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the PTC No. 1 Relay and the TIPM. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) ,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B10B8-CABIN HEATER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Three relays are used for the electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater system. The PTC relays are used to switch fused battery voltage directly to the heating elements of the PTC heater unit when requested by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PTC relays are activated through a ground path provided by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects the (K361) PTC No. 2 Relay Control circuit is open or shorted to ground. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F343) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (K361) PTC NO. 2 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (K361) PTC NO. 2 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN PTC NO. 2 RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DTC IS ACTIVE WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts, or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions can result possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

Before erasing stored DTCs, record the environmental conditions. Attempting to duplicate these conditions may assist when checking for an active DTC.

1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off and wait 30 seconds. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (F343) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORTED CIRCUIT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the PTC No. 2 Relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F343) Fused ASD Relay Output circuit at the PTC No. 2 Relay harness connector. 

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the open or short in the (F343) Fused ASD Relay Output circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (K361) PTC NO. 2 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K361) PTC No. 2 Relay Control circuit. 

Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 4.

No Repair the short to ground in the (K361) PTC No. 2 Relay Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK (K361) PTC NO. 2 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 1. Measure the resistance of the (K361) PTC No. 2 Relay Control circuit between the PTC No. 2 Relay harness connector and the TIPM C1 harness connector. 

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (K361) PTC No. 2 Relay Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK PTC NO. 2 RELAY 1. Reconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 2. Remove the PTC No. 2 Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. 5. Turn the ignition off and wait 30 seconds. 6. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds. 7. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Replace the PTC No. 2 Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. INSPECT RELATED WIRING AND CHECK FOR TSBs 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the PTC No. 2 Relay and the TIPM. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 4. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 5. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B10B9-CABIN HEATER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Three relays are used for the electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater system. The PTC relays are used to switch fused battery voltage directly to the heating elements of the PTC heater unit when requested by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PTC relays are activated through a ground path provided by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. PTC No. 2 Relay command on. SET CONDITION:

If the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects that the (K361) PTC No. 2 Relay Control circuit is shorted to voltage. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K361) PTC NO. 2 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE PTC NO. 2 RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DTC IS ACTIVE WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Before erasing stored DTCs, record the environmental conditions. Attempting to duplicate these conditions may assist when checking for an active DTC.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. With the scan tool, actuate the Diesel Cabin Heat 2. Monitor the scan tool for at least 30 seconds. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK PTC NO. 2 RELAY 1. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Remove the PTC No. 2 Relay. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds. 6. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

NOTE:

The scan tool should display an open circuit DTC with the PTC No. 2 Relay removed.

Does the scan tool display: B10B8-CABIN HEATER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Replace the PTC No. 2 Relay. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (K361) PTC NO. 2 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between ground and the (K361) PTC No. 2 Relay Control circuit. 

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (K361) PTC No. 2 Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. INSPECT RELATED WIRING AND CHECK FOR TSBS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the PTC No. 2 Relay and the TIPM. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B1138-CABIN HEATER 3 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Three relays are used for the electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater system. The PTC relays are used to switch fused battery voltage directly to the heating elements of the PTC heater unit when requested by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PTC relays are activated through a ground path provided by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects the (K363) PTC No. 3 Relay Control circuit is open or shorted to ground. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F343) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (K363) PTC NO. 3 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (K363) PTC NO. 3 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN PTC NO. 3 RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DTC IS ACTIVE WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts, or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions can result possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Before erasing stored DTCs, record these conditions. Attempting to duplicate these conditions may assist when checking for an active DTC.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. Turn the ignition off and wait 30 seconds. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (F343) FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORTED CIRCUIT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the PTC No. 3 Relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F343) Fused ASD Relay Output circuit at the PTC No. 3 Relay harness connector. 

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the open or short in the (F343) Fused ASD Relay Output circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (K363) PTC NO. 3 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K363) PTC No. 3 Relay Control circuit. 

Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the short to ground in the (K363) PTC No. 3 Relay Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK (K363) PTC NO. 3 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 1. Measure the resistance of the (K363) PTC No. 3 Relay Control circuit between the PTC No. 3 Relay harness connector and the TIPM C1 harness connector. 

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (K363) PTC No. 3 Relay Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK PTC NO. 3 RELAY 1. Reconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 2. Remove the PTC No. 3 Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. 5. Turn the ignition off and wait 30 seconds. 6. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds. 7. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Replace the PTC No. 3 Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. INSPECT RELATED WIRING AND CHECK FOR TSBS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the PTC No. 3 Relay and the TIPM. 3. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 4. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 5. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1139-CABIN HEATER 3 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Three relays are used for the electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater system. The PTC relays are used to switch fused battery voltage directly to the heating elements of the PTC heater unit when requested by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PTC relays are activated through a ground path provided by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. PTC No. 3 Relay command on. SET CONDITION:

If the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects that the (K363) PTC No. 3 Relay Control circuit is shorted to voltage. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K363) PTC NO. 3 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE PTC NO. 3 RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Before erasing stored DTCs, record the environmental conditions. Attempting to duplicate these conditions may assist when checking for an active DTC.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. With the scan tool, actuate the Diesel Cabin Heat 3. Monitor the scan tool for at least 30 seconds. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. Is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK PTC NO. 3 RELAY 1. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Remove the PTC No. 3 Relay. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds. 6. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

NOTE:

The scan tool should display an open circuit DTC with the PTC No. 3 Relay removed.

Does the scan tool display: B1138-CABIN HEATER 3 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes  

Replace the PTC No. 3 Relay. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (K363) PTC NO. 3 RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between ground and the (K363) PTC No. 3 Relay Control circuit. 

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (K363) PTC No. 3 Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. INSPECT RELATED WIRING AND CHECK FOR TSBS 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the PTC No. 3 Relay and the TIPM. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B162B-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Left Low Beam Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting low beam lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the low beam driver circuit. For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps, the low beam driver circuit connects to the HID Ballast through a wire harness internal to the Front Lamp Unit. For vehicles without HID lamps, the low beam driver circuit connects to the Low Beam Lamp. A headlamp return signal circuit that connects to the TIPM is used in both vehicle applications. For additional information on the Headlamp operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the low beam headlamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L43) LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (L43) LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (L911) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT LEFT LOW BEAM BULB FRONT LAMP UNIT (VEHICLES WITH HID) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Headlamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B162B-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID). 3. Disconnect the Left Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID). 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B162C-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 





For vehicles with HID lamps, replace the Front Lamp Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . For vehicles without HID lamps, replace the Left Low Beam Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L43) LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Left Low Beam Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the short to ground in the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (L43) LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (L911) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Left Low Beam Driver Circuit For A Short To Headlamp Return Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit and the (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Repair the short between the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit and the (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B162C-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Left Low Beam Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting low beam lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the low beam driver circuit. For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps, the low beam driver circuit connects to the HID Ballast through a wire harness internal to the Front Lamp Unit. For vehicles without HID lamps, the low beam driver circuit connects to the Low Beam Lamp. A headlamp return signal circuit that connects to the TIPM is used in both vehicle applications. For additional information on the Headlamp operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the low beam headlamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L43) LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (L43) LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (L911) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN LEFT LOW BEAM BULB FRONT LAMP UNIT (VEHICLES WITH HID) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Headlamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B162C-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK THE (L43) LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Left Low Beam Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Turn the Headlamps off. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID). Disconnect the Left Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID). Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit and (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit in the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID) or Left Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID). 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Headlamps on. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 





For vehicles with HID lamps, replace the Front Lamp Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . For vehicles without HID lamps, replace the Left Low Beam Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L43) LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking Left Low Beam Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit between the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID) or Left Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID) and the TIPM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L43) Left Low Beam Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (L911) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Checking Headlamp Return Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit between the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID) or Left Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID) and the TIPM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B162F-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Right Low Beam Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting low beam lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the low beam driver circuit. For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps, the low beam driver circuit connects to the HID Ballast through a wire harness internal to the Front Lamp Unit. For vehicles without HID lamps, the low beam driver circuit connects to the Low Beam Lamp. A headlamp return signal circuit that connects to the TIPM is used in both vehicle applications. For additional information on the Headlamp operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the low beam headlamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (L910) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT RIGHT LOW BEAM BULB FRONT LAMP UNIT (VEHICLES WITH HID) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Headlamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B162F-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID). 3. Disconnect the Right Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID). 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1630-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 





For vehicles with HID lamps, replace the Front Lamp Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . For vehicles without HID lamps, replace the Right Low Beam Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking Right Low Beam Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the short to ground in the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (L910) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Measuring Resistance Between Right Low Beam Driver Circuit & Headlamp Return Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit and the (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Repair the short between the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit and the (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1630-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Right Low Beam Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting low beam lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the low beam driver circuit. For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps, the low beam driver circuit connects to the HID Ballast through a wire harness internal to the Front Lamp Unit. For vehicles without HID lamps, the low beam driver circuit connects to the Low Beam Lamp. A headlamp return signal circuit that connects to the TIPM is used in both vehicle applications. For additional information on the Headlamp operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the low beam headlamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (L910) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN RIGHT LOW BEAM BULB FRONT LAMP UNIT (VEHICLES WITH HID) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Headlamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1630-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK THE (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking Right Low Beam Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Turn the Headlamps off. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID). Disconnect the Right Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID). Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit and (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit in the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID) or Right Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID). 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Headlamps on. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 





For vehicles with HID lamps, replace the Front Lamp Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . For vehicles without HID lamps, replace the Right Low Beam Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Checking Right Low Beam Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit between the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID) or Right Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID) and the TIPM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L44) Right Low Beam Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (L910) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Headlamp Return Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit between the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector (Vehicles with HID) or Right Front Lamp Assembly C2 harness connector (Vehicles without HID) and the TIPM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1633-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Left Hi Beam Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting high beam lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the high beam driver circuit. For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps, the high beam driver circuit connects to a circuit board internal to the Front Lamp Unit that controls the shutter in front of the HID Lighting Element. When this shutter is closed, some of the light from the HID Lighting Element is blocked resulting in low beam operation. When high beam lamp illumination is requested, the shutter is opened resulting in high beam lamp operation. The high beam driver circuit connects to the shutter control circuit board through a wire harness internal to the Front Lamp Unit. For vehicles without HID lamps, the high beam driver circuit connects to the High Beam Lamp. A headlamp return signal circuit that connects to the TIPM is used in both vehicle applications. For additional information on the Headlamp operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the high beam headlamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (L911) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT LEFT HIGH BEAM BULB FRONT LAMP UNIT (VEHICLES WITH HID) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the High Beam Headlamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1633-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1634-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 





For vehicles with HID lamps, replace the Front Lamp Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . For vehicles without HID lamps, replace the Left High Beam Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & Left High Beam Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the short to ground in the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (L911) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Measuring Resistance Between Left High Beam Driver Circuit & Headlamp Return Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit and the (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Repair the short between the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit and the (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1634-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Left Hi Beam Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting high beam lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the high beam driver circuit. For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps, the high beam driver circuit connects to a circuit board internal to the Front Lamp Unit that controls the shutter in front of the HID Lighting Element. When this shutter is closed, some of the light from the HID Lighting Element is blocked resulting in low beam operation. When high beam lamp illumination is requested, the shutter is opened resulting in high beam lamp operation. The high beam driver circuit connects to the shutter control circuit board through a wire harness internal to the Front Lamp Unit. For vehicles without HID lamps, the high beam driver circuit connects to the High Beam Lamp. A headlamp return signal circuit that connects to the TIPM is used in both vehicle applications. For additional information on the Headlamp operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the high beam headlamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (L911) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN LEFT HIGH BEAM BULB FRONT LAMP UNIT (VEHICLES WITH HID) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the High Beam Headlamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1634-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Measuring Voltage Between Ground & Left High Beam Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the Headlamps off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit and (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit in the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the High Beam Headlamps on. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 





For vehicles with HID lamps, replace the Front Lamp Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . For vehicles without HID lamps, replace the Left High Beam Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Checking Left High Beam Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit between the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector and the TIPM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L33) Left High Beam Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (L911) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 24: Checking Headlamp Return Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit between the Left Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector and the TIPM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (L911) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1637-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: Right Hi Beam Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting high beam lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the high beam driver circuit. For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps, the high beam driver circuit connects to a circuit board internal to the Front Lamp Unit that controls the shutter in front of the HID Lighting Element. When this shutter is closed, some of the light from the HID Lighting Element is blocked resulting in low beam operation. When high beam lamp illumination is requested, the shutter is opened resulting in high beam lamp operation. The high beam driver circuit connects to the shutter control circuit board through a wire harness internal to the Front Lamp Unit. For vehicles without HID lamps, the high beam driver circuit connects to the High Beam Lamp. A headlamp return signal circuit that connects to the TIPM is used in both vehicle applications. For additional information on the Headlamp operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the high beam headlamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (L910) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT RIGHT HIGH BEAM BULB FRONT LAMP UNIT (VEHICLES WITH HID) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the High Beam Headlamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1637-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1638-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 





For vehicles with HID lamps, replace the Front Lamp Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . For vehicles without HID lamps, replace the Right High Beam Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Checking Right High Beam Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the short to ground in the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (L910) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Checking Right High Beam Driver Circuit For A Short To Headlamp Return Signal Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit and the (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Repair the short between the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit and the (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1638-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 28: Right Hi Beam Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting high beam lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the high beam driver circuit. For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps, the high beam driver circuit connects to a circuit board internal to the Front Lamp Unit that controls the shutter in front of the HID Lighting Element. When this shutter is closed, some of the light from the HID Lighting Element is blocked resulting in low beam operation. When high beam lamp illumination is requested, the shutter is opened resulting in high beam lamp operation. The high beam driver circuit connects to the shutter control circuit board through a wire harness internal to the Front Lamp Unit. For vehicles without HID lamps, the high beam driver circuit connects to the High Beam Lamp. A headlamp return signal circuit that connects to the TIPM is used in both vehicle applications. For additional information on the Headlamp operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the high beam headlamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (L910) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN RIGHT HIGH BEAM BULB FRONT LAMP UNIT (VEHICLES WITH HID) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the High Beam Headlamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1638-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Checking Right High Beam Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Turn the Headlamps off. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit and (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit in the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the High Beam Headlamps on. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 





For vehicles with HID lamps, replace the Front Lamp Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . For vehicles without HID lamps, replace the Right High Beam Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Checking Right High Beam Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit between the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector and the TIPM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L34) Right High Beam Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (L910) HEADLAMP RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Checking Headlamp Return Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit between the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector and the TIPM C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (L910) Headlamp Return Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B163B-FRONT LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Front Left Turn Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the front turn signal control circuit. The front turn signal control circuit connects to the dual filament Park and Turn Signal Lamp. For certain export applications, a single filament bulb is used and the Park Lamp function is in a separate lamp. The same ground circuit is used for both the Park and Turn Signal filaments in a dual filament lamp. For additional information on the Turn Signal Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L161) Left Front Turn Signal Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L161) LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND PARK AND TURN SIGNAL BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Left Turn Signal on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B163B-FRONT LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the Left Turn Signal off. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Left Front Lamp Assembly C3 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Turn the Left Turn Signal on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B163C-FRONT LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 



Replace the Left Park and Turn Signal Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L161) LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Checking Left Front Turn Signal Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L161) Left Front Turn Signal Control circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



No

Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the short to ground in the (L161) Left Front Turn Signal Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B163C-FRONT LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

Fig. 35: Front Left Turn Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the front turn signal control circuit. The front turn signal control circuit connects to the dual filament Park and Turn Signal Lamp. For certain export applications, a single filament bulb is used and the Park Lamp function is in a separate lamp. The same ground circuit is used for both the Park and Turn Signal filaments in a dual filament lamp. For additional information on the Turn Signal Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L161) Left Front Turn Signal Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L161) LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (L161) LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK AND TURN SIGNAL BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Left Turn Signal on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B163C-FRONT LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (L161) LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS 

Fig. 36: Checking Left Front Turn Signal Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the Left Turn Signal off. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Left Front Lamp Assembly C3 harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L161) Left Front Turn Signal Control circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L161) Left Front Turn Signal Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

Fig. 37: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L161) Left Front Turn Signal Control circuit and the (Z901) Ground circuit at the Left Front Lamp Assembly C3 harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Left Turn Signal on. Does the test light blink on and off? Yes 



Replace the Park and Turn Signal Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L161) LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 38: Checking Left Front Turn Signal Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (L161) Left Front Turn Signal Control circuit between the Left Front Lamp Assembly C3 harness connector and the TIPM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L161) Left Front Turn Signal Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z901) Ground circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (Z901) Ground circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B163F-FRONT RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: Front Right Turn Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the front turn signal control circuit. The front turn signal control circuit connects to the dual filament Park and Turn Signal Lamp. For certain export applications, a single filament bulb is used and the Park Lamp function is in a separate lamp. The same ground circuit is used for both the Park and Turn Signal filaments in a dual filament lamp. For additional information on the Turn Signal Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L160) Right Front Turn Signal Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L160) RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND PARK AND TURN SIGNAL BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Right Turn Signal on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B163F-FRONT RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the ignition off. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the Right Front Lamp Assembly C3 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Turn the Right Turn Signal on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1640-FRONT RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 



Replace the Right Park and Turn Signal Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L160) RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Checking Right Front Turn Signal Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L160) Right Front Turn Signal Control circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



No

Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the short to ground in the (L160) Right Front Turn Signal Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1640-FRONT RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

Fig. 42: Front Right Turn Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the front turn signal driver circuit. The front turn signal driver circuit connects to the dual filament Park and Turn Signal Lamp. For certain export applications, a single filament bulb is used and the Park Lamp function is in a separate lamp. The same ground circuit is used for both the Park and Turn Signal filaments in a dual filament lamp. For additional information on the Turn Signal Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L160) Right Front Turn Signal Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L160) RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (L160) RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN PARK AND TURN SIGNAL BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Right Turn Signal on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1640-FRONT RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (L160) RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS 

Fig. 43: Checking Right Front Turn Signal Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the Right Turn Signal off. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Right Front Lamp Assembly C3 harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. Turn the ignition on. 6. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L160) Right Front Turn Signal Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L160) Right Front Turn Signal Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L160) Right Front Turn Signal Driver circuit and the (Z909) Ground circuit at the Right Front Lamp Assembly C3 harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Right Turn Signal on. Does the test light blink on and off? Yes 



Replace the Park and Turn Signal Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, FRONT LAMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L160) RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Checking Right Front Turn Signal Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (L160) Right Front Turn Signal Driver circuit between the Right Front Lamp Assembly C3 harness connector and the TIPM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L160) Right Front Turn Signal Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z909) Ground circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



No

Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the open in the (Z909) Ground circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1643-REAR LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Fig. 47: Rear Left Turn Lamp Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the rear turn signal control circuit. The rear turn signal control circuit connects to the dual filament Park and Turn Signal Bulb in the Lamp, Tail Stop Turn. For certain export applications, a single filament bulb is used for turn signal operation. The same ground circuit is used for both the Park and Turn Signal filaments in a dual filament lamp. For additional information on the Turn Signal Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L63) Left Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L63) LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Left Turn Signal on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1643-REAR LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the Left Turn Signal off. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Disconnect the Left Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C2 harness connector (Export). 4. Disconnect the Left Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C1 harness connector (Except Export). 5. Turn the ignition on. 6. Turn the Left Turn Signal on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC: B1644-REAR LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 



Replace the Left Rear Turn Signal Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP, TAIL STOP TURN , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L63) LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Checking Left Rear Turn Signal Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L63) Left Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Repair the short to ground in the (L63) Left Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



B1644-REAR LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Rear Left Turn Lamp Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the rear turn signal control circuit. The rear turn signal control circuit connects to the dual filament Park and Turn Signal Bulb in the Lamp, Tail Stop Turn. For certain export applications, a single filament bulb is used for turn signal operation. The same ground circuit is used for both the Park and Turn Signal filaments in a dual filament lamp. For additional information on the Turn Signal Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L63) Left Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L63) LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (L63) LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Left Turn Signal on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1644-REAR LEFT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK THE (L63) LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS

Fig. 50: Checking Left Rear Turn Signal Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Turn the Left Turn Signal off. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Left Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C2 harness connector (Export). Disconnect the Left Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C1 harness connector (Except Export). Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L63) Left Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L63) Left Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

Fig. 51: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L63) Left Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit and the (Z923) Ground circuit at the Left Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C2 harness connector (Export) or Left Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C1 harness connector (Except Export). 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Left Turn Signal on. Does the test light blink on and off? Yes 



Replace the Left Rear Turn Signal Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP, TAIL STOP TURN , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L63) LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Checking Left Rear Turn Signal Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (L63) Left Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit between the Left Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C2 harness connector (Export) or Left Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C1 harness connector (Except Export) and the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L63) Left Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (Z923) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z923) Ground circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Repair the open in the (Z923) Ground circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1647-REAR RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 54: Rear Right Turn Lamp Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the rear turn signal control circuit. The rear turn signal control circuit connects to the dual filament Park and Turn Signal Bulb in the Lamp, Tail Stop Turn. For certain export applications, a single filament bulb is used for turn signal operation. The same ground circuit is used for both the Park and Turn Signal filaments in a dual filament lamp. For additional information on the Turn Signal Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L62) Right Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L62) RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Right Turn Signal on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1647-REAR RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the Right Turn Signal off. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Disconnect the Right Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C2 harness connector (Export). 4. Disconnect the Right Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C1 harness connector (Except Export). 5. Turn the ignition on. 6. Turn the Right Turn Signal on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC: B1648-REAR RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 



Replace the Right Rear Turn Signal Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP, TAIL STOP TURN , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L62) RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 55: Checking Right Rear Turn Signal Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L62) Right Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (L62) Right Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1648-REAR RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Rear Right Turn Lamp Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the rear turn signal control circuit. The rear turn signal control circuit connects to the dual filament Park and Turn Signal Bulb in the Lamp, Tail Stop Turn. For certain export applications, a single filament bulb is used for turn signal operation. The same ground circuit is used for both the Park and Turn Signal filaments in a dual filament lamp. For additional information on the Turn Signal Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L62) Right Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L62) RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (L62) RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Z924) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Right Turn Signal on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1648-REAR RIGHT TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (L62) RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS 

Fig. 57: Checking Right Rear Turn Signal Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the Right Turn Signal off. 2. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Disconnect the Right Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C2 harness connector (Export). Disconnect the Right Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C1 harness connector (Except Export). Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L62) Right Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L62) Right Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L62) Right Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit and the (Z924) Ground circuit at the Right Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C2 harness connector (Export) or Right Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C1 harness connector (Except Export). 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Right Turn Signal on. Does the test light blink on and off? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Right Rear Turn Signal Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP, TAIL STOP TURN , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L62) RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Checking Right Rear Turn Signal Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (L62) Right Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit between the Right Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C2 harness connector (Export) or Right Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp C1 harness connector (Except Export) and the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L62) Right Rear Turn Signal Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (Z924) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z924) Ground circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Repair the open in the (Z924) Ground circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1659-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

Fig. 61: Front Fog Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting fog lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the front fog lamp control output circuit. The front fog lamp control output circuit connects to the both the Left and Right Front Fog Lamps. Separate ground circuits are used for the Left and Right Front Fog Lamps. For additional information on the Front Fog Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the fog lamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L90) Front Fog Lamp Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L90) FRONT FOG LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND LEFT FRONT FOG LAMP BULB RIGHT FRONT FOG LAMP BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Fog Lamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1659-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the Fog Lamps off. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Disconnect the Left and Right Front Fog Lamp harness connectors. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Fog Lamps on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1660-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 



Determine which lamp is causing the short to ground condition. Replace the appropriate Front Fog Lamp Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP, FOG, FRONT , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L90) FRONT FOG LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 62: Checking Front Fog Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L90) Front Fog Lamp Driver circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (L90) Front Fog Lamp Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: Park Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting park lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the park lamp circuits. Two of the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

park lamp circuits are controlled by the TIPM through a relay. The other two circuits are controlled directly by the TIPM. For additional information on the operation of the Park Lamps, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the Park Lamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low voltage condition on one of the park lamp voltage supply circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L77) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (L78) RIGHT PARK LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (L678) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (L777) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DAMAGED OR INOPERATIVE LAMP/BULB AFTERMARKET OR ACCESSORIES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all TIPM DTCs. 3. Turn the Park Lamps off and on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ISOLATE THE (L77) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT 1. Remove Fuse M35 to isolate the (L77) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Turn the Park Lamps off and on. 3. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW as stored? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. CHECK THE LAMPS ON THE (L77) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND 1. Install Fuse M35. 2. Turn the Park Lamps off and on. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, disconnect the harness connector for each lamp on the (L77) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit one at a time while checking for the DTC to become stored. 

Does the DTC change to stored? Yes 



Repair or replace the lamp/bulb that caused the DTC to change to stored in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L77) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Checking Fused Park Lamp Relay Output Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C5 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L77) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit in the TIPM C5 harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Repair the short to ground in the (L77) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. ISOLATE THE (L678) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT 1. Install Fuse M35. 2. Remove Fuse J14 to isolate the (L678) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit. 3. Turn the Park Lamps off and on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW as stored? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Go To 8. 6. CHECK THE AFTERMARKET, TRAILER TOW, OR ACCESSORIES FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

NOTE:

Inspect the connections at any aftermarket, trailer tow, or accessories using the (L678) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Repair as necessary.

1. Install Fuse J14. 2. Disconnect any aftermarket, trailer tow, or accessories using the (L678) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit. 3. Turn the Park Lamps off and on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW as stored? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





The concern is with the aftermarket, trailer tow, or accessories using the (L678) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit. Repair as necessary. Refer to the aftermarket accessories or accessories manual. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK THE (L678) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Checking Fused Park Lamp Relay Output Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C5 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L678) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit in the TIPM C5 harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Repair the short to ground in the (L678) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. CHECK THE LAMPS ON THE (L777) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND 1. Install Fuse J14. 2. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, disconnect the harness connector for each lamp on the (L777) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit one at a time while checking for the DTC to become stored. 

Does the DTC change to stored? Yes 



Repair or replace the lamp/bulb that caused the DTC to change to stored in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. CHECK THE (L777) FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Checking Fused Park Lamp Relay Output Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L777) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit in the TIPM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 10.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the short to ground in the (L777) Fused Park Lamp Relay Output circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 10. CHECK THE LAMPS ON THE (L78) RIGHT PARK LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND 1. Reconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, disconnect the harness connector for each lamp or component on the (L78) Right Park Lamp Driver circuit one at a time while checking for the DTC to become stored. 

Does the DTC change to stored? Yes 



Repair or replace the lamp/bulb/component that caused the DTC to change to stored in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 11. 11. CHECK THE (L78) RIGHT PARK LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Checking Right Park Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L78) Right Park Lamp Driver circuit in the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (L78) Right Park Lamp Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1660-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Front Fog Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting fog lamp illumination. When

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the front fog lamp control output circuit. The front fog lamp control output circuit connects to the both the Left and Right Front Fog Lamps. Separate ground circuits are used for the Left and Right Front Fog Lamps. For additional information on the Front Fog Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the fog lamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L90) Front Fog Lamp Driver circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L90) FRONT FOG LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (L90) FRONT FOG LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Z901) AND (Z909) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN LEFT AND RIGHT FRONT FOG LAMP BULBS TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all TIPM DTCs. 3. Turn the Front Fog Lamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1660-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (L90) FRONT FOG LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Checking Front Fog Lamp Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Turn the Fog Lamps off. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Left and Right Front Fog Lamp harness connectors. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L90) Front Fog Lamp Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the short to voltage on the (L90) Front Fog Lamp Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

Fig. 70: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L90) Front Fog Lamp Driver circuit and the (Z901) Ground circuit at the Left Front Fog Lamp harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Fog Lamps on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Left and Right Front Fog Lamp Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP, FOG, FRONT , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L90) FRONT FOG LAMP DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Checking Front Fog Lamp Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (L90) Front Fog Lamp Driver circuit between the Left Front Fog Lamp harness connector and the TIPM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L90) Front Fog Lamp Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (Z901) AND (Z909) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Checking Ground Circuits For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z901) Ground circuit. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z909) Ground circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) ,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (Z901) and (Z909) Ground circuits. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1663-REAR FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting rear fog lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the rear fog lamp control output circuit. The rear fog lamp control output circuit connects to the both the Left and Right Rear Fog Lamps. Separate ground circuits are used for the Left and Right Front Fog Lamps. For additional information on the Rear Fog Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the rear fog lamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L674) RIGHT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND LEFT REAR FOG LAMP BULB RIGHT REAR FOG LAMP BULB TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Rear Fog Lamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1663-REAR FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 1. Turn the Rear Fog Lamps off. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Disconnect the Left and Right Rear Fog Lamp harness connectors. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Rear Fog Lamps on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC: B1664-REAR FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 



Determine which lamp is causing the short to ground condition. Replace the appropriate Rear Fog Lamp Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP, FOG, FRONT , REMOVAL , and LAMP, FOG, REAR , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L674) RIGHT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. 

Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1664-REAR FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting rear fog lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a voltage output through the rear fog lamp control output circuit. The rear fog lamp control output circuit connects to the both the Left and Right Rear Fog Lamps. Separate ground circuits are used for the Left and Right Front Fog Lamps. For additional information on the Rear Fog Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the rear fog lamps active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a high condition on the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L674) RIGHT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT OPEN (L674) RIGHT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Z923) AND (Z924) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN LEFT AND RIGHT FRONT FOG LAMP BULBS TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all TIPM DTCs. 3. Turn the Rear Fog Lamps on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B1664-REAR FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (L674) RIGHT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS 1. Turn the Rear Fog Lamps off. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Disconnect the Left and Right Rear Fog Lamp harness connectors. 4. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 5. Turn the ignition on. 6. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. 

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage on the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE REAR FOG LAMPS FOR CORRECT OPERATION 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit and the (Z923) Ground circuit at the Left Rear Fog Lamp harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. Turn the Rear Fog Lamps on. 

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Replace the Left and Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP, FOG, FRONT , REMOVAL , and LAMP, FOG, REAR , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (L674) RIGHT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit between the Left Rear Fog Lamp harness connector and the TIPM C7 harness connector. 

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (Z923) AND (Z924) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z923) Ground circuit. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z924) Ground circuit. 

Does the test light illuminate brightly for each circuit? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (Z923) and (Z924) Ground circuits. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B16D0-LEFT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 73: Left DRL Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

On vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) controls the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) relays by providing a ground path for the coil side of the relays. An ignition run/start circuit provides the supply voltage to the coil. For additional information on the Daytime Running Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the DRL active SET CONDITION:

When the TIPM detects a low condition on the (L57) Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L57) LEFT DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN LEFT DRL RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

For export applications, the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) may be disabled by the vehicle owner or at the request of the vehicle owner. The DRL feature is disabled by removing the DRL relays, which will set this DTC. These DTCs should be ignored unless or until it has been confirmed that the vehicle owner did not remove the DRL relays or did not request the disabling of the DRL feature.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. Start the engine. With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B16D0-LEFT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE LEFT DRL RELAY 1. Shift the gear selector into Park. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Remove the Left DRL Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 6. Start the engine. 7. With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive. 8. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC: B16D0-LEFT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Left DRL Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (L57) LEFT DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Checking Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Shift the gear selector into Park. Turn the ignition off. Reinstall the Left DRL Relay. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L57) Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit at the TIPM C1 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Repair the open or high resistance in the (L57) Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B16D1-LEFT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: Left DRL Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

On vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) controls the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) relays by providing a ground path for the coil side of the relays. An ignition run/start circuit provides the supply voltage to the coil. For additional information on the Daytime Running Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the DRL active SET CONDITION:

When the TIPM detects a high condition on the (L57) Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L57) LEFT DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE LEFT DRL RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Start the engine. 4. With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B16D1-LEFT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE LEFT DRL RELAY 1. Shift the gear selector into Park. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Remove the Left DRL Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 6. Start the engine. 7. With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive. 8. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B16D1-LEFT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Left DRL Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (L57) LEFT DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 76: Checking Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Shift the gear selector into Park. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Left DRL Relay. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L57) Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit at the TIPM C1 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L57) Left Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B16D4-RIGHT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Right DRL Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

On vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) controls the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) relays by providing a ground path for the coil side of the relays. An ignition run/start circuit provides the supply voltage to the coil. For additional information on the Daytime Running Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the DRL active SET CONDITION:

When the TIPM detects a low condition on the (L60) Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L60) RIGHT DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN RIGHT DRL RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

For export applications, the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) may be disabled by the vehicle owner or at the request of the vehicle owner. The DRL feature is disabled by removing the DRL relays, which will set this DTC. These DTCs should be ignored unless or until it has been confirmed that the vehicle owner did not remove the DRL relays or did not request the disabling of the DRL feature.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. Start the engine. With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B16D4-RIGHT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE RIGHT DRL RELAY 1. Shift the gear selector into Park. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Remove the Right DRL Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 6. Start the engine. 7. With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive. 8. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC: B16D4-RIGHT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Right DRL Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (L60) RIGHT DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 78: Checking Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Shift the gear selector into Park. Turn the ignition off. Reinstall the Right DRL Relay. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L60) Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit at the TIPM C1 harness connector. Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Repair the open or high resistance in the (L60) Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B16D5-RIGHT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 79: Right DRL Lamp Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

On vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) controls the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) relays by providing a ground path for the coil side of the relays. An ignition run/start circuit provides the supply voltage to the coil. For additional information on the Daytime Running Lamps operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the DRL active SET CONDITION:

When the TIPM detects a high condition on the (L60) Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L60) RIGHT DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE RIGHT DRL RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Start the engine. 4. With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B16D5-RIGHT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE RIGHT DRL RELAY 1. Shift the gear selector into Park. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Remove the Right DRL Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 6. Start the engine. 7. With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive. 8. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B16D5-RIGHT DRL LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Right DRL Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (L60) RIGHT DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 80: Checking Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Shift the gear selector into Park. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Right DRL Relay. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L60) Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit at the TIPM C1 harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L60) Right Daytime Running Lamp Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B17AE-REAR LEFT TRAILER TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 81: Rear Left Trailer Turn Lamp Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the trailer tow turn signal control circuit. For additional information on the Trailer Tow Wiring operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L673) Left Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L673) LEFT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Make sure any aftermarket or trailer tow accessories are disconnected from the trailer tow connector.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. Turn on the Left Turn Signal. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B17AE-REAR LEFT TRAILER TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK THE (L673) LEFT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS

Fig. 82: Checking Left Rear Turn Signal Control Circuit For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Disconnect the Trailer Tow 7-Way Wiring harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L673) Left Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Repair the short to ground in the (L673) Left Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND 

NOTE:

This measurement is taken at the Trailer Tow Connector used by the customer. Use the diagram on the Trailer Tow Connector cover to determine the correct terminal.

1. Reconnect the Trailer Tow 7-Way Wiring harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L673) Left Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit at the appropriate terminal in the Trailer Tow Connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the Trailer Tow Connector in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONNECTOR, TRAILER TOW , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B17B2-REAR RIGHT TRAILER TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Rear Right Trailer Turn Lamp Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives a bus message requesting turn signal lamp illumination. When this bus message is received, the TIPM provides a pulsed voltage output through the trailer tow turn signal control circuit. For additional information on the Trailer Tow Wiring operation, refer to OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the turn signal active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L674) RIGHT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Make sure any aftermarket or trailer tow accessories are disconnected from the Trailer Tow Connector.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. Turn on the Right Turn Signal. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B17B2-REAR RIGHT TRAILER TURN LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK THE (L674) RIGHT REAR STOP/TURN SIGNAL FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS

Fig. 84: Checking Right Rear Turn Signal Control Circuit For A Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Disconnect the Trailer Tow 7-Way Wiring harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Repair the short to ground in the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND 

NOTE:

This measurement is taken at the Trailer Tow Connector used by the customer. Use the diagram on the Trailer Tow Connector cover to determine the correct terminal.

1. Reconnect the Trailer Tow 7-Way Wiring harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L674) Right Rear Stop/Turn Signal Feed circuit at the appropriate terminal in the Trailer Tow Connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the Trailer Tow Connector in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONNECTOR, TRAILER TOW , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1820-HOOD AJAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 85: Hood Ajar Input Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects and open or short to voltage on the Hood Ajar Switch Sense circuit for over 10 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G70) HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (G931) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN (G70) HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE HOOD AJAR SWITCH OPEN TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Open the hood and make sure the Hood Ajar Switch is connected before proceeding.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. Close the hood. Cycle the ignition from on to off. Turn the ignition on. Open then close the hood. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1820-HOOD AJAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE HOOD AJAR SWITCH 1. Turn the ignition off. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Open the hood. Disconnect the Hood Ajar Switch harness connector. Manually rotate the Hood Latch into the closed position. Measure the resistance between the (G70) Hood Ajar Switch Sense circuit and the (G931) Sensor Return circuit at the component. Is the resistance approximately 1k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Hood Latch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LATCH, HOOD , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (G70) HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Checking Hood Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Measure the voltage between ground and the (G70) Hood Ajar Switch Sense circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the short to voltage in the (G70) Hood Ajar Switch Sense circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (G70) HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Checking Hood Ajar Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (G70) Hood Ajar Switch Sense circuit between the TIPM C4 harness connector and the Hood Ajar Switch harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (G70) Hood Ajar Switch Sense circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (G931) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 88: Checking Sensor Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (G931) Sensor Return circuit between the TIPM C4 harness connector and the Hood Ajar Switch harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (G931) Sensor Return circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B184E-FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 89: Flipper Glass Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives an unlatch signal for the flip-up glass. SET CONDITION:

When the TIPM detects a low condition on the Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit for over five seconds, this code sets. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q81) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND FLIP-UP GLASS LATCH TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Operate the Flip-Up Glass Release Switch several times. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display B184E-FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE FLIP-UP GLASS LATCH FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Checking Flip-Up Glass Latch For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Flip-Up Glass Latch C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (Q81) Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit and the (Z924) Ground circuit in Flip-Up Glass Latch C1 harness connector. 6. With the scan tool, actuate the Flipper Glass Release Motor. Does the test light illuminate brightly when the latch is actuated? Yes 

Replace the Flip-Up Glass Latch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LATCH , REMOVAL , and LATCH, FLIP-UP GLASS , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (Q81) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 91: Checking Flip-Up Glass Relay Output Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q81) Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (Q81) Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B184F-FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Flipper Glass Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives an unlatch signal for the flip-up glass. SET CONDITION:

When the TIPM detects a high condition on the Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit for over five seconds, this code sets. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q81) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Q81) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN (Z924) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN FLIP-UP GLASS LATCH TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Operate the Flip-Up Glass Release Switch several times. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display B184F-FLIPPER GLASS CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (Q81) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: Checking Flip-Up Glass Relay Output Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Flip-Up Glass Latch C1 harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (Q81) Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit in the FlipUp Glass Latch C1 harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

No

Repair the short to voltage in the (Q81) Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE FLIP-UP GLASS LATCH FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

Fig. 94: Checking Flip-Up Glass Latch For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Reconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (Q81) Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit and the (Z924) Ground circuit in Flip-Up Glass Latch C1 harness connector. 5. With the scan tool, actuate the Flipper Glass Release Motor. Does the test light illuminate brightly when the latch is actuated? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Flip-Up Glass Latch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LATCH , REMOVAL , and LATCH, FLIP-UP GLASS , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (Q81) FLIP-UP GLASS RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 95: Checking Flip-Up Glass Relay Output Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (Q81) Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit between the Flip-Up Glass Latch C1 harness connector and the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (Q81) Flip-Up Glass Relay Output circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (Z924) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 96: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Using a test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z924) Ground circuit in the Flip-Up Glass C1 harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (Z924) Ground circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B1851-FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 97: Flipper Glass Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition on the Flip-Up Glass Switch Sense circuit for over 10 seconds, this code will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (Q80) FLIP-UP GLASS SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND FLIP-UP GLASS RELEASE SWITCH STUCK TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Operate the Flip-Up Glass Release Switch several times. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1851-FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. FLIP-UP GLASS SWITCH STUCK 1. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 2. Disconnect the License Plate Lamp/Rear Camera Assembly harness connector. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Wait 10 seconds. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display B1851-FLIPPER GLASS SWITCH STUCK? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Flip-Up Glass Release Switch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SWITCH, FLIP-UP GLASS RELEASE , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (Q80) FLIP-UP GLASS SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 98: Checking Flip-Up Glass Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q80) Flip-Up Glass Switch Sense circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (Q80) Flip-Up Glass Switch Sense circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B2101-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 99: Ignition Run/Start Input Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) monitors the hardwired ignition switch output circuit from the ignition switch or Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) and compares it to the ignition switch status message received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition switch on. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM has detected that the hardwired ignition switch input voltage from the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) indicates that the ignition switch is in the off position, but the CAN bus message indicates that the ignition switch is the run position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Check to make sure the battery and charging system are operating properly. Battery and/or charging system problems may cause these DTCs to set.

NOTE:

Diagnose any related Powertrain DTC(s) before continuing.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTC(s). Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT AT THE TIPM 

Fig. 100: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Measure the voltage between ground and the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 101: Checking Fused Ignition Run-Start Output Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the WIN harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the WIN in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 102: Ignition Run/Start Input Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) monitors the hardwired ignition switch output circuit from the ignition switch or Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) and compares it to the ignition switch status message received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition switch on. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM has detected that the hardwired ignition switch input voltage from the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) indicates that the ignition switch is in the run position, but the CAN bus message indicates that the ignition switch is the off position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

Check to make sure the battery and charging system are operating properly. Battery and/or charging system problems may cause these DTCs to set.

NOTE:

Diagnose any related Powertrain DTC(s) before continuing.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, read TIPM DTC(s). Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE 

Fig. 103: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit For Short To Battery Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Disconnect the WIN harness connector. Measure the voltage between ground and the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the WIN harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIN FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 104: Checking WIN For An Internal Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the WIN harness connector. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the WIN in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Battery voltage less than 9 volts for approximately five to six seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RESISTANCE IN THE BATTERY POSITIVE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE IN THE GENERATOR CASE GROUND GENERATOR OPERATION GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS NOTE:

Make sure the Battery is in good condition. and perform the Battery System diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

NOTE:

Inspect the vehicle for after market accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.

NOTE:

Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.

NOTE:

Inspect the fuses in the TIPM. If an open fuse is found, use the wire

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for damage. 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs. Does the scan tool display any active PCM DTCs? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic test procedure.



Check the above conditions that can cause a low voltage condition. Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Battery voltage greater than 16 volts for approximately five to six seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes GENERATOR OPERATION POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS NOTE:

Make sure the Battery is in good condition. and perform the Battery System diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

NOTE:

Inspect the vehicle for after market accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.

NOTE:

Inspect the fuses in the TIPM. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs. Does the scan tool display any active PCM DTCs? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic test procedure.



Check the above conditions that can cause a high voltage condition. Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



B212F-IGNITION RUN/ACC CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the ignition is in the accessory or on position, the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) energizes the Run/Accessory Relay. The TIPM internally grounds the coil for the Run/Accessory Relay. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. With the Run/Accessory Relay commanded on. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM detects a short to ground in the internal Run/Accessory Relay Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RUN/ACCESSORY RELAY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B212F-IGNITION RUN/ACC CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. RUN/ACCESSORY RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Run/Accessory Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 5. Turn the ignition off. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC: B212F-IGNITION RUN/ACC CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Run/Accessory Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Before continuing, check the TIPM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

1. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. 2. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B2142-IGNITION OFF DRAW (IOD) FUSE NOT PRESENT For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the off position. WHEN MONITORED:

With the Ignition on. Odometer reading is less than 80.5 km (50 mi). SET CONDITION:

Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Fuse not installed or blown in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes IOD FUSE NOT PRESENT IOD FUSE OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC NOTE:

If the odometer reading is greater than 80.5 km (50 mi), DTC B219F sets instead of B2142 when the IOD fuse cannot be detected.

1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition off for a minimum of 30 seconds. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B2142-IGNITION OFF DRAW (IOD) FUSE NOT PRESENT? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. VERIFY THE IOD FUSE IS INSTALLED 1. Verify the IOD Fuse is installed in the TIPM. 

Is the IOD Fuse present? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Install the IOD Fuse.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK FOR A OPEN IOD FUSE 1. Check if the IOD Fuse is open. 

Is the IOD Fuse blown? Yes 



Using the wiring diagrams, diagnose the cause of the short to ground condition. Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Test complete. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B219A-IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START CONTROL CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT

Fig. 105: Ignition Switch Output Circuit Wiring Diagram

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Over-current condition detected on the (F1) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F1) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (ESM)/SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) - 5.7L TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition off for a minimum of 30 seconds. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK FOR AN INTERNAL CONCERN WITH ESM/SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Shift Lever Assembly harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition off for a minimum of 30 seconds. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

For vehicles with a 3.6L, Go To 4. For all others, Go To 3.

No Replace the Shift Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. For vehicles with NAG1 transmissions, refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . For vehicles with 545RFE transmissions, refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK FOR AN INTERNAL CONCERN WITH PCM 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the PCM C1 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition off for a minimum of 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace and program the PCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWERTRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (F1) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 106: Checking Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (F1) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (F1) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B219F-IGNITION OFF DRAW (IOD) FUSE BLOWN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the off position. WHEN MONITORED:

With the Ignition on. Odometer reading is greater than 80.5 km (50 mi). SET CONDITION:

Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Fuse not installed or open in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes IOD FUSE NOT PRESENT IOD FUSE OPEN DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition off for a minimum of 30 seconds. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B219F-IGNITION OFF DRAW (IOD) FUSE BLOWN?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. VERIFY THE IOD FUSE IS INSTALLED 1. Verify the IOD Fuse is installed in the TIPM. 

Is the IOD Fuse present? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Install the IOD Fuse.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK FOR A OPEN IOD FUSE 1. Check if the IOD Fuse is open. 

Is the IOD Fuse blown? Yes 



Using the wiring diagrams, diagnose the cause of the short to ground condition. Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING / MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) transmits the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) as a network message on the CAN C bus. The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) receives and stores the VIN.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The current VIN message from the PCM is different than the VIN stored in the TIPM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PCM FROM ANOTHER VEHICLE INSTALLED DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. PCM FROM ANOTHER VEHICLE INSTALLED NOTE:

This DTC is set when a PCM from another vehicle is installed into the current vehicle.

Has another PCM been installed? Yes 



Replace the PCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWERTRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. OTHER CAN-C MODULES SET VIN MISMATCH 

Is the VIN Mismatch DTC set in other CAN-C modules? Yes 



Replace the PCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWERTRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B2215-FRONT CONTROL MODULE INTERNAL (TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) performs an internal self test. The repair of this fault condition does not involve any external circuitry and centers on verifying the integrity of the internal circuitry and software validity. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects an internal fault. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. REPLACE THE TIPM IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The same Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for a vehicle can be used with different market and vehicle content applications. In order for the TIPM to function properly, the vehicle configuration information must be correctly programmed into the module when the module is replaced. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is not configured correctly to the vehicle. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC 1. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on at least five times, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds per cycle. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CONFIGURE THE TIPM TO THE VEHICLE 1. With the scan tool, enter program network configuration and program the TIPM to the vehicle configuration. 2. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on at least five times, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds per cycle. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace and program the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Repair is complete.



No

B2304-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (STUCK LOW)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 107: Wiper Park Switch Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Front Wiper operating in Low Speed or Intermittent mode. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a short to ground on the Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND FRONT WIPER MOTOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Cycle the Wiper Switch on and off three times. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. FRONT WIPER MOTOR 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Windshield Wiper Motor harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the Front Wiper Park Switch Sense. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the Front Wiper Park Switch Sense display: Not Parked? Yes 



Replace the Front Wiper Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, WIPER , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 108: Checking Wiper Park Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (W7) Front Wiper Park Sense Circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B2305-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (STUCK HIGH)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 109: Wiper Park Switch Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Front Wiper operating in Low Speed or Intermittent mode. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) does not detect a change from High to Low voltage on the Front Wiper Park Switch Sense Circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE FRONT WIPER MOTOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Cycle the Wiper Switch on and off three times. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 110: Checking Front Wiper Park Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Windshield Wiper Motor harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR 

Fig. 111: Checking Front Wiper Motor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Reconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Connect a jumper wire between the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit and ground. With the scan tool, read the Front Wiper Park Switch Sense.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the Front Wiper Park Switch Sense display: Parked? Yes 



Replace the Front Wiper Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, WIPER , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 112: Checking Front Wiper Park Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit between the Front Wiper Motor harness connector and the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B230D-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (STUCK LOW)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 113: Rear Wiper Park Switch Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on. Rear Wiper requested SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a short to ground or open in the Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND REAR WIPER MOTOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Cycle the Rear Wiper Switch on and off three times. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE REAR WIPER MOTOR HARNESS CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Check the headliner harness inline connectors and rear wiper motor harness connector. Make sure the connectors are fully seated. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Cycle the Rear Wiper Switch on and off three times. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the open connector condition that originally set this DTC is not present at this time.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE REAR WIPER MOTOR 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Rear Wiper Motor harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the Rear Wiper Park Signal. 

Does the Rear Wiper Park Signal display: Not Parked (false)? Yes 



Replace the Rear Wiper Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, WIPER , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK (W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 114: Measuring Resistance Between Ground And Rear Wiper Park Switch Sensor Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense Circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B230E-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (STUCK HIGH)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 115: Rear Wiper Park Switch Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on. Rear Wiper requested SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) does not detect a change from High to Low voltage on the Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense Circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE REAR WIPER MOTOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Cycle the Rear Wiper Switch on and off three times. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 116: Checking Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Rear Wiper Motor harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE REAR WIPER MOTOR 

Fig. 117: Rear Wiper Motor Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a jumper wire between the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit and ground. 2. With the scan tool, read the Rear Wiper Park Signal. Does the Rear Wiper Park Signal display: Parked?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Rear Wiper Motor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MOTOR, WIPER , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 118: Measuring Resistance Of Rear Wiper Park Switch Sensor Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit between the Rear Wiper Motor harness connector and the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B2323-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 119: Headlamp Washer Motor Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. With the Headlamp Washers off. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a low condition. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L124) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (W24) COIL RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN (L124) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (W24) COIL RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B2323-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK THE HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Headlamp Washer Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B2323-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Headlamp Washer Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (L124) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Remove the Headlamp Washer relay. 4. Measure the resistance of the (L124) Headlamp Washer Relay Control circuit between the TIPM C4 harness connector and the Headlamp Washer relay. 

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the open in the (L124) Headlamp Washer Relay Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (L124) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 120: Checking Headlamp Washer Relay Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L124) Headlamp Washer Relay Control circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the short to ground in the (L124) Headlamp Washer Relay Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (W24) COIL RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 1. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (W24) Coil Relay Supply circuit between the TIPM C3 harness connector and the Headlamp Washer relay. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the open in the (W24) Coil Relay Supply circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE (W24) COIL RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 121: Checking Coil Relay Supply Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (W24) Coil Relay Supply circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the short to ground in the (W24) Coil Relay Supply circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B2324-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 122: Headlamp Washer Motor Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. With the Headlamp Washers activated. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects an high condition. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L124) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the Headlamp Washers on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B2324-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Remove the Headlamp Washer Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. Turn the Headlamp Washers on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B2324-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Headlamp Washer Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (L124) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 123: Checking Headlamp Washer Relay Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Remove the Headlamp Washer Relay. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L124) Headlamp Washer Relay Control circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L124) Headlamp Washer Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B25AB-LIFTGATE UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 124: Liftgate Unlock Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Liftgate Unlock Relay inactive. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects the Liftgate Unlock Relay Control circuit is open. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L177) LIFTGATE UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN LIFTGATE UNLOCK RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from off to on. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B25AB-LIFTGATE UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE LIFTGATE UNLOCK RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Liftgate Unlock Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition from off to on. 6. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display DTC: B25AB-LIFTGATE UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Liftgate Unlock Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (L177) LIFTGATE UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 125: Checking Liftgate Unlock Relay Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Reinstall the Liftgate Unlock Relay. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L177) Liftgate Unlock Relay Control circuit at the TIPM C1 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open or high resistance in the (L177) Liftgate Unlock Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

B25AE-LIFTGATE UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 126: Liftgate Unlock Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Liftgate Unlock Relay active. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects the Liftgate Unlock Relay Control circuit is shorted to voltage. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L177) LIFTGATE UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE LIFTGATE UNLOCK RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off. 4. Remove the FOBIK from the vehicle. 5. Lock the doors. 6. With the FOBIK present, apply and release the Passive Entry Liftgate Lock and Unlock switch located on the Liftgate. 7. Turn the ignition on. 8. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B25AE-LIFTGATE UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE LIFTGATE UNLOCK RELAY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Turn the ignition off. Remove the Liftgate Unlock Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Remove the FOBIK from the vehicle. Lock the doors. With the FOBIK present, apply and release the Passive Entry Liftgate Lock and Unlock switch located on the Liftgate. 9. Turn the ignition on. 10. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: B25AE-LIFTGATE UNLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Liftgate Unlock Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (L177) LIFTGATE UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 127: Checking Liftgate Unlock Relay Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Remove the Liftgate Unlock Relay. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (L177) Liftgate Unlock Relay Control circuit at the TIPM C1 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (L177) Liftgate Unlock Relay Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING C1008-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Brake Fluid Sensor Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects the Brake Fluid Level Circuit voltage is greater than expected for more than five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (B20) BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN (B20) BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (B20) BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Brake Fluid Level Switch Sense Circuit For A Short To Voltage In The Harness Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Brake Fluid Level Switch harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (B20) Brake Fluid Level Switch Sense circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (B20) Brake Fluid Level Switch Sense circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (B20) BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Brake Fluid Level Switch Sense Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (B20) Brake Fluid Level Switch Sense circuit between the Brake

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fluid Level Switch harness connector and the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the open in the (B20) Brake Fluid Level Switch Sense circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (Z901) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS 

Fig. 4: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z901) Ground circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (Z901) Ground circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking The TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Connect a jumper wire between the (B20) Brake Fluid Level Switch Sense circuit and the (Z901) Ground circuit in the Brake Fluid Level Switch harness connector. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. With the scan tool, read the Brake Fluid Level Voltage. Is the voltage below 1.0 volt? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Replace the Brake Fluid Level Switch. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0072-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor input voltage is below the minimum acceptable value. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G31) AAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (G31) AAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G931) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (AAT) SENSOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Diagnose and repair any system voltage DTCs before continuing with this test.

1. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature. WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 2. With the scan tool, select View DTCs. Is the DTC Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor signal voltage. Is the voltage above 4.5 volts with the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness disconnected? Yes 



Verify there is good pin to terminal contact in the AAT Sensor and TIPM harness connectors. Replace the Ambient Temperature Sensor if no problems were found with the connectors in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, AMBIENT TEMPERATURE , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (G31) AAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking AAT Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G31) AAT Sensor Signal circuit in the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.



Repair the short to ground in the (G31) AAT Sensor Signal circuit.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (G31) AAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (G931) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 8: Checking AAT Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Sensor Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (G31) AAT Sensor Signal circuit and the (G931) Sensor Return circuit in the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the short between the (G31) AAT Sensor Signal circuit and the (G931) Sensor Return circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the AAT Sensor and TIPM connectors. 5. Monitor the scan tool data relative to this circuit and wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 6. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 7. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB)s that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0073-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects that the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor input voltage is above the maximum acceptable value. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G31) AAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (G31) AAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (G931) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (AAT) SENSOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Diagnose and repair any system voltage DTCs before continuing with this test.

1. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature. WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 2. With the scan tool, select View DTCs. Is the DTC Active at this time? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (G31) AAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 10: Checking AAT Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the (G31) AAT Sensor Signal circuit in the Ambient Air Temperature

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Sensor harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (G31) AAT Sensor Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Checking Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) Sensor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the (G31) AAT Sensor Signal circuit and the (G931) Sensor Return in the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor signal voltage. Is the voltage below 1.0 volt with the jumper wire in place? Yes 



Verify there is good pin to terminal contact in the AAT Sensor and TIPM harness connectors. Replace the Ambient Temperature Sensor if no problems were found with the connectors in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, AMBIENT TEMPERATURE , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (G31) AAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking AAT Sensor Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C4 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance of the (G31) AAT Sensor Signal circuit between the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector and the TIPM C4 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (G31) AAT Sensor Signal circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (G931) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking Sensor Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (G931) Sensor Return circuit between the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector and the TIPM C4 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the open in the (G931) Sensor Return circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the AAT Sensor and Totally Integrated Power Module connectors. 5. Monitor the scan tool data relative to this circuit and wiggle test the wiring and connectors. 6. Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test. 7. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB)s that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0462-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects that the Fuel Level Sensor input voltage is below the minimum acceptable value. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G109) FUEL LEVEL SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT FUEL LEVEL SENSOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0462-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0463-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 



Replace the Fuel Level Sending Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENDING UNIT AND SENSOR, FUEL LEVEL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Checking Fuel Level Signal 1 Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (N4) Fuel Level Signal 1 circuit at the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

No

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the short to ground in the (N4) Fuel Level Signal 1 circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (G109) FUEL LEVEL SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 16: Checking Fuel Level Signal 1 Circuit For A Short To Fuel Level Sense Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit and the (N4) Fuel Level Signal 1 circuit at the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the short between the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit and the (N4) Fuel Level Signal 1 circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the Fuel Pump Module and the TIPM. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Fuel Pump Module and the TIPM C7 harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB)s that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0463-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects that the Fuel Level Sensor input voltage is above the maximum acceptable value. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT OPEN (N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (G109) FUEL LEVEL SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN FUEL LEVEL SENSOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0463-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Checking Fuel Level Signal 1 Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (N4) Fuel Level Signal 1 circuit at the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (N4) Fuel Level Signal 1 circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

Fig. 19: Checking Fuel Level Sensor For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Connect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the (N4) Fuel Level Signal 1 circuit and the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit at the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0463-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 



Replace the Fuel Level Sending Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENDING UNIT AND SENSOR, FUEL LEVEL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Checking Fuel Level Signal 1 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (N4) Fuel Level Signal 1 circuit between the Fuel Pump Module harness connector and the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (N4) Fuel Level Signal 1 circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (G109) FUEL LEVEL SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Checking Fuel Level Sense Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit between the Fuel Pump

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Module harness connector and the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the open in the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the Fuel Pump Module and the TIPM. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Fuel Pump Module and the TIPM C7 harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB)s that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0691-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (2-SPEED FAN)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Cooling Fan 1 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram (2-Speed Fan) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) sends a CAN bus message to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) requesting low speed cooling fan operation. The TIPM internally grounds the coil for the Low Speed

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Cooling Fan Relay. The Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay then provides battery voltage to the low speed coil in the Cooling Fan Motor. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. With the Low Speed Cooling Fan off. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM detects an open in the internal Low Speed Cooling Fan Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW SPEED COOLING FAN RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0691-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. LOW SPEED COOLING FAN RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. Turn the ignition off. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0691-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE 

NOTE:

Before continuing, check the TIPM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

1. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. 2. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0691-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (PWM FAN)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Cooling Fan 2 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram (PWM Fan) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

Vehicles with diesel engines and trailer tow packages are equipped with a pulse-width modulated (PWM) fan. Additionally, certain export market vehicles are also equipped with a PWM fan. The fan receives a duty cycle signal from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. The Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay is not used to control any components and has no external function. The TIPM connects to the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay through an internal connection and may set a DTC if the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay is removed or damaged. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. With the Low Speed Cooling Fan relay off. SET CONDITION:

The DTC is set if the Low Speed Fan relay is damaged or removed while the ignition is on. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW SPEED COOLING FAN RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) NOTE:

For diesel engine, trailer tow and certain export applications, the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay is not used to control any components and has no external function. The TIPM connects to the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay through an internal connection and may set a DTC if the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay is removed or damaged.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0691-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. LOW SPEED COOLING FAN RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 5. Turn the ignition off. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC: P0691-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE 

NOTE:

Before continuing, check the TIPM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

1. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. 2. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0692-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (2-SPEED FAN)

Fig. 24: Cooling Fan 1 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram (2-Speed Fan) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) sends a CAN bus message to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) requesting low speed cooling fan operation. The TIPM internally grounds the coil for the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay. The Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay then provides battery voltage to the low speed coil in the Cooling Fan Motor. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. With the Low Speed Cooling Fan on. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM detects a shorted condition in the internal Low Speed Cooling Fan Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW SPEED COOLING FAN RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, actuate Radiator Fan 1. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0692-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. LOW SPEED COOLING FAN RELAY 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Turn the ignition off. Remove the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, actuate Radiator Fan 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0692-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE 

NOTE:

Before continuing, check the TIPM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

1. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. 2. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0692-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (PWM FAN)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: Cooling Fan 2 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram (PWM Fan) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

Vehicles with diesel engines and trailer tow packages are equipped with a pulse-width modulated (PWM) fan. Additionally, certain export market vehicles are also equipped with a PWM fan. The fan receives a duty cycle signal from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. The Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay is not used to control any components and has no external function. The TIPM connects to the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay through an internal connection and may set a DTC if the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay is removed or damaged. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. With the Low Speed Cooling Fan relay on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC is set if the Low Speed Fan relay is damaged. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW SPEED COOLING FAN RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) NOTE:

For diesel engine, trailer tow and certain export applications, the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay is not used to control any components and has no external function. The TIPM connects to the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay through an internal connection and may set a DTC if the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay is removed or damaged.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, actuate Radiator Fan 1. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0692-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. LOW SPEED COOLING FAN RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 5. Turn the ignition off. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC: P0692-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE 

NOTE:

Before continuing, check the TIPM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

1. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. 2. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0693-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (2-SPEED FAN)

Fig. 26: Cooling Fan 1 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram (2-Speed Fan) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) sends a CAN bus message to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) requesting high speed cooling fan operation. The TIPM grounds the coil for the High Speed Cooling Fan Relay through the high speed radiator fan control circuit. The High Speed Cooling Fan Relay then provides battery voltage to the high speed coil in the Cooling Fan Motor. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. With the High Speed Cooling Fan off. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM detects a low condition in the Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (F942) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0693-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Radiator Fan High Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 5. Turn the ignition off. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display DTC: P0693-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Radiator Fan High Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (F942) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Remove the Radiator Fan High Relay. Turn the ignition on. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F942) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. NOTE:

The test light should be illuminated and bright. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the test light illuminated and bright? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (F942) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 28: Checking High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the short to ground in the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Measuring Resistance Of High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit from the TIPM C3 harness connector to the Radiator Fan High Relay. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the open or high resistance in the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 

NOTE:

Before continuing, check the TIPM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

1. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0693-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (PWM FAN)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Cooling Fan 2 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram (PWM Fan) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

Vehicles with diesel engines and trailer tow packages are equipped with a pulse-width modulated (PWM) fan. Additionally, certain export market vehicles are also equipped with a PWM fan. The fan receives a duty cycle signal from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. Based on the requested fan speed from the PCM, the TIPM outputs a 10 Hz duty cycle signal on the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit to the Radiator Cooling Fan. The Radiator Cooling Fan receives the duty cycle signal from the TIPM and controls the fan accordingly. The High Speed Cooling Fan Relay is not used to control any components and has no external function. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. Cooling Fan off. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM detects an open or short to ground in the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND RADIATOR COOLING FAN MODULE TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0693-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN IN THE HARNESS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Checking Rad Fan High Speed Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. Disconnect the Radiator Cooling Fan Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit between the TIPM C3 harness connector and Radiator Cooling Fan Module harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HARNESS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Checking Rad Fan High Speed Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit at the Radiator Cooling Fan Module harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the short to ground in the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Before continuing, check the TIPM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

1. Reconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. 4. With the scan tool, actuate the Radiator Fan 2 actuator using the On and Off commands. Does the test light dimly blink on and off while Radiator Fan 2 is commanded on? Yes 



Replace the Cooling Fan Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to FAN, COOLING , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0694-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (2-SPEED FAN)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Cooling Fan 2 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram (2-Speed Fan) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) sends a CAN bus message to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) requesting high speed cooling fan operation. The TIPM grounds the coil for the High Speed Cooling

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fan Relay through the high speed radiator fan control circuit. The High Speed Cooling Fan Relay then provides battery voltage to the high speed coil in the Cooling Fan Motor. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. With the High Speed Cooling Fan on. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM detects a short to voltage in the Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, actuate Radiator Fan 2. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0694-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Remove the Radiator Fan High Relay and substitute it with a known good relay. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, actuate Radiator Fan 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0694-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Radiator Fan High Relay.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Checking High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. Remove the Radiator Fan High Relay. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 

NOTE:

Before continuing, check the TIPM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

1. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits. Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P0694-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (PWM FAN)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Cooling Fan 2 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram (PWM Fan) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

Vehicles with diesel engines and trailer tow packages are equipped with a pulse-width modulated (PWM) fan. Additionally, certain export market vehicles are also equipped with a PWM fan. The fan receives a duty cycle signal from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. Based on the requested fan speed from the PCM, the TIPM outputs a 10 Hz duty cycle signal on the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit to the Radiator Cooling Fan. The Radiator Cooling Fan receives the duty cycle signal from the TIPM and controls the fan accordingly. The High Speed Cooling Fan Relay is not used to control any components and has no external function. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on, engine running. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. Cooling Fan commanded on. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM detects a short to voltage in the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE RADIATOR COOLING FAN MODULE TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, actuate Radiator Fan 2. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0694-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (K175) RAD FAN HIGH SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HARNESS

Fig. 37: Checking Rad Fan High Speed Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. Disconnect the Radiator Cooling Fan Module harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (K175) Rad Fan High Speed Control circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. ATTEMPT TO SET THE OPPOSITE DTC 

NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Before continuing, check the TIPM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.

Turn the ignition off. Reconnect the TIPM C3 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, clear the DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P0693-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 



Replace the Cooling Fan Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to FAN, COOLING , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the Totally Integrated Power Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P1273-A/C CONTROL CIRCUIT 2 HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 38: A/C Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is commanded by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) through a hardwired signal to actuate the A/C Clutch. The TIPM actuates the A/C Clutch by providing voltage through a high-side driver circuit. The TIPM monitors this circuit for correct voltage and current flow. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts. Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch on. A/C Compressor Clutch command on. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects the voltage on the A/C Clutch Driver circuit is higher than the calibrated level. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C3) A/C CLUTCH DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (C3) A/C CLUTCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN OR EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE A/C CLUTCH TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. A/C CLUTCH OPERATION NOTE:

If Powertrain Control Module (PCM) DTC P0645-A/C CLUTCH CONTROL CIRCUIT is present, diagnose it first.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, actuate the A/C Clutch. Does the A/C Clutch actuate? Yes 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE (C3) A/C CLUTCH DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Checking A/C Clutch Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the A/C Compressor Clutch harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage between ground and the (C3) A/C Clutch Driver circuit at the A/C Compressor Clutch harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (C3) A/C Clutch Driver circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE TIPM FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: Checking TIPM For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Reconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Connect a 12-volt test light between the (C3) A/C Clutch Driver circuit and (Z909) Ground circuit at the A/C Compressor Clutch harness connector. 5. With the scan tool, actuate the A/C Clutch. Does the test light illuminate when the A/C Clutch is commanded on? Yes 



Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the A/C Compressor Clutch and TIPM connectors. If OK, replace the A/C Clutch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C3) A/C CLUTCH DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Checking A/C Clutch Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (C3) A/C Clutch Driver circuit between the A/C Compressor Clutch harness connector and the TIPM C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (C3) A/C Clutch Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 42: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z909) Ground circuit at the A/C

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Compressor Clutch harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (Z909) Ground circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the A/C Clutch and TIPM. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the A/C Compressor Clutch and TIPM connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB)s that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P1275-A/C CONTROL CIRCUIT 2 OVERCURRENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: A/C Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is commanded by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) through a hardwired signal to actuate the A/C Clutch. The TIPM actuates the A/C Clutch by providing voltage through a high-side driver circuit. The TIPM monitors this circuit for correct voltage and current flow. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts. Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch on. A/C Compressor Clutch command on. SET CONDITION:

The TIPM detects the current draw on the A/C Clutch Driver circuit is higher than the calibrated level. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C3) A/C CLUTCH DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND A/C CLUTCH TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. A/C CLUTCH OPERATION 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With a scan tool, actuate the A/C Clutch. Does the A/C Clutch actuate? Yes 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE (C3) A/C CLUTCH DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Checking A/C Clutch Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the A/C Compressor Clutch harness connector. 3. Disconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 4. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C3) A/C Clutch Driver circuit at the A/C Compressor Clutch harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the short to ground in the (C3) A/C Clutch Driver circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (C3) A/C CLUTCH DRIVER FROM TIPM 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Checking A/C Clutch Driver From TIPM Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Reconnect the TIPM C1 harness connector. 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. Using the 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (C3) A/C Clutch Driver circuit in the A/C Compressor Clutch harness connector. 4. With a scan tool, actuate the A/C Clutch. Does the test light illuminate when the A/C Clutch is commanded on? Yes 



Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the A/C Compressor Clutch and TIPM connectors. If OK, replace the A/C Clutch in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P129C-INVERTER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 46: Inverter Module Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Once the 115 Volt AC Outlet switch is pressed, the Switch Bank Module sends a message over the Local Interface Network (LIN) to the Cluster (CCN) indicating the switch has been pressed. The Cluster (CCN) then sends a message over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) to enable the Power Inverter Module. The TIPM provides a voltage output to enable the Power Inverter Module. Once the Power Inverter Module is functional, it sends a signal to the Cluster (CCN) indicating that it is ready to function. The Cluster (CCN) then requests the Switch Bank Module to illuminate the status indicator on the 115 Volt AC Outlet switch. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. Inverter commanded on. SET CONDITION:

If the TIPM detects an open or short high condition on the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P807) INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (P807) INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN POWER INVERTER MODULE TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Operate the 115 Volt AC Outlet switch several times. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK (P807) INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 47: Checking Inverter Switch Signal Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Inverter Module harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit at the Inverter

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Module harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (P807) INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FUNCTION 

Fig. 48: Checking Inverter Switch Signal Circuit Function Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Reconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit at the Inverter Module harness connector. 5. With the scan tool, actuate the Inverter Switch. NOTE:

The test light should be illuminated and brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Power Inverter Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER INVERTER , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (P807) INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Checking Inverter Switch Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit between the TIPM C7 harness

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

connector and the Inverter Module harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair the open in the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P129E-INVERTER CONTROL CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Inverter Module Control Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Once the 115 Volt AC Outlet switch is pressed, the Switch Bank Module sends a message over the Local Interface Network (LIN) to the Cluster (CCN) indicating the switch has been pressed. The Cluster (CCN) then sends a message over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) to enable the Power Inverter Module. The TIPM provides a voltage output to enable the Power Inverter Module. Once the Power Inverter Module is functional, it sends a signal to the Cluster (CCN) indicating that it is ready to function. The Cluster (CCN) then requests the Switch Bank Module to illuminate the status indicator on the 115 Volt AC Outlet switch. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. Inverter commanded on. SET CONDITION:

If the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects an overcurrent condition on the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (P807) INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND POWER INVERTER MODULE TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Operate the 115 Volt AC Outlet switch several times. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK (P807) INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 51: Checking Inverter Switch Signal Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Disconnect the Inverter Module harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit at the Inverter Module harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the short to ground in the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK (P807) INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FUNCTION 

Fig. 52: Checking Inverter Switch Signal Circuit Function Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Reconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (P807) Inverter Switch Signal circuit at the Inverter Module harness connector. 5. With the scan tool, actuate the Inverter Switch. NOTE:

The test light should be illuminated and bright. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace the Power Inverter Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER INVERTER , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P2067-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects that the Fuel Level Sensor 2 input voltage is below the minimum acceptable value. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G109) FUEL LEVEL SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P2067-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the Fuel Level Sense 2 voltage. Is the Fuel Level Sense 2 voltage above 4.5 volts? Yes 



Replace the Auxiliary Fuel Level Sending Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENDING UNIT AND SENSOR, FUEL LEVEL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 54: Checking Fuel Level Signal 2 Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (N5) Fuel Level Signal 2 circuit at the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.



Repair the short to ground in the (N5) Fuel Level Signal 2 circuit.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (G109) FUEL LEVEL SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 55: Checking Fuel Level Signal 2 Circuit For A Short To Fuel Level Sense Return Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit and the (N5) Fuel Level Signal 2 circuit at the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Is the resistance above 10k Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the short between the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit and the (N5) Fuel Level Signal 2 circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the Fuel Pump Module and the TIPM. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Fuel Pump Module and the TIPM C7 harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB)s that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

P2068-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects that the Fuel Level Sensor 2 input voltage is above the maximum acceptable value. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT OPEN (N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (G109) FUEL LEVEL SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P2068-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK THE (N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Checking Fuel Level Signal 2 Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (N5) Fuel Level Signal 2 circuit at the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (N5) Fuel Level Signal 2 circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 FOR CORRECT OPERATION 

Fig. 58: Checking Fuel Level Sensor 2 For Correct Operation Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Connect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the (N5) Fuel Level Signal 2 circuit and the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit at the Fuel Pump Module harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display DTC: P2067-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW? Yes 



Replace the Auxiliary Fuel Level Sending Unit in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENDING UNIT AND SENSOR, FUEL LEVEL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Checking Fuel Level Signal 2 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (N5) Fuel Level Signal 2 circuit between the Fuel Pump Module harness connector and the TIPM C7 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the open in the (N5) Fuel Level Signal 2 circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE (G109) FUEL LEVEL SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Checking Fuel Level Sense Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit between the Fuel Pump

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Module harness connector and the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the open in the (G109) Fuel Level Sense Return circuit.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors between the Fuel Pump Module and the TIPM. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Verify that there is good pin to terminal contact in the Fuel Pump Module and the TIPM C7 harness connectors. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB)s that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0001-CAN C BUS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a corrupt CAN C Bus message. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D51) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE (ABS) OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER MODULE (ORC) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SAS)/STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SCM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL MODULE (ACC) AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) AUTO HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE (AHLM) DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (ESM) TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on. 5. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Antilock Brake Module harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace and program the Antilock Brake Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the ABS VERIFICATION TEST. 3. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 

WARNING: Turn the ignition off disconnect the 12-volt battery and wait two minutes before proceeding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Disconnect the Occupant Restraint Controller Module harness connectors. Reconnect the 12-volt battery. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Occupant Restraint Controller Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the RESTRAINTS SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST. 4. POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module C1 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. 5. 6. 7.

With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWERTRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. 5. STEERING ANGLE SENSOR/STEERING CONTROL MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Steering Control Module C1 harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 6. Turn the ignition on. 7. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Steering Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 6. WIRELESS IGNITION NODE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Wireless Ignition Node harness connector. 3. Turn the ignition on. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. 5. 6. 7.

With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Wireless Ignition Node in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) VERIFICATION TEST. 7. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 

NOTE:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

Disconnect the Adaptive Cruise Control harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 8.



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Adaptive Cruise Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR AND BRACKET, ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) VERIFICATION TEST.

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

8. AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. NOTE:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

Disconnect the Air Suspension Control Module C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 9.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Air Suspension Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST. 9. AUTO HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 

NOTE:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

Disconnect the Right Front Lamp Assembly C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 10.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Auto Headlamp Leveling Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEADLAMP LEVELING , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 10. DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 

NOTE:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

Disconnect the Drive Train Control Module C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 11.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Drive Train Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST. 11. ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 

NOTE:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

Disconnect the Electronic Limited Slip Differential C2 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 12.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Electronic Limited Slip Differential Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST. 12. ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 

NOTE:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

Disconnect the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering Module C2 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 13.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the ElectroHydraulic Power Steering Pump in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the EHPS VERIFICATION TEST. 13. ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 

NOTE:

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

2. Disconnect the Center Console Assembly C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 14.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Electronic Shift Module, which is integral to the Shift Lever Assembly (SLA), in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the NAG1 TCM VERIFICATION TEST. 14. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 

NOTE:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

Disconnect the Tire Pressure Module harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 15.



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the TPM VERIFICATION. 15. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 

NOTE:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

Disconnect the Transmission Control Module C2 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 16.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace and program the Transmission Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the NAG1 TCM VERIFICATION TEST. 16. PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 1. Turn the ignition off. 

NOTE:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If vehicle is not equipped with this module, answer yes to the question.

Disconnect the Passive Entry Module C1 harness connector. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display U0001-CAN C BUS as active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 17.

No Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace and program the Passive Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL .  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 17. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 62: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (-) Circuits & Ground At TIPM Harness Connectors Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C7 and C1 harness connectors. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit and ground at the TIPM C7 harness connector. 5. Measure the voltage between the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit and ground at the TIPM C1 harness connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (D51) or the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 18. 18. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (+) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit. Is any resistance present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the short to ground in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 19. 19. CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT 

Fig. 64: Measuring Resistance Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 2. Measure the resistance between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is any resistance present? Yes  

Repair the short between the CAN C Bus (+) circuit and the CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the Totally Integrated Power Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0010-CAN INTERIOR BUS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase TIPM DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read active TIPM DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) MODULE - INTERNAL SHORT 

NOTE:

When performing this step, turn the ignition off (wait one minute) before disconnecting any module. When the module is disconnected turn the ignition on.

NOTE:

This step is to determine if the fault is internal within a module.

1. While monitoring the scan tool, disconnect each CAN Interior Bus (125K) module (except for the TIPM), one at a time. 2. Check for this DTC to become active after disconnecting each CAN Interior Bus (125K) module the vehicle is equipped with. NOTE:

If the DTC becomes stored when a particular module is disconnected, that module is causing the DTC to set.

With all the CAN Interior Bus modules disconnected, does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 

Go To 3.



Replace the module that when disconnected caused this DTC to become stored in accordance with the Service Information.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 3. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 66: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit At TIPM Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit at the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is any resistance present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the short to ground in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 67: Measuring Voltage At CAN Interior Bus (-) Circuit At TIPM C7 Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage at the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit at the TIPM C7 harness connector. Is the voltage above 6 volts?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the short to voltage in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or short circuits. If OK, replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY PCM POWER AND GROUND POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE PCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the PCM is active on the bus. 

Is the PCM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the PCM? Yes 



Replace/update the PCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWERTRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the PCM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out and corroded terminals.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 70: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TCM POWER AND GROUND TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE TCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the TCM is active on the bus. Is the TCM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM TCM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the TCM? Yes 



Replace/update the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST for 3.6L gasoline and 3.0L diesel engine applications. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform 545RFE TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST for 5.7L engine applications.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the TCM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Go To 6.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 73: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0102-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TRANSFER CASE CONTROL MODULE / AWD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Drive Train Control Module (DTCM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY DTCM POWER AND GROUND DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (DTCM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE DTCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the DTCM is active on the bus. Is the DTCM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM DTCM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the DTCM? Yes 



Replace/update the DTCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DRIVETRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the DTCM VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the DTCM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 76: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE (ESM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Electric Gear Shift Module (ESM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY ESM POWER AND GROUND ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE (ESM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE ESM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the ESM is active on the bus. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the ESM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM ESM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the ESM? Yes 



Replace/update the ESM, which is integral to the Shift Lever Assembly (SLA), in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the ESM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 78: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 79: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0104-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CRUISE CONTROL MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 80: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY ACC MODULE POWER AND GROUND ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE ACC IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the ACC is active on the bus. Is the ACC active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM ACC diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the ACC? Yes  

Replace/update the ACC module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the ACC. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 81: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 82: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Anti-Lock Brake Module (ABS) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY ABS POWER AND GROUND ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE (ABS) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE ABS IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the ABS is active on the bus. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the ABS active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM ABS diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the ABS? Yes 



Replace/update the ABS module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the ABS VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the ABS. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 85: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0127-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TPM POWER AND GROUND TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE TPM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the TPM is active on the bus. Is the TPM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate NO RESPONSE FROM TPM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the TPM? Yes 



Replace/update the TPM module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the TPM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 88: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0131-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE (EHPS)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 89: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering Control (EHPS) Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY EHPS MODULE POWER AND GROUND ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING (EHPS) MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE EHPS IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the EHPS is active on the bus. Is the EHPS active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM EHPS diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the EHPS? Yes 



Replace/update the EHPS module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to PUMP , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the EHPS VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the EHPS. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 91: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0132-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Air Suspension Control Module (ASCM) module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY ASCM POWER AND GROUND AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE (ASCM) MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE ASCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the ASCM is active on the bus. Is the ASCM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate NO RESPONSE FROM ASCM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the ASCM? Yes 



Replace/update the ASCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the ASCM VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the ASCM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 94: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0136-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELSD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 95: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY ELSD POWER AND GROUND ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (ELSD) MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE ELSD IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the ELSD is active on the bus. Is the ELSD active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate NO RESPONSE FROM ELSD diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the ELSD? Yes 



Replace/update the ELSD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, ELECTRONIC LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the ELSD VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the ELSD. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 97: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 98: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DIAGNOSTIC CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TIPM POWER AND GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

procedure. No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE TIPM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the TIPM is active on the bus. 

Is the TIPM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM TIPM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the TIPM? Yes 



Replace/update the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER (ORC)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 99: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY ORC POWER AND GROUND OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER (ORC) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE ORC IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the ORC is active on the bus. Is the ORC active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM ORC diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the ORC? Yes 



Replace/update the ORC in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the RESTRAINTS SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the ORC. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 100: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 101: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 102: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Cluster/Cabin Compartment Node (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY CLUSTER/CCN POWER AND GROUND CLUSTER/CABIN COMPARTMENT NODE (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE CCN IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the CCN is active on the bus. Is the CCN active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM CCN (CLUSTER) diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the CCN? Yes 



Replace/update the Cluster/CCN in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the Cluster/CCN. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 103: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 104: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK ASSIST MODULE (PTS)

Fig. 105: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fused installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Park Assist (PTS) Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY PARK ASSIST MODULE POWER AND GROUND PARK ASSIST MODULE (PTS) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE PTS IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the PTS is active on the bus. 

Is the PTS active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM PARK ASSIST (PARKTRONICS) (PTS) MODULE diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the PTS? Yes 



Replace/update the Park Assist (PTS) Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PARK ASSIST , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the Park Assist (PTS) Module. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 106: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 107: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE

Fig. 108: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the HVAC Control Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY HVAC POWER AND GROUND HVAC CONTROL MODULE MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE HVAC IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the HVAC is active on the bus. 

Is the HVAC active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM HVAC diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the HVAC? Yes 



Replace/update the HVAC Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the HVAC. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 109: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 110: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0167-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL MODULE (ITM)

Fig. 111: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the ITM for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY ITM POWER AND GROUND INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL MODULE (ITM) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE ITM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the ITM is active on the bus. 

Is the ITM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM ITM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the ITM? Yes 



Replace/update the ITM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, INTRUSION , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the ITM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 112: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 113: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE (WIRELESS IGNITION NODE OR WIN)

Fig. 114: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY WIN POWER AND GROUND WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE WIN IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the WIN is active on the bus. 

Is the WIN active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM WIN diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the WIN? Yes 



Replace/update the WIN in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the WIN. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 115: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 116: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0181-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 117: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Auto Headlamp Leveling Module (AHLM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY AHLM POWER AND GROUND AUTO HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE (AHLM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE AHLM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Verify the AHLM is active on the bus. Is the AHLM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM AHLM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the AHLM? Yes 



Replace/update the AHLM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEADLAMP LEVELING , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the AHLM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 118: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 119: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 120: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Radio for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY RADIO POWER AND GROUND RADIO MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE RADIO IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the Radio is active on the bus. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the Radio active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM RADIO diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the Radio? Yes 



Replace/update the Radio in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RADIO , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the Radio. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 121: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 122: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUDIO AMPLIFIER (AMP)

Fig. 123: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Amplifier (AMP) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY AMP POWER AND GROUND AMPLIFIER (AMP) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE AMP IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the AMP is active on the bus. 

Is the AMP active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM AMP diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the AMP? Yes 



Replace/update the AMP in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to AMPLIFIER , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the AMP. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 124: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 125: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE (HFM)

Fig. 126: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the HFM for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY HFM POWER AND GROUND HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE (HFM) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE HFM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the HFM is active on the bus. 

Is the HFM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM HFM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the HFM? Yes 



Replace/update the HFM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HANDS FREE (HFM) , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the HFM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 127: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 128: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0203-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT (DMFL) (DRIVER DOOR MODULE)

Fig. 129: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Door Module Front Left (DMFL) or Driver Door Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY DMFL POWER AND GROUND DOOR MODULE FRONT LEFT (DMFL) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE DMFL IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the DMFL is active on the bus. 

Is the DMFL active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM DDM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the DMFL? Yes 



Replace/update the DMFL or Driver Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the DMFL. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 130: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 131: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0204-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT (DMFR) (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE)

Fig. 132: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Door Module Front Right (DMFR) or Passenger Door Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY DMFR POWER AND GROUND DOOR MODULE FRONT RIGHT (DMFR) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE DMFR IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the DMFR is active on the bus. 

Is the DMFR active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM PDM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the DMFR? Yes 



Replace/update the DMFR or Passenger Door Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, DOOR , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the DMFR. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 133: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 134: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE

Fig. 135: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Heated Seat Module (HSM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY HSM POWER AND GROUND HEATED SEAT MODULE (HSM) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE HSM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the HSM is active on the bus. 

Is the HSM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM HSM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the HSM? Yes 



Replace/update the HSM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, HEATED SEAT , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the HSM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 136: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 137: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE (MSMD)

Fig. 138: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the MSMD for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY MSMD POWER AND GROUND MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE (MSMD) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE MSMD IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the MSMD is active on the bus. 

Is the MSMD active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM MSMD diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the MSMD? Yes 



Replace/update the MSMD in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, MEMORY, SEAT , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the MSMD. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 139: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 140: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCM

Fig. 141: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Steering Control Module (SCM)/Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY SCM/SAS POWER AND GROUND STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SCM)/STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SAS) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE SAS IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the SAS is active on the bus. 

Is the SAS active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM SAS diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the SAS? Yes 



Replace/update the SCM/SAS in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, STEERING COLUMN , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the SAS. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 142: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 143: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0230-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH POWER LIFTGATE MODULE (PLGM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 144: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Power Liftgate Module (PLGM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY PLGM POWER AND GROUND POWER LIFTGATE MODULE (PLGM) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE PLGM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the PLGM is active on the bus. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the PLGM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM PLGM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the PLGM? Yes 



Replace/update the Power Liftgate Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. Using the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the PLGM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. Using the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 145: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 146: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0232-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH BLIND SPOT DETECTION MODULE (BSM)

Fig. 147: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Blind Spot Module (BSM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY BSM POWER AND GROUND BLIND SPOT MODULE (BSM) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE BSM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the BSM is active on the bus. 

Is the BSM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM BSM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the BSM? Yes 



Replace/update the BSM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, BLIND SPOT , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the BSM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 148: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 149: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE (AHBM)

Fig. 150: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Auto Highbeam Module (AHBM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY AHBM POWER AND GROUND AUTO HIGHBEAM MODULE (AHBM) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE AHBM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the AHBM is active on the bus. 

Is the AHBM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM AHBM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the AHBM? Yes 



Replace/update the AHBM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MIRROR, REARVIEW , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the AHBM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 151: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 152: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U0249-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE LAST ROW (VES3)

Fig. 153: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Bus messages not received from the Vehicle Entertainment Control Module (VES3) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY VES3 POWER AND GROUND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE (VES3) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE VES3 IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the VES3 is active on the bus. 

Is the VES3 active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM VES3 diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the VES3? Yes 



Replace/update the VES3 in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the VES3. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 154: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 155: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U1145-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH KEYLESS GO SECURITY MODULE

Fig. 156: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults. All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. NOTE:

The Keyless Go Security Module feature is a function of the Passive Entry Module (PEM). The diagnostic procedures for the Keyless Go Security Module are performed on the PEM.

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Keyless Go Security Module/Passive Entry Module (PEM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D51) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D52) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY PEM POWER AND GROUND PASSIVE ENTRY MODULE (PEM) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE PEM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the PEM is active on the bus. 

Is the PEM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM PEM diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the PEM? Yes 



Replace/update the PEM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the PEM. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active? Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN C BUS modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN C BUS modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D52) OR (D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 157: Measuring Voltage Between CAN C Bus (+) Circuits & Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D52) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. 2. Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D52) or (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. (D51) OR (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 158: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & CAN C Bus (-) Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D51) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D51) or (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U1147-ADDITIONAL CAN INTERIOR BUS ECU DETECTED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects an additional CAN Interior Bus module and requires reprogramming. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ADDITIONAL MODULE ADDED/REMOVED FROM THE CAN INTERIOR BUS NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE VEHICLE REPAIR HISTORY 1. Check the vehicle repair history for any recent module replacements or additions. Have any modules been recently replaced or added? Yes 

Verify the appropriate installation and module initialization procedures were completed. Make sure any changes related to the sales codes associated with the vehicle or the vehicle

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



configuration were correctly updated. Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. RESTORE THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, view the modules on the communication network. Read and record the listed modules or run a Vehicle Scan Report. 3. With the scan tool, select TIPM, miscellaneous functions then Restore Vehicle Configuration. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times and read the active TIPM DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Retest system and attempt to reprogram the TIPM. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair is complete. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U1148-ADDITIONAL CAN C BUS ECU DETECTED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) detects an additional CAN C Bus module and requires reprogramming. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ADDITIONAL MODULE ADDED/REMOVED FROM THE CAN C BUS NETWORK DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK THE VEHICLE REPAIR HISTORY 1. Check the vehicle repair history for any recent module replacements or additions. Have any modules been recently replaced or added? Yes 



Verify the appropriate installation and module initialization procedures were completed. Make sure any changes related to the sales codes associated with the vehicle or the vehicle configuration were correctly updated. Repair as necessary. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. RESTORE THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, view the modules on the communication network. Read and record the listed modules or run a Vehicle Scan Report. 3. With the scan tool, select TIPM, miscellaneous functions then Restore Vehicle Configuration. 4. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times and read the active TIPM DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Retest system and attempt to reprogram the TIPM. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Repair is complete. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

U1158-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER (SDARV)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 159: Can C Bus Circuit Module Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The primary communication network between electronic control modules on this vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules connected to the bus to share information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the higher speed CAN C (500K) Bus or on the lower speed CAN Interior High Speed (IHS) (125K) Bus the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Totally Integrated Power Module/Central GateWay (TIPM or TIPMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the CAN buses. The TIPM also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for certain bus network faults.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

All modules transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange between the modules is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages (a form of transmission in which data bits are sent sequentially, one at a time, over a single line). Each module can both send and receive serial data simultaneously. Each data bit of a CAN Bus message is carried over the bus as a voltage differential between the two bus circuits which, when strung together, form a message. Each module uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the same time. Corruption of a single bit within a message will corrupt the entire message. Each message contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) which specifies the message size exactly. If the message detected conflicts with the CRC the ECU receiving it will determine the message to be an error and consider that communication has not been possible. Diagnosis of this condition using a lab scope may reveal activity that appears to be Bus data messages even if no actual communication is possible. Communication problems that affect the whole bus, as a result of opens and terminal push outs are more likely to occur on data busses that operate at a high speed than a data bus that operates at a lower speed. When an open circuit or terminal push out occurs one or more modules can become isolated from the remainder of the bus. The isolated module will attempt to communicate, but will not be able to receive messages or determine arbitration from other modules. Each time the isolated module attempts to communicate it alters the bus voltage on the intact bus circuit. Without functioning arbitration the isolated module alters the bus voltage while other bus messages are being sent thereby corrupting the messages on the remainder of the bus. The CAN bus modules are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN Low or CAN bus (-) wire. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Satellite Video Receiver (SDARV) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY SDARV POWER AND GROUND SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER (SDARV) MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS diagnostic procedure. 2. CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules. 

NOTE:

Check for TIPM configuration, CAN Interior Bus hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY THE SDARV IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 3. Verify the SDARV is active on the bus. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the SDARV active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the NO RESPONSE FROM SDARV diagnostic procedure. 4. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Is there more than one module with active DTCs "Logged Against" the SDARV? Yes 



Replace/update the SDARV in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, SATELLITE VIDEO , REMOVAL . Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CLEAR DTC IN MODULE SETTING FAULT 1. With the scan tool, select the module setting the DTC against the SDARV. 2. Clear active DTCs. 

Is this DTC still active? Yes  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CYCLE IGNITION 1. Cycle the ignition from RUN to OFF three times ending with the key in the RUN position. 

Does this DTC become active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 7.

No The condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.  Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL LOST COMMUNICATION FAULTS 1. With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics. 

Does the TIPM and other CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules show Lost Communication with the remaining CAN Interior BUS (125K) modules? Yes 

Go To 8.

No Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. 8. (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 160: Checking CAN Interior Bus (+) Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage between the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit and ground. Is the voltage above 5.0 volts? Yes



Repair the short to voltage in the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (+) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 9.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

9. (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (-) (125K) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 161: Checking CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Is the resistance below 10k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (-) (125K) circuit. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the appropriate verification test for the module being replaced. If there is no verification test for the associated module, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE and perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description P0219 ENGINE OVERSPEED P0501 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE P0562 BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW P0563 BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH P0601 INTERNAL MEMORY CHECKSUM INVALID P0602 CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR/NOT PROGRAMMED P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAM P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE ROM P0613 INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROCESSOR P0614 ECM/TCM INCOMPATIBLE P0642 SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT LOW P0643 SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH P0657 SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT P0710 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT P0712 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW P0714 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO P0731 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST P0732 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND P0733 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD P0734 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH P0735 GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 5TH P0741 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE P0742 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH STUCK ON P0743 TCC SOLENOID CIRCUIT P0748 MODULATOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT P0752 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID P0753 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CIRCUIT P0757 2-3 SOLENOID P0758 2-3 SOLENOID CIRCUIT P0762 3-4 SOLENOID P0763 3-4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT P0778 SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

P1629 P1631 P1632 P1633 P1634 P1636 P1637 P1638 P1639 P1644 P1704 P1705 P1731 P2638 P2767 P2783 P2784 U0002 U0100 U0103 U0114 U0121 U0141 U0155 U0164 U0401 U0404 U0414 U0415 U0431 U110B U1118 U1119 U1400 U1401 U1402 U1404 U1405 U1406 U1407 U1408 U1409

TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID SUPPLY/ WATCHDOG TCM INTERNAL- PROCESSOR CLOCK PERFORMANCE TCM INTERNAL - TEST INTERNAL WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE TCM INTERNAL - TEST EXTERNAL WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE TCM INTERNAL- INTERNAL WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE TCM INTERNAL- EXTERNAL WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE TCM INTERNAL-EEPROM PERFORMANCE TCM INTERNAL-CAN 1 RAM PERFORMANCE TCM INTERNAL-CAN 2 RAM PERFORMANCE INCORRECT VARIANT/CONFIGURATION INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 OVERSPEED INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 OVERSPEED INCORRECT GEAR ENGAGED TORQUE MANAGEMENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL PERFORMANCE INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL TORQUE CONVERTER TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ESM IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM FDCM IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS IMPLAUSIBLE DATA FROM FCM LOST ENGINE COOLANT MESSAGE LOST ENGINE VARIANT MESSAGE LOST IPM (FCM/TIPM/BCM) VARIANT MESSAGE IMPLAUSIBLE TPS SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE TEMPERATURE SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE STATIC ENGINE TORQUE SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE MINIMUM ENGINE TORQUE SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE MAXIMUM ENGINE TORQUE SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE TORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE BRAKE SIGNAL RECEIVED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

U140A U140B U140C U140F U1410 U1505 U1507 U1508 U1509 U150A

IMPLAUSIBLE LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE VARIANT DATA IMPLAUSIBLE IPM (FCM/TIPM/BCM) VARIANT DATA IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM FDCM IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE TEMPERATURE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM ESM IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE VARIANT MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED IMPLAUSIBLE IPM (FCM/TIPM/BCM) VARIANT MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING P0219-ENGINE OVERSPEED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) monitors the engine speed over the CAN bus. If the engine speed is greater than a calibrated limit (see table above), the TCM assumes that either the information from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is incorrect or that a major mechanical problem exist. Once the DTC is set, the TCM will position the transmission gear into neutral to protect the engine and transmission from damage. The transmission will remain in neutral and will not be revaluated by the TCM until the ignition is cycled. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, engine running, with the transmission in gear with a valid Engine RPM message received at least once, and the CAN Bus Circuit and Engine CAN Message Missing are not active. SET CONDITION:

Engine speed is greater than a calibrated limit (see table above). POSSIBLE CAUSES

3.0 L (Diesel) 3.5 L 3.7 L 4.0 L 5.7 L

Engine Overspeed Limit 4350 + 800 RPM 6400 + 500 RPM 6000 + 500 RPM 6000 + 500 RPM 5600 + 500 RPM

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6.1L

6200 + 500 RPM Possible Causes

MECHANICAL ENGINE PROBLEM MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs. Are there any gear ratio and/or speed sensor DTCs present in addition to P0219? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. If any speed sensor DTCs are present, perform their respective test first.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR ENGINE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for Powertrain DTCs. 

Are there any engine DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK IF ENGINE MECHANICAL PROBLEMS ARE PRESENT 1. Determine if any Engine mechanical problems are present. 

Are there any Engine mechanical problems present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Repair engine as necessary.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK IF TRANSMISSION MECHANICAL PROBLEMS ARE PRESENT 1. Determine if any Transmission mechanical problems are present. 2. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 3. Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for debris or a plugged Transmission Oil Filter. 

Is there any debris, plugged Transmission Oil Filter, or signs of an internal transmission problem? Yes 



Repair Transmission as necessary. and repair as necessary. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER , DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. TEST DRIVE VEHICLE 

NOTE:

The Engine and Transmission must not have mechanical problems and be operating normally before proceeding with this test.

1. Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in accordance with the Service Information. 2. Reassemble any previously disconnected connectors and/or components. 3. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 4. Road test the vehicle. 5. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did DTC P0219-ENGINE OVERSPEED reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Test Complete Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0501-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 msec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if multiple ABS wheel speed signals are invalid. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ABS DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR DTCS U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE 1. With the scan tool, check DTCs. Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE set? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS DTC first if it is present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR ABS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs. 

Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) monitors ignition voltage. The DTC will set if the monitored battery voltage drops below 8.5 Volts and a temporary limp in will be activated. If the voltage rises above 9.0 Volts, normal operations is resumed and the TCM will record the DTC as a one trip fault. The DTC will only mature to a full DTC if the voltage is less than 8.5 Volts with a engine speed greater than 2000 RPM for a least 60 seconds. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When monitored battery voltage drops below 8.5 Volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ENGINE CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE (F202) IGNITION SWITCH RUN OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE (Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE RUN START RELAY TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ENGINE CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. Are there any Engine Charging System DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. No Go To 2. 2. CHECK SYSTEM VOLTAGE 1. Start the engine. 2. Using the scan tool, under transmission, check system voltage. 

Is the transmission system voltage above 9.0 volts? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE INTERNAL FUSED (B+) 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Internal Fused (B+) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Remove the Transmission Control relay. Ignition on, engine not running. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the internal Fused B(+) circuit in the Transmission Relay connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the internal Fused B(+) circuit for high resistance or replace the TIPM in accordance with the service information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (F202) IGNITION SWITCH RUN OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Ignition Switch Run Output (Run-Start) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Remove the Transmission Relay. 3. Connect a jumper wire between the internal Fused B(+) circuit and the (F202) Ignition Switch Run Output (Run-Start) circuit in the Run/Start Relay connector. 4. Start the engine. 5. Using the scan tool, under transmission, check system voltage. Is the transmission system voltage above 9.0 volts? Yes  

Replace the Transmission Relay. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (F202) IGNITION SWITCH RUN OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Checking Ignition Switch Run Output (Run-Start) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F202) Ignition Switch Run Output (RunStart) circuit in the TCM C1 harness connector. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Repair the (F202) Ignition Switch Run Output (Run-Start) circuit for high resistance.  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK (Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z909) Ground circuit in the TCM C1 harness connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Repair the (Z909) Ground circuit for high resistance.  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Where there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) monitors ignition voltage. The DTC will set and temporary limp-in will be activated, if the monitored battery voltage rises above 16.9 volts. If the voltage drops below 16.4 volts, normal operations is resumed and the TCM will record the DTC as a one trip fault. The DTC will only mature to a full DTC if the voltage rises above 16.9 volts with a engine speed greater than 2000 RPM for a least 60 seconds. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When the monitored battery voltage rises above 16.9 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CHARGING SYSTEM OVERCHARGE CONDITION JUMP START OFF A 24 VOLT SYSTEM TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. NOTE:

This includes any one trip faults.

Are there any Engine Charging System DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF VOLTAGE IS GREATER THAN 16.9 VOLTS 1. Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM. 2. With the scan tool, monitor the Transmission system voltage for at least 60 seconds. 

Does the Transmission system voltage read above 16.9 volts for any period of time? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. VERIFY IF VEHICLE WAS JUMP STARTED WITH 24-VOLT SYSTEM 1. Verify if the vehicle was jump started by another vehicle using a 24-volt charging system. 

Was the vehicle jump started by another vehicle using a 24-volt charging system? Yes  

This is the cause of the DTC. Erase the DTC and return the vehicle to the customer. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 4. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking Battery Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Start the engine and raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM. With the scan tool, read the Transmission system voltage. With a voltmeter, measure the battery voltage at the battery. Compare the readings. Does the voltage readings match between the Transmission scan tool reading and the battery voltmeter reading?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Repair the charging system for an over charging condition.

No Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0601-INTERNAL MEMORY CHECKSUM INVALID For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. If the TCM detects that the variables that dictate the vehicle application are not present a DTC will set. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects that the variables that dictate the vehicle application are not present.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CONTROLLER NOT CODED TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF TCM IS FLASHABLE NOTE:

Controller is programmed with generic software and will not allow the correct vehicle Powertrain management.

1. With the scan tool, record the vehicles controller part number. 2. Select Use Controller Part Number under the Flash Tab. 3. Flash the controller with the correct software. Were you able to update (flash) the controller successfully? Yes  

Test Complete. Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0602-CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING ERROR/NOT PROGRAMMED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. If the TCM detects that the variables that dictate the vehicle application are not present, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects that the variables that dictate the vehicle application are not present. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CONTROLLER NOT CODED TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE TCM IS FLASHABLE NOTE:

Controller is programmed with generic software and will not allow the correct vehicle Powertrain management.

1. With the scan tool, record the vehicles controller part number. 2. Select Use Controller Part Number under the Flash Tab. 3. Flash the controller with the correct software. Were you able to update (flash) the controller successfully? Yes  

Test Complete. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0604-INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAM

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. If the TCM detects an error with the controllers Random Access Memory (RAM), the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects an error with the controllers Random Access Memory (RAM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0605-INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE ROM

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. If the TCM detects an error with the controllers Read Only Memory (ROM), the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects an error with the controllers Read Only Memory (ROM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0613-INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROCESSOR

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. If the TCM detects an error with the controllers processor, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects an error with the controllers processor. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0614-ECM/TCM INCOMPATIBLE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

If the TCM detects that the variables that dictate the vehicle application are not present a DTC will set. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects that the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) software level is incompatible with the TCM software level. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CONTROLLER(S) NOT PROPERLY CODED TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF TCM IS FLASHABLE 1. With the scan tool, record the vehicles TCM and PCM part numbers. 2. Verify the model year and make of both the TCM and PCM part numbers. 3. Flash and program the controller(s) with the correct software that corresponds with year and make of the vehicle. Were you able to update (flash) the controller(s) successfully to the proper software levels? Yes  

Test Complete. Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0642-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Sensor Supply Voltage circuit supplies a 6-volt power supply to the two input speed sensors. The Sensor Supply Voltage circuit is constantly monitored for correct voltage between 4.8 to 7.2 volts. If the voltage does not stay within the 4.8 to 7.2 volt range, the appropriate DTC will set.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on and no undervoltage condition exist. SET CONDITION:

When the monitored sensor voltage is not within specified limits drops below 4.8 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes SPEED SENSOR DTCS PRESENT (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE SHORTED TO GROUND INTERNAL SHORT IN THE Electrohydraulic CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR SPEED SENSOR DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs. Are there any speed sensor DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking Sensor Supply Voltage For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connectors. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit in the TCM harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit for a short to ground Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK FOR A SHORT IN THE Electrohydraulic CONTROL UNIT 

Fig. 14: Checking For A Short In The Electrohydraulic Control Unit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Reconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit in the TCM harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0643-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Sensor Supply Voltage circuit supplies a 6 volt power supply for the two input speed sensors. The Sensor Supply Voltage circuit is constantly monitored for correct voltage between 4.8 to 7.2 volts. If the voltage does not stay within the 4.8 to 7.2 volt range, the appropriate DTC will set.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on and no overvoltage condition exist. SET CONDITION:

When the monitored sensor voltage is not within specified limits and rises above 7.2 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO OTHER CIRCUITS TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR SPEED SENSOR DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs. Are there any speed sensor and/or temperature sensor DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE ON THE SCAN TOOL 1. Start the engine. 2. With the scan tool, check the Transmission Solenoid Supply Voltage. 

Is the Transmission Solenoid Supply Voltage above 7.2 volts? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. CHECK (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Sensor Supply Circuit Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. While back probing, measure the voltage of the (T72) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit in the TCM harness connector. Does the measured voltage match the voltage reading on the scan tool ± 0.2 of a volt? Yes 

Go To 4.



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 4. (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 17: Checking Sensor Supply Voltage Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Disconnect all TCM harness connectors. Measure the resistance between the (T72) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit and all other circuits in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T72) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit and all other circuits in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T72) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for a short to another circuit(s). Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0657-SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Solenoid Supply Voltage output of the Transmission Control Module (TCM) provides the voltage to the three shift, two pressure and TCC solenoids. The output is active whenever the system is in normal operation. If

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

a major system fault is detected, this output is turned off to ensure that no solenoids are active. WHEN MONITORED:

When the output is active and no undervoltage condition exists. SET CONDITION:

When the monitored supply voltage and battery voltage differ by 3.6 volts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT OPEN (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE 1. With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs. Is the DTC P1629-TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID SUPPLY/WATCHDOG also present? Yes 



When both P0657-SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT and P1629-TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID SUPPLY/WATCHDOG DTCs set at the same time indicates that the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit is shorted to voltage. Repair the Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for a short to voltage. If no short to voltage is present, using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Checking Solenoid Supply Voltage Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C1 and C2 harness connectors. Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit between the TCM C2 harness

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

connector and the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 20: Checking Solenoid Supply Voltage Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 21: Checking Solenoid Supply Voltage Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit and all other circuits in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for a short to another circuit(s). Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0710-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly of the NAG1 transmission contains a temperature sensor to monitor the transmission oil temperature. This sensor is wired in series with the transmission Park/Neutral switch. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) expects to see a valid voltage level from the sensor when the shifter is in Reverse or any forward Drive position. The TCM also expects to see an open circuit condition when

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the shifter is in the Park or Neutral position. When the controller detects an open circuit when in Reverse or any forward drive position the DTC will set. Note: Due to a open circuit condition in Park or Neutral, the TCM substitutes the Transmission Temperature reading with Engine Temperature when in Park or Neutral WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an open circuit when in Reverse or any forward drive position the DTC will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY OUT OF ADJUSTMENT (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO OTHER CIRCUITS (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT(S) SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF SPEED SENSOR DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Are there any speed sensor DTCs present also? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY SHIFT CABLE IS OUT OF ADJUSTMENT 1. Check the Shift Lever Assembly Cable for proper adjustment in accordance with the Service Information. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the Shift Lever Assembly shift cable properly adjusted? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Adjust the Shift Lever Cable in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CABLE, SHIFT , ADJUSTMENTS .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK IF ENGINE STARTS IN PARK OR NEUTRAL 1. Attempt to start the engine in Park or Neutral. 

Does the engine start in either Park or Neutral? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 5. 4. TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Checking Transmission Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. Place the gear selector in Drive. Measure the resistance of the Transmission Temperature Sensor between the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit and the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 500 to 2500 Ohms? Yes 

Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Using the schematics as a guide, check the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly and Transmission Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch pins and connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. If no problems are found, replace the Transmission Temperature Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Reconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 

NOTE:

This procedure may set various DTCs to multiple modules connected to the CAN bus. Disregard and erase any DTCs that may set after completion of this procedure.

4. With the Shift Lever in the Park position, attempt to start the engine. Does the engine start? Yes 



Replace the Transmission Temperature in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK IF THE (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT IS SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 24: Checking Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Reconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Disconnect the TCM C1 and C2 harness connectors. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK IF (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT IS SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT(S) 

Fig. 25: Checking Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

(s) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit and all other circuits in the TCM C1 and C2 harness connectors. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit and any other circuit(s)? Yes 



Repair the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit for a short to another circuit (s). Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0712-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly of the NAG1 transmission contains a temperature sensor to monitor the transmission oil temperature. This sensor is wired in series with the transmission Park/Neutral switch. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) expects to see a valid voltage level from the sensor when the shifter is in Reverse or any forward Drive position. The TCM also expects to see an open circuit condition when

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the shifter is in the Park or Neutral position. When the controller detects an open circuit when in Reverse or any forward drive position the DTC will set. Note: The TCM substitutes the Transmission Temperature reading with Engine Temperature due to a open circuit condition in Park or Neutral. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects the Temperature sensor input is below 0.5 of a volt. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for Electronic Shift Module (ESM) DTCs. Are there any Shift Lever ESM DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY CABLE FOR PROPER ADJUSTMENT 1. Check the Shift Lever Assembly Cable for proper adjustment in accordance with the Service Information. 

Is the Shift Lever Assembly Cable properly adjusted? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Adjust the Shift Lever Assembly Cable in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CABLE, SHIFT , ADJUSTMENTS .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 27: Checking Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T54) TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 28: Checking Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit (s) Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the TCM C1 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit and all

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

other circuits in the TCM C1 and C2 harness connectors. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit and any other circuit(s)? Yes 



Repair the (T54) Temperature Sensor-P/N Switch Signal circuit for a short to another circuit (s). Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0714-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTERMITTENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly of the NAG1 transmission contains a temperature sensor to monitor the transmission oil temperature. This sensor is wired in series with the transmission Park/Neutral switch. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) expects to see a valid voltage level from the sensor when the shifter is in Reverse or any forward Drive position. The TCM also expects to see an open circuit condition when

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the shifter is in the Park or Neutral position. When the controller detects an open circuit when in Reverse or any forward drive position the DTC will set. Note: The TCM substitutes the Transmission Temperature reading with Engine Temperature due to a open circuit condition in Park or Neutral. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on and the Transmission Temperature below 170 °C (338 °F). SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects the Temperature sensor input changes more than 10 °C (18 °F) between each 20 mSec sensor read. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRING AND CONNECTORS TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR - P/N SWITCH TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, monitor the Transmission Temperature. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. With the brakes firmly applied, place the gear selector in Drive. 5. While monitoring the scan tool, wiggle the wires and connectors from the TCM to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit. Did the transmission temperature fluctuate while wiggling the wires? Yes  

Repair the wiring and/or connectors as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTC RESETS 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Replace the Transmission Temperature Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL . 2. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 3. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did DTC P0714 reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Test Complete.

P0717-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) is one of two hall effect speed sensors that are used by the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to calculate the transmissions turbine speed. Since the turbine speed could not be measured directly, two of the drive elements are measured. Two input speed sensors are required because both elements are not active in all gears.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Engine speed greater than 450 RPM with none of the following DTCs present: engine speed, TCM undervoltage, output speed sensor, and/or rear wheel speed DTCs. Also required are all wheel speeds above 250 RPM and no wheel slip detected (signal from the ABS system). SET CONDITION:

If the Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) signal is equal to 0 RPM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT OPEN (T70) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (T70) SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT (T70) SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

The Transmission Control Module stores under Environmental Data the transmission operating conditions when the DTC was set. Before erasure of any DTC, record all information pertaining to the DTC, even if there is more than one DTC stored.

1. With the scan tool, erase transmission DTCs. 2. Using the Environmental Data previously recorded, drive the vehicle and try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. Does the DTC reset? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 10. 2. CHECK THE (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 31: Checking Sensor Supply Voltage Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

4. Measure the resistance of the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T70) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Checking Input Speed Sensor 1 Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (T70) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT(S) 

Fig. 34: Checking Input Speed Sensor 1 Signal Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit to all the other circuits in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit for a short to another circuit(s). Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (T70) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Checking Input Speed Sensor 1 Signal Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT(S) 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit For Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit to all the other circuits in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Yes  

Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to another circuit(s) Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 8. 8. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. CHECK THE INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 

Fig. 38: Checking The Input Speed Sensor 1 Signal Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 39: Typical 5-Volt Square Wave Pattern Chart Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Using a Lab Scope, backprobe the (T70) Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) Signal circuit at the TCM C2 harness connector. WARNING: Properly support the vehicle.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Raise all drive wheels off the ground. 4. Start the engine. WARNING: To avoid possible serious or fatal injury, keep hands and feet clear of rotating wheels. 5. Place gear selector in drive and increase vehicle speed to engage 2nd gear. 6. Compare the scope pattern on the Lab Scope with a typical 5-volt square wave pattern. Is the scope pattern comparable to the typical 5-volt square wave signal scope pattern? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 10. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wires while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

P0730-INCORRECT GEAR RATIO For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sensor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the transmission is trying to mechanically shift into a different gear than the TCM intends. NOTE:

The transmission control module is programmed to immediately place the transmission into neutral if P0730 or P1731 codes are set. These codes indicate that the transmission experienced an unknown or incorrect gear ratio. Placing the transmission in neutral prevents potential catastrophic failure. When this occurs, the transmission will remain in neutral until the vehicle slows to 29 Km/h (18 mph).

WHEN MONITORED:

Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and vehicle speed above 10 Km/h (6 mph). SET CONDITION:

No shifting operation and actual gear differs from the target gear. No shifting operation - actual (calculated) gear differs from the target (expected) gear, no plausible gear is calculated, actual (calculated) turbine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear. During Downshift - actual (calculated) gear is greater than target (expected) gear. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW FLUID LEVEL ABS DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION SOLENOID, SPEED SENSOR AND/OR OTHER ELECTRICAL RELATED DTCS PRESENT INTERMITTENT STICKING VALVE IN THE VALVE BODY INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK IF ABS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, check for ABS DTCs. Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF TRANSMISSION SOLENOID DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs. 

Are there any transmission solenoid, speed sensor and/or any other transmission electrical related DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL 

NOTE:

Low fluid level can be the cause of many transmission problems. Visually inspect the transmission and cooler lines for leakage and repair as necessary and adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. If no visual leaks are observed and the vehicle has obtained over 1610 km (1000 miles) from either new or transmission service, a fluid level check is unnecessary.

1. Check the transmission fluid level and condition in accordance with the Service Information. Is the fluid level and condition correct? Yes 

Go To 4.



Correct the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK ENVIRONMENTAL DATA 1. With the scan tool, check environmental data for P1731. 

Did the environmental data show the code setting during a 3-4 upshift or 4-3 downshift? Yes NOTE:

Debris may enter through the vents in the top of the valve body. The debris can be a very small sliver that is visibly unnoticable unless flushing onto a fine filter paper. The debris has the potential to stick the 3-4 Shift Pressure or 3-4 Holding valves. If either valve is stuck during a 3-4 upshift or 4-3 downshift, a shift flare, bump shift, harsh shift, or neutraling out will occur.

 



Flush and clean the Valve Body in accordance with the Service Information. Pay particular attention to the 3-4 shift pressure and 3-4 holding valve. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK FOR INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM 1. Check for an internal Transmission mechanical problem(s). 2. Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for excessive debris or a plugged Transmission Oil Filter. 3. Inspect the valve body for foreign material, starting with the four valves associated with the shift described in the environmental data (shift pressure, holding, overlap, command), and continue on to the other valves. 4. This DTC is usually set due to an internal transmission problem such as but not limited to: stuck solenoid valve and/or contamination in the valve body, broken springs, leaking clutch seals, dislodged or broken snap ring etc. 5. Inspect the internal transmission. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



If no internal transmission mechanical problems are found, using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sensor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the transmission is slipping or an invalid gear ratio is present. WHEN MONITORED:

Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and vehicle speed above 10 Km/h (6 mph). SET CONDITION:

No shifting operation and actual gear is not the target gear. No shifting operation - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear, no plausible gear is calculated, actual (calculated) turbine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear. During Downshift - actual (calculated) gear is greater than target (expected) gear. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PINION FACTOR IS NOT PROPERLY PROGRAMMED LOW TRANSMISSION FLUID OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS PRESENT INTERNAL TRANSMISSION FAILURE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE PINION FACTOR IS PROGRAMMED 1. With the scan tool, check if the pinion factor has been programmed in the FCM.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

If the Pinion Factor is not properly programmed, a Gear Ratio DTC may set.

Was the Pinion Factor properly programmed for the actual tire size and axle ratio of the vehicle? Yes 

Go To 2.

No With the scan tool, properly program the Pinion Factor in the Front Control Module (FCM).  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK FOR OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check transmission DTCs. 

Are there any solenoid and/or solenoid supply voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL 

NOTE:

Low fluid level can be the cause of many transmission problems. Visually inspect the transmission and cooler lines for leakage and repair as necessary and adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. If no visual leaks are observed and the vehicle has obtained over 1610 km (1000 miles) from either new or transmission service, a fluid level check is unnecessary.

1. Check the transmission fluid level and condition in accordance with the Service Information. Is the fluid level correct? Yes 

No

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Properly adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER , STANDARD PROCEDURE .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT 1. With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Transmission DTCs. 

NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

2. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. Did the DTC P0731-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 1ST reset? Yes 



Repair internal transmission as necessary. Pay particular attention to components related to the referenced DTC. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test Complete.

P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sensor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the transmission is slipping or an invalid gear ratio is present. WHEN MONITORED:

Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and vehicle speed above 10 Km/h (6 mph). SET CONDITION:

No shifting operation and actual gear is not the target gear. No shifting operation - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear, no plausible gear is calculated, actual (calculated) turbine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear. During Downshift - actual (calculated) gear is greater than target (expected) gear. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PINION FACTOR IS NOT PROPERLY PROGRAMMED LOW TRANSMISSION FLUID OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS PRESENT INTERNAL TRANSMISSION FAILURE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE PINION FACTOR IS PROGRAMED 1. With the scan tool, check if the pinion factor has been programmed. NOTE:

If the Pinion Factor is not properly programmed, a Gear Ratio DTC may set.

Was the Pinion Factor properly programmed for the actual tire size and axle ratio of the vehicle? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No With the scan tool, properly program the Pinion Factor.  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 2. CHECK FOR OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check transmission DTCs. 

Are there any solenoid and/or solenoid supply voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL 

NOTE:

Low fluid level can be the cause of many transmission problems. Visually inspect the transmission and cooler lines for leakage and repair as necessary and adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. If no visual leaks are observed and the vehicle has obtained over 1610 km (1000 miles) from either new or transmission service, a fluid level check is unnecessary.

1. Check the transmission fluid level and condition in accordance with the Service Information. Is the fluid level correct? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Properly adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER , STANDARD PROCEDURE .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT 1. With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Transmission DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

2. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. Did the DTC P0732-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 2ND reset? Yes 



Repair internal transmission as necessary. Pay particular attention to components related to the referenced DTC. for proper repair procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0733-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sensor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the transmission is slipping or an invalid gear ratio is present. WHEN MONITORED:

Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and vehicle speed above 10 Km/h (6 mph). SET CONDITION:

No shifting operation and actual gear is not the target gear. No shifting operation - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear, no plausible gear is calculated, actual (calculated) turbine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear. During Downshift - actual (calculated) gear is greater than target (expected) gear. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW TRANSMISSION FLUID OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS PRESENT INTERNAL TRANSMISSION FAILURE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check transmission DTCs. Are there any solenoid and/or solenoid supply voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR OTHER GEAR RATIO DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check transmission DTCs. 

Is the DTC P0730 and/or P1731 gear ratio DTC also present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL 

NOTE:

Low fluid level can be the cause of many transmission problems. Visually inspect the transmission and cooler lines for leakage and repair as necessary and adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. If no visual leaks are observed and the vehicle has obtained over 1610 km (1000 miles) from either new or transmission service, a fluid level check is unnecessary.

1. Check the transmission fluid level and condition in accordance with the Service Information. Is the fluid level correct? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Properly adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 1. With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Transmission DTCs. 

NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

2. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. Did the DTC P0733-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 3RD reset? Yes 

Repair internal transmission as necessary. Pay particular attention to components related to the referenced DTC. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0734-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sensor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the transmission is slipping or an invalid gear ratio is present. WHEN MONITORED:

Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and vehicle speed above 10 Km/h (6 mph). SET CONDITION:

No shifting operation and actual gear is not the target gear. No shifting operation - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear, no plausible gear is calculated, actual (calculated) turbine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear. During Downshift - actual (calculated) gear is greater than target (expected) gear.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW TRANSMISSION FLUID OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS PRESENT INTERNAL TRANSMISSION FAILURE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check transmission DTCs. Are there any solenoid and/or solenoid supply voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR OTHER GEAR RATIO DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check transmission DTCs. 

Is the DTC P0730 and/or P1731 gear ratio DTC also present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL 

NOTE:

Low fluid level can be the cause of many transmission problems. Visually inspect the transmission and cooler lines for leakage and repair as necessary and adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. If no visual leaks are observed and the vehicle has obtained over 1610 km (1000 miles) from either new or transmission service, a fluid level check is unnecessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Check the transmission fluid level and condition in accordance with the Service Information. Is the fluid level correct? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Properly adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER , STANDARD PROCEDURE .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT 1. With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Transmission DTCs. 

NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

2. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. Did the DTC P0734-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 4TH reset? Yes 



Repair internal transmission as necessary. Pay particular attention to components related to the referenced DTC. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0735-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 5TH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sensor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the transmission is slipping or an invalid gear ratio is present. WHEN MONITORED:

Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and vehicle speed above 10 Km/h (6 mph). SET CONDITION:

No shifting operation and actual gear is not the target gear. No shifting operation - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear, no plausible gear is calculated, actual (calculated) turbine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear. During Downshift - actual (calculated) gear is greater than target (expected) gear. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW TRANSMISSION FLUID OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS PRESENT INTERNAL TRANSMISSION FAILURE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR OTHER TRANSMISSION DTCS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. With the scan tool, check transmission DTCs. Are there any solenoid and/or solenoid supply voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL 

NOTE:

Low fluid level can be the cause of many transmission problems. Visually inspect the transmission and cooler lines for leakage and repair as necessary and adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. If no visual leaks are observed and the vehicle has obtained over 1610 km (1000 miles) from either new or transmission service, a fluid level check is unnecessary.

1. Check the transmission fluid level and condition in accordance with the Service Information. Is the fluid level correct? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Properly adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER , STANDARD PROCEDURE .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT 1. With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Transmission DTCs. 

NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

2. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did the DTC P0735-GEAR RATIO ERROR IN 5TH reset? Yes 



Repair internal transmission as necessary. Pay particular attention to components related to the referenced DTC. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0741-TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The torque converter contains an internal Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) which is controlled by the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to maintain slip (engine speed versus transmission input speed) to optimize fuel economy under specific speed and throttle conditions. For fault determination, the TCM monitors the amount of torque converter slip ONLY when the TCC is in Slip Mode operation. During Slip Mode, the slip speed is expected to be within a predetermined range. If the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) does not receive adequate hydraulic pressure for any reason, or if the internal clutch is damaged, the TCC will not be able to control to the predetermined slip value. Therefore, if the torque converter slip is more than expected for a predetermined amount of time, the DTC will set. WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition on, TCM not in initialization phase, no input speed sensor 1 or 2 (N2-N3) DTCs, no CAN bus or ECM DTCs, no CAN engine speed signal or engine torque signal not implausible DTCs, engine speed greater than 450 RPM, no shift in progress, gear 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 engaged, and the TCM torque converter status is SLIP SET CONDITION:

While in Slip Mode operation, the TCM detects TCC slippage greater than a calibrated value. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TCC HYDRAULIC CONTROL CIRCUIT LOCKUP CONTROL VALVE STICKING IN ITS BORE TORQUE CONVERTER TCC SOLENOID INTERNAL TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine off. 2. Using the scan tool, check DTCs. Are there any Speed Sensor and/or TCC DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH PERFORMANCE 1. Operate the vehicle until the transmission sump temperature is to greater than 65° C (150° F). 2. Using the shifter lever, select third gear. 3. Accelerate the vehicle to third gear and hold. 4. With the scan tool, verify the TCC status is reading "SLIP". 5. Monitor TCC Desired Slip and TCC Actual Slip. 6. Operate the vehicle at 30 mph while maintaining third gear. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

7. Lightly depress the accelerator and hold the throttle position steady between 40 and 50%. 8. Slowly accelerate vehicle using steady throttle without causing TCC Status to read "OPEN". NOTE:

If at any time during the above test the TCC Status changes from SLIP to OPEN, or the vehicle downshifts to a lower gear, the test is invalid and must be performed again.

9. Compare TCC Actual Slip and TCC Desired Slip during steady throttle acceleration with TCC Status continually reading "SLIP". Does TCC Actual Slip exceed TCC Desired Slip by more than 60 RPM while accelerating at a steady throttle and staying in SLIP mode? Yes 







Inspect transmission fluid for water contamination. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER , DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Inspect internal transmission. Pay particular attention to the components related to the TCC such as possible missing Input Shaft Seal Ring, Lockup Control Valve sticking in its bore, and/or a leaking TCC Solenoid. If no internal transmission issues found, replace the Torque Converter. Refer to TORQUE CONVERTER , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) 1. Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. Check for Service Bulletins for any possible causes that may apply. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . 2. Perform TCC slip test to verify repair. 

NOTE:

To set P0741 fault, TCM must encounter three events where the TCM cannot control TCC Actual Slip to TCC Desired Slip in a single key cycle.

Does the DTC reset? Yes 

Inspect transmission fluid for water contamination. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER ,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee







DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Inspect internal transmission. Pay particular attention to the components related to the TCC such as possible missing Input Shaft Seal Ring, Lockup Control Valve sticking in its bore, and/or a leaking TCC Solenoid. If no internal transmission issues are found, replace the Torque Converter in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Test complete.

P0742-TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH STUCK ON

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly monitors the amount of torque converter slippage. When the torque converter clutch (TCC) is open the slippage is expected to be above a threshold. If the slippage is less

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

then expected when the TCC is open, the TCM assumes that the TCC is stuck on. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, TCM not in initialization phase, No input speed sensor 1 or 2 (N2-N3) DTCs, No CAN bus or ECM DTCs, No CAN engine speed signal or engine torque signal not implausible DTCs, Engine speed greater than 450 RPM, No shift in progress, Gear 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 engaged, and the TCM torque converter status is OPEN SET CONDITION:

Engine RPM (Turbine Speed) is greater than 30 RPM when engine torque less than 100 N.m (74.0 ft.lbs.) for period of 1.0 second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT INTERNAL TRANSMISSION LOCKUP CONTROL VALVE STICKING IN ITS BORE LEAKING TCC SOLENOID TORQUE CONVERTER TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF ENGINE STALLS OR STUMBLES IN GEAR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 3. Start the engine. 4. With the brakes firmly applied, shift the gear selector into Drive. Did the engine stall or stumble? Yes 



Repair internal transmission. Pay particular attention to the components related to the TCC such as the Lockup Control Valve sticking in its bore or a leaking TCC Solenoid. Refer to the Service Information for the proper repair procedures. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 41: Checking TCC Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 42: Checking TCC Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit and all other circuits in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit and all other circuits in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for a short to another circuit(s). Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P0743-TCC SOLENOID CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The TCC Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the Torque Converter Clutch should be activated. The Torque Converter Clutch is a variable slip torque clutch that allows

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

control of the slip from 5.5% to 95.5% of lock-up. The Clutch is controlled by the TCC Solenoid which is pulse width modulated (PWM) to provide the desired amount of slip. The clutch requires both an electrical PWM of 1000Hz and an hydraulic PWM of 100Hz. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, engine running, with the transmission in gear, the TCC Solenoid is inactive, or when the TCC Solenoid is active and controlled above 25% duty cycle, with the Solenoid Supply voltage active. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects on the TCC Solenoid control circuit a open, short to ground, short to voltage, internal short in the TCC Solenoid or open in the TCC Solenoid. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT TCC SOLENOID TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC P0743 reset? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Checking Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Checking TCC Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T75) TCC SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 46: Checking TCC Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit and all other circuits in the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit for a short to another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE TCC SOLENOID RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Checking Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the TCC Solenoid between the (T75) TCC Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Supply circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 2.0 and 4.0 Ohms? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the TCC Solenoid in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , DISASSEMBLY .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0748-MODULATOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve's purpose is to control the modulating pressure depending on the continuously changing operating conditions, such as load and gear change.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve is always active. The solenoid uses pulse width modulation (PWM) to control the transmissions hydraulic fluid pressure that is determined by the Transmission Control Module (TCM). WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, engine running, the Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve is either off, or active with 25-75% duty cycle, with no Solenoid Supply Voltage DTCs present. SET CONDITION:

When the Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve is turned on and the Solenoid driver detects an error (the measured current is too different then the target current) or when the solenoid is off and a short to ground is detected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT MODULATING PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC P0748 reset?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Checking Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control circuit between the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Checking Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T76) MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 51: Checking Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control circuit and every

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control circuit for a short to another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE MODULATING PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Checking Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. 3. Measure the resistance between the (T76) Modulation Pressure Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the Modulating Pressure Control Solenoid Valve in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0752-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The 1-2/4-5 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must shift into or out of second or fifth gear. The solenoid is only activated during the actual shift

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

of the transmission. When the solenoid is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off. WHEN MONITORED:

When both the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active. SET CONDITION:

When 1-2/4-5 Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid or circuit: open, short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC P0752 reset? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 54: Checking 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 55: Checking 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 56: Checking 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control Circuit For A To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID 

Fig. 57: Checking 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid between the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 Ohms? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0753-1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The 1-2/4-5 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must shift into or out of second or fifth gear. The solenoid is only activated during the actual shift

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

of the transmission. When the solenoid is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off. WHEN MONITORED:

When both the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active. SET CONDITION: POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC P0753 reset? Yes 

Go To 2.



Go To 6.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK THE (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Fig. 59: Checking 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 4. Measure the resistance of the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Checking 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T60) 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 61: Checking 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control Circuit For A To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit for another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE 1-2/4-5 SOLENOID 

Fig. 62: Checking 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid between the (T60) 1-2/4-5 Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 Ohms? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the 1-2/4-5 Solenoid in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0757-2-3 SOLENOID

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 63: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The 2-3 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must shift into or out of 3rd gear. The solenoid is only activated during the shifting of the transmission. When

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the solenoid is activated hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off. WHEN MONITORED:

When both the 2-3 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active. SET CONDITION:

When 2-3 Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the 2-3 Solenoid or circuit: open, short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 2-3 SOLENOID TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC P0757 reset? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 64: Checking 2-3 Solenoid Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Checking 2-3 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 66: Checking 2-3 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE 2-3 SOLENOID 

Fig. 67: Checking 2-3 Solenoid Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the 2-3 Solenoid between the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 Ohms? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the 2-3 Solenoid in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0758-2-3 SOLENOID CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The 2-3 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must shift into or out of 3rd gear. The solenoid is only activated during the shifting of the transmission. When

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the solenoid is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off. WHEN MONITORED:

When both the 2-3 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active. SET CONDITION:

When 2-3 Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the 2-3 Solenoid or circuit: open, short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 2-3 SOLENOID TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC P0758 reset? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 69: Checking 2-3 Solenoid Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 70: Checking 2-3 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T74) 2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 71: Checking 2-3 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit for another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE 2-3 SOLENOID 

Fig. 72: Checking 2-3 Solenoid Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the 2-3 Solenoid between the (T74) 2-3 Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 Ohms? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the 2-3 Solenoid in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0762-3-4 SOLENOID

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 73: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The 3-4 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must shift into or out of 4th gear. The solenoid is only activated during the shifting of the transmission. When

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the solenoid is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off. WHEN MONITORED:

When both the 3-4 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active. SET CONDITION:

When 3-4 Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the 3-4 Solenoid or circuit: open, short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 3-4 SOLENOID TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC P0762 reset? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Checking 3-4 Solenoid Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: Checking 3-4 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 76: Checking 3-4 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit and every other circuit in the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE 3-4 SOLENOID 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Checking 3-4 Solenoid Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the 3-4 Solenoid between the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 Ohms? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the 3-4 Solenoid in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0763-3-4 SOLENOID CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 78: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The 3-4 Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that the transmission must shift into or out of 4th gear. The solenoid is only activated during the shifting of the transmission. When

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the solenoid is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements in the transmission to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off. WHEN MONITORED:

When both the 3-4 Solenoid and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active. SET CONDITION:

When 3-4 Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the 3-4 Solenoid or circuit: open, short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 3-4 SOLENOID TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC P0763 reset? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 79: Checking 3-4 Solenoid Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 80: Checking 3-4 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T73) 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 81: Checking 3-4 Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit and every other circuit in the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit for another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE 3-4 SOLENOID 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 82: Checking 3-4 Solenoid Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the 3-4 Solenoid between the (T73) 3-4 Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 Ohms? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the 3-4 Solenoid in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P0778-SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: TCM & TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Shift Pressure Solenoid is activated when the Transmission Control Module (TCM) determines that a transmission gear shift is required. The Shift Pressure Solenoid is pulse width modulated (PWM) controlled to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

allow the proper amount of hydraulic pressure to the shift elements. The Shift Pressure Solenoid is only activated during the shift of the transmission. When the Shift Pressure Solenoid is activated, hydraulic pressure is applied to the proper shift elements through one of the shift solenoids in the transmission to allow the desired shift. Once the shift is completed the solenoid is turned off. WHEN MONITORED:

When the Shift Pressure Solenoid is: off, or active with 25-75% duty cycle, and the Solenoid Supply voltage is active. SET CONDITION:

When Shift Pressure Solenoid is turned on and the TCM detects any of the following in the Shift Pressure Solenoid or circuit: open, short to ground, short to voltage, or the solenoid driver in the TCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC P0778 reset? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 84: Checking Shift Pressure Solenoid Control Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit between the TCM C2 harness connector and the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 85: Checking Shift Pressure Solenoid Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T77) SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT 

Fig. 86: Checking Shift Pressure Solenoid Control Circuit For Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit for another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Checking Shift Pressure Solenoid Resistance Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the Shift Pressure Solenoid between the (T77) Shift Pressure Solenoid Control circuit and the (T78) Solenoid Voltage Supply circuit in the TCM C2 harness connector. Is the resistance between 2.5 and 6.5 Ohms? Yes 

Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the Shift Pressure Solenoid in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P1629-TCM INTERNAL - SOLENOID SUPPLY/ WATCHDOG

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 88: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. During the power up of the controller, the TCM tests the ability of the TCM to shut down the Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit. The controller monitors the A/D feedback on the Solenoid Supply driver output to ensure that battery voltage is no longer present. Note: A short to voltage on the Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit or any one of the solenoids may set this DTC. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects voltage on the Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit when the TCM request the circuit to be off. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE (T78) SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 89: Checking Solenoid Supply Voltage Circuit For A Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the TCM C1 and C2 harness connectors. Disconnect the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Measure the resistance between the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit and every other circuit in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Transmission Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T78) Solenoid Supply Voltage circuit for short to another circuit. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1631-TCM INTERNAL- PROCESSOR CLOCK PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates that there is an issue with the TCM's internal clock. If the TCM detects an error with the controllers internal clock, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects an error with the controllers internal clock. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1632-TCM INTERNAL - TEST INTERNAL WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 91: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates that there is an issue with the TCM's internal watchdog failed. If the TCM detects an error with the controllers internal watchdog, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects an error with the controllers internal watchdog. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1633-TCM INTERNAL - TEST EXTERNAL WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates that there is an issue with the TCM's external watchdog. If the TCM detects an error with the controllers external watchdog failed the power up test, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects an error with the controllers external watchdog failed the power up test. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1634-TCM INTERNAL- INTERNAL WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates that the controller's microprocessor internal watchdog has detected an error. If the TCM microprocessor detects an internal watchdog error, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM microprocessor internal watchdog detects an error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1636-TCM INTERNAL- EXTERNAL WATCHDOG PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 94: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates that watch dog circuitry external to the microprocessor has detected an error. If the TCM watch dog circuitry external to the microprocessor detects an error, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM watch dog circuitry external to the microprocessor detects an error. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1637-TCM INTERNAL-EEPROM PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 95: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates that there is an internal error with the controllers Random Access Memory. If detected, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM indicates that there is an internal error with the controllers Random Access Memory. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1638-TCM INTERNAL-CAN 1 RAM PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates that there is an internal error with the controllers Random Access Memory (RAM) on the CAN controller 1 section of the microprocessor. If detected, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects an internal error with the controllers Random Access Memory (RAM) on the CAN controller 1 section of the microprocessor. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1639-TCM INTERNAL-CAN 2 RAM PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 97: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. This DTC indicates that there is an internal error with the controllers Random Access Memory (RAM) on the CAN controller 2 section of the microprocessor. If detected, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects an internal error with the controllers Random Access Memory (RAM) on the CAN controller 2 section of the microprocessor. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Repair 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1644-INCORRECT VARIANT/CONFIGURATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 98: Transmission Control Module (TCM) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) performs various internal tests to verify proper controller operation. If the TCM detects that the variables that dictate the vehicle application are not present, the controller will enter Limp-in mode and illuminate the MIL. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the TCM detects that the variables that dictate the vehicle application are not present. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CONTROLLER NOT CODED TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. PERFORM TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE NOTE:

Controller is programmed with generic software and will not allow the correct vehicle Powertrain management.

1. With the scan tool, perform the TCM replacement procedure. Were you able to update the controller successfully? Yes  

No

Test Complete. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P1704-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 OVERSPEED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 99: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The NAG1 transmission has two input speed sensors 1 and 2 (N2 and N3), both speed sensors are located on the valve body. The speed sensors are hall effect speed sensors that are used by the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to calculate the transmissions input speed. Since the input speed could not be measured directly, two of the drive elements are measured. Two input speed sensors were required because both drive elements are not active in all gears. The input speed sensors 1 and 2 will report the same input speed in gears 2nd, 3rd or 4th. If the 1 and 2 input speed sensor signals are not the same in these gears, the TCM will set the DTC P2784-Input Speed Sensor 1/2 Correlation. The input speed sensor 2 is not reported in 1st and 5th gears. The input speed sensor 1 (N2) is not reported in Reverse. The P01704-Input Speed Sensor 1 Overspeed and P01705-Input Speed Sensor 2 Overspeed DTCs are rationality checks designed to detect a major transmission failure. If either DTC is detected, the TCM will place the transmission in Neutral. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, engine running, transmission in gear, and Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) greater than 0 RPM. SET CONDITION:

If the RPM of the Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) is greater than 7700 RPM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INTERNAL TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Raise the vehicle on the hoist. 4. Start the engine. 5. With the scan tool, monitor the Input Speed Sensor 1 RPM.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6. Firmly apply the brakes and place the gear selector in Drive. WARNING: To avoid possible serious or fatal injury, keep hands and feet clear of rotating wheels. 7. Release the brakes and raise the engine RPM to allow the transmission to upshift to the 2-3 and 3-4 shift schedule. Did the Input Speed Sensors 1 display an RPM above 7700? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION 1. This DTC is an indication of a internal transmission failure. 2. Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for excessive debris such as clutch friction material or metal contamination. 

Is there any indication of an internal transmission failure? Yes  

Repair internal transmission as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

P1705-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 OVERSPEED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 100: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The NAG1 transmission has two input speed sensors 1 and 2 (N2 and N3), both speed sensors are located on the valve body. The speed sensors are hall effect speed sensors that are used by the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to calculate the transmissions input speed. Since the input speed could not be measured directly, two of the drive elements are measured. Two input speed sensors were required because both drive elements are not

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

active in all gears. The input speed sensors 1 and 2 will report the same input speed in gears 2nd, 3rd or 4th. If the 1 and 2 input speed sensor signals are not the same in these gears, the TCM will set the DTC P2784-Input Speed Sensor 1/2 Correlation. The input speed sensor 2 is not reported in 1st and 5th gears. The input speed sensor 1 (N2) is not reported in Reverse. The P01704-Input Speed Sensor 1 Overspeed and P01705-Input Speed Sensor 2 Overspeed DTCs are rationality checks designed to detect a major transmission failure. If either DTC is detected, the TCM will place the transmission in Neutral. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, engine running, transmission in gear, and Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) greater than 0 RPM SET CONDITION:

If the RPM of the Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) is greater than 7700 RPM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INTERNAL TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK TO SEE IF DTC IS CURRENT 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Raise the vehicle on the hoist. 4. Start the engine. 5. With the scan tool, monitor the Input Speed Sensor 2 RPM. 6. Firmly apply the brakes and place the gear selector in Drive. WARNING: To avoid possible serious or fatal injury, keep hands and feet clear of rotating wheels. 7. Release the brakes and raise the engine RPM to allow the transmission to upshift to the 2-3 and 3-4 shift schedule. Did the Input Speed Sensor 2 display an RPM above 7700?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION 1. This DTC is an indication of a internal transmission failure. 2. Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for excessive debris such as clutch friction material or metal contamination. 

Is there any indication of an internal transmission failure? Yes  

Repair internal transmission as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test Complete.

P1731-INCORRECT GEAR ENGAGED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) constantly calculates the transmission ratio based on the input speed sensor 1 and 2 (N2-N3) signals and the calculated output shaft speed. The intent of this diagnostic is to detect if the transmission is trying to mechanically shift into a different gear than the TCM intends. NOTE:

The transmission control module is programmed to immediately place the transmission into neutral if P0730 or P1731 codes are set. These codes indicate that the transmission experienced an unknown or incorrect gear ratio. Placing the transmission in neutral prevents potential catastrophic failure. When this occurs, the transmission will remain in neutral until the vehicle slows to 29 Km/h (18 mph).

WHEN MONITORED:

Engine RPM greater than 450 RPM, no N2 - N3 input speed sensor errors present, no gear selector lever errors present, no ABS system errors, and vehicle speed above 10 Km/h (6 mph). SET CONDITION:

No shifting operation and actual gear differs from the target gear. No shifting operation - actual (calculated) gear differs from target (expected) gear, actual (calculated) turbine speed is greater than 300 RPM or calculated transmission ratio is above threshold. During an Upshift - actual (calculated) gear is less than target (expected) gear. During Downshift - actual (calculated) gear is greater than target (expected) gear. Exception: Actual (calculated) gear is 1st and target (desired) gear is 2nd. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW FLUID LEVEL ABS DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION SOLENOID, SPEED SENSOR AND/OR OTHER ELECTRICAL RELATED DTCS PRESENT INTERMITTENT STICKING VALVE IN THE VALVE BODY INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF ABS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, check for ABS DTCs. Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF TRANSMISSION SOLENOID DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs. 

Are there any transmission solenoid, speed sensor and/or any other transmission electrical related DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL 

NOTE:

Low fluid level can be the cause of many transmission problems. Visually inspect the transmission and cooler lines for leakage and repair as necessary and adjust the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. If no visual leaks are observed and the vehicle has obtained over 1610 km (1000 miles) from either new or transmission service, a fluid level check is unnecessary.

1. Check the transmission fluid level and condition in accordance with the Service Information. Is the fluid level correct? Yes 

No

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Correct the fluid level in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER , STANDARD PROCEDURE .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK ENVIRONMENTAL DATA 1. With the scan tool, check environmental data for P1731. 

Did the environmental data show the code setting during a 3-4 upshift or 4-3 downshift? Yes NOTE:

Debris may enter through the vents in the top of the valvebody. The debris can be a very small sliver that is visibly unnoticable unless flushing onto a fine filter paper. The debris has the potential to stick the 3-4 Shift Pressure or 3-4 Holding valves. If either valve is stuck during a 3-4 upshift or 4-3 downshift, a shift flare, bump shift, harsh shift, or neutraling out will occur.

 



Flush and clean the Valve Body in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , CLEANING . Pay particular attention to the 3-4 shift pressure and 3-4 holding valve. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK FOR INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM 1. Check for an internal Transmission mechanical problem(s). 2. Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for excessive debris or a plugged Transmission Oil Filter. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER , STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. Inspect the valve body for foreign material, starting with the four valves associated with the shift described in the environmental data (shift pressure, holding, overlap, command), and continue on to the other valves. 4. This DTC is usually set due to an internal transmission problem such as but not limited to: stuck solenoid valve and/or contamination in the valve body, broken springs, leaking clutch seals, dislodged or broken snap ring etc. 5. Inspect the internal transmission. 

Were there any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P2638-TORQUE MANAGEMENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) requests torque reductions over the CAN bus during a transmission shift to improve shift quality. The TCM verifies that the PCM / ECM has performed the requested torque reduction by monitoring the response to the request. If the response is not within a specified tolerance, the TCM increments a counter, and if this counter reaches a threshold, the DTC sets. WHEN MONITORED:

Engine intervention active for at least 20 ms, no engine torque errors, engine torque demand is greater than 0. SET CONDITION:

Torque Reduction acknowledge bit - not set, no shift aborts, the error flag Torque Reduction Acknowledge is not set, Powertrain controller not supporting torque requests. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUIT DTC PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) POWERTRAIN / ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (PCM OR ECM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK FOR ENGINE DTC PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, check engine DTCs. Are there any engine DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for any CAN bus DTCs or a sign of a CAN bus failure. 

Are there any CAN bus DTCs present in any module other than the TCM or an overall indication of a CAN bus communication problem? Yes 



This is an indication of a CAN bus communication problem. Depending on the DTC, refer to the module reporting the DTC and perform diagnostics for the appropriate symptom. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK IF DTC RESETS 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWERTRAIN CONTROL for the appropriate service procedure. 3. With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Transmission DTCs. 

NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

4. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. 5. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did the DTC P2638-TORQUE MANAGEMENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL PERFORMANCE reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test Complete. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

P2767-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 101: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) is one of two hall effect speed sensors that are used by the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to calculate the transmissions turbine speed. Since the turbine speed could not be measured directly, two of the drive elements are measured. Two input speed sensors are required because both elements are not active in all gears.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Engine speed greater than 450 RPM with none of the following DTCs present: engine speed, TCM undervoltage, output speed sensor, and/or rear wheel speed DTCs. Also required are all wheel speeds above 250 RPM and no wheel slip detected (signal from the ABS system). SET CONDITION:

If the Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) signal is equal to 0 RPM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT OPEN (T71) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (T71) SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT (T71) SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS CURRENT NOTE:

The Transmission Control Module stores under Environmental Data the transmission operating conditions when the DTC was set. Before erasure of any DTC, record all information pertaining to the DTC, even if there is more than one DTC stored.

1. With the scan tool, erase transmission DTCs. 2. Using the Environmental Data previously recorded, drive the vehicle and try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. Did the DTC P2767 reset? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 10. 2. CHECK THE (T72) SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 102: Checking Sensor Supply Voltage Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

4. Measure the resistance of the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (T72) Sensor Supply Voltage circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (T71) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 103: Checking Input Speed Sensor 2 Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 104: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit from the TCM C2 harness connector to the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for an open. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (T71) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT(S) 

Fig. 105: Checking Input Speed Sensor 2 Signal Circuit For Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit to all the other circuits in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit for a short to another circuit(s). Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (T71) INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 106: Checking Input Speed Sensor 2 Signal Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO ANOTHER CIRCUIT(S) 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 107: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit For Short To Another Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit to all the other circuits in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms between the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit and any other circuit(s) in the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector? Yes  

Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to another circuit(s). Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 8. 8. CHECK THE (T13) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 108: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit For Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (T13) Sensor Ground circuit for a short to ground. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 9. 9. CHECK THE INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL 

Fig. 109: Checking The Input Speed Sensor 2 Signal Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 110: Typical 5-Volt Square Wave Pattern Chart Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Electrohydraulic Control Unit Assembly harness connector. 2. Using a Lab Scope, backprobe the (T71) Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) Signal circuit at the TCM C2 harness connector. WARNING: Properly support the vehicle.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Raise all drive wheels off the ground. 4. Start the engine. WARNING: To avoid possible serious or fatal injury, keep hands and feet clear of rotating wheels. 5. Place gear selector in drive and increase vehicle speed to engage 2nd gear. 6. Compare the scope pattern on the Lab Scope with a typical 5-volt square wave pattern. Is the scope pattern comparable to the typical 5-volt square wave signal scope pattern? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Replace the Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3). Refer to UNIT, ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 10. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

P2783-TORQUE CONVERTER TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) monitors the friction loss of the torque converter clutch while it is in slipping mode. The TCM calculates friction loss using CAN communication signals such as, engine speed and engine torque, as well as the torque converter turbine speed computed by the TCM. Depending on the friction loss calculated in each program cycle, a corresponding value is added to a factor as long as the torque converter clutch is in slipping mode. The factor is set to 0 when the clutch is opened. If the factor reaches a specified value a DTC is set. WHEN MONITORED:

When the solenoid supply voltage is active. With no reporting Input Speed Sensor 1 or 2 (N2 - N3), CAN Bus, PCM, CAN Engine, and/or CAN Engine Speed DTCs present. Torque Converter Clutch in slip mode. SET CONDITION:

When the friction loss factor reaches threshold. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INTERNAL TRANSMISSION OR TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH PROBLEM Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERNAL TRANSMISSION PROBLEM 1. This DTC is an informational DTC. 2. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 3. This is usually a sign of Torque Converter Clutch failure or an internal transmission problem. 4. Check the Engine and Transmission Cooling Systems for proper operation. . Repair 



Repair internal Transmission, Torque Converter, and/or Transmission and Engine Cooling systems as necessary. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

P2784-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION

Fig. 111: Electrohydraulic Control Unit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Input Speed Sensors 1 and 2 (N2 - N3) will report the same speed in 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. If the Input

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Speed Sensor 1 and 2 signals are not the same in these gears, the DTC will set. WHEN MONITORED:

Engine speed greater than 450 RPM, no engine speed DTCs, no TCM undervoltage system operation, no output speed sensor DTCs (CAN signal from the ABS system), all wheel speeds above 250 RPM (CAN signal from the ABS system), no rear wheel speed DTCs (signal from the ABS system), and no wheel slip detected (CAN signal from the ABS system), no shifting operation, Input Speed Sensor 2 (N3) greater than 800 RPM and Input Speed Sensor 1 (N2) greater than 0 RPM and the TCM not in reset. SET CONDITION:

If the speed difference between the Input Speed Sensors 1 and 2 (N2 - N3) is greater than 150 RPM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INTERNAL TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR SPEED SENSOR OR SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for other transmission DTCs. Are any Input Speed Sensor and/or Sensor Supply Voltage DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK TO SEE IF INPUT SENSOR MISMATCH IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set and is located in scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. With the scan tool, record the Environmental Data and erase Transmission DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, test drive the vehicle while trying to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. Did the DTC P2784-INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION reset? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 3. INTERNAL TRANSMISSION 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Remove the Transmission Oil Pan and inspect for debris, a plugged Transmission Oil Filter, or any sign of an internal transmission problem. 

Is there any debris, plugged Transmission Oil Filter, or any sign of an internal transmission problem? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL .  Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between controllers. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured in a twisted pair within the electrical harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The TCM detects an: open, short to ground, short to voltage of the CAN C (+) or CAN C (-) circuits, short between the CAN C (+) or CAN C (-) circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN OVERALL CAN COMMUNICATION BUS FAILURE 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Are there any CAN C Bus failure, or one or more CAN C Bus DTCs? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS DTC first if it is present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE not present. One second after ignition on and not in Park or Neutral, no System Overvoltage or System Undervoltage condition present, or the transmission in Park or Neutral and engine RPM greater than 850 RPM. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if a CAN ID was not received in the required time from the ECM or PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS or U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM set? Yes 



Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Shift Modules (ESM) over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the Electronic Gear Shift Module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM set? Yes 



Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. Using the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U0114-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the Final Drive control module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0114-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE set? Yes 



Refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Information and perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. Using the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U0114-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the ABS. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE set? Yes 



Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE reset? Yes 

Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM? Yes 



Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE reset? Yes 

Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the Cluster/CCN. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN set? Yes 



Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN reset? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the HVAC Control Module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE set? Yes 



Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE reset?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U0401-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN message received at least once, and no U0002-CAN C Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN message from the Engine Control Module (ECM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS ENGINE DTCS TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF CAN BUS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. 

Are there any Engine DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U0404-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ESM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the Electronic Shift Module (ESM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

No

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 2. 2. ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE DTCS PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read Electronic Shift Module (ESM) DTCs. 

Are there any ESM DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U0414-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM FDCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the Final Drive Control Module (FDCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE (FDCM) DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE DTCS PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read Final Drive Control Module (FDCM) DTCs. 

Are there any FDCM DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No



U0415-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the ABS control module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FCM CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT ABS DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ABS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs. 

Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA FROM FCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the Front Control Module (FCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FCM CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No



U110B-LOST ENGINE COOLANT MESSAGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the ECM/PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS DTC or U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM set? Yes 



Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001-CAN C BUS first if it is present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U110B-LOST ENGINE COOLANT MESSAGE reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U1118-LOST ENGINE VARIANT MESSAGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the ECM/PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS or U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM set? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001CAN C BUS first, if it is present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U1118-LOST ENGINE MESSAGE reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U1119-LOST IPM (FCM/TIPM/BCM) VARIANT MESSAGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Transmission Control Module (TCM) receives information from the Engine, Anti-lock Brake System, and the Electronic Gear Shift control modules over the CAN C bus. The CAN C bus is a high speed communication bus that allows real time control capability between various controllers. Most messages are sent every 20 mSec, this means critical information can be shared between multiple controllers almost instantaneously. The CAN C bus is a two wire bus with a CAN (+) and a CAN (-) circuit. To reduce the potential of radio and other electrical noise interference, the CAN Bus circuit wiring is manufactured using a twisted pair configuration within the electrical wiring harness. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The DTC will set if a valid CAN ID was not received in the required time from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN C BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Is DTC U0001-CAN C BUS or U0101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM set? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the diagnostic procedure for U0001CAN C BUS first, it present. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF THE DTC IS CURRENT 

NOTE:

When the Transmission Control Module (TCM) detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located in the scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, record any available data to assist in duplicating the conditions in which the DTC originally set.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, erase Transmission DTCs. 3. Using the Environmental Data recorded earlier, try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC originally set. It may be necessary to test drive the vehicle. 4. With the scan tool, read Transmission DTCs. Did the DTC U1119-LOST FCM MESSAGE reset? Yes 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors specific to this circuit. 3. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for any possible open or shorted circuits. 4. Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Test Complete.



No

U1400-IMPLAUSIBLE TPS SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ECM/PCM DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read engine DTCs. 

Are there any engine DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1401-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes TIPM CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read engine DTCs. 

Are there any engine DTCs present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1402-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE TEMPERATURE SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read engine DTCs. 

Are there any engine DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1404-IMPLAUSIBLE STATIC ENGINE TORQUE SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read engine DTCs. 

Are there any engine DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1405-IMPLAUSIBLE MINIMUM ENGINE TORQUE SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read engine DTCs. 

Are there any engine DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1406-IMPLAUSIBLE MAXIMUM ENGINE TORQUE SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read engine DTCs. 

Are there any engine DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1407-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE TORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ENGINE DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read engine DTCs. 

Are there any engine DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1408-IMPLAUSIBLE BRAKE SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the ABS control module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT ABS DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ABS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs. 

Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1409-IMPLAUSIBLE LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the ABS control module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT ABS CONTROL MODULE DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ABS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U140A-IMPLAUSIBLE RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the ABS control module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT ABS CONTROL MODULE DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ABS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs. 

Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U140B-IMPLAUSIBLE LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the ABS control module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT ABS CONTROL MODULE DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ABS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs. 

Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 

Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U140C-IMPLAUSIBLE RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SIGNAL RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the ABS control module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT ABS CONTROL MODULE DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ABS DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs. 

Are there any ABS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U140F-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE VARIANT DATA For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ECM/PCM DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. 

Are there any PCM DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1410-IMPLAUSIBLE IPM (FCM/TIPM/BCM) VARIANT DATA

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

U1505-IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM FDCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the Final Drive Control Module (FDCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT FINAL DRIVE CONTROL MODULE DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE DTCS PRESENT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. With the scan tool, read Final Drive Control Module (FDCM) DTCs. Are there any FDCM DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No



U1507-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE TEMPERATURE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ECM/PCM DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. 

Are there any PCM DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1508-IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM ESM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the Electronic Shift Module (ESM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (ESM) DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE DTCS PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read Electronic Shift Module (ESM) DTCs. 

Are there any ESM DTCs present? Yes 

No

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

U1509-IMPLAUSIBLE ENGINE VARIANT MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the PCM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT PCM DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF ECM/PCM DTCS ARE PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. 

Are there any PCM DTCs present? Yes 



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U150A-IMPLAUSIBLE IPM (FCM/TIPM/BCM) VARIANT MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The messages sent on the CAN bus are distinguished by an identifier (ID). Each CAN ID is defined to contain a certain number of bytes. The Transmission Control Module (TCM) verifies that it has received the proper number of bytes for each ID. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN ID received at least once, and no U0002-CAN Bus Off Performance DTC present. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

When the TCM detects an incorrect CAN ID from the front Control Module (FCM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS DTCS PRESENT TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CAN BUS DTCS 1. With the scan tool, check for CAN BUS DTCs. Are there any CAN BUS DTCs present? Yes  

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

No 



Using the schematics as a guide, check the Transmission Control Module (TCM) pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no problems are found, replace and program the TCM in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.

STANDARD PROCEDURE NAG1 PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . Perform the following pre-diagnostic troubleshooting procedures prior to performing any diagnostic test. NOTE:

Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay.

NOTE:

Incorrect fluid level, and/or poor fluid condition can be the cause of many

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

transmission problems. Visually inspect the transmission and cooler lines for leakage and repair as necessary and adjust the fluid level per the Service Information. Always perform diagnostics with a fully charged battery to avoid false symptoms. 1. With the scan tool, read the engine DTCs. Check and repair all engine DTCs prior to performing transmission symptom diagnostic procedures. 2. With the scan tool, read and record all Transmission DTCs. Record the controller software version and variant ID (configuration or level). NOTE:

Check for any Service Information Tune-ups or Technical Service Bulletins (TSB) that may apply.

NOTE:

If the TCM detects and stores a DTC, the TCM also stores the vehicles operating conditions under which the DTC originally set. This information is located using a scan tool under Environmental Data. Before erasing any stored DTCs, it is recommended to record all available data to assist in troubleshooting and duplicating the conditions and in which the DTC originally set.

3. Verify the current software level of transmission controller. Various problems are corrected by software upgrades (flash) to the transmission controller. NOTE:

If a TCM software update is performed, all DTC information (Environmental Data) will be lost.

4. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors to all components related to the transmission and shift lever assembly. Clean and repair as necessary. 5. Most DTCs set on start up but some may only set by driving the vehicle. Note the when monitored and set conditions of the reported DTC. If variant DTCs are present, perform their respective test first. 6. Verify the axle ratio and transfer case ratio. NOTE:

The Transfer case ratio must be programmed using the scan tool under the appropriate gateway module (FCM, FDCM, and/or TIPM) even if equipped with AWD or NO transfer case. Validate that the left to right tire sizes on each axle are the same. Do not perform diagnostics using a space-saver spare tire. Invalid tire sizes (right to left) may cause erroneous DTCs to set.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. Did any of the above procedures repair the vehicle? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Testing is complete. Perform the NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



No

NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST To validate that the repair(s) fixed the vehicle, perform the following steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Reconnect any disconnected components. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector. With the scan tool, erase ABS DTCs. With the scan tool, erase PCM DTCs. With the scan tool, erase TCM DTCs. CAUTION: Apply the parking brake.

NOTE:

The Transmission Temperature can only be read while in Reverse or Drive.

6. With the scan tool, display the Transmission temperature. Start and run the engine until the Transmission temperature is above 43° C (110° F). 7. If internal transmission components were repaired or replaced check the Transmission fluid and adjust if necessary. Refer to the Service Information for the proper Fluid Fill procedure. Refer to FLUID AND FILTER , STANDARD PROCEDURE . 8. If the TCM (EGS) is flashed or replaced, with the scan tool, perform an EGS initialization to relearn variant coding. 9. If internal transmission repairs are performed or replacement of the Transmission Control Module, perform a TCM ADAPTATION procedure. Refer to MODULE, TRANSMISSION CONTROL , STANDARD PROCEDURE . 10. After performing the above procedures, perform the Road Test Procedure. ROAD TEST PROCEDURE

1. Road test the vehicle. Make fifteen to twenty 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, and 4-5 upshifts. 2. Perform these shifts from a standing start to 72 Km/h (45 mph) with a constant throttle opening of 20 to 25 degrees. 3. With speeds below 40 Km/h (25 mph), make five to eight wide open throttle kickdowns to 1st gear. Allow at least five seconds each in 2nd and 3rd gear between each kickdown. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Transmission Control Module (TCM) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. Did any DTCs set? Yes 

Refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Information and perform the appropriate symptom(s).



Testing is complete.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B142B VES UNIT HIGH TEMPERATURE B14CE VES BRIGHTNESS UP INPUT BUTTON STUCK B14CF VES BRIGHTNESS DOWN INPUT BUTTON STUCK B14E0 CHANNEL 1 VIDEO CONTINUITY B14E1 CHANNEL 1 AUDIO LEFT CONTINUITY B14E2 CHANNEL 1 AUDIO RIGHT CONTINUITY B14E3 CHANNEL 2 VIDEO CONTINUITY B14E4 CHANNEL 2 AUDIO LEFT CONTINUITY B14E5 CHANNEL 2 AUDIO RIGHT CONTINUITY B14E7 CHANNEL 3 AUDIO LEFT CONTINUITY B14E8 CHANNEL 3 AUDIO RIGHT CONTINUITY B210A SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW B210B SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH B210D BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW B210E BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH B21A1 ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED B222B VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM INTERNAL B222C VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED U0010 CAN INTERIOR BUS U0011 CAN INTERIOR BUS OFF PERFORMANCE U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN U0159 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE U0184 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO U1158 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER (SDARV)

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B142B-VES UNIT HIGH TEMPERATURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. VES active.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The Video Screen Module temperature is above 90°C (194°F). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VIDEO SCREEN MODULE HIGH TEMPERATURE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VIDEO SCREEN MODULE HIGH TEMPERATURE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all VES DTCs. 3. Turn the VES on. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTC information. Does the scan tool read: B142B-VES UNIT HIGH TEMPERATURE? Yes



Turn the Video Screen Module off and allow the unit to cool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Test Complete.



No

B14CE-VES BRIGHTNESS UP INPUT BUTTON STUCK For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. VES active. SET CONDITION:

The Video Screen Module detects a closed switch for 60 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VIDEO SCREEN MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. VERIFY OPERATION OF THE BUTTON 1. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 2. Press and release the button three times. 3. Wait 30 seconds. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is DTC B14CE-VES BRIGHTNESS UP INPUT BUTTON STUCK active? Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B14CF-VES BRIGHTNESS DOWN INPUT BUTTON STUCK For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. VES active. SET CONDITION:

The Video Screen Module detects a closed switch for 60 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VIDEO SCREEN MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY OPERATION OF THE BUTTON 1. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 2. Press and release the button three times. 3. Wait 30 seconds. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is DTC: active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B14E0-CHANNEL 1 VIDEO CONTINUITY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Video Screen Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, and the radio is in the video mode. The radio sends a video signal to the Video Screen Module, using circuits (X534) video 1 signal , (X535) video 1 common and (X536) video 1 shield, which displays on the video screen. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, and the radio is in the video mode. SET CONDITION:

No video is displayed on the rear video screen. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X534) VIDEO 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X535) VIDEO 1 COMMON CIRCUIT OPEN (X536) VIDEO 1 SHIELD CIRCUIT OPEN RADIO VIDEO SCREEN MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Set the radio in the video mode. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the VES DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 5. Turn the ignition on and set the radio in the video mode. 6. With the scan tool, read the active VES DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B14E0-CHANNEL 1 VIDEO CONTINUITY? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X534) VIDEO 1 SIGNAL, THE (X535) COMMON, AND THE (X536) SHIELD CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Video 1 Signal, The Common, And The Shield Circuits For An Open Circuit

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the radio C3 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X534), (X535), and (X536) circuits between the Video Screen Module harness connector and radio C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms on the (X534), (X535), or (X536) circuits? Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the appropriate circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B14E1-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO LEFT CONTINUITY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Video Screen Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, and the radio is in the video mode. The radio sends an audio signal to the Video Screen Module, using circuits (X539) Channel 1 Audio Left and (X540) Channel 1 Audio Return. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, and the radio is in the video mode. SET CONDITION:

The VES detects an open condition on the Channel 1 Audio Left circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X539) CHANNEL 1 AUDIO LEFT OPEN (X540) CHANNEL 1 AUDIO RETURN OPEN VIDEO SCREEN MODULE RADIO DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Set the radio in the video mode. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the VES DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 5. Turn the ignition on and set the radio in the video mode. 6. With the scan tool, read the active VES DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B14E1-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO LEFT CONTINUITY? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X539) CHANNEL 1 AUDIO LEFT OPEN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Checking Channel 1 Audio Left Open Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the radio C3 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X539) Channel 1 Audio Left circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (X539) Channel 1 Audio Left circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (X540) CHANNEL 1 AUDIO RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Channel 1 Audio Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (X540) Channel 1 Audio Return circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (X540) Channel 1 Audio Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B14E2-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO RIGHT CONTINUITY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Video Screen Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, and the radio is in the video mode. The radio sends an audio signal to the Video Screen Module, using circuits (X538) Channel 1 Audio Right and (X540) Channel 1 Audio Return. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, and the radio is in the video mode. SET CONDITION:

The VES detects an open condition on the Channel 1 Audio Right circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X538) CHANNEL 1 AUDIO RIGHT OPEN (X540) CHANNEL 1 AUDIO RETURN OPEN VIDEO SCREEN MODULE RADIO DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Set the radio in the video mode. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the VES DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 5. Turn the ignition on and set the radio in the video mode. 6. With the scan tool, read the active VES DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B14E2-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO RIGHT CONTINUITY? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X538) CHANNEL 1 AUDIO RIGHT OPEN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking Channel 1 Audio Right Open Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the radio C3 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X538) Channel 1 Audio Right circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (X538) Channel 1 Audio Right circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (X540) CHANNEL 1 AUDIO RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Checking Channel 1 Audio Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (X540) Channel 1 Audio Return circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (X540) Channel 1 Audio Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B14E3-CHANNEL 2 VIDEO CONTINUITY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Video Screen Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, and the radio is in the video mode. The radio sends a video signal to the Video Screen Module, using circuits (X541) video 2 signal, (X542) video 2 common and (X543) video 2 shield, which displays on the video screen. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, and the radio is in the video mode. SET CONDITION:

No video is displayed on the rear video screen. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X541) VIDEO 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (X542) VIDEO 2 COMMON CIRCUIT OPEN (X543) VIDEO 2 SHIELD CIRCUIT OPEN VIDEO SCREEN MODULE RADIO DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Set the radio in the video mode. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the VES DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 5. Turn the ignition on and set the radio in the video mode. 6. With the scan tool, read the active VES DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B14E3-CHANNEL 2 VIDEO CONTINUITY? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X541) VIDEO 2 SIGNAL, THE (X542) COMMON, AND THE (X543) SHIELD CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking Video 2 Signal, The Common, And The Shield Circuits For An Open Circuit

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the radio C3 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X541), (X542), and (X543) circuits between the Video Screen Module harness connector and radio C3 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms on the (X541) (X542) or (X543) circuits? Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the appropriate circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B14E4-CHANNEL 2 AUDIO LEFT CONTINUITY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Video Screen Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, and the radio is in the video mode. The radio sends an audio signal to the Video Screen Module, using circuits (X545) Channel 2 Audio Left and (X546) Channel 2 Audio Return. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, and the radio is in the video mode. SET CONDITION:

The VES detects an open condition on the Channel 2 Audio Left circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X545) CHANNEL 2 AUDIO LEFT OPEN (X546) CHANNEL 2 AUDIO RETURN OPEN VIDEO SCREEN MODULE RADIO DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Set the radio in the video mode. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the VES DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 5. Turn the ignition on and set the radio in the video mode. 6. With the scan tool, read the active VES DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B14E4-CHANNEL 2 AUDIO LEFT CONTINUITY? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X545) CHANNEL 2 AUDIO LEFT OPEN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Channel 2 Audio Left Open Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the radio C3 harness connector. Disconnect the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (X545) Channel 2 Audio Left circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (X545) Channel 2 Audio Left circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (X546) CHANNEL 2 AUDIO RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Checking Channel 2 Audio Return Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (X546) Channel 2 Audio Return circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (X546) Channel 2 Audio Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B14E5-CHANNEL 2 AUDIO RIGHT CONTINUITY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Video Screen Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, and the radio is in the video mode. The radio sends an audio signal to the Video Screen Module, using circuits (X544) Channel 2 Audio Right and (X546) Channel 2 Audio Return. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, and the radio is in the video mode. SET CONDITION:

The VES detects an open condition on the Channel 2 Audio Right circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X544) CHANNEL 2 AUDIO RIGHT OPEN (X546) CHANNEL 2 AUDIO RETURN OPEN VIDEO SCREEN MODULE RADIO DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Set the radio in the video mode. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the VES DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 5. Turn the ignition on and set the radio in the video mode. 6. With the scan tool, read the active VES DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B14E5-CHANNEL 2 AUDIO RIGHT CONTINUITY? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X544) CHANNEL 2 AUDIO RIGHT OPEN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Checking Channel 2 Audio Right Open Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect the radio C3 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X544) Channel 2 Audio Right circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (X544) Channel 2 Audio Right circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (X546) CHANNEL 2 AUDIO RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Channel 2 Audio Return Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (X546) Channel 2 Audio Return circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (X546) Channel 2 Audio Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B14E7-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO LEFT CONTINUITY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Video Screen Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, and the radio is in the video mode. The radio sends an audio signal to the Video Screen Module, using circuits (X551) Channel 3 Audio Left and (X552) Channel 3 Audio Return. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, and the radio is in the video mode. SET CONDITION:

The VES detects an open condition on the Channel 3 Audio Left circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X551) CHANNEL 3 AUDIO LEFT OPEN (X552) CHANNEL 3 AUDIO RETURN OPEN VIDEO SCREEN MODULE RADIO DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Set the radio in the video mode. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the VES DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 5. Turn the ignition on and set the radio in the video mode. 6. With the scan tool, read the active VES DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B14E7-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO LEFT CONTINUITY? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X551) CHANNEL 3 AUDIO LEFT OPEN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Checking Channel 3 Audio Left Open Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the radio C3 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X551) Channel 3 Audio Left circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (X551) Channel 3 Audio Left circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (X552) CHANNEL 3 AUDIO RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Checking Channel 3 Audio Return Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (X552) Channel 3 Audio Return circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (X552) Channel 3 Audio Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B14E8-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO RIGHT CONTINUITY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Video Screen Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, and the radio is in the video mode. The radio sends an audio signal to the Video Screen Module, using circuits (X550) Channel 3 Audio Right and (X552) Channel 3 Audio Return. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, and the radio is in the video mode. SET CONDITION:

The VES detects an open condition on the Channel 3 Audio Right circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (X550) CHANNEL 3 AUDIO RIGHT OPEN (X552) CHANNEL 3 AUDIO RETURN OPEN VIDEO SCREEN MODULE RADIO DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Set the radio in the video mode. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase the VES DTCs. 4. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 5. Turn the ignition on and set the radio in the video mode. 6. With the scan tool, read the active VES DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: B14E8-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO RIGHT CONTINUITY? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (X550) CHANNEL 3 AUDIO RIGHT OPEN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Checking Channel 3 Audio Right Open Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the radio C3 harness connector. 2. Disconnect the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (X550) Channel 3 Audio Right circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (X550) Channel 3 Audio Right circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (X552) CHANNEL 3 AUDIO RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Checking Channel 3 Audio Return Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (X552) Channel 3 Audio Return circuit between the radio C3 harness connector and the Video Screen Module C1 harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Replace the Video Screen Module. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the (X552) Channel 3 Audio Return circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210A-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the battery voltage was below 10 volts for over 20 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. Are there any ENGINE Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

This code is for information only. At some time there was a low battery system voltage. Check the battery and charging system in accordance with the Service Information.

B210B-SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the battery voltage was above 16 volts for over 20 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes HIGH SYSTEM VOLTAGE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs. Are there any ENGINE Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .



This code is for information only. At some time there was a low battery system voltage. Check the battery and charging system in accordance with the Service Information.

No

B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

Battery voltage less than 10 volts for more than 20 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RESISTANCE IN THE (A1) BATTERY POSITIVE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE IN THE GENERATOR CASE GROUND (K125) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (K125) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Z20) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BATTERY GENERATOR POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS NOTE:

Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using the Midtronics Battery Tester, test the Battery before continuing.

NOTE:

Inspect the vehicle for after market accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.

NOTE:

Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.

NOTE:

Inspect the fuses in the IPM. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs. Does the scan tool display any active battery or charging DTCs? Yes 

No

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Check the above conditions that can cause a low voltage condition. Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Battery voltage greater than 16 volts for more than 20 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K125) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE BATTERY GENERATOR POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS NOTE:

Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using the Midtronics Battery Tester, test the Battery before continuing.

NOTE:

Inspect the vehicle for after market accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.

NOTE:

Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.

NOTE:

Inspect the fuses in the IPM. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs. Does the scan tool display any active battery or charging system DTCs? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .



Check the above conditions that can cause a high voltage condition. Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B21A1-ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Video Screen Module experiences a reset event. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all VES DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, then on again. 4. With the scan tool read VES DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B21A1-ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED? Yes



Check for intermittent condition by inspecting the wiring harness and cables for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Test Complete.





No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B222B-VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Video Screen Module detects an internal failure. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VIDEO SCREEN MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. REPLACE THE VIDEO SCREEN MODULE 1. When this DTC is active, replace the Video Screen Module. Repair 



Replace the Video Screen Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MONITOR, MEDIA SYSTEM , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Vehicle configuration information not programmed into the TIPM. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES NO COMMUNICATION WITH TOTALLY INTEGRATED CONTROL MODULE ACTIVE TIPM DTCs TOTALLY INTEGRATED CONTROL MODULE (TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait ten seconds then turn the ignition on. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. VERIFY COMMUNICATION WITH TIPM 1. With the scan tool, read the active modules on the bus. 

Does the scan tool show the TIPM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the No Response from TIPM diagnostic procedure. 3. CHECK TIPM FOR ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. Wait approximately ten seconds. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

Are any active DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION INFORMATION WITH SCAN TOOL 1. With the scan tool run an ECU Details Report, read the Original and Current VINs, and the Body Style of the vehicle. 

Does the information displayed match the vehicle? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. RESTORE THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION 1. With the scan tool, restore the vehicle configuration. 2. Turn the ignition off, then back on. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED as active? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0010-CAN INTERIOR BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0010-CAN Interior Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0011-CAN INTERIOR BUS OFF PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0011-CAN Interior Bus Off Performance diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10.0 and 16.0 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

No

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Instrument Cluster (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0155-Lost Communication with

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure. No 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fused installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Parking Assist Control Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES PARK ASSIST MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY PARK ASSIST MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0159-Lost Communication with Parking Assist Control Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fused installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Radio for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES RADIO POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY RADIO MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0184-Lost Communication with Radio diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U1158-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER (SDARV) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Satellite Video Receiver (SDARV) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER MODULE THAT SET THE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Entertainment System (VES3) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U1158-Lost Communication with Satellite Video Receiver (SDARV) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B1539 SATELLITE VIDEO ANTENNA PERFORMANCE (NOT CONNECTED) B210D BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW B210E BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH B21A1 ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED B222C VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED B2287 SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER INTERNAL U0010 CAN INTERIOR BUS U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) U0184 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO U0196 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B1539-SATELLITE VIDEO ANTENNA PERFORMANCE (NOT CONNECTED) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on and the Radio in Satellite Video Mode. SET CONDITION:

If the Satellite Video Module does not detect an Antenna connection, this DTC will set. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BAD SATELLITE VIDEO ANTENNA CONNECTION OPEN SATELLITE VIDEO ANTENNA CABLE OPEN SATELLITE VIDEO ANTENNA SATELLITE VIDEO MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE ANTENNA CONNECTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Satellite Video Antenna Cable connector at the Satellite Video Module. 3. Inspect the Satellite Video Antenna connection. Was the Antenna connection clean and secure? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Repair the Antenna connection as needed.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. TEST THE SATELLITE VIDEO MODULE 

NOTE:

Move vehicle outside approximately 9.14 m (30 ft.) from any structure.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record, then erase the Satellite Video Module DTCs. Turn the ignition off. Connect the Radio Diagnostic Tool (special tool #9977-6-SAT, Antenna) to the Satellite Video Antenna connection at the Satellite Video Module. 5. Turn the ignition and the Radio on. 6. Put the Radio in Satellite Video Mode. 7. With the scan tool, read the active Satellite Video Module DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1539 Satellite Video Antenna Performance (Not Connected) as Active? Yes  

Replace the Satellite Video Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. TEST THE SATELLITE VIDEO ANTENNA 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Satellite Video Antenna cable connector at the Satellite Video Antenna. 3. Connect the appropriate Radio Diagnostic Tool (special tool #9977-6-1, Adapter) or (special tool #9977-6-3, Adapter) to the Satellite Video Antenna cable at the Satellite Video Module. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Connect the appropriate Radio Diagnostic Tool (special tool #9977-6-4, Jumper) or (special tool #9977-6-2, Jumper) to the Satellite Video Antenna cable at the Satellite Video Antenna. 5. Measure the Resistance across the terminals on the tool. Is the resistance above 52.5 Ohms? Yes 



Use the Radio Diagnostic Tool (special tool #9977-6, Kit, Radio Antenna Diagnostic) to locate the open circuit, repair or replace the Satellite Video Antenna cable as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Replace the Satellite Video Antenna in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Battery voltage less than 9 volts for more than 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BATTERY GENERATOR POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS NOTE:

Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using the Midtronics Battery Tester, test the Battery before continuing.

NOTE:

Inspect the vehicle for after market accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.

NOTE:

Inspect the fuses in the IPM. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs. Does the scan tool display any active battery or charging DTCs? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate battery or charging system diagnostic procedure .



Check the above conditions that can cause a low voltage condition. Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Battery voltage greater than 16 volts for more than 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes BATTERY GENERATOR POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using the Midtronics Battery Tester, test the Battery before continuing.

NOTE:

Inspect the vehicle for after market accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.

NOTE:

Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.

NOTE:

Inspect the fuses in the IPM. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs. Does the scan tool display any active battery or charging system DTCs? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate battery or charging system diagnostic procedure .



Check the above conditions that can cause a high voltage condition. Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B21A1-ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Satellite Video Receiver Module (SDARV) experiences a reset event. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, clear all SDARV DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off, then on again. 4. With the scan tool read SDARV DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B21A1-ECU RESET/RECOVERY OCCURRED? Yes



Check for intermittent condition by inspecting the wiring harness and cables for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Test Complete.





No

B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Vehicle configuration information not programmed into the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES NO COMMUNICATION WITH TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ACTIVE TIPM DTCS TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Turn the ignition off, wait ten seconds then turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. VERIFY COMMUNICATION WITH TIPM 1. With the scan tool, read the active modules on the bus. 

Does the scan tool show the TIPM active on the bus? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the No Response From TIPM diagnostic procedure. 3. CHECK TIPM FOR ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, erase TIPM DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. Wait approximately ten seconds. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

Are any active DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION INFORMATION WITH SCAN TOOL 1. With the scan tool run an ECU Details Report, read the Original and Current VINs, and the Body 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Style of the vehicle. Does the information displayed match the vehicle? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. RESTORE THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION 1. With the scan tool, restore the vehicle configuration. 2. Turn the ignition off, then back on. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED as active? Yes 



Replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2287-SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Satellite Video Receiver detects an internal failure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. REPLACE THE SATELLITE VIDEO RECEIVER 1. When this DTC is active, replace the Satellite Video Receiver. Repair 



Replace the Satellite Video Receiver in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, SATELLITE VIDEO , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0010-CAN INTERIOR BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0010-CAN Interior Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10.0 and 16.0 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fused installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Radio for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES RADIO POWER AND GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY RADIO MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0184-Lost Communication with Radio diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0196-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fused installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Vehicle Entertainment System (DVD player) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Video Satellite (SDARV) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM (DVD PLAYER) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM (DVD PLAYER) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0196-Lost Communication with Vehicle Entertainment Control Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B1A08 RKE FOB 1 PERFORMANCE B1A09 RKE FOB 2 PERFORMANCE B1A0A RKE FOB 3 PERFORMANCE B1A0B RKE FOB 4 PERFORMANCE B1A0C RKE FOB 5 PERFORMANCE B1A0D RKE FOB 6 PERFORMANCE B1A0E RKE FOB 7 PERFORMANCE B1A0F RKE FOB 8 PERFORMANCE B1A10 RKE FOB 1 BATTERY LOW B1A11 RKE FOB 2 BATTERY LOW B1A12 RKE FOB 3 BATTERY LOW B1A13 RKE FOB 4 BATTERY LOW B1A14 RKE FOB 5 BATTERY LOW B1A15 RKE FOB 6 BATTERY LOW B1A16 RKE FOB 7 BATTERY LOW B1A17 RKE FOB 8 BATTERY LOW B1A24 KEY NOT PROGRAMMED B1A25 INVALID KEY B1A26 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED B1A27 SKREEM PROGRAMMING PERFORMANCE B1A28 ECM MISMATCH WITH SKIM B1A29 SKIM BASESTATION MISMATCH B1A35 UNIDENTIFIED KEY COMMUNICATION ERROR B1A68 STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE BOLT CONTROL LOW (WIN) B1A6B B1A6B STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE NOT INITIALIZED B1A6C SECRET KEY MISMATCH B1A77 REMOTE START ANTENNA CIRCUIT LOW B1A79 REMOTE START ANTENNA CIRCUIT OPEN OR NOT CONNECTED B210A SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW B210B SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH B210D BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW B210E BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH B2204 ECU CONFIGURATION MISMATCH B2205 ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B2211 B221D B2224 B2254 C0077 C1501 C1502 C1503 C1504 C151C P0928 U0001 U0037 U0100 U0121 U0146 U0231 U0236 U1197

RAIN SENSOR MODULE INITIALIZATION PERFORMANCE RAIN SENSOR MODULE INTERNAL SKREEM INTERNAL COLUMN LOCK MODULE INTERNAL LOW TIRE PRESSURE TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 1 INTERNAL TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 2 INTERNAL TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 3 INTERNAL TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 4 INTERNAL TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSORS MISSING BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT CAN C BUS LIN BUS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE ECM/PCM LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY (TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH LIGHT RAIN SENSING MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH COLUMN LOCK MODULE SECURITY SEED RESPONSE NOT RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B1A08-RKE FOB 1 PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Scrambled messages to the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) from the FOBIK transmitter. POSSIBLE CAUSES

NOTE:

The most probable cause that sets this code is the RKE transmitter being pressed over 1024 times when it is out of range of the Wireless Ignition Node and it loses synchronization with the rolling code of the WIN. To correct, insert the FOBIK in the ignition and turn to the on position to synchronize the rolling code.

Possible Causes EXCESSIVE PRESSES FROM TRANSMITTER WHEN OUT OF RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Put the FOBIK in the ignition and turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. 4. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Replace the FOBIK and program using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Inform the owner of the most probable cause for this code to set and therefore causes the RKE system to be inoperative. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A09-RKE FOB 2 PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Scrambled messages to the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) from the FOBIK transmitter. POSSIBLE CAUSES

NOTE:

The most probable cause that sets this code is the FOBIK transmitter being pressed over 1024 times when it is out of range of the Wireless Ignition Node and it loses synchronization with the rolling code of the WIN. To correct, insert the FOBIK in the ignition and turn to the on position to synchronize the rolling code. Possible Causes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

EXCESSIVE PRESSES FROM TRANSMITTER WHEN OUT OF RANGE FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Put the FOBIK in the ignition and turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 4. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Inform the owner of the most probable cause for this code to set and therefore causes the RKE to be inoperative. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A0A-RKE FOB 3 PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Scrambled messages to the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) from the FOBIK transmitter. POSSIBLE CAUSES

NOTE:

The most probable cause that sets this code is the FOBIK transmitter being pressed over 1024 times when it is out of range of the Wireless Ignition Node and it loses synchronization with the rolling code of the WIN. To correct, insert the FOBIK in the ignition and turn to the on position to synchronize the rolling code.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes EXCESSIVE PRESSES FROM TRANSMITTER WHEN OUT OF RANGE FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Put the FOBIK in the ignition and turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 4. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK transmitter using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Inform the owner of the most probable cause for this code to set and therefore causes the RKE system to be inoperative. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A0B-RKE FOB 4 PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Scrambled messages to the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) from the transmitter. POSSIBLE CAUSES

NOTE:

The most probable cause that sets this code is the FOBIK transmitter being pressed over 1024 times when it is out of range of the Wireless Ignition Node and it loses synchronization with the rolling code of the WIN. To correct, insert the FOBIK in the ignition and turn to the on position to synchronize the rolling

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

code. Possible Causes EXCESSIVE PRESSES FROM TRANSMITTER WHEN OUT OF RANGE FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Put the FOBIK in the ignition and turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 4. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK transmitter using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Inform the owner of the most probable cause for this code to set and therefore causes the RKE system to be inoperative. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A0C-RKE FOB 5 PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Scrambled messages to the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) from the transmitter. POSSIBLE CAUSES

NOTE:

The most probable cause that sets this code is the FOBIK transmitter being pressed over 1024 times when it is out of range of the Wireless Ignition Node

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

and it loses synchronization with the rolling code of the WIN. To correct, insert the FOBIK in the ignition and turn to the on position to synchronize the rolling code. Possible Causes EXCESSIVE PRESSES FROM TRANSMITTER WHEN OUT OF RANGE FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Put the FOBIK in the ignition and turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 4. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK transmitter using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Inform the owner of the most probable cause for this code to set and therefore causes the RKE system to be inoperative. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A0D-RKE FOB 6 PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Scrambled messages to the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) from the transmitter. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The most probable cause that sets this code is the FOBIK transmitter being pressed over 1024 times when it is out of range of the Wireless Ignition Node and it loses synchronization with the rolling code of the WIN. To correct, insert the FOBIK in the ignition and turn to the on position to synchronize the rolling code.

Possible Causes EXCESSIVE PRESSES FROM TRANSMITTER WHEN OUT OF RANGE FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Put the FOBIK in the ignition and turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 4. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Inform the owner of the most probable cause for this code to set and therefore causes the RKE system to be inoperative. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A0E-RKE FOB 7 PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

Scrambled messages to the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) from the transmitter.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

NOTE:

The most probable cause that sets this code is the FOBIK transmitter being pressed over 1024 times when it is out of range of the Wireless Ignition Node and it loses synchronization with the rolling code of the WIN. To correct, insert the FOBIK in the ignition and turn to the on position to synchronize the rolling code.

Possible Causes EXCESSIVE PRESSES FROM TRANSMITTER WHEN OUT OF RANGE FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Put the FOBIK in the ignition and turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 4. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Inform the owner of the most probable cause for this code to set and therefore causes the RKE system to be inoperative. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A0F-RKE FOB 8 PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Scrambled messages to the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) from the transmitter. POSSIBLE CAUSES

NOTE:

The most probable cause that sets this code is the FOBIK transmitter being pressed over 1024 times when it is out of range of the Wireless Ignition Node and it loses synchronization with the rolling code of the WIN. To correct, insert the FOBIK in the ignition and turn to the on position to synchronize the rolling code.

Possible Causes EXCESSIVE PRESSES FROM TRANSMITTER WHEN OUT OF RANGE FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Put the FOBIK in the ignition and turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 4. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Inform the owner of the most probable cause for this code to set and therefore causes the RKE system to be inoperative. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A10-RKE FOB 1 BATTERY LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During key interrogation and when a valid RKE transmission is read.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the battery in the Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is low during key interrogation, with a valid key, this code will set. It may also set during a valid RKE button press. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. Operate the RKE transmitter in all positions several times. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A10-RKE FOB 1 BATTERY LOW as active? Yes 



Replace the FOBIK battery. Test the FOBIK using the Miller Special Tool "(special tool #9001, Rf Detector)" RF Detector". If the Strength Display does not display "Strong", replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Test complete. The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A11-RKE FOB 2 BATTERY LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During key interrogation and when a valid RKE transmission is read.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the battery in the Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is low during key interrogation, with a valid key, this code will set. It may also set during a valid RKE button press. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. Operate the FOBIK transmitter in all positions several times. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A11-RKE FOB 2 BATTERY LOW as active? Yes 



Replace the FOBIK battery. Test the FOBIK using the Miller Special Tool "(special tool #9001, Rf Detector)" RF Detector". If the Strength Display does not display "Strong", replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

No  

Test complete. The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

B1A12-RKE FOB 3 BATTERY LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During key interrogation and when a valid RKE transmission is read.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the battery in the Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is low during key interrogation, with a valid key, this code will set. It may also set during a valid RKE button press. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A12-RKE FOB 3 BATTERY LOW as active? Yes 



Replace the FOBIK battery. Test the FOBIK using the RF Detector (special tool #9001, Rf Detector). If the Strength Display does not display "Strong", replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Test complete. The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A13-RKE FOB 4 BATTERY LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During key interrogation and when a valid RKE transmission is read.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the battery in the Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is low during key interrogation, with a valid key, this code will set. It may also set during a valid RKE button press. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. Operate the FOBIK transmitter in all positions several times. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A13-RKE FOB 4 BATTERY LOW as active? Yes 



Replace the FOBIK battery. Test the FOBIK using the Miller Special Tool "(special tool #9001, Rf Detector)" RF Detector". If the Strength Display does not display "Strong", replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Test complete. The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A14-RKE FOB 5 BATTERY LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During key interrogation and when a valid RKE transmission is read.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the battery in the Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is low during key interrogation, with a valid key, this code will set. It may also set during a valid RKE button press. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. Operate the RKE transmitter in all positions several times. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A14-RKE FOB 5 BATTERY LOW as active? Yes 



Replace the FOBIK battery. Test the FOBIK using the Miller Special Tool "(special tool #9001, Rf Detector)" RF Detector". If the Strength Display does not display "Strong", replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Test complete. The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A15-RKE FOB 6 BATTERY LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During key interrogation and when a valid RKE transmission is read.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the battery in the Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is low during key interrogation, with a valid key, this code will set. It may also set during a valid RKE button press. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1A15-RKE FOB 6 BATTERY LOW? Yes 



Replace the FOBIK battery. Test the FOBIK using the Miller Special Tool "(special tool #9001, Rf Detector)" RF Detector". If the Strength Display does not display "Strong", replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Test complete The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A16-RKE FOB 7 BATTERY LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During key interrogation and when a valid RKE transmission is read.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the battery in the Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is low during key interrogation, with a valid key, this code will set. It may also set during a valid RKE button press. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. Operate the FOBIK in all positions several times. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A16-RKE FOB 7 BATTERY LOW as active? Yes 



Replace the FOBIK battery. Test the FOBIK using the Miller Special Tool "(special tool #9001, Rf Detector)" RF Detector". If the Strength Display does not display "Strong", replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Testy complete. The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A17-RKE FOB 8 BATTERY LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During key interrogation and when a valid RKE transmission is read.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the battery in the Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is low during key interrogation, with a valid key, this code will set. It may also set during a valid RKE button press. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOW BATTERY FOBIK TRANSMITTER DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. Operate the RKE transmitter in all positions several times. Turn the ignition on. Using the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A17-RKE FOB 8 BATTERY LOW as active? Yes 



Replace the FOBIK battery. Test the FOBIK using the Miller Special Tool "(special tool #9001, Rf Detector)" RF Detector". If the Strength Display does not display "Strong", replace and program the FOBIK using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Test complete. The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A24-KEY NOT PROGRAMMED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Whenever a Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is inserted in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) basestation, the WIN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

performs a self test and resynchronization routine. During the routine, the WIN interrogates the FOBIK, performing various validity and performance tests. The repair of this fault condition relies on the programmed status of the FOBIK. WHEN MONITORED:

During interrogation, the FOBIK sends a low frequency (LF) signal to the WIN that includes the FOBIK identification information. SET CONDITION:

This DTC sets if the WIN receives the default, secret key status from a FOBIK. Once set, this DTC will remain active until a valid, programmed FOBIK is inserted in the basestation and rotated through the ON position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FOBIK WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) PRE-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

1. Turn the ignition on. NOTE:

Before continuing, review and check for the following:  



Review the repair history of the vehicle. Make sure that the vehicle has the correct PCM and WIN installed by verifying the part numbers. With the scan tool, make sure that the PCM and WIN are programmed correctly. Compare the PCM VIN to the WIN VIN and ensure the two VINs match.

2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Perform two ignition cycles, leaving the ignition switch on for a minimum of one minute per cycle. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1A24-KEY NOT PROGRAMMED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 2.

No Perform the WIN INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. ENGINE WILL NOT CRANK 

NOTE:

When diagnosing any WIN system concern, all the FOBIKS should be present

1. If this vehicle does not crank, use the table below to determine if the key is functional or not. With the scan tool under Data Display, Bussed Outputs, put the key in each position and check the "Ignition Status". Then with the key in the Run position, check "Valid Skim Key" and "SCREEM Status" reported by the WIN (or WCM). Compare all six readings with the "Good Key" column. If the engine does crank, answer "Yes" to the question below. BUSSED OUTPUTS Ignition Good Bad Key Status Key (Failed) Ignition ---------------------Position = --- or -Lock Lock Ignition -----------Position = Off/Acc. -Acc. Ignition Position = Run Lock Run Or ON Ignition Position = Start or Start Lock Engine Off Run - Trans. in Gear

Wrong New Key Key (Blank) ---------- --------------- -- or Lock ---------Off/Acc. ----

Lock

Run

Lock

Run

SNA SKREEM Normal Service Invalid (Signal Status Status SKREEM Key Not Available) Valid Yes/True No/False No/False No/False Skim Key

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Trouble Code (DTC)

B1A35

B1A6C, B1A25

B1A24

Does the key (FOBIK) pass All Six Comparisons that are in the "Good Key" column? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced along with the WIN in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK OPERATION OF THE FOBIK IN USE 1. Using the scan tool, program the FOBIK to the WIN. 2. Use the scan tool and erase all codes in the WIN. 3. Turn the Ignition Off, and wait 15 seconds before turning the Ignition On. 4. Wait one minute, and read active codes. 

Does the scan tool display: B1A24-KEY NOT PROGRAMMED? Yes  

Replace the key (FOBIK) and program using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair is complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A25-INVALID KEY For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Whenever a Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is inserted in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) basestation, the WIN performs a self test and resynchronization routine. During the routine, the WIN interrogates the FOBIK, performing various validity and performance tests. The repair of this fault condition relies on whether the ID of the FOBIK is recognized as valid in the WIN. WHEN MONITORED:

During interrogation, the FOBIK sends a low frequency (LF) signal to the WIN that includes the inserted FOBIK ID. SET CONDITION:

This DTC sets if the WIN receives an ID from the FOBIK that does not match any of the eight possible FOBIK IDs currently programmed in the WIN. This DTC will remain active until a valid, programmed FOBIK is inserted in the basestation and rotated through the ON position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FOBIK WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) PRE-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

An external Radio-Frequency Identification (RFID) key (and/or pass/radio key), such as one used to gain access to a 24 hour gym, can cause this DTC to set and create a no start condition. Inspect the customer's key chain for any type of RFID key. If one is not found, question the customer to see if a spare key chain has this RFID key on it or if it was removed from the original key chain before the vehicle was released for service. If a RFID key is present, remove the ignition key from the vehicle and remove the RFID key from the key chain. For GPEC equipped vehicles, disconnect the battery and wait a minimum of five minutes, reconnect and attempt to start the vehicle. For NGC equipped vehicles, turn the ignition on a minimum for one hour, and then attempt to start the vehicle. If the vehicle does not start, continue with the diagnostic test.

NOTE:

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing this DTC to set.

1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Before continuing, review and check for the following:  



Review the repair history of the vehicle. Make sure that the vehicle has the correct PCM and WIN installed by verifying the part numbers. With the scan tool, make sure that the PCM and WIN are programmed correctly. Compare the PCM VIN to the WIN VIN and make sure the two VINs match.

2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Perform two ignition cycles, leaving the ignition switch on for a minimum of one minute per cycle. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1A25-INVALID KEY as active? Yes  

If the engine does not crank, Go To 2. If the engine does crank, Go To and answer "Yes" to the question in step 2. Refer to 2.

No Perform the WIN INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK 

NOTE:

When diagnosing any WIN system concern, all the FOBIKS should be present

1. If this vehicle does not crank, use the table below to determine if the key is functional or not. With the scan tool under Data Display, Bussed Outputs, put the key in each position and check the "Ignition Status". Then with the key in the Run position, check "Valid Skim Key" and "SCREEM Status" reported by the WIN (or WCM). Compare all six readings with the "Good Key" column. BUSSED OUTPUTS Ignition Good Bad Key Wrong New Key Status Key (Failed) Key (Blank) Ignition ---------------------- ---------- -----------Position = --- or ----- -- or Lock Lock Lock Ignition ------------ ---------Position = Off/Acc. Off/Acc. ----Acc. Ignition

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Position = Run Run Or ON Ignition Position = Start Start or Engine Off Run - Trans. in Gear

Lock

Lock

Run

Lock

Lock

Run

SKREEM Normal Service Invalid Status Status SKREEM Key

SNA (Signal Not Available)

Valid Yes/True No/False No/False No/False Skim Key Trouble Code (DTC)

B1A35

B1A6C, B1A25

B1A24

Does the key (FOBIK) pass All Six Comparisons that are in the "Good Key" column? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module, the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



If the customer affirms that the FOBIK being used in this test is the correct one for this vehicle, use the scan tool and perform the "Program Ignition Keys or Key FOBs" routine. If the key fails, replace the key (FOBIK) and program using the scan tool. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A26-MAXIMUM NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) is preprogrammed from the factory with 2 Fob-Integrated-Keys (FOBIKS), with the capability to have a maximum of 8 FOBIKS programmed in total. Additional programmed FOBIKS are automatically learned to the next available FOBIK position in the WIN software and do not overwrite any previous positions. The repair of this fault condition relies on the current number of FOBIKS programmed into the WIN and the number of available positions in the WIN software. WHEN MONITORED:

When the WIN is placed into FOBIK programming mode, the module references the number of unique FOBIK identifications stored in its memory. SET CONDITION:

In the event the WIN detects the user is attempting to program a 9th FOBIK, this DTC will be set as active. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBIKS (8) HAVE BEEN PROGRAMMED WIRELESS IGNITION NODE Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) PRE-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DETERMINE ACTIVE OR STORED DTC Is the DTC active or stored? WIN - ACTIVE DTC 

Go To 2.

WIN - STORED DTC Perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CLEAR FOBIKS PROGRAMMED INTO WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) AND REPROGRAM FOBIKS 

NOTE:

The below procedure clears all FOBIKS currently programmed in the WIN software. It is important to obtain all the customer FOBIKS so they may be reprogrammed to the module. Any FOBIKS not present for the following procedure will be inoperable and require additional programming to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

function. 1. Using the scan tool, use the Erase All Ignition Keys feature under Miscellaneous Functions. 2. Using the scan tool, use the Program Ignition Keys or Key Fobs feature under Miscellaneous Functions. 3. Program all the customer key(s) into the WIN (up to eight). 4. Use the scan tool and erase all DTCs in the WIN. 5. Turn the Ignition Off, and wait 15 seconds before turning the Ignition On. 6. Wait one minute, and read active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A26-MAXIMUM NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module, the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair is complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A27-SKREEM PROGRAMMING PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) is one of the many functions that is a subset of the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). SKREEM programming takes place during the Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) programming procedure. The repair of this fault condition is dependent on the programmed status of the FOBIK attempting to be programmed. Once the WIN requests the FOBIK to send its identification information, the FOBIK will attempt to send the information up to three times for redundancy to ensure "Good" information has been received. WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

During FOBIK programming mode when the FOBIK and the WIN module are communicating over LF (low frequency) communication. SET CONDITION:

The WIN will set this DTC if one or more of the three FOBIK transmissions, during FOBIK programming, failed to be properly received by the WIN. The FOBIK may still get programmed because the transmission was successful on one of the other attempts. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FOBIK WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) PRE-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. NOTE:

All FOBIKs programmed to this vehicle should be present before continuing.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DELETE FOBIKS AND REPROGRAM 1. With the scan tool, use the "Erase All Ignition Keys" feature under Miscellaneous Functions to delete all stored FOBIKs. 2. With the scan tool, use the "Program Ignition Keys or Key FOBs" feature under Miscellaneous Functions to reprogram all applicable FOBIKs. 3. With the scan tool, erase the WIN DTCs. 4. Turn the ignition off, wait 15 seconds, turn the ignition on. 5. Wait one minute, and read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1A27-SKREEM PROGRAMMING PERFORMANCE? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module, the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Repair is complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A28-ECM MISMATCH WITH SKIM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

For the engine to start, the Sentry Key Immobilizer (SKIM) feature of the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must successfully communicate data over the data bus. Once the WIN sends the message that a valid Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is being used, the PCM and WIN perform a "handshake" routine, encrypted with the VIN, to validate this information, and a match allows the engine to run when the ignition state transitions to START. The repair of this fault is determined by the ability of the WIN and PCM/ECM to complete a successful handshake routine over the bus. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever a valid FOBIK is inserted in the basestation and turned to the ON position, the WIN/PCM handshake takes place. The WIN validates that the message is sent to, and received by the PCM. SET CONDITION:

When a valid FOBIK is used and the WIN receives a mismatching cryptology code from the PCM as part of the routine, the WIN will send the command to flash the Security warning lamp and set this DTC as active. The engine will not start and the DTC will remain active until the WIN and PCM complete a successful handshake. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) PRE-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DETERMINE ACTIVE OR STORED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) Is the DTC active or stored? WIN - ACTIVE DTC 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WIN - STORED DTC Perform the WIN INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. VERIFY THE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) STORED IN THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM). 1. Using the scan tool, access the VIN number stored in the PCM. 

NOTE:

Make sure that a VIN has been programmed into the PCM. If a VIN is not displayed, attempt to program the PCM with the correct VIN before continuing.

2. Compare the VIN displayed, with the VIN of the vehicle. Does the VIN recorded in the PCM match the VIN of the vehicle? Yes 









Using the scan tool, verify the VIN in the WIN matches the VIN of the vehicle. If it DOES, Go To 3 If it does NOT match, replace the Wireless Ignition Node in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to 3. Prior to replacing the WIN, the RUN circuits must be checked at the PCM. A missing run circuit at the PCM can cause this DTC to set. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed before the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Using the scan tool, perform the PCM Replaced Procedure to update the VIN in the PCM. Then, Go To 3. 3. PCM STARTING DTCS 1. Use the scan tool and erase all DTCs in the WIN and PCM. 2. Turn the Ignition Off, and wait 15 seconds before turning the Ignition On. 3. Try to start the engine. If the engine starts, leave it run for one minute and then turn the engine off (ignition on) 4. Wait one minute, and read the active PCM DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display any Starting related DTCs?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 4. 4. VERIFY PCM PROGRAMMING 1. Use the scan tool and erase all DTCs in the WIN and PCM. 2. Turn the Ignition Off, and wait 15 seconds before turning the Ignition On. 3. Wait one minute, and read the active WIN DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B1A28-ECM MISMATCH WITH SKIM as active? Yes 



Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWERTRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST - NGC or PCM VERIFICATION TEST - 3.0L DIESEL .

No  

Repair is complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A29-SKIM BASESTATION MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

For the engine to start, the Sentry Key Immobilizer (SKIM) feature of the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must successfully communicate VIN data over the serial data bus. Once the WIN sends the message that a valid Fob-in-Key (FOBIK) is being used, the PCM and WIN perform a "handshake" routine to validate this VIN information, including a positive response from the PCM which allows the engine to run when the ignition state transitions to START. The repair of this fault is determined by the WIN recognition of a valid FOBIK and the ability of the WIN and PCM to complete a successful VIN handshake routine over the bus. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever a FOBIK is inserted in the basestation, the WIN determines its validity status. If determined valid, the WIN allows rotation to the ON position and the WIN/PCM handshake takes place.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

When an invalid FOBIK is used and the WIN receives a mismatching or no secret key data from the FOBIK, the WIN will send the command to illuminate the Security warning lamp, send an invalid key status in the handshake with the PCM, and set this DTC as active. The "B1A28 ECM/PCM Mismatch with SKIM" DTC will probably be accompanied along with this B1A29. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) FOBIK Always perform the WIN Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. NOTE:

When diagnosing any WIN system DTCs, all FOBIK used on the vehicle should be present.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the WIN DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 4. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. NOTE:

This DTC identifies two fault conditions together, an unknown or non communicating FOBIK and a negative response from the PCM to start the engine. First, root cause why the FOBIK is unknown or not responsive. Once the FOBIK issue is corrected, the B1A29 DTC should go to a stored status. Once the B1A29 becomes stored, the B1A28 DTC can be corrected.

Does the scan tool display: B1A29-SKIM BASESTATION MISMATCH as Active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Verify the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK that caused this DTC to set. If it was, perform the WIN INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. VERIFY FOBIK COMMUNICATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

When diagnosing any WIN concern, all FOBIKs should be present

1. With the scan tool, read the WIN active DTCs again. Does the scan tool display; B1A35-UNIDENTIFIED KEY COMMUNICATION ERROR as Active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 4. 3. TEST LF COMMUNICATION 1. With the scan tool, in the WIN menu, go to Data Display, Bussed Outputs and check the "SKREEM Status" for the current FOBIK that is being used. Record that status. 2. Remove the FOBIK. 3. Insert one of the other known good FOBIKs used with this vehicle. 

NOTE:

If another FOBIK is not available, insert a new unprogrammed FOBIK to test the WIN module's LF communication (do not program the FOBIK).

4. Check the "SKREEM Status" for the current FOBIK. Verify that the status changed from the first FOBIK that was in the ignition. Did the "SKREEM Status" change? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 





Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. VERIFY THE STATE OF THE WIN MODULE 1. Currently the secret key in the FOBIK does not match the secret key in the WIN module. Find out which component has the correct secret key for this vehicle. 

Has the WIN module just been replaced? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace and program the FOBIK in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. VERIFY THE WIN MODULE HAS BEEN INITIALIZED 1. Using the scan tool, go to Miscellaneous Functions and run the "Reset WIN" routine. 2. Enter the unique 4 digit PIN number assigned to this vehicle. 

Was the 4 digit PIN accepted? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No NOTE:

If the PCM was replaced at the same time the WIN was, install the old PCM before continuing or else the correct secret key value will not get transferred and replacing all FOBIKs will be necessary.

  



Using the scan tool, go to Miscellaneous Functions and run the "WIN Replaced" routine. Using the scan tool, go to Miscellaneous Functions and run the "Program Ignition Keys or Key Fobs" routine. Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1A35-UNIDENTIFIED KEY COMMUNICATION ERROR For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Whenever a Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is inserted in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) basestation, the WIN performs a self test and resynchronization routine. During the routine, the WIN interrogates the FOBIK, performing various validity and performance tests. The repair of this fault condition relies on whether the FOBIK ID is received by the WIN. WHEN MONITORED:

During interrogation, the FOBIK sends an LF (Low frequency) signal to the WIN that includes the programmed FOBIK ID. SET CONDITION:

This Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) sets if a FOBIK is inserted in the WIN basestation but the WIN does not receive or is unable to read an ID from the FOBIK. This DTC will remain active until a valid programmed FOBIK is inserted in the WIN and its ID is received. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FOBIK WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

An external Radio-Frequency Identification (RFID) key (and/or pass/radio key), such as one used to gain access to a 24 hour gym, can cause this DTC to set and create a no start condition. Inspect the customer's key chain for any type of RFID key. If one is not found, question the customer to see if a spare key chain has this RFID key on it or if it was removed from the original key chain before the vehicle was released for service. If a RFID key is present, remove the ignition key from the vehicle and remove the RFID key from the key chain. For GPEC equipped vehicles, disconnect the battery and wait a minimum of five minutes, reconnect and attempt to start the vehicle. For NGC equipped vehicles, turn the ignition on a minimum for one hour, and then attempt to start the vehicle. If the vehicle does not start, continue with the diagnostic test.

NOTE:

Verify the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing this DTC to set.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the WIN DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then crank the engine. 4. Turn the engine off, key on. 5. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A35-UNIDENTIFIED KEY COMMUNICATION ERROR as Active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Perform the WIN INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. TEST LF COMMUNICATION 1. With the scan tool, in the WIN menu, go to Data Display, Bussed Outputs and check the "SKREEM Status" for the current FOBIK that is being used. Record that status. 2. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 3. Insert one of the other known good FOBIKs used with this vehicle. 

NOTE:

If another FOBIK is not available, insert a new FOBIK (Do not program) to test the WIN module's LF communication

4. Check the "SKREEM Status" for the current FOBIK. Verify that the status changed from the first FOBIK that was in the ignition. Did the "SKREEM Status" change? Yes  

Replace and program the FOBIK in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . NOTE:

If this vehicle is equipped with the Passive Entry System (PEM),

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

with the scan tool, perform the "PEM Replace" routine in the PEM after the FOBIKS have been programmed.  



Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1A68-STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE BOLT CONTROL LOW (WIN)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Steering Column Lock Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Anytime the Key is placed in the ignition. SET CONDITION:

This code is set immediately when the Wireless Ignition Node detects the (F892) Ignition Switch Output circuit shorted to ground when the ignition key is removed. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE (ELV) WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT DTC B1A68-STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE BOLT CONTROL LOW (WIN) 1. With the scan tool, record and erase WIN DTCs. 2. Insert and remove the key from the ignition switch several times. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A68-STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE BOLT CONTROL LOW as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Steering Column Lock Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Steering Column Lock Module connector. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean and repair as necessary.

3. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from On to Off three times. Remove and insert the key in the ignition switch several times. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A68-STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE BOLT CONTROL LOW (WIN) as active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Steering Column Lock Module in accordance with the service information. The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) must also be replaced along with the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the WIN MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. .  Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL .  Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. CHECK THE (F892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Wireless Ignition Node harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (F892) Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) circuit in the WIN harness connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (F892) Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. The Steering Column Lock Module must also be replaced along with the WIN Module in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module, the WIN MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1A6B STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE NOT INITIALIZED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Steering Column Lock Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

The Wireless Ignition Node detects that the Steering Column Lock Module has not initialized. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE NOT INITIALIZED STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE (ELV) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase WIN DTCs. 2. Remove and insert the key from the ignition switch several times then leave the key in the run position. 3. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A6B STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE NOT INITIALIZED? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. INITIALIZE STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE 1. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs in the WIN. 2. With the scan tool, perform the Steering Wheel Lock Module (ELV) Replaced routine. 3. Turn the Ignition off, wait 15 seconds then turn the ignition back on. 4. Remove and insert the key from the ignition switch several times then leave the key in the run position. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B1A6B STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE NOT INITIALIZED? Yes 

Replace the Steering Column Lock Module in accordance with the service information.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee







The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) must also be replaced along with the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the WIN MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Test complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A6C-SECRET KEY MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Whenever a Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is inserted in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) basestation, the WIN performs a self test and resynchronization routine. During the routine, the WIN interrogates the FOBIK for the secret key information and start the vehicle. The repair of this fault condition relies on whether the current secret key in the FOBIK is recognized by the WIN. WHEN MONITORED:

During interrogation, the FOBIK sends a low frequency (LF) signal to the WIN that includes the current secret key. SET CONDITION:

This Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) sets if the WIN receives a secret key ID from the FOBIK that is not the correct secret key value stored in the WIN. This DTC will remain active until a valid, programmed FOBIK, with the correct secret key is inserted in the basestation and rotated through the ON position. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes FOBIK WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

When diagnosing any WIN system concern, all the FOBIKS should be present.

NOTE:

Verify that the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

1. Turn the ignition on. NOTE:

Before continuing, review and check for the following:  



Review the repair history of the vehicle. Make sure that the vehicle has the correct PCM and WIN installed by verifying the part numbers. With the scan tool, ensure that the PCM and WIN are programmed correctly. Compare the PCM VIN to the WIN VIN and ensure the two VINs match.

2. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 3. Perform five ignition cycles, leaving the ignition switch on for a minimum of one minute per cycle. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display; B1A6C-SECRET KEY MISMATCH as active? Yes  

If the engine does not crank, Go To 2. If the engine does crank, Go To 3.

No Perform the WIN INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. ENGINE DOES NOT CRANK 1. If this vehicle does not crank, use the table below to determine if the key is functional or not. With the scan tool under Data Display, Bussed Outputs, put the key in each position and check the "Ignition Status". Then with the key in the Run position, check "Valid Skim Key" and "SKREEM Status" reported by the WIN (or WCM). Compare all six readings with the "Good Key" column. 

BUSSED OUTPUTS Ignition Good Status Key

Bad Key Wrong New Key (Failed) Key (Blank)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ignition -------------------------------- ---------Position = --- or --- or ----Lock Lock Lock Ignition ------------ ---------Position = Off/Acc. Off/Acc. ----Acc. Ignition Position = Run Lock Lock Run Run Or ON Ignition Position = Start or Start Lock Lock Run Engine Off Run - Trans. in Gear "SNA" SKREEM Normal Service Invalid Signal Not Status Status SKREEM Key Available Valid Yes/True No/False No/False No/False Skim Key Trouble Code (DTC)

B1A35

B1A6C, B1A24 B1A25

Does the key (FOBIK) pass All Six Comparisons that are in the "Good Key" column? Yes



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced along with the WIN in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Go To 3.







No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. VERIFY THE WIN HAS BEEN PROPERLY INITIALIZED 1. Using the scan tool, read the Number of Key/Fobs Programmed under Data Display. Does the scan tool show any Key/Fobs Programmed? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Using the scan tool, program the FOBIKS.  Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. CHECK OPERATION OF THE FOBIK IN USE 

NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Verify the FOBIK in use is the FOBIK causing the DTC to set.

Replace the FOBIK currently in use, unless the FOBIK was identified as a new key in Step 2. Using the scan tool, program the new FOBIK to the WIN. Use the scan tool and erase all codes in the WIN. Turn the Ignition Off, and wait 15 seconds before turning the Ignition On. Wait one minute, and read active codes. Does the scan tool display this DTC as active? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced along with the WIN in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair is complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B1A77- REMOTE START ANTENNA CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Remote start present and configured. SET CONDITION:

Short to ground detected on the Remote Start Antenna. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes REMOTE START ANTENNA WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the WIN DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 4. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A77- REMOTE START ANTENNA CIRCUIT LOW as Active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Perform the WIN INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECK WIN 1. Unplug the Remote Start Antenna from the WIN module. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the WIN DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on, wait five seconds. 4. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. 

NOTE:

The "B1A79-Remote Start Antenna Circuit Open or Not Connected" will probably display as active.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display; B1A77- REMOTE START ANTENNA CIRCUIT LOW as Active? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the Remote Start Antenna in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ANTENNA, REMOTE START , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B1A79- REMOTE START ANTENNA CIRCUIT OPEN OR NOT CONNECTED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. Remote start present and configured. SET CONDITION:

No Remote Start Antenna detected by the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes REMOTE START ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED REMOTE START ANTENNA WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. REMOTE START ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED 1. Verify that the Remote Start Antenna is connected to the WIN. 2. Disconnect the Remote Start Antenna and reconnect it to ensure that it is seated correctly.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. 4. 5. 6.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, record and erase the WIN DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on, wait five seconds. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B1A79- REMOTE START ANTENNA CIRCUIT OPEN OR NOT CONNECTED as Active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK REMOTE START ANTENNA 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Secure a new Remote Start Antenna and connect the connector to the WIN. 3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, record and erase the WIN DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off, wait five seconds and then back to on. 6. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B1A79- REMOTE START ANTENNA CIRCUIT OPEN OR NOT CONNECTED as Active? Yes



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



Finish the installation of the Remote Start Antenna in accordance with the Service







No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210A-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times. SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the battery voltage was below 10.0 volts for over 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read Powertrain DTCs Are there any Powertrain Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC .



This code is for information only. At some time there was a low battery system voltage. Check the battery and charging system in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B210B-SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

At all times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

This is a CAN message that the system voltage was above 16.0 volts for over 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

POSSIBLE CAUSES HIGH BATTERY SYSTEM VOLTAGE CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK ENGINE DTCs 1. With the scan tool, read Powertrain DTCs. Are there any Powertrain Charging or Battery DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .



This code is a CAN system message for information only. Check the charging system in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition switch on. SET CONDITION:

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage was below 10.5 volts for over 15 seconds except during cranking or when the FOBIK removal inhibit feature is engaged. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RESISTANCE IN THE BATTERY POSITIVE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE IN THE GENERATOR CASE GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

GENERATOR OPERATION (K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTED (A106) FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT RESISTED POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCs NOTE:

Be sure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. With a scan tool, read the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) DTCs. Are there any Charging or Starting System DTCs set in the PCM? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. VERIFY THAT DTC B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, record and erase the DTCs. 2. Cycle the ignition switch to the OFF position then start the engine and let run for one minute. 3. With the scan tool, read the WIN active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (A106) FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT OR (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT HAS HIGH RESISTANCE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking The Ground Circuit At The WIN Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Check the related fuses to the Fused (B+) circuit. If the fuse is found to be open, repair the circuit for a shorted condition.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the WIN harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Using a 12-volt test light, connect it between the (A106) Fused (B+) circuit and the (Z912) Ground circuit in the WIN harness connector. 5. The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the test light as bright at the module as it is at the battery? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it MUST also be replaced along with the WIN in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Test the (A106) Fused B(+) circuit and the Ground circuit to determine which one has the high resistance. Repair the Fused B(+) circuit or the Ground circuit for high resistance. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition switch on. SET CONDITION:

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage to be above 15.5 volts for over 15 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTED GENERATOR POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM RELATED DTCs IN THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

MODULE (PCM) NOTE:

Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using the Midtronics Battery Tester, test the Battery before continuing.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool in ECU View, select PCM and check for any Battery or Charging System related DTCs. Does the scan tool display any Battery or Charging System related DTCs? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. INTERMITTENT CONDITION 

NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Be sure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

With the scan tool, record and erase the WIN DTCs. Perform five ignition cycles, leaving the ignition switch on for a minimum of one minute per cycle. Start the engine and run for two minutes. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT AT THE WIN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking The Ground Circuit At The WIN Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

A dirty (partial) ground can cause abnormal conditions within a system.

1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the WIN connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light, connect it between the (A106) Fused (B+) circuit and the (Z912) Ground circuit in the WIN harness connector. 4. The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery. Is the test light as bright at the module connector as it is at the battery? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee









Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair the (Z912) Ground circuit for high resistance. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2204-ECU CONFIGURATION MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) must be configured for various parameters such as model year and vehicle line, after a service replacement. The WIN checks for the proper configuration by comparing the values stored to those sent out on the serial data bus. The repair of this fault does not involve any external circuitry and centers on verifying the module is configured correctly. WHEN MONITORED:

The WIN checks the feature configuration at power up during the initialization process, and continuously through the ignition cycle. SET CONDITION:

This DTC sets when the WIN detects a mismatch of Model Year, vehicle line, body style or market country between the current vehicle configuration of the module and the information sent out on the CAN bus. Once set, this DTC is latched for the entire ignition cycle. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRELESS IGNITION NODE Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DETERMINE ACTIVE OR STORED DTC Is the DTC active or stored? WIN - ACTIVE DTC 

Go To 2.

WIN - STORED DTC Perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. RESET/RECONFIGURE THE TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, select ECU View. This will list the modules on the vehicle. Read and record the listed modules. 

NOTE:

A Scan Report will list all the modules on the vehicle.

3. Using the scan tool, select the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) and then press Miscellaneous Functions. 4. Press Reset ECU. 5. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times and read the active WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B2204-ECU CONFIGURATION MISMATCH active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair is complete.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. RESET/RECONFIGURE THE WIN 1. Using the scan tool, select the WIN and then press Miscellaneous Functions. 2. Press Reset ECU. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times and read the active WIN DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: B2204-ECU CONFIGURATION MISMATCH active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee









Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module, the Win MUST be programmed before the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair is complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When a valid Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK) is used and the ignition is rotated to the RUN position, the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) "listens" to the CAN C bus for the broadcast of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). WHEN MONITORED:

The WIN monitors the VIN broadcast on the CAN C bus three times, when the ignition is turned to the RUN position. When the full VIN has been received by the WIN, all further broadcasts of the VIN are ignored for that ignition cycle. SET CONDITION:

When the VIN received from the CAN C bus does not match the VIN stored in the memory of the Wireless Ignition Node, the WIN will send the command to flash the Security warning lamp and set this DTC as active and the vehicle will immobilize. The DTC will remain active until a VIN matching the one stored in WIN memory is received by the module from the bus. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DETERMINE ACTIVE OR STORED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) Is the DTC active or stored? WIN - ACTIVE DTC 

Go To 2.

WIN - STORED DTC Perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. CHECK THE VIN STORED IN THE PCM 1. Using the scan tool, compare the VIN that is stored in the PCM to the VIN of the vehicle's VIN plate. 

Does the VIN stored in the PCM match the vehicle's VIN? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module, the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 



Replace the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWERTRAIN CONTROL , REMOVAL . Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST - NGC or PCM VERIFICATION TEST - 3.0L DIESEL .

B2211-RAIN SENSOR MODULE INITIALIZATION PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Rain Sensor Module Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

This DTC is set when the internal initialization state machine is set to FAIL or the (D508) LIN Bus circuit is shorted. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D508) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D508) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE WINDSHIELD WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) RAIN SENSING MODULE (RSM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR DELAMINATION ON THE WINDSHIELD 1. Check the contact surface of the Rain Sensing Module to the windshield for delamination (this will resemble air bubbles in the contact area). Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Is delamination present on the windshield? Yes  

Replace the windshield in accordance with the Service Information Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 2. 2. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. 4. Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. 

NOTE:

If the D508 LIN Bus circuit is shorted to Ground or Battery voltage, this code may appear as Stored and when erased may return as Stored.

Does the scan tool display: B2211-RAIN SENSOR MODULE INITIALIZATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

PERFORMANCE either Active or Stored? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. (D508) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

Fig. 8: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & LIN Bus Circuit In Rain Sensor Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the Rain Sensor harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D508) LIN Bus circuit in the rain sensor connector. Is the resistance below 20, 000 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 4. 4. (D508) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY 

Fig. 9: Checking LIN Bus Circuit For A Short To Battery Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Measure the voltage between the (D508) LIN Bus circuit and ground. NOTE:

The voltage should fluctuate between approximately 7.0 and 9.8 volts.

Is the voltage above 10.0 volts? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Replace the Rain Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.  Replace and program the Rain Sensor. Refer to MODULE, LIGHT RAIN SENSOR (LRSM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (D508) LIN BUS WIRE SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Measuring Resistance Between Ground & LIN Bus Circuit In Rain Sensor Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D508) LIN Bus circuit in the rain sensor connector. Is the resistance below 20, 000 Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (D508) LIN Bus circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Rain Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.  Replace and program the Rain Sensor. Refer to MODULE, LIGHT RAIN SENSOR (LRSM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. (D508) LIN BUS WIRE SHORTED TO BATTERY 

Fig. 11: Checking LIN Bus Circuit For A Short To Battery Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between the (D508) LIN Bus circuit and ground. Is there any voltage present? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the LIN Bus wire for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module, the Win MUST be programmed before the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B221D-RAIN SENSOR MODULE INTERNAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Rain Sensor Module Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Rain Sensing Module detects an internal failure. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RAIN SENSING MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. REPLACE THE RAIN SENSING MODULE 1. With the scan tool, read the WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B221D-RAIN SENSOR MODULE (RSM) INTERNAL active? Yes 



Replace the Rain Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. With the scan tool select: Misc. Functions, LRSM Re-Adaption and run that program. Refer to MODULE, LIGHT RAIN SENSOR (LRSM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 

Perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B2224-SKREEM INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

During key insertion and removal and at module power up. SET CONDITION:

When the internal memory is corrupted. This DTC can also set if the vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock module (BUX). If after any three consecutive unsuccessful Steering Column Lock and/or Unlock (ELV) attempts, which could be caused by an encoded data mismatch or the bolt did not reach the intended position when requested. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THAT THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. NOTE:

Before continuing, review and check for the following:  



Review the repair history of the vehicle. Make sure that the vehicle has the correct PCM and WIN installed by verifying the part numbers. With the scan tool, ensure that the PCM and WIN are programmed correctly. Compare the PCM VIN to the WIN VIN and ensure the two VINs match.

2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Perform three ignition cycles, leaving the ignition switch on for a minimum of one minute per cycle. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: B2224-SKREEM INTERNAL as active? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced along with the WIN in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the WIN MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

B2254-COLUMN LOCK MODULE INTERNAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 13: Steering Column Lock Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

If the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) does not receive the correct response message back from the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN (F892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT OPEN (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (D508) COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN CIRCUIT OPEN STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE (ELV) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT DTC 1. Using the scan tool, record and erase the WIN DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off and remove the FOBIK. 3. Arm the Vehicle Theft and Security System (VTSS) and wait one minute. 4. Disarm the VTSS by inserting the FOBIK. 5. Turn the ignition on. 6. Wait one minute. 7. Using the scan tool, read the WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display active; B2254-COLUMN LOCK MODULE INTERNAL? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Perform the WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) INTERMITTENT TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 14: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Gain access to the Steering Column Lock Module. Disconnect the Steering Column Lock Module connector. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A106) Fused B(+) circuit in the Steering Column Lock Module connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (A106) Fused B(+) circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (F892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Checking Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the WIN harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (F982) Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) circuit between in the WIN module and the Steering Column Lock Module. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (F892) Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light, connect one end to the (A106) Fused B(+) circuit and the other end to the (Z912) Ground circuit in the Steering Column Lock Module connector. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 5.



Repair the (Z912) Ground circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. (D508) COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Measure the resistance of the (D508) COM-LIN Tire Pressure Monitor LAN circuit between (Cavity 2) in the WIN module and (Cavity 4) in the Steering Column Lock Module.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Checking COM-LIN Tire Pressure Monitor LAN Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC Is the resistance below 1.0 Ohms? Yes 







Replace the Steering Column Lock Module in accordance with the service information. The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) must also be replaced along with the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the WIN MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair the (D508) COM-LIN Tire Pressure Monitor LAN circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

C0077-LOW TIRE PRESSURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

A low pressure condition will exist when the tire pressure falls below or is equal to the low pressure threshold value as specified for the vehicle. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INCORRECT TIRE PRESSURE INCORRECT PLACARD VALUES TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. DTC STATUS NOTE:

If the incorrect Placard Values were programmed into the WIN, a DTC could be set. Before continuing with any TPM diagnostic test, using the scan tool, check that the correct Placard Values have been programmed in to the module.

NOTE:

If any the following conditions are present repair them first before continuing with this test.   

NOTE:

Individual Low Tire Pressure Sensor DTCs Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor Internal fault Spare Tire is not equipped with a TPM Sensor and is currently on the vehicle

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and may have caused the tire pressure to fall below the low pressure warning threshold. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure (placard). This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more then three hours, and in outside ambient temperatures.

1. Correct all tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation tire pressure specifications and wait two minutes for the system to update. 2. Ignition on engine not running. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 4. Test drive the vehicle at speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for minimum of 10 minutes. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 8. 2. LOW TIRE PRESSURE 

NOTE:

This DTC can be caused by many different factors and might not be a TPM Sensor or a WIN fault. Interference from other elements can over power the sensor/transmitter RF frequency to the WIN making erratic operation to the TPM system. Check the vehicle for aftermarket accessories that could compromise the RF frequency signal before diagnosing the TPM system.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Correct all tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation tire pressure specifications and wait two minutes for the system to update. 2. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 8. 3. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR 

NOTE:

The following tests are used to locate the Tire Pressure Sensor/Transmitter that is setting the low pressure fault. If the tires have been rotated, the Tire Pressure Sensor/Transmitter is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the sensor/transmitter IDs. You MUST locate the correct Tire Pressure Sensor/Transmitter that set the fault before.

NOTE:

Before continuing with any TPM diagnostic test, using the scan tool and read first set of the Tire Placard Pressure Front and Tire Placard Pressure Rear under Data Display in the WIN. (under the Left Rear Transponder Status) Confirm that the values match the Tire Inflation Pressure (Placard) label located on the Drivers Side B-Pillar. If the incorrect Placard Values have been programmed in the WIN, go to Update Pressure Thresholds under Miscellaneous Functions for the WIN and follow the procedure. If the vehicle is equipped with a WIN Module, go into the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), select Data Display and read "Tire Placard Pressure - Front" and "Tire Placard Pressure - Rear" to confirm the values were programmed correctly. If the Placard values are incorrect in the TIPM, select the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) then under "Miscellaneous" select "Update Pressure Threshold" and enter the placard pressure value as seen on the Tire Inflation Pressure (Placard) label. Repeat step #2 for Diagnostics.

1. With the scan tool, select View Data Display in the WIN and find the compensated tire pressure values located under each of the Sensor Identification locations. Are any of the compensated tire pressure values are below the Placard Value? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 4. 4. TPM/RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is their a TPM/RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 7. 5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR NON-RESPONSIVE 1. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE), check to see if the any of the TPM Sensors do not respond after repeated attempts or display the following:  "Damaged Accel"  "Damaged Temp"  "Damaged Temp"  "Damaged Press" 

Are any of the TPM Sensors not responding or displaying the information listed above? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. TPM SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM/RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the sensor internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the Tire Pressure Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

sensor/transmitter IDs. You MUST locate the correct Tire Pressure Sensor that set the fault before continuing. Use the following method below at every tire location. NOTE:

If the sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM sensors and repeat this step.

1. With the scan tool, select Data Display for the WIN. 2. Check to see if the Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the WIN. Has the Tire Pressure Sensor been located? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 7. TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values 2. Look for a tire location whose sensor ID that is not responding. 3. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the sensor in question has been identified Has the Tire Pressure Sensor been located? Yes 



No

Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, erase DTCs. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

C1501-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 1 INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The tire pressure sensor actively monitors the air pressure and air temperature inside the tire, the sensor internal battery status, and the radial acceleration of the wheel. Each sensor has a unique ID code. WHEN MONITORED:

With vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). SET CONDITION:

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) will monitor the signals from the four active road tire sensors. A loss of signal error is detected when eight consecutive blocks of data are not received or cannot be accurately decoded. An internal sensor hardware error condition will be set when an error in the accelerometer, pressure sensor, or temperature sensor is detected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes INCORRECT SENSORS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and may have caused the tire pressure to fall below the low pressure warning threshold. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure (placard). This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more then three hours, and in outside ambient temperatures.

1. Correct all tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation tire pressure specifications and wait two minutes for the system to update. 2. Ignition on engine not running. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 4. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for a minimum of 10 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 5. With the scan tool, read the DTCs. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 9. 2. TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 8. 3. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

This fault can be set if the incorrect or no TPM Sensor is installed on the vehicle. If the spare tire is currently installed on the vehicle, and it is not equipped with a TPM Sensor, this DTC can be set. Replace the spare with a TPM Sensor equipped wheel and tire assembly. Test drive the vehicle. If the DTC resets, continue with the diagnostic procedure.

1. Perform a visual inspection to verify that all road wheels are equipped with a TPM Sensor. 2. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) verify the correct TPM Sensor is on the vehicle. Is the correct TPM Sensor installed on the vehicle? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM-RKE ANALYZER 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing. Use the following method below at every tire location.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for a response, and store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE). If you receive no response from any of the TPM Sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly and repeat the process on each non-responsive wheel. Has the faulty TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to verify the TPM Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the WIN. The TPM Sensor Identifications are located under "Data Display" for the WIN. Do the TPM Sensor IDs match what is stored in the WIN? Yes  

Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT 1. Using the data taken by the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE), program the current sensor ID's into the WIN module in the corresponding locations. 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with the vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) to verify that the DTC does not return in an active state. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: C1501-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 1 INTERNAL Yes 



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 1. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer, read the sensor ID's. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Do the sensor ID's match the ID's just learned in the previous step? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive the TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 2. Look for a tire location with a non-responsive TPM Sensor ID. 3. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the TPM Sensor in question has been identified. Has the faulty TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 9. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Module. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Return to the beginning of this test and perform the diagnostic procedure as necessary.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

C1502-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 2 INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The tire pressure sensor actively monitors the air pressure and air temperature inside the tire, the sensor internal battery status, and the radial acceleration of the wheel. Each sensor has a unique ID code. The sensor transmits the data at regular intervals via an encoded signal to a receiver circuit located in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). WHEN MONITORED:

With vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). SET CONDITION:

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) will monitor the signals from the four active road tire sensors. A loss of signal error is detected when eight consecutive blocks of data are not received or cannot be accurately decoded. An internal sensor hardware error condition will be set when an error in the accelerometer, pressure sensor, or temperature sensor is detected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INCORRECT SENSORS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and may have caused the tire pressure to fall below the low pressure warning threshold.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure (placard). This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more then three hours, and in outside ambient temperatures. 1. Correct all tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation tire pressure specifications and wait two minutes for the system to update. 2. Ignition on engine not running. 3. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 4. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for a minimum of 10 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 5. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 9. 2. TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 8. 3. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC 

NOTE:

This fault can be set if the incorrect or no TPM Sensor is installed on the vehicle. If the spare tire is currently installed on the vehicle, and it is not equipped with a TPM Sensor, this DTC can be set. Replace the spare with a TPM Sensor equipped wheel and tire assembly. Test drive the vehicle. If the DTC resets, continue with the diagnostic procedure.

1. Perform a visual inspection to verify that all road wheels are equipped with a TPM Sensor. 2. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) verify the correct TPM Sensor is on the vehicle. Is the correct TPM Sensor installed on the vehicle?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM-RKE ANALYZER 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing. Use the following method below at every tire location.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for a response, and store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE). If you receive no response from any of the TPM Sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly and repeat the process on each non-responsive wheel. Has the faulty TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to verify the TPM Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the WIN. The TPM Sensor Identifications are located under "Data Display" for the WIN.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Do the TPM Sensor IDs match what is stored in the WIN? Yes 



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT 1. Using the data taken by the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE), program the current sensor ID's into the WIN module in the corresponding locations. 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with the vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) to verify that the DTC does not return in an active state. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: C1502-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 2 INTERNAL Yes 



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 1. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer, read the sensor ID's. 

Do the sensor ID's match the ID's just learned in the previous step? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No 

Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive the TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 2. Look for a tire location with a non-responsive TPM Sensor ID. 3. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the TPM Sensor in question has been identified. Has the faulty TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the WIN module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 9. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. With the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Return to the beginning of this test and perform the diagnostic procedure as necessary.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. C1503-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 3 INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The tire pressure sensor actively monitors the air pressure and air temperature inside the tire, the sensor internal battery status, and the radial acceleration of the wheel. Each sensor has a unique ID code. The sensor transmits the data at regular intervals via an encoded signal to a receiver circuit located in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). WHEN MONITORED:

With vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). SET CONDITION:

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) will monitor the signals from the four active road tire sensors. A loss of signal error is detected when eight consecutive blocks of data are not received or cannot be accurately decoded. An internal sensor hardware error condition will be set when an error in the accelerometer, pressure sensor, or temperature sensor is detected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INCORRECT SENSORS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and may have caused the tire pressure to fall below the low pressure warning threshold. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure (placard). This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more then three hours, and in outside ambient temperatures.

1. Correct all tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation tire pressure specifications and wait two minutes for the system to update. 2. Ignition on engine not running. 3. Using the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 4. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for a minimum of 10 minutes in

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 5. Using the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 9. 2. TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 8. 3. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC 

NOTE:

This fault can be set if the incorrect or no TPM Sensor is installed on the vehicle. If the spare tire is currently installed on the vehicle, and it is not equipped with a TPM Sensor, this DTC can be set. Replace the spare with a TPM Sensor equipped wheel and tire assembly. Test drive the vehicle. If the DTC resets, continue with the diagnostic procedure.

1. Perform a visual inspection to verify that all road wheels are equipped with a TPM Sensor. 2. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) verify the correct TPM Sensor is on the vehicle. Is the correct TPM Sensor installed on the vehicle? Yes 

Go To 4.



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM-RKE ANALYZER 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing. Use the following method below at every tire location.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for a response, and store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE). If you receive no response from any of the TPM Sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly and repeat the process on each non-responsive wheel. Has the faulty TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to verify the TPM Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the WIN. The TPM Sensor Identifications are located under "Data Display" for the WIN. Do the TPM Sensor IDs match what is stored in the WIN? Yes 



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 6. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT 1. Using the data taken by the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE), program the current sensor ID's into the WIN module in the corresponding locations. 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with the vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) to verify that the DTC does not return in an active state. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display: C1503-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 3 INTERNAL Yes 



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 1. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer, read the sensor ID's. 

Do the sensor ID's match the ID's just learned in the previous step? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive the TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 2. Look for a tire location with a non-responsive TPM Sensor ID. 3. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the TPM Sensor in question has been identified. Has the faulty TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 9. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. Using the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. Using the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Return to the beginning of this test and perform the diagnostic procedure as necessary.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

C1504-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 4 INTERNAL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The tire pressure sensor actively monitors the air pressure and air temperature inside the tire, the sensor internal

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

battery status, and the radial acceleration of the wheel. Each sensor has a unique ID code. The sensor transmits the data at regular intervals via an encoded signal to a receiver circuit located in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). WHEN MONITORED:

With vehicle speed greater than 15 m.p.h. (24 km/h). SET CONDITION:

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) will monitor the signals from the four active road tire sensors. A loss of signal error is detected when eight consecutive blocks of data are not received or cannot be accurately decoded. An internal sensor hardware error condition will be set when an error in the accelerometer, pressure sensor, or temperature sensor is detected. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INCORRECT SENSORS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. DTC STATUS IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and may have caused the tire pressure to fall below the low pressure warning threshold. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure (placard). This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more then three hours, and in outside ambient temperatures.

1. Correct all tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation tire pressure specifications and wait two minutes for the system to update. 2. Ignition on engine not running. 3. Using the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 4. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for a minimum of 10 minutes in order to receive TPM Sensor data and allow for the system to update. 5. Using the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 9. 2. TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 8. 3. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL DTC 

NOTE:

This fault can be set if the incorrect or no TPM Sensor is installed on the vehicle. If the spare tire is currently installed on the vehicle, and it is not equipped with a TPM Sensor, this DTC can be set. Replace the spare with a TPM Sensor equipped wheel and tire assembly. Test drive the vehicle. If the DTC resets, continue with the diagnostic procedure.

1. Perform a visual inspection to verify that all road wheels are equipped with a TPM Sensor. 2. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) verify the correct TPM Sensor is on the vehicle. Is the correct TPM Sensor installed on the vehicle? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET USING TPM-RKE ANALYZER 

NOTE:

The following procedure is used to locate the TPM Sensor that is setting the internal fault. If the tires have been rotated, the TPM Sensor is no longer in sequence from the factory. Faults are linked to the TPM Sensor IDs. You MUST locate the TPM Sensor that set the fault before continuing.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Use the following method below at every tire location. 1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for a response, and store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE). If you receive no response from any of the TPM Sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly and repeat the process on each non-responsive wheel. Has the faulty TPM Sensor been located? Yes 



Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 5. 5. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 

NOTE:

If the TPM Sensor IDs do not match, it may be necessary to move the vehicle to a location away from other TPM Sensors and repeat this step.

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to verify the TPM Sensor IDs match what is programmed into the WIN. The TPM Sensor Identifications are located under "Data Display" for the WIN. Do the TPM Sensor IDs match what is stored in the WIN? Yes 



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 6. 6. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT 1. Using the data taken by the TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE), program the current sensor ID's into the WIN module in the corresponding locations. 2. With the scan tool, erase the DTCs. 3. Drive the vehicle for a minimum of 20 minutes with the vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

mph) to verify that the DTC does not return in an active state. 4. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display: C1504-TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR 4 INTERNAL Yes 



Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Go To 7. 7. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT - MISMATCHED ID 1. With the TPM-RKE Analyzer, read the sensor ID's. 

Do the sensor ID's match the ID's just learned in the previous step? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 8. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR INTERNAL FAULT SET 

NOTE:

Some vehicles will not receive the TPM Sensor data when the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle may need to be driven at speeds greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for about a minute in order to receive TPM Sensor data.

1. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 2. Look for a tire location with a non-responsive TPM Sensor ID. 3. Repeat this test on each wheel on the vehicle until the TPM Sensor in question has been identified. Has the TPM Sensor been located? Yes 

Replace the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensor in accordance with the service

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



information. Refer to SENSOR, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 9. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR DTC 1. The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time. 2. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 3. Using the scan tool, clear DTCs in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Module. 4. Test drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes with vehicle speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph). 5. Using the scan tool, select View DTCs in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Module. 

Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Return to the beginning of this test and perform the diagnostic procedure as necessary.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

C151C-TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSORS MISSING For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

When installing a new Wireless Ignition Node (WIN), the module is programed with universal IDs for the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. The WIN must be programmed with the correct TPM Sensor IDs. WHEN MONITORED:

During vehicle TPM Sensor ID locate process. SET CONDITION:

When installing a new Wireless Ignition Node (WIN).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes INCORRECT TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR ID(S) TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

The DTC can be caused by many different factors and might not be a sensor/transmitter or a WIN fault. Interference from other elements will over power the sensor/transmitter RF frequency making erratic operation to the TPM system. Check the vehicle for aftermarket accessories that could compromise the RF frequency signal before diagnosing the TPM system.

1. Correct all tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation tire pressure specifications and wait two minutes for the system to update. 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. Using the scan tool, record and erase DTCs. 4. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for a minimum of 10 minutes in order to receive TPM data and allow for the system to update. 5. Using the scan tool, read DTCs. Is the DTC status Active at this time? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 5. 2. TPM-RKE ANALYZER CH9936 

Is there a TPM-RKE Analyzer CH9936 available? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 3. WITH TPM-RKE TOOL CHECK TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR ID(S) 

NOTE:

Always be certain to select the proper vehicle line and model year when using this tool, as the tool will automatically use the correct protocol to attempt to read the Sensor. If the incorrect vehicle line and/or model year is selected, the Sensor will not respond to the tool.

NOTE:

If you receive no response from any of the tire pressure sensors, check to make sure that the TPM-RKE Analyzer is set correctly, and repeat the process on each of the non-responsive wheel(s)

1. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to scan each TPM Sensor for an ID, store in the proper location in the TPM-RKE Analyzer. 2. Use a TPM-RKE Analyzer (special tool #CH9936, Analyzer, TPM/RKE) to upload the correct IDs and proper locations in the scan tool. 3. Using the scan tool, select the TIPM Module under "Miscellaneous Functions", follow the procedure for uploading TPM Sensor IDs. 4. Using the scan tool, erase DTCs. 5. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for a minimum of 10 minutes in order to receive TPM data and allow for the system to update. 6. Using the scan tool, check to see if the TPM Module IDs match what is programmed into the WIN. Do the TPM IDs match? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. WITHOUT TPM-RKE ANALYZER CHECK TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) SENSOR ID(S) 1. Starting with the left front wheel, deflate the tire to 20 PSI, wait two minutes, and check the scan tool for changes to any compensated tire pressure values. 2. Repeat the above step on each wheel of the vehicle. 3. Using the scan tool, erase DTCs. 4. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for a minimum of 10 minutes in order to receive TPM data and allow for the system to update. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. Using the scan tool, check to see if the TPM IDs are programmed into the WIN. Are the TPM Sensor IDs in the WIN? Yes  

Test complete. Perform the VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Perform the TPM VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. INTERMITTENT TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR DTC 

NOTE:

The DTC can be caused by many different factors and might not be a sensor/transmitter or a WIN fault. Interference from other elements will over power the sensor/transmitter RF frequency making erratic operation to the TPM system. Check the vehicle for aftermarket accessories that could compromise the RF frequency signal before diagnosing the TPM system.

1. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply to this condition. 2. Using the scan tool, erase DTCs. 3. Test drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 24 km/h (15 mph) for a minimum of 10 minutes in order to receive TPM data and allow for the system to update. 4. Using the scan tool, read DTCs. Does the DTC reset or is the status Active for this DTC? Yes 

Go To 2.



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

P0928-BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Brake Transmission Switch Interlock Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The brake switch signal must be active before the shift lever can be moved out of the park position. The Shifter Lever Assembly (SLA) Electronic Shift Module (ESM) receives two brake switch signals. The first signal is a

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

CAN C Bus message sent to the shifter lever assembly. The second signal is a hard wired Brake Transmission Switch Interlock (BTSI) Control signal to the shifter lever assembly from the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). The CAN C Bus message is the primary brake switch signal and the hard wired signal serves as the backup brake switch signal. These two brake switch signals are compared against each other to verify proper brake switch operation. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the WIN detects a short to ground, open or disconnected (K321) BTSI Control circuit, for more than 10 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes ENGINE BRAKE DTCS PRESENT (K321) BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK (BTSI) CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) Always perform the NAG1 Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ENGINE DTCS PRESENT 1. With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Are there any Powertrain Control Module (PCM) brake related DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Checking The BTSI Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the Shifter Lever Assembly harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

3. Turn the ignition on, engine not running.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (K321) BTSI Control circuit in the Shifter Lever Assembly connector. 5. With the scan tool under WIN, actuate the BTSI. Does the test light illuminate brightly on and off while cycling the (K321) BTSI Control circuit? Yes 



Replace the Shifter Lever Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SHIFTER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Checking BTSI Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the WIN harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K321) BTSI Control circuit in the Shifter Lever harness connector. 4. Measure the resistance between ground and the (K321) BTSI Control circuit in the WIN harness

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms in either connector? Yes  

Repair the (K321) BTSI Control circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 4. 4. (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Measuring Resistance Of BTSI Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (K321) BTSI Control circuit between the Shifter Lever Assembly harness connector and the WIN harness connector. Is the resistance above 2.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (K321) BTSI Control circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 5. 5. (K321) BTSI CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 22: Measuring Voltage Between Ground & BTSI Control Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (K321) BTSI Control circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (K321) BTSI Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module, the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U0001-CAN C BUS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

Whenever the CAN C Bus (+) or CAN C Bus (-) circuit is open, shorted to voltage or shorted to ground. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES PRESENT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN C MODULE SHORTED

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from off to on at least 3 times, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of one minute per cycle. 3. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U0001-CAN C BUS as active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0001-CAN C Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0037-LIN BUS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Rain Sensor Module Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously when the ignition is on. SET CONDITION:

The module detects a short to ground, voltage or an open circuit on the Com-LIN Tire Pressure Monitor Lan (LIN Bus) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D508) COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN (LIN BUS) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT (D508) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D508) LIN BUS CIRCUIT OPEN STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE (ELV) (BUX) RAIN SENSOR WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, record and erase the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition from on to off to on three times. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. With the scan tool, read the active Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U0037-LIN BUS as active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally set this DTC are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and poor pin fit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE RAIN SENSOR 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 24: Rain Sensor Harness Connector End View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Rain Sensor harness connector. NOTE:

If this vehicle is not equipped with a Rain Sensor, go to the next step.

3. Turn the ignition on. 4. With the scan tool, erase the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition from on to off to on three times.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6. Wait 30 seconds. 7. With the scan tool, read the active Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: U0037-LIN BUS? yes 

Go To 3.

No Replace the Rain Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, LIGHT RAIN SENSOR (LRSM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: Checking Steering Column Lock Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) connector. NOTE:

If this vehicle is not equipped with a Steering Wheel Lock Module (BUX), go to the next step.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool, erase the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs. Cycle the ignition from on to off to on three times. Wait 30 seconds. With the scan tool, read the active Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: U0037-LIN BUS? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Replace the Steering Column Lock Module in accordance with the service information. The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) must also be replaced along with the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the WIN MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed.  Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL .  Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL .  Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. (D508) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Checking LIN Bus Circuit For Short To Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Wireless Ignition Node harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the (D508) LIN Bus circuit and the (Z912) Ground circuit in the WIN connector. Is the resistance below 10K Ohms? Yes  

No

Repair the (D508) LIN Bus circuit for a short to the (Z912) Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 5. 5. (D508) LIN BUS CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 27: Checking LIN Bus Circuit For Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Measure the voltage between ground and the (D508) LIN Bus circuit in the WIN connector. Is there any voltage present? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the (D508) LIN Bus circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 6. 6. (D508) LIN BUS CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 28: Checking LIN Bus Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D508) LIN Bus circuit between the WIN connector and the Rain Sensor or the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) (BUX) (if equipped) connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the open in the (D508) LIN Bus circuit. Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM/ECM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM/ECM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Does the scan tool display as active: U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE ECM/PCM? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0100-Lost Communication with PCM diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ABS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition run time is greater than one second. Battery voltage between 9 and 16 volts. Engine run time greater than three seconds. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Anti Lock Brake Module (ABS) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED ABS MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. ACTIVE DTC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Is the DTC Active at this time? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0121-Lost Communication with Anti-Lock Brake Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0146-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY (TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. The battery voltage between 10.0 and 16.0 Volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Does the scan tool display active: U0146-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH LIGHT RAIN SENSING MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Rain Sensor Module Circuit Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously when the ignition is on. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fused installed. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Rain Sensing Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F981) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT OPEN (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (D508) COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN CIRCUIT OPEN RAIN SENSOR MODULE WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

With the scan tool, record and erase the WIN DTCs. Cycle the ignition switch from on to off three times then back to on. Start the engine and run for two minutes. With the scan tool, read the active WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH LIGHT RAIN SENSING MODULE? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING , and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. 2. (F981) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Be sure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the Rain Sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between ground and the (F981) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit in the Rain Sensor harness connector. Is the voltage above 12.0 volts? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Repair the (F981) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (Z919) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 

Fig. 31: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using the a 12 volt test light connected to 12 volts, check the (Z919) Ground circuit. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (Z919) Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (D508) COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN CIRCUIT 

Fig. 32: Checking Voltage Of The COM-LIN Tire Pressure Monitor LAN Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the voltage between the (D508) COM-Lin Tire Pressure Monitor LAN circuit and ground in the Rain Sensor connector. Is the voltage below 7.0 volts? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Replace the Rain Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, LIGHT RAIN SENSOR (LRSM) , REMOVAL .  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (D508) COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Checking COM-LIN Tire Pressure Monitor LAN Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the WIN Module harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (D508) COM-Lin Tire Pressure Monitor LAN circuit between the WIN Module harness connector and the Rain Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 







Replace the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) in accordance with the Service Information. If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module (BUX), it must also be replaced in accordance with the Service Information. When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module, the Win MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair the (D508) COM-Lin Tire Pressure Monitor LAN circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U0236-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH COLUMN LOCK MODULE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Steering Column Lock Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Continuously. SET CONDITION:

If the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) does not receive the correct response message back from the Steering Column Lock Module. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN (F892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT OPEN (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (D508) COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN CIRCUIT OPEN STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE (ELV) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INTERMITTENT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) 1. Using the scan tool, erase the current WIN DTCs. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Arm the Vehicle Theft and Security System (VTSS) and wait one minute. 4. Disarm the VTSS and turn the ignition on. 5. Using the scan tool, read the WIN DTCs. Does the scan tool display active; U0236-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH COLUMN LOCK MODULE? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Perform the STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS TEST. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . 2. (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Gain access to the Steering Column Lock Module. 2. Disconnect the Steering Column Lock Module connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A106) Fused B(+) circuit (Cavity 1) in the Steering Column Lock Module connector. 

Does the test light illuminate brightly?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair the (A106) Fused B(+) circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (F892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Disconnect the WIN harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (F982) Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) circuit between (Cavity 9) in the WIN module and (Cavity 3) in the Steering Column Lock Module. 

Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (F892) Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z912) Ground circuit (Cavity 2) in the Steering Column Lock Module connector. 

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the (Z912) Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. (D508) COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN CIRCUIT OPEN 1. Measure the resistance of the (D508) COM-LIN Tire Pressure Monitor LAN circuit between (Cavity 2) in the WIN module and (Cavity 4) in the Steering Column Lock Module. 

Is the resistance below 2.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee









Replace the Steering Column Lock Module in accordance with the service information. The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) must also be replaced along with the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). When replacing the WIN and the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV), the WIN MUST be programmed BEFORE the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV) is programmed. . Replace and program the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Refer to RECEIVER, WIRELESS IGNITION NODE , REMOVAL . Replace and program the Steering Column Lock Module (ELV). Refer to MODULE, SHAFT LOCK , REMOVAL . Perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.

No  

Repair the (D508) COM-LIN Tire Pressure Monitor LAN circuit for an open. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

U1197-SECURITY SEED RESPONSE NOT RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

Whenever a Fob Integrated Key (FOBIK) is inserted in the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN), the WIN performs a self test and resynchronization routine. During the routine, the WIN interrogates the FOBIK for the secret key information and performs a CAN Bus message handshake with the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM must reply to the WIN that the secret key information matches to initiate the start sequence or this code will set on the third attempt. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever a FOBIK is rotated to the Run position. SET CONDITION:

This DTC sets if the WIN does not receive a CAN Bus message from the ECM/PCM. This code will set on the 20th start attempt. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes PCM PROGRAMMING DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY PCM PROGRAMMING 1. Using the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs in the PCM.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Turn the Ignition Off, and wait fifteen seconds before turning the Ignition On. 3. Wait one minute, and read the active PCM DTCs. Does the scan tool display: U1197-SECURITY SEED RESPONSE NOT RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM as active? Yes 



Perform the PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING procedure. Refer to PCM REPROGRAMMING . Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST - NGC or PCM VERIFICATION TEST - 3.0L DIESEL .

No  

Repair is complete. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

STANDARD PROCEDURE WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) INTERMITTENT TEST For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. RECORD AND ERASE ALL WIN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) Using the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from the WIN. Monitor for any active codes as you work through the following steps. 

 

Review the code monitor and set conditions for any DTCs that are stored and attempt to reproduce the conditions listed. Wiggle the wiring harness and connectors of the related circuit, sensor or component. Turn the ignition off. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) that may apply.

Was the source of the customer complaint found or did any DTCs appear and stay active? Yes 

No

Make the appropriate repairs and perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST, or, refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE, and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 2. 2. ATTEMPT TO REPRODUCE THE CONDITION 

In the event the customer complaint cannot be duplicated due to an intermittent condition in the theft/security system, the following may aid in attempting to reproduce the condition. 









Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors related to the stored code or component in question. Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals. If the customer concern was related to a specific Fob-Integrated-Key (FOBIK), ensure the FOBIK in question is used while attempting reproduce the condition. Reconnect any disconnected components and harness connectors and ensure they are properly seated. If numerous trouble codes were set, use a schematic and inspect any common ground or supply circuits.

Was the source of the intermittent condition located? Yes 

Make the appropriate repairs and perform the WIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE.



The problem cannot be found at this time. If repeated intermittent failures are encountered that cannot be reproduced and the condition has prompted multiple customer visits to the dealership, document any findings on the repair order.

No

WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) PRE-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Before attempting to repair any WIN system, technicians should be familiar with and fully understand the system operation. for complete details. Refer to OPERATION . The following should be used as a checklist to be completed in its entirety prior to referencing specific WIN diagnostic procedures. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. FOLLOW THE BASIC OUTLINE SET FORTH IN THE SIX-STEP TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 1. Verification of complaint. 2. Verification of any related symptoms. 3. Symptom analysis. 4. Problem isolation. 5. Repair of isolated problem.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

6. Verification of proper operation. 2. TAKE INTO ACCOUNT CURRENT VEHICLE CONDITION, REPAIR HISTORY, AND TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS (TSBs)  Verify there are no outward signs of vehicle damage that could impact the proper operation of the theft or security system. Check for aftermarket vehicle accessories that may have been installed improperly or could interfere with the system  Check the vehicle repair history for repairs that may relate to the current condition.  Perform a check of current Technical Service Bulletins (TSB) for the WIN system related to the customer concern. If a TSB applies, follow the procedure outlined in the TSB. 3. DIAGNOSE ONLY THOSE FAILURES THAT ARE ACTIVE AND CAN BE REPRODUCED  Check the control module that is central to the subsystem which is exhibiting the condition for the active DTCs.  For an intermittent failure that is not current at the time of vehicle inspection, and perform the WIN INTERMITTENT TEST and document the event on the repair order. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. ADDRESS ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) IN THE CORRECT ORDER As a general rule, for any WIN module that exhibits more than one active DTC, address the codes in the order indicated: 1. Low/High Voltage and Serial Data Loss of Communication Codes 2. Module Internal Failure and Configuration Mismatch Codes 3. Circuit specific DTC failures Should the malfunction still be present after conducting this Pre-diagnostic Procedure, technicians should continue to the appropriate DTC procedure or symptom diagnostic. WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) VERIFICATION WIN VERIFICATION

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . Perform the following after completion of a diagnostic repair: NOTE:

When entering the Personal Identification Number (PIN), care should be taken because the WIN will only allow three consecutive attempts to enter the correct PIN. If three consecutive incorrect PINs are entered the WIN will Lock Out the scan tool. To exit Lock Mode, the ignition key must remain in the Run position for one hour. All accessories must be off. A battery charger connected to the battery during this time period is recommended.

NOTE:

On vehicles equipped with a Base Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system, when the WIN and/or the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new unit, a

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that allows the WIN to be programmed with the ID number and location of the spare tire pressure sensor mounted in the wheel of the spare tire. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under "Miscellaneous Functions" for the "WIN" menu item as appropriate. In addition, if the WIN is replaced, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the ID number on the spare tire pressure sensor so that the ID code for that sensor can be programmed into the new WIN. 1. Reconnect the previously disconnected components and connectors. 2. Obtain the vehicle's unique Personal Identification Number (PIN) assigned to it's original WIN. This number can be obtained from the original vehicle invoice or from your Service Manager or Parts Manager. PCM & WIN REPLACEMENT

NOTE:

If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the WIN are replaced at the same time, program the PCM VIN into the PCM first.

NOTE:

The PCM stores the secret key information. If the WIN ever needs to be replaced, the secret key information can be retrieved from the PCM and then transferred to the WIN for security use.

During PCM/ECM replacement, use the following steps to verify the transfer of the secret key information from the WIN to the new PCM: 1. If the PCM is to be replaced, first, replace the PCM/ECM with the original WIN still connected to the vehicle. If the PCM is not being replaced, go to step 3. 2. Using the appropriate Service Information to program the new PCM/ECM. (This will verify the Secret Key Transfer from the original WIN into the new PCM/ECM). 3. Now replace and program (WIN Replaced) the WIN (if necessary). This will cause the WIN to receive the Secret Key from the PCM/ECM back into the new WIN. NOTE:

If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module, it must be replaced along with the WIN. Whenever a WIN is replaced the Steering Wheel Lock Module MUST also be replaced.

4. Using the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WIN. Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with the Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System, program the Placard Pressure Values into the WIN. 6. Make sure all the customer's keys have been programmed into the new module if necessary. NOTE:

If the WIN module was replaced and the vehicle is equipped with the Passive Entry System (PEM), with the scan tool, perform the "PEM

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace" routine in the PEM after the FOBIKS have been programmed. 7. Using the scan tool, erase all DTCs. Perform five ignition key cycles, leaving the key on for at least 90 seconds per cycle. 8. Using the scan tool, read WIN DTCs. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. Are there any WIN DTCs present? Yes 

Repair not complete, go to the appropriate diagnostic information and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Repair is complete.

No

TPM VERIFICATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM) Was the Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) replaced during the test procedure? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 3. 2. WIRELESS IGNITION NODE (WIN) 

NOTE:

When entering the PIN, care should be taken because the WIN will only allow three consecutive attempts to enter the correct PIN. If three consecutive incorrect PIN's are entered the WIN will Lock Out the scan tool. To exit Lock Mode, the ignition key must remain in the Run position for one hour. All accessories must be off. A battery charger connected to the battery during this time period is recommended.

1. Reconnect the previously removed and/or disconnected components and connectors.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Obtain the vehicle's unique Personal Identification Number (PIN) assigned to its original WIN. This number can be obtained from the vehicle invoice or from the Chrysler Customer Center (Phone 1-800-992-1997). 3. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, Wireless Ignition Node (WIN). Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 4. If the WIN was replaced, all the customer's keys must be programmed to the new module. Use the scan tool and the Program Key procedure 5. With the scan tool, erase all DTCs. Perform five ignition key cycles, leaving the key on for at least 90 seconds per cycle. 6. Drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time the system will learn the new sensor ID code and will clear any DTC(s) automatically. 7. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Are there any DTCs present? Yes 

Repair not complete, perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Repair is complete. 3. TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR REPLACE 1. Reconnect the previously removed and/or disconnected components and harness connectors. 2. If available, use a TPM-RKE Analyzer tool with the scan tool to program the WIN with the tire pressure sensors ID's on the vehicle. 3. Drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time the system will learn the new sensor IDs. 4. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Are there any DTCs present? Yes 

Repair not complete, perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Repair is complete.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

SPECIFICATIONS TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Description Brake caliper guide pins Engine cradle crossmember support bolts Engine cradle stiffener bracket bolts Engine mount nuts Front bumper support bolts Front bumper outer bolts Front hub nuts Front propeller shaft bolts Front shock clevis bolt Front skid plate bolts Front suspension skid plate bolts Front tow hook bolts Front tow hook bracket bolts Front tow hook nuts Fuel tank skid plate bolts Power steering pressure line nut Rear bumper support bolts Rear lower shock clevis bolt Rear suspension crossmember support bolts Rear tow hook bolts Rear tow hook support bracket bolt Steering shaft coupler bolt Trailer hitch bolts Transfer case skid plate bolts Transmission crossmember reinforcement bracket bolts Transmission crossmember to frame bolts Transmission crossmember to transmission mount bolts Transmission skid plate bolts Upper ball joint nut

SPECIAL TOOLS SPECIAL TOOLS

N.m 55 175 20 75 26 9 310 32 217 28 28 47 47 25 28 28 54 235 180 165 100 49 165 28 55 61 61 28 95

Ft. Lbs 41 129 15 55 19 229 24 160 21 21 35 35 18.5 21 21 40 173 133 122 74 36 122 21 41 45 45 21 70

In. Lbs. 80 -

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

6602 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 6602-2 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 8173-3 - Remover/Installer (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 8180CC, 8263CC.) 8244 - Puller, Extension Housing (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 8295CC.) 8534B - Support Fixture, Engine (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 8534, 8534B, 8849, 9565.) 8838-2 - Screw Assembly (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 8696, 8696CC, 8710, 8710CC, 8715.) 9031-7A - Installer, Bushing (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 9074, 9076, 9090, 9329-SUP, 9396, 9515-SUP, 9516-SUP, 9517-SUP, 9518, 9519, 9540-SUP, 9541-SUP.) 9520-1 - Installer Disc (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 9329, 9329-SUP, 9515-SUP, 9516, 9516-SUP, 9517-SUP, 9518, 9519, 9540-SUP, 9541-SUP.) 9520-4 - Cup, Receiver (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 9329, 9329-SUP, 9515-SUP, 9516, 9516-SUP, 9517-SUP, 9518, 9519, 9540-SUP, 9541-SUP.) C-4150A - Press, Ball Joint (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 6672, 6745.) C-4212F - Press, Ball Joint (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 6745, 6880, 6881, MLR-C03.)

BUMPERS BUMPER, FRONT REMOVAL REMOVAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Side Plastic Air Deflectors, Bumper Beam, Fasteners & Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the radiator grille assembly. Refer to GRILLE , REMOVAL . 3. Remove the fasteners (5) that secure the hood latch assembly and the upper radiator support cross bracing. 4. Remove both the side plastic air deflectors (1).

Fig. 2: Front Bumper Isolator Pad & Push-Pin Type Retainers Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Release the clips and position aside the power steering cooler assembly, if equipped. 6. Release the clips securing the headlamp electrical harness and position the harness aside.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

7. Remove the push-pin type retainers (2) and remove the front bumper isolator pad (1).

Fig. 3: Side Plastic Air Deflectors, Bumper Beam, Fasteners & Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Remove the four bolts (4) securing the bumper beam to the vehicle frame 9. Remove the outer two fasteners (3) that secure the bumper beam to the radiator closure panel and remove the beam (2). 10. Remove the cross bracing from the bumper beam and any miscellaneous parts as needed. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 4: Side Plastic Air Deflectors, Bumper Beam, Fasteners & Bolts

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Install the cross bracing on the bumper beam (2) and transfer any miscellaneous parts as needed. Position the bumper and install the four bolts (4) securing the beam to the vehicle frame. Install the outer two bolts (3) that secure the beam to the radiator closure panel. Tighten the four inner Bolts (4) to 26 N.m (19 ft. lbs.) and the two outer bolts (3) to 9 N.m (7 ft. lbs.).

Fig. 5: Front Bumper Isolator Pad & Push-Pin Type Retainers Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Position the isolator pad (1) and install the push-pin type retainers (2). 6. Position the headlamp electrical harness and secure in place. 7. Position back and secure the power steering cooler assembly, if equipped.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Side Plastic Air Deflectors, Bumper Beam, Fasteners & Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Install both the side plastic air deflectors (1). 9. Install the hood latch assembly and upper radiator support cross bracing. Refer to LATCH, HOOD , INSTALLATION . 10. Install the radiator grille assembly. Refer to GRILLE , INSTALLATION . 11. Connect the negative battery cable. FASCIA, FRONT REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 7: Rivets & Front Fender Flare Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the plastic rivets (5) at each wheel well that secure the flares (1) to the fascia (4). 2. Release the clips and partially remove both front fender flares. 3. Remove the fasteners (3) that secure the wheel liners (2) to the fascia (4).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: 1/4 Turn Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Remove the 1/4 turn fasteners (1) and separate the lower wheel liner from the fascia.

Fig. 9: Lower Retainers, Fog Lamp Connectors & Fascia Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. 6. 7. 8.

Remove the four lower retainers (4). Release the integral latches at the wheel well openings (2) and the radiator grille assembly. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors (3), if equipped. Remove the fascia assembly (1).

INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

INSTALLATION

Fig. 10: Lower Retainers, Fog Lamp Connectors & Fascia Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the front fascia (1) and connect the fog lamp electrical connectors (3), if equipped. 2. Install the fascia, locking the integral latches at the radiator grille assembly and at the wheel well openings (2). 3. Install the four lower retainers (4).

Fig. 11: Rivets & Front Fender Flare Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Install the fasteners (3) that secure the wheel liners (2) to the fascia (4). 5. Position the front fender flares (1) and press in place, engaging the retaining clips.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

6. Install new plastic rivets (5) to secure the fender flares.

Fig. 12: 1/4 Turn Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 7. Install the 1/4 turn fasteners (1) and secure the lower wheel liner to the fascia. FASCIA, REAR REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 13: Rivets & Rear Fender Flare Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

1. Remove the plastic rivets (3) that secure the fender flares (1) to the rear fascia. 2. Release the clips (2) and remove both rear fender flares.

Fig. 14: Lower Retainers & Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. 4. 5. 6.

Open the rear liftgate (1). Remove the two lower retainers (4) at the rear support beam. Remove the fasteners (5) at the back sides of the quarter panels, in the liftgate opening. Remove the fasteners (3) on both sides at the wheel well openings.

Fig. 15: Integral Latch Features, Body Harness Connector, Park Assist & Blind Spot Sensors Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 7. Release the integral latch features (2) at the sides and along the back and separate the fascia from the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

vehicle. 8. Disconnect the body harness electrical connector (3) and remove the fascia. 9. Remove both the park assist (5) and blind spot sensors (2), if equipped. 10. Remove the sensor electrical harness. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 16: Integral Latch Features, Body Harness Connector, Park Assist & Blind Spot Sensors Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Install the park assist and blind spot sensors (5 and 2), if equipped. 2. Install the sensor electrical harness, if equipped. 3. Position the fascia onto the vehicle and connect the body harness electrical connector (3), if equipped.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 17: Lower Retainers & Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Slightly spread the sides of the fascia to clear the painted surfaces. 5. position the fascia and then press into place at the sides and along the liftgate opening to engage the integral latches (2). 6. Install the two lower retainers (4) at the rear support beam. 7. Install the fasteners (5) at the liftgate opening. 8. Install the fasteners (3) on both sides at the wheel well openings

Fig. 18: Rivets & Rear Fender Flare Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Position the fender flares and press firmly and evenly to engage the clips (2) and install both fender flares. 10. Install new rivets (1) at the wheel wells to secure the fender flares (1) to the rear fascia.

FRAME WARNING USE OF HEAT DURING REPAIR

WARNING: Chrysler Group LLC engineering's position on the use of heat during collision repair is as follows: 



Any body panel or frame component damaged which is to be repaired and reused, must be repaired using the "cold straightening" method. No heat may be used during the straightening process. During rough straightening prior to panel replacement, damaged panels or frame components may be heated to assist in body/frame

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

realignment. The application of heat must be constrained to the parts which will be replaced and not allowed to affect any other components. This "no heat" recommendation is due to the extensive use of high strength and advanced high strength steels in Chrysler Group LLC products. High-strength materials can be substantially and negatively affected from heat input which will not be obviously known to the repairer or consumer. Ignoring these recommendations may lead to serious compromises in the ability to protect occupants in a future collision event, reduce the engineered qualities and attributes, or decrease the durability and reliability of the vehicle. This statement supersedes any previously released information by the Chrysler Group LLC. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious or fatal injury. WARNINGS

WARNING: Use an Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) approved breathing filter, when spraying paint or solvents in a confined area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 



avoid prolonged skin contact with petroleum or alcohol based cleaning solvents. do not stand under a hoisted vehicle that is not properly supported on safety stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury.

CAUTION: When holes are drilled or punched in an inner body panel, verify the depth of space to the outer body panel, electrical wiring or other components. Damage to the vehicle can result. 

 



do not weld exterior panels unless combustible material on the interior of vehicle is removed from the repair area. Fire or hazardous conditions, can result. always have a fire extinguisher ready for use when welding. disconnect the negative (-) cable clamp from the battery when servicing electrical components that are live when the ignition is off. Damage to electrical system can result. do not use abrasive chemicals or compounds on painted surfaces.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee





Damage to finish can result. do not use harsh alkaline based cleaning solvents on painted or upholstered surfaces. Damage to finish or color can result. do not hammer or pound on plastic trim panel when servicing interior trim. Plastic panels can break.

RESTRAINT WARNINGS

WARNING: To avoid potential physical injury, or damage to sensitive electronic circuits and systems, always disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable and the positive cable, then ground the positive cable to discharge the ORC capacitor before performing any welding operations on the vehicle. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment, possible damage to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) circuits and components, and possible damage to other electronic circuits and components. Whenever a welding process is being performed within 30 cm (12 in) of an electronic module/harness, then that module/harness should be relocated out of the way, or disconnected. Always protect against component or vehicle damage from weld spatter by using weld blankets and screens. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious or fatal injury. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), never attempt to repair the electrically conductive circuits or wiring components related to the SRS for which there is no MOPAR wiring repair kit. It is important to use ONLY the recommended splicing kit and procedure. For applicable and available MOPAR wiring repair kits, please visit the MOPAR Connector Web Site at the following address on the Internet: (http://dto.vftis.com/mopar/disclaimer.asp). Inappropriate repairs can compromise the conductivity and current carrying capacity of those critical electrical circuits, which may cause SRS components not to deploy when required, or to deploy when not required. Only minor cuts or abrasions of wire and terminal insulation where the conductive material has not been damaged, or connector insulators where the integrity of the latching and locking mechanisms have not been compromised may be repaired using appropriate methods. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the Chrysler Mopar® Parts Catalog. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) diagnosis or service. The ORC contains a rollover sensor, which enables the system to deploy the side curtain airbags in the event of a vehicle rollover event. If an ORC is accidentally rolled during service while still connected to battery power, the side curtain airbags will deploy. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, Occupant Classification System (OCS), seat belt tensioner, impact sensor or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid potential physical injury or damage to sensitive electronic circuits and systems, always disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable and the positive cable, then ground the positive cable to discharge the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) capacitor before performing any welding operations on the vehicle. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment, possible damage to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) circuits and components, and possible damage to other electronic circuits and components. Whenever a welding process is being performed within 12 inches (30 centimeters) of an electronic module or wiring harness, then that module or harness should be relocated out of the way, or disconnected. Always protect against component or vehicle damage from weld spatter by using weld blankets and screens. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, do not attempt to dismantle an airbag unit or tamper with its inflator. Do not puncture, incinerate or bring into contact with electricity. Do not store at temperatures exceeding 93° C

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

(200° F). An airbag inflator unit may contain sodium azide and potassium nitrate. These materials are poisonous and extremely flammable. Contact with acid, water, or heavy metals may produce harmful and irritating gases (sodium hydroxide is formed in the presence of moisture) or combustible compounds. An airbag inflator unit may also contain a gas canister pressurized to over 17.24 kPa (2500 psi). Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when handling a seat belt tensioner retractor. Exercise proper care to keep fingers out from under the retractor cover and away from the seat belt webbing where it exits from the retractor cover. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, replace all Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components only with parts specified in the Chrysler Mopar® Parts Catalog. Substitute parts may appear interchangeable, but internal differences may result in inferior occupant protection. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the fasteners, screws, and bolts originally used for the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components must never be replaced with any substitutes. These fasteners have special coatings and are specifically designed for the SRS. Anytime a new fastener is needed, replace it with the correct fasteners provided in the service package or specified in the Chrysler Mopar® Parts Catalog. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when a steering column has an airbag unit attached, never place the column on the floor or any other surface with the steering wheel or airbag unit face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. SPECIFICATIONS FRAME DIMENSIONS

Frame dimensions are listed in metric scale. All dimensions are from center to center of Principal Locating Point (PLP), or from center to center of PLP and fastener location. VEHICLE PREPARATION

Position the vehicle on a frame alignment rack, refer to instructions provided with equipment being used. Adjust the vehicle PLP heights to the specified dimension above the work surface (datum line). Vertical dimensions can be taken from the datum line to the locations indicated were applicable. DESCRIPTION FRAME DIMENSIONS - TOP VIEW

FIGURE Refer toFig. 19.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

FRAME DIMENSIONS - SIDE VIEW

Fig. 19: Frame Dimensions - Top View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

Refer toFig. 20.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Frame Dimensions - Side View Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CROSSMEMBER, CRADLE, ENGINE AND SUSPENSION REMOVAL REMOVAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 21: Engine Support Tool Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to MANIFOLD, INTAKE , REMOVAL or MANIFOLD, INTAKE , REMOVAL or MANIFOLD, INTAKE , REMOVAL , 5.7L . 2. Remove the oil control solenoid, if equipped. Refer to CONTROL VALVE, OIL INTAKE , REMOVAL , 5.7L . 3. Support engine using engine support fixture (special tool #8534B, Support Fixture, Engine) (1) or equivalent. 4. Remove the front skid plate. Refer to PLATE, SKID, FRONT , REMOVAL and PLATE, SKID, FRONT SUSPENSION , REMOVAL. 5. Remove both brake calipers and hang to the side. Refer to CALIPER, DISC BRAKE , REMOVAL .

Fig. 22: Motor Mount Bracket, Motor Mount & Nuts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Remove the motor mount nuts.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Coupler, Pinch Bolt & Steering Shaft Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: Steering column module is centered to the vehicles steering system. Failure to keep the system and steering column module centered and locked/inhibited from rotating can result in steering column module damage. Refer to CLOCKSPRING , STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. Place the front wheels in the straight ahead position with the steering wheel centered and locked with a steering wheel lock. 8. Drain or siphon the power steering system. 9. Remove the steering shaft coupler pinch bolt (2) and disconnect the coupler (1) from the steering shaft (3).

Fig. 24: Pressure Line, Return Line & Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

10. Disconnect the pressure line (1), and the return line (2) at the gear (3).

Fig. 25: Ball Joint Press, Upper Ball Joint & Knuckle Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 11. Support the outside of the lower control arms with a suitable holding fixture, and raise to normal ride height. 12. Remove the upper ball joint nuts. 13. Separate the upper ball joints (2) from the knuckles (3) using Ball Joint Press (special tool #C-4150A, Press, Ball Joint) (1).

Fig. 26: Lower Control Arm Nut/Bolt Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 14. Remove the shock clevis bracket to lower control arm nut/bolts (1).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Propeller Shaft, Pinion Flange & Reference Marks Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 15. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 16. Mark front propeller shaft (1) and pinion flange (2) for installation reference. Remove propeller shaft from pinion flange.

Fig. 28: Hub Nut & Half Shaft Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 17. Remove hub nuts (1) from half shafts (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Cradle, Brace Bolts & Cradle Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE: 18. 19. 20. 21.

Right side shown in illustration, left side similar.

Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the engine support cradle on the underbody. Remove the six frame brace bolts (2). Support the cradle (1) with suitable lifting device. Remove the four cradle bolts (3) and separate the engine cradle crossmember from the vehicle.

As necessary;    

Remove the lower control arms. Refer to ARM, LOWER CONTROL , REMOVAL . Remove the front drive axle. Refer to REMOVAL . Remove the steering gear. Refer to GEAR , REMOVAL . Remove the sway bar. Refer to STABILIZER BAR, FRONT , REMOVAL .

INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Cradle, Brace Bolts & Cradle Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC As necessary;    

Install the lower control arms. Refer to ARM, LOWER CONTROL , INSTALLATION . Install the front drive axle. Refer to INSTALLATION . Install the steering gear. Refer to GEAR , INSTALLATION . Install the sway bar. Refer to STABILIZER BAR, FRONT , INSTALLATION .

NOTE:

Right side shown in illustration, left side similar.

1. Raise the engine cradle into position guiding the engine mount into the engine mount bracket. 2. Align the engine cradle to the marks made during removal and install the four engine cradle support bolts (3) 3. Tighten the four support bolts (3) to 175 N.m (129 ft. lbs.). 4. Tighten the six cradle stiffener bracket bolts (2) to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Steering Knuckle & Upper Ball Joint Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Support the outside of the lower control arm with a suitable holding fixture, and raise to position the upper ball joint (2) into the knuckle (3). 6. With the holding fixture holding the suspension at normal ride height, install the upper ball joint nut (4) and tighten to 95 N.m (70 ft. lbs.).

Fig. 32: Lower Control Arm Nut/Bolt Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 7. Support the outside of the lower control arm with a suitable holding fixture, and raise to normal ride height. 8. Tighten the shock clevis bracket to lower control arm nut/bolt (1) to 217 N.m (160 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Hub Nut & Half Shaft Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Install the half shaft (2) hub nuts (1) and tighten to 310 N.m (229 ft. lbs.).

Fig. 34: Propeller Shaft, Pinion Flange & Reference Marks Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Install the propeller shaft (1) with reference marks (3) aligned. NOTE:

Clean propeller shaft bolts and apply Mopar Lock and Seal Adhesive or equivalent to the threads before installation.

11. Install the propeller shaft bolts and tighten to 32 N.m (24 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 35: Pressure Line, Return Line & Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 12. Connect the pressure line (1), and the return line (2) at the gear (3) and tighten to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.).

Fig. 36: Coupler, Pinch Bolt & Steering Shaft Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: The steering gear must be centered prior to installing the coupler to prevent clockspring damage. 13. Connect the steering shaft coupler (1) to the steering shaft (3), install a new coupler pinch bolt (2) and tighten to 49 N.m (36 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Engine Support Tool Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 14. Lower the engine fully onto the engine mounts.

Fig. 38: Motor Mount Bracket, Motor Mount & Nuts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 15. Tighten the engine mount nuts (2) to 75 N.m (55 ft. lbs.). 16. Install the brake calipers. Refer to CALIPER, DISC BRAKE , INSTALLATION . 17. Install the front skid plate. Refer to PLATE, SKID, FRONT , INSTALLATION and PLATE, SKID, FRONT SUSPENSION , INSTALLATION. 18. Install the oil control solenoid, if equipped. Refer to CONTROL VALVE, OIL INTAKE ,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

INSTALLATION , 5.7L . 19. Install the intake manifold. Refer to MANIFOLD, INTAKE , INSTALLATION or MANIFOLD, INTAKE , INSTALLATION or MANIFOLD, INTAKE , INSTALLATION , 5.7L . 20. Perform wheel alignment, paying special attention to thrust angle. If engine cradle crossmember needs to be shifted to align thrust angle. Refer to WHEEL ALIGNMENT , STANDARD PROCEDURE . CROSSMEMBER, REAR REMOVAL REMOVAL

1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to JACKING AND HOISTING LIFT POINTS . 2. On each side of vehicle rear, remove wheels. Refer to WHEELS , STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. Remove the rear drive shaft. Refer to SHAFT, DRIVE, REAR , REMOVAL .

Fig. 39: Brake Caliper Tension Clip Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Front rotor shown in illustration, rear rotor similar.

4. Bottom caliper pistons into the caliper. 5. Remove the brake caliper tension clip (1) by pressing rearward on the front of the clip (2) while pulling the clip out (3) from the caliper.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: Guide Pins, Brake Caliper & Caliper Adapter Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Remove the caliper slide dust bolt shields and loosen the brake caliper slide bolts (guide pins) (1). CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 7. Remove the brake caliper (2) from the caliper adapter (3) and hang the brake caliper (2).

Fig. 41: Cable Retaining Bracket, Cable Housing & Equalizer Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Disconnect the brake cable end from the equalizer (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 42: Wheel Speed Sensor Wiring Connector, Wiring Harness Connector & Cradle Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Disconnect both wheel speed sensor wiring connectors (1) from the wiring harness connectors (2).

Fig. 43: Shock Absorber, Upper Shock Bolts & Lower Shock Bolt/Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Support the outboard end of the lower control arm with a suitable holding fixture. 11. Remove the lower shock bolt and nut (3). 12. Lower the support on the outboard end of the lower control arm just enough to tilt the shock (1) into position for removal between the front and rear arms of the lower control arm.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Marking Location Of Crossmember Mount To Body Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1 - BODY 2 - MARKER (OR CRAYON) 3 - CROSSMEMBER BUSHING FLANGE 13. Carefully mark location of rear crossmember on body at all four mount (bushing) locations using a marker or crayon. Do not use a scratch awl to mark location. 14. Position an extra pair of jack stands under and support forward end of engine cradle to help stabilize vehicle during rear suspension removal/installation.

Fig. 45: Jack Positioned Beneath Crossmember

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 15. Position under-hoist utility jack or transmission jack (2) under center of rear crossmember (1). Raise jack head to contact crossmember and secure in place. When securing crossmember to jack, be sure not to secure stabilizer bar.

Fig. 46: Crossmember & Crossmember Mounting Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 16. Remove the four crossmember bolts (2) and remove the crossmember (1). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Rear Crossmember Positioned On Jack Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Install rear crossmember (1) on jack (2) head in same position in which it was removed and secure in place. 2. Raise crossmember to body mounting points. As crossmember is raised, align shocks (3) with pockets in spring links. Do not install bolts at this time.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Crossmember & Crossmember Mounting Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. Continue to raise crossmember (1) with jack until crossmember mounting bolts (2) can be installed. Install left side crossmember mounting bolts, but not the right side bolts. It is not necessary to tighten bolts at this point.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 49: Marking Location Of Crossmember Mount To Body Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1 - BODY 2 - MARKER (OR CRAYON) 3 - CROSSMEMBER BUSHING FLANGE 4. Shift crossmember as necessary to line up mounts (3) with location marks drawn on body (1) before removal.

Fig. 50: Crossmember & Crossmember Mounting Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Continue to raise crossmember (1) with jack until crossmember mounting bolts (2) can be installed. Install left side crossmember mounting bolts, but not the right side bolts. It is not necessary to tighten bolts at this point.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 51: Isolators, Coil Spring, Shock Absorber & Crossmember Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: To avoid damaging other components of vehicle, do not lower crossmember any further than necessary to install coil spring (2). 6. Slowly lower jack allowing right side of crossmember to drop. Do not lower jack at a fast rate. Lower jack just enough to allow spring (2) Installation. Do not lower jack any further than necessary. NOTE:

Before installing coil spring, make sure isolators (1 and 5) are completely installed on ends of spring.

7. Install coil spring (2) with isolators into spring pocket of spring link fitting the lower isolator to the shape of the pocket, then align top of spring with body mount.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Shock Absorber, Upper Shock Bolts & Lower Shock Bolt/Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Carefully raise jack, guiding coil spring and lower end of shock absorber (1) into mounted positions. Once shock absorber (1) lower mounting hole lines up with hole in control arm, stop jacking. 9. Install the lower shock bolt/nut (3). Raise the support on the lower control arm to normal ride height and tighten the bolt/nut to 235 N.m (173 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 53: Crossmember & Crossmember Mounting Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Raise right side of crossmember (1) into mounted position. Install right side crossmember mounting bolts (2). Snug, but do not fully tighten bolts at this time. 11. Remove both front and rear crossmember mounting bolts (2) on left side of vehicle.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 54: Isolators, Coil Spring, Shock Absorber & Crossmember Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: To avoid damaging other components of vehicle, do not lower crossmember any further than necessary to install coil spring (2). 12. Slowly lower jack allowing left side of crossmember to drop. Do not lower jack at a fast rate. Lower jack just enough to allow spring (2) Installation. Do not lower jack any further than necessary. NOTE:

Before installing coil spring, make sure isolators (1 and 5) are completely installed on ends of spring.

13. Install coil spring (2) with isolators into spring pocket of spring link fitting the lower isolator to the shape of the pocket, then align top of spring with body mount.

Fig. 55: Shock Absorber, Upper Shock Bolts & Lower Shock Bolt/Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 14. Carefully raise jack, guiding coil spring and lower end of shock absorber (1) into mounted positions. Once shock absorber (1) lower mounting hole lines up with hole in the control arm, stop jacking. 15. Install the lower shock bolt/nut (3). Raise the support on the lower control arm to normal ride height and tighten the bolt/nut to 235 N.m (173 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Crossmember & Crossmember Mounting Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 16. Raise left side of crossmember (1) into mounted position. Install left side crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3). Snug, but do not fully tighten bolts at this time. 17. Once mounts are lined up with location marks, on both sides of vehicle, tighten all four crossmember mounting bolts (2) to 180 N.m (133 ft. lbs.)

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Wheel Speed Sensor Wiring Connector, Wiring Harness Connector & Cradle Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 18. Route the wheel speed sensor and connect the wheel speed sensor wiring connector (1) to the wiring harness connector (2). 19. Attach the wheel speed sensor (1) wiring routing clip (not shown in illustration) to the top of the cradle (3).

Fig. 58: Cable Retaining Bracket, Cable Housing & Equalizer Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 20. Connect the brake cable end to the equalizer (3).

Fig. 59: Guide Pins, Brake Caliper & Caliper Adapter Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Front rotor shown in illustration, rear rotor similar.

NOTE:

Caliper slide pins should be free from debris.

21. Position the brake caliper/pads and tighten the brake caliper slide bolts (guide pins) (1) to 55 N.m (41 ft. lbs.). 22. Install the caliper slide bolt dust shields.

Fig. 60: Brake Caliper Tension Clip Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

Install the brake caliper tension clip (1). Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to WHEELS , STANDARD PROCEDURE . Install the rear drive shaft. Refer to SHAFT, DRIVE, REAR , INSTALLATION . Pump brake pedal several times to ensure vehicle has a firm brake pedal before moving vehicle. Perform wheel alignment, paying special attention to thrust angle. If rear crossmember needs to be shifted to align thrust angle. Refer to WHEEL ALIGNMENT , STANDARD PROCEDURE .

CROSSMEMBER, TRANSMISSION REMOVAL REMOVAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Crossmember, Crossmember Bolts & Transmission Mount Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the skid plate. Refer to PLATE, SKID, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL and PLATE, SKID, TRANSFER CASE , REMOVAL. 2. Remove the reinforcement brackets. 3. Support the transmission with a suitable lifting device. 4. Remove the transmission mount bolts (3). 5. Remove the six crossmember bolts (2) and remove the crossmember (1). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 62: Crossmember, Crossmember Bolts & Transmission Mount Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Install the crossmember (1) and install the six crossmember bolts (2). Tighten the six crossmember bolts (2) to 61 N.m (45 ft. lbs.). Remove the lifting device. Install the transmission mount bolts (3) and tighten to 61 N.m (45 ft. lbs.). Install the crossmember reinforcement brackets and tighten the bolts to 55 N.m (41 ft. lbs.). Install the skid plate. Refer to PLATE, SKID, TRANSMISSION , INSTALLATION and PLATE, SKID, TRANSFER CASE , INSTALLATION.

HITCH, TRAILER REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 63: Trailer Wiring Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the rear fascia. Refer to FASCIA, REAR , REMOVAL. 2. Disconnect the trailer wiring connector (2) harness. NOTE:

7-way connector shown in illustration, 4 way similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Horizontal Bolts & Vertical Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. Remove the six horizontal bolts (1) and two vertical bolts (2).

Fig. 65: Trailer Hitch Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Remove the trailer hitch (1). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Trailer Hitch Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Install the hitch (1).

Fig. 67: Horizontal Bolts & Vertical Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 2. Install the bolts (1 and 2) 3. Tighten the six horizontal bolts (1) to 165 N.m (122 ft. lbs.). 4. Tighten the two vertical bolts (2) to 165 N.m (122 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Trailer Wiring Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Connect the trailer connector wire harness (2). NOTE:

7-way connector shown in illustration, 4 way similar.

6. Install the rear fascia. Refer to FASCIA, REAR , INSTALLATION. HOOK(S), TOW, FRONT REMOVAL REMOVAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Support Bracket, Tow Hook, Bolts & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the nut (5) and remove the tow hook (2). 2. Remove the two front bolts (3) and remove the tow hook (2). 3. If necessary, remove the two bolts (4) and remove the support bracket (1). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 70: Support Bracket, Tow Hook, Bolts & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

If removed previously, install the tow hook support bracket (1) and install the two bolts (4). Tighten the bolts (4) to 47 N.m (35 ft. lbs.). Install the tow hook (2) and install the bolts (3). Tighten the bolts (3) to 47 N.m (35 ft. lbs.). Install the nut (5) and tighten to 25 N.m (18.5 ft. lbs.).

HOOK(S), TOW, REAR REMOVAL REMOVAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Rear Tow Hook Bolt, Reinforcement Bracket Bolt, Side Bracket Bolts, Lower Frame Bolt & Tow Hook Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Loosen the rear tow hook bolt (1). Remove the reinforcement bracket bolt (2). Remove the side bracket bolts (3). Remove the lower frame bolt (4) and remove the tow hook assembly (5).

INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 72: Rear Tow Hook Bolt, Reinforcement Bracket Bolt, Side Bracket Bolts, Lower Frame Bolt & Tow

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Hook Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Install the rear notch (5) of the tow hook onto the rear frame bolt (1). Install the front lower frame bolt (4). Install the side frame bolts (3) and tighten to 165 N.m (122 ft. lbs.). Tighten the front vertical bolt (4) to 165 N.m (122 ft. lbs.). Tighten the rear vertical bolt (1) to 165 N.m (122 ft. lbs.). Install the support bracket bolt (2) to 100 N.m (74 ft. lbs.).

ISOLATOR, FRONT CROSSMEMBER, FRAME REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 73: Spacer & Engine Cradle Crossmember Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the engine cradle crossmember (2). Refer to CROSSMEMBER, CRADLE, ENGINE AND SUSPENSION , REMOVAL. 2. Remove the spacer (1).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 74: Crossmember, Isolator Mark & Isolator Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. As an installation reference, carefully mark location of isolator (3) requiring removal on crossmember (1) (around isolator can flange) using a marker or crayon. Do not use a scratch awl to mark location.

Fig. 75: OTC Puller, Bushing Remover/Installer, Front Engine Cradle Crossmember & Isolator Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1 - OTC puller 1182 or equivalent 2 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 6602-2 3 - Front Engine Cradle Crossmember 4 - Isolator NOTE:

Prior to using special tools, lubricate OTC puller 1182 or equivalent (1) threads to provide ease of use and promote tool longevity.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

4. Assemble tools over isolator as shown in illustration. 5. Using OTC puller 1182 or equivalent and Remover/Installer, Bushing (special tool #6602-2, Remover/Installer, Bushing) remover, remove the isolator (4). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 76: Crossmember, Isolator Mark & Isolator Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: It is very important that isolator be installed in same position as original to maintain vehicle ride quality and isolator longevity. That is why isolator, once installed, needs to closely match reference marks applied upon removal of original isolator. 1. Position isolator (3) on crossmember (1) isolator bore aligning isolator can flange with reference marks applied during removal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Ball Joint Press, Bushing Remover/Installer, Front Engine Cradle Crossmember & Isolator Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1 - Press, Ball Joint C-4212F 2 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 9031-5A 3 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 9031-7A 4 - Front Engine Cradle Crossmember 5 - Isolator NOTE:

Prior to using special tools, lubricate Press, Ball Joint (special tool #C4212F, Press, Ball Joint) (1) threads to provide ease of use and promote tool longevity.

NOTE:

A mixture of soap and water may be used to aid installation of the isolator.

2. Assemble tools over isolator as shown in illustration. 3. Tighten Press, Ball Joint (special tool #C-4212F, Press, Ball Joint) (1) screw-drive, pressing isolator (5) into crossmember (4). Install isolator until isolator can flange contacts surface of crossmember. 4. Remove tools.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 78: Spacer & Engine Cradle Crossmember Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Install the spacer (1). 6. Install the engine cradle crossmember (2). Refer to CROSSMEMBER, CRADLE, ENGINE AND SUSPENSION , INSTALLATION. ISOLATOR, REAR CROSSMEMBER, DIFFERENTIAL REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 79: Transmission Jack At Rear Axle Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

1. Remove the exhaust as necessary to obtain clearance while lowering the rear differential. Refer to TAILPIPE, EXHAUST , REMOVAL . 2. Remove the rear differential as necessary to gain enough access to the differential support isolators. Refer to REMOVAL . 3. Position transmission jack (1) to rear axle assembly.

Fig. 80: Rear Axle Isolator Bolt/Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Remove rear axle forward mount isolator bolt/nut (1).

Fig. 81: Bolts & Stabilizer Bar Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

5. Remove the bolts (1) and lower the stabilizer bar (2).

Fig. 82: Rear Axle-to-Crossmember Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Remove two rear axle-to-crossmember bolts (1). 7. Lower axle just enough to gain access to the differential isolator being serviced.

Fig. 83: Bushing Remover/Installer, Screw Assembly, Rear Suspension Crossmember & Remover/Installer Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 9520-2 2 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 9520-4 3 - Screw Assembly 8838-2

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

4 - Rear Suspension Crossmember 5 - Remover/Installer 8173-3 NOTE:

Prior to using special tools, lubricate Screw Assembly (special tool #88382, Screw Assembly) (3) threads to provide ease of use and promote tool longevity.

NOTE:

When installing thrust bearing, be sure to place hardened side toward bolt head.

8. Assemble tools over isolator as shown in illustration. 9. While holding Nut from rotating, using hand tools , tighten Screw Assembly (special tool #8838-2, Screw Assembly) (3) until Remover/Installer (special tool #8173-3, Remover/Installer) (5) comes in contact with isolator and Remover/Installer, Bushing (special tool #9520-4, Cup, Receiver) (2) sets squarely against crossmember (4). 10. Continue to tighten Screw Assembly (special tool #8838-2, Screw Assembly) (3), pressing isolator out of crossmember (4). 11. Remove tools with isolator. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 84: Screw Assembly, Isolator, Bushing Remover/Installer & Rear Suspension Crossmember Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1 - Screw Assembly 8838 2 - Isolator 3 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 9520-2 4 - Remover/Installer 8173-3

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

5 - Rear Suspension Crossmember 6 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 9031-7A NOTE:

Prior to using special tools, lubricate Screw Assembly (special tool #8838-2, Screw Assembly) (1) threads to provide ease of use and promote tool longevity.

NOTE:

When installing thrust bearing, be sure to place hardened side toward bolt head.

NOTE:

A mixture of soap and water may be used to aid installation of the isolator.

1. Assemble tools over isolator as shown in illustration. 2. While holding Nut (4) from rotating, tighten Screw Assembly (special tool #8838-2, Screw Assembly) (1) using hand tools , pressing isolator (2) into crossmember (4). Stop when the isolator (2) bottoms against Remover/Installer, Bushing (special tool #9031-7A, Installer, Bushing). 3. Remove tools.

Fig. 85: Rear Axle-to-Crossmember Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Carefully raise rear axle. 5. Install two rear axle-to-crossmember bolts (1) and torque to 135 N.m (100 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 86: Rear Axle Isolator Bolt/Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Install rear axle forward mount isolator bolt/nut (1) and torque to 135 N.m (100 ft. lbs.).

Fig. 87: Bolts & Stabilizer Bar Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 7. Position the stabilizer bar (2) and install the upper and lower stabilizer bar to cradle bolts (1) and tighten to 110 N.m (81 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust if necessary. Refer to TAILPIPE, EXHAUST , INSTALLATION . ISOLATOR, REAR CROSSMEMBER, FRAME

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 88: Isolator Location Mark & Crossmember Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the rear suspension crossmember. Refer to CROSSMEMBER, REAR , REMOVALCROSSMEMBER, TRANSMISSION , REMOVAL. 2. As an installation reference, carefully mark location of isolator (1) requiring removal on crossmember (2) (around isolator can flange) using a marker or crayon. Do not use a scratch awl to mark location.

Fig. 89: Bushing Remover/Installer, Support Bolts, Rear Suspension Crossmember, Isolator & Extension Housing Puller Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

1 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 6602 2 - Support Bolts 3 - Rear Suspension Crossmember 4 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 9520-1 5 - Isolator 6 - Puller, Extension Housing 8244 NOTE:

Prior to using special tools, lubricate Remover/Installer, Bushing (special tool #6602, Remover/Installer, Bushing) Screw Assembly (1) threads to provide ease of use and promote tool longevity.

NOTE:

When installing thrust bearing, be sure to place hardened side toward bolt head.

3. Assemble tools over isolator as shown in illustration. 4. Install two bolts (2) as shown in illustration to stabilize Puller, Extension Housing (special tool #8244, Puller, Extension Housing) (6) legs during the removal procedure. 5. While holding screw assembly from rotating, using hand tools , tighten Remover/Installer, Bushing (special tool #6602, Remover/Installer, Bushing) nut (1) until Remover/Installer, Bushing (special tool #9520-1, Installer Disc) (4) comes in contact with isolator (5) and Puller, Extension Housing (special tool #8244, Puller, Extension Housing) (6) sets squarely against crossmember (3). 6. Continue to tighten Remover/Installer, Bushing (special tool #6602, Remover/Installer, Bushing) nut (1), pressing isolator (5) out of crossmember (3). 7. Remove tools with isolator. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 90: Isolator Location Mark & Crossmember

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: It is very important that isolator be installed in same position as original to maintain vehicle ride quality and isolator longevity. That is why isolator, once installed, needs to closely match reference marks applied upon removal of original isolator. 1. Position isolator (1) on crossmember (2) isolator bore aligning isolator can flange with reference marks applied during removal.

Fig. 91: Ball Joint Press, Remover/Installer, Bushing, Rear Suspension Crossmember & Bushing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1 - Press, Ball Joint C-4212F 2 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 9031-5A 3 - Remover/Installer, Bushing 9031-1 4 - Rear Suspension Crossmember 5 - Bushing NOTE:

Prior to using special tools, lubricate Press, Ball Joint (special tool #C4212F, Press, Ball Joint) (1) threads to provide ease of use and promote tool longevity.

NOTE:

A mixture of soap and water may be used to aid installation of the isolator.

2. Assemble tools over isolator as shown in illustration. 3. Tighten Press, Ball Joint (special tool #C-4212F, Press, Ball Joint) (1) screw-drive, pressing isolator (5) into crossmember (4). Install isolator until isolator can flange contacts surface of crossmember. 4. Remove tools.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

5. Install the rear suspension crossmember (4). Refer to CROSSMEMBER, REAR , INSTALLATIONCROSSMEMBER, TRANSMISSION , INSTALLATION.

UNDER BODY PROTECTION PLATE, SKID, FRONT REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 92: Skid Plate & Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the six fasteners (2) and remove the skid plate (1). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 93: Skid Plate & Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Install the skid plate (1) and install the six fasteners (2). 3. Tighten the fasteners to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.). PLATE, SKID, FRONT SUSPENSION REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 94: Skid Plate & Bolts

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the four fasteners (2) and remove the skid plate (1). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 95: Skid Plate & Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Install the skid plate (1) and install the four bolts (2). 3. Tighten the bolts to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.). PLATE, SKID, FUEL TANK REMOVAL REMOVAL

NOTE:

Right side shown in illustration, left side similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Fuel Tank, Skid Plate & Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the three fasteners (3) and remove the skid plate (2). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

Right side shown in illustration, left side similar.

Fig. 97: Fuel Tank, Skid Plate & Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Install the skid plate (2) and install the three fasteners (3). 3. Tighten the bolts to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.). PLATE, SKID, TRANSMISSION REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 98: Skid Plate & Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the five fasteners (2) and remove the skid plate (1). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 99: Skid Plate & Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Install the skid plate (1) and install the five fasteners (2). 3. Tighten the fasteners to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.). PLATE, SKID, TRANSFER CASE REMOVAL REMOVAL

Fig. 100: Skid Plate, Nuts & Fasteners

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Frame and Bumpers - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the two nuts (2) and four bolts (3) and remove the skid plate. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 101: Skid Plate, Nuts & Fasteners Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Install the skid plate and install the four fasteners (3) and nuts (2). 2. Tighten the bolts to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

A Manual Temperature Control (MTC) dual zone and an Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) dual zone heating-A/C system is available on this model. To maintain the performance level of the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system, the engine cooling system must be properly maintained. The use of a bug screen is not recommended. Any obstructions in front of the radiator or A/C condenser will reduce the performance of the A/C and engine cooling systems. The engine cooling system includes the radiator, thermostat, radiator hoses and the engine coolant pump. For more information, refer to ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM before attempting any service to the engine cooling system.

Fig. 1: HVAC Housing, Mode, Recirculation Door Actuator, Air Filter & Blower Motor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC All vehicles are equipped with a common HVAC housing (1). The heating-A/C system combines A/C, heating, and ventilating capabilities in a single unit mounted within the passenger compartment, beneath the instrument panel. The HVAC housing includes: 

Mode door actuator (2) and air-doors

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

        

Recirculation door actuator (3) and air-door Particulate air filter (4), when equipped Blower motor (5) Blower motor power module (ATC) (6) Passenger side blend door actuator (7) and air-door Evaporator temperature sensor (8) Heater core (9) A/C evaporator (10) Driver side blend door actuator (11) and air-door

NOTE:

An electric positive temperature coefficient (PTC) heater is used on vehicles when equipped with the 3.0L diesel engine. The PTC heater unit compensates for the lower engine coolant temperatures produced by the diesel engine. The PTC heater unit is mounted in the HVAC air distribution housing, downstream of the heater core. For more information, refer to UNIT, HEATER, DESCRIPTION.

Based upon the system and selected mode, conditioned air can exit the HVAC housing through one or a combination of the four main housing outlets: defrost, panel, floor and console. The defrost and panel outlets are located on the top of the HVAC housing, the floor outlets are located at each side of the HVAC housing, and the console outlet is located at the bottom rear of the HVAC housing. Once the conditioned air exits the HVAC housing, it is further directed through molded plastic ducts to the outlets within the vehicle interior. These outlets and their locations are as follows: 









Defroster Outlets - Two large defroster outlets are located near the center of the instrument panel top cover, near the base of the windshield. Side Window Demister Outlets - There are two side window demister outlets. One is located at the bottom of each A-pillar. Panel Outlets - There are four panel outlets in the instrument panel. One located near each outboard end of the instrument panel facing the rear of the vehicle and one located on each side of the instrument panel center bezel. Floor Outlets - There are four floor panel outlets. One outlet located above each side of the floor panel center tunnel near the dash panel and one outlet located under the rear of each front seat. Console Outlets - There are four console outlets located at the rear of the center floor console. Two facing the rear of the vehicle and one on each side of the console, directing conditioned air under each front seat.

OPERATION OPERATION Both the Manual Temperature Control (MTC) and the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) heating-A/C systems are dual zone, blend-air type systems. In a dual zone blend-air heating-A/C system, two blend-air doors control the amount of conditioned air that is allowed to flow through, or around the heater core. The two blendair doors provide completely independent side-to-side temperature control of the discharge air. The temperature

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

controls determine the discharge air temperatures by operating the blend door actuators, which move the blendair doors. This design allows almost immediate control of the output air temperatures.

Fig. 2: Blend Air System Schematic Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Typical blend-air type HVAC system shown in illustration.

The heating-A/C system pulls outside (ambient) air through the fresh air intake (4) located at the cowl panel at the base of the windshield and into the air inlet housing above the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) housing and passes through the A/C evaporator (7). Air flow is then directed either through or around the heater core (2). This is done by adjusting the position of the blend-air door(s) (3) with the temperature control(s) located on the A/C-heater control in the instrument panel. Air flow is then directed out the floor outlet (8), instrument panel outlet (10) or the defroster outlet (1) in various combinations by adjusting the position of the mode-air doors (9 and 11) using the mode control located on the A/C-heater control. The temperature and mode control uses electrical actuators to operate the air doors. The velocity of the air flow out of the outlets can be adjusted with the blower speed control located on the A/Cheater control. The fresh air intake can be shut off by pressing the Recirculation button on the A/C-heater control. This will operate the electrically actuated recirculation-air door (5), which closes off the fresh air intake. With the fresh air intake closed, the conditioned air within the vehicle is pulled back into the HVAC housing through the recirculation air intake (6) located within the passenger compartment. The A/C compressor can be engaged by pressing the A/C (snowflake) button on the MTC A/C-heater control or is automatically engaged on the ATC system when set temperatures require conditioned air cooling. On both systems, the A/C compressor will automatically engage when in any Mix to Defrost position. This will remove heat and humidity from the air before it is directed through or around the heater core.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

The two slot-type defroster outlets receive airflow from the HVAC housing through the molded plastic defroster ducts, which connect to the HVAC housing defroster outlets. The airflow from the defroster outlets is directed by fixed vanes in the defroster outlet grilles and cannot be adjusted. The defroster outlet grilles are serviceable from the instrument panel top cover. The side window demister outlets receive airflow from the HVAC housing through the molded plastic demister ducts. The demisters direct air from the HVAC housing through the outlets located on the A-pillars. The airflow from the side window demister outlets is directed by fixed vanes in the demister outlet grilles and cannot be adjusted. The side window demister outlet grilles are not serviceable from the A-pillars. The demisters operate when the controls are in Heat, Bi-level, Mix and Defrost modes. The four instrument panel outlets receive airflow from the HVAC housing through two molded plastic main panel ducts. One duct directs air flow out of the right side instrument panel outlets, while the other duct delivers air flow to the left side outlets. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The floor outlets receive airflow from the HVAC housing through the floor distribution ducts which are connected to the rear of the HVAC air distribution housing. Two plastic rear distribution ducts and one center console duct attach to the rear of the air distribution housing and provide conditioned air to the rear seating positions. The airflow from the two rear distribution ducts cannot be adjusted. The two outlets located at the rear of the floor console can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air, but the outlets on either side of the console cannot be adjusted and air flow is directed by fixed vanes. NOTE:

It is important to keep the HVAC air intake opening clear of debris. Leaf particles and other debris that is small enough to pass through the cowl opening screen can accumulate within the HVAC housing. The closed, warm, damp and dark environment created within the housing is ideal for the growth of certain molds, mildews and other fungi. Any accumulation of decaying plant matter provides an additional food source for fungal spores, which enter the housing with the fresh intake-air. Excess debris, as well as objectionable odors created by decaying plant matter and growing fungi can be discharged into the passenger compartment during heater-A/C operation if the air intake opening is not kept clear of debris.

The A/C system is designed for the use of non-CFC, R-134a refrigerant and uses an A/C expansion valve to meter the flow of refrigerant to the A/C evaporator. The A/C evaporator cools and dehumidifies the incoming air prior to blending it with the heated air. To maintain minimum evaporator temperatures and prevent evaporator freezing, an evaporator temperature sensor is used. This sensor is located downstream of the evaporator and supplies an evaporator temperature signal to the A/C-heater control.

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING A/C PERFORMANCE The A/C system is designed to provide the passenger compartment with low temperature and low humidity air. The A/C evaporator, located in the HVAC housing is cooled to temperatures near the freezing point. As warm damp air passes over the fins of the A/C evaporator, the air transfers its heat to the refrigerant in the evaporator coils and the moisture in the air condenses on the evaporator fins. During periods of high heat and humidity, an

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

A/C system will be more effective in the Recirculation mode (max-A/C). With the system in the Recirculation mode, only air from the passenger compartment passes through the A/C evaporator. As the passenger compartment air dehumidifies, the A/C system performance levels rise. Humidity has an important bearing on the temperature of the air delivered to the interior of the vehicle. It is important to understand the effect that humidity has on the performance of the A/C system. When humidity is high, the A/C evaporator has to perform a double duty. It must lower the air temperature, and it must lower the temperature of the moisture in the air that condenses on the evaporator fins. Condensing the moisture in the air transfers heat energy into the evaporator fins and coils. This reduces the amount of heat the A/C evaporator can absorb from the air. High humidity greatly reduces the ability of the A/C evaporator to lower the temperature of the air. However, evaporator capacity used to reduce the amount of moisture in the air is not wasted. Wringing some of the moisture out of the air entering the vehicle adds to the comfort of the passengers. Although, an owner may expect too much from their A/C system on humid days. A performance test is the best way to determine whether the system is performing up to design standards. This test also provides valuable clues as to the possible cause of trouble with the A/C system. The ambient air temperature in the location where the vehicle will be tested must be a minimum of 21° C (70° F) for this test. A/C PERFORMANCE TEST

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible serious or fatal injury. CAUTION: The use of an A/C recycling/charging station for purposes of determining the actual charge level of an A/C system is not recommend. Service recycling/charging stations do not reflect the correct amount of refrigerant charge in the A/C system after a single "reclaim" cycle. Tests have shown that it can take two or more "reclaim" cycles to remove all of the refrigerant charge, depending on the equipment being used. Use only the following procedure for determining the proper charge level. NOTE:

When connecting the service equipment coupling to the line fitting, verify that the valve of the coupling is fully closed. This will reduce the amount of effort required to make the connection.

NOTE:

The work area ambient temperature and the evaporator temperature must be above 18.3°C (65°F) prior to conducting the A/C Performance Test.

1. Conduct the A/C System Performance Test (Cooldown Test) found within the HVAC System Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are found in the A/C -heater control, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), refer to 2. If any DTCs are found, repair as required, then, refer to 2. 2. Connect a tachometer and a manifold gauge set.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

3. Operate the heating-A/C system under the following conditions.  Engine at 1, 000 rpm at operating temperature  Doors and windows closed  Transmission in Park  A/C-heater controls set to Recirculation mode (max-A/C), full cool, panel mode, high blower and with A/C compressor engaged. If the A/C compressor does not engage, see the A/C System Diagnosis table. 4. Insert a thermometer in the driver side center panel air outlet and operate the A/C system until the thermometer temperature stabilizes. NOTE:

This procedure requires the technician to know what the temperature and relative humidity is at the time of the test. The temperature must be combined with the relative humidity to calculate the apparent ambient temperature ("feels like" temperature), when the temperatures are above 21° C (70° F). Use the current ambient temperature and the relative humidity in your location. This information can be obtained from multiple sources, such as the internet or local news media.

5. With the A/C clutch engaged, compare the air temperature at the center panel outlet and the A/C compressor discharge pressure (high side) to the A/C Performance Temperature and Pressure chart. The A/C clutch may cycle, depending upon the ambient temperature and humidity. If the A/C clutch cycles, use the readings obtained before the clutch disengaged (coldest temperature). A/C PERFORMANCE TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE 21° 27° 32° Ambient Air 38°C 43°C C C C Temperature (100° (110° (70° (80° (90° (Apparent) F) F) F) F) F) Maximum 12° Allowable 9°C 9°C 15°C 18°C C Air (48° (48° (59° (65° (54° Temperature F) F) F) F) F) at Center Panel Outlet 138 138 207 207 241 to to to to to Suction 207 207 276 276 310 Pressure at kPa kPa kPa kPa kPa Service Port (20 (20 (30 (30 (35 to to to (Low Side) to 40 to 45 30 30 40 psi) psi) psi) psi) psi)

Discharge

1034 1379 1551 1724 2068 to to to to to 1724 2068 2241 2413 2758

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Pressure at kPa kPa kPa Service Port (150 (200 (225 (High Side) to to to 250 300 325 psi) psi) psi)

kPa (250 to 350 psi)

kPa (300 to 400 psi)

6. If the air outlet temperature fails to meet the specifications in the A/C Performance Temperature and Pressure chart, or if the A/C compressor discharge pressure is high, see the A/C System Diagnosis table. A/C SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS Condition Possible Causes Correction Rapid A/C clutch cycling 1. Very low refrigerant system 1. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REFRIGERANT SYSTEM LEAKS. Test (ten or more cycles per charge the refrigerant system for leaks. Repair, minute) evacuate and charge the refrigerant system, if required. Equal pressures, but the 1. No refrigerant in the 1. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING compressor clutch does not refrigerant system REFRIGERANT SYSTEM LEAKS. Test engage the refrigerant system for leaks. Repair, evacuate and charge the refrigerant system, if required. 2. Open fuse 2. Refer to appropriate Wiring Information. Check the fuses in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). Repair the shorted circuit or component and replace the fuse(s), if required. 3. Inoperative A/C clutch coil 3. Refer to A/C CLUTCH COIL. Test the A/C clutch coil and replace, if required. 4. Improperly installed or 4. Refer to SENSOR, EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE. Test the sensor and inoperative evaporator replace, if required. temperature sensor 5. Inoperative A/C pressure 5. Refer to TRANSDUCER, A/C transducer PRESSURE. Test the sensor and replace, if required. 6. Inoperative A/C heater 6. Refer to appropriate Electrical Diagnostic control, PCM or TIPM article. Test the A/C heater control, PCM or TIPM and replace, if required. Normal pressures, but A/C 1. Excessive refrigerant oil in 1. Refer to REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL. Performance Test air system Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant temperatures at center panel system and inspect the refrigerant oil outlet are too high content. Restore the refrigerant oil to the proper level, if required. 2. Blend door actuator(s) 2. Refer to OPERATION. Inspect the improperly installed or actuators for proper operation and replace, if required. inoperative 3. Blend-air door(s) 3. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC. Inspect the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

inoperative or sealing improperly The low side pressure is 1. Low refrigerant system normal or slightly low, and charge the high side pressure is too low

The low side pressure is normal or slightly high, and the high side pressure is too high

The low side pressure is too high, and the high side pressure is too low

The low side pressure is too low, and the high side pressure is too high

blend-air doors for proper operation and sealing. Repair if required. 1. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REFRIGERANT SYSTEM LEAKS. Test the refrigerant system for leaks. Repair, evacuate and charge the refrigerant system, if required. 2. Refrigerant flow through the 2. Refer to EVAPORATOR, A/C. Replace A/C evaporator is restricted the restricted A/C evaporator, if required. 3. Inoperative A/C compressor 3. Refer to A/C COMPRESSOR. Replace the A/C compressor, if required. 1. A/C condenser air flow 1. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C. Check the restricted A/C condenser for damaged fins, foreign objects obstructing air flow through the condenser fins, and missing or improperly installed air seals. Clean, repair, or replace components as required. 2. Refrigerant flow through the 2. Refer to DRIER, A/C RECEIVER. A/C receiver/drier is restricted Replace the restricted receiver/drier, if required. 3. Inoperative radiator cooling 3. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . fan Test the radiator cooling fan and replace, if required. 4. Refrigerant system 4. Refer to REFRIGERANT. Recover the overcharged refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Charge the refrigerant system to the proper level, if required. 5. Air in the refrigerant system 5. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING REFRIGERANT SYSTEM LEAKS. Test the refrigerant system for leaks. Repair, evacuate and charge the refrigerant system, if required. 6. Engine overheating 6. Refer to ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . Test the engine cooling system and repair, if required. 1. Accessory drive belt 1. Refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT . slipping Inspect the accessory drive belt condition and tension. Repair as required. 2. Inoperative A/C expansion 2. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING A/C EXPANSION VALVE. Test and valve replace the valve, if required. 3. Inoperative A/C compressor 3. Refer to A/C COMPRESSOR. Replace the A/C compressor, if required. 1. Restricted refrigerant flow 1. Refer to LINE, A/C DISCHARGE and through the refrigerant lines LINE, A/C LIQUID and LINE, A/C SUCTION. Inspect the refrigerant lines for

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

2. Restricted refrigerant flow through the A/C expansion valve 3. Restricted refrigerant flow through the A/C condenser

kinks, tight bends or improper routing. Correct the routing or replace the refrigerant line, if required. 2. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING A/C EXPANSION VALVE. Test and replace the valve, if required. 3. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C. Replace the restricted A/C condenser, if required.

HEATER PERFORMANCE Refer to ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM before performing the following tests. Check the engine coolant level and flow, engine coolant reserve/recovery system operation, accessory drive belt condition and tension, radiator air flow and the fan drive operation. Perform the A/C System Performance Test, which is found within the HVAC System Test. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . If any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are found in the A/C heater control or Powertrain Control Module (PCM), repair as necessary. MAXIMUM HEATER OUTPUT

Engine coolant is delivered to the heater core through two heater hoses. With the engine idling at normal operating temperature, set the temperature control to the full hot position, the mode control to the floor position, and the blower motor control to the highest speed position. Using a test thermometer, check the temperature of the air being discharged at the front floor outlets. Compare the test thermometer reading to the Heater Temperature Reference chart. Ambient Air Temperature Minimum Heater System Air Outlet Temperature

16° C (60° F) 52° C (125° F)

21° C (70° F) 56° C (133° F)

27° C (80° F) 59° C (139° F)

32° C (90° F) 62° C (144° F)

Refer to ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . If the heater outlet air temperature is below the minimum specification. Both of the heater hoses should be hot to the touch. The coolant return heater hose should be slightly cooler than the coolant supply heater hose. If the return hose is much cooler than the supply hose, locate and repair the engine coolant flow obstruction in the cooling system. OBSTRUCTED COOLANT FLOW

Possible locations or causes of obstructed coolant flow are as follows:      

Inoperative water pump. Inoperative thermostat. Pinched or kinked heater hoses. Improper heater hose routing. Plugged heater hoses or supply and return ports at the cooling system connections. Plugged heater core.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

If proper coolant flow through the cooling system is verified, and heater outlet air temperature is low, a mechanical problem may exist. MECHANICAL PROBLEMS

Possible locations or causes of insufficient heat due to mechanical problems are as follows:       

Obstructed cowl air intake. Obstructed heater system outlets. Inoperative engine thermostat. Inoperative blower motor system. Inoperative A/C heater control. Inoperative blend door actuator(s). Inoperative, obstructed or improperly installed blend-air door.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

If the heater outlet air temperature cannot be adjusted with the temperature control on the A/C-heater control, the following could require service:     

Inoperative A/C heater control. Inoperative blend door actuator(s). Inoperative, obstructed or improperly installed blend-air door. Improper engine coolant temperature. Inoperative related wiring harness or connectors.

STANDARD PROCEDURE STANDARD PROCEDURE - A/C EVAPORATOR CLEANING Some vehicle operators may experience a musty odor from the A/C system, primarily at start up in hot and humid climates. This odor may be the result of microbial growth on the cooling coil. During normal A/C system operation, condensation forms in and around the A/C cooling coil. When airborne pollutants mix with this condensation, bacteria and fungi growth begins and odor may result. If the vehicle operator experiences a musty odor when operating the A/C system, perform the following procedure. WARNING: Always use eye protection, rubber gloves and protective clothing when performing the following procedure. Avoid continuous breathing of vapors from evaporator coil cleaning and sealing fluids. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Failure to follow these instruction may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 1. On models equipped with a particulate air filter, remove the filter and inspect for dirt and debris. Refer to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

13.

14. 15.

FILTER, PARTICULATE AIR, REMOVAL. Discard the used particulate filter if required. Remove the cowl panel cover. Refer to COVER, COWL PANEL . Clean any dirt and debris that may be present at the HVAC fresh air inlet screen and at the top of the cowl panel. Install the cowl panel cover. Raise and support the vehicle. Inspect the evaporator drain hose or tube (depending on application) for foreign material that may be blocking the drain and repair as necessary. Once drain operation has been verified;  when equipped with a rubber drain hose, temporarily pinch the drain hose closed using an appropriate pair of heater hose pliers.  when equipped with a solid plastic drain tube, obtain an appropriate size rubber or plastic cap or plug and temporarily cap or plug the drain tube. Lower the vehicle. Place a protective cover over the front passenger side floor and seat area. Remove the blower motor. Refer to MOTOR, BLOWER, REMOVAL. Remove the blower motor power module. Refer to MODULE, POWER, BLOWER MOTOR, REMOVAL. Clean any dirt and debris that may be present inside the HVAC blower motor housing and all readily accessible areas inside the HVAC housing. If necessary, use a vacuum with a small flexible hose, and take caution not to damage the evaporator core fins. Using PSE Flex Spray Delivery Tool 534-62637 or equivalent, completely coat the entire surface of A/C evaporator with three bottles of Mopar® Cooling Coil Cleaner through the blower motor and power module or resistor openings. Be sure to use all of the coil cleaner in each container. Allow the vehicle to sit for 30 minutes. Raise and support the vehicle. WARNING: Excess cooling coil cleaner will drain from the evaporator housing when the clamp, cap or plug is removed from the evaporator drain hose or tube. Always use eye protection, rubber gloves and protective clothing. Avoid continuous breathing of vapors from evaporator coil cleaning fluid. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Failure to follow these instruction may result in possible serious or fatal injury.

16. Remove the previously installed clamp, cap or plug from the evaporator drain hose or tube and allow excess coil cleaner to drain from the HVAC housing. 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Refill the three empty coil cleaner bottles with clean tap water. 19. Using PSE Flex Spray Delivery Tool 534-62637 or equivalent, completely rinse the entire surface of A/C evaporator with the three bottles of clean tap water through the blower motor and power module openings. Be sure to use all of the water in each container.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

20. Install the blower motor. Refer to MOTOR, BLOWER, INSTALLATION. 21. Install the blower motor power module. Refer to MODULE, POWER, BLOWER MOTOR, INSTALLATION. 22. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the A/C compressor to disable compressor operation. Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C, REMOVAL. 23. Start the engine 24. Adjust all the windows so they are open approximately 8 mm (0.5 in.). 25. Set the A/C heater controls to the following:  air distribution to Panel and Recirculation mode  temperature to full heat 26. Allow the vehicle to run for 20 minutes. 27. Turn the engine off. 28. Raise and support the vehicle. 29. Inspect the evaporator drain hose or tube (depending on application) for foreign material that may have blocked the drain during evaporator coil cleaning and repair as necessary. 30. Once drain operation has been verified;  when equipped with a rubber drain hose, temporarily pinch the drain hose closed using an appropriate pair of heater hose pliers.  when equipped with a solid plastic drain tube, obtain an appropriate size rubber or plastic cap or plug and temporarily cap or plug the drain tube. 31. Lower the vehicle. 32. Remove the blower motor. Refer to MOTOR, BLOWER, REMOVAL. 33. Remove the blower motor power module. Refer to MODULE, POWER, BLOWER MOTOR, REMOVAL. 34. Using PSE Flex Spray Delivery Tool 534-62637 or equivalent, completely coat the entire surface of A/C evaporator with one bottle of Mopar® Cooling Coil Coating through the blower motor and power module openings. Be sure to use all of the coil coating in the container. NOTE:

Be sure to thoroughly clean out the spray delivery tool with warm water once coil coating is complete to prevent damage to the tool.

35. Refill the empty bottles with clean warm tap water and completely rinse out the PSE Flex Spray Delivery Tool 534-62637, or equivalent. 36. Allow the vehicle to sit for 30 minutes. 37. Install the blower motor. Refer to MOTOR, BLOWER, INSTALLATION. 38. Install the blower motor power module. Refer to MODULE, POWER, BLOWER MOTOR, INSTALLATION. 39. Raise and support the vehicle. WARNING: Excess cooling coil coating will drain from the evaporator housing when the clamp, cap or plug is removed from the evaporator drain

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

hose or tube. Always use eye protection, rubber gloves and protective clothing. Avoid continuous breathing of vapors from evaporator coil sealing fluid. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Failure to follow these instruction may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 40. Remove the previously installed clamp, cap or plug from the evaporator drain hose or tube and allow excess coil coating to drain from the HVAC housing. 41. Lower the vehicle. 42. Start the engine 43. Adjust all the windows so they are open approximately 8 mm (0.5 in.). 44. Set the A/C heater controls to the following:  air distribution to Panel and Recirculation mode  temperature to full heat 45. Allow the vehicle to run for 20 minutes. 46. Turn vehicle off. 47. Remove protective cover from front passenger side floor and seat area. 48. On models equipped with a particulate air filter, install the filter. Refer to FILTER, PARTICULATE AIR, INSTALLATION. 49. Connect the wire harness connector to the A/C compressor. Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C, INSTALLATION. 50. Verify proper heating and A/C system operation.

SPECIFICATIONS A/C SYSTEM Item A/C Compressor

A/C Clutch Air Gap

A/C Clutch Coil Draw

A/C Clutch Coil Resistance Freeze-up Control Pressure Control

Description Denso 10SRE18 - 3.0L/5.7L Engines Visteon RS-18 - 3.6L Engine 0.35 - 0.60 mm (0.014 - 0.024 in.) 0.35 - 0.65 mm (0.014 - 0.025 in.) 3.2 amps Max @ 12V ± 0.5V @ 21° C (70° F) 3.1 - 4.0 amps @ 12V ± 0.5V @ 21° C (70° F) 3.3 - 3.5 ohms 3.0 - 4.0 ohms Evaporator Temperature Sensor A/C Pressure Transducer

Notes ND-8 PAG oil* VC-46 PAG oil* 3.0L/5.7L Engines 3.6L Engine 3.0L/5.7L Engines 3.6L Engine 3.0L/5.7L Engines 3.6L Engine HVAC housing mounted A/C discharge line mounted See A/C Underhood Specification

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Refrigerant Charge Capacity 623.7g (1.375 lbs.) R-134a

Label located in the engine compartment

*Always use the type of PAG oil listed for the model being serviced. See A/C Underhood Specification Label located in the engine compartment. Do not mix different types of PAG oils. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. FASTENER TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Description All Screws NOT Listed Below A/C Compressor to Engine A/C Expansion Valve to Evaporator Bolts Air Distribution Housing Halves Screws Air Distribution Housing to HVAC Housing Screws Air Inlet Housing to HVAC Housing Screws A/C Pressure Transducer Blower Motor Screws Compressor Shaft Bolt Flange to HVAC Housing Screw Heater Core Bracket Screw Heater Core Tube to Heater Core Clamp Screws Heater Core Tube Bracket Screw HVAC Air inlet Duct to Dash Panel Nuts HVAC Housing Halves Screws HVAC Housing to Dash Panel Nuts HVAC Housing to Instrument Panel Nuts Refrigerant Line to A/C

N.m

Ft. Lbs.

In. Lbs.

2

-

17

Specific fastener placement and torque pattern required. Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C, INSTALLATION. 11

-

97

2.2

-

20

2.2

-

20

2.2

-

20

5.1 2.2 19

-

45 20 168

2.2

-

20

2.2

-

20

1.7

-

15

2.2

-

20

4.5

-

40

2.2

-

20

4.5

-

40

4.5

-

40

20

15

-

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Compressor Nut Refrigerant Lines to A/C Condenser Nut Refrigerant Lines to A/C Expansion Valve Nut Refrigerant Line to Refrigerant Line Nut

20

15

-

20

15

-

20

15

-

SPECIAL TOOLS SPECIAL TOOLS 6801 - Terminal Probe (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 10190.) 9764 - Pliers, A/C Snap Ring (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 9909.) C-4755 - Trim Stick (Originally Shipped In Kit Number(s) 9299, 9299CC, 9299CC, 9300A-CAN.)

CONTROLS ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

Fig. 3: Blend Door Actuator, Connector Receptacle, Mounting Tabs & Splines Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

The blend door actuators (1) are reversible, 12 volt direct current (DC), servo motors. Both dual zone heatingA/C systems use two blend-air doors, which are controlled by two blend door actuators. The driver side blend door actuator is located on the driver side end of the HVAC air distribution housing and is mechanically connected to the driver side blend-air door. The passenger side blend door actuator is located on the passenger side of the air distribution housing and is mechanically connected to the passenger side blend-air door. The blend door actuators are interchangeable with each other, as well as with the actuators for the mode-air doors and the recirculation-air door. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Each actuator has an identical output shaft with splines (3) that connect it to its respective door linkage, and three integral mounting tabs (4) that allow the actuator to be secured to the air distribution housing. The blend door actuators require mechanical indexing to the blend-air door cams and are electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. OPERATION OPERATION

The blend door actuators are connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The blend door actuator(s) can move the blend-air door(s) in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the blend-air door will move in one direction. When the A/Cheater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the blend-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the blend-air door(s) stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the blend door actuators and the blend-air doors. The A/C-heater control learns the blend-air doors stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the blend door actuator circuits. The blend door actuator(s) is diagnosed using a scan tool. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . The blend door actuator(s) cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The dual zone system has two blend door actuators, one for the driver side blend-air door and one for the passenger side blend-air door.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

LEFT SIDE

Fig. 4: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the left side instrument panel silencer. 3. On RHD models, remove the glove box and glove box closeout. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, REMOVAL . 4. On LHD models, remove the knee blocker. Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, REMOVAL . 5. Remove the left side floor distribution duct from the HVAC air distribution housing (4). Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, REMOVAL. 6. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (3) to the left side of the air distribution housing. 7. Remove the blend door actuator from the air distribution housing. 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the blend door actuator and remove the actuator from the vehicle. RIGHT SIDE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the right side instrument panel silencer. 3. On LHD models, remove the glove box and glove box closeout. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, REMOVAL . 4. Remove the right side floor distribution duct from the HVAC air distribution housing (4). Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, REMOVAL. 5. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (3) to the right side of the air distribution housing. 6. Remove the blend door actuator from the air distribution housing. 7. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the blend door actuator and remove the actuator from the vehicle. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE: LEFT SIDE

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Blend Door Actuator, Air Distribution Housing, Actuator Output Shaft & Blend Door Drive Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the blend door actuator (1) into the vehicle. 2. Install the blend door actuator onto the left side of the HVAC air distribution housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (4) with those on the blend door drive gear (3).

Fig. 7: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. Install the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (3) to the left side of the HVAC air distribution housing (4). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the blend door actuator. 5. Install the left side floor distribution duct. Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, INSTALLATION.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

6. On LHD models, install the knee blocker. Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, REMOVAL . 7. On RHD models, install the glove box closeout and the glove box. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, INSTALLATION . 8. Install the left side instrument panel silencer. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 10. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . RIGHT SIDE

Fig. 8: Blend Door Actuator, Air Distribution Housing, Actuator Output Shaft & Blend Door Drive Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the blend door actuator (1) into the vehicle. 2. Install the blend door actuator onto the right side of the HVAC air distribution housing (4). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (2) with those on the blend door drive gear (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. Install the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (3) to the right side of the HVAC air distribution housing (4). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the blend door actuator. 5. Install the right side floor distribution duct. Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, INSTALLATION. 6. On LHD models, install the glove box closeout and the glove box. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, INSTALLATION . 7. Install the right side instrument panel silencer. 8. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 9. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . ACTUATOR, MODE DOOR DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Blend Door Actuator, Connector Receptacle, Mounting Tabs & Splines Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The mode door actuator (1) is a reversible, 12 volt direct current (DC), servo motor. The mode door actuator is located on the upper right side of the HVAC air distribution housing and mechanically connected to the modeair doors. The mode door actuator is interchangeable with the actuators for the blend-air doors and the recirculation-air door. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Each actuator has an identical output shaft with splines (3) that connect it to its door linkage and three integral mounting tabs (4) that allow the actuator to be secured to the air distribution housing. The mode door actuator requires mechanical indexing to the mode-air door linkage and is electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. OPERATION OPERATION

The two mode door actuators are connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by dedicated two-wire leads and connectors of the HVAC wire harness. The mode door actuators can move the panel/defrost/demist/floor air doors in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the mode-air doors will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the mode-air doors moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the mode-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the mode door actuators and the mode-air doors. The A/C-heater control learns the mode-air doors stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the mode door actuator circuits. The mode door actuators are diagnosed using a scan tool. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

The mode door actuators cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

Fig. 11: Three Screws, Mode Door Actuator & Mode Door Bracket Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the right side instrument panel silencer. 3. Remove the right side floor distribution duct from the HVAC air distribution housing. Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, REMOVAL. 4. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the mode door actuator (2) to the mode door bracket (4) located on the right side of the air distribution housing. 5. Remove the mode door actuator from the air distribution housing. 6. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the mode door actuator and remove the actuator from the vehicle. INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

INSTALLATION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 12: Mode Door Actuator, Mode Door Linkage Bracket, Actuator Output Shaft & Mode Door Drive Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the mode door actuator (3) into the vehicle. 2. Install the mode door actuator onto the mode door linkage bracket (1) located on the right side of the HVAC air distribution housing. If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the flat area of the splines on the actuator output shaft (4) with the flat area in the mode door drive gear (2).

Fig. 13: Three Screws, Mode Door Actuator & Mode Door Bracket Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

3. Install the three screws (3) that secure the mode door actuator (2) to the mode door linkage bracket (4). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the mode door actuator. 5. Install the right side floor distribution duct. Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, INSTALLATION. 6. Install the right side instrument panel silencer. 7. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 8. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . ACTUATOR, RECIRCULATION DOOR DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

Fig. 14: Blend Door Actuator, Connector Receptacle, Mounting Tabs & Splines Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The recirculation door actuator (1) is a reversible, 12 volt direct current (DC), servo motor. The recirculation door actuator is located on the HVAC air inlet housing and is directly connected to the pivot shaft of the recirculation-air door. The recirculation door actuator is interchangeable with the actuators for the blend-air doors and the mode-air doors. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Each actuator has an identical output shaft with splines (3) that connect it to its door linkage and three integral mounting tabs (4) that allow the actuator to be secured to the air inlet housing. The recirculation door actuator requires mechanical indexing to the recirculation door pivot shaft and is electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

OPERATION

The recirculation door actuator is connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The recirculation door actuator can move the recirculation-air door in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the recirculation-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the recirculation-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the recirculation-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the recirculation door actuator and the recirculation-air door. The A/C-heater control learns the recirculation-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the recirculation door actuator circuits. The recirculation door actuator is diagnosed using a scan tool. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . The recirculation door actuator cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Two Screws, Recirculation Door Actuator, HVAC Air Inlet Housing & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the passenger side instrument panel silencer. 3. Remove the passenger side floor distribution duct from the HVAC air distribution housing. Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, REMOVAL. 4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the recirculation door actuator (3) to the HVAC air inlet housing (4). 5. Remove the recirculation door actuator from the air inlet housing. 6. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the recirculation door actuator and remove the actuator from the vehicle. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 16: Recirculation Door Actuator, HVAC Air Inlet Housing, Actuator Output Shaft & Recirculation Door Pivot Shaft Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the recirculation door actuator (1) into the vehicle. 2. Install the recirculation door actuator onto the HVAC air inlet housing (3). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines of the actuator output shaft (4) with those on the recirculation door pivot shaft (2).

Fig. 17: Two Screws, Recirculation Door Actuator, HVAC Air Inlet Housing & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. Install the two screws (1) that secure the recirculation door actuator (3) to the HVAC air inlet housing (4). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the recirculation door actuator.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

5. Install the passenger side floor distribution duct. Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, INSTALLATION. 6. Install the passenger side instrument panel silencer. 7. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 8. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER DESCRIPTION AUTOMATIC DUAL ZONE

Fig. 18: Identifying Automatic Dual Zone Functions Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The A/C-heater control (1) for the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) dual zone heating-A/C system allows both the driver and the front seat passenger the ability to individually regulate air temperature for their side of the vehicle. All controls are identified by International Standardization Organization (ISO) graphic symbols. The ATC A/C-heater control and integral computer is located in the center of the instrument panel and contains: 





a push button A/C on/off control (2). An ISO Snowflake symbol appears in the Vacuum-Flourescent (VF) digital display (3) when the A/C system is in operation, whether under manual or Auto mode. a push button front window defogger control (4). An indicator lamp illuminates in the control when selected manually and an ISO symbol appears in the VF digital display when selected by Auto mode. four push button temperature controls (5 and 15) to select the front comfort temperatures from 15° to 31° C (60° to 88° F). Comfort temperatures for each zone are shown in the VF digital display. If the set temperatures are 15° C (60° F) and is adjusted lower, the A/C-heater control will attempt to achieve the lowest temperature possible, but the display will show LO. If the set temperatures are 31° C (88° F) and is adjusted up, the A/C-heater control will attempt to achieve the highest temperature possible, but the display will show HIGH. Temperatures can be displayed in either Metric or Fahrenheit, which is selected

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee







 







 

from the overhead console. a push button rear window defogger on/off control (6). An indicator lamp illuminates in the control when selected. The indicator lamp illuminates in the control even with the heating-A/C system turned off. Refer to OPERATION . a push button automatic mode control (7) to set the heating-A/C system to Auto mode. AUTO appears in the VF digital display when the system is in Auto mode. two push button front heated seat controls (8 and 11). Each control has two indicator lamps that illuminate, depending on seat temperature selected. Refer to OPERATION . a rotary control knob for fan speed selection and turning the heating-A/C system off (9). a cab temperature sensor (10) is located in the center of the A/C-heater control. The sensor detects thermal radiation emitted by the front seat occupants and their surroundings. a push button mode control (12) to override the Auto mode. An ISO mode symbol appears in the VF digital display to indicate the current mode setting when selected manually or by Auto mode. Auto mode provides variable air recirculation through a broad range of high temperature and humidity conditions. a push button air recirculation control (13). The Recirculation button contains an LED that illuminates when the recirculation function is manually activated. The ATC A/C-heater control computer logic provides variable air recirculation through a broad range of temperature and humidity conditions. a push button synchronize control (14) that automatically adjusts the temperature of the front passenger comfort zone to the drivers comfort zone temperature. An LED illuminates in the SYNC button when the SYNC function is manually activated. SYNC appears in the VF digital display when the system is synchronized, whether under manual or Auto mode. illumination lamps for backlighting of the ATC A/C-heater control. computer logic that remembers the settings of the controls when the ignition is turned off, and retains those settings after a restart. If the system is off when the ignition is turned off, it will be off when the engine is restarted, etc.

The A/C-heater control for the ATC dual zone heating-A/C system is diagnosed using a scan tool. Prior to replacing an A/C-heater control, check for any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) related to the heating-A/C system and initiate the Actuator Calibration function to verify that the concern is not a heating-A/C system calibration issue. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . The A/C-heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. The ATC A/C-heater control utilizes integrated circuitry and information carried on the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus to monitor many sensors and switch inputs throughout the vehicle. In response to these inputs, the internal circuitry and programming of the ATC A/C-heater control allow it to control electronic functions and features of the ATC heating-A/C system. Some of the inputs received by the A/C-heater control of the ATC heating-A/C system on the CAN bus are as follows:   

A/C Clutch Engage Ambient Air Temperature A/C-heater control backlight dimming

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

      

Engine Coolant Temperature Engine Speed Refrigerant Pressure Electrical System Voltage Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Odometer Vehicle Speed

Some of the messages broadcasted by the A/C-heater control of the ATC heating-A/C system on the CAN bus are as follows:   

A/C Request EBL Status Heated/Ventilated Seat Select

MANUAL DUAL ZONE

Fig. 19: Identifying Manual Dual Zone Functions Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The A/C-heater control (1) for the Manual Temperature Control (MTC) dual zone heating-A/C system allows both the driver and the front seat passenger the ability to individually regulate air temperature for their side of the vehicle. All controls are identified by International Standardization Organization (ISO) graphic symbols. The MTC A/C-heater control and integral computer is located in the instrument panel and contains: 



two rotary control knobs for individual driver and front seat passenger temperature control of the discharged air (2). five push buttons for mode control of the discharged air (3, 4, 9, 10 and 11). Each mode control button

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee





 

contains an LED that illuminates when manually activated. a push button rear window defogger on/off control (5). The defogger button contains an LED that illuminates when the rear window defogger system is in operation. a push button air recirculation control (6). The Recirculation button contains an LED that illuminates when the recirculation function is manually activated. a rotary control knob for fan speed selection and turning the heating-A/C system off (7). a push button A/C on/off control (8). The A/C button contains an LED that illuminates when the A/C system is in operation.

Prior to replacing an A/C-heater control, check and repair any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) related to the heating-A/C system and initiate the Actuator Calibration function. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . The MTC A/C-heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the face of the A/C-heater control, center bezel and the instrument panel switch pod from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

Fig. 20: A/C-Heater Control, Bezel & Screws

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel center bezel (3) and place it on a workbench. Refer to BEZEL, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CENTER, REMOVAL . 3. Remove the four screws (2 and 4) that secure the A/C-heater control (1) to the center bezel and remove the control. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the face of the A/C-heater control, center bezel and the instrument panel switch pod from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

Fig. 21: A/C-Heater Control, Bezel & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the A/C-heater control (1) into the instrument panel center bezel (3). 2. Install the four screws (2 and 4) that secure the A/C-heater control to the center bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the instrument panel center bezel. Refer to BEZEL, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CENTER, INSTALLATION . 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 5. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . MODULE, POWER, BLOWER MOTOR DESCRIPTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) shown in illustration. Manual Temperature Control (MTC) similar.

Fig. 22: Two Integral Connector Receptacles & Cylindrical Finned Heat Sink Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC A blower motor power module is used on this model when equipped with either the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) heating-A/C system, or the Manual Temperature Control (MTC) heating-A/C system. The blower motor power module is mounted to the passenger side of the HVAC housing, near the blower motor. The blower motor power module consists of a molded plastic housing with mounting plate and two integral connector receptacles (1). Concealed behind the mounting plate is the power module electronic circuitry and a multiple, cylindrical finned heat sink (2).The blower motor power module is accessed for service from under the instrument panel. OPERATION OPERATION

The blower motor power module is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated lead and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A second lead and connector of the instrument panel wire harness is connected to the blower motor. On the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system, the blower motor power module allows the microprocessor-based A/C-heater control to calculate and provide infinitely variable blower motor speeds based upon either manual blower switch input or the ATC programming. On the Manual Temperature Control (ATC) system, the blower motor power module allows the microprocessor-based A/C-heater control to provide an infinite amount of blower motor speeds throughout its operating range, based upon blower switch input.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Both the ATC and MTC systems use a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) circuit strategy. PWM voltage is applied to a comparator circuit which compares the PWM signal voltage to the blower motor feedback voltage. The resulting output drives the power module circuitry, which provides a linear output voltage to change or maintain the desired blower speed. The blower motor power module is diagnosed using a scan tool. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . The blower motor power module cannot be adjusted or repaired must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: The heat sink for the blower motor power module may get very hot during normal operation. If the blower motor was turned on prior to servicing the blower motor power module, wait five minutes to allow the heat sink to cool before performing diagnosis or service. Failure to take this precaution can result in possible personal injury. NOTE:

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) shown in illustration. Manual Temperature Control (MTC) similar.

Fig. 23: Passenger Side Floor Ducts

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the passenger side instrument panel silencer. 3. Disconnect the passenger side floor ducts (1) from the HVAC housing (2).

Fig. 24: Two Wiring Harness Connectors & Motor Power Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Disconnect the two wiring harness connectors (1) from the blower motor power module (2).

Fig. 25: Two Screws, Blower Motor Power Module & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

5. Remove the two screws (13) that secure the blower motor power module (2) to the HVAC housing (3). 6. Remove the blower motor power module from the HVAC housing. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) shown in illustration. Manual Temperature Control (MTC) similar.

Fig. 26: Two Screws, Blower Motor Power Module & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the blower motor power module (2) onto the HVAC housing (3). 2. Install the two screws (1) that secure the blower motor power module to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Two Wiring Harness Connectors & Motor Power Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. Connect the two wire harness connectors (1) to the blower motor power module (2).

Fig. 28: Passenger Side Floor Ducts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

4. Connect the passenger side floor ducts (1) to the HVAC housing (2). 5. Install the passenger side instrument panel silencer. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. SENSOR, AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

Fig. 29: Identifying Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that monitors the air temperature outside of the vehicle. The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system uses the ambient air temperature sensor data to help maintain optimum cabin temperature levels. The ambient air temperature sensor is mounted to the condenser/radiator closeout, behind the grille. OPERATION OPERATION

The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a 5 volt Direct Current (DC) reference signal sent by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The ambient air temperature sensor is connected to the TIPM through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The ambient air temperature sensor changes its internal resistance in response to changes in the outside air temperature, which either increases or decreases the reference signal voltage read by the TIPM. The TIPM converts and broadcasts the sensor data over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus, where it is read by the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) A/C heater control, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and other vehicle control modules. The ambient air temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. Refer to appropriate Electrical Diagnostic article . The ambient air temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Wire Harness Connector, Air Temperature Sensor, Condenser/Radiator Closeout & Push-Pin Fastener Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. Remove the grille. Refer to GRILLE, REMOVAL . Disconnect the wire harness connector (4) from the ambient air temperature sensor (2). Remove the push-pin fastener (1) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the condenser/radiator closeout (3) and remove the sensor.

INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Fig. 31: Wire Harness Connector, Air Temperature Sensor, Condenser/Radiator Closeout & Push-Pin Fastener

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the ambient air temperature sensor (2) onto the condenser/radiator closeout (3) and install the push-pin fastener (1). 2. Connect the wire harness connector (4) to the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. Install the grille. Refer to GRILLE, INSTALLATION . 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. SENSOR, EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

Cutaway view of HVAC housing shown in illustration for clarity.

Fig. 32: Evaporator Temperature Sensor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The evaporator temperature sensor (1) measures the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (2). The evaporator temperature sensor is an electrical thermistor within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the HVAC housing (3) near the coldest point of the A/C evaporator. Two terminals within the connector receptacle (4) connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed and installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. OPERATION OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C heater control. The A/C heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5 volt Direct Current (DC) reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C heater control uses the monitored voltage reading as an indication of evaporator temperature. The A/C heater control is programmed to respond to this input by requesting the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to cycle the A/C clutch as necessary to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Wire Harness Connector, Evaporator Temperature Sensor & HVAC housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the right side instrument panel silencer. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the right side of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

Fig. 34: Wire Harness Connector, Evaporator Temperature Sensor & HVAC housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (1) into the right side of the HVAC housing (3). Make sure that the sensor retaining clips are fully engaged in the housing. 2. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the right side instrument panel silencer 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. SENSOR, SUN DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Typical sun sensor assembly shown in illustration.

Fig. 35: Sun Sensor, Clear Lens & Wire Harness Receptacle Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) heating-A/C system uses a sun sensor (1) to measure sun light intensity. The sun sensor incorporates two sun load sensors (2) within a molded plastic case which is mounted to the instrument panel and a clear lens (3) that protrudes through the defroster grille. The wire harness receptacle (4) connects the sun sensor to the vehicle electrical system. OPERATION OPERATION

The ATC heating-A/C system uses two sun sensors to balance the system in response to side-to-side variations in sun light intensity. Passengers in sun and shadow require different functional settings because they experience very different temperatures. The sun sensor assembly provides data to the A/C heater control to help determine proper mode and blend-air door positions and blower motor speeds. The sun sensors are not thermistor type sensors, but rather photo diodes. For this reason the sun sensors responds to sun light intensity rather than temperature. The sun sensor assembly is also used to sense day and night conditions for automatic headlight control on MTC equipped vehicles. The sun sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . The sun sensor assembly cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SUN SENSOR

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable. Wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. The sun sensor assembly is located so that the sun rays will hit the sensors in the same way that it will hit the driver and the passenger. If the vehicle exhibits a lack of passenger comfort in sunny weather such as in the early afternoon, inspect the area around the sun sensor on top of the dash panel. It is important that the area of the sun sensor be unobstructed from plain view. Check for the following:    

Windshield wipers are properly adjusted. Sun sensor is properly installed. Refer to SENSOR, SUN, INSTALLATION. Any stickers on the windshield are not directly in front of the sun sensor. Any items laying on top of the instrument panel are not covering the sun sensor.

The A/C-heater control continually monitors the sun sensor circuits and will store Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) for any problem it detects. The sun sensor can be tested in the vehicle with a scan tool. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable. Wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the face of the defroster grille from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Defroster Grille, Wire Harness Connector & Sun Sensor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) or equivalent, remove the defroster grille (3) from the instrument panel and disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the sun sensor (1).

Fig. 37: Two Retaining Tabs, Sun Sensor & Defroster Grill Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. Place the defroster grill (2) on a workbench. 4. Disengage the two retaining tabs (1) that secure the sun sensor (3) to the back side of the defroster grille and remove the sensor. INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

INSTALLATION

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the face of the defroster grille from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

Fig. 38: Two Retaining Tabs, Sun Sensor & Defroster Grill Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Align the tab on the sun sensor (3) with the slot in the opening in the defroster grille (2) and install the sensor onto the grille. Make sure that the two sensor retaining tabs (1) are fully engaged to the defroster grille.

Fig. 39: Defroster Grille, Wire Harness Connector & Sun Sensor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 2. Position the defroster grille (3) to the top of the instrument panel and connect the wire harness connector

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

(2) to the sun sensor (1). 3. Carefully install the defroster grille onto the instrument panel. Make sure the retaining tabs on the defroster grille are fully engaged to the instrument panel. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. TRANSDUCER, A/C PRESSURE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

Fig. 40: A/C Pressure Transducer Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C discharge line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connect it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C discharge line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the discharge line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. OPERATION OPERATION

The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the A/C refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the A/C discharge line, and its internal resistance changes in response to the pressures it monitors. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) provides a 5 volt Direct Current (DC) reference signal and a sensor ground to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The PCM is programmed to respond to this and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C clutch and the radiator cooling fan to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system components from damage. The PCM will disengage the A/C clutch

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

when high side pressure rises above 3219 kPa (476 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 2937 kPa (426 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C clutch if the high side pressure drops below 110 kPa (16 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 220 kPa (32 psi). When the refrigerant pressure rises above 1655 kPa (240 psi), the PCM will actuate the cooling fan. The A/C pressure transducer signal to the PCM also prevents the A/C clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 10° C (50° F), due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. A Schrader-type valve in the A/C discharge line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. Refer to appropriate Electrical Diagnostic article . The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

NOTE:

It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer.

Fig. 41: A/C Pressure Transducer, Connector, Discharge Line & O-Ring Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Typical A/C pressure transducer and refrigerant line shown in illustration.

1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2) located on the A/C discharge line (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the fitting on the A/C discharge line and remove and discard the O-ring seal (4). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor.

Fig. 42: A/C Pressure Transducer, Connector, Discharge Line & O-Ring Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Typical A/C pressure transducer and refrigerant line shown in illustration.

1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the discharge line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the A/C discharge line. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer to 5.1 N.m (45 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable.

DISTRIBUTION DUCT, DEFROSTER DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Molded Plastic Defroster Duct & Instrument Panel Cover Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

The defroster outlets receive airflow from the HVAC housing through a molded plastic defroster duct (2) that is attached to the underside of the instrument panel cover (1). The defroster duct is integral to the instrument panel cover and is not serviced separately. DUCT, FLOOR CONSOLE REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable and wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

FRONT DUCT

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the floor console from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Four Push-Pin Retainers, Front Console Duct & Rear Console Duct Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the floor console from the passenger compartment and place it on a workbench. Refer to CONSOLE, FLOOR, REMOVAL . 3. Disengage the four push-pin retainers (1) that secure the front console duct (2) to the floor console. 4. Disconnect the front console duct from the rear console duct (3) and remove the front console duct. REAR DUCT

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the floor console rear trim panel from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

Fig. 45: Floor Console Rear Trim Panel, Six Screws & Floor Console Rear Duct Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the floor console rear trim panel (4) from the back of the floor console using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) or equivalent. Disconnect any necessary electrical connectors and place the trim panel on a workbench. 3. Remove the six screws (1 and 3) that secure floor console rear duct (2) to the floor console rear trim panel (4). NOTE:

If the foam seal on the console rear duct is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

4. Remove the floor console rear duct from the floor console rear trim panel.

Fig. 46: Trim Stick, Air Outlet Barrel(S) & Console Rear Duct Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. If required, using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) (1) or equivalent, gently pry on the air outlet barrel(s) (3) until the barrel retainers release from the pivot shafts on the console rear duct (2). Rotate the air outlet barrel(s) as necessary. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

FRONT DUCT

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the floor console from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Four Push-Pin Retainers, Front Console Duct & Rear Console Duct Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

1. 2. 3. 4.

If the foam seal on the console rear duct is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

Position the floor console front duct (2) to the floor console and connect it to the rear duct (3). Install the four push-pin retainers (1). Install the floor console. Refer to CONSOLE, FLOOR, INSTALLATION . Reconnect the negative battery cable.

REAR DUCT

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the floor console rear trim panel from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Air Outlet Barrel(S) & Console Rear Duct Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. If required, position the air outlet barrel(s) (1) into the console rear duct (2) and gently push the barrel(s) into the duct, until the barrel snaps into position on the pivot shafts. Make sure each barrel is square in the duct opening and moves freely on the pivot shafts.

Fig. 49: Floor Console Rear Trim Panel, Six Screws & Floor Console Rear Duct Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the foam seal on the console rear duct is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

2. Install the floor console rear duct (2) onto the floor console rear trim panel (4). 3. Install the six screws (1 and 3) that secure floor console rear duct to the floor console rear trim panel. Tighten the screws securely.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

4. Install the floor console rear trim panel (4) onto the back of the floor console. Be sure to connect any necessary electrical connectors and properly align the console ducts. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable. Wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

LEFT SIDE

Fig. 50: Push Pin, Left Side Floor Ducts & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

1. Remove the left side instrument panel silencer. 2. Remove the push pin (3) that secures the left side floor ducts (1) to the instrument panel.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

3. Disconnect the left side floor ducts from the HVAC housing (2). RIGHT SIDE

Fig. 51: Passenger Side Floor Ducts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

1. Remove the right side instrument panel silencer. 2. Disconnect the right side floor ducts (1) from the HVAC housing (2). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE: LEFT SIDE

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 52: Push Pin, Left Side Floor Ducts & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

1. Connect the left side floor ducts (1) to the HVAC housing (2). Make sure the ducts are fully engaged to the HVAC housing and each other. 2. Install the push pin (3) that secures the left side floor ducts to the instrument panel. 3. Install the left side instrument panel silencer. RIGHT SIDE

Fig. 53: Passenger Side Floor Ducts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

1. Connect the right side floor ducts (1) to the HVAC housing (2). Make sure the ducts are fully engaged to the HVAC housing and each other. 2. Install the right side instrument panel silencer. DUCT, INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable. Wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the face of the instrument panel cover from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

NOTE:

It is not necessary to remove the air outlets to service the instrument panel duct. Illustrations shown with air outlets removed from view for clarity.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 54: Left Side Instrument Panel Cover, Instrument Panel Duct & Screws

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the instrument panel cover (4) and place it on a workbench. Refer to COVER, INSTRUMENT PANEL, REMOVAL . 2. Remove the instrument panel demister ducts. Refer to DUCT, INSTRUMENT PANEL DEMISTER, REMOVAL. 3. Remove the screws (1, 2 and 5) that secure the left side of the instrument panel duct (3) to the instrument panel cover.

Fig. 55: Right Side Instrument Panel Cover, Instrument Panel Duct & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Remove the screws (1, 2 and 5) that secure the right side of the instrument panel duct (3) to the instrument panel cover (4). NOTE:

If the foam seal on an air outlet is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

5. Remove the instrument panel duct from the instrument panel cover. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the face of the instrument panel cover from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

NOTE:

Illustrations shown with air outlets removed from view for clarity.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Right Side Instrument Panel Cover, Instrument Panel Duct & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the instrument panel duct (2) to the instrument panel cover (4). NOTE:

If the foam seal on an air outlet is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

2. Connect the instrument panel duct the instrument panel air outlets. Be sure the duct is properly aligned and connected to both outlets. 3. Install the screws (1, 2 and 5) that secure the right side of the instrument panel duct (3) to the instrument panel cover (4). Tighten the screws securely.

Fig. 57: Left Side Instrument Panel Cover, Instrument Panel Duct & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

4. Install the screws (1, 2 and 5) that secure the left side of the instrument panel duct (3) to the instrument panel cover (4). Tighten the screws securely. 5. Install the instrument panel demister ducts. Refer to DUCT, INSTRUMENT PANEL DEMISTER, INSTALLATION. 6. Install the instrument panel cover. Refer to COVER, INSTRUMENT PANEL, INSTALLATION . DUCT, INSTRUMENT PANEL DEMISTER REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable. Wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the face of the instrument panel cover from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

NOTE:

The center demister duct is integral to the instrument panel cover and is not serviced separately.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 58: Left Side Instrument Panel Demister Duct & Screw

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the instrument panel cover and place it on a workbench. Refer to COVER, INSTRUMENT PANEL, REMOVAL . 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the left side instrument panel demister duct (3) to the instrument panel cover. NOTE:

If the foam seal on a demister duct is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

3. Disconnect the left side instrument panel demister duct from the center demister duct (1).

Fig. 59: Right Side Instrument Panel Demister Duct & Screw Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the right side instrument panel demister duct (2) to the instrument panel cover NOTE:

If the foam seal on a demister duct is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

5. Disconnect the right side instrument panel demister duct from the center demister duct (1). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the face of the instrument panel cover from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Right Side Instrument Panel Demister Duct & Screw Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the foam seal on an air outlet is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

1. Connect the right side instrument panel demister duct (2) to the center demister duct (1). 2. Install the screw (3) that secures the right side instrument panel demister duct to the center duct. Tighten the screw securely.

Fig. 61: Left Side Instrument Panel Demister Duct & Screw Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the foam seal on an air outlet is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

3. Connect the left side instrument panel demister duct (3) to the center demister duct (1). 4. Install the screw (2) that secures the left side instrument panel demister duct to the center duct. Tighten the screw securely. 5. Install the instrument panel cover. Refer to COVER, INSTRUMENT PANEL, INSTALLATION . FILTER, PARTICULATE AIR DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

Typical filter shown in illustration.

Fig. 62: Particulate Air Filter Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC Most models are equipped with a particulate air filter (1) that helps purify the outside air entering the HVAC housing. The filter is mounted in the passenger compartment, behind the glove box bin. The filter should be replaced at least once a year or every 24, 000 km (15, 000 miles) and checked if heatingA/C system performance seems lower than expected. The particulate air filter is labeled with an arrow (2) to indicate the direction of air flow through the filter. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: Always make sure the A/C-heater system is turned off and that the ignition switch is in the OFF position prior to servicing the particulate air filter. Never place fingers or other objects into the filter opening of the HVAC housing. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 63: Glove Box Shelf & Instrument Panel Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the glove box bin. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, REMOVAL . 2. Remove the glove box shelf (2) from the instrument panel (1). Carefully pull the shelf rearward to disengage the four retainers.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Retaining Tab, Air Filter Cover & Hinge Clips Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 3. Disengage the retaining tab (1) that secures the particulate air filter cover (2) to the HVAC housing. 4. Open the particulate air filter cover to disengage the hinge clips (3) and remove the cover.

Fig. 65: Particulate Air Filter & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Remove the particulate air filter (1) from the HVAC housing (2) by pulling the filter element straight rearward, out of the housing. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The particulate air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate air flow direction through the filter. Make sure to properly install the particulate air filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace the filter sooner than required by design.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 66: Particulate Air Filter & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Install the particulate air filter (1) into the filter opening in the HVAC housing (2). Insert the particulate air filter directly into the housing with the arrows on the filter (3) pointing to the floor.

Fig. 67: Retaining Tab, Air Filter Cover & Hinge Clips Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

2. Position the particulate air filter cover (2) to the HVAC housing and engage the hinge clips (3). 3. Close the particulate air filter cover and engage the retaining tab (1). Make sure the retaining tab and hinges are fully engaged.

Fig. 68: Glove Box Shelf & Instrument Panel Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Install the glove box shelf (2). Make sure the four retainers are fully engaged to the instrument pane (1). 5. Install the glove box bin. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, INSTALLATION . HOUSING, HVAC DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 69: Air Inlet Housing & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC All models are equipped with a common HVAC housing assembly that combines A/C and heating capabilities into a single unit mounted within the passenger compartment. The HVAC housing assembly consists of three separate housings: 





Air inlet housing (1) - The air inlet housing is mounted to the passenger side end of the HVAC housing and contains the recirculation-air door and actuator. HVAC housing (2) - The HVAC housing is mounted behind the instrument panel and contains the A/C evaporator, blower motor resistor block or power model (depending on application) and the blower motor. The HVAC housing consists of a upper and a lower housing that are attached together and has mounting provisions for the air inlet housing and air distribution housing. Air distribution housing (3) - The air distribution housing is mounted to the rear of the HVAC housing and contains the heater core, blend-air doors and actuators, mode-air doors and actuator, door linkages and the evaporator temperature sensor. When the vehicle is equipped with the 3.0L diesel engine, the air distribution housing also contains the electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater unit.

The heating-A/C system is a blend-air type system. The blend-air doors control the amount of conditioned air that is allowed to flow through, or around the heater core. The two available dual zone heating A/C systems use two blend door actuators. The A/C system is designed for the use of a non-CFC, R-134a refrigerant and uses an A/C evaporator to cool and dehumidify the incoming air prior to blending it with the heated air. A temperature control determines the discharge air temperature by operating the blend door actuators, which moves the blend-air doors. This allows an almost immediate control of the output air temperature of the system. The two mode door actuators operate the mode-air doors which direct the flow of the conditioned air out the various air outlets, depending on the mode selected. The recirculation door actuator operates the recirculation-air door which closes off the fresh air intake and recirculates the air already inside the vehicle. The blower motor controls the velocity of air flowing through the HVAC housing assembly by spinning the blower wheel within the HVAC housing at the selected speed by use of a blower motor resistor or power model, depending on heater-A/C system application.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the A/C evaporator. The air distribution housing must be removed from the HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the mode-air and blend-air doors. The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door. REMOVAL HOUSING-AIR DISTRIBUTION

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

The air distribution housing must be removed from the HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the mode-air and blend-air doors.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 70: Foam Seal, Two Screws, HVAC Housing & Flange Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the HVAC housing assembly and place it on a workbench. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

REMOVAL. 2. Remove the floor distribution ducts from the air distribution housing. Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, REMOVAL. 3. Disconnect the wire harness from the mode door actuator, both blend door actuators and the evaporator temperature sensor and position the harness out of the way. Refer to ACTUATOR, MODE DOOR and ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR and SENSOR, EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE. NOTE:

If the foam seal at the front of the HVAC housing is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced.

4. Carefully remove the foam seal (1). 5. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the lower part of the flange (3) to the upper part of the HVAC housing (2).

Fig. 71: Flange, Screw, Heater Core Retaining Bracket & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Position the lower part of the flange (1) out of the way. 7. Remove the screw (5) that secures the heater core retaining bracket (4) to the air distribution housing (3) and position the bracket out of the way. NOTE:

If the foam seal around the heater core is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced.

8. Carefully pull the heater core (4) out of the air distribution housing.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Two Screws & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the air distribution housing (2) to the HVAC housing (3). 10. Carefully disengage the two retaining tabs (1) that secure the air distribution housing to the HVAC housing.

Fig. 73: Air Distribution Housing, Two Tab-And-Slot Type Retainers & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 11. Tilt the air distribution housing (2) downward to disengage the two tab-and-slot type retainers (1) from the bottom of the HVAC housing (3). 12. Remove the air distribution housing from the HVAC housing. 13. If required, disassemble the air distribution housing. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, DISASSEMBLY. HOUSING-AIR INLET

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

Fig. 74: Door Actuator, Two Screws, Air Inlet Housing & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the HVAC housing assembly and place it on a workbench. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, REMOVAL. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the recirculation door actuator (1). 3. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the left side of the air inlet housing (2) to HVAC housing (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: One Screw, Air Inlet Housing & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Remove the one screw (1) that secures the right side of the air inlet housing (2) to HVAC housing (3). 5. Tilt the left side of the air inlet housing upward to disengage the two tab-and-slot type retainers (4) located at the right side of the housings and remove the inlet housing from the HVAC housing. NOTE:

If the foam seal on the air inlet housing is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced.

6. If required, disassemble the air inlet housing. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, DISASSEMBLY. HOUSING-HVAC ASSEMBLY

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

The HVAC housing assembly must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the air inlet housing, air distribution housing and the A/C evaporator.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 76: Nut, HVAC Housing & Instrument Panel Support Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. Drain the engine cooling system. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. Remove the passenger side instrument panel silencer. 5. Remove the glove box, glove box shelf and the trim panel, located behind the glove box. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, REMOVAL . 6. Remove the nut (1) that secures the passenger side end of the HVAC housing (3) to the instrument panel support (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Passenger Side Floor Ducts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

7. Disconnect the passenger side floor ducts (1) from the HVAC housing (2).

Fig. 78: Two Wiring Harness Connectors & Motor Power Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors (1) from the blower motor power module (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 79: Wiring Harness Connector & Blower Motor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the Passive Entry Module (PEM). Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY, REMOVAL . 10. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (1) from the blower motor (2).

Fig. 80: Two Screws, Recirculation Door Actuator, HVAC Air Inlet Housing & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 11. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (2) from the recirculation door actuator (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 81: Three Screws, Mode Door Actuator & Mode Door Bracket Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 12. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (1) from the mode door actuator (3).

Fig. 82: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (2) from the right side blend door actuator (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 83: Wire Harness Connector, Evaporator Temperature Sensor & HVAC housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 14. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (2) from the evaporator temperature sensor (1).

Fig. 84: HVAC Housing Four Nuts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 15. 16. 17. 18.

Remove the front floor console. Refer to CONSOLE, FLOOR, REMOVAL . Remove the radio. Refer to RADIO, REMOVAL . Remove the bin from the center of the instrument panel. Remove the four nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing to the center of the instrument panel support.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 85: Push Pin, Left Side Floor Ducts & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

19. Remove the driver side instrument panel silencer. 20. Remove the push pin (3) that secures the driver side floor ducts (1) to the instrument panel. 21. Disconnect the driver side floor ducts from the HVAC housing (2).

Fig. 86: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 22. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (2) from the left side blend door actuator (3). 23. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 87: Two Nuts, Air Inlet Duct & Dash Panel Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 24. Remove the windshield wiper arms and wiper module. Refer to LINKAGE, WIPER ARM, REMOVAL . 25. Remove the cowl extension silencer. Refer to SILENCER, COWL EXTENSION . 26. Remove the two nuts (2) that secure the HVAC air inlet duct (1) to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (3) and remove the duct.

Fig. 88: Two Nuts & Dash Panel Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 27. Disconnect the A/C liquid line and the A/C suction line from the A/C expansion valve. Refer to VALVE, A/C EXPANSION, REMOVAL. 28. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core tubes.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

29. Remove the two nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing assembly to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (2). 30. Lift the HVAC housing assembly upwards so that the condensate drain tube clears the floor panel and remove the HVAC housing assembly from the passenger compartment. 31. If required, disassemble the HVAC housing assembly. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, DISASSEMBLY. DISASSEMBLY HOUSING-AIR DISTRIBUTION

NOTE:

The air distribution housing must be removed from the HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the mode-air and blend-air doors.

Fig. 89: Air Distribution Housing, Five Screws, Mode Door Actuator & Blend Door Actuator Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the air distribution housing (1) from the HVAC housing and place it on a workbench. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, REMOVAL. 2. On models equipped with the 3.0L diesel engine, remove the electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater from the air distribution housing. Refer to UNIT, HEATER, REMOVAL. 3. Remove the five screws (3) that secure the mode door actuator (2) and the blend door actuator (4) to the right side of the air distribution housing and remove the actuators.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 90: Three Screws, Actuator Bracket & Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Remove the three screws (1) that secure the mode door actuator bracket (2) to the right side of the air distribution housing (3) and remove the bracket. 5. Remove the right side blend door drive gear (4).

Fig. 91: Trim Stick, Mode Door Drive Gear Lever Arm & Air Door Lever Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) (4) or equivalent, disconnect the mode door drive gear lever arm (2) from the right side floor air door lever (3). 7. Remove the mode door drive gear lever (1) and lever arm from the right side the air distribution housing.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 92: Mode Door Drive Gear & Aligned Position Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Remove the mode door drive gear (1) from the right side of the air distribution housing. Note the proper aligned position (3) of the drive gear to the driven gear (1) for reassembly.

Fig. 93: Trim Stick, Gear Assembly, Door Linkage Rod & Floor Air Door Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) (3) or equivalent, remove the right side floor air door lever and gear assembly (1) and the floor air door linkage rod (2) from the right side floor air door (4).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 94: Console Air Door Lever & Mode Door Driven Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Remove the console air door lever (1) and the mode door driven gear (2) from the right side the air distribution housing.

Fig. 95: Trim Stick & Two Mode Air Door Levers Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 11. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) (3) or equivalent, remove the two mode air door levers (1 and 2) from the right side the air distribution housing.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 96: Trim Stick & Blend Door Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 12. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) (2) or equivalent, remove the blend door gear (1) from the right side the air distribution housing (3).

Fig. 97: Screw, Door Gear Bracket & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 13. Remove the screw (2) that secures the mode door gear bracket (2) to the right side of the air distribution housing (1) and remove the bracket.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 98: Floor Air Door & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the rubber seal on the air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced.

14. Remove the floor air door (1) from the right side of the air distribution housing (2) by carefully lifting the front of the air door out of the housing, then slide the air door forward to disengage the door pivot shaft from the housing.

Fig. 99: Evaporator Temperature Sensor & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 15. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor (1) from the right side of the air distribution housing (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 100: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 16. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (2) to the left side of the air distribution housing (3) and remove the actuator.

Fig. 101: Blend Door Drive Gear & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 17. Remove the blend door drive gear (1) from the left side of the air distribution housing (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 102: Trim Stick & Blend Door Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 18. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) (3) or equivalent, remove the blend door gear (1) from the left side the air distribution housing (3).

Fig. 103: Trim Stick, Air Door Gear, Linkage Rod & Left Side Floor Air Door Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 19. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) (3) or equivalent, remove the left side floor air door gear (4) and the floor air door linkage rod (1) from the left side floor air door (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 104: Floor Air Door & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the rubber seal on the air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced.

20. Remove the floor air door (1) from the left side of the air distribution housing (2) by carefully lifting the front of the air door out of the housing, then slide the air door forward to disengage the door pivot shaft from the housing.

Fig. 105: Foam Seal & Parting Lines Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the foam seal is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

21. Carefully cut the foam seal (1) along the parting lines (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

22. Remove the thirteen screws (3) that secure the two halves of the air distribution housing (4 and 5) together. 23. Carefully remove the left half of the air distribution housing from the right half of the air distribution housing.

Fig. 106: Left Side Partition, Blend Air Door, Center Partition, Air Distribution Housing & Mode Air Doors Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the rubber seal on any air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced.

24. Remove the left side partition (1), blend air door (2) and mode air doors (3). 25. Remove the center partition (4) from the right half of the air distribution housing (5).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 107: Right Side Partition, Blend Air Door, Mode Air Doors, Floor Console Air Door & And Linkage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the rubber seal on any air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced.

26. Remove the right side partition (1), blend air door (2) and the mode air doors (4 and 5) from the right side of the air distribution housing (3). 27. Remove the floor console air door (7) and linkage (6). 28. If required, remove the linkage from the floor console air door. HOUSING-AIR INLET

NOTE:

The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 108: Air Inlet Housing, Two Screws, Recirculation Door Actuator, Retaining Tab & Air Filter Cover Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the air inlet housing (3) from the HVAC housing and place it on a workbench. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, REMOVAL. 2. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the recirculation door actuator (2) to the air inlet housing and remove the actuator. 3. If equipped, disengage the retaining tab (5) that secure the particulate air filter cover (4) to the air inlet housing and remove the cover and particulate air filter.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 109: Foam Seal, Parting Line, Air Inlet Housing & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the foam seal on the air inlet housing is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced.

4. Carefully cut the foam seal (1) along the parting line (5) of the two halves of the air inlet housing (2 and 4). If the seal is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 5. Remove the seven screws (3) that secure the two halves of the air inlet housing together and separate the housing halves.

Fig. 110: Recirculation-Air Door, Pivot Shaft & Air Inlet Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the rubber seal on the recirculation-air door is deformed or damaged, the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

door must be replaced. 6. Carefully remove the recirculation-air door (1) from the pivot shaft (2) located on the right half of the air inlet housing (3). HOUSING-HVAC ASSEMBLY

NOTE:

The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the A/C evaporator.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 111: Air Inlet Housing & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the HVAC housing assembly and place it on a workbench. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, REMOVAL. 2. Remove the Passive Entry Module (PEM) from the HVAC housing (2). Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY, REMOVAL . 3. Remove the air inlet housing (1) from the HVAC housing. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, REMOVAL. 4. Remove the air distribution housing (3) from the HVAC housing. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, REMOVAL.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 112: Blower Motor, Blower Motor Power Module Or Resistor & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Remove the screws that secure the blower motor (2) and the blower motor power module or resistor (3), depending on application, to the HVAC housing (1). 6. Remove the blower motor and the blower motor power module or resistor from the HVAC housing.

Fig. 113: Two Bolts, A/C Expansion Valve & Tube Tapping Block Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 7. Remove the two bolts (1) that secure the A/C expansion valve (3) to the evaporator tube tapping block (2). 8. Remove the A/C expansion valve from the evaporator tube tapping block and remove and discard the Oring seals. 9. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened evaporator tube fittings.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 114: Screws, Metal Retaining Clips & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Remove the fifteen screws (1) and three metal retaining clips (2) that secure the upper half of the HVAC housing (3) to the lower half of the HVAC housing (4). NOTE:

Use care when separating the HVAC housing to prevent damage to the alignment pins located on the lower half of the housing.

11. Separate the two halves of the HVAC housing by lifting straight up on the upper half of the housing.

Fig. 115: Tapping Block, A/C Evaporator, Insulator & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 12. Remove the tapping block (1) from the evaporator tubes. 13. Lift the A/C evaporator (2) and insulator (3) out of the lower half of the HVAC housing (4).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

14. If required, remove the insulator from the A/C evaporator. If the insulator is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. ASSEMBLY HOUSING-AIR DISTRIBUTION

Fig. 116: Right Side Partition, Blend Air Door, Mode Air Doors, Floor Console Air Door & And Linkage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. If removed, install the linkage (6) onto the floor console air door (7). 2. Install the floor console air door and linkage into the right side of the air distribution housing (3). 3. Install the right side partition (1), blend air door (2) and mode air doors (4 and 5).

Fig. 117: Left Side Partition, Blend Air Door, Center Partition, Air Distribution Housing & Mode Air Doors

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Align the air door pivot shafts and the right side partition with the holes in the center partition (4) and carefully install the center partition onto the right half of the air distribution housing (5). 5. Install the left side partition (1), blend air door (2) and mode air doors (3).

Fig. 118: Foam Seal & Parting Lines Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Align the air door pivot shafts and the left side partition with the holes in the left half of the air distribution housing (5) and carefully install the left half of the air distribution housing onto the right half of the air distribution housing (4). 7. Install the thirteen screws (3) that secure the two halves of the air distribution housing together. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (20 in. lbs.). 8. Inspect the foam seal (1), especially at the parting lines (2). If the foam seal is OK, adhere the cuts made at the parting lines back together with a small amount of RTV sealer. If the foam seal is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 119: Floor Air Door & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Install the floor air door (1) into the left side of the air distribution housing (2).

Fig. 120: Floor Air Door Linkage Rod, Floor Air Door Gear, Linkage Rod & Floor Air Door Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Install the floor air door linkage rod (2) and the left side floor air door gear (4). First, align together the largest tooth opening on the gear with largest tooth on the linkage rod (1). Then install the gear into the left side floor air door (3), with the door in the open position as shown in illustration. Make sure the gear is fully engaged to the air door.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 121: Blend Door Gear & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 11. Align the blend door gear (1) with the blend air door on the left side the air distribution housing (2) and install the gear. Make sure the gear is fully engaged to the air door.

Fig. 122: Blend Door Drive Gear & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 12. Align the blend door drive gear (1) with the blend door gear on the left side of the air distribution housing (2) and install the drive gear. Make sure the gears are aligned as shown in illustration.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 123: Blend Door Actuator, HVAC Air Distribution Housing, Blend Door Cam & Actuator Output Shaft Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 13. Position the blend door actuator (1) into the vehicle. 14. Install the blend door actuator onto the driver side of the HVAC air distribution housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the flat area of the splines on the actuator output shaft (4) with the flat area in the blend door cam (3).

Fig. 124: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 15. Install the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (3) to the left side of the air distribution housing (4). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 125: Evaporator Temperature Sensor & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 16. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (1) onto the right side of the air distribution housing (2).

Fig. 126: Floor Air Door & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 17. Install the floor air door (1) onto the right side of the air distribution housing (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 127: Screw, Door Gear Bracket & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 18. Position the mode door gear bracket (2) onto the right side of the air distribution housing (1) and install the retaining screw (3). Tighten the screw to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.).

Fig. 128: Blend Door Gear & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 19. Align the blend door gear (1) with the blend air door on the right side the air distribution housing (2) and install the gear. Make sure the gear is fully engaged to the air door.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 129: Two Mode Air Door Levers & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC Align the two mode air door levers (1 and 2) with the mode air doors on the right side the air distribution housing (3) and install the levers. Make sure the levers are fully engaged to the air doors.

Fig. 130: Console Air Door Lever & Mode Door Driven Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 20. Align the previously installed mode air door lever to the slot in the back of mode door driven gear (2) and install the driven gear. 21. Align the console air door lever (1) to console air door linkage rod and the slot in the front of the mode door driven gear and install the lever. Make sure the lever is fully engaged to the linkage rod and the driven gear.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 131: Floor Air Door Linkage Rod, Lever Assembly, Linkage Rod & Right Side Floor Air Door Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 22. Install the floor air door linkage rod (1) and the right side floor air door gear and lever assembly (2). First, align together the largest tooth opening on the gear and lever assembly with largest tooth on the linkage rod (3). Then install the gear and lever assembly into the right side floor air door (4), with the door in the open position as shown in illustration. Make sure the gear and lever assembly is fully engaged to the air door and that both floor air doors open and close together simultaneously.

Fig. 132: Mode Door Drive Gear & Aligned Position Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 23. Align the mode door driven gear (1) to the mode door drive gear (2) in the position shown in illustration (3). 24. Align the previously installed mode air door lever to the slot in the back of mode door drive gear and install the drive gear.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 133: Mode Door Drive Gear Lever, Mode Door Drive Gear, Door Drive Gear Lever Arm & Right Side Floor Air Door Lever Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 25. Align the tab on the back side of the mode door drive gear lever (2) with the slot on the front of the mode door drive gear (1) and install the lever. 26. Connect the mode door drive gear lever arm (4) to the right side floor air door lever (3). 27. Rotate the mode door drive gear back and forth by hand. Make sure that the mode air doors at the top of the housing, and the floor air doors on each side of the housing, open and close fully, with no binding or excessive effort required.

Fig. 134: Three Screws, Actuator Bracket & Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 28. Position the mode door actuator bracket (2) to the right side of the air distribution housing (3) and install the three retaining screws (1). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

29. Align the blend door drive gear (4) with the blend door gear and install the drive gear. Make sure the gears are aligned as shown in illustration.

Fig. 135: Blend Door Actuator, Air Distribution Housing, Actuator Output Shaft & Blend Door Drive Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 30. Install the blend door actuator (1) onto the right side of the air distribution housing (4). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (2) with those on the blend door drive gear (3).

Fig. 136: Mode Door Actuator, Mode Door Linkage Bracket, Actuator Output Shaft & Mode Door Drive Gear Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 31. Install the mode door actuator (3) onto the mode door actuator bracket (1). If necessary, rotate the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

actuator slightly to align the flat area of the splines on the actuator output shaft (4) with the flat area in the mode door drive gear (2).

Fig. 137: Air Distribution Housing, Five Screws, Mode Door Actuator & Blend Door Actuator Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 32. install the five screws (3) that secure the mode door actuator (2) and the blend door actuator (4) to the right side of the air distribution housing. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.). 33. On models equipped with the 3.0L diesel engine, install the electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater. Refer to UNIT, HEATER, INSTALLATION. 34. Install the air distribution housing onto the HVAC housing. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, INSTALLATION. HOUSING-AIR INLET

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 138: Recirculation-Air Door, Pivot Shaft & Air Inlet Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the recirculation-air door (1) onto the pivot shaft (2) located on the right half of the air inlet housing (3).

Fig. 139: Foam Seal, Parting Line, Air Inlet Housing & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: Make sure that the recirculation door pivot shaft is properly located in the shaft opening on the left half on the air inlet housing. 2. Install the two halves of the air inlet housing (2 and 4) together. Be sure to properly align the recirculation door pivot shaft with the opening on the left side of the air inlet housing 3. Install the seven screws (3) that secure the two halves of the air inlet housing together. Tighten the screws

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.).

Fig. 140: Recirculation Door Actuator, Air Inlet Housing, Actuator Output Shaft & Recirculation Door Pivot Shaft Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Install the recirculation door actuator (1) onto the air inlet housing (3). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines of the actuator output shaft (4) with those on the recirculation door pivot shaft (2).

Fig. 141: Air Inlet Housing, Two Screws, Recirculation Door Actuator, Retaining Tab & Air Filter Cover Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Install the two screws (1) that secure the recirculation door actuator (2) to the air inlet housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

6. If equipped, install the particulate air filter into the opening in the air inlet housing with the arrow on the filter pointing down and install the cover (4). Make sure the retaining tab (5) is fully engaged. Refer to FILTER, PARTICULATE AIR, INSTALLATION. 7. Install the air inlet housing onto the HVAC housing. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, INSTALLATION. HOUSING-HVAC ASSEMBLY

CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle.

NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line seals is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber and metal seals could result in a refrigerant system leak.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 142: Tapping Block, A/C Evaporator, Insulator & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

1. If removed, install the insulator (3) over the A/C evaporator (2). If the insulator is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 2. Install the A/C evaporator into the lower half of the HVAC housing (4). Make sure that the evaporator drain within the HVAC housing is clean and unrestricted and that the insulator and evaporator are properly positioned in the housing. 3. Install the tapping block (1) onto the evaporator tubes.

Fig. 143: Screws, Metal Retaining Clips & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Install the upper half of the HVAC housing (3) onto the lower half of the HVAC housing (4). 5. Install the fifteen screws (1) that secure the two halves of the HVAC housing together. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (20 in lbs.). 6. Install the three metal retaining clips (2) that secure the two halves of the HVAC housing together.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 144: Two Bolts, A/C Expansion Valve & Tube Tapping Block Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 7. Remove the tape or plugs from the evaporator tube fittings. 8. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them on the evaporator tube fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 9. Install the A/C expansion valve (3) onto the evaporator tube tapping block (2). 10. Install the two bolts (1) that secure the A/C expansion valve to the evaporator tube tapping block. Tighten the bolts to 11 N.m (97 in. lbs.).

Fig. 145: Blower Motor, Blower Motor Power Module Or Resistor & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 11. Install the blower motor (2) onto the HVAC housing (1). Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (20 in. lbs.). 12. Install the blower motor resistor or power module (3), depending on application. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 146: Air Inlet Housing & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 13. Install the air inlet housing (1) onto the HVAC housing (2). Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, INSTALLATION. 14. Install the air distribution housing (3) onto the HVAC housing. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, INSTALLATION. 15. Install the Passive Entry Module (PEM) onto the HVAC housing. Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY, INSTALLATION . 16. Install the HVAC housing assembly. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, INSTALLATION. 17. If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. INSTALLATION HOUSING-AIR DISTRIBUTION

NOTE:

The air distribution housing must be removed from the HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the mode-air and blend-air doors.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 147: Air Distribution Housing, Two Tab-And-Slot Type Retainers & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the air distribution housing (2) to the rear of the HVAC housing (3) 2. Engage the two tab-and-slot type retainers (1). 3. Tip the air distribution housing upward until it is properly aligned with the HVAC housing.

Fig. 148: Two Screws & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Carefully engage the two retaining tabs (1) that secure the air distribution housing (2) to the HVAC housing (3). 5. Install the two screws (4) that secure the air distribution housing to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (20 in. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 149: Flange, Screw, Heater Core Retaining Bracket & Air Distribution Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Carefully install the heater core (2) into the air distribution housing (3). 7. Reposition the heater core retaining bracket (4) and install the screw (5). Tighten the screw to 2.2 N.m (20 in. lbs.). 8. Reposition the lower part of the flange (1).

Fig. 150: Foam Seal, Two Screws, HVAC Housing & Flange Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Install the two screws (4) that secure the lower part of the flange (3) to the upper part of the HVAC housing (2). Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (20 in. lbs.). 10. Install the foam seal (1) onto the front of the HVAC housing. 11. Reposition and connect the wire harness to the mode door actuator, both blend door actuators and the

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

evaporator temperature sensor. Refer to ACTUATOR, MODE DOOR and ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR and SENSOR, EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE. 12. Install the floor distribution ducts onto the air distribution housing. Refer to DUCT, FLOOR DISTRIBUTION, INSTALLATION. 13. Install the HVAC housing assembly. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, INSTALLATION. HOUSING-AIR INLET

NOTE:

The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

Fig. 151: One Screw, Air Inlet Housing & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the air inlet housing (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3) and engage the two tab-and-slot type retainers (4) located on the right side of the housings. 2. Tip the left side of the air inlet housing downward until it is properly seated on the HVAC housing. 3. Install the screw (1) that secures the air inlet housing to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screw to 2.2 N.m (20 in. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 152: Door Actuator, Two Screws, Air Inlet Housing & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 4. Install the two screws (4) that secure the left side of the air inlet housing (2) to the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screw to 2.2 N.m (20 in. lbs.). 5. Connect the wire harness connector to the recirculation door actuator (1). 6. Install the HVAC housing assembly. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, INSTALLATION. HOUSING-HVAC ASSEMBLY

CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle.

NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line seals is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber and metal seals could result in a refrigerant system leak.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 153: Two Nuts & Dash Panel Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the HVAC housing assembly into the passenger compartment side of the dash panel (2). Make sure that the condensate drain tube protrudes through the opening in the floor panel. 2. Install the two nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing assembly to the engine compartment side of the dash panel. Tighten the nuts to 4.5 N.m (40 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the heater hoses to the heater core tubes. 4. Connect the A/C suction line and A/C liquid line to the A/C expansion valve. Refer to VALVE, A/C EXPANSION, INSTALLATION.

Fig. 154: Two Nuts, Air Inlet Duct & Dash Panel Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Install the HVAC air inlet duct (1) to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

6. Install the two nuts (2) that secure the HVAC air inlet duct to the dash panel. Tighten the nuts to 4.5 N.m (40 in. lbs.). 7. Install the cowl extension silencer. Refer to INSTALLATION . 8. Install the windshield wiper module and arms. Refer to LINKAGE, WIPER ARM, INSTALLATION .

Fig. 155: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Install the instrument panel. Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, INSTALLATION . 10. Connect the wiring harness connector (2) to the left side blend door actuator (3).

Fig. 156: Push Pin, Left Side Floor Ducts & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

11. Connect the driver side floor ducts to the HVAC housing (2). 12. Install the push pin (3) that secures the driver side floor ducts to the instrument panel. 13. Install the driver side instrument panel silencer.

Fig. 157: HVAC Housing Four Nuts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 14. Install the four nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing to the center of the instrument panel support. Tighten the nuts to 4.5 N.m (40 in. lbs.). 15. Install the bin into the center of the instrument panel. 16. Install the radio. Refer to RADIO, INSTALLATION . 17. Install the floor console. Refer to CONSOLE, FLOOR, INSTALLATION .

Fig. 158: Wire Harness Connector, Evaporator Temperature Sensor & HVAC housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

18. Connect the wiring harness connector (2) to the evaporator temperature sensor (1).

Fig. 159: Two Screws, Blend Door Actuator & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 19. Connect the wiring harness connector (2) to the right side blend door actuator (3).

Fig. 160: Three Screws, Mode Door Actuator & Mode Door Bracket Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 20. Connect the wiring harness connector (1) to the mode door actuator (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 161: Two Screws, Recirculation Door Actuator, HVAC Air Inlet Housing & Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 21. Connect the wiring harness connector (2) to the recirculation door actuator (3).

Fig. 162: Wiring Harness Connector & Blower Motor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 22. Connect the wire harness connector to the Passive Entry Module (PEM). Refer to MODULE, PASSIVE ENTRY, INSTALLATION . 23. Connect the wiring harness connector (1) to the blower motor (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 163: Two Wiring Harness Connectors & Motor Power Module Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 24. Connect the two wiring harness connectors (1) to the blower motor power module (2).

Fig. 164: Passenger Side Floor Ducts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

25. Connect the passenger side floor ducts (1) to the HVAC housing (2).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 165: Nut, HVAC Housing & Instrument Panel Support Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 26. Install the nut (1) that secures the passenger side end of the HVAC housing (3) to the instrument panel support (2). Tighten the nut to 4.5 N.m (40 in. lbs.). 27. Install the IP trim panel, glove box shelf and the glove box. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, INSTALLATION . 28. Install the passenger side instrument panel silencer. 29. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 30. If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system. Refer to REVERSE FLUSHING . 31. Refill the engine cooling system. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 32. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 33. If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 34. Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. 35. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . MOTOR, BLOWER DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 166: Blower Motor, Blower Wheel, Harness Connector & Mounting Tabs Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The blower motor (1) is used to control the velocity of air moving through the HVAC housing assembly by spinning the blower wheel (2) at the selected or programmed speed (depending on control system application). The blower motor is a 12-volt, Direct Current (DC) motor that is mounted within a plastic housing that has integral wire harness connector (3), integral mounting tabs (4) and a squirrel cage-type blower wheel that is secured to the blower motor shaft. The blower wheel is positioned within the air inlet housing on the passenger side of the HVAC housing assembly. OPERATION OPERATION

The blower motor controls the velocity of air moving through the HVAC housing by spinning the blower wheel within the HVAC air inlet housing at the selected speed. Both the Manual Temperature Control (MTC) heating-A/C system and the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) heating-A/C system have an electronic blower motor power module to control blower motor speed. The power module uses a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) input from the A/C-heater control and a feedback signal from the blower motor to regulate the blower motor ground path. On both systems, the blower motor receives battery current through the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) whenever the ignition switch is in the Run position, and the blower motor control is in any position except Off. The blower motor control system is diagnosed using a scan tool. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . The blower motor and blower motor wheel are factory balanced as an assembly and cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING BLOWER MOTOR

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. Failure to take the proper precautions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

Refer to appropriate Wiring Information for circuit descriptions and diagrams.

OPERATION

Possible causes of an inoperative blower motor include:      

Open fuse Inoperative blower motor power module Inoperative blower motor switch Inoperative mode control switch Inoperative blower motor Inoperative blower motor circuit wiring or wire harness connectors

NOISE

To determine if the blower motor is the source of the noise, simply switch the blower motor from Off to On. To verify that the blower motor is the source of the noise, unplug the blower motor wire harness connector and operate the heater-A/C system. If the noise goes away, possible causes include:      

Foreign material on fresh air inlet screen Foreign material in blower wheel Foreign material in the HVAC housing Improper blower motor mounting Deformed or damaged blower wheel Worn blower motor bearings or brushes

VIBRATION

Possible causes of blower motor vibration include:    

Improper blower motor mounting Foreign material in blower wheel Deformed or damaged blower wheel Worn blower motor bearings

REMOVAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

Fig. 167: Wiring Harness Connector & Blower Motor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. Remove the passenger side instrument panel silencer. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the blower motor (2). Remove the three screws (3) that secure the blower motor to the HVAC housing (4) and remove the blower motor.

INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 168: Wiring Harness Connector & Blower Motor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the blower motor (2) into the HVAC housing (4). 2. Install the three screws (3) that secure the blower motor to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N.m (20 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the blower motor. 4. Install the passenger side instrument panel silencer. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. OUTLET, AIR REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable. Wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

OUTBOARD OUTLETS

NOTE:

The outboard air outlets can be serviced without removing the instrument panel

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

cover.

Fig. 169: Outboard Air Outlet & Retaining Tabs Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Underside of instrument panel cover shown in illustration. Instrument panel duct removed from view for clarity.

1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. When servicing the passenger side air outlet: a. remove the passenger side instrument panel silencer b. remove the glove box, glove box shelf and the trim panel, located behind the glove box. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, REMOVAL . 3. When servicing the driver side air outlet: a. remove the driver side instrument panel silencer b. remove the knee blocker. Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, REMOVAL . NOTE:

The air outlet trim panels are serviced with the air outlets as an assembly.

4. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs (2) that secure the outboard air outlet trim panel to the face of the instrument panel cover (4). 5. Reach up behind the instrument panel and disengage the four retaining tabs (1 and 3) that secure each outboard air outlet (5) to the back of the instrument panel cover. NOTE:

If the foam seal on an air outlet is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

6. Remove the outboard air outlet(s) from the instrument panel cover.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

INBOARD OUTLETS

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the center bezel from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

Fig. 170: Air Outlet, Retaining Tabs & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel center bezel (3) and place it on a workbench. Refer to BEZEL, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CENTER, REMOVAL . 3. Remove the two screws (1) that secure each air outlet (2) to the center bezel. 4. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) or equivalent, gently disengage the two retaining tabs (4) that secure each air outlet to the center bezel. NOTE:

If the foam seal on an air outlet is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

5. Remove the inboard air outlet(s) from the center bezel. FLOOR CONSOLE OUTLETS

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the floor console rear trim panel from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 171: Floor Console Rear Trim Panel, Six Screws & Floor Console Rear Duct Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the floor console rear trim panel (4) from the back of the floor console using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) or equivalent. Disconnect any necessary electrical connectors and place the trim panel on a workbench. 3. Remove the six screws (1 and 3) that secure floor console rear duct (2) to the floor console rear trim panel (4). NOTE:

If the foam seal on the console rear duct is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

4. Remove the floor console rear duct from the floor console rear trim panel.

Fig. 172: Trim Stick, Air Outlet Barrel(S) & Console Rear Duct

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Using Trim Stick (special tool #C-4755, Trim Stick) (1) or equivalent, gently pry on the air outlet barrel (s) (3) until the barrel retainers release from the pivot shafts on the console rear duct (2). Rotate the air outlet barrel(s) as necessary. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

OUTBOARD OUTLETS

NOTE:

Underside of instrument panel cover shown in illustration. Instrument panel duct removed from view for clarity.

Fig. 173: Outboard Air Outlet & Retaining Tabs Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Make sure that the air outlet is properly aligned to the instrument panel opening and that the foam seal on the outlet is properly installed.

1. Install the outboard instrument panel air outlet (5) through the opening in the instrument panel cover (4) and connect it to the duct 2. Engage the four retaining tabs (1 and 3) that secure each outboard air outlet to the instrument panel cover. Make sure the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 3. Engage the retaining tabs (2) that secure the outboard air outlet trim panel to the face of the instrument panel cover. Make sure the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 4. When servicing the passenger side air outlet:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

a. Install the IP trim panel, glove box shelf and glove box Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, INSTALLATION . b. install the passenger side instrument panel silencer 5. When servicing the driver side air outlet: a. install the knee blocker Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, INSTALLATION . b. install the driver side instrument panel silencer 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. INBOARD OUTLETS

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the center bezel from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

Fig. 174: Air Outlet, Retaining Tabs & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the foam seal on an air outlet is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

1. Position the inboard air outlet(s) (2) to the center bezel (3). 2. Engage the two retaining tabs (4) that secure each air outlet to the center bezel. Make sure the retaining tabs are fully engaged. 3. Install the two screws (1) that secure each air outlet to the center bezel. Tighten the screws securely. 4. Install the instrument panel center bezel. Refer to BEZEL, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CENTER, INSTALLATION . 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. FLOOR CONSOLE OUTLETS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the floor console rear trim panel from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

Fig. 175: Air Outlet Barrel(S) & Console Rear Duct Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the air outlet barrel(s) (1) into the console rear duct (2) and gently push the barrel(s) into the duct, until the barrel snaps into position on the pivot shafts. Make sure each barrel is square in the duct opening and moves freely on the pivot shafts.

Fig. 176: Floor Console Rear Trim Panel, Six Screws & Floor Console Rear Duct Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

If the foam seal on the console rear duct is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

2. Install the floor console rear duct (2) onto the floor console rear trim panel (4). 3. Install the six screws (1 and 3) that secure floor console rear duct to the floor console rear trim panel. Tighten the screws securely. 4. Install the floor console rear trim panel (4) onto the back of the floor console. Be sure to connect any necessary electrical connectors and properly align the console ducts. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable.

PLUMBING WARNING WARNING

WARNING: The A/C system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Repairs should only be performed by qualified service personnel. Serious or fatal injury may result from improper service procedures. WARNING: Avoid breathing the refrigerant and refrigerant oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose, and/or throat. Wear eye protection when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Serious eye injury can result from direct contact with the refrigerant. If eye contact occurs, seek medical attention immediately. WARNING: Do not expose the refrigerant to open flame. Poisonous gas is created when refrigerant is burned. An electronic leak detector is recommended. Serious or fatal injury may result from improper service procedures. WARNING: If accidental A/C system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Large amounts of refrigerant released in a closed work area will displace the oxygen and cause suffocation and serious or fatal injury. WARNING: The evaporation rate of R-134a refrigerant at average temperature and altitude is extremely high. As a result, anything that comes in contact with the refrigerant will freeze. Always protect the skin or delicate objects from direct contact with the refrigerant. WARNING: The R-134a service equipment or the vehicle refrigerant system should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Some mixtures of air and R-134a have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures are potentially dangerous, and may result in fire or explosion causing property damage and serious or fatal injury. WARNING: The engine cooling system is designed to develop internal pressures up

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

to 145 kPa (21 psi). Do not remove or loosen the coolant pressure cap, cylinder block drain plugs, radiator drain, radiator hoses, heater hoses, or hose clamps while the engine cooling system is hot and under pressure. Allow the vehicle to cool for a minimum of 15 minutes before opening the cooling system for service. Failure to observe this warning can result in serious burns from the heated engine coolant. CAUTION CAUTION

CAUTION: Never add R-12 to a refrigerant system designed to use R-134a. Do not use R-12 equipment or parts on an R-134a A/C system. These refrigerants are not compatible and damage to the A/C system will result. CAUTION: Never use R-12 refrigerant oil in an A/C system designed to use R-134a refrigerant oil. These refrigerant oils are not compatible and damage to the A/C system will result. CAUTION: The use of A/C system sealers may result in damage to A/C refrigerant recovery/evacuation/recharging equipment and/or A/C system. Many federal, state/provincial and local regulations prohibit the recharge of A/C systems with known leaks. Chrysler LLC recommends the detection of A/C system leaks through the use of approved leak detectors and fluorescent leak detection dyes. Vehicles found with A/C system sealers should be treated as contaminated and replacement of the entire A/C refrigerant system is recommended. A/C systems found to be contaminated with A/C system sealers, A/C stop-leak products or seal conditioners voids the warranty for the A/C system. CAUTION: Recover the refrigerant before opening any fitting or connection. Open the fittings with caution, even after the system has been discharged. Never open or loosen a connection before recovering the refrigerant. CAUTION: If equipped, do not remove the secondary retention clip from any springlock coupler connection while the refrigerant system is under pressure. Recover the refrigerant before removing the secondary retention clip. Open the fittings with caution, even after the system has been discharged. Never open or loosen a connection before recovering the refrigerant. CAUTION: The internal parts of the A/C system will remain stable as long as moisture-free refrigerant and refrigerant oil is used. Abnormal amounts of dirt, moisture or air can upset the chemical stability. This may cause operational troubles or even serious damage if present in more than very small quantities. Before disconnecting a component, clean the outside of

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

the fittings thoroughly to prevent contamination from entering the refrigerant system. Keep service tools and the work area clean. Do not open the refrigerant system or uncap a replacement component until you are ready to service the system. Immediately after disconnecting a component from the refrigerant system, seal the open fittings with a cap or plug. This will prevent contamination from entering the A/C system. CAUTION: Refrigerant oil will absorb moisture from the atmosphere if left uncapped. Do not open a container of refrigerant oil until you are ready to use it. Replace the cap on the oil container immediately after using. Store refrigerant oil only in a clean, airtight, and moisture-free container. CAUTION: Do not overcharge the refrigerant system. Overcharging will cause excessive compressor head pressure and can cause compressor noise and A/C system failure. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - REFRIGERANT SYSTEM LEAKS

WARNING: R-134a service equipment or vehicle A/C system should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Mixture of air and R-134a can be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures are potentially dangerous and may result in fire or explosion causing property damage and possible serious or fatal injury. Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE requirements to discharge an R-134a system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. NOTE:

If the A/C system refrigerant charge is empty or low, a leak in the A/C system is likely. When searching for a refrigerant leak in the A/C system, use an electronic leak detector and refrigerant leak detection dye with an Ultra Violet (UV) light that is designed for R-134a refrigerant. It is important to use only high-quality refrigerant leak detection equipment to properly locate refrigerant system leaks, such as the equipment listed in the teamPSE Service Equipment Catalog. Use only Chrysler approved R-134a leak detection dye, available through Mopar®.

1. Visually inspect all A/C lines, A/C fittings and A/C components under the hood for an oily residue. Oil residue can be an indicator of a leak location. 2. Connect a high-quality manifold gauge set or refrigerant recovery machine to the A/C system and determine if the static A/C system pressure is above or below 345 kPa (50 psi). Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. If static A/C system pressure is less than 345 kPa (50 psi), refer to SYSTEM EMPTY. If static A/C system pressure is greater than 345 kPa (50 psi), refer to SYSTEM LOW.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

SYSTEM EMPTY

1. Evacuate the refrigerant system to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately -8 kPa (-26 in. Hg) or greater vacuum) for at least 30 minutes. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. CAUTION: Use only Chrysler LLC approved R-134a leak detection dye. It is important to use only high-quality refrigerant leak detection equipment. Small leaks may not be found using low-budget equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in an incomplete diagnosis and possible remaining refrigerant leaks. 2. Prepare an R-134a dye injector with a Chrysler approved R-134a leak detection dye. 3. Prepare the vehicle specific amount of R-134a refrigerant. Refer to REFRIGERANT, SPECIFICATIONS. NOTE:

Anytime an R-134a leak detection dye has been added to the refrigerant system, a label indicating that dye has been added should be placed on the vehicle in plain view, for other technicians.

4. Dispense the leak detection dye and the correct amount of R-134a refrigerant into the evacuated refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. 5. Refer to LEAK TEST. SYSTEM LOW

CAUTION: Use only Chrysler LLC approved R-134a leak detection dye. It is important to use only high-quality refrigerant leak detection equipment. Small leaks may not be found using low-budget equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in an incomplete diagnosis and possible remaining refrigerant leaks. 1. Prepare an R-134a dye injector with a Chrysler approved R-134a leak detection dye. NOTE:

Anytime an R-134a leak detection dye has been added to the refrigerant system, a label indicating that dye has been added should be placed on the vehicle in plain view, for other technicians.

2. Dispense the leak detection dye and 0.284 kilograms (10 ounces) of R-134a refrigerant into the evacuated refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. 3. Refer to LEAK TEST. LEAK TEST

1. Position the vehicle in a wind-free work area. This will aid in detecting small leaks. 2. Operate the heating and A/C system with the engine at idle under the following conditions for at least 15 minutes.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Doors or windows open  Transmission in Park or Neutral with the parking brake set (depending on transmission application)  Front A/C and heater controls set to outside air, full cool, panel mode, high blower and A/C compressor engaged  If equipped, rear A/C and heater controls set to full cool and high blower. 3. Shut the vehicle off and wait at least 5 minutes. 

CAUTION: Use it is important to use only a high-quality Ultra Violet (UV) light when searching for a leak in the refrigerant system. Small leaks may not be found using budget equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in an incomplete diagnosis and possible remaining refrigerant leaks. 4. Begin searching for leaks using a high quality UV light to detect the fluorescent R-134a leak detection dye. Inspect all connections, plumbing fittings, brazed joints, hoses, hose crimps, service ports, compressor housing, pressure relief valve and A/C condenser for dye. Inspect the evaporator drain tube and condensate for presence of dye, which indicates a leak from the A/C evaporator. WARNING: Use extreme care when working around a running engine. Keep hands and fingers clear of the radiator fan, accessory drive belt and all other moving components. Keep away when wearing loose clothing, jewelry or long hair that is not properly secured. Underhood components may become hot to the touch. Be careful not to come into contact with hot engine, A/C and engine cooling system components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious or fatal injury. CAUTION: Use only an electronic leak detector designed for R-134a refrigerant. It is important to use only high-quality refrigerant leak detection equipment. Small leaks may not be found using budget equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in an incomplete diagnosis and possible remaining refrigerant leaks. 5. If a leak is not found with the R-134a detection dye, use a high-quality electronic R-134a leak detector and insert it into the evaporator drain tube, and into the instrument panel air outlets, to check for evaporator leaks. Check the evaporator tubes at the A/C expansion valve, for leaks not visible behind the valve. Check around the front of the A/C compressor, for compressor shaft seal leaks. Check between the A/C condenser and radiator for condenser leaks not previously visible. STANDARD PROCEDURE REFRIGERANT SYSTEM RECOVERY

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. CAUTION: Various aftermarket manufacturers produce A/C system sealants that are designed to stop A/C refrigerant system leaks. The use of A/C system sealants may result in damage to A/C refrigerant recovery/evacuation/recharging equipment and/or the vehicle A/C system and are not recommended for use by Chrysler LLC.

Fig. 177: Identifying R-134a Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Charging Station Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC When servicing the A/C system, an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (1) that meets SAE standard J2788 must be used. Per SAE standard J2788, refrigerant recovery stations must recover 95% of the refrigerant system within 30 minutes at 21.1° C (70° F) and be able to measure the amount of refrigerant removed from the system to an accuracy of 28 grams (1 oz.). Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. NOTE:

A/C system should be tested prior to refrigerant recovery if the use of A/C system sealants are suspected. These sealants have the potential to clog refrigerant recovery equipment and cause vehicle A/C component damage. Various tool manufacturers make tool kits that detect A/C system sealants. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment.

If sealants are detected in an A/C system, the system should be treated as contaminated and replacement of the entire A/C refrigerant system is recommended. A/C systems found to be contaminated with A/C system sealers, A/C stop-leak products or seal conditioners void the warranty for the A/C system. REFRIGERANT SYSTEM EVACUATE

NOTE:

Special effort must be used to prevent moisture from entering the A/C system

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

oil. Moisture in the oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. If an A/C compressor designed to use R-134a refrigerant is left open to the atmosphere for an extended period of time, it is recommended that the refrigerant oil be drained and replaced with new oil, or a new A/C compressor be used. This will eliminate the possibility of contaminating the refrigerant system. If the refrigerant system has been open to the atmosphere, it must be evacuated before the system can be filled. Moisture and air mixed with the refrigerant will raise the compressor head pressure above acceptable operating levels. This will reduce the performance of the A/C system and damage the A/C compressor. Moisture will boil at near room temperature when exposed to vacuum. Use the following procedure to evacuate the refrigerant system: NOTE:

When connecting the service equipment coupling to the line fitting, verify that the valve of the coupling is fully closed. This will reduce the amount of effort required to make the connection.

1. Recover the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. Connect a suitable charging station, refrigerant recovery machine or a manifold gauge set with vacuum pump and refrigerant recovery equipment. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. Open the suction and discharge valves and start the vacuum pump. The vacuum pump should run a minimum of 45 minutes prior to charge to eliminate all moisture in system. When the suction gauge reads to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately -88 kPa (- 26 in. Hg) or greater) for 30 minutes, close all valves and turn off vacuum pump. If the system fails to reach specified vacuum, the refrigerant system likely has a leak that must be corrected. If the refrigerant system maintains specified vacuum for at least 30 minutes, start the vacuum pump, open the suction and discharge valves. Then allow the system to evacuate an additional 10 minutes. 4. Close all valves. Turn off and disconnect the vacuum pump. 5. Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

The Underhood HVAC Specification Label contains the refrigerant fill specification of the vehicle being serviced.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 178: Identifying R-134a Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Charging Station Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC After all refrigerant system leaks have been repaired and the refrigerant system has been evacuated, a refrigerant charge can be injected into the system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. When charging the A/C system, use an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (1) that meets SAE standard J2788. Per SAE standard J2788, refrigerant recovery stations must charge the system to an accuracy of 14 grams (0.5 oz.). Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. CHARGING PROCEDURE

CAUTION: A small amount of refrigerant oil is removed from the A/C system each time the refrigerant system is recovered and evacuated. Before charging the A/C system, you MUST replenish any oil lost during the recovery process. Refer to the equipment manufacturer instructions for more information. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2788 to the refrigerant system. 3. Measure the proper amount of refrigerant and heat it to 52° C (125° F) with the charging station. Refer to REFRIGERANT. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper use of this equipment. 4. Open both the suction and discharge valves, then open the charge valve to allow the heated refrigerant to flow into the system. 5. When the transfer of refrigerant has stopped, close both the suction and discharge valves. 6. If all of the refrigerant charge did not transfer from the dispensing device, open all of the windows in the vehicle and set the heating-A/C system controls so that the A/C compressor is engaged and the blower motor is operating at its lowest speed setting. Run the engine at a steady high idle (about 1400 rpm). If the A/C compressor does not engage, test the compressor clutch circuits and repair as required.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

WARNING: Take care not to open the discharge (high pressure) valve at this time. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. 7. Open the low-side valve to allow the remaining refrigerant to transfer to the refrigerant system. 8. Disconnect the charging station from the refrigerant system service ports. 9. Reinstall the caps onto the refrigerant system service ports. COMPRESSOR, A/C DESCRIPTION A/C CLUTCH

Fig. 179: A/C Compressor Clutch Components Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Denso A/C clutch assembly shown in illustration. Visteon A/C clutch assembly similar.

The A/C compressor clutch assembly consists of a stationary electromagnetic field coil (4), bearing and pulley assembly (3), shims (7) and a clutch plate (2) that is splined to the compressor shaft and secured by a bolt (1). These components provide the means to engage and disengage the A/C compressor from the engine accessory drive belt. The A/C clutch bearing and pulley assembly on both A/C compressors are retained to the front of the compressor with a snap ring (6). The A/C clutch coil on the Denso A/C compressor is also retained to the front of the compressor using a snap ring (5). The A/C clutch coil on the Visteon A/C compressor is pressed onto the front of the compressor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

A/C COMPRESSOR

Fig. 180: A/C Compressor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Typical A/C compressor shown in illustration.

Models equipped with the 3.0L and 5.7L engine, use a Denso 10SRE18 A/C compressor, with a fixed displacement of 180 cubic centimeters (11 cubic inches). Models equipped with the 3.6L engine, use a Visteon RS-18 A/C compressor, with a fixed displacement of 180 cubic centimeters (11 cubic inches). All A/C compressors have the suction and discharge ports (2) located on the compressor cylinder head (3) at the rear of the compressor and have a label identifying the use of R-134a refrigerant. HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

A high pressure relief valve is located on the compressor cylinder head at the rear of the A/C compressor. Refer to HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE. This mechanical valve is designed to vent refrigerant from the A/C system to protect against damage to the A/C compressor and other A/C system components caused by condenser air flow restriction or an overcharge of refrigerant. OPERATION A/C CLUTCH

The A/C compressor clutch components provide the means to engage and disengage the A/C compressor from the engine accessory drive belt. When the electromagnetic A/C clutch field coil is energized, it magnetically draws the clutch plate into contact with the clutch pulley and drives the compressor shaft. When the coil is not energized, the pulley freewheels on the clutch hub bearing, which is part of the pulley assembly.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

A/C compressor clutch engagement is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or the Engine Control Module (ECM), depending on engine application. The A/C compressor clutch components cannot be repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. A/C COMPRESSOR

The A/C compressor is driven by the engine through an electric clutch, drive pulley and belt arrangement. The A/C compressor is lubricated by refrigerant oil that is circulated throughout the refrigerant system with the refrigerant. The A/C compressor draws in low-pressure refrigerant vapor from the A/C evaporator through its suction port. It then compresses the refrigerant into a high-pressure, high-temperature refrigerant vapor, which is then pumped to the A/C condenser through the compressor discharge port. CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. The A/C compressor cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be inoperative or damaged. The compressor clutch, pulley and bearing assembly, and clutch field coil are available for service. If an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred, the A/C condenser must also be replaced. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL. HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

The high pressure relief valve vents refrigerant from the A/C system when a discharge pressure of 3445 to 4135 kPa (500 to 600 psi) or above is reached. The high pressure relief valve closes with a minimum discharge pressure of 2756 kPa (400 psi) is reached. The high pressure relief valve should not open when the A/C system is operating correctly. If the high pressure relief valve vents refrigerant, there is most likely a problem within the A/C refrigerant system. The high pressure relief valve vents only enough refrigerant to reduce the A/C system pressure, and then re-seats itself. If the high pressure relief valve vents refrigerant, see the A/C System Diagnosis chart. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. The high pressure relief valve is factory-calibrated and cannot be adjusted or repaired, and must not be removed or otherwise disturbed. The valve is only serviced as a part of the A/C compressor. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING A/C CLUTCH COIL

The A/C clutch coil electrical circuit is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), through the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). Refer to appropriate Wiring Information for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Begin testing of a suspected A/C clutch coil problem by performing the preliminary checks.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

PRELIMINARY CHECKS

1. Using a scan tool, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the A/C heater control, PCM and TIPM. If no DTCs are found, refer to 2. If any DTCs are found, repair as required. 2. If the A/C clutch still will not engage, verify the refrigerant charge level by conducting the A/C Performance test. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. If the refrigerant charge level is OK, refer to COIL RESISTANCE TEST and COIL CURRENT DRAW TEST. If the refrigerant charge level is not OK, adjust the refrigerant charge as required. COIL RESISTANCE TEST

1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the A/C clutch coil connector. 3. Use an ohm meter and Back Probe Tool (special tool #6801, Terminal Probe) and measure the resistance of the A/C clutch coil at the coil connector terminals. 4. See A/C Clutch Coil Specifications table for acceptable A/C clutch coil resistance. Specifications apply for a work area temperature of 21° C (70° F). 1. If the A/C clutch coil reading is below specifications, the coil is shorted and must be replaced. 2. If the A/C clutch coil reading is above specifications, the coil is open and must be replaced. COIL CURRENT DRAW TEST

1. Verify the battery state of charge. Refer to BATTERY, AGM, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . 2. Connect an ammeter (0 to 10 ampere scale selected) in series with the A/C clutch coil feed terminal using Back Probe Tool (special tool #6801, Terminal Probe). Connect a voltmeter (0 to 20 volt scale selected) to measure voltage across the battery and the A/C clutch coil. 3. With the A/C-heater control in the A/C mode and the blower motor at low speed, start the engine and allow it to run at a normal idle speed. 4. The A/C clutch should engage immediately and the clutch coil supply voltage should be within two volts of the battery voltage. If the clutch coil supply voltage is OK, refer to 5. If the coil supply voltage is not within two volts of battery voltage, test the clutch coil feed circuit for excessive voltage drop and repair as necessary. 5. See A/C Clutch Coil Specifications table for acceptable A/C clutch coil current draw. Specifications apply for a work area temperature of 21° C (70° F). If voltage is more than 12.5 volts, add electrical loads by turning on electrical accessories until voltage reads below 12.5 volts. 1. If the A/C clutch coil current reading is zero, the coil is open and must be replaced. 2. If the A/C clutch coil current reading is above specifications, the coil is shorted and must be replaced. A/C CLUTCH COIL SPECIFICATIONS Application Coil Resistance 3.0L/5.7L Engines

3.3 - 3.5 ohms

3.6L Engine

3.0 - 4.0 ohms

Coil Current Draw 3.2 amps Max @ 12V ± 0.5V @ 21° C (70° F) 3.1 - 4.0 amps @ 12V ± 0.5V @

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

21° C (70° F) A/C SYSTEM NOISE

When investigating an A/C system related noise, you must first know the conditions under which the noise occurs. These conditions include: weather, vehicle speed, transmission in gear or neutral, engine speed, engine temperature, and any other special conditions. Noises that develop during A/C operation can often be misleading. For example: What sounds like a failed front engine bearing or connecting rod, may be caused by loose bolts, nuts, mounting brackets or a loose compressor clutch assembly. Drive belts are speed sensitive. At different engine speeds and depending upon drive belt tension, drive belts can develop noises that are mistaken for an A/C compressor noise. Improper drive belt tension can cause a misleading noise when the compressor clutch is engaged, which may not occur when the compressor clutch is disengaged. Check the accessory drive belt condition and tension as described in Cooling before beginning this procedure. 1. Select a quiet area for testing. Duplicate the complaint conditions as much as possible. Turn the A/C compressor On and Off several times to clearly identify the compressor noise. Listen to the A/C compressor while the clutch is engaged and disengaged. Probe the A/C compressor with an engine stethoscope or a long screwdriver with the handle held to your ear to better localize the source of the noise. 2. Loosen all of the compressor mounting hardware and retighten. Check the compressor clutch retainer. Be certain that the clutch field coil is mounted securely to the A/C compressor, and that the clutch plate and pulley are properly aligned and have the correct air gap. 3. To duplicate high-ambient temperature conditions (high head pressure), restrict the air flow through the A/C condenser. Install a manifold gauge set or a scan tool to be certain that the discharge pressure does not exceed 2760 kPa (400 psi). 4. Check the refrigerant system plumbing for incorrect routing, rubbing or interference, which can cause unusual noises. Also check the refrigerant lines and hoses for kinks or sharp bends that will restrict refrigerant flow, which can cause noises. 5. If the noise is from opening and closing of the high pressure relief valve, conduct the A/C Performance test and verify refrigerant charge level. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. 6. If the high pressure relief valve still does not seat properly, replace the A/C compressor. Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C, REMOVAL. STANDARD PROCEDURE STANDARD PROCEDURE - A/C CLUTCH INSPECTION

NOTE:

The A/C clutch can be serviced in the vehicle. The refrigerant system can remain fully-charged during compressor clutch, pulley and bearing assembly, or coil replacement.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 181: Identifying Compressor Shaft, Clutch Plate & Shim Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC Examine the friction surfaces of the pulley and the clutch plate (2) for wear. The pulley and clutch plate should be replaced if there is excessive wear or scoring. If the friction surfaces are oily, inspect the shaft and nose area of the A/C compressor (1) for refrigerant oil. If refrigerant oil is found, the compressor shaft seal is leaking and the A/C compressor must be replaced. Check the pulley bearing for roughness or excessive leakage of grease. Replace the pulley and bearing assembly, if required. REMOVAL A/C CLUTCH

NOTE:

The A/C clutch can be serviced with the refrigerant system fully-charged.

NOTE:

Typical A/C compressor and clutch assembly shown in illustrations.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 182: A/C Compressor Shaft Bolt Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. Remove the accessory drive belt. Refer to BELT, SERPENTINE, REMOVAL . Disconnect the engine wire harness from the A/C clutch coil connector (1). If required (depending on A/C compressor application), remove the A/C clutch coil connector and lead from the connector bracket (2). 5. If required, remove the A/C compressor from the engine and support the compressor. Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C, REMOVAL. 6. Remove the compressor shaft bolt (3). A band-type oil filter wrench or a strap wrench may be used to hold the clutch plate (4) from rotating during bolt removal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 183: Identifying Compressor Shaft, Clutch Plate & Shim Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: Do not pry between the clutch plate and the pulley and bearing assembly to remove the clutch plate from the compressor shaft as this may damage the clutch plate. NOTE:

Use care not to lose any clutch shim(s) during removal of the clutch plate, as they may be reused during the clutch plate installation process.

7. Tap the clutch plate (2) lightly with a plastic mallet to release it from the splines on the compressor shaft (1) and remove the clutch plate and shim(s) (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 184: Clutch Pulley & Snap Ring Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Using A/C Snap Ring Pliers (special tool #9764, Pliers, A/C Snap Ring) (1) or equivalent, remove the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the A/C compressor and remove the pulley and bearing assembly.

Fig. 185: Clutch Coil & Snap Ring Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. Using A/C Snap Ring Pliers (special tool #9764, Pliers, A/C Snap Ring) (1) or equivalent, remove the snap ring (4) that secures the A/C clutch coil (2) to the A/C compressor (3) and remove the coil. 3.0L ENGINE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

WARNING: Refer to the applicable Warnings and Cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

NOTE:

The A/C compressor may be removed and repositioned without disconnecting the refrigerant lines or discharging the refrigerant system. Discharging is not necessary if servicing the A/C clutch, clutch coil or engine.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 186: Suction Line, Discharge Line & Nuts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the engine trim cover. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor wire harness connector and remove the engine air cleaner housing. Refer to BODY, AIR CLEANER, REMOVAL . 5. Remove the accessory drive belt. Refer to BELT, SERPENTINE, REMOVAL . 6. Remove the nuts (1 and 3) that secure the A/C suction line (2) and A/C discharge line (4) to the A/C compressor. 7. Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the seals. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over all of the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor ports.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 187: Identifying Wire Harness Connector, Bolts & A/C Compressor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Raise and support the vehicle. Remove the front belly pan. Remove the bolts (2 and 5) that secure the A/C compressor (6) to the engine. Lower the vehicle. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the A/C clutch electrical connector (1). Support the A/C compressor, remove the nut (4) and stud (3) that secures the A/C compressor to the engine and remove the compressor.

3.6L ENGINE

WARNING: Refer to the applicable Warnings and Cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

NOTE:

The A/C compressor may be removed and repositioned without disconnecting the refrigerant lines or discharging the refrigerant system. Discharging is not necessary if servicing the A/C clutch, clutch coil or engine.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 188: Nuts, A/C Suction Line, A/C Discharge Line Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the engine trim cover. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 4. Remove the air cleaner housing. Refer to BODY, AIR CLEANER, REMOVAL . 5. Remove the accessory drive belt. Refer to BELT, SERPENTINE, REMOVAL . 6. Remove the nuts (1 and 3) that secure the A/C suction line (2) and A/C discharge line (3) to the A/C compressor. 7. Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the seals. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over all of the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor ports.

Fig. 189: A/C Compressor, Nut, Stud & Three Bolts

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. 10. 11. 12.

Disconnect the engine wire harness from the A/C compressor (2). Remove the nut (5) and position the heater tube and bracket (4) out of the way. Support the A/C compressor and remove the stud (3) and the three bolts (1). Remove the A/C compressor from the engine compartment.

5.7L ENGINE

WARNING: Refer to the applicable Warnings and Cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

NOTE:

The A/C compressor may be removed and repositioned without disconnecting the refrigerant lines or discharging the refrigerant system. Discharging is not necessary if servicing the A/C clutch, clutch coil or engine.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 190: Nuts, A/C Suction Line & A/C Discharge Line Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner housing and resonator. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

4. 5. 6. 7.

PROCEDURE. Remove the accessory drive belt. Refer to BELT, SERPENTINE, REMOVAL . Remove the nuts (2) that secure the A/C suction line (1) and A/C discharge line (3) to the A/C compressor. Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the seals. Install plugs in, or tape over all of the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor ports.

Fig. 191: A/C Clutch Electrical Connector, Two Bolts, A/C Compressor, Nut & Stud Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Raise and support the vehicle. Remove the front belly pan. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the A/C clutch electrical connector (2). Remove the two bolts (3) that secure the A/C compressor (1) to the engine. Support the A/C compressor and remove the nut (5) and stud (4). Remove the A/C compressor from the engine compartment.

INSTALLATION A/C CLUTCH

NOTE:

Typical A/C compressor and clutch assembly shown in illustrations.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 192: Clutch Coil & Snap Ring Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Align the dowel pin on the back of the A/C clutch coil (2) with the hole in the front of the A/C compressor (3) and install the coil onto the compressor. Depending on compressor application, be certain that the A/C clutch coil wire lead is properly routed so that it is not pinched between the A/C compressor and the coil. CAUTION: The snap ring must be fully and properly seated in the groove or it will vibrate out, resulting in a clutch failure and severe damage to the A/C compressor. NOTE:

A new snap ring must be used to secure the A/C clutch coil to the A/C compressor. The bevel side of the snap ring must face outward. On Denso compressor models, both snap ring eyelets must be oriented to the right or to the left of the coil dowel pin location on the front of the A/C compressor.

2. Using A/C Snap Ring Pliers (special tool #9764, Pliers, A/C Snap Ring) (1) or equivalent, install the snap ring (4) that secures the A/C clutch coil to the A/C compressor. Be certain that the snap ring is fully and properly seated in the groove and oriented correctly.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 193: Identifying Pulley & Bearing Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: If required (depending on A/C compressor application), be certain to position the A/C clutch coil wire lead so that damage will not occur during A/C compressor pulley and bearing installation. CAUTION: When installing the pulley and bearing assembly, DO NOT mar the friction surfaces of the pulley or premature failure of the A/C clutch will result. 3. Install the pulley and bearing assembly (1) onto the A/C compressor. If necessary, tap the pulley gently with a block of wood (2) placed on the pulley friction surface.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 194: Clutch Pulley & Snap Ring Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC CAUTION: The snap ring must be fully and properly seated in the groove or it will vibrate out, resulting in a clutch failure and severe damage to the A/C compressor. NOTE:

A new snap ring must be used to secure the pulley and bearing assembly to the A/C compressor. The bevel side of the snap ring must face outward.

4. Using A/C Snap Ring Pliers (special tool #9764, Pliers, A/C Snap Ring) (1) or equivalent, install the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the A/C compressor. Be certain that the snap ring is fully and properly seated in the groove.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 195: Identifying Compressor Shaft, Clutch Plate & Shim Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. If the original clutch plate (2) and pulley and bearing assembly are to be reused, reinstall the original shim (s) (3) onto the compressor shaft (1). If a new clutch plate and pulley and bearing assembly are being used, install a trial stack of shims 2.54 mm (0.010 in.) thick onto the compressor shaft.

Fig. 196: A/C Compressor Shaft Bolt

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Install the clutch plate (4) onto the front of the A/C compressor (5). 7. Install the compressor shaft bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 19 N.m (168 in. lbs.). NOTE:

The shims may compress after tightening the shaft bolt. Check the air gap in four or more places to verify the air gap is correct. Spin the pulley before performing a final check of the air gap.

NOTE:

On models with the clutch plate recessed into the pulley, use a 90° wire gap gauge to measure the clutch air gap. On other models, use a blade type feeler gauge to measure the air gap.

8. With the clutch plate assembled tight against the shim(s), measure the air gap between the clutch plate and the pulley and bearing assembly. The air gap should be between 0.35 - 0.60 mm (0.014 - 0.024 in.). If the air gap is not between specifications, add or subtract shims as needed until the correct air gap is obtained. CAUTION: If required (depending on A/C compressor application), be certain that the A/C clutch coil wire lead is properly routed so that it is not pinched between the A/C compressor and the coil connector bracket. 9. If required (depending on A/C compressor application), route the A/C clutch coil wire lead behind the connector bracket (2) and install the A/C clutch coil connector (1) to the bracket. 10. If removed, install the A/C compressor to the engine. Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C, INSTALLATION. 11. Connect the engine wire harness to the A/C clutch coil connector. 12. Install the accessory drive belt. Refer to BELT, SERPENTINE, INSTALLATION . 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 3.0L ENGINE

CAUTION: If the A/C compressor is being replaced, be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be removed from the new A/C compressor. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets may result in a refrigerant system leak.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 197: Identifying Wire Harness Connector, Bolts & A/C Compressor Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. If the A/C compressor (6) is being replaced, the refrigerant oil in the old compressor must be first drained and measured. Then the oil in the new A/C compressor must be drained. Finally, the new compressor must be refilled with the same amount of new refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 2. Position the A/C compressor to the engine and install the stud (3). Tighten the stud to 10 N.m (89 in. lbs.). 3. Install and hand tighten the nut (4) that secures the A/C compressor to the engine. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. 5. Install and hand tighten the two bolts (2 and 5) that secure A/C compressor to the engine. Tighten the bolts to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.). 6. Tighten the two bolts to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.) using the following sequence:  Bolt at rear of compressor.  Bolt at front of compressor. 7. Install the belly pan. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Tighten the nut at the front of the A/C compressor to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.). 10. Connect the engine wire harness to the A/C clutch electrical connector (1).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 198: Suction Line, Discharge Line & Nuts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 11. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor ports. 12. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 13. Connect the A/C suction line (2) and the A/C discharge line (4) to the A/C compressor (4). 14. Install the nuts (1 and 3) that secure the refrigerant lines to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nuts to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). NOTE:

The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

15. Install the accessory drive belt. Refer to BELT, SERPENTINE, INSTALLATION . 16. Install the engine air cleaner housing and connect the wire harness to the mass air flow sensor. Refer to BODY, AIR CLEANER, INSTALLATION . 17. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 18. Install the engine trim cover. 19. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 3.6L ENGINE

CAUTION: If the A/C compressor is being replaced, be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be removed from the new A/C compressor. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets may result in a refrigerant system leak.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 199: A/C Compressor, Nut, Stud & Three Bolts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. If the A/C compressor (2) is being replaced, the refrigerant oil in the old compressor must be first drained and measured. Then the oil in the new A/C compressor must be drained. Finally, the new compressor must be refilled with the same amount of new refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 2. Position the A/C compressor to the engine and install the stud (3). Tighten the stud to 10 N.m (89 in. lbs.). 3. Loosely install the three bolts (1) that secure the A/C compressor to the engine. 4. Reposition the heater tube and bracket (4) onto the stud and install the loosely install the nut (5). 5. Tighten the bolts and nut to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.) using the following sequence:  Upper bolt at front of compressor.  Lower bolt at front of compressor.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Bolt at rear of compressor.  Nut at rear of compressor. 6. Connect the engine wire harness to the A/C compressor. 

Fig. 200: Nuts, A/C Suction Line, A/C Discharge Line Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 7. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor ports. 8. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 9. Install the A/C suction line (2) and the A/C discharge line (4) onto the A/C compressor. 10. Install the nuts (1 and 3) that secure the refrigerant lines to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nuts to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the accessory drive belt. Refer to BELT, SERPENTINE, INSTALLATION . NOTE:

12. 13. 14. 15.

The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

Install the air cleaner housing. Refer to BODY, AIR CLEANER, INSTALLATION . Reconnect the negative battery cable. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Install the engine trim cover

5.7L ENGINE

CAUTION: If the A/C compressor is being replaced, be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be removed from the new A/C compressor. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets may result in a refrigerant system leak.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 201: A/C Clutch Electrical Connector, Two Bolts, A/C Compressor, Nut & Stud Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. If the A/C compressor (1) is being replaced, the refrigerant oil in the old compressor must be first drained and measured. Then the oil in the new A/C compressor must be drained. Finally, the new compressor must be refilled with the same amount of new refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 2. Position the A/C compressor to the engine and install the stud (4). Tighten the stud to 10 N.m (89 in. lbs.). 3. Loosely install the two bolts (3) and one nut (5) that secure the A/C compressor to the engine. 4. Tighten the nut and bolts to 28 N.m (21 ft. lbs.) using the following sequence:

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Nut at front of compressor.  Bolt at front of compressor.  Bolt at rear of compressor. 5. Connect the engine wire harness to the A/C clutch electrical connector (2). 

Fig. 202: Nuts, A/C Suction Line & A/C Discharge Line Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. 7. 8. 9.

Install the front belly pan. Lower the vehicle. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor ports. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 10. Install the A/C suction line (1) and the A/C discharge line (3) onto the A/C compressor. 11. Install the nuts (2) that secure the refrigerant lines to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nuts to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the accessory drive belt. Refer to BELT, SERPENTINE, INSTALLATION . NOTE:

The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

13. Install the resonator and air cleaner housing. 14. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 15. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. CONDENSER, A/C DESCRIPTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

Gasoline engine model shown in illustration. Diesel engine model similar.

Fig. 203: A/C Condenser, Mounting Tabs, Steering Cooler, A/C Receiver/Drier & Tapping Block Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The A/C condenser (1) is located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the grille. The A/C condenser is a heat exchanger that allows the high-pressure refrigerant gas being discharged by the A/C compressor to give up its heat to the air passing over the condenser fins, which causes the refrigerant to cool and change to a liquid state. CAUTION: The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Failure to replace the A/C condenser can cause serious damage to the replacement A/C compressor. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL. The A/C condenser is equipped with integral mounting tabs (2 and 7), a tapping block for the A/C discharge and liquid lines (3), mounting provisions for the power steering cooler (4), an integral A/C receiver/drier (5), and an integral automatic transmission cooler with a tapping block (6) for the transmission cooler lines. OPERATION OPERATION

When air passes through the fins of the A/C condenser, the high-pressure refrigerant gas within the A/C condenser gives up its heat. The refrigerant then condenses as it leaves the A/C condenser and becomes a highpressure liquid. The volume of air flowing over the condenser fins is critical to the proper cooling performance of the A/C system. Therefore, it is important that there are no objects placed in front of the radiator grille openings at the front of the vehicle or foreign material on the condenser fins that might obstruct proper air flow. Also, any factory-installed air seals or shrouds must be properly reinstalled following radiator or A/C condenser service.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak.

The A/C condenser has no serviceable parts. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever a refrigerant line is disconnected from the A/C condenser. The A/C condenser cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury.

Fig. 204: Bolt, A/C Liquid Line, Nut, A/C Discharge Line & A/C Condenser Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, remove the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. Remove the engine trim cover, if equipped. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. Remove the grille. Refer to GRILLE, REMOVAL . 6. Remove the bolt (2) that secures the A/C liquid line (5) to the upper radiator support. 7. Remove the nut (6) that secures the A/C discharge line (4) and A/C liquid line to the A/C condenser (1).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

8. Disconnect the A/C discharge line and A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the seals. 9. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fittings and the condenser ports.

Fig. 205: Automatic Transmission Cooler Lines & Transmission Fluid Cooler Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with radiator removed from view for clarity.

10. Remove the hood latch assembly from the radiator crossmember and position it out of the way. Refer to LATCH, HOOD, REMOVAL . 11. Disengage the two plastic air dams from the front of engine compartment and position them out of the way. 12. Position the two radiator crossmember support bars out of the way. 13. Disconnect the automatic transmission cooler lines (1) from the transmission fluid cooler (2). Refer to TUBES AND HOSES, TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER, STANDARD PROCEDURE . 14. Install plugs in, or tape over the automatic transmission cooler line fittings and the fluid cooler ports.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 206: Power Steering Fluid Cooler, A/C Condenser & Retaining Tabs Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 15. If equipped with 3.0L diesel engine, remove the charge air cooler. 16. If equipped, remove the power steering fluid cooler (3) from the A/C condenser (4) and position it out of the way. Refer to COOLER, POWER STEERING, REMOVAL . 17. Disengage the two retaining tabs (1 and 2) that secure A/C condenser to the radiator. 18. Tip the A/C condenser forward and carefully remove from engine compartment. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

NOTE:

If only the A/C condenser is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle.

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line seals is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber and metal seals could result in a refrigerant system leak.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Be certain that each of the radiator and condenser air dams are installed in their proper locations. These air dams are required for the A/C and engine cooling systems to perform as designed.

Fig. 207: Power Steering Fluid Cooler, A/C Condenser & Retaining Tabs Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the A/C condenser (4) into the engine compartment. 2. Engage the two retaining tabs (1 and 2) that secure A/C condenser to the radiator. 3. If equipped, install the power steering fluid cooler (3) onto the A/C condenser. Refer to COOLER, POWER STEERING, INSTALLATION . 4. If equipped with 3.0L diesel engine, install the charge air cooler.

Fig. 208: Automatic Transmission Cooler Lines & Transmission Fluid Cooler Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE: 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Illustration shown with radiator removed from view for clarity.

Remove the tape or plugs from the automatic transmission cooler line fittings and the fluid cooler ports. Connect the automatic transmission cooler lines (1) to the transmission fluid cooler (2). Reposition the two radiator crossmember support bars. Reposition the two plastic air dams to the front of engine compartment and install the push-pin retainers. Install the hood latch assembly to the radiator crossmember. Refer to LATCH, HOOD, INSTALLATION .

Fig. 209: Bolt, A/C Liquid Line, Nut, A/C Discharge Line & A/C Condenser Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the condenser ports. 11. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 12. Connect the A/C liquid line (5) and A/C discharge line (4) to the A/C condenser (1). 13. Install the nut (6) that secures the A/C discharge and liquid line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 14. Install the bolt (2) that secures the A/C liquid line to the upper radiator support. Tighten the bolt securely. 15. Install the grille. Refer to GRILLE, INSTALLATION . 16. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, install the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. 17. Install the engine trim cover, if equipped. 18. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 19. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 20. If the A/C condenser is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL,

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 21. Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. 22. Check the automatic transmission fluid level and refill as required. CORE, HEATER DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

Fig. 210: Heater Core, Heater Core Tubes & Tank Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The heater core (1) is mounted into the left side of the HVAC air distribution housing, which is located behind the instrument panel. The heater core is a heat exchanger made of rows of aluminum tubes and fins. The heater core is positioned within the air distribution housing so that only the selected amount of air entering the housing passes through the heater core, before being distributed through the heater-A/C system ducts and outlets. One end of the heater core is fitted with a tank (2) that includes the fittings for the heater core tubes (3) The heater core can be serviced without removing the HVAC housing from the vehicle. OPERATION OPERATION

When the engine is running, engine coolant is circulated at all times from the engine through hoses to the heater core. As the coolant flows through the engine and into the heater core, heat is removed from the engine and transferred to the heater core tubes and fins. Air is directed through the heater core and picks up the heat from the heater core fins and tubes and becomes distributed into the HVAC air distribution housing. The blend-air

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

doors allow control of the output air temperature by regulating the amount of air flowing through the heater core. The blower motor speed controls the volume of air flowing through the HVAC housing. The heater core cannot be repaired and must be replaced if restricted, leaking or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Refer to the applicable Warnings and Cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage while performing this procedure.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 211: Nut, HVAC Housing & Instrument Panel Support Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

2. Drain the engine cooling system. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. Remove the passenger side instrument panel silencer. 4. Remove the glove box, glove box shelf and the trim panel, located behind the glove box. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, REMOVAL . 5. Remove the nut (1) that secures the passenger side end of the HVAC housing (3) to the instrument panel support (2).

Fig. 212: HVAC Housing Four Nuts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. 7. 8. 9.

Remove the front floor console. Refer to CONSOLE, FLOOR, REMOVAL . Remove the radio. Refer to RADIO, REMOVAL . Remove the bin from the center of the instrument panel. Remove the four nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing to the center of the instrument panel support.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 213: Push Pin, Left Side Floor Ducts & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

10. On LHD, remove the driver side instrument panel silencer. 11. Remove the push pin (3) that secures the left side floor ducts (1) to the instrument panel. 12. Disconnect the left side floor ducts from the HVAC housing (2). NOTE:

Removal of the instrument panel from the vehicle is not required to perform this procedure. It is only necessary to position the instrument panel so that removal of the heater core is possible.

13. Position the instrument panel to gain full access to the heater core located on the left side of the HVAC air distribution housing. Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, REMOVAL .

Fig. 214: Two Clamps, Heater Tubes, Screw, Heater Core Retaining Bracket & Heater Core Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

14. 15. 16. 17.

Take proper precautions to protect the carpeting from engine coolant. Have absorbent toweling readily available to clean up any spills.

Remove the two clamps (2 and 6) that secure the heater tubes (1) to the heater core (3). Disconnect the heater core tubes from the heater core and remove and discard the O-ring seals. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened heater core tubes and heater core ports. Remove the screw (7) that secures the heater core retaining bracket (5) to the air distribution housing and position the bracket out of the way. NOTE:

If the foam seal around the heater core is deformed or damaged, it must be

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

replaced. 18. Carefully pull the heater core out of the air distribution housing. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustrations. RHD model similar.

Fig. 215: Two Clamps, Heater Tubes, Screw, Heater Core Retaining Bracket & Heater Core Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Carefully install the heater core (3) into the left side of the HVAC air distribution housing (4). 2. Reposition the heater core retaining bracket (5) and install the screw (7). Tighten the screw to 2.2 N.m (20 in. lbs.). 3. Remove the tape or plugs from the heater core tubes (1) and heater core ports. 4. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean engine coolant and install them onto the heater core tubes. Use only the specified O-ring as they are made of a special material for the engine cooling system. 5. Connect the heater core tubes to the heater core. 6. Install the two clamps (2 and 6) that secure the heater core tubes to the heater core. Tighten the screws on the clamps to 1.7 N.m (15 in. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 216: Push Pin, Left Side Floor Ducts & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Illustration shown with instrument panel removed from view for clarity.

7. Connect the left side floor ducts to the HVAC housing (2). 8. Reposition and install the instrument panel as necessary. Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, INSTALLATION . 9. Install the push pin (3) that secures the left side floor ducts to the instrument panel. 10. On LHD models, install the driver side instrument panel silencer.

Fig. 217: HVAC Housing Four Nuts Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 11. Install the four nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing to the center of the instrument panel support.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Tighten the nuts to 4.5 N.m (40 in. lbs.). 12. Install the bin into the center of the instrument panel. 13. Install the radio. Refer to RADIO, INSTALLATION . 14. Install the floor console. Refer to CONSOLE, FLOOR, INSTALLATION .

Fig. 218: Nut, HVAC Housing & Instrument Panel Support Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 15. Install the nut (1) that secures the passenger side end of the HVAC housing (3) to the instrument panel support (2). Tighten the nut to 4.5 N.m (40 in. lbs.). 16. Install the IP trim panel, glove box shelf and the glove box. Refer to GLOVE BOX, INSTRUMENT PANEL, INSTALLATION . 17. Install the passenger side instrument panel silencer. 18. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 19. If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system. Refer to REVERSE FLUSHING . 20. Refill the engine cooling system. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . CORE, SERVICE PORT VALVE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 219: High Side Service Port & Low Side Service Port Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The high side service port (1) is located on the A/C liquid line, near the upper radiator support. The low side service port (2) is located on the A/C suction line, near the left strut tower. Refrigerant system service ports are used to recover, recycle, evacuate, charge and test the A/C refrigerant system. Unique sizes are used on the two service ports for the R-134a refrigerant system to ensure the proper connections are made when using refrigerant system service equipment, and that the system is not accidentally contaminated with R-12 refrigerant, or by service equipment used for R-12 refrigerant. NOTE:

Protective caps aid in service port sealing and help protect the refrigerant system from contamination. Remember to always reinstall the protective caps onto the service ports when refrigerant system service is complete.

Each of the service ports has a threaded plastic protective cap installed over it from the factory. The high side and low side A/C service port valve cores and the protective caps are serviceable items. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious or fatal injury.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 220: Identifying A/C Service Port Components Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Typical A/C service port shown in illustration.

1. Remove the protective cap (1) from the service port (2). 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 3. Using a Schrader-type valve core tool, remove the valve core (3) from the service port. 4. Install a plug in, or tape over the opened service port(s). INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 221: Identifying A/C Service Port Components Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

Typical A/C service port shown in illustration.

1. Lubricate the valve core (3) with clean refrigerant oil prior to installation. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 2. Remove the tape or plug from the service port (2). CAUTION: Damage may result to a service port valve core if the valve core is not fully seated in the A/C service port. Such damage can result in a loss of refrigerant. 3. Install and tighten the valve core into the service port(s) using a Schrader type valve core tool. 4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. NOTE:

The protective cap helps aid in service port sealing and helps protect the refrigerant system from contamination. Remember to always reinstall the protective cap onto the service port when refrigerant system service is complete.

5. Install the protective cap (1) onto the service port. DRIER, A/C RECEIVER DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Gasoline engine model shown in illustration. Diesel engine model similar.

Fig. 222: A/C Condenser, Mounting Tabs, Steering Cooler, A/C Receiver/Drier & Tapping Block Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The A/C receiver/drier (5) stores unnecessary refrigerant, filters the refrigerant, helps remove moisture from the refrigerant and retains any refrigerant vapor that may leave the A/C condenser (1) until it becomes a liquid. The A/C receiver/drier is on the high-side of the A/C system and is located on the left side of the A/C condenser. CAUTION: The A/C condenser must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Failure to replace the A/C condenser can cause serious damage to the replacement A/C compressor. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL. The A/C receiver/drier is integral to the A/C condenser and must be replaced with the condenser as an assembly. OPERATION OPERATION

The A/C receiver/drier performs a filtering action to prevent foreign material that may be in the refrigerant from contaminating the A/C expansion valve and the A/C compressor. Refrigerant enters the A/C receiver/drier as a high-pressure, low temperature liquid. Desiccant inside the A/C receiver/drier absorbs any moisture which may have entered and become trapped within the refrigerant system. In addition, during periods of high demand operation of the A/C system, the A/C receiver/drier acts as a reservoir to store surplus refrigerant. The A/C receiver/drier is integral to the A/C condenser and has no serviceable parts. The A/C receiver/drier cannot be repaired and the A/C condenser must be replaced if the receiver/drier is leaking or damaged, or if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Refer to CONDENSER, A/C, REMOVAL.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

EVAPORATOR, A/C DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

Fig. 223: A/C Evaporator, Insulator, Tubes, O-Rings & Block Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The A/C evaporator (1) for the heating-A/C system is located within the HVAC housing, behind the instrument panel. The A/C evaporator and insulator (2) are positioned in the HVAC housing so that all air entering the housing must pass over the evaporator fins before it is distributed through the heating-A/C system ducts and outlets. However, air passing over the evaporator fins will only be conditioned when the A/C compressor is engaged and circulating refrigerant through the A/C evaporator. The A/C evaporator tubes (4) are connected and sealed to the A/C expansion valve by use of rubber O-rings (5) and a tapping block (3). The A/C evaporator can only be serviced by removing and disassembling the HVAC housing assembly. OPERATION OPERATION

Refrigerant enters the A/C evaporator from the A/C expansion valve as a low-temperature, low-pressure mixture of liquid and gas. As air flows over the fins of the A/C evaporator, the humidity in the air condenses on the fins, and the heat from the air is absorbed by the refrigerant. Heat absorption causes the refrigerant to boil and vaporize. The refrigerant becomes a low-pressure gas when it leaves the A/C evaporator. NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

a refrigerant line or expansion valve is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C evaporator has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C expansion valve is removed from the A/C evaporator. The A/C evaporator cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. REMOVAL REMOVAL

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

Fig. 224: Tapping Block, A/C Evaporator, Insulator & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the HVAC housing assembly. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, REMOVAL. 2. Disassemble the HVAC housing as necessary to access the A/C evaporator (2). Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, DISASSEMBLY. 3. Remove the tapping block (1) from the evaporator tubes. 4. Lift the A/C evaporator and insulator (3) out of the lower half of the HVAC housing (4). 5. If required, remove the insulator from the A/C evaporator. If the insulator is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle.

NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line seals is required anytime the A/C expansion valve is removed from the A/C evaporator. Failure to replace the rubber and metal seals may result in a refrigerant system leak.

NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

Fig. 225: Tapping Block, A/C Evaporator, Insulator & HVAC Housing Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. If removed, install the insulator (3) over the A/C evaporator (2). If the insulator is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 2. Install the A/C evaporator into the lower half of the HVAC housing (4). Make sure that the evaporator drain within the HVAC housing is clean and unrestricted and that the insulator and evaporator are properly positioned in the housing. 3. Install the tapping block (1) onto the evaporator tubes.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

4. Assemble the HVAC housing. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, ASSEMBLY. 5. Install the HVAC housing assembly. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC, INSTALLATION. 6. If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. LINE, A/C DISCHARGE REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

5.7L engine model shown in illustrations. Other models similar.

Fig. 226: Bolt, A/C Liquid Line, Nut, A/C Discharge Line & A/C Condenser Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, remove the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. Remove the engine trim cover, if equipped. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. Remove the grille. Refer to GRILLE, REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

6. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the A/C pressure transducer (3) and remove the transducer from the A/C discharge line (4), if required. Refer to TRANSDUCER, A/C PRESSURE, REMOVAL. 7. Remove the bolt (2) that secures the A/C liquid line (5) to the upper radiator support. 8. Remove the nut (6) that secures the A/C discharge line and A/C liquid line to the A/C condenser (1). 9. Disconnect the A/C discharge line and A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser. 10. Separate the liquid line fitting from the discharge line fitting and remove and discard the seals.

Fig. 227: Nuts, A/C Suction Line & A/C Discharge Line Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 11. 12. 13. 14.

Remove the nut (2) that secures the A/C discharge line (3) to the A/C compressor. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the seal. Remove the A/C discharge line from the engine compartment. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor and condenser ports.

INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line seals is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber and metal seals could result in a refrigerant system leak.

NOTE:

5.7L engine model shown in illustrations. Other models similar.

Fig. 228: Nuts, A/C Suction Line & A/C Discharge Line Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the A/C discharge line (3) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor and condenser ports. 3. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. 5. Install the nut (2) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 229: Bolt, A/C Liquid Line, Nut, A/C Discharge Line & A/C Condenser Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Engage the A/C liquid line (5) to the A/C discharge line (4) and connect the lines to the A/C condenser (1). 7. Install the nut (6) that secures the A/C discharge and liquid lines to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the bolt (2) that secures the A/C liquid line to the upper radiator support. Tighten the bolt securely. 9. If removed, install the A/C pressure transducer (3) onto the A/C discharge line. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer to 5.1 N.m (45 in. lbs.). 10. Connect the engine wire harness to the A/C pressure transducer. 11. Install the grille. Refer to GRILLE, INSTALLATION . 12. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, install the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. 13. Install the engine trim cover, if equipped. 14. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 15. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 16. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 17. Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. LINE, A/C LIQUID REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections.

NOTE:

LHD model with 5.7L engine shown in illustrations. RHD model and other engines similar.

FRONT

Fig. 230: Liquid Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, remove the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. Remove the engine trim cover, if equipped. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. Remove the nut (2) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (3) to the rear section of the A/C liquid line (1). 6. Disconnect the A/C liquid lines from each other and remove and discard the seal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 231: Bolt, A/C Liquid Line, Nut, A/C Discharge Line & A/C Condenser Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Remove the grille. Refer to GRILLE, REMOVAL . Remove the bolt (2) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (5) to the upper radiator support. Remove the nut (6) that secures the A/C discharge line (4) and A/C liquid line to the A/C condenser (1). Disconnect the A/C discharge line and A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser. Separate the A/C liquid line from the A/C discharge line and remove and discard the seals. Remove the front section of the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. Install plugs in, or tape over all the opened refrigerant line fittings and the condenser ports.

REAR

NOTE:

The rear section of the A/C liquid line is only serviced with the rear section of the A/C suction line.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 232: Suction Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, remove the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. Remove the engine trim cover, if equipped. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. Remove the evaporative emissions purge solenoid valve from the A/C liquid and suction line bracket located on the left front strut tower and position it out of the way. Refer to SOLENOID, EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS PURGE, REMOVAL . 6. Remove the nut (2) that secures the front section of the A/C suction line (3) to the rear section of the A/C suction line (1). 7. Disconnect the A/C suction lines from each other and remove and discard the seal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 233: Liquid Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Remove the nut (2) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (3) to the rear section of the A/C liquid line (1). 9. Disconnect the A/C liquid lines from each other and remove and discard the seal.

Fig. 234: A/C Suction & Liquid Line Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Remove the windshield wiper arms and wiper module. Refer to LINKAGE, WIPER ARM, REMOVAL . 11. Remove the cowl extension silencer. Refer to SILENCER, COWL EXTENSION . 12. Remove the nut (2) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly (1) to the stud (3) located on the left front strut tower. 13. Remove the bolt (4) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the cowl panel bracket. 14. Remove the nut (6) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the A/C expansion valve (5). 15. Disengage the A/C liquid and suction line assembly from the stud located on the strut tower. 16. Disconnect the A/C liquid and suction line assembly from the A/C expansion valve. 17. Remove the A/C liquid and suction line assembly from the engine compartment and remove and discard the seals. 18. Install plugs in, or tape over all the opened refrigerant line fittings and expansion valve ports. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak.

NOTE:

LHD model with 5.7L engine shown in illustrations. RHD model and other engines similar.

FRONT

Fig. 235: Bolt, A/C Liquid Line, Nut, A/C Discharge Line & A/C Condenser Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the front section of the A/C liquid line (5) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the condenser ports. 3. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Engage the A/C liquid line to the A/C discharge line (4) and connect the lines to the A/C condenser (1). 5. Install the nut (6) that secures the A/C discharge and liquid lines to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the bolt (2) that secures the A/C liquid line to the upper radiator support. Tighten the bolt securely. 7. Install the grille. Refer to GRILLE, INSTALLATION .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 236: Liquid Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line (3) to the rear section of the A/C liquid line (1). 9. Install the nut (2) that secures the two sections of the A/C liquid line together. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 10. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, install the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. 11. Install the engine trim cover, if equipped. 12. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 13. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 14. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 15. Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. REAR

NOTE:

The rear section of the A/C liquid line is only serviced with the rear section of the A/C suction line.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 237: A/C Suction & Liquid Line Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the A/C liquid and suction line assembly (1) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the expansion valve ports. 3. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the A/C expansion (5). 5. Engage the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to stud (3) located on the left front strut tower. 6. Install the nut (6) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the A/C expansion valve. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the bolt (4) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the cowl panel bracket. Tighten the bolt securely. 8. Install the nut (2) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the stud located on the strut tower. Tighten the nut securely.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 238: Liquid Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. 10. 11. 12.

Install the cowl extension silencer. Refer to INSTALLATION . Install the windshield wiper module and arms. Refer to LINKAGE, WIPER ARM, INSTALLATION . Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line (3) to the rear section of the A/C liquid line (1). Install the nut (2) that secures the two sections of the A/C liquid line together. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.).

Fig. 239: Suction Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 13. Connect the front section of the A/C suction line (3) to the rear section of the A/C suction line (1). 14. Install the nut (2) that secures the two sections of the A/C suction line together. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

15. Install the evaporative emissions purge solenoid valve. Refer to SOLENOID, EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS PURGE, INSTALLATION . 16. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, install the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. 17. Install the engine trim cover, if equipped. 18. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 19. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 20. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 21. Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. LINE, A/C SUCTION REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections.

NOTE:

LHD model with 5.7L engine shown in illustrations. RHD model and other engines similar.

FRONT

Fig. 240: Suction Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, remove the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. Remove the engine trim cover, if equipped. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. Remove the nut (2) that secures the front section of the A/C suction line (3) to the rear section of the A/C suction line (1). 6. Disconnect the A/C suction lines from each other and remove and discard the seal.

Fig. 241: Nuts, A/C Suction Line & A/C Discharge Line Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 7. 8. 9. 10.

Remove the nut (2) that secures the A/C suction line (1) to the A/C compressor. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the seal. Remove the front section of the A/C suction line from the engine compartment. Install plugs in, or tape over all of the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor port.

REAR

NOTE:

The rear section of the A/C suction line is only serviced with the rear section of the A/C liquid line.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 242: Suction Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, remove the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. Remove the engine trim cover, if equipped. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. Remove the evaporative emissions purge solenoid valve from the A/C liquid and suction line bracket located on the left front strut tower and position it out of the way. Refer to SOLENOID, EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS PURGE, REMOVAL . 6. Remove the nut (2) that secures the front section of the A/C suction line (3) to the rear section of the A/C suction line (1). 7. Disconnect the A/C suction lines from each other and remove and discard the seal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 243: Liquid Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Remove the nut (2) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (3) to the rear section of the A/C liquid line (1). 9. Disconnect the A/C liquid lines from each other and remove and discard the seal.

Fig. 244: A/C Suction & Liquid Line Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Remove the windshield wiper arms and wiper module. Refer to LINKAGE, WIPER ARM, REMOVAL . 11. Remove the cowl extension silencer. Refer to SILENCER, COWL EXTENSION . 12. Remove the nut (2) that secures the A/C suction and liquid line assembly (1) to the stud (3) located on the left front strut tower. 13. Remove the bolt (4) that secures the A/C suction and liquid line assembly to the cowl panel bracket. 14. Remove the nut (6) that secures the A/C suction and liquid line assembly to the A/C expansion valve (5). 15. Disengage the A/C suction and liquid line assembly from the stud located on the strut tower. 16. Disconnect the A/C suction and liquid line assembly from the A/C expansion valve. 17. Remove the A/C suction and liquid line assembly from the engine compartment and remove and discard the seals. 18. Install plugs in, or tape over all the opened refrigerant line fittings and expansion valve ports. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line seals is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber and metal seals could result in a refrigerant system leak.

NOTE:

LHD model with 5.7L engine shown in illustrations. RHD model and other engines similar.

FRONT

Fig. 245: Nuts, A/C Suction Line & A/C Discharge Line Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the front section of the A/C suction line (2) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the compressor port. 3. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor (4). 5. Install the nut (5) that secures the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 246: Suction Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 6. Connect the front section of the A/C suction line (3) to the rear section of the A/C suction line (1). 7. Install the nut (2) that secures the two sections of the A/C suction line together. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 8. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, install the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. 9. Install the engine trim cover, if equipped. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 12. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 13. Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. REAR

NOTE:

The rear section of the A/C suction line is only serviced with the rear section of the A/C liquid line.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 247: A/C Suction & Liquid Line Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Position the A/C suction and liquid line assembly (1) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the expansion valve ports. 3. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the A/C suction and liquid line assembly to the A/C expansion (5). 5. Engage the A/C suction and liquid line assembly to stud (3) located on the left front strut tower. 6. Install the nut (6) that secures the A/C suction and liquid line assembly to the A/C expansion valve. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the bolt (4) that secures the A/C suction and liquid line assembly to the cowl panel bracket. Tighten the bolt securely. 8. Install the nut (2) that secures the A/C suction and liquid line assembly to the stud located on the strut tower. Tighten the nut securely.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 248: Liquid Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 9. 10. 11. 12.

Install the cowl extension silencer. Refer to INSTALLATION . Install the windshield wiper module and arms. Refer to LINKAGE, WIPER ARM, INSTALLATION . Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line (3) to the rear section of the A/C liquid line (1). Install the nut (2) that secures the two sections of the A/C liquid line together. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.).

Fig. 249: Suction Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 13. Connect the front section of the A/C suction line (3) to the rear section of the A/C suction line (1). 14. Install the nut (2) that secures the two sections of the A/C suction line together. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

15. Install the evaporative emissions purge solenoid valve. Refer to SOLENOID, EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS PURGE, INSTALLATION . 16. On 5.7L and 3.6L models, install the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. 17. Install the engine trim cover, if equipped. 18. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 19. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 20. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 21. Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE. OIL, REFRIGERANT STANDARD PROCEDURE REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL

When an A/C system is assembled at the factory, all components except the A/C compressor are refrigerant oil free. After the refrigerant system has been charged and operated, the refrigerant oil in the A/C compressor is dispersed throughout the refrigerant system. The receiver/drier, A/C evaporator, A/C condenser and the A/C compressor will each retain a significant amount of the needed refrigerant oil. It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system. This ensures proper lubrication of the A/C compressor. Too little oil will result in damage to the A/C compressor, while too much oil will reduce the cooling capacity of the A/C system and consequently result in higher discharge air temperatures. CAUTION: The refrigerant oil in the A/C system is unique depending on the A/C compressor used. Use only PAG oils that are designed to work with the refrigerant type and A/C compressor in the vehicle. Always refer to the A/C Underhood Specification Label for the correct oil designation. The refrigerant oil container should be kept tightly capped until it is ready for use, and then tightly recapped after use to prevent contamination from dirt and moisture. Refrigerant oil will quickly absorb any moisture it comes in contact with, therefore, special effort must be used to keep all R-134a system components moisture-free. Moisture in the refrigerant oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. NOTE:

Most reclaim/recycling equipment will measure the lubricant being removed during recovery. This amount of lubricant should be added back into the system. Refer to the reclaim/recycling equipment manufacturers instructions.

It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C condenser, A/C evaporator or A/C receiver/drier is replaced. See the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart. The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation. Refer to COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE. REFRIGERANT OIL TYPE A/C Compressor Denso 10SRE18 - 3.0L/5.7L Engines Visteon RS-18 - 3.6L Engine

Oil Type ND-8 PAG oil* VC-46 PAG oil*

*Always use the type of PAG oil listed for the model being serviced. See A/C Underhood Specification Label located in the engine compartment. Do not mix different types of PAG oils. REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITIES Component Name Total System Fill A/C Compressor A/C Condenser A/C Evaporator A/C Receiver/drier

ml. oz. 120 4.0 Drain and measure the oil from the old compressor. Refer to COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE. 30 1.0 40 1.4 30 1.0

COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE

CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Failure to properly drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and cause serious compressor damage. The A/C compressor is filled with refrigerant oil from the factory. Use the following procedure to drain and measure refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor. 1. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the old A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 2. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the new A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 3. Refill the new A/C compressor with the same amount of refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. Use only clean refrigerant oil of the type specified for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the new A/C compressor onto the engine. Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C, INSTALLATION. REFRIGERANT SPECIFICATIONS REFRIGERANT CHARGE CAPACITY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

REFRIGERANT CHARGE CAPACITY Application All models

Capacity 623.7g (1.375 lbs.)

VALVE, A/C EXPANSION DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

Fig. 250: A/C Expansion Valve Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC The A/C expansion valve controls the amount of refrigerant entering the A/C evaporator and is of a thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) design. The A/C expansion valve consists of an aluminum H-valve type body (1) with an integral thermal sensor (2) and is located at the dash panel between the A/C refrigerant lines and the A/C evaporator. OPERATION OPERATION

The A/C expansion valve controls the high-pressure, low temperature liquid refrigerant from the A/C liquid line and converts it into a low-pressure, low-temperature mixture of liquid and gas before it enters the A/C evaporator. A mechanical sensor in the A/C expansion valve monitors the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the A/C evaporator through the A/C suction line, and adjusts the orifice size at the liquid line port to let the proper amount of refrigerant into the evaporator to meet the vehicle A/C cooling requirements. Controlling the refrigerant flow through the A/C evaporator ensures that none of the refrigerant leaving the A/C evaporator is still in a liquid state, which could damage the A/C compressor. NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected from the expansion valve. Failure to replace the rubber Oring seals could result in a refrigerant system leak.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

The A/C expansion valve is factory calibrated and cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - A/C EXPANSION VALVE

WARNING: Refer to the applicable Warnings and Cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

The A/C expansion valve should only be tested following testing of the A/C compressor.

NOTE:

Liquid CO2 is required to test the A/C expansion valve. This material is available from most welding supply facilities. Liquid CO2 is also available from companies which service and sell fire extinguishers.

When testing the A/C expansion valve, the work area and the vehicle temperature must be 21° to 27° C (70° to 85° F). To test the expansion valve: 1. Connect a charging station or manifold gauge set to the refrigerant system service ports. Verify the refrigerant charge level. 2. Close all doors, windows and vents to the passenger compartment. 3. Set the A/C-heater controls so that the A/C compressor is operating, the temperature control is in the highest temperature position, the mode-air doors is directing air output to the floor and the blower motor operating is operating at the highest speed. 4. Start the engine and allow it to idle. After the engine has reached normal operating temperature, allow the passenger compartment to heat up. This will create the need for maximum refrigerant flow into the A/C evaporator. 5. If the refrigerant charge is sufficient, the discharge (high pressure) gauge should read 827 kPa to 1655 kPa (120 psi to 240 psi). The suction (low pressure) gauge should read 207 kPa to 345 kPa (30 psi to 50 psi). If OK, refer to 6. If not OK, replace the inoperative A/C expansion valve. WARNING: Protect the skin and eyes from exposure to liquid CO2 or personal injury can result. 6. If the suction (low pressure) gauge reads within the specified range, freeze the A/C expansion valve for 30 seconds using liquid CO2 or another suitable super-cold material.Do not spray R-134a or R-12 refrigerant on the A/C expansion valve for this test. The suction (low pressure) gauge reading should drop by 69 kPa (10 psi). If OK, refer to 7. If not OK, replace the inoperative A/C expansion valve. 7. Allow the expansion valve control head to thaw. The suction (low pressure) gauge reading should stabilize at 207 kPa to 345 kPa (30 psi to 50 psi). If not OK, replace the inoperative A/C expansion valve.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

8. When the expansion valve testing is complete, test the overall A/C system performance. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

LHD model with 5.7L engine shown in illustrations. RHD model and other engines similar.

Fig. 251: Suction Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. On 3.6Land 5.7L models, remove the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. Remove the engine trim cover, if equipped. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 5. Remove the evaporative emissions purge solenoid valve from the A/C liquid and suction line bracket located on the left front strut tower and position it out of the way. Refer to SOLENOID, EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS PURGE, REMOVAL . 6. Remove the nut (2) that secures the front section of the A/C suction line (3) to the rear section of the A/C suction line (1). 7. Disconnect the A/C suction lines from each other and remove and discard the seal.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 252: Liquid Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 8. Remove the nut (2) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (3) to the rear section of the A/C liquid line (1). 9. Disconnect the A/C liquid lines from each other and remove and discard the seal.

Fig. 253: A/C Suction & Liquid Line Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 10. Remove the windshield wiper arms and wiper module. Refer to LINKAGE, WIPER ARM, REMOVAL . 11. Remove the cowl extension silencer. Refer to SILENCER, COWL EXTENSION . 12. Remove the nut (2) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly (1) to the stud (3) located on the left front strut tower.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

Remove the bolt (4) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the cowl panel bracket. Remove the nut (6) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the A/C expansion valve (5). Disengage the A/C liquid and suction line assembly from the stud located on the strut tower. Disconnect the A/C liquid and suction line assembly from the A/C expansion valve. Remove the A/C liquid and suction line assembly from the engine compartment and remove and discard the seals.

Fig. 254: Two Bolts & A/C Expansion Valve Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 18. Remove the two bolts (1) that secure the A/C expansion valve (2) to the evaporator tube tapping block. 19. Remove the A/C expansion valve from the evaporator tubes and remove and discard the seals. 20. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fittings and evaporator ports. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE:

When replacing multiple A/C system components, see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE.

NOTE:

Replacement of the refrigerant line seals is required anytime the A/C expansion valve is removed from the A/C evaporator. Failure to replace the rubber and

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

metal seals may result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE:

LHD model with 5.7L engine shown in illustrations. RHD model and other engines similar.

Fig. 255: Two Bolts & A/C Expansion Valve Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Remove the tape or plugs from all the opened refrigerant line fittings and evaporator ports. 2. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the evaporator tube and refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 3. Install the A/C expansion valve (2) onto the evaporator tubes. 4. Install the two bolts (1) that secure the A/C expansion valve to the evaporator tube tapping block. Tighten the bolts to 11 N.m (97 in. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 256: A/C Suction & Liquid Line Assembly Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 5. Position the A/C liquid and suction line assembly (1) into the engine compartment. 6. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant line fittings and the expansion valve ports. 7. Lubricate new seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line fittings. Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 8. Connect the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the A/C expansion (5). 9. Engage the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to stud (3) located on the left front strut tower. 10. Install the nut (6) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the A/C expansion valve. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the bolt (4) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the cowl panel bracket. Tighten the bolt securely. 12. Install the nut (2) that secures the A/C liquid and suction line assembly to the stud located on the strut tower. Tighten the nut securely. 13. Install the cowl extension silencer. Refer to INSTALLATION . 14. Install the windshield wiper module and arms. Refer to LINKAGE, WIPER ARM, INSTALLATION .

Fig. 257: Liquid Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 15. Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line (3) to the rear section of the A/C liquid line (1). 16. Install the nut (2) that secures the two sections of the A/C liquid line together. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 258: Suction Line & Nut Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 17. Connect the front section of the A/C suction line (3) to the rear section of the A/C suction line (1). 18. Install the nut (2) that secures the two sections of the A/C suction line together. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 ft. lbs.). 19. Install the evaporative emissions purge solenoid valve. Refer to SOLENOID, EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS PURGE, INSTALLATION . 20. On 3.6L and 5.7L models, install the air cleaner housing, air intake tube and resonator, as equipped. 21. Install the engine trim cover, if equipped. 22. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 23. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Refer to PLUMBING, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 24. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. Refer to OIL, REFRIGERANT, STANDARD PROCEDURE. 25. Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE.

CABIN HEATER UNIT, HEATER DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 259: Positive Temperature Coefficient Heater Unit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

An Electric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater unit (1) is used on vehicles when equipped with the 3.0L diesel engine. The PTC heater unit aids in passenger compartment heating by compensating for the lower engine coolant temperatures produced by the diesel engine. The PTC heater unit is mounted in the HVAC air distribution housing, downstream of the heater core and is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The PTC heater consists of a molded plastic mounting plate (2) with an integral wire connector receptacle (3). Concealed behind the mounting plate are four heating elements with fins (4) that transfer the heat produced by the PTC heater to the conditioned air flowing within the air distribution housing. A retaining feature (5) is molded onto the opposite end of the heater unit to support the heater unit inside the air distribution housing. The PTC heater unit is connected to the vehicle electrical system through the instrument panel wire harness and the PTC heater jumper harness. The PTC heater unit is accessed for service by removing the instrument panel. OPERATION OPERATION

The Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater unit dissipates 1 kW of electrical power through 4 heating bars. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) operate three relays for the PTC heater unit. The PTC heater unit is split into three "banks". Each bank is driven separately based on alternator load. This allows for lower in-rush current and optimum battery charging. After a bank has been turned on, another bank can only be turned on 10 seconds after the previous. On average, the PTC banks are not switched more than 25 times for each vehicle start. Electrical power output is between 900-1050 W.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

The control system for the PTC heater unit is diagnosed using a scan tool. Prior to replacing a PTC heater unit, check for any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) related to the heating and A/C system, PCM and TIPM. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function to verify that the concern is not a heating and A/C system calibration issue. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . The PTC heater unit cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING POSITIVE TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (PTC) HEATER UNIT

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE:

Refer to appropriate Wiring Information for circuit descriptions and diagrams. Wiring Information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds.

Prior to replacing the Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) heater unit, check for any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) related to the heating and A/C system, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). Repair as necessary. Also, initiate the Actuator Calibration function to verify that the concern is not a heating and A/C system calibration issue. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the PTC heater unit. Refer to UNIT, HEATER, REMOVAL. 3. Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between all of the PTC heater unit terminals. In each case there should be continuity. If OK, repair the wire harness circuits between the PTC heater unit and the PCM and the TIPM. If not OK, replace the PTC heater unit. REMOVAL REMOVAL

WARNING: Refer to the applicable Warnings and Cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Refer to PLUMBING, WARNING and PLUMBING, CAUTION. Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Refer to WARNING . Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury.

Fig. 260: Disconnecting Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

PTC heater shown in illustration removed from distribution housing for clarity.

1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, REMOVAL . NOTE:

To disconnect the wire harness connector from the heater unit, pull upward on the connector lock while pulling the connector away from the heater unit.

3. Disengage the wire connector lock (1) and disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the positive temperature coefficient (PTC) heater unit (3).

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 261: PTC Heater Unit, Housing & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the PTC heater unit (2) to the driver side of the HVAC air distribution housing (3). 5. Carefully remove the PTC heater unit from the air distribution housing by pulling it straight out of the housing. INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Service Information - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 262: PTC Heater Unit, Housing & Screws Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

LHD model shown in illustration. RHD model similar.

1. Carefully install the positive temperature coefficient (PTC) heater unit (2) into the driver side of the HVAC air distribution housing (3). Make sure to engage the top end of the heater unit to the plastic molded pin located inside of the air distribution housing, on the passenger side of the housing. 2. Install the two screws (1) that secure the PTC heater unit to the air distribution housing. Tighten the screws to 2 N.m (17 in. lbs.).

Fig. 263: Connecting Wire Harness Connector Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC NOTE:

PTC heater shown in illustration removed from distribution housing for clarity.

3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the PTC heater unit (2) while pulling downward on the connector lock (3). Make sure the wire harness connector and lock are fully engaged. 4. Install the instrument panel. Refer to PANEL, INSTRUMENT, INSTALLATION . 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX DTC Description B1000-92 A/C SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1003-92 PANEL MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1006-92 BI-LEVEL MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1009-92 RECIRCULATION SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B100C-92 FLOOR MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B100F-92 MIX MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1012-92 DEFROST MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1015-92 EBL / REAR DEFROST SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B101E-92 POWER ON/OFF SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1030-11 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1030-12 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1037-92 AUTO SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1058-11 RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND B1058-12 RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY B1058-13 RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN B1058-2B RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - WIRES SHORTED TOGETHER B1058-92 RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B105C-00 RECIRCULATION DOOR TRAVEL RANGE TOO SMALL B105D-00 RECIRCULATION DOOR TRAVEL RANGE TOO LARGE B1084-92 LEFT HEATED SEAT REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B1087-92 RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION B10B2-00 A/C COOL DOWN TEST PERFORMANCE B10E8-14 BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B10E8-12 B1142-92 B1184-92 B1185-92 B1186-92 B1187-92 B1188-92 B11C2-11 B11C2-12 B11C2-13 B11C2-2B B11C2-92 B11C3-00 B11C4-00 B11C8-11 B11C8-12 B11C8-13 B11C8-2B B11CB-92 B11C9-00 B11CA-00 B11CB-11 B11CB-12 B11CB-13 B11CB-2B B11CB-92 B11CC-00 B11CD-00 B11D3-00 B11D5-00 B10D6-92

BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY MODE UP SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION MAIN/LEFT TEMP UP SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION MAIN/LEFT TEMP DOWN SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION RIGHT TEMP UP SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION RIGHT TEMP DOWN SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - WIRES SHORTED TOGETHER FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION FRONT MODE DOOR 1 TRAVEL RANGE TOO SMALL FRONT MODE DOOR 1 TRAVEL RANGE TOO LARGE RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - WIRES SHORTED TOGETHER RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR TRAVEL TOO SMALL RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR TRAVEL TOO LARGE MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - WIRES SHORTED TOGETHER MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR TRAVEL TOO SMALL MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR TRAVEL TOO LARGE A/C COOLDOWN TEST PERFORMANCE - COMPRESSOR NOT ENGAGED A/C COOLDOWN TEST PERFORMANCE - EVAP TEMP SENSOR ERROR LEFT SEAT VENTILATION SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B10D7-92 B11D9-92 B11DA-96 B11DB-92 B11E9-92 B11EA-92 B1600-11 B1600-12 B1603-11 B1603-12 B160F-11 B160F-12 B210A-84 B210B-85 B210D-84 B210E-85 B2214-00 B222A-00 U0010-00 U0141-00 U0155-00 U0208

OR INCORRECT OPERATION RIGHT SEAT VENTILATION SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION BLOWER SPEED KNOB REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION ITOS CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION LEFT TEMPERATURE KNOB REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION RIGHT TEMPERATURE KNOB REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION LEFT SOLAR SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND LEFT SOLAR SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY RIGHT SOLAR SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND RIGHT SOLAR SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY TWILIGHT/AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND TWILIGHT/AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE (HVAC) CLIMATE CONTROL INTERNAL VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH CAN INTERIOR BUS LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING B1000-92-A/C SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C On/Off Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the A/C On/Off Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the A/C On/Off Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



No

The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1003-92-PANEL MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Panel Mode Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Panel Mode Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Panel Mode Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 

Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No



B1006-92-BI-LEVEL MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Bi-level Mode Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Bi-level Mode Control Switch in an On position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Bi-level Mode Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1009-92-RECIRCULATION SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Recirculation Mode Switch is stuck in a On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Recirculation Mode Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Recirculation Mode Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B100C-92-FLOOR MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Floor Mode Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Floor Mode Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Floor Mode Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B100F-92-MIX MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Mix Mode Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Mix Mode Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Mix Mode Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1012-92-DEFROST MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Defrost Mode Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Defrost Mode Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Defrost Mode Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 

The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1015-92-EBL / REAR DEFROST SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

If the Electric Back light (EBL) Electronic Rear Defrost Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 20 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the (EBL) Electronic Rear Defrost Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the (EBL) Electronic Rear Defrost Switch being held in or stuck in an On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 20 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B101E-92-POWER ON/OFF SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Power On/Off Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Power On/Off Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Power On/Off Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1030-11-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Evaporator Temperature Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The HVAC A/C heater control uses a variety of sensors to adjust HVAC operation to obtain optimal performance. These sensors are continuously monitored by the A/C heater control to assure that they are in range. An active Diagnostic trouble Code (DTC) indicates that a sensor is out of range. A stored DTC indicates that the sensor was out of range but is currently within range. The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the surface temperature of the A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C heater control. The input signal value is used to optimize the A/C system performance and to protect the A/C evaporator from freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor resistance value will change in response to the surface temperature of A/C evaporator. The resistance value is electronically transferred to the A/C heater control using a sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. Normal operation of the sensor the resistive value decreases when the A/C evaporator temperature decreases and the sensor resistive value increases when the A/C evaporator temperature increases. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short to ground on the Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal voltage input to the controller. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid voltage, the DTC will change from active to stored and will stay stored for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C21) EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 5. 2. CHECK (C21) EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 2: Checking Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the Evaporator Temperature Sensor harness connector.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C21) Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (C21) Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK (C21) EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C121) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 3: Checking Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To The Sensor

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between the (C21) Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal circuit and the (C121) Sensor Ground circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (C21) Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal circuit for a short to the (C121) Sensor Ground circuit. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Replace the Evaporator Temperature Sensor in Accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE , REMOVAL . 2. Cycle the ignition off for 30 seconds then back on. 3. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B1030-12-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Evaporator Temperature Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The HVAC A/C heater control uses a variety of sensors to adjust HVAC operation to obtain optimal performance. These sensors are continuously monitored by the A/C heater control to assure that they are in range. An active Diagnostic trouble Code (DTC) indicates that a sensor is out of range. A stored DTC indicates that the sensor was out of range but is currently within range. The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the surface temperature of the A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C heater control. The input signal value is used to optimize the A/C system performance and to protect the A/C evaporator from freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor resistance value will change in response to the surface temperature of A/C evaporator. The resistance value is electronically transferred to the A/C heater control using a sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. Normal operation of the sensor the resistive value decreases when the A/C evaporator temperature decreases and the sensor resistive value increases when the A/C evaporator temperature increases. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short to voltage on the Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid voltage the DTC will change from active to stored and will stay stored for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C21) EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (C21) EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL OPEN (C121) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK (C21) EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 5: Checking Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Evaporator Temperature Sensor harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (C21) Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (C21) Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (C21) EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Measure the resistance of the (C21) Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Evaporator Temperature Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Repair the (C21) Evaporator Temperature Sensor Signal circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C121) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 7: Checking Sensor Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (C121) Sensor Ground circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Evaporator Temperature Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm? Yes  

Repair the (C121) Sensor Ground circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Evaporator Temperature Sensor in Accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE , REMOVAL . 3. Ignition on, engine not running. 4. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 5. Cycle the ignition off for 30 seconds then back on. 6. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B1037-92-AUTO SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Auto Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Auto Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Auto Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1058-11-RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short to ground on the Recirculation Door Driver circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C32) RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C32) RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Checking Recirculation Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Recirculation Door Actuator harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C32) Recirculation Door Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C32) Recirculation Door Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 10: Checking Common Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Recirculation Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, RECIRCULATION DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B1058-12-RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short voltage on the Recirculation Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid voltage, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C32) RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C32) RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 12: Checking Recirculation Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Recirculation Door Actuator harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (C32) Recirculation Door Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C32) Recirculation Door Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 13: Checking Common Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Recirculation Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, RECIRCULATION DOOR , REMOVAL . 3. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION . 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete.

B1058-13-RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 14: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects an open in the Recirculation Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C32) RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C32) RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 15: Checking Recirculation Door Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the Recirculation Door Actuator harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (C32) Recirculation Door Driver circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Recirculation Door Actuator harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm? Yes 

Repair the (C32) Recirculation Door Driver circuit for an open or high resistance.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 16: Checking Common Door Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit between the A/C Heater Control

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

C1 harness connector and the Recirculation Door Actuator harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm? Yes  

Repair the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Recirculation Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, RECIRCULATION DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete.

B1058-2B-RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - WIRES SHORTED TOGETHER

Fig. 17: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects the control wiring shorted together in the Recirculation Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C32) RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN THE (C32) RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT AND THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 18: Checking For A Short Between The Recirculation Door Driver Circuit And The Common Door Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Recirculation Door Actuator harness connector. Measure the resistance between the (C32) Recirculation Door Driver circuit and the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes 

Repair the short between (C32) Recirculation Door Driver circuit and the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Recirculation Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, RECIRCULATION DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B1058-92-RECIRCULATION DOOR CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater Control detects a overheat condition of the Integrated Circuit (IC) that controls the Recirculation Door Driver circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid temperature the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Allow the A/C Heater Control to cool down for five minutes then Go To 2.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B105C-00-RECIRCULATION DOOR TRAVEL RANGE TOO SMALL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

When ever an Actuator Calibration Test is performed. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control uses a pulse feedback to the controller to detect the total door movement range. If the amount of pulses required to move the door completely in both directions is less than what the controller has stored in its memory, this DTC will set. If an Actuator Calibration Test is performed and the A/C Heater Control detects a valid range of the door movement span in both directions, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED DTCS PRESENT RECIRCULATION DOOR BINDING RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Are there any Door Control Circuit Open, Performance, or Short to Ground, Voltage, or Together DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is this DTC active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 6. 4. CHECK THE RECIRCULATION DOOR 1. Remove the Recirculation Door Actuator and check the Recirculation Door for binding and full travel. Refer to ACTUATOR, RECIRCULATION DOOR , REMOVAL . 

Were there any problems found? Yes 



Repair or replace the Recirculation Door as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Recirculation Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, RECIRCULATION DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC reset during HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B105D-00-RECIRCULATION DOOR TRAVEL RANGE TOO LARGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

When ever an Actuator Calibration Test is performed.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control uses a pulse feedback to the controller to detect the total door movement range. If the amount of pulses required to move the door completely in both directions is greater than what the controller has stored in its memory, this DTC will set. If an Actuator Calibration Test is performed or during normal operation and the A/C Heater Control detects a valid range of the door movement span in both directions, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED DTCS PRESENT RECIRCULATION DOOR STOPS RECIRCULATION DOOR RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Are there any Door Control Circuit Short to Voltage, Short to Ground or Open DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 6. 4. CHECK THE RECIRCULATION DOOR 1. Remove the Recirculation Door Actuator and check the Recirculation Door stops, linkage (stripped or cracked) and door. Refer to ACTUATOR, RECIRCULATION DOOR , REMOVAL . 

Were there any problems found? Yes 



Repair or replace the Recirculation Door as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HOUSING, HVAC , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE RECIRCULATION DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Recirculation Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, RECIRCULATION DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes  

No

Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B1084-92-LEFT HEATED SEAT REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Left Heated Seat Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Left Heated Seat Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Left Heated Seat switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 

Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No



B1087-92-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Right Heated Seat Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Right Heated Seat Switch in an On position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Right Heated Seat switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B10B2-00-A/C COOL DOWN TEST PERFORMANCE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The A/C Heater Controller has software to enable it to perform an A/C Cool Down Test by a command using a scan tool. This test checks for evaporator temperature drop over a predetermined time. If the test fails, this DTC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

will set. However, certain test conditions are required to perform this test. Failure to run this test within those parameters can result in failure of the test. WHEN MONITORED:

With ever an A/C Cooldown Test is performed. SET CONDITION:

This DTC is set whenever the A/C Cooldown Test is performed and the desired temperature drop is not achieved by the system. The DTC will go to stored after a successful A/C Cooldown Test. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes A/C SYSTEM WORKING IMPROPERLY Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CONDITIONS FOR A/C COOLDOWN TEST 1. The following condition must be met before running the A/C Cooldown test.  No Powertrain Control Module (PCM) DTCs present.  No Communication DTCs present.  Condenser cooling fan working properly.  No active HVAC evaporator temperature sensor, sun sensor, recirculation, mode, or blend door actuator DTCs present.  The refrigerant system must be fully charged.  The blower motor must operate correctly in all speeds.  The evaporator temperature must be above 12.7° C (55° F).  The A/C compressor must be turned off.  Blower must be on high. Are all of the above conditions met before running the A/C Cooldown Test? Yes 

Go to the Service Information for additional Cooldown Test related diagnostic information and testing procedures and repair as necessary. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . NOTE:

Run the Cooldown Test again after any repairs are performed.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



If the Cooldown Test passes, testing is complete.



Run the A/C Cooldown test again with the above test conditions.

No

B10E8-14-BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 19: Front Blower Motor Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The A/C Heater Control constantly monitors the Blower Control circuit to the Blower Motor Power Module for proper operation. If the voltage or the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) on that circuit drops below or rises above a predetermined value, a DTC will set. For further information, refer to MODULE, POWER, BLOWER MOTOR , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater control detects the Blower Motor Control circuit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) is less than 0% and or greater than 100% or PWM equals 100% for the period of 30 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C56) BLOWER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (C56) BLOWER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BLOWER MOTOR POWER MODULE A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. NOTE:

It can take up to 30 seconds or more for this DTC to mature.

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (C56) BLOWER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 20: Checking Blower Control Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Blower Motor Power Module C1 harness connector Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C56) Blower Control circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C56) Blower Control circuit for an short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (C56) BLOWER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 21: Checking Blower Control Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Measure the resistance of the (C56) Blower Control circuit between the A/C Heater Control harness connector and the Blower Motor Power Module harness connector. Is the resistance above 100k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (C56) Blower Control circuit for an open. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 22: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12 volts, check the (Z911) Ground circuit. NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes  

Repair the (Z911) Ground circuit for an open. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR POWER MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Blower Motor Power Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER, BLOWER MOTOR , REMOVAL . 3. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 

Did the DTC reset during or after the HVAC Verification Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B10E8-12-BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 23: Front Blower Motor Control Module Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The A/C Heater Control constantly monitors the Blower Control circuit to the Blower Motor Power Module for proper operation. If the voltage or the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) on that circuit drops below or rises above a predetermined value, a DTC will set. For further information, refer to MODULE, POWER, BLOWER MOTOR , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater control detects the Blower Motor Control circuit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) is less than 0% and or greater than 100% or PWM equals 0% for the period of 30 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C56) BLOWER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE BLOWER MOTOR POWER MODULE A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. NOTE:

It can take up to 30 seconds or more for this DTC to mature.

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. CHECK THE (C56) BLOWER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 24: Checking Blower Control Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the Blower Motor Power Module C1 harness connector. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (C56) Blower Control circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is there and voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (C56) Blower Control circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR POWER MODULE 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Blower Motor Power Module in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, POWER, BLOWER MOTOR , REMOVAL . 3. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 

Did the DTC reset during or after the HVAC Verification Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete. 4. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test complete.

B1142-92-MODE UP SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Up Mode Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Up Mode Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Up Mode Switch being held in or stuck On?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1184-92-MAIN/LEFT TEMP UP SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Left Temperature Up Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Left Temperature Up Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Left Temperature Up Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1185-92-MAIN/LEFT TEMP DOWN SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Left Temperature Down Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Left Temperature Down Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Left Temperature Down Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1186-92-RIGHT TEMP UP SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Right Temperature Up Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Right Temperature Up Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

switch. Is the Right Temperature Up Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1187-92-RIGHT TEMP DOWN SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Right Temperature Down Control Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Right Temperature Down Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Right Temperature Down Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B1188-92-HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Heater Steering Wheel Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Heater Steering Wheel Control Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Heated Steering Wheel Control Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B11C2-11-FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 25: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short to ground on the Mode Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C35) MODE DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND MODE DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C35) MODE DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 26: Checking Mode Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Mode Door Actuator harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C35) Mode Door Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (C35) Mode Door Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 27: Checking Common Door Driver 2 Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes 

Repair the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit for a short to ground.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE MODE DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Mode Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, MODE DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11C2-12-FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 28: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short voltage on the Mode Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid voltage, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C35) MODE DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE MODE DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C35) MODE DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 29: Checking Mode Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Mode Door Actuator harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (C35) Mode Door Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C35) Mode Door Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT 2 FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 30: Checking Common Door Driver Circuit 2 For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE MODE DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Mode Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, MODE DOOR , REMOVAL . 3. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11C2-13-FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 31: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects an open in the Mode Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C35) MODE DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN MODE DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C35) MODE DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 32: Checking Mode Door Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Mode Door Actuator harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (C35) Mode Door Driver circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Mode Door Actuator harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C35) Mode Door Driver circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 33: Checking Common Door Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (C807) Common Door Driver circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Mode Door Actuator harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (C807) Common Door Driver circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE MODE DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Mode Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, MODE DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11C2-2B-FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - WIRES SHORTED TOGETHER

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 34: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects the control wiring shorted together in the Mode Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid amperage draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C35) MODE DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT MODE DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. CHECK THE (C35) MODE DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT 

Fig. 35: Checking Mode Door Driver Circuit For A Short To The Common Door Driver 2 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. Disconnect the Mode Door Actuator harness connector. 3. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. 4. Measure the resistance between the (C35) Mode Door Driver circuit and the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes 



Repair the (C35) Mode Door Driver circuit for a short to the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE MODE DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Mode Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, MODE DOOR , REMOVAL . 3. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11C2-92-FRONT MODE DOOR 1 CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater Control detects a overheat condition of the Integrated Circuit (IC) that controls the Mode Door Driver circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid temperature the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Allow the A/C Heater Control to cool down for five minutes then go to 2.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

B11C3-00-FRONT MODE DOOR 1 TRAVEL RANGE TOO SMALL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

When ever an Actuator Calibration Test is performed. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control uses a pulse feedback to the controller to detect the total door movement range. If the amount of pulses required to move the door completely in both directions is less than what the controller has stored in its memory, this DTC will set. If an Actuator Calibration Test is performed and the A/C Heater Control detects a valid range of the door movement span in both directions, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED DTCS PRESENT MODE DOOR BINDING MODE DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Are there any Door Control Circuit Open, Performance, or Short to Ground, Voltage, or Together DTCs present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 6. 4. CHECK THE MODE DOOR 1. Remove the Mode Door Actuator and check the Mode Door for binding and full travel. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair or replace the Mode Door as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE MODE DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Mode Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, MODE DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC reset during HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11C4-00-FRONT MODE DOOR 1 TRAVEL RANGE TOO LARGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

When ever an Actuator Calibration Test is performed. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control uses a pulse feedback to the controller to detect the total door movement range. If the amount of pulses required to move the door completely in both directions is greater than what the controller has stored in its memory, this DTC will set. If an Actuator Calibration Test is performed or during normal operation and the A/C Heater Control detects a valid range of the door movement span in both directions, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED DTCS PRESENT MODE DOOR STOPS MODE DOOR MODE DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Are there any Door Control Circuit Open, Performance, or Short to Ground, Voltage, or Together DTCs present? Yes 

No

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC System Test? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 6. 4. CHECK THE MODE DOOR 1. Remove the Mode Door Actuator and check the Mode Door stops, linkage (stripped or cracked) and door. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair or replace the Mode Door as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE MODE DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Mode Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, MODE DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

FUNCTION. Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11C8-11-RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 36: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short to ground on the Passenger Blend Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C33) PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C33) PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 37: Checking Passenger Blend Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Passenger Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C33) Passenger Blend Door Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (C33) Passenger Blend Door Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 38: Checking Common Door Driver 2 Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Passenger Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete.

B11C8-12-RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Fig. 39: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short voltage on the Passenger Blend Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid voltage, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C33) PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C33) PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 40: Checking Passenger Blend Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Passenger Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (C33) Passenger Blend Door Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C33) Passenger Blend Door Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 41: Checking Common Door Driver 2 Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the voltage of the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes 

Repair the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit for a short to voltage.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Passenger Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11C8-13-RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 42: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects an open in the Passenger Blend Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C33) PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT OPEN PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C33) PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 43: Checking Passenger Blend Door Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Passenger Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (C33) Passenger Blend Door Driver circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Passenger Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C33) Passenger Blend Door Driver circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 44: Checking Common Door Driver 2 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Passenger Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm? Yes  

Repair the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Passenger Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11C8-2B-RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - WIRES SHORTED TOGETHER

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 45: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects the control wiring shorted together in the Passenger Blend Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C33) BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN THE (C33) PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT AND THE (C807) COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 CIRCUIT 

Fig. 46: Checking For A Short Between The Passenger Blend Door Driver Circuit And The Common Door Driver 2 Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Passenger Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Measure the resistance between the (C33) Passenger Blend Door Driver circuit and the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes 



Repair the short between (C33) Passenger Blend Door Driver circuit and the (C807) Common Door Driver 2 circuit. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Passenger Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11CB-92-RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater Control detects a overheat condition of the Integrated Circuit (IC) that controls the Passenger Blend Door Driver circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid temperature the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Allow the A/C Heater Control to cool down for five minutes then go to 2.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

No

Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Test complete.

B11C9-00-RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR TRAVEL TOO SMALL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

When ever an Actuator Calibration Test is performed. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control uses a pulse feedback to the controller to detect the total door movement range. If the amount of pulses required to move the door completely in both directions is less than what the controller has stored in its memory, this DTC will set. If an Actuator Calibration Test is performed and the A/C Heater Control detects a valid range of the door movement span in both directions, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED DTCS PRESENT PASSENGER BLEND DOOR BINDING PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Are there any Door Control Circuit Open, Performance, or Short to Ground, Voltage, or Together DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 6. 4. CHECK THE PASSENGER BLEND DOOR 1. Remove the Passenger Blend Door Actuator and check the Passenger Blend Door for binding and full travel. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 

Were there any problems found? Yes 

Repair or replace the Passenger Blend Door as necessary in accordance with the Service

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Information. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Passenger Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC reset during HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11CA-00-RIGHT TEMPERATURE DOOR TRAVEL TOO LARGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

When ever an Actuator Calibration Test is performed. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control uses a pulse feedback to the controller to detect the total door movement range. If the amount of pulses required to move the door completely in both directions is greater than what the controller has stored in its memory, this DTC will set. If an Actuator Calibration Test is performed or during normal operation and the A/C Heater Control detects a valid range of the door movement span in both directions, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED DTCS PRESENT PASSENGER BLEND DOOR STOPS PASSENGER BLEND DOOR PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Are there any Door Control Circuit Open, Performance, or Short to Ground, Voltage, or Together DTCs present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC System Test? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 6. 4. CHECK THE PASSENGER BLEND DOOR 1. Remove the Passenger Blend Door Actuator and check the Passenger Blend Door stops, linkage (stripped or cracked) and door. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 

Were there any problems found? Yes 



No

Repair or replace the Passenger Blend Door as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE PASSENGER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Passenger Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11CB-11-MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 47: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short to ground on the Driver Blend Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C61) DRIVER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C61) DRIVER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 48: Checking Driver Blend Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Driver Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C61) Driver Blend Door Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C61) Driver Blend Door Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

Fig. 49: Checking Common Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Driver Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11CB-12-MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 50: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a short voltage on the Driver Blend Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid voltage, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C61) DRIVER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C61) DRIVER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 51: Checking Driver Blend Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Driver Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (C61) Driver Blend Door Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C61) Driver Blend Door Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

Fig. 52: Checking Common Door Driver Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the voltage of the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Driver Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete.

B11CB-13-MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 53: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects an open in the Driver Blend Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C61) DRIVER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. CHECK THE (C61) DRIVER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 54: Checking Driver Blend Door Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the Driver Blend Door Actuator harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (C61) Driver Blend Door Driver circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Driver Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (C61) Driver Blend Door Driver circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 55: Checking Common Door Driver Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Driver Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Is the resistance above 1.0 Ohm? Yes  

Repair the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit for an open or high resistance. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Driver Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes 

Repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.

No

B11CB-2B-MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - WIRES SHORTED TOGETHER

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 56: Recirculation Door Control Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects the control wiring shorted together in the Driver Blend Door control circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid current draw, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (C61) DRIVER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN THE (C61) DRIVER BLEND DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT AND THE (C34) COMMON DOOR DRIVER CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 57: Checking For A Short Between The Driver Blend Door Driver Circuit And The Common Door Driver Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Driver Blend Door Actuator harness connector. Measure the resistance between the (C61) Driver Blend Door Driver circuit and the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes 

Repair the short between (C61) Driver Blend Door Driver circuit and the (C34) Common Door Driver circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Driver Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11CB-92-MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR CONTROL - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater Control detects a overheat condition of the Integrated Circuit (IC) that controls the Driver Blend Door Driver circuit. If the A/C Heater Control detects a valid temperature the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Allow the A/C Heater Control to cool down for five minutes then go to 2.

No Go To 2. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11CC-00-MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR TRAVEL TOO SMALL For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

When ever an Actuator Calibration Test is performed. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control uses a pulse feedback to the controller to detect the total door movement range. If the amount of pulses required to move the door completely in both directions is less than what the controller has stored in its memory, this DTC will set. If an Actuator Calibration Test is performed and the A/C Heater Control detects a valid range of the door movement span in both directions, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED DTCS PRESENT DRIVER BLEND DOOR BINDING DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Are there any Door Control Circuit Open, Performance, or Short to Ground, Voltage, or Together DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is this DTC active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 3. 3. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 6. 4. CHECK THE DRIVER BLEND DOOR 1. Remove the Driver Blend Door Actuator and check the Driver Blend Door for binding and full travel. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 

Were there any problems found? Yes 



Repair or replace the Driver Blend Door as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Driver Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC reset during HVAC Actuator Calibration Test? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11CD-00-MAIN/LEFT TEMPERATURE DOOR TRAVEL TOO LARGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. For further information, refer to DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

When ever an Actuator Calibration Test is performed.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control uses a pulse feedback to the controller to detect the total door movement range. If the amount of pulses required to move the door completely in both directions is greater than what the controller has stored in its memory, this DTC will set. If an Actuator Calibration Test is performed or during normal operation and the A/C Heater Control detects a valid range of the door movement span in both directions, the DTC will change from Active to Stored and will stay in the controllers memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED DTCS PRESENT DRIVER BLEND DOOR STOPS DRIVER BLEND DOOR DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR RELATED DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Are there any Door Control Circuit Open, Performance, or Short to Ground, Voltage, or Together DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 3. 3. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. With the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did this DTC change from Stored to Active while performing the HVAC System Test? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 6. 4. CHECK THE DRIVER BLEND DOOR 1. Remove the Driver Blend Door Actuator and check the Driver Blend Door stops, linkage (stripped or cracked) and door. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 

Were there any problems found? Yes 



Repair or replace the Driver Blend Door as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE DRIVER BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Replace the Driver Blend Door Actuator in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to ACTUATOR, BLEND DOOR , REMOVAL . 2. With the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs and perform the ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION. 

Did this DTC reset? Yes 



No

Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11D3-00-A/C COOLDOWN TEST PERFORMANCE - COMPRESSOR NOT ENGAGED For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever a Cooldown Test is performed. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control receives a BUS message from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) that the compressor is not engaged when it is requested. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH THE PCM OR MULTIPLE BUS PROBLEMS A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. CHECK FOR ACTIVE BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read DTCs. Are there any Active BUS Communication DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR STORED BUS COMMUNICATION DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Are there any inactive or stored BUS Communication DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK FOR PCM A/C COMPRESSOR DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. 

Are there any PCM A/C Compressor DTCs present? Yes 



No

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 4. 4. CHECK FOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

Are there any TIPM DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE A/C COMPRESSOR 1. Ignition on, engine running. 2. Using the A/C heater Control, request A/C maximum cool. 

Does the A/C Compressor Clutch engage? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Refer to COMPRESSOR, A/C , DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . 6. CHECK IF THE DTC RESETS 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Ignition on, engine not running. 3. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 4. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 5. Ignition on, engine not running. 

Using the scan tool, perform the A/C Cooldown Test. Follow the instructions on the scan tool. 6. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Does this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 7. 7. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11D5-00-A/C COOLDOWN TEST PERFORMANCE - EVAP TEMP SENSOR ERROR For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

After the initial installation of the A/C Heater Control, the controller is calibrated to each individual blend/mode door actuator. These calibrations are stored as in the number of pulses it takes to move the door from one stop to another. The A/C Heater Control drives the Door Actuators by the use of Door Driver circuit and a Common Door Driver circuit and monitors all door actuator pulses to detect door movement in both directions. Most of the door actuators share a common door driver circuit but each door actuator has its own unique driver circuit. Due to shared circuitry, similar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set at the same time for multiple actuators depending upon the type of circuit malfunction, its location, and the direction the actuator is moving when the malfunction is present. WHEN MONITORED:

Whenever a Cooldown Test is performed. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a circuit malfunction with the Evaporator Temperature Sensor during a Cooldown Test.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DTC PRESENT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, perform an A/C Cooldown Test. 3. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. PERFORM HVAC ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Using the scan tool, perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 

Did any other HVAC DTCs set while performing the Actuator Calibration Test? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Replace the Evaporator Temperature Sensor in Accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE , REMOVAL . 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Cycle the ignition off for 30 seconds then back on. 4. Using the scan tool, perform an A/C Cooldown Test. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

5. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Does this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B10D6-92-LEFT SEAT VENTILATION SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Left Seat Ventilation Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Left Seat Ventilation Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Left Seat Ventilation Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Go To 2.



No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B10D7-92-RIGHT SEAT VENTILATION SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Right Seat Ventilation Switch is stuck in an On position for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Right Seat Ventilation Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Right Seat Ventilation Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 

Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No



B11D9-92-BLOWER SPEED KNOB REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Blower Motor Control has a mechanical or electrical failure for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on. 4. Slowly Turn the Blower Speed Control knob from Low to High multiple times for a minimum of 30 seconds. 5. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11DA-96-ITOS CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR - COMPONENT INTERNAL FAILURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control uses a variety of sensors to adjust HVAC operation to obtain optimal performance. These sensors are continuously monitored by the A/C Heater Control to assure that they are in a calibrated range and are functioning properly. The Integrated Thermal Optical Sensor (ITOS) in mounted in the front of the A/C Heater Control and is a non-serviceable component.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

The A/C Heater Control detects a malfunction in the Integrated Thermal Optical Sensor (ITOS). POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes DEBRIS INHIBITING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE INTEGRATED THERMAL OPTICAL SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. REPLACE THE A/C HEATER CONTROL This DTC detects a problem with the ITOS which is an internal sensor circuit in the controller and is not serviceable. Repair 



Inspect the A/C Heater Control for debris that my be inhibiting the functionality of the Integrated Thermal Optical Sensor and clean as necessary. If no problem is found, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B11DB-92-MODE SWITCH REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Mode Switch Control has a mechanical or electrical failure for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a dematuring time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. INSPECT FOR OBJECT HOLDING SWITCH IN AN ON POSITION 1. Inspect the A/C Heater Control for an object or debris holding the Mode Switch in an On position. NOTE:

Using the scan tool you can read the On/Off status of the control switch.

Is the Mode Switch being held in or stuck On? Yes 



The A/C Heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged but it might be cleanable if external debris is inhibiting the proper operation of the control switch or knob. If you are unable to clean the control to where it can function properly, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on and wait a minimum of 30 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

seconds. 4. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Does the scan tool display this DTC as Active or is the status of the switch reading On? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No  

Test complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B11E9-92-LEFT TEMPERATURE KNOB REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Left Temperature Control has a mechanical or electrical failure for more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes A/C HEATER CONTROL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on. 4. Slowly Turn the Left Temperature Control from full cold to full hot several times for a minimum of 30 seconds. 5. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Did this DTC reset? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B11EA-92-RIGHT TEMPERATURE KNOB REQUEST INPUT - PERFORMANCE OR INCORRECT

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

OPERATION For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control contains various switches and knobs that are used to change the systems operation. There are currently three types of switches used depending on the configuration of the system. Push button momentary switches which are normally open or in the Off position. Multifunction or rotary switches which have several distinct positions and potentiometers which are a rotary variable resistor that is used for a more precise control. An active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates that either a control switch or potentiometer is stuck in an On position or out of a calibrated range. A stored DTC indicates that control switch or potentiometer was stuck On or out of calibration but has since returned to its normal state. For further information, refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , DESCRIPTION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Right Temperature Control has a mechanical or electrical failure more than 30 seconds. This DTC has a de-maturing time of one second. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored, the DTC will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Using the scan tool, erase HVAC DTCs. 3. Turn the ignition off for 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on. 4. Slowly Turn the Right Temperature Control from full cold to full hot multiple times for a minimum of 30 seconds. 5. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Did this DTC reset? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B1600-11-LEFT SOLAR SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 58: Evaporator Temperature Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The HVAC A/C Heater Control uses a variety of sensors to adjust HVAC operation to obtain optimal performance. These sensors are continuously monitored by the A/C Heater Control to assure that they are in range. If those sensors fall out of predetermined ranges a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. For further information Refer to SENSOR, SUN , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater Control detects a short to ground on Sun Sensor Signal 1 circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G39) SUN SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND SUN SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. CHECK (G39) SUN SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 59: Checking Sun Sensor Signal Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G39) Sun Sensor Signal 1 circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (G39) Sun Sensor 1 Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE SUN SENSOR AND A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Replace the Sun Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, SUN , REMOVAL . 2. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 

Did this DTC reset while performing the HVAC Verification Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete. 4. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B1600-12-LEFT SOLAR SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 60: Evaporator Temperature Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the appropriate System Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The HVAC A/C Heater Control uses a variety of sensors to adjust HVAC operation to obtain optimal performance. These sensors are continuously monitored by the A/C Heater Control to assure that they are in range. If those sensors fall out of predetermined ranges a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. For further information, refer to SENSOR, SUN , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater Control detects a short to voltage on Sun Sensor Signal 1 circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G39) SUN SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (G39) SUN SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT OPEN (C939) SUN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN SUN SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (G39) SUN SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 61: Checking Sun Sensor Signal 1 Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the Sun Sensor harness connector. 3. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. Check the voltage of the (G39) Sun Sensor Signal 1 circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (G39) Sun Sensor Signal 1 circuit for an short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (G39) SUN SENSOR SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 62: Checking Sun Sensor Signal 1 Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Measure the resistance of the (G39) Sun Sensor Signal 1 circuit between the A/C Heater Control harness connector and the Sun Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (G39) Sun Sensor Signal 1 circuit for an open. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (C939) SUN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 63: Checking Sun Sensor Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (C121) Sun Sensor Return circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Sun Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (C939) Sun Sensor Return circuit for an open. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE SUN SENSOR AND A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Sun Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, SUN , REMOVAL . 3. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 

Did the DTC reset during or after the HVAC Verification Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete.

B1603-11-RIGHT SOLAR SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 64: Evaporator Temperature Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control uses a variety of sensors to adjust HVAC operation to obtain optimal performance. These sensors are continuously monitored by the A/C Heater Control to assure that they are in range. If those sensors fall out of predetermined ranges a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. For further information, refer to SENSOR, SUN , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater Control detects a short to ground on Sun Sensor Signal 2 circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G139) SUN SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND SUN SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. CHECK (G139) SUN SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 65: Checking Sun Sensor Signal 2 Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Sun Sensor harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (G139) Sun Sensor Signal 2 circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (G139) Sun Sensor Signal 2 circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE SUN SENSOR AND A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Replace the Sun Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, SUN , REMOVAL . 2. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 

Did this DTC reset while performing the HVAC Verification Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete. 4. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B1603-12-RIGHT SOLAR SENSOR - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 66: Evaporator Temperature Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the appropriate System Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The HVAC A/C Heater Control uses a variety of sensors to adjust HVAC operation to obtain optimal performance. These sensors are continuously monitored by the A/C Heater Control to assure that they are in range. If those sensors fall out of predetermined ranges a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. For further information, refer to SENSOR, SUN , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater Control detects a short to voltage on Sun Sensor Signal 2 circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (G139) SUN SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (G139) SUN SENSOR SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT OPEN (G939) SUN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN SUN SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (G139) SUN SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 67: Checking Sun Sensor 2 Signal Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the Sun Sensor harness connector. 3. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control harness connector. NOTE:

Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

4. Ignition on, engine not running. 5. Check the voltage of the (G139) Sun Sensor 2 Signal circuit. Is there any voltage present? Yes  

Repair the (G139) Sun Sensor 2 Signal circuit for an short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (G139) SUN SENSOR 2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 68: Checking Sun Sensor 2 Signal Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Measure the resistance of the (G139) Sun Sensor 2 Signal circuit between the A/C Heater Control harness connector and the Sun Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (G139) Sun Sensor 2 Signal circuit for an open. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK THE (G939) SUN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 69: Checking Sun Sensor Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Measure the resistance of the (G939) Sun Sensor Return circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Sun Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance above 5.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the (G939) Sun Sensor Return circuit for an open. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE SUN SENSOR AND A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Replace the Sun Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, SUN , REMOVAL . 3. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 

Did the DTC reset during or after the HVAC Verification Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 

Test complete.

B160F-11-TWILIGHT/AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 70: Evaporator Temperature Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the appropriate System Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC A/C Heater Control uses a variety of sensors to adjust HVAC operation to obtain optimal performance. These sensors are continuously monitored by the A/C Heater Control to assure that they are in range. If those sensors fall out of predetermined ranges a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. For further information, refer to SENSOR, SUN , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Twilight or Ambient Light Sensor input voltage is less than 1.05 volts for period of 1.2 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L24) AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND SUN SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 4. 2. CHECK (L24) AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 71: Checking Auto Headlamps Signal Circuit For A Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Disconnect the Sun Sensor harness connector. Measure the resistance between ground and the (L24) Auto Headlamps Signal circuit. Is the resistance below 100k Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the (L24) Auto Headlamps Signal circuit for a short to ground. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE SUN SENSOR AND A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Replace the Sun Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, SUN , REMOVAL . 2. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 

Did this DTC reset while performing the HVAC Verification Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete. 4. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B160F-12-TWILIGHT/AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR INPUT - CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 72: Evaporator Temperature Sensor Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the appropriate System Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The HVAC A/C Heater Control uses a variety of sensors to adjust HVAC operation to obtain optimal performance. These sensors are continuously monitored by the A/C Heater Control to assure that they are in range. If those sensors fall out of predetermined ranges a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. For further information, refer to SENSOR, SUN , OPERATION . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the Twilight or Ambient Light Sensor input voltage is greater than 4.83 volts for period of 1.2 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (L24) AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (L24) AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN (G939) SUN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN SUN SENSOR A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Go To 6. 2. CHECK THE (L24) AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 73: Checking Auto Headlamps Signal Circuit For A Short To Voltage Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Ignition on, engine not running. Measure the voltage of the (L24) Auto Headlamps Signal circuit. Is there any voltage present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes  

Repair the (L24) Auto Headlamps Signal circuit for a short to voltage. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (L24) AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 74: Checking Auto Headlamps Signal Circuit For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the Sun Sensor harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (L24) Auto Headlamps Signal circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Sun Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the (L24) Auto Headlamps Signal circuit for an open.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 4. CHECK THE (G939) SUN SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 75: Checking Sun Sensor Return Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (G939) Sun Sensor Return circuit between the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector and the Sun Sensor harness connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 5.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the (G939) Sun Sensor Return circuit for an open.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE SUN SENSOR AND A/C HEATER CONTROL 1. Replace the Sun Sensor in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to SENSOR, SUN , REMOVAL . 2. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 

Did this DTC reset while performing the HVAC Verification Test? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Test complete. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B210A-84-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the appropriate System Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

The A/C Heater Control constantly monitors battery and ignition voltage as well as battery voltage derived from BUS communication to ensure proper operation. If the voltage to the controller is out of range, it could cause damage to the controller or its respective components. If the voltage of either circuit drops below or rises above a predetermined calibration a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the controller system voltage or ignition voltage broadcast over the BUS is lower than monitored controller voltage the for period of 60 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED TIPM DTCS PRESENT RELATED CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT RELATED HVAC DTCS PRESENT OTHER CONTROLLERS REPORTING UNDER VOLTAGE CONDITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR TIPM DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Are there any Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Are there any Powertrain Control Module (PCM) charging system DTCs present?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK FOR HVAC DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is the DTC B210D-84-Battery Voltage Low - Signal Below Allowable Range present also? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the diagnostic procedure for DTC B210D-84-Battery Voltage Low - Signal Below Allowable Range.

No Go To 4. 4. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

NOTE:

It can take up to 60 seconds or more for this DTC to mature.

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 6. 5. CHECK IF OTHER CONTROLLERS ARE REPORTING AN OVER VOLTAGE CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Are any other controllers reporting an over voltage condition? Yes 

No

Go to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL .  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B210B-85-SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the appropriate System Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

The A/C Heater Control constantly monitors battery and ignition voltage as well as battery voltage derived from BUS communication to ensure proper operation. If the voltage to the controller is out of range, it could cause damage to the controller or its respective components. If the voltage of either circuit drops below or rises above a predetermined calibration a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously with the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the controller system voltage or ignition voltage broadcast over the BUS is higher than monitored controller voltage the for period of 60 seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

RELATED TIPM DTCS PRESENT RELATED CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT RELATED HVAC DTCS PRESENT OTHER CONTROLLERS REPORTING OVER VOLTAGE CONDITION A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR TIPM DTCS 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool, read DTCs. Are there any Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Are there any Powertrain Control Module (PCM) charging system DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK FOR HVAC DTCS 1. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is the DTC B210E-85-Battery Voltage High - Signal Above Allowable Range present also? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the diagnostic procedure for B210E-

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

85-Battery Voltage High - Signal Above Allowable Range. No Go To 4. 4. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

NOTE:

It can take up to 60 seconds or more for this DTC to mature.

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 6. 5. CHECK IF OTHER CONTROLLERS ARE REPORTING AN OVER VOLTAGE CONDITION 1. With the scan tool, read DTCs. 

Are any other controllers reporting an over voltage condition? Yes 

Go to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL .  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 6. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. With the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B210D-84-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW - SIGNAL BELOW ALLOWABLE RANGE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 76: TIPM Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The A/C Heater Control constantly monitors battery and ignition voltage as well as battery voltage derived from BUS communication to ensure proper operation. If the voltage to the controller is out of range, it could cause damage to the controller or its respective components. If the voltage of either circuit drops below or rises above a predetermined calibration a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the controller battery voltage is less than or equal to 10.0 volts for period of five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT (F921) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN (A417) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. Are there any charging system DTCs present in the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .



Go To 2.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. CHECK FOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. Are there any TIPM DTCS present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 7. 4. CHECK THE (F921) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 77: Checking Fused Ignition Switch Output Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. While back probing, measure the voltage of the (F921) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit in the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Is the voltage 10.0 volts or below? Yes 

Repair the (F921) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit for an open or high resistance. NOTE:



If the fuse is open, make sure to check for a short to ground on the (F921) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit.

Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Go To 5. 5. CHECK THE (A417) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 78: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. While back probing, measure the voltage of the (A417) Fused B (+) circuit in the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. Is the voltage 10.0 volts or below? Yes 

Repair the (A417) Fused B (+) circuit for an open or high resistance.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:



Make sure to check if the IOD fuse is installed. If the fuse is open, make sure to check for a short to ground.

Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Go To 6. 6. CHECK THE (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 79: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. 2. Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z912) Ground circuit.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

NOTE:

The test light must illuminate brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.

Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

No Repair the (Z912) Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 7. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B210E-85-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH - SIGNAL ABOVE ALLOWABLE RANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the appropriate System Wiring Information . THEORY OF OPERATION

The A/C Heater Control constantly monitors battery and ignition voltage as well as battery voltage derived from BUS communication to ensure proper operation. If the voltage to the controller is out of range, it could cause damage to the controller or its respective components. If the voltage of either circuit drops below or rises above a predetermined calibration a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the controller battery voltage is higher than 16.0 volts for period of one second. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes RELATED CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS PRESENT A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, read PCM DTCs. Are there any charging system DTCs present in the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK FOR TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE DTCS 1. Using the scan tool, read TIPM DTCs. 

Are there any TIPM DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK IF THE DTC IS ACTIVE 1. Using the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is this DTC active? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 5. 4. CHECK IF OTHER CONTROLLER ARE REPORTING AN OVER VOLTAGE CONDITION 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. With the scan tool read DTCs. 

Are any other controllers reporting an over voltage condition? Yes 

Go to DTC Based Diagnostics and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

No Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL .  Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. 5. CHECK THE WIRING AND CONNECTORS 1. The conditions necessary to set the DTC are not present at this time. 2. Using the scan tool, check the Environmental Data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. 3. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 4. Wiggle the wiring and connectors while checking for shorted and open circuits. 

Were there any problems found? Yes



Repair as necessary. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Test complete.



No

B2214-00-(HVAC) CLIMATE CONTROL INTERNAL

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to the appropriate System Wiring Information . WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the A/C Heater Control has an internal fault. This Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) has a maturing time of five seconds and a de-maturing time of 10 seconds. If the DTCs status changes from active to stored it will stay in memory for 100 ignition cycles. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE A/C HEATER CONTROL Repair 



Check for any controller software updates if applicable. If an update is available, reprogram the controller with the latest software. If no software updates are available, replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

B222A-00-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The A/C Heater Controller checks for vehicle configuration using communication over the BUS. If the stored configuration does not match the configuration stored in the controller this DTC will set. WHEN MONITORED:

With the ignition on. SET CONDITION:

If the stored configuration does not match the configuration stored in the controller.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT STORED IN THE TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) CONTROL MODULE INSTALLED IN INCORRECT VEHICLE A/C HEATER CONTROL Always perform the HVAC Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. Refer to HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOTE:

The DTC must be active and no BUS communication DTCs present before performing this test. If BUS communication DTCs are present, perform there respective test first. If the DTC is stored, erase the DTC and cycle the ignition. If the DTC resets and changes to active, then proceed.

1. With the scan tool, check the vehicle configuration stored in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). 2. With the scan tool, check the vehicle configuration stored in the A/C Heater Control (HVAC). Pick the answer that best describes your findings: TIPM has wrong or no vehicle configuration  

With the scan tool, program the proper vehicle configuration in the TIPM. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

HVAC has wrong vehicle configuration but TIPM has correct configuration. 



Replace and program the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

HVAC and TIPM have proper calibration and the DTC is active in the HVAC. 



Check if other modules such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) have the wrong configuration stored in the controller and reprogram or replace as necessary. If all other modules show the proper configuration, replace the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to CONTROL, A/C AND HEATER , REMOVAL . Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.

U0010-00-CAN INTERIOR BUS

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. SET CONDITION:

The controller detects a short to ground on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit or a short to voltage on the CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (+) (125k) CIRCUIT TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) ANY CAN INTERIOR BUS MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.

1. Using the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0010-CAN Interior Bus diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

U0141-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM) For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Integrated Power Module (TIPM) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D65) CAN C BUS(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D64) CAN C BUS(-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is the DTC active at this time? Yes 

No

Perform the U0141-Lost Communication with IPM (FCM/TIPM) diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . .

U0155-00-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Instrument Cluster (CCN) for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS(+) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS(-) (125k) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (CCN) MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read active DTCs. Is this DTC active? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0155-Lost Communication with

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Cluster/CCN diagnostic procedure. No 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

Continuously when the ignition is on. Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts. Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fused installed. Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is configured correctly. SET CONDITION:

Bus messages not received from the Heated Seat Module for approximately two to five seconds. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes CAN BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES HEATED SEAT MODULE POWER AND GROUND TIPM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY HEATED SEAT MODULE MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) IS ACTIVE NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. With the scan tool, read the active DTCs. Is this DTC active?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the U0208-Lost Communication with Heated Seat Control Module diagnostic procedure.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the Stored Lost Communication DTCs diagnostic procedure.

No

STANDARD PROCEDURE HVAC VERIFICATION TEST Perform the following procedures to verify that the repair(s) are valid. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Make sure that all accessories are turned off. Make sure that the battery is fully charged. Turn the ignition off to the lock position. Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors. With the scan tool, record and erase all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from ALL modules. Turn the ignition off, remove the scan tool from the DLC (Data Link Connector). Open the door and close the door. Wait a minimum 30 seconds, then turn the ignition on. Reconnect the scan tool. NOTE:

Disconnecting the scan tool and opening and closing the door will allow the controller to enter into sleep mode.

7. With the scan tool perform the HVAC Actuator Calibration Test. 8. Start and run the engine for two minutes while operating all functions of the system that caused the original concern. 9. With the scan tool, check for DTCs in all modules. Is the original condition still present or are there any other HVAC DTCs present? Yes 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



Repair is complete.

No

HVAC SYSTEM TEST For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

THEORY OF OPERATION

The HVAC System Test provides a starting point in the diagnostic process by identifying the appropriate diagnostic procedure or system test to perform when diagnosing a given symptom, condition, or Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). It also provides a means for testing the entire HVAC system by utilizing the A/C Heater Control's On-Board System Tests. The HVAC System Tests can also assist in diagnosing stored DTCs. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. HVAC SYSTEM TEST NOTE:

Diagnose and repair all active DTCs before diagnosing and repairing stored DTCs. If active DTCs are present, see DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.

Make a selection based on the symptom, condition, or DTC that you want to diagnose. scan tool Indicates HVAC Not Active On Bus 

Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the No Response from HVAC diagnostic procedure.

Blower Motor Inoperative 

Refer to MOTOR, BLOWER , DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for Blower Motor diagnostic procedures.

Actuator Calibration Test 

Go To 4.

A/C System Performance (Cooldown) Test Go To 2. 2. A/C COOLDOWN TEST 

The following are prerequisites of the A/C Cooldown Test. Verify that the: 







Refrigerant system has an adequate charge. Check and repair as necessary before proceeding in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . Blower motor operates correctly in all speeds. Diagnose and repair all blower related faults before proceeding. Work area ambient temperature is above 16° C (60° F) before proceeding. Move the vehicle to a warmer work area if necessary. Evaporator temperature is above 13° C (55° F) before proceeding.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



A/C compressor is not running. If the compressor is running, turn the A/C off and allow the evaporator to warm up before proceeding.

NOTE:

Running the AC Cooldown test will cause the A/C status indicator to flash. One or more status messages will display on the scan tool after running the Cooldown Test. These messages will clear after paging back out of this test function. Therefore, it is important to note all messages before doing so.

1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the Blower control to the high speed position. 3. With the scan tool in HVAC, select System Tests and then select Cooldown test. Allow the test to run to completion. Does the scan tool display a status message that indicates a fault has occurred? Yes 

See DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure based on vehicle HVAC system.

No Go To 3. 3. MODE SWITCH AND DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUIT TEST 

NOTE:

If at anytime a DTC becomes active during this test, proceed to the conclusion question. If multiple DTCs are active, diagnose those that relate to a short circuit first.

1. Start the engine and turn the Blower control to the low speed position. 2. Set the Blend control (single-zone) or Driver and Passenger Blend control (dual-zone) to the full cold position. 3. Monitor the scan tool for active HVAC DTCs while performing the following test steps.  If equipped, press the A/C mode switch on, wait 30 seconds, and then press it off.  On Dual-Zone systems, press the Recirculation mode switch on, wait 30 seconds, and then press it off.  If equipped, press the EBL mode switch on, wait 30 seconds, and then press it off.  Move the Blend control (single-zone) or Driver Blend control (dual-zone) from full cold to full hot, wait 30 seconds, and then move it back to full cold.  If equipped, move the Passenger Blend control from full cold to full hot, wait 30 seconds, and then moved it back to full cold.  Turn the Mode select control to the defrost position, wait 30 seconds, and then turn it to the panel position (dual-zone) or panel / recirculation position (single-zone). Wait 30 seconds

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

before proceeding. Does the scan tool display any active DTCs? Yes 

See DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure based on vehicle HVAC system.

No Go To 4. 4. ACTUATOR CALIBRATION TEST 1. Ignition on, engine not running. 2. Using the scan tool, select Actuator Calibration Test. When the test is complete, read HVAC DTCs. 

Does the scan tool display any DTCs? Yes 

See DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure based on vehicle HVAC system.



Test Complete.

No

HVAC PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . Perform the following steps prior to any diagnostic procedure(s).  



 



Testing should only be performed with the battery fully charged to avoid false diagnosis. With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). If PCM DTCs are present, and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure(s) before proceeding. Refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - 3.0L DIESEL or DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX - NGC . Depending on the vehicle configuration, with the scan tool, read Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) DTCs. If TIPM DTCs are present, and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure(s) before proceeding. Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . With the scan tool, read HVAC DTCs. Record all Stored, Active, and Pending DTC information. With the scan tool, read the Environmental Data. Use this data to help identify the conditions in which the DTC was set. Refer to the When Monitored and Set Conditions for this DTC. DTCs can set at ignition on, at start up, or operating under specific conditions.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee





Using the wiring diagram as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors related to this circuit and clean/repair as necessary. Check for controller software updates if applicable. Some conditions can be corrected by upgrading the controller software. NOTE:



If the controller is updated with new software, with the scan tool, perform a HVAC Actuator Calibration Test.

Check for Service Information Tune-ups or Service Bulletins for any possible causes that may apply.

Did any of the above procedures repair the vehicle? Yes



Testing is complete. Perform the HVAC VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to HVAC VERIFICATION TEST.



Refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.



No

HEATING-A/C SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS

CAUTION: Do not exchange A/C Heater Controls from vehicle to vehicle. Software versions differ between models and model years. Installing an A/C Heater Control with software that is incompatible for a given vehicle can result in either improper or failed HVAC system operation. NOTE:

Always inspect the IOD fuse prior to diagnosing any heating-A/C system concerns. Make sure the fuse is functional and fully seated into the terminals of the totally integrated power module (TIPM) located in the engine compartment.

The A/C-heater control communicates on the controller area network (CAN) B bus and is fully addressable with a scan tool. The A/C-heater controls primary means of fault detection is through active and stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Active DTCs are those which currently exist in the system. The condition causing the fault must be repaired in order to clear this type of DTC. Stored DTCs are those which occurred in the system since the A/Cheater control received the last clear diagnostic info message. All DTCs must be read with a scan tool (refer to DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDEX for the diagnostic test procedures). The A/C-heater controls secondary means of fault detection is through system tests. These tests include the HVAC System Test, the A/C Cooldown Test, the Actuator Calibration Function, and for MTC Systems, the Actuator DTC Detection Test. Refer to SYSTEM TESTS for a detailed description of each test.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

SYSTEM TESTS - HVAC HVAC SYSTEM TEST

The HVAC System Test provides a starting point in the diagnostic process by identifying the appropriate system test to perform when diagnosing a given condition or DTC. It also provides a means for testing the entire HVAC system by utilizing the A/C-heater controls On-Board System Tests. The On-Board System Tests can also assist in diagnosing stored DTCs. SYSTEM TESTS - A/C COOLDOWN A/C COOLDOWN TEST

The A/C Cooldown Test:     



is actuated with a scan tool. tests A/C system performance based on evaporator temperature sensor input. will fail if evaporator starting temperature is below 18° C (65° F) when initiating the test. will pass if the evaporator temperature drops 11° C (20° F). indicates test outcome by displaying one or more test status messages on the scan tool. These messages will clear after paging back out of this test function. Therefore, is it important to note all of the messages before doing so. will cause the A/C status indicator to flash while the test is running.

ACTUATOR CALIBRATION FUNCTION

The Actuator Calibration function:   



is actuated with a scan tool. homes and repositions door actuators. monitors for door span faults. Door span faults (XXX Door Travel Range Too Large or XXX Door Travel Range Too Small) will only display after calibration. will cause the electric backlight (EBL) status indicator to flash while the test is running.

ACTUATOR DTC DETECTION TEST

The Actuator DTC Detection Test:   

is actuated with a scan tool. supplements the continuous diagnostics on the actuator drive system. monitors for shorted actuator circuits allowing service to easily diagnose and troubleshoot up to three simultaneous shorts. Shorted actuator circuit faults (XXX Control Circuit High or XXX Control Circuit Low) will only display after running the Actuator DTC Detection Test.

After repairing each DTC, cycle the ignition switch, and then rerun the Actuator DTC Detection test to ensure that no new DTCs exist. If multiple DTCs are present, beginning with the common circuits, diagnose and repair

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 HVAC Heating & Air Conditioning - Electrical Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

all short high faults and then short low faults. When the test returns passed, proceed with troubleshooting by clearing faults and running the Actuator Calibration function as a final check of proper system operation.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING NO BACKSEAT TV AUDIO-VIDEO PLAYING For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECKING THE SATV AUDIO 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Check radio volume level and ensure radio is in SATV mode. 3. If the radio is a RER/REN, select the SATV tab. If the radio is REQ, press the SAT button twice. NOTE:

Verify that the remote control is on the correct channel (CH1/CH2).

4. Press Mode on the remote control, then select Radio and SATV. 5. Use the headphones to check the audio by turning the headphones on while the video is present. Is SATV audio present in the headphones? Yes 

SATV is functioning properly. Test Complete.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECKING THE AUDIO IN OTHER MODES 1. Use the remote to select other VES modes (SAT Audio, FM). 

Is audio present on headphones in other audio modes? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 5. 3. SATV TO VES AUDIO INPUTS/OUTPUTS 1. Turn the ignition off. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the VES 25 pin harness connector. Disconnect the SATV harness connector. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Test the wiring for continuity from the audio out of the SATV (pins 14 RT, 15 COM, 16 LT) at the connector to the audio inputs on the VES. Is the wiring and connections OK from the SATV to the VES? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. SATV POWER RESET 1. Cycle the vehicle ignition. 2. Cycle the battery to the SATV module by removing the IOD fuse. 

Does the SATV function normal? Yes 

SATV is functioning properly. Test Complete.

No Go To 6. 5. SATV WIRING AND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the VES 25 pin harness connector. 3. Disconnect the SATV harness connector. 4. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 5. Test the radio circuits, amplifier circuits and speaker circuits for any source of audio loss. 

Is the wiring and connections OK from the SATV to the VES? Yes 

No

Go To 6.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. SATV MODULE 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for the SATV Module. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Replace the SATV Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

NO VIDEO (BLACK SCREEN) - BACKSEAT TV AUDIO PLAYING For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECKING THE TV OPERATION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. If the radio is a RER/REN, place the vehicle in park. If the radio is REQ, Go To 2. 3. Select the SATV tab and press View Video to display video on radio screen. Does the radio display video now? Yes 

SATV is functioning properly. Test Complete.

No Go To 2. 2. SATV WIRING AND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. 3. 4. 5.

Disconnect the VES 25 pin harness connector. Disconnect the SATV harness connector. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. Test the video shield circuit, video common circuit, and the video signal circuit for continuity. Is the wiring and connections OK from the SATV to the VES? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. SATV MODULE 1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for the SATV Module. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Refer to any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. 

Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Replace the SATV Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

NO VIDEO (BLACK SCREEN) - NO BACKSEAT TV AUDIO For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECKING THE TV OPERATION 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. If the radio is a RER/REN, select the SATV tab. If the radio is REQ, press the SAT button twice.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. Ensure the VES is in SATV mode. 4. Press Mode on the remote button, select Radio and SATV. Is SATV video and audio present in either radio or VES? Yes 

SATV is functioning properly. Test Complete.

No Go To 2. 2. COMMUNICATION WITH VES AND RADIO 1. With the scan tool, confirm communication with the VES and the radio by checking for DTCs. 

Does the scan tool communicate with the VES and the radio? Yes 

Go To 3.

No Go To 6. 3. COMMUNICATION WITH SDARV 1. With the scan tool, confirm communication with the SDARV by checking for DTCs. 

Does the scan tool communicate with the SDARV? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 5. 4. SATV AUDIO/VIDEO WIRING AND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the VES 25 pin harness connector. 3. Disconnect the SATV harness connector. 4. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 5. Test the audio circuit and the video circuit for continuity. 

Is the wiring and connections OK from the SATV to the VES?

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. SATV CANH AND CANL WIRING AND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the VES 25 pin harness connector. 3. Disconnect the SATV harness connector. 4. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 5. Test the CANL circuit and the CANH circuit for continuity. 

Is the wiring and connections OK from the SATV to the VES? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. SATV WIRING AND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the VES 25 pin harness connector. 3. Disconnect the SATV harness connector. 4. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 5. Test the radio, VES, and the wiring connections for source of CAN loss or video/audio loss. 

Is the wiring and connections OK from the SATV to the VES? Yes 

Go To 7.

No Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 7. SATV MODULE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

1. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for the SATV Module. 2. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Perform any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply. Were any problems found? Yes  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Replace the SATV Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

BLUE SIRIUS® BACKSEAT TV TUNING BOX DISPLAYED WITH BUFFER BAR EMPTY-NO CHANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECKING THE VIDEO OPERATION NOTE:

There is no change in the display, the Sirius® Backseat TV logo is continuously displayed and does not change. No flicker, green flash, or reset occurs.

NOTE:

An empty buffer bar usually indicates no signal condition or faulty antenna. Watch the screen for five minutes to look for any reset activity or display change.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Select SAT video mode on radio and VES. Does the radio display Acquiring Signal? Yes 

No

Go To 2.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Call Sirius® and have the subscription updated.  Cycle the vehicle ignition then cycle the battery to the SATV module by removing the IOD fuse. If failure still exists, replace the SATV Module in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECKING THE AUDIO OPERATION 1. Select SAT audio mode on radio and VES. 

Does the radio display Acquiring Signal and the audio is not functioning? Yes 



Sirius® antenna signal is obstructed. Drive the vehicle to an open area or test another Sirius® module for signal presence in the area. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECKING FOR RADIO SIGNAL 

Does the radio display No Signal and the audio is not functioning? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 5. 4. SATV AUDIO ANTENNA WIRING AND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the radio harness connector. 3. Disconnect the antenna harness connector. 4. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 5. Test the yellow circuit and green circuit for continuity or any source of SAT audio antenna signal loss. 

NOTE:

After this repair, start over at the beginning of the diagnostic as this is only a SAT audio problem and does not solve the SATV issue.

Is the wiring and connections OK for the SAT audio antenna? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Replace the rear antenna. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. DTC B1539 SATV ANTENNA FAULT ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, check the SATV for DTCs. 

Is DTC B1539 SATV Antenna Fault set? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Call Sirius® and have the subscription updated.  Attempt ignition cycle then battery cycle on SATV by removing the IOD fuse. If failure still exists, replace the SATV Module in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. SATV ANTENNA WIRING AND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the antenna harness connector. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Test the brown circuit for continuity or any source of SATV antenna signal loss. 

Is the wiring and connections OK for the SATV antenna? Yes  

Replace the front antenna. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

BLUE SIRIUS® BACKSEAT TV TUNING BOX DISPLAYED WITH BUFFER BAR EMPTY-RESETS EVERY 15 SECONDS For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECKING THE SATV OPERATION NOTE:

Every 15 seconds a reset occurs. Green flash followed by a black screen and the Sirius® Backseat TV logo is displayed.

1. Cycle the vehicle ignition. 2. Cycle the battery to the SATV module by removing the IOD fuse. 3. Call Sirius® and have the subscription updated. Does the SATV function normal? Yes 

Test Complete.



Repeat this test. If the failure still exists, replace the SATV module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



BLUE SIRIUS® BACKSEAT TV TUNING BOX DISPLAYED WITH FULL BUFFER BAR-NO CHANGE For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECKING THE SATV OPERATION NOTE:

There is no change in the display, the Sirius® Backseat TV logo is continuously displayed and does not change. No flicker, green flash, or reset occurs.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Use the VES remote and radio to attempt to change the channel. Does the SATV function normally? Yes 

No

Test Complete.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Go To 2. 2. SATV RESET 1. Cycle the vehicle ignition. 2. Cycle the battery to the SATV module by removing the IOD fuse. 3. Call Sirius® and have the subscription updated. 

Does the SATV function normally? Yes 

Test Complete.



Repeat this step. If the failure still exists, replace the SATV module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



BLUE ON FULL SCREEN-DISPLAY SHOWS SIRIUS® SUBSCRIPTION INFO For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECKING THE VIDEO OPERATION NOTE:

This condition will occur when a new SATV module is installed, or when the subscription runs out. The module needs to be exposed to the satellite signal to activate properly. If this has not occurred, it could mean a no signal condition or faulty antenna. Watch the screen for five minutes to look for any reset activity or display change.

1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Select SAT video mode on radio and VES. Does the radio display Acquiring Signal? Yes 

Go To 2.



Call Sirius® and have the subscription updated. Cycle the vehicle ignition then cycle the battery to the SATV module by removing the IOD

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

fuse. If failure still exists, replace the SATV Module in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECKING THE AUDIO OPERATION 1. Select SAT audio mode on radio and VES. Does the radio display Acquiring Signal and the audio is not functioning? Yes 



Sirius® antenna signal is obstructed. Drive the vehicle to an open area or test another Sirius® module for signal presence in the area. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 3. 3. CHECKING FOR RADIO SIGNAL 

Does the radio display No Signal and the audio is not functioning? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Go To 5. 4. SATV AUDIO ANTENNA WIRING AND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the radio harness connector. 3. Disconnect the antenna harness connector. 4. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 5. Test the yellow circuit and green circuit for continuity or any source of SAT audio antenna signal loss. 

NOTE:

After this repair, start over at the beginning of the diagnostic as this is only a SAT audio problem and does not solve the SATV issue.

Is the wiring and connections OK for the SAT audio antenna? Yes 

Replace the rear antenna.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Repair as necessary.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. DTC B1539 SATV ANTENNA FAULT ACTIVE 1. With the scan tool, check the SATV for DTCs. 

Is DTC B1539 SATV Antenna Fault set? Yes 

Go To 6.

No Call Sirius® and have the subscription updated.  Attempt ignition cycle then battery cycle on SATV by removing the IOD fuse. If failure still exists, replace the SATV Module in accordance with the Service Information.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 6. SATV ANTENNA WIRING AND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the antenna harness connector. 3. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals. 4. Test the brown circuit for continuity or any source of SATV antenna signal loss. 

Is the wiring and connections OK for the SATV antenna? Yes  

Replace the front antenna. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair as necessary. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

NO RESPONSE FROM RADIO

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Radio Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (A116) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (D264) OR (D265) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) CIRCUIT OPEN RADIO DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION NOTE:

Check for any TSB(s) related to the condition. If a TSB applies, perform the procedure outlined in the TSB before continuing.

1. Turn the ignition on. NOTE:

Make sure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10.0 and 16.0 volts.

2. With the scan tool, read the module status. NOTE:

Check the TIPM for any active CAN hardware DTCs, perform DTC before proceeding.

Does the scan tool indicate that the module is active on the bus? Yes 

The no response condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE (A116) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For Open Or Short Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the Radio C2 harness connector. 3. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A116) Fused B(+) circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 3.



Repair the open or short in the (A116) Fused B(+) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

3. CHECK THE (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Fig. 3: Checking Ground Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z912) Ground circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

No

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the open in the (Z912) Ground circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (D265) AND (D264) CAN INTERIOR BUS (125K) CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 4: Checking Can Interior Bus Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (D264) CAN Interior Bus (125K) (-) circuit between the TIPM C7 harness connector and the Radio C2 harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance of the (D265) CAN Interior Bus (125K) (+) circuit between the TIPM C7

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

harness connector and the Radio C2 harness connector. Are the resistances below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Replace the Radio in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to RADIO , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the open in the (D265) or (D264) CAN Interior Bus (125K) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

REAR CAMERA INOPERATIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Rear Camera Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . THEORY OF OPERATION

The Camera is activated when the ignition switch is in the RUN position. The (F921) circuit supplies power to

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

the camera. The camera sends a video signal (std. NTSC i.e. TV) to the navigation radio, using circuits (X970) camera signal, (X971) signal return and (X972) camera shield, which displays on the navigation screen. The screen toggles functions displaying only one kind of image at a time. And in reverse, the rear camera has priority. The (Z924) circuit is ground for the system. WHEN MONITORED:

Ignition on, vehicle in reverse. SET CONDITION:

No rear picture is displayed on radio with the vehicle in reverse. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (F921) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT (Z924) GROUND CIRCUIT (X970) CAMERA SIGNAL CIRCUIT (X971) CAMERA RETURN CIRCUIT (X972) CAMERA SHIELD LICENSE PLATE LAMP/REAR CAMERA ASSEMBLY DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. VERIFY OPERATION OF THE RADIO AND BACKUP LAMPS 1. Verify the operation of the Radio and Backup Lamps. Do the Radio and Backup Lamps operate correctly? Yes 

Go To 2.

No Diagnose any problems with the Radio and Backup Lamps.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 2. CHECK THE (F921) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Checking Fused Run Relay Output Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Apply the parking brake. Disconnect the License Plate/Rear Camera Assembly Harness Connector. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage between the (F921) Fused Run Relay Output circuit and ground. Is battery voltage present? Yes 

No

Go To 3.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Repair the (F921) Fused Run Relay Output circuit for an open or short to ground.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. CHECK THE (Z924) GROUND CIRCUIT 

Fig. 7: Checking The Ground Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Measure the resistance between ground and the (Z924) Ground Circuit. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 

Go To 4.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair the (Z924) Ground circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE (X970) CAMERA SIGNAL, THE (X971) RETURN, AND THE (X972) SHIELD CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 8: Checking Camera Signal, The Return, And The Shield Circuits For An Open

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Radio C3 harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the (X970) (X971) and (X972) circuits between the Rear Camera harness connector and Radio C3 harness connectors. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms on the (X970) (X971) or (X972) circuits? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Repair the appropriate circuit for an open.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. CHECK THE (X970) CAMERA SIGNAL, THE (X971) RETURN, AND THE (X972) SHIELD CIRCUITS SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Checking Camera Signal, The Return, And The Shield Circuits Shorted To Ground

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Audio/Video - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance between ground and the (X970) (X971) and (X972) circuits. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms on the (X970) (X971) or (X972) circuits? Yes  

Repair the appropriate circuit for a short to ground. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No 



Replace the License Plate Lamp/Rear Camera Assembly in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to LAMP BAR, EXTERIOR HANDLE , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 GENERAL INFORMATION Body - Non-DTC-Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 GENERAL INFORMATION Body - Non-DTC-Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING FUEL DOOR RELEASE INOPERATIVE

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 GENERAL INFORMATION Body - Non-DTC-Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 1: Fuel Door Switch & Solenoid Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 GENERAL INFORMATION Body - Non-DTC-Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (A27) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED (P335) FUEL DOOR RELEASE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN FUEL DOOR RELEASE SWITCH FUEL DOOR RELEASE SOLENOID DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION 1. Press the Fuel Door Release button located on the instrument panel. Does the Fuel Door open? Yes 



Test complete, the condition or conditions that originally cause this condition are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals and correct pin tension. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No Go To 2. 2. CHECK THE (P335) FUEL DOOR RELEASE CONTROL CIRCUIT 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 GENERAL INFORMATION Body - Non-DTC-Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Fuel Door Release Control Circuit Using Test Light Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Fuel Door Release solenoid harness connector. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (P335) Fuel Door Release Control circuit. 3. Press the Fuel Door Release button located on the instrument panel. Does the test light illuminate brightly when the Fuel Door Release button is pressed? Yes 

Go To 5.

No Go To 3. 3. CHECK THE (A27) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 GENERAL INFORMATION Body - Non-DTC-Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Fused B(+) Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Disconnect the Fuel Door Release switch harness connector located on the instrument panel. 2. Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A27) Fused B(+) circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 

Go To 4.

No Repair the open or short in the (A27) Fused B(+) circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 4. CHECK THE FUEL DOOR RELEASE SWITCH 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 GENERAL INFORMATION Body - Non-DTC-Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Checking Fuel Door Release Control Circuit For Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Reconnect the Fuel Door Release solenoid harness connector. 2. Momentarily connect a jumper between the (A27) Fused B(+) circuit and the (P335) Fuel Door Release Control circuit. Does the Fuel Door Release solenoid click when the jumper is connected? Yes  

Replace the Fuel Door Release switch in accordance with the Service Information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 GENERAL INFORMATION Body - Non-DTC-Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No Repair an open in the (P335) Fuel Door Release Control circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 5. CHECK THE (Z916) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN 

Fig. 5: Checking Ground Circuit For An Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z916) Ground circuit. Does the test light illuminate brightly? Yes 



No

Replace the Fuel Door Release solenoid in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to HOUSING, FUEL FILL , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 GENERAL INFORMATION Body - Non-DTC-Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

 

Repair the open in the (Z916) Ground circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING BOTH DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) AND DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) CIRCUITS OPEN

Fig. 1: Can C (+) And Diagnostic Can C (-) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

WHEN MONITORED:

When the scan tool queries the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). SET CONDITION:

The scan tool has detected an open condition on both Diagnostic CAN C circuits. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D72) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) CIRCUIT OPEN (D71) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) CIRCUIT OPEN TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE ERROR MESSAGE NOTE:

Make sure the vehicle being tested is a CAN BUS VEHICLE. If not, false error messages may be displayed.

NOTE:

Make sure the scan tool is updated to the latest software.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

With the scan tool, record the error message. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Reconnect the scan tool. Turn the ignition on. Does the scan tool display this same error message? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this error message to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. (D72) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 2: Checking Resistance CAN C (+) Circuit Between TIPM Harness Connector And DLC Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. 3. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. NOTE:

Check the connectors at both the DLC and the TIPM.

4. Measure the resistance of the (D72) Diagnostic CAN C (+) circuit between the TIPM C7 harness connector and the DLC. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Go To 3.

No Repair the open in the (D72) Diagnostic CAN C (+) circuit.  Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE . 3. (D71) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 3: Checking Resistance Of Diagnostic CAN C (-) Circuit Between TIPM Harness Connector And DLC Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. Measure the resistance of the (D71) Diagnostic CAN C (-) circuit between the TIPM C7 harness connector and the DLC. Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No  

Repair the open in the (D71) Diagnostic CAN C (-) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) CIRCUITS HIGH

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 4: Can C (+) And Diagnostic Can C (-) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

When the scan tool queries the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). SET CONDITION:

The scan tool has detected a shorted high condition on either or both Diagnostic CAN C circuits.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D72) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE (D71) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE ERROR MESSAGE NOTE:

Make sure the vehicle being tested is a CAN BUS VEHICLE. If not, false error messages may be displayed.

NOTE:

Make sure the scan tool is updated to the latest software.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

With the scan tool, record the error message. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Reconnect the scan tool. Turn the ignition on. Does the scan tool display this same error message? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this error message to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. DIAGNOSTIC CAN C CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 5: Checking Voltage Of The Diagnostic CAN C Circuits Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. Turn the ignition on. Measure the voltage of the Diagnostic CAN C circuits. Is the voltage above 6.0 volts for either circuit? Yes 

Repair the short to voltage in the Diagnostic CAN C circuits.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee



Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

No



DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) CIRCUIT LOW

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 6: Can C (+) And Diagnostic Can C (-) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

When the scan tool queries the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). SET CONDITION:

The scan tool has detected a shorted low condition on the (D72) Diagnostic CAN C (+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D72) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE ERROR MESSAGE NOTE:

Make sure the vehicle being tested is a CAN BUS VEHICLE. If not, false error messages may be displayed.

NOTE:

Make sure the scan tool is updated to the latest software.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

With the scan tool, record the error message. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Reconnect the scan tool. Turn the ignition on. Does the scan tool display this same error message? Yes 

Go To 2.



The conditions that caused this error message to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension.

No

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

2. (D72) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Fig. 7: Checking Diagnostic Can C (+) Circuit Short To Ground Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D72) Diagnostic CAN C (+) circuit. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D72) Diagnostic CAN C (+) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) CIRCUIT LOW

Fig. 8: Can C (+) And Diagnostic Can C (-) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

When the scan tool queries the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). SET CONDITION:

The scan tool has detected a shorted low condition on the (D71) Diagnostic CAN C (-) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D71) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE ERROR MESSAGE NOTE:

Make sure the vehicle being tested is a CAN BUS VEHICLE. If not, false error messages may be displayed.

NOTE:

Make sure the scan tool is updated to the latest software.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

With the scan tool, record the error message. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Reconnect the scan tool. Turn the ignition on. Does the scan tool display this same error message? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this error message to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. (D71) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 9: Checking Resistance Between Ground And Diagnostic CAN C (-) Circuit Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. Measure the resistance between ground and the (D71) Diagnostic CAN C (-) circuit. Is the resistance below 100.0 Ohms? Yes  

Repair the short to ground in the (D71) Diagnostic CAN C (-) circuit. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

No 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PROCEDURE .

DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Fig. 10: Can C (+) And Diagnostic Can C (-) Wiring Diagram Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

For a complete wiring diagram, refer to appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article . WHEN MONITORED:

When the scan tool queries the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). SET CONDITION:

The scan tool has detected an open condition on the (D72) Diagnostic CAN C (+) circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSES

Possible Causes (D72) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) CIRCUIT OPEN TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (TIPM) DIAGNOSTIC TEST

1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE ERROR MESSAGE NOTE:

Make sure the vehicle being tested is a CAN BUS VEHICLE. If not, false error messages may be displayed.

NOTE:

Make sure the scan tool is updated to the latest software.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

With the scan tool, record the error message. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. Cycle the ignition from on to off three times. Reconnect the scan tool. Turn the ignition on. Does the scan tool display this same error message? Yes 

Go To 2.

No The conditions that caused this error message to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagrams as a guide, check all related splices and connectors for signs of water intrusion, corrosion, pushed out or bent terminals, and correct pin tension. 2. (D72) DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) CIRCUIT OPEN 

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Fig. 11: Checking Diagnostic Can C (+) Circuit Open Courtesy of CHRYSLER LLC 1. 2. 3. 4.

Turn the ignition off. Disconnect the TIPM C7 harness connector. Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC. Measure the resistance of the (D72) Diagnostic CAN C (+) circuit between the TIPM C7 harness connector and the DLC.

2011 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2011 ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT Communication - Non-DTC Based Diagnostics - Grand Cherokee

Is the resistance below 5.0 Ohms? Yes 



Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If OK, replace the TIPM in accordance with the Service Information. Refer to MODULE, TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER (TIPM) , REMOVAL . Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to STANDARD PRO